Specifications for LA CROSSE COUNTY LAKEVIEW HEALTH CENTER PHASE II BID PACKAGE 1 WEST SALEM, WISCONSIN July 14, 2014 by Construction Manager/General Contractor Market & Johnson, Inc. 1652 Lakeshore Drive (54603) P.O. Box 2769 La Crosse, WI 54602-2769 608.784.5000 Fax: 608.782.7873 Architect HSR Associates, Inc. 100 Milwaukee Street La Crosse, WI 54603 608.784.1830 Office 608.782.5844 Fax
Project Manager: Kurt Schroeder Architecture: Kyle Schauf & Michelle Maland Interior Design: Danielle Connor HVAC: Kimberly Lee Electrical: Scott Gerzsik Specifications: Ron Knapmiller
Civil Consultant
Structural Consultant
PARAGON ASSOCIATES 632 Copeland Ave La Crosse, WI 54603 (608) 781-3110 Jeff Moorhouse
ERA ERICKSEN ROED & ASSOCIATES 3610 Oakwood Hills Parkway Suite 200 Eau Claire, WI 54701-7807 715-552-5336 Terry Nuesse
Food Service Consultant
Plumbing Consultant
Mackesey and Associates LLC 2976 Triverton Rd Fitchburg, WI 608.270.1178 Paul Mackesey
JDR Engineering 5525 Noble Drive, Suite 110 Madison, WI 608.277.1728 Chris Gehrke
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS Project:
La Crosse County Lakeview Health Center Phase II Bid Package #1 West Salem, Wisconsin
Date:
July 14, 2014
DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 01 10 Table of Contents 00 11 16 Invitation to Bid 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 00 23 00 Work Categories 00 41 00 Bid Form 00 43 25 Substitution Request 00 45 36 Equal Employment Opportunity Program 00 45 39 Minority Participation Program 00 52 00 Subcontract Agreement 00 52 10 Subcontract Agreement Attachment 00 62 76 Application for Payment 00 72 00 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA A201, 2007 00 73 00 Supplementary General Conditions 00 73 43 Certification of Wages DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Special Conditions 01 14 00 Use of the Premises 01 14 19 Tobacco, Alcohol and Firearms 01 21 13 Allowances 01 23 00 Alternates 01 31 13 Coordination 01 31 19 Meetings 01 32 16 Construction Schedule 01 33 00 Submittals 01 35 00 Subcontractor Safety Requirements 01 35 05 Fire Precaution and Protection 01 35 60 Cutting and Patching 01 40 00 Quality Assurance 01 45 21 Roofing Inspection Services 01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities 01 52 13 Field Offices and Sheds 01 53 00 Barricades and Enclosures 01 53 10 Construction Aids 01 56 40 Security 01 65 00 Material and Equipment 01 71 23 Field Engineering 01 74 23 Cleaning 01 77 00 Contract Close Out 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 80 00 Testing, Balancing and Adjusting 01 90 00 Starting of Systems
13032-2
Table of Contents 00 01 10 – Page 1
DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS (not used) DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 41 13 Precast Concrete Hollow Core Planks DIVISION 4 – MASONRY 04 70 00 Manufactured Masonry DIVISION 5 – METALS 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 17 33 Wood I Joist 06 17 53 Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework 06 61 00 Simulated Stone Fabrications 06 66 10 Manufactured Trim 06 82 00 Decorated Thermoplastic Sheets DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 18 00 Traffic Coatings 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 25 00 Weather Barriers 07 31 13 Asphalt Shingles 07 46 46 Fiber Cement Siding 07 53 00 Elastomeric Membrane Roofing 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 71 23 Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 90 05 Joint Sealers DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08 14 23 High Impact Resistance Doors 08 33 13 Coiling Counter Doors 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 36 Plastic Strip Doors and Curtains 08 36 13 Sectional Doors 08 43 13 Aluminum Framed Storefronts 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows 08 54 13 Fiberglass Windows 08 56 59 Service and Teller Window Units 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 08 83 00 Mirrors 08 87 17 Safety And Security Glazing Films DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09 05 61 Common Work Results For Flooring Preparation 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 30 00 Tiling 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceiling 13032-2
Table of Contents 00 01 10 – Page 2
09 65 00 09 67 00 09 68 13 09 90 00
Resilient Flooring Fluid Applied Flooring Tile Carpeting Paints and Coatings
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 21 13.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments 10 21 23 Cubicles 10 22 26.33 Folding Panel Partitions 10 26 01 Wall and Corner Guards 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 10 31 00 Manufactured Fireplaces 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10 51 00 Lockers 10 56 23 Wire Storage Shelving DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11 13 19.13 Loading Dock Levelers 11 40 00 Foodservice Equipment 11 73 10 Ceiling Gantry Lift DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12 21 13 Drapery Track and Accessories 12 21 18 Window Shade Systems DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems – (DISTRIBUTED BY ADDENDUM) DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT [NOT USED] DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION: REFER TO THE FRONT OF THE DIVISION DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING: REFER TO THE FRONT OF THE DIVISION DIVISION 23 – HVAC: REFER TO THE FRONT OF THE DIVISION – BID PACKAGE 2 DIVISION 26, 27, 28– ELECTRICAL: REFER TO THE FRONT OF THE DIVISION – BID PACKAGE 2 DIVISION 31, 32 & 33 SITE: REFER TO THE FRONT OF THE DIVISION
***
13032-2
Table of Contents 00 01 10 – Page 3
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID PROJECT:
La Crosse County Lakeview Health Center Phase II Bid Package 1 West Salem, Wisconsin
BID DEADLINE:
Thursday, August 7, 2014 @ 2:00 p.m. local time
BID TO:
La Crosse County Facilities Department Attn: Jim Speropulos 400 4th Street North, Room 1370 La Crosse, WI 54601 Fax: 608-793-6521
Sealed bids for the above project will be received, on behalf of the Owner, by the Construction Manager Market & Johnson, Inc., at the above location, until the Bid Deadline. All bids must be submitted on the Bid Form supplied and in accordance to the Work Categories outlined in the specifications. Facsimile bids will not be accepted. Bids will be opened publicly. Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the documents prepared by HSR Associates, Inc., 100 Milwaukee Street, La Crosse, WI 54603 and dated July 14, 2014. This is an single story wood framed, 90 bed care facility. The building consists of; concrete foundations, SOG, wood framed walls and wood trusses, masonry veneer, structural steel, asphalt roofing, vinyl clad windows, painting, flooring, acoustical systems, food service equipment, fire suppression, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, site excavation, and asphalt paving. Bid Package 1 does not include HVAC or Electrical; these will be distributed via Addendum. A pre-bid meeting will not be held. Bid documents may be examined at the following locations: Market & Johnson’s Office, La Crosse, WI; Builders Exchanges in Albert Lee, Austin, Duluth, Mankato, Minneapolis, Rochester, and St. Cloud, MN; the Builders Exchanges in Altoona (Eau Claire-Chippewa Falls area), Appleton, Fond du Lac, La Crosse, Milwaukee, and Wausau, WI; Reed Construction Data, Bid+ Network and Bid Clerk.. Electronic bid documents can be obtained by contacting Market & Johnson at 608-784-5000 and an email will be sent with a link to access the plans. (If using the electronic website, addenda will be posted to this site and it is the bidder’s responsibility to check for addenda issued.) A 10% bid security is required with bid. The Owner or Construction Manager may contract with the successful bidder. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive informalities in any bid and to accept any bid which the Owner may determine to be in its best interest. No proposal may be withdrawn for a period of 120 days after opening of the proposals without consent of the Owner. ***
Invitation to Bid 00 11 16 – Page 1
SECTION 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Index 1. Receipt and Opening of Bid Proposals 2. Pre-Bid Conference 3. Method of Bidding 4. Requirements of Signing 5. Furnish and Install 6. Bid Form 7. Bid Security 8. Withdrawal or Revision of Bids 9. Acceptance and Rejection of Bids
1.
10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
Submission of Post-Bid Information Availability of Contract Documents Examine Contract Documents and Site Interpretations, Discrepancies and Omissions Addenda Alternates Request for Substitution, Voluntary Alternates Taxes Laws, Permits, Licenses and Regulations
Receipt and Opening of Bid Proposals Market & Johnson, Inc. requests Bid Proposals for the construction of La Crosse County’s Lakeview Health Center Phase II, Bid Package 1 project located in West Salem, Wisconsin. Bid Proposals will be received as noted in the Invitation to Bid. The Bid Proposals will be opened publicly by Market & Johnson. Bid Proposals must submitted in sealed envelope to Market & Johnson, Inc. Bid proposal shall be designated as “Bid Proposal for La Crosse County Lakeview Health Center Phase II, Bid Package 1”
2.
Pre-Bid Conference A pre-bid conference will not be held.
3.
Method of Bidding Each Bid shall be based on the provisions in the Instruction to Bidders, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions, Divisions 00 and 01 and Specification Sections and related Drawings.
4.
Requirements of Signing Each Bid must include the full business address of the Bidder as well as the telephone and fax numbers, contact and authorized signature. When requested by Market & Johnson, satisfactory evidence of agency or authority of any person signing on behalf of another must be furnished.
5.
Furnish and Install “Furnish and Install” means to provide all labor, materials, insurance, taxes, equipment, etc. to complete the described work, per the plans and specifications. “Install Only” means receive delivery on board, unload, uncrate and install, including all labor, miscellaneous materials, insurance, taxes, and equipment necessary for materials supplied by others. This also includes removal of debris generated by materials supplied by others. “Furnish Only” means deliver, tax and freight included (FOB job site), materials to the Owner’s facility for installation by others. Delivery shall be made during standard working hours and notification of delivery shall be given to Market & Johnson 72 hours in advance.
Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 – Page 1
Specification sections are used to designate areas of work. All Bidders are required to review all specifications and plan documents in order to evaluate the extent of their work. Specification sections that are included in these specifications but are not itemized within any specific Work Category are the full responsibility of all Subcontractors as they relate to their primary scope of work. Assignments of specification sections to a given Work Category are for purposes of indicating primary responsibility for such work only. The number designation for a Work Category does not relieve other Subcontractors from providing work for this specification section as it relates to their primary scope of work. 6.
Bid Form Bids must be submitted on the Bid Form provided in this manual. The Bid Form must be complete with all blank spaces filled in. Any incomplete Bids may be disqualified. Bidder shall submit separate Bid Form for each Work Category being bid upon or for each combination bid being submitted. Additional copies of the Bid Form are available at the office of Market & Johnson, Inc.
7.
Bid Security Bidders in selected Work Categories shall submit a bid bond or certified check in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the maximum amount of the bid. Bid bond shall be AIA Document A310 or equivalent form. Failure to include this bid security with the Bid Form will result in disqualification. Certified checks will be returned after the Owner has a contractual agreement for similar work category or for a period of 120 days.
8.
Withdrawal or Revision of Bids Bids may be withdrawn or revised by written request received from Bidder prior to the time for opening bids. Negligence on the part of the Bidder in preparing the Bid infers no right for withdrawal of the Bid after it has been opened. All Bids shall be effective and open for acceptance for a period of 120 days after the date and time set for receipt of Bids.
9.
Acceptance and Rejection of Bids Market & Johnson reserves the right to reject any or all bids or to waive any informalities in any Bid or to accept any Bid which will be in the best interests of our firm and the Owner. In addition, the Bidder recognizes the right of Market & Johnson to reject a Bid if the Bidder failed to furnish any of the data required by the Bidding Documents, or if the Bid is in any way incomplete or irregular. Market & Johnson also reserves unrestricted privilege to accept or reject any given prices for additions to or deductions from work as given in Bid.
10.
Post-Bid/Pre-Award Information and Submittal Requirements A.
Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to Market & Johnson, upon request, a properly executed AIA Document A305, Contractor’s Qualification Statement.
B.
Market & Johnson reserves the right to request copy of the Bidder’s audited financial statement, four-year revenue history, overall bonding capacity, and current available bonding Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 – Page 2
capacity. This information will be held confidential, and is a part of Market & Johnson’s Subcontractor Evaluation and Selection Process. By virtue of submitting a Bid, this Subcontractor agrees to submit any and all information requested by Market & Johnson as outlined in these Instructions to Bidders, as well as any other information reasonably requested as a part of Market & Johnson’s process for evaluating and selecting Subcontractors. C.
Bidders shall submit to Market & Johnson satisfaction supporting data confirming their ability to furnish a Certificate of Insurance in accordance with the project requirements.
D.
The apparent successful Bidder, within three (3) days after notification, shall submit to Market & Johnson the names and addresses of all proposed Subcontractors and/or vendors within the Work Category. Subcontractors and/or vendors with contracts of $5,000 or less need not be listed initially. The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of Market & Johnson the reliability and responsibility of the proposed Sub-subcontractors and/or Vendors to furnish and perform the work described in the sections of the specifications pertaining to such proposed Subcontractor’s respective trades. If an agreement with Sub-subcontractors and/or Vendor cannot be reached, Market & Johnson reserves the right to delete that particular portion of work from the Subcontract and award separate subcontract for the same. If construction conditions necessitate, the Subcontractor, at no change in contract price, may make substitution of a Sub-subcontractor and/or Vendor, provided such substitution provided in writing and has been accepted by Market & Johnson and Owner.
E.
11.
Bidders shall submit supporting data confirming their ability to adequately staff the project with qualified labor classifications as may be required to support the project schedule and other project requirements. Specific clarifications may include, but are not limited to qualifications and resumes of project management team with organization chart identifying reporting lines and locations of individuals, whether on site or in your corporate office. Includes as a minimum project manager, field supervisors and trade foremen. Demonstrate the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in Bidding Documents. Once Bidder’s team has been established, this team cannot be changed without written consent of Market & Johnson.
Availability of Contract Documents Contract Documents are available for review and purchase as noted on the Invitation to Bid.
12.
Examine Contract Documents and Site Each Bidder shall read and familiarize themselves with Division 00, Division 01 and applicable Specification Sections. The Bidder shall also examine all drawings. The successful Bidder will be required to perform all the work belonging to the specific Work Category, which is either shown on the Drawings, mentioned in the Specifications, or reasonably implied as necessary to complete the work in the Work Category, including removal of existing work and preparing old work to receive new. Each bidder shall also review the Subcontract/Purchase Agreement form included within these specifications. Each bidder shall visit the site to become acquainted with the following: adjacent areas, means of approach to the site, conditions of actual job site, and facilities for delivering, storing, placing and handling of materials and equipment. Bidders shall compare Specifications and Drawings with existing conditions and inform themselves of all conditions affecting execution of work, including other work, if any, being performed. Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 – Page 3
No consideration will be granted for any alleged misinterpretation or misunderstanding of the work to be done and/or materials or equipment to be furnished. 13.
Interpretations, Discrepancies and Omissions No oral explanation in regard to the meaning of Drawings and Specifications will be made and no oral instructions will be given before award of a contract. Bidders shall bring discrepancies, omissions, conflicts, or doubt as to true meaning of any part of contract documents to Market & Johnson’s attention, in writing, at least five (5) days before the due date for bids. Prompt clarifications will immediately be supplied to bidders by Addendum. Failure to request clarification or interpretation of Contract Documents will not relieve a Subcontractor and/or Vendor of their responsibilities. Signing of the Proposal/Bid Form will imply that the Subcontractor has thorough comprehension of full intent and scope of the Contract Documents. Neither the Owner or Architect, nor Market & Johnson will be responsible for oral instructions. Only a written interpretation or correction by Addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon any interpretation or correction given by any other method.
14.
Addenda All addenda issued during the time of bidding shall become part of the Contract Documents and each Addenda shall be acknowledged on the Bid Form. Failure to acknowledge addenda may disqualify bidder.
15.
Alternates Each Bidder must bid on the Alternate(s) listed in the Bid Form that is applicable to their respective Work Category. Alternates will be considered in awarding of the Contracts and Purchase Orders. Market & Johnson shall be allowed a period of one hundred twenty (120) days after receipt of a signed Subcontract/Purchase Order to accept or reject any or all alternates submitted on the Bid Form.
16.
Request for Substitution, Voluntary Alternates Whenever a material, article, or piece of equipment is identified in the Contract Documents by reference to manufacturer or vendor’s names, trade names, catalog numbers, or the like, it is so identified for the purpose of establishing a standard. Any material, article or piece of equipment of other manufacturers or vendors, which will perform adequately the duties imposed by the general design, will be considered equally acceptable provided the material, article or piece of equipment so proposed is, in the opinion of the Architect, of equal substance, appearance and function. Alternate work shall not be performed and substitute or alternate materials or equipment shall not be purchased or installed by the Subcontractor and/or Vendor without the Architect’s prior written approval. Base bids must be based upon the item specified, not upon voluntary alternates. Reference Substitution Request Form. Subcontractors are encouraged to offer voluntary alternates to items specified. Voluntary alternates should list the add or deduct amounts to the base bid for each item and should provide an adequate description of each item or system suggested. The Owner, Architect and Market & Johnson reserve the right to accept or reject any voluntary alternates. If accepted, voluntary alternates will be subject to the requirements for Substitutions. In the event that a Subcontractor is awarded a contract and submits for approval a material, article or piece of equipment which is considered as unequal to the specified item by the Owner, Architect, Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 – Page 4
and/or Market & Johnson, the Subcontractor shall be required to provide the specified item at no additional cost. 17.
Taxes Each Bidder shall include all taxes required by law in the Bid Proposal. Where the Owner is exempt from payment of state sales tax, the Owner reserves the right to purchase materials for the project.
18.
Laws, Permits, Licenses, and Regulations Attention is particularly directed to the General Conditions for requirements that deal with laws, permits, licenses and regulations. Subcontractors and/or Vendors shall conform to all applicable federal and state laws, municipal ordinances, rules and regulations or all authorities having jurisdiction over construction, including all construction codes and safety code which may apply to the following: Performance of the work. Protection of adjoining and adjacent property. Maintenance of passageways, guard fences or other protective facilities. Market & Johnson shall provide the general building permit. Each Subcontractor and/or Vendor shall obtain and pay for all other permits, licenses and approvals for their work and give all notices as required for each specific Work Category. Subcontractor and/or Vendor shall arrange for all inspections required by federal, state, municipal or other authorities and pay all fees and costs incurred.
19.
Amerinet Material Suppliers Should your firm hold a current group purchasing agreement with Amerinet, Inc., St. Louis, MO (hereinafter referred to as Amerinet) or should your firm distribute products on behalf of a manufacturer that holds a current group purchasing agreement with Amerinet, then pricing/discounting provided via this request for quotation (RFQ) should be the same or better than that reflected in the Amerinet agreement. Further, any purchases resulting from this RFQ for products available through a current Amerinet agreement shall be reported to Amerinet in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Amerinet group purchasing agreement in effect at the time of purchase. (Attached and the end of this section)
20.
Bidder’s Qualifications Before a bid is considered for award, the Bidder may be requested by Market & Johnson to submit a statement regarding his previous experience in performing comparable work, his business and technical organization, financial resources, list of proposed Subcontractors, and any other criteria Market & Johnson deems relevant to the successful performance of the Contract.
***
Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 – Page 5
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 00 23 00 WORK CATEGORIES With the intent of supplementing and clarifying the scope of work elsewhere defined, and without intending to limit and/or restrict the extent of work required by the Contract Documents, the work generally will consist of the following items and operations listed in each of the attached Work Categories descriptions. Each bidder is responsible for insuring that their price is all inclusive of any requirements in related specification sections or contract drawings not included under a specific Work Category. Each Work Category is identified by a Work Category Number and Work Category Description. These designations shall be placed on the Bid Form and the Work Category Description shall become the scope of work for the successful Contractor selected for each Work Category. Each Contractor shall examine the Contract Documents of all disciplines to determine the extent of the proposed construction and shall perform the work to conform to construction called for an in such manner as not to interfere with or delay work of other Contractors. It is important that all Bidders review all of the Work Categories as items and statements contained in other Work Categories will clarify the interaction of each Contractor’s work with others. If there is a conflict on a specific item between the Contract Documents and the Work Category Description, the Bid Package Description will govern. However, if an item is covered in the Contract Documents but not reiterated in the Work Category Description, the Bidder shall still be responsible for that item of work. The following sections apply to all Work Category Bidders: All Division 00 sections. All Division 01 sections. 00 23 00 Work Categories WORK CATEGORY NUMBER
SPECIFICATION SECTION(S)
03A CONCRETE
03 10 00 – Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete 07 18 00 – Traffic Coatings 32 13 13 – Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 32 14 05 – Site Concrete
03B PRE-CAST
03 41 13 – Precast Concrete Hollow Core Planks
04A MASONRY
04 70 00 – Manufactured Masonry 07 21 00 – Thermal Insulation (as applies)
05A STEEL ERECTION
05 12 00 – Structural Steel Framing 05 31 00 – Steel Decking 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications
05B STEEL MATERIAL
05 12 00 – Structural Steel Framing 05 31 00 – Steel Decking 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 1
WORK CATEGORY NUMBER
SPECIFICATION SECTION(S)
06A BUILDING WORKS
06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry 06 17 33 – Wood I Joists 06 17 53 – Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry 06 41 00 – Architectural Wood Casework 06 61 00 – Simulated Solid Fabrications 06 66 10 – Manufactured Trim 06 82 00 – Decorated Thermoplastic Sheets 07 21 00 – Thermal Insulation (as applies) 07 25 00 – Weather Barriers 07 46 46 – Fiber Cement Siding 07 84 00 – Firestopping (as applies) 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 14 16 – Flush Wood Doors 08 14 23 – High Impact Resistant Doors 08 31 00 – Access Doors and Panels 08 33 13 – Coiling Counter Doors 08 33 23 – Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 36 – Plastic Strip Door and Curtains 08 36 13 – Sectional Doors 08 54 13 – Fiberglass Windows 08 71 00 – Door Hardware 10 21 13.19 – Plastic Toilet Partitions 10 21 23 – Cubicles 10 22 26.33 – Folding Panel Partitions 10 26 01 – Wall and Corner Guards 10 28 00 – Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 10 31 00 – Manufactured Fireplaces 10 44 00 – Fire Protection Specialties 10 51 00 – Lockers 10 56 23 – Wire Storage Shelving 12 22 16 – Drapery Track and Accessories 12 24 00 – Window Shades 32 15 00 – Sire Furnishings 32 15 20 – Sire Signage 32 31 13 – Galvanized Chainlink Fence 32 31 19 – Aluminum Picket Fence 32 31 23 – PVC Fences
07A ROOFING
07 31 13 – Asphalt Shingles 07 53 00 – Elastomeric Membrane Roofing 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 71 23 – Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts
07B CAULKING & SEALANTS
07 90 00 – Joint Sealers
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 2
WORK CATEGORY NUMBER
SPECIFICATION SECTION(S)
08A ALUMINUM SYSTEMS
08 43 13 – Aluminum Framed Storefronts 08 51 13 – Aluminum Windows 08 56 59 – Service and Teller Window Units 08 80 00 – Glazing 08 83 00 – Mirrors 08 87 17 – Safety and Security Glazing Films
09A GYPSUM WALLBOARD
07 21 00 – Building Insulation (as applies) 07 84 00 – Firestopping (as applies) 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies
09B TILING
09 30 00 – Tiling
09C ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS & WALLS
09 51 00 – Acoustical Ceilings
09D FLOORING
09 05 61 – Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation 09 65 00 – Resilient Flooring 09 67 00 – Fluid Applied Flooring 09 68 13 – Tile Carpeting
09E PAINTING
09 90 00 – Painting and Finishing
11A FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
11 40 00 – Foodservice Equipment
11B EQUIPMENT
11 13 19.13 – Loading Dock Levelers 11 73 10 – Ceiling Gantry Lift
13A METAL BUILDING
13 34 19 – Metal Building Systems (distributed by addendum)
21A FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 21 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression 21 10 00 – Water Based Fire Suppression Systems 21 10 00 – Water Based Fire Suppression
22A PLUMBING
07 84 00 – Firestopping(applicable portion) 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 14 – Plumbing Specialties 22 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Plumbing 22 07 00 – Plumbing Insulation 22 13 92 – Facility Sanitary Sewerage 22 16 00 – General Service Natural Gas System 22 30 00 – Plumbing Equipment 22 40 00 – Plumbing Fixtures
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 3
WORK CATEGORY NUMBER
SPECIFICATION SECTION(S)
23A HVAC
(distributed by addendum)
26A ELECTRICAL
(distributed by addendum)
31A EARTHWORK UTILITIES
31 10 00 – Site Preparation 31 22 00 – Earthwork 31 23 16 – Excavation and Backfilling 31 23 50 – Finish Grading 31 25 00 – Erosion Control 33 11 00 – Water Mains 33 31 11 – Sanitary Sewers 33 41 11 – Storm Sewers
32A ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16.13 – Plant Mix Asphalt Paving 32 17 23 – Pavement Markings
32B EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 29 23 – Sodding 32 92 19 – Seeding 32 93 00 – Trees, Plants and Ground Cover
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 4
Work Category 03A – Concrete The following information is provided inn order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this bid package. Division 00 Division 01
Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract General Requirements
Division 3 03 10 00 03 20 00 03 30 00
Concrete Forming and Accessories Concrete Reinforcing Cast-in-place Concrete
Division 7 07 18 00
Traffic Coatings
Division 32 32 13 13 32 14 05
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement Site Concrete
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Mix designs for the project shall be submitted to the Market & Johnson within one week of the receipt of a written contract or letter of intent. Failure to meet this requirement may lead to project delays. 2. Concrete reinforcement shop drawings shall be submitted to Market & Johnson within 4 weeks of the receipt of a written contract or letter of intent. Reinforcing steel shall be delivered to the site within 4 weeks after receipt of approved shop drawings. Failure to meet this requirement may lead to project delays. 3. The only concrete that is not included within Work Category 03A is those items specifically listed to be provided within other Work Categories. 4. Provide winter weather protection for the work of this Work Category, including but not limited to, temporary heating, temporary enclosure, snow removal, batch plant requirements, curing requirements, frost protection and any other requirements necessary to complete the work of this Work Category. Schedule delays due to weather and lack of winter weather protection will not be accepted by Market & Johnson. Work Category 03A will be responsible for any damages because of these types of schedule delays. 5. Provide provisions for hot weather concrete placement for the work of this Work Category. Schedule delays due to weather and lack of hot weather protection will not be accepted by Market & Johnson. Work Category 03A will be responsible for any damages because of these types of schedule delays. Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 5
6. All concrete pours shall be coordinated with Market & Johnson 24 hours in advance of the concrete delivery. Any concrete pours that are not coordinated are subject to the concrete being rejected with the cost of the concrete to be borne by Work Category 03A. 7. Granular fill and compacted sub-base elevations shall be coordinated with Work Category 31A while grading operations are in progress. Work Category 03A shall chalk finished slab elevations on the walls surrounding the areas that are to be prepared. It is the responsibility of Work Category 03A to be on-site at the conclusion of the grading for each area so that final acceptance of the elevations can be verified while Work Category 31A is there in the process of completing their work. Once grading is complete, if the elevations have not been verified by Work Category 03A, any corrective grading shall be the responsibility of Work Category 03A to complete. 8. Provide concrete sealer at the locations shown in the Contract Documents at the conclusion o the project. Work Category 03A shall provide protection or removal of all dirt, construction debris, and residue as required by the sealer manufacturer prior to installation. 9. Floor flatness shall be provided as per the Contract Documents. Any floors which are not in compliance with the floor flatness requirement may be subject to removal and replacement at the expense of Work Category 03A. Market & Johnson may also choose to have the floor patched by Work Category 9B or 9E Flooring in lieu of removal, at the expense of Work Category 03A.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 6
Work Category 3B –Precast Concrete The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this bid package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 3 03 41 13
Precast Concrete Hollow Core Planks
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Embeds and anchor bolt shop drawings for all embedded items within the work of other Work Categories shall be provided to the Construction Manager within 6 weeks of receiving a contract or letter of intent. Delivery of these items shall be made within 3 weeks of receiving the approved shops. 2. Complete engineering and shop drawings shall be provided to the Construction Manager within 8 weeks of receiving a contract or letter of intent. The precast shall be delivered to the site within 4 weeks (or per construction schedule if longer) of receiving the approved shops. 3. Work Category 3B includes erection. Coordinate erection plan with construction manager prior to sequencing production of materials. 4. Coordination including but not limited to Work Category 5B Steel Material, 6A Building Works, 7A Roofing, 8A Aluminum Systems, 21A Fire Protection, 22A Plumbing, 23A HVAC, 26A Electrical 5. Precast deliveries should be coordinated with the Construction Manager 24 hours in advance of the delivery. 6. The site access route provided in the contract documents shall be adhered to at all times without exception. 7. Interior and exterior caulking of all precast to precast components provided by Work Category 3B. 8. Any floor or wall openings incorrectly cast, will be the responsibility of Work Category 3B to provide the correct opening.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 7
Work Category 4A –Masonry The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this Bid Package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 4 04 70 00
Manufactured Masonry
Division 7 07 21 00
Building Insulation (as applies)
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Hoisting as required for the work of this Work Category. 2. Winter Heat and snow removal for the duration of the masonry installation process is the responsibility of Work Category 4A. 3. The Construction Manager will provide temporary heating for the inside of the building after building enclosure. Building enclosure is defined as precast complete, roofing complete and exterior windows and curtain wall installed. 4. Work Category 4A will be responsible for providing a shelter and heat as required for mixing operations as interior mixing during the winter months cannot be guaranteed or expected 5. Concrete block deliveries shall be coordinated with the Construction Manager 24 hours in advance of delivery. 6. Interior and Exterior layout shall be included in this Work Category for installation of the work of this package.
7. All openings shall be provided in the masonry walls, including but not limited to, doors, windows, ducts, cable trays, and any other penetrations requiring a framed masonry opening. It is the responsibility of Work Category 4A to provide all of the openings and coordinate with the requirements of all other Work Categories and the Construction Manager. 8. Installation of all embedded materials required by other packages including but not limited to, embedded plates, steel angles, strap anchors, anchors, and sleeves. 9. Coordination and cooperation with Work Categories 21A, 22A, 23A, and 26A for the rough in of piping, mechanical, and electrical components.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 8
10. Cooperation and coordination with the owners testing agency. Any work failing to meet the specified testing requirements will be removed and replaced at the expense of Work Category 4A. 11. Hollow Metal frames will be set by Work Category 6A. It is the responsibility of this Package to verify the frame for squareness, alignment, plumbness and damage. If no deficiencies are noted any corrections will be assumed to be the responsibility of Work Category 4A. 12. Horizontal and vertical reinforcement embedded within masonry walls will be furnished and installed by Work Category 4A. 13. Protection and cleaning of concrete, wall and ceiling surfaces surrounding the work of this Work Category, including but not limited to, plywood protection under scaffolding and plastic, or other means of floor protection. 14. In addition to the daily clean up requirements listed in the Contract Documents, this Work Category is to provide 1 person for 2 hours per week to assist the Construction Manager in general clean up duties and relocation of materials as required. This requirement applies each week for which you have personnel on-site. This amount of labor shall be listed on the schedule of values and will be only paid when participation requirements are satisfied, otherwise the amount will be deducted from the contract.
15. Provide complete protection of existing features surrounding the project for the installation of the work of Work Category 4A, including but not limited to, paving, curb & gutter, sidewalks, buildings, green space. The complete removal and replacement of the damaged site features shall be the responsibility of Work Category 4A. 16. The Site access route must be coordinated with the Construction Manager and adhered to at all times.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 9
Work Category 5A –Steel Erection The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely installed under the scope of this bid package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 5 05 12 00 05 31 00 05 50 00
Structural Steel Framing Steel Decking Metal Fabrications
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Coordination of erections sequences and material deliveries with the Construction Manager and Work Category 5B, including participation in coordination meetings as required. 2. Receipts and inventory of all anchors, bolts, fasteners, screws, and associated hardware for installation of the work of this package, Work Category 5A shall notify the Construction Manager in writing, within 3 days of delivery of material, as to any quantities that are insufficient. The Construction Manager will only be responsible for obtaining the quantities of insufficient materials listed and will NOT be responsible for obtaining additional hardware not listed in writing per the requirements. Work Category 5A shall be responsible for obtaining any additional hardware not placed in writing to the Construction Manager. 3. Hoisting as required for the work in this Work Category. 4. Off-loading, inventory and installation of all steel components, including but not limited to, structural steel, steel joists, metal decking, metal fabrications, miscellaneous metals, stairs, ladders, ship ladders, hand railings, guard railings, decorative railings, aluminum steel grating, roof opening frames, pour stops, topping slab support angles, pipe bollards, elevator sill angles, and any other steel components not specifically listed within other bid packages. 5. Coordination with Work Category 3B Precast and Construction Manager for erection of structural steel during the precast erection sequence. 6. Grouting all base plates after erections 7. In addition to the daily clean up requirements listed in the Contract Documents, this Work Category is to provide 1 person for 2 hours per week to assist the Construction Manager in general clean up duties and relocation of materials as required. This requirement applies each week for which you have personnel on-site. This amount of labor shall be listed on the schedule of values and will be only paid when participation requirements are satisfied, otherwise the amount will be deducted from the contract
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 10
Work Category 5B –Steel Material The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished under the scope of this bid package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 5 05 12 00 05 31 00 05 50 00
Structural Steel Framing Steel Decking Metal Fabrications
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Furnish steel components, including but not limited to, structural steel, steel joists, metal decking, metal fabrications, miscellaneous metals, stairs, ladders, ship ladders, hand railings, guard railings, decorative railings, aluminum steel grating, roof opening frames, pour stops, topping slab support angles, pipe bollards, elevator sill angles, and any other steel components not specifically listed within other Work Categories. 2. Coordinate and deliver steel components as per the erection sequence and schedules approved by the Construction Manager and Work Category 5A. 3. Coordinate with Work Category 22A Plumbing and 23A HVAC for the sizes and location of all roof openings for incorporation into the approval drawings. This package shall be responsible for any required corrections that were not properly coordinated. 4. Coordinate with Work Category 3A Concrete and the Construction Manager for the location and size of all pour stops, deck openings, and roof openings. 5. Materials furnished under this package shall be shipped FOB jobsite. The Construction Manager and Work Category 5A shall be notified 5 days in advance of delivery so that provisions for hoisting can be arranged. Deliveries that are not coordinated per these requirements will be rejected. 6. The Site access route must be coordinated with the Construction Manager and adhered to at all times.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 11
Work Category 6A –Building Works The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this bid package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 6 06 10 00 06 17 33 06 17 53 06 20 00 06 41 00 06 61 00 06 66 10 06 82 00
Rough Carpentry Wood I Joists Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses Finish Carpentry Architectural Wood Casework Simulated Solid Fabrications Manufactured Trim Decorated Thermoplastic Sheets
Division 7 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 25 00 Weather Barriers 07 46 46 Fiber Cement Siding 07 84 00 Firestopping (as applies) Division 8 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08 14 23 High Impact Resistant Doors 08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels 08 33 13 Coiling Counter Doors 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 36 Plastic Strip Door and Curtains 08 36 13 Sectional Doors 08 54 13 Fiberglass Windows 08 71 00 Door Hardware Division 10 10 21 13.19 Plastic Toilet Partitions 10 21 23 Cubicles 10 22 26.33 Folding Panel Partitions 10 26 01 Wall and Corner Guards 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 10 31 00 Manufactured Fireplaces 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10 51 00 Lockers 10 56 23 Wire Storage Shelving Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 12
Division 12 12 22 16 12 24 00
Drapery Track and Accessories Window Shades
Division 32 32 15 00 32 15 20 32 31 13 32 31 19 32 31 23
Sire Furnishings Sire Signage Galvanized Chainlink Fence Aluminum Picket Fence PVC Fences
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Coordinate all deliveries with the Construction Manager. Material shall be provided FOB jobsite and a packing list shall be provided to the Construction Manager. In the event that a packing ship is not provided for delivery, Work Category 6A is responsible. 2. Shall receive, unload, transport, inventory, store, protect, and install all of the components of this Work Category. 3. Coordinate development of shop drawings with the electrical, mechanical and finish trade contractors during the rough-in stages of construction to ensure accuracy of final cutouts. 4. All fasteners required for the work of this Work Category. 5. This Work Category will be responsible for correcting any scratches to the finished material installed by this package. If scratches cannot be adequately fixed, this package shall be responsible for replacement. 6. Provide for off-loading and hoisting of all materials. Hoisting access to the second floor is not guaranteed, it may be necessary to hand carry materials through stairs. The elevators will not be used for material hoisting. 7. The Site access route must be coordinated with the Construction Manager and adhered to at all times. 8. Contractor to provide backing for all owner provided equipment. 9. In addition to the daily clean up requirements listed in the Contract Documents, this Work Category is to provide 1 person for 2 hours per week to assist the Construction Manager in general clean up duties and relocation of materials as required. This requirement applies each week for which you have personnel on-site. This amount of labor shall be listed on the schedule of values and will be only paid when participation requirements are satisfied, otherwise the amount will be deducted from the contract. 10. Work Category 6A shall carry a $20,000 allowance for miscellaneous labor/material, to be utilized by the Construction Manager. Any portion of this allowance not explicitly requested and approved by the Construction Manager will be deducted from the contract and returned to the owner
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 13
Work Category 7A- Roofing The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this bid package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 7 07 31 13 07 53 00 07 62 00 07 71 23
Asphalt Shingles Elastomeric Membrane Roofing Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Roofing systems complete, flashing and sheet metal, insulation, crickets, copings, edge metal, reglets, gravel stops, scuppers, downspouts, ballast and roof accessories as shown, required by manufacturer or specified. 2. Complete flashing and seal for all roof penetrations as shown or specified, including penetrations shown or required by the mechanical and electrical drawings. 3. Include a separate mobilization for sealing pipes/conduit penetrations after the initial installation of the roof. 4. This Work Category shall be responsible for completely cleaning & blowing off the roof decks, plank and precast prior to installation of roof. Shall have Construction Manager inspect all roof areas prior to installation of the roof. 5. Complete flashing and seal for all roof curbs as shown or specified on the architectural, mechanical, and electrical drawings 6. Roof walkway pads, pavers, splash blocks, and accessories as shown or specified. 7. Metal parapet caps, counter flashings, metal reglet flashings, scuppers, overflow scuppers, downspouts, flashings, and sealants as shown or specified. 8. Provide caulking and sealants as required for the work of this Work Category, including all caulking recommended by the roofing manufacturer whether or not it is shown on the drawings.
9. Snow removal and cold weather protection. 10. Vapor barriers under the roofing membrane as shown or specified. Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 14
11. In addition to daily clean up requirements listed in the contract documents, this package is to assist the Construction Manager in general clean up duties and relocation of materials as required.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 15
Work Category 7B –Caulking and Sealants The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this bid package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 7 07 90 00
Joint Sealers
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Caulking of the following, but not limited to, concrete topping slab connection to precast and masonry, masonry control joins, masonry to masonry, masonry to precast, masonry to steel, and masonry to drywall, interior and exterior cast stone, drywall control joins, cabinetry and back splashes, perimeter of wood paneling, exterior door frames, interior frames, interior joints around windows, entrances, curtain walls, window stools, access doors, exterior overhead doors, louvers, tile control joints, shower compartments, toilet, bath and laundry accessories, fire extinguisher cabinets, food service equipment. 2. Caulking as required by Work Category 04A, 06A, 21A, 22A, 23A and 26A including but not limited to, all penetrations, perimeter of fixtures. 3. In addition to daily clean up requirements in the construction documents, this Work Category is to provide assistance to the construction manager in general clean up and relocation of materials as necessary.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 16
Work Category 8A- Aluminum Systems The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this bid package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 8 08 43 13 08 51 13 08 56 59 08 80 00 08 83 00 08 87 17
Aluminum Framed Storefronts Aluminum Windows Service and Teller Window Units Glazing Mirrors Safety and Security Glazing Films
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Provide all accessories, fasteners, insulation, supports, and blocking required for the work of this Work Category. Including but not limited to, all wood blocking required for support of anchoring of the curtain wall, aluminum windows, storefronts, entrances, skylights, power door operators, and power door operator actuators. 2. Provide all non-corrosive flashings indicated to be provided around all window, storefront, aluminum entrance and curtain wall openings. 3. Provide all joint sealants as required for all materials installed under the scope of this Work Category, including where the work of this package abuts the work of others. This includes but not limited to, exterior perimeter seals of all aluminum windows, curtain wall, storefronts, entrances. 4. Provide all materials and labor necessary to clean and protect the work provided under this Work Category until owner acceptance. This includes the removal and cleaning of all stickers. 5. Provide all standard interior glass. 6. Provide automatic entrance doors, including all supports, accessories, and hardware as shown or specified. Coordinate function of electrical hardware required to be tied into the fire alarm and security systems with electrical and security. 7. Perform field measurements for all openings required for the work of this package prior to release for fabrication. 8. Provide all off loading and hoisting of the materials of this Work Category. 9. The Site access route must be coordinated with the Construction Manager and adhered to at all times. Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 17
10. Provide final cleaning of all exterior glass, immediately prior to building occupancy. This work will be completed after the precast is power washed. 11. In addition to daily clean up requirements in the construction documents, this Work Category is to provide assistance to the Construction Manager in general clean up and relocation of materials as necessary. 12. Provide and Install all Hardware for Aluminum Doors
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 18
Work Category 09A- Gypsum Wallboard The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this Bid Package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 7 07 84 00
Firestopping (as applies)
Division 9 09 21 16
Gypsum Board Assemblies
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Work Category shall include all layout as necessary to perform work of this package. 2. Provide vapor barrier as shown or specified. 3. Provide gypsum wall board, moisture resistant sheetrock, impact resistant board, exterior sheathing, shaft wall, core board, tile backer units, security mesh, at locations shown or specified on the contract documents. 4. Coordinate rough opening sizes and requirements for all window, curtainwall, and aluminum entrance openings with Work Category 08A. 5. Coordinate with Work Categories 21A, 22A, 23A, and 26A for installation of mechanical and electrical components within the work of this Work Category. 6. Provide firestopping, caulking, sealant as required at head of wall conditions constructed by this package. Rated walls shall be constructed according to UL listed assemblies and as per the requirements of the Contract Documents. 7. Provide all firestopping system or devices necessary to ensure work installed by this Work Category complies with the requirements of specification section 07 84 00 and meets all code requirements. Coordinate the firestopping work required of this Bid Package with the firestopping work of all other Work Category to ensure complete construction of all wall and firestopping assemblies. 8. Provide metal framing, sheathing, and insulation at all areas not specifically listed in other Work Categories 9. Provide all suspension systems for gypsum board assemblies.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 19
10. Coordinate the installation of all work associated with this Work Category and, with the work of all Work Categories, and existing work, to ensure that all tolerances and clearances required for all Work Categories are maintained. 11. Provide all materials and labor necessary to clean and protect the work provided under this Work Category until Owner Acceptance. 12. Provide daily cleanup, including sweeping of all work areas and the disposal of debris and garbage generated by this Work Category personnel. Provide a sufficient quantity of trash carts, bins, garbage cans, etc to prevent the accumulation of waste and provide means to transport the waste to the dumpster furnished by the Construction Manager. 13. The Construction Manager can direct Work Category 9A to certain areas that are critical path for scheduling
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 20
Work Category 09B - Tiling The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this bid package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 9 09 30 00
Tiling
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1.
Provide complete protection of existing features surrounding the project for the complete demo and installation of the work of Work Category 9B, including but not limited to, paving, curb & gutter, sidewalks, buildings, green space. The complete removal and replacement of the damaged site features shall be the responsibility of Work Category 9B.
2. Coordinate with Work Category 3A Concrete, 22A Plumbing and the Construction Manager for any special tile requirements for the sloping floors. 3. Provide waterproofing membrane where shown or specified in the contract documents. 4. Provide crack isolation membrane at all construction joints, control joints, and shrinkage cracks greater than 1/8” in the concrete substrate. 5. Provide proper termination of the waterproofing membrane at the floor drain. 6. Provide protection of adjacent floor, wall and ceiling finishes. 7. Provide all materials and labor necessary to clean and protect the work provided under this Work Category until owner acceptance. 8. Provide temporary lighting as required. 9. Provide all material hoisting and off-loading of material. 10. Provide attic stock material with a written inventory list of the materials provided to the Construction Manager at the conclusion of the project. 11. In addition to daily clean up requirements in the construction documents, this package is to provide assistance to the construction manager in general clean up and relocation of materials as necessary.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 21
Work Category 09C-Accoustical Ceilings The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this bid package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 9 09 51 00
Acoustical Ceilings
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Provide complete protection of existing features surrounding the project for the complete demo and installation of the work of Work Category 9C, including but not limited to, paving, curb & gutter, sidewalks, buildings, green space. The complete removal and replacement of the damaged site features shall be the responsibility of Work Category 9C. 2. Provide all acoustical ceilings, including suspension systems, adhesives, trim, molding, extended perimeter wall moldings, curtain pockets moldings, extruded aluminum profiles, accessories and height differential materials, as needed, shown or specified. 3. Provide all sound absorptive panels as shown or specified. 4. Provide all openings, penetrations, cutouts in acoustical work for all trades as required to allow each trade to complete their scope of work. 5. Install tiles for ceiling mounted devices (devices provided by others) when directed by the construction manager. 6. Provide all materials and labor necessary to clean and protect the work provided under this section until owner acceptance. 7. Provide hoisting as required for this Work Category. 8. In addition to daily clean up requirements in the construction documents, this package is to provide assistance to the construction manager in general clean up and relocation of materials as necessary.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 22
Work Category 09D - Flooring The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this Bid Package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 9 09 05 61 09 65 00 09 67 00 09 68 13
Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation Resilient Flooring Fluid Applied Flooring Tile Carpeting
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Provide complete protection of existing features surrounding the project for installation of the work of Work Category 9E, including but not limited to, adjacent floor finishes, wall finishes, doors, casework. The complete removal and replacement of the damaged site features shall be the responsibility of Work Category 9E. 2. Provide all materials and labor necessary to clean and protect the work provided under this Work Category until owner acceptance. 3. Provide temporary lighting as required. 4. Provide all material hoisting and off-loading of material. 5. Provide attic stock material with a written inventory list of the materials provided to the construction manager at the conclusion of the project. 6. Provide all accessories, trim pieces, edging strips, reducers, and transitions shown or specified. 7. Clean resilient flooring or provide protection until the completion of the punch list. After completion of punch list, provide floor polish finish of VCT. 8. Provide floor protection of installed carpet until completion of punch list. After completion of the punch list, remove protection and vacuum/clean carpet for final acceptance. 9. In addition to daily clean up requirements in the construction documents, this package is to provide assistance to the Construction Manager in general clean up and relocation of materials as necessary.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 23
Work Category 09E - Painting The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this Bid Package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 9 09 90 00
Painting and Finishing
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Paint all exposed steel, including but not limited to, handrails, guardrails, spindles or mesh on handrails and guardrails, steel stairs, stair risers, security mesh, c-channel handrail and guardrail bases, roof ladders, roof hatches, elevator pit ladders, ships ladders, exposed lintels, exposed embeds, bollards and all other exposed metal shown or specified. 2. Work Category 9E shall inspect and review all finished wall conditions as provided by Work Category 9A Gypsum prior to applying paint, and report and deficiencies to the Construction Manager. By applying paint to drywall surfaces, Work Category 9E is accepting the substrate. In the event that painted wall surfaces are later rejected by Owner, Architect, or Construction Manager due to taping deficiencies or finish issues, Work Category 9E will provide re-painting as required at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Provide all preparation of new or existing surfaces for painting of concrete, masonry, steel, iron, galvanized steel, aluminum, mechanical and electrical work, wood products and gypsum board, including floor treatments, sealers, primers, sandblasting, and other preparatory means, as required, shown or specified. 4. Clean and sand all hollow metal doors and frames prior to painting. 5. Provide finish for all millwork, casework not specifically spelled out to be pre-finished as indicated on the Contract Documents. 6. Provide finish paint of all materials, equipment, or products shown or specified to be field painted on all disciplines of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to, miscellaneous metals, access panels, projection screens, door frames and hollow metal doors. 7. Paint all access doors shown on the documents. 8. Provide all materials and labor necessary to clean and protect the work provided under this Work Category until Owner acceptance.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 24
9. In addition to daily clean up requirements in the construction documents, this package is to provide assistance to the Construction Manager in general clean up and relocation of materials as necessary. 10. Paint all walls to the deck and exposed ceilings in rooms scheduled without a ceiling. 11. Paint all exposed piping, ductwork, and conduit in finished spaces exposed to view. 12. Provide hoisting and off-loading of materials as required for the work of this Package. 13. Any overspray whether on floors, walls, or ceilings that cause a material no to bond will be the responsibility of this Work Category to remove.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 25
Work Category 11A - Food and Laundry Equipment
The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this Bid Package. Bidding and General Requirements Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Division 11 11 40 00
Food Service Equipment
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Provide delivery, off-loading, and hoisting of all equipment provided by this Work Category. This includes any temporary provisions and/or rigging required to get the equipment from the delivery truck to the final installed location. 2. Work Category 11A shall furnish, receive, unload, transport, and install all of the components of this Work Category. The components of this Work Category shall be warehoused by Work Category 11A, until the scheduled date for installation. Upon arrival at the jobsite the protection, security, and storage of the material is the responsibility of the Work Category 11A. 3. Participation in two on-site coordination meetings to verify kitchen equipment rough-in locations prior to pouring the slab-on-grade and prior to setting masonry / sheetrocking. Work Category 11A shall assist in layout of rough-in locations for mechanical, plumbing, and electrical services. 4. The kitchen equipment shall be initially set in place for mechanical and electrical connections. A separate trip shall be provided for equipment start-up and testing. After the equipment has been fully tested and operated, Owner training can be conducted. 5. Coordinate masonry opening size requirements if applicable. 6. Provide all firestopping systems or devices necessary to ensure work installed by this Work Category complies with the requirements of specifications and meets all code requirements. Coordinate the firestopping work required of this Work Category with the firestopping work of all other Work Category to ensure complete construction of all wall and firestopping assemblies. 7. Provides Cords for all Equipment.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 26
Work Category 11B – Equipment The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this Bid Package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 11 11 13 19.13 11 73 10
Loading Dock Levelers Ceiling Gantry Lift
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Work Category 11B shall furnish, receive, unload, transport, and install all of the components of the Work Category, including all hoisting. Upon arrival at the jobsite the protection, security, and storage of the material is the responsibility of Work Category 11B. 2. The Construction Manager may require the relocation of staged materials as required for overall completion of the project. Work Category 11B shall complete this relocation upon request. 3. Provide all hoisting for the work of this Work Category. 4. Work Category 11B shall perform field measurements prior to releasing the materials for the fabrication unless otherwise coordinated with the Construction Manager. 5. Work Category 11B shall coordinate with 03A, 05A, 05B, 06A and 09D; any embeds or floor items that need to be cast-in floor. 6. Work Category 11B shall provide any items/materials that are cast in any concrete and precast. Work Category 11B shall verify correct locations.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 27
Work Category 21A - Fire Suppression The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this Bid Package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 7 07 84 00
Firestopping (as applies)
Division 21 21 05 00 21 05 29 21 10 00
Common Work Results for Fire Suppression Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment Water Based Fire Suppression Systems
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Provide all materials, labor, supervision, equipment to install complete and functional fire protection systems (pre-action, clean agent, wet and dry systems) and related work, as shown or reasonably inferred for a complete and functioning project. 2. Provide fire protection coverage / heads in all freezers, refrigerators, kitchen hoods, kitchen ducts, and skylights, as specified, shown, or required by code. 3. Provide fire hose and fire valve cabinets as shown or specified or as required to meet code. 4. Center all sprinkler heads in ceiling tiles, planks, or soffits unless otherwise noted. 5. All manufacturers’ warranties shall be included. Warranties shall begin at Owner’s acceptance. Extended warranties, if specified, shall be provided. 6. Submit inspection reports from local, state, and federal inspection agencies to the Construction Manager. 7. Submit product data, drawings, calculations to authority having jurisdiction and Owner’s insurance carrier. 8. Provide all cleaning of pipe and equipment as specified or required to meet code. 9. Provide all pipe leakage/pressure testing as specified or required to meet code. 10. This Work Category is responsible for the removal, replacement, cutting, patching, etc. of any walls, floors, ceilings needed for the installation of its work.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 28
11. Provide all blocking, backing, miscellaneous supports, sleeves, block outs, core drilling, holes in walls, decks, precast, and concrete slabs, hangers, support framing, anchors, concrete embeds, hardware, etc. required for the scope of the work of the Work Category. 12. Provide all fire/smokestopping systems or devices necessary to insure work installed by this Work Category complies with the requirements of specification 07 84 00 and meets all code requirements. Coordinate the firestopping work required of this Work Category with the firestopping work of all other Work Categories to ensure complete construction of all wall and firestopping assemblies. 13. Coordinate the installation of all work associated with this Work Category with the work of all Work Categories, and existing work to endure that all tolerances and clearances required for all Work Categories are maintained. 14. Provide all hangers, clamps, support framing, and anchors as required to complete this scope of work. If no other finish is specified, provide steel prime coated. 15. Provide all start up, testing, verification, corrective action, manuals, and training as required or specified, including separate demonstration tests to the Construction Manager, the Owner, and authorities having jurisdiction. 16. Provide owner training for equipment and systems. Include on-site training by manufacturers’ technical representatives for all equipment and systems. This trip is a separate trip from time of equipment start-up and demonstration testing. 17. Provide complete participation and cooperation for above ceiling coordination. 18. In addition to the daily clean up requirements listed in the Contract Documents, this Package is to provide 1 person for 2 hours per week to assist the Construction Manager in general clean-up duties and relocation of materials as required. This requirement applies each week for which you will have personnel on-site. The amount of this labor shall be listed on the schedule of values and will only be paid when participation requirements are satisfied, otherwise the amount will be deducted from the Contract. 19. Owner Training will occur in phases following the construction phases in the schedule.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 29
Work Category 22A - Plumbing The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this Bid Package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 7 07 84 00
Firestopping (as applies)
Division 22 22 05 00 22 05 14 22 05 29 22 07 00 22 13 92 22 16 00 22 30 00 22 40 00
Common Work Results for Plumbing Plumbing Specialties Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Plumbing Insulation Facility Sanitary Sewerage General Service Natural Gas System Plumbing Equipment Plumbing Fixtures
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Provide all excavation, trenching, and back fill required for the installation of all underground work. Remove any spoils 2. Provide final connections to kitchen equipment, including but not limited to, internal connections, external connections, indirect wastes to floor drains, installation of backflow prevention devices, fittings, valves, parts, adaptors, regulators, and any other required accessories. 3. Provide all rough-ins, hookups, and connections for equipment furnished by other Work Categories and all Owner furnished equipment. 4. All manufacturers’ warranties shall be included. Warranties shall begin at Owners acceptance. Extended warranties, if specified, shall be provided. Where equipment is used for temporary, extended warranties shall be provided for the period of temporary usage. 5. Provide identification/coding/labeling of piping, equipment, systems, ceiling markers, etc. as necessary to complete this scope. 6. It is this Work Category responsibility to schedule and attend all local, state and/or federal inspections whether or not they occur during normal project working hours. Submit inspection reports from local, state and federal inspection agencies to the Construction Manager. Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 30
7. Provide labor, material, equipment, coordination, and supervision for connection and tieins to existing pipes. 8. Work Category 31A Earthwork will provide utility services stubs within 5’-0” of the exterior foundation wall of the building. The final connection shall be made by Work Category 22A Plumbing or 31A Earthwork. Coordinate the locations for these services with Work Category 31A Earthwork. 9. Provide all cleaning/disinfecting of pipe and equipment as required. 10. Provide all coordination with the assistance to the independent certified testing and balancing Contractor, during the performance of their work under Work Category 23C Testing and Balancing. Provide labor to adjust systems as directed by the Test and Balance Contractor. 11. All demolition and sawcutting of floor openings is by individual Work Categories requiring the opening. 12. Refer to other Work Categories for coordination of work between HVAC Sheetmetal, Testing and Balancing, Building Automation and Electrical Systems. Coordinate all work with the Contractors performing under those Work Categories. 13. Work Category 03A is providing all concrete equipment curbs, pads, and bases, as shown on the drawings. Equipment pads not shown on the drawings will be provided the Work Category requiring the pad. This Work Category is to include all concrete and reinforcing for inertia bases they provide. 14. Provide all blocking, backing miscellaneous supports, sleeves, clock outs, core drilling, holes in walls, decks, precast, and concrete slabs. Provide all hangers, support framing, anchors, concrete embeds, hardware, etc. required for the scope of the Work Category. Include final cutting of decking for block outs/openings/sleeves. 15. Alert all Contractors of penetrations, sleeves and other types of openings, installed under this Work Category, impacting their work by physically marking, providing layout drawings, and/or coordinating all locations of openings, penetrations and sleeves within concrete, precast, masonry, gypsum board, etc. Furnish, layout, set, inspect all sleeves and openings as needed to support precast, concrete, masonry, etc. 16. Provide spray fireproofing patching at any fireproofed areas damaged by this scope of work. 17. Coordinate the installation of all work associated with this Work Category, with the work of all Work Categories, and existing work to ensure that all tolerances and clearances required for all Work Categories are maintained. 18. Provide and coordinate all necessary tie-ins, demolition, relocation, and shutdowns with the Construction Manager and the Owner to ensure no disruption to the existing system occurs. The necessity of performing the work of this Work Category during non-regular or non-peak hours as directed by the Owner will not be compensable. 19. Provide all start up, testing, verification, corrective action, manuals, and training as required or specified, including separate demonstration tests to the Construction Manager, the Owner, and local authorities. 20. Provide Owner training for equipment and systems. Include on-site training by manufacturer’s technical representatives for all equipment and systems. This trip is a separate trip from time of equipment startup and demonstration testing.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 31
21. Provide all materials and labor necessary to clean and protect the work provided under this Work Category until Owner acceptance. 22. Provide complete participation and cooperation for above ceiling coordination. 23. Once the building is enclosed, the Construction Manager will be installing temporary gas heaters to heat the building. This Work Category is to provide temporary gas piping, meter, connections to the heaters furnished by the Construction Manager. 24. In addition to the daily clean up requirements listed in the Contract Documents, this Package is to provide 1 person for 2 hours per week to assist the Construction Manager in general clean-up duties and relocation of materials as required. This requirement applies each week for which you will have personnel on-site. The amount of this labor shall be listed on the schedule of values and will only be paid when participation requirements are satisfied, otherwise the amount will be deducted from the Contract. 25. Owner Training will occur in phases following the construction phases in the schedule. 26. Work Category 22A shall carry a $10,000 allowance for miscellaneous labor/material, to be utilized by the Construction Manager. Any portion of this allowance not explicitly requested and approved by the Construction Manager will be deducted from the contract and returned to the owner.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 32
Work Category 23A – HVAC Distributed via Addendum
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 33
Work Category 26A – Electrical Distributed via Addendum
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 34
Work Category 31A - Earthwork The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this Bid Package. Division 00 Division 01 00 31 32
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements Geotechnical Exploration
Division 31 31 10 00 31 22 00 31 23 16 31 23 50 31 25 00
Site Preparation Earthwork Excavation and Backfilling Finish Grading Erosion Control
Division 33 33 11 00 33 31 11 33 41 11
Water Mains Sanitary Sewers Storm Sewers
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Site removals, included but not limited to, curb and gutter, sidewalk, concrete paving, bituminous pavement, gravel, site utilities, abandoned utilities, hydrants, miscellaneous foundations, trees, stumps, top soil and all other site elements indicated to be removed from the site. At locations where hard surfaces are to be removed, a clean, straight sawcut shall be provided around the perimeter of the removal and terminated at the nearest construction joint. 2. Provide sub-grade for slab-on-grade, footings, foundations, curb and gutter, concrete paving, sidewalks, landscaping, rock beds, seeded areas, sodded areas, generator pad, transformer pad, chiller pads, and monument sign. The compacted sub-grade shall be provided within - .05 feet of the finished sub-grade elevation. 3. Provide granular sand cushion/sand base for the slab-on-grade and stoops. The sand base shall be provided within - .05 feet of the finished elevation. Work Category 31B shall be responsible for coordinating the acceptance of the final grades with Work Category 03A and the Construction Manager. If the final elevation is not accepted by the Construction Manager and Work Category 03A, prior to Work Category 31B demobilizing , any corrective work to adjust the finished grade elevations shall be the financial responsibility of Work Category 31B. Note the granular base for the slab on grade is not currently apart of previous Work Categories and must be included for the entire building footprint. 4. Work Category 31A shall provide the sub-base and base for the work of Exterior Concrete Paving, Asphalt Paving, including but not limited to, curb and gutter, aprons Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 35
and slabs, sidewalks, pedestrian curb ramps, concrete paving, generator pad, chiller pad, and transformer pad. 5. Work Category 31A shall provide complete dewatering of the site at all times to protect the sub-grade from becoming unstable and maintaining the stability of the sub-base materials. Dewatering and/or replacement of unsuitable materials shall be provided immediately as directed by the Construction Manager or Geo-Technical Engineer. Work Category 31 shall be responsible for site dewatering for the entirety of the project. 6. Provide complete winter weather protection and snow removal for the work of this Work Category. Snow removal for general access to the site, trailers, on-site parking, and access to the building shall be provided by Work Category 31B until the slab-on-grade sub-base is completed. Upon completion of the slab-on-grace sub-base, the Construction Manager will accept responsibility for the snow removal for the general access to the site. 7. Provide complete protection of existing site features surrounding the project for the complete installation of the work of this Work Category, including but not limited to, paving, curb and gutter, sidewalks, street signs, light poles, buildings, utilities, trees, and green spaces. The complete removal and replacement of the damaged site features shall be the responsibility of Work Category 31A. 8. Work Category 31A will bring the fire main and domestic water service into the building and terminate it 1’-0” above the finished floor. Work Category 21A Fire Protection and Work Category 22A Plumbing is to connect to the mains at that point. This Work Category is to coordinate with Work Category 21A Fire Protection and Work Category 22A Plumbing for the exact location (north/south and east/west), where the main is to be located within the building. 9. All permitting not included in the general building permit, including but not limited to, street permits, parking permits, and sewer and water access changes shall be provided by Work Category 31A 10. Work Category to provide 18” of compacted fill (DOT Grade 1-see specification) below slab on grade for the entire new building footprint. This work is not currently apart of the previous bid packages. 11. . Work Category 31A will be responsible for furnishing and placing topsoil.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 36
Work Category 32A- Asphalt Paving The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this Bid Package. Division 00 Division 01 00 31 32
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements Geotechnical Exploration
Division 32 32 12 16 32 17 23
Asphaltic Concrete Pavement Pavement Markings
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Provide striping and pavement markings at all locations shown on the contract documents, including concrete surfaces not installed in this package. 2. Provide separate mobilization for the installation of the base course and binder course 3. Power washing and cleaning of surfaces as required for proper installation of striping and pavement markings. 4. Grading of base course under asphalt paving shall be provided by this work package. 5. Include layout as necessary for the scope of this work package. 6. Construction Manager has right to install binder course only and finish paving at a later date, contingent on weather. 7. Work Category 32A to figure in multiple mobilizations, as required.
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 37
Work Category 32B- Landscaping The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, bonding, taxes, and all other items required to perform this work. The information is to be complimentary with the collective requirements of all the other Contract Documents. All the Contract Documents, including all disciplines of the specifications and drawings, are included as part of this scope of work. The Document will become a part of the successful Bidder’s Final Contract and outlines the specific scope of work for this Work Category. The following specification sections shall be completely furnished and installed under the scope of this Bid Package. Division 00 Division 01
Procurement and Contracting Requirements General Requirements
Division 32 32 29 23 32 92 19 32 93 00
Sodding Seeding Trees, Plants and Ground Cover
Scope of Work – Additional Category Requirements 1. Protection of adjacent finished work during the installation of the work of this Work Category. 2. Work Category 32B shall provide measures to prevent top soil and planting materials from washing out prior to the permanent plantings being established. Top soil correction and replanting shall be provided until the permanent plantings are established. 3 Protection of adjacent finished work during the installation of the work of this Work Category. (sidewalks, curbs, asphalt paving, etc.)
Work Categories 00 23 00 – Page 38
SECTION 00 41 00 BID FORM PROJECT:
La Crosse County Lakeview Health Center Phase II Bid Package 1 West Salem, Wisconsin
BID DEADLINE:
Thursday, August 7, 2014 @ 2:00 p.m. local time
BID TO:
La Crosse County Facilities Department Attn: Jim Speropulos 400 4th Street North, Room 1370 La Crosse, WI 54601 Fax: 608-793-6521
Company Name Business Address Street Address
City
P.O. Box
City
State
Zip
Mailing Address Phone Number
(
)
State
Fax: Number
Contact for Project
(
Zip
)
Email Address:
Authorized Signature (circle applicable items)
Union
Title Non-Union
MBE
WBE
SBE
SEAL IF BID BY A CORPORATION In strict compliance with the Bidding and Contract Documents entitled La Crosse County, Lakeview Health Center Phase II, West Salem, Wisconsin and dated July 14, 2014, as prepared by HSR Associates, Inc., 100 Milwaukee Street, La Crosse, WI 54603, the undersigned have become thoroughly familiar with the terms and conditions of the proposed Contract Documents, local conditions affecting the Work, fully inspected the particulars of the site, and propose the following bid:
A separate Bid Form should be used for each Work Category or for each combination of Work Categories being bid.
WORK CATEGORY NUMBER(S)
BASE BID: All Work as defined in Work Category Number(s) noted above. for the sum of Dollars ($
Bid Form 00 41 00 – Page 1
).
Page Intentionally Left Blank
Company Name:
Work Category No(s).
Alternate Bid 1: For Heat Stack Recovery, add/deduct/no change (circle one) to the Base Bid the sum of Dollars ($
).
Alternate Bid 2: For Humidity Control, add/deduct/no change (circle one) to the Base Bid the sum of Dollars ($
).
Alternate Bid 3: For LED Light Fixtures, add/deduct/no change (circle one) to the Base Bid the sum of Dollars ($
).
Alternate Bid 4: For Generator, add/deduct/no change (circle one) to the Base Bid the sum of Dollars ($
).
Alternate Bid 5: For Solar Panels, add/deduct/no change (circle one) to the Base Bid the sum of Dollars ($
).
Alternate Bid 6: For Canopies, add/deduct/no change (circle one) to the Base Bid the sum of Dollars ($
).
Alternate Bid 7: For Domestic Water Treatment, add/deduct/no change (circle one) to the Base Bid the sum of Dollars ($
Bid Form 00 41 00 – Page 2
).
Page Intentionally Left Blank
Company Name:
Work Category No(s).
We acknowledge receipt of Addenda __________ through __________ inclusive.
Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond The Bidder can / cannot provide Performance and Payment Bond in favor of La Crosse County and Market & Johnson, if requested, in the sum of 100% of the Contract Amount. The premium for any bonds will be paid by the Contractor, separate from the amounts quoted above. The name of the proposed surety is
.
To provide Performance and Payment Bonds Base Bid
Add
$
Alternate A
Add / Deduct
$
Alternate B
Add / Deduct
$
***
Bid Form 00 41 00 – Page 3
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 00 43 25 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST
Date Received: Project No.
TO:
PROJECT: Section
Page
Paragraph
Exact Description
The undersigned requests consideration of the following: PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: REASON FOR REQUEST: Attached data includes product description, specifications, samples, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Also included is a list describing all changes to the Contract Documents, which the proposed substitutions will require for installation and a list of itemized cost differences, if applicable. The undersigned certifies that the following statements, unless noted and shown as modified in attachments, are correct: 1. Does not affect weights, locations, and dimensions indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Will have no adverse affect on other trades or contractors, the construction schedule, required code compliance or specified warranty requirements. 3. Will have maintenance and service parts locally readily available. 4. Proposed Installed (as applicable): The undersigned further states that the performance, function, appearance and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item. The undersigned agrees to pay for required changes to the building design and architectural and engineering fees for revisions, design and detailing and for additional construction costs caused by the requested substitution. List all attachments: Submitted By: (Authorized Signature – faxed or copied signatures not acceptable) (Name and Title) (Firm Name) (Address)
Submit in Triplicate (Telephone)
(Fax No.)
RESPONSE: REVIEWED. REQUEST QUALIFIED AS ACCEPTABLE, based on information submitted and subject to compliance with the Contract Documents. Qualification does not constitute Architect’s and Engineer’s endorsement of proposed substitution. REVIEWED. REQUEST DENIED. Review indicates non-compliance with Contract Document requirements. REVIEWED. RESUBMIT. Information is inadequate for evaluation of Request. REMARKS
Response by: Name and Company
Date
Substitution Request 00 43 25 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 00 45 36 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY PROGRAM 1.
During performance of the Work of the Contract, the Subcontractor will be required to follow an equal employment opportunity program complying with the current rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor.
2.
The Subcontractor’s equal employment opportunity program should be based on the following stipulations, except as otherwise approved in advance by the appropriate governing agency. A.
There shall be no discrimination against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, color, sex, age, religion, disability, or national origin. Affirmative action will be taken to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, creed, color, sex, age, religion, disability, or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer Recruitment or recruitment advertising Layoffs or terminations Rates of pay or other forms of compensation Selection for training, including apprenticeship
Notices shall be posted in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.
3
B.
All solicitations or advertisement for employees shall state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, creed, color, sex, age, religion, disability, or national origin.
C.
Subcontractors shall send to each labor union or representative of workers which they have a collective bargaining agreement or other contract of understanding, a notice to be provided advising the labor union or workers’ representative of the Subcontractor’s commitments under the current regulations of the Equal Employment Opportunity Program. The Subcontractor shall post copies of the appropriate notices in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment.
D.
Subcontractors shall furnish all information and reports required by the rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto as required by Market & Johnson, for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders. The Subcontractors shall furnish, as requested, copies of their certified payrolls indicating ethnic group of each employee.
E.
In the event of Subcontractors’ noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of their contracts, or with any of such rules, regulations, or orders, their contracts may be cancelled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part, and they may be declared ineligible for further contracts on governmentally assisted construction work. Other sanctions may be impose and remedies invoked as provided by the rules, regulations, or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law.
F.
The Subcontractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs “A” through “E” in every subcontract or purchase order so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor.
Other programs in satisfactory use may be substituted in lieu of the basic program delineated above, subject to the approval of all governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION Equal Employment Opportunity Program 00 45 36 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 00 45 39 MINORITY PARTICIPATION PROGRAM 1.
2.
Business Development and Training Program A.
Assistance will be available during the bidding process for any Subcontractors or vendors desiring assistance. Please contact at if you have any questions.
B.
A component of this Minority and Female Participation Program will be an organized Business Development Mentor Program.
C.
Specific training programs will also be provided for on-site craftsmen.
Minority and Female Participation Requirements A.
Each Subcontractor will be required to utilize minority and/or women-owned, managed and controlled firms to a minimum of percent ( %) of the total subcontract amount (not including Owner direct purchases). Please note that this is not a goal, it is a requirement. Subcontractors substantially exceeding the requirements may be given special consideration in the award of subcontracts. In addition, at least percent ( minorities and women.
B.
%) of each Subcontractor’s on-site work force shall be
Minority and female participation is calculated based on the following criteria: 1)
A Subcontractor shall be credited one hundred percent (100%) of expenditures to minority or woman-owned, managed and controlled firms, if all of the identified scope of work has a commercially useful function in the actual work of the subcontract and is performed directly by the minority or woman-owned, managed and controlled subsubcontractor, however. a) percent ( %) or more of the % minority participation requirement must be sub-subcontracted to minority and/or woman-owned managed and controlled sub-subcontractors performing substantial labor on the project. It is anticipated that subcontractors will have to sub-subcontract portions of the work they normally perform in order to meet this requirement. b) percent ( %) or less of the participation requirement can be subsubcontracted to a minority and/or woman-owned, managed and controlled supplier (regular dealer). (A regular dealer is a firm that owns, operates, or maintains a store, warehouse, or other establishment in which the materials or supplies are kept in stock, and regularly sold to the public in the usual course of business. A regular dealer in such bulk items as steel, cement, gravel, stone, and petroleum products need not keep such products in stock, if it owns or operates distribution equipment. Brokers and packagers shall not be regarded as manufacturers or regular dealers within the meaning of this section.)
2)
A Subcontractor shall be credited with one hundred percent (100%) of the expenditures to minority or woman-owned, managed and controlled manufacturers. A minority or woman-owned, managed and controlled manufacturer is a firm that operates or maintains a factory or establishment that produces on the premises good from raw materials or adds value to the materials or supplies obtained by the subcontractor.
3)
Subcontractors are required to notify Market & Johnson if their minority-owned or woman-owned sub0subcontractors will further subcontract out work on this project. Credit will be given based on actual participation by minority and woman-owned, Minority Participation Program 00 45 39 – Page 1
managed and controlled firms. Credit will not be given for work subcontracted by minority-owned or woman-owned firms to other majority-owned firms unless previously approved by the Program Directors.
C.
4)
Percentage of minority and female on-site work force shall be measured based on total man-hours of on-site labor, including supervision.
5)
Decisions regarding credit will be made based on the specifics of the subcontract to be awarded and the relevant industry standards.
Proposed minority and woman-owned, managed and controlled firms must be listed in the space provided on the Bid Form. The list shall include but not be limited to the following: 1)
The names, addresses, telephone numbers and contact persons for the minorityowned and woman-owned firm(s) that will participate on the project.
2)
A description of the scope of work to be performed by the minority-owned and womanowned firm(s) on this project.
3)
The minority-owned and woman-owned firm(s) sub-subcontract amount(s) and corresponding percentages that the sub-subcontract amount(s) represent of the total subcontract amount. Listing a minority or woman-owned, managed and controlled firm shall constitute a representation that the subcontractor has communicated directly with the firm(s) listed, and that the listed firm(s) is(are) available and will complete the specified work. If awarded the subcontract, the subcontractor will enter into a subsubcontract with the firm(s) listed for the work and sub-subcontract amount set forth thereon.
D.
After the execution of the subcontract, if for any reason the minority-owned or woman-owned firm(s) cannot perform, or if the subcontractor has a problem in meeting the minority and/or female participation requirement, or any other problem relative to their minority and/or female participation requirement, the subcontractor shall immediately contact Market & Johnson. The subcontractor must submit a written request for substitution, specifying the reason for the request. Approval must be obtained prior to making substitutions. Any difference in the cost occasioned by such substitution shall be borne by the Subcontractor.
E.
When evaluating the performance of this subcontract, the Program Directors reserve the right to conduct compliance reviews and request, both from the Subcontractor and minority-owned and woman-owned Sub-subcontractors, documentation that would indicate the level of compliance. If the Subcontractor is no in compliance with the specifications, the Program Directors will notify the Subcontractor in writing of the corrective action that will bring the subcontractor into compliance. If the Subcontractor fails or refuses to take corrective action as directed, the Program Directors may take one or more of the actions listed below: 1) 2) 3)
F.
Terminate or cancel the subcontract in whole, or in part. Remove the Subcontractor from the list of qualified bidders for this project and refuse to accept bids on future phases. Impose other appropriate sanctions.
The Program Directors reserve the right to waive any of these specifications when it is in the best interest of the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Minority Participation Program 00 45 39 – Page 2
SECTION 00 52 00 SUBCONTRACT AGREEMENT
Subcontract Agreement 00 52 00 – Page 1
Subcontract Agreement 00 52 00 – Page 2
Subcontract Agreement 00 52 00 – Page 3
Subcontract Agreement 00 52 00 – Page 4
Subcontract Agreement 00 52 00 – Page 5
Subcontract Agreement 00 52 00 – Page 6
Subcontract Agreement 00 52 00 – Page 7
Subcontract Agreement 00 52 00 – Page 8
Subcontract Agreement 00 52 00 – Page 9
Subcontract Agreement 00 52 00 – Page 10
SECTION 00 52 10 SUBCONTRACT AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT
Subcontract Agreement Attachment 00 52 10 – Page 1
SECTION 00 62 76 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
Application for Payment 00 62 76 – Page 1
Application for Payment 00 62 76 – Page 2
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION AIA DOCUMENT A201, 2007 The “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction”, Pages 1-38, inclusive, AIA Document No. A201 - 2007, as published by the American Institute of Architects, Articles 1-15, inclusive, are hereby made a part of the Contract Documents to the same extent as if bound herein and as supplemented hereinafter. A copy of A201 is on file in Market & Johnson’s office. ***
General Conditions 00 72 00 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (AIA 201 - 2007 Edition). All articles, paragraphs, subparagraphs or clauses not altered by the Supplementary Conditions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS Subarticle 1.2.2, add the following paragraph: 1.2.2.1 It shall, however, assign the divisions and sections of the Work to the various Subcontractor. Work assigned by the Drawings or Specifications to more than one Subcontractor will be deemed to be assigned to each; Market & Johnson, Inc. will determine which Subcontractor shall furnish the Work and will adjust the contract sums accordingly. Subarticle 1.2.3, add the following paragraphs: 1.2.3.1 Directed, Requested, Etc: Where not otherwise explained, terms as “directed”, “requested”, “authorized”, “selected”, “approved”, “required”, “accepted”, and “permitted” mean “directed, by the Architect/Engineer”, “requested by the Architect/Engineer”, and similar phrases, however, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architects/Engineers responsibility into the Contractor’s area of construction supervision. 1.2.3.2 Approve: Where used in conjunction with the Architect’s/Engineer’s response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the contractor, the meaning of the term “approved” will be held to limitations of the Architect’s/Engineer’s responsibilities and duties as specified in General and Supplementary Conditions. In no case will the Architect’s/Engineer’s approval or acceptance be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibilities to contract documents. 1.2.3.3 Furnish and Install: means to provide all labor, materials, insurance, taxes, equipment, etc. to complete the described work, per plans and specifications. 1.2.3.4 Install Only means receive delivery on board, unload, uncrate and install, including all labor, miscellaneous materials, insurance, taxes, and equipment necessary for material supplied by others. This also includes removal of debris generated by materials supplied by others. 1.2.3.5 Furnish Only means deliver, tax and freight includes (FOB job site), materials to the Owner’s facility for installation by others. Delivery shall be made during standard working hours and notification of delivery shall be given to Market & Johnson 72 hours in advance. 1.2.3.6 Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term “provide” means “to furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use”, as applicable in each instance. 1.2.3.7 Maintain: Shall mean to keep in good working order for the duration of the project, or until no longer required, as directed by Market & Johnson. 1.2.3.8 Mechanical: Shall mean plumbing, fire protection, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, electrical, pneumatic tube, sprinkler, elevator, etc. as applicable. Subarticle 1.2, Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents, add the following paragraphs: 1.2.4 The General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and the General Requirements along with other Division 00 and 01 sections shall apply to all sections of the Supplementary General Conditions 00 73 00 – Page 1
Specifications. Sections of Division 01 - General Requirements govern the execution of the work of all sections of the specifications. 1.2.5 The Architect shall furnish additional drawings or explanations as may be required to clarify or illustrate the work to be done, and the Subcontractor shall conform to these additional drawings and explanations as part of the contract so far as consistent with the Drawings and Specifications. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for informing Market & Johnson, in a timely manner, of any additional drawings or explanations required from Market & Johnson for the proper execution of the Work and any associated cost impact within five (5) days of receipt of any project revisions. Requests for additional drawings or explanations shall be submitted in writing. 1.2.6 In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, interpretations will be based on the following priorities: 1. The Agreement. 2. Addenda, with those of later date having precedence over those of earlier date. 3. The Supplementary General Conditions. 4. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 5. The General Requirements of Divisions 00 and 01. 6. The Specifications. 7. The Drawings. 1.2.6.1 In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either document not clarified by Addenda, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided by the Subcontractor or vendor in accordance with Market & Johnson’s interpretation. 1.2.6.2 In the event that work or materials are specified and/or shown on Drawings to be done or provided by more than one Subcontractor, each such Subcontractor will be deemed to have figured the item an Architect will determine who shall furnish work and who shall submit credit to Owner for work. 1.2.6.3 Subcontractor must provide all work and materials which any Section or part of the Plans, Drawings, Project Manual or conditions require him to provide regardless of whether such requirements are faithfully repeated in other parts or sections thereof to which the provision might be appropriate. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR Subarticle 3.4 Labor and Materials, add the following paragraph: 3.4.4 Products, Materials and Equipment: Where products are specified by manufacturer and trade name with no qualifying statement, such products shall be furnished without substitution. Subarticle 3.6 Taxes, add the following paragraph: 3.6.1 If you are a vendor residing in a state other than Wisconsin and deliver goods and materials to our project in Wisconsin and include sales tax in your contract, we must receive your Wisconsin tax identification number before we will pay the sales tax amount to your company. Please note that only Wisconsin state sales tax will be paid. All other state sales tax must be deducted from your contract. This is per the Wisconsin Department of Revenue sales tax division. Invoices not billed in this way will be returned for correction. Subarticle 3.10 Contractor’s Construction Schedules, add the following paragraph: 3.10.1.1 Various Subcontractors will be required to collaborate with Market & Johnson and shall develop a work schedule which integrates all the activities of the Subcontractors and suppliers, and which meets the requirements of the Owner and Architect. The final scheduled sequence of all such activities shall be determined by Market & Johnson. All scheduling information shall be submitted to Market & Johnson within 5 days after requested. Market & Johnson shall provide periodic schedule Supplementary General Conditions 00 73 00 – Page 2
updates throughout the duration of the project. After each schedule update, Subcontractors shall have five (5) working days to respond, in writing, with any proposed corrections/modifications. Failure to do so within the five day period will serve as an implied acceptance of the updated schedule and shall make the Subcontractor and Vendors fully contractually obligated to meet each of the scheduled activity completion dates. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS Subarticle 5.3 Subcontractual Relations, add the following paragraphs: 5.3.1 Whenever possible, to assure the continued availability of materials, parts and components, the Subcontractor shall obtain products from sources which maintain a regular domestic stock. 5.3.2 Employees of the Subcontractor whose work is unsatisfactory to the Owner, Architect, or Market & Johnson, or who are considered to be careless, disrespectful, incompetent, unskilled or otherwise objectionable, shall be dismissed from work immediately upon notice from Market & Johnson. Superintendents and/or Foremen will not be removed from this project unless approved in writing by Market & Johnson. 5.3.3 It shall be the duty of every Subcontractor to enforce among all workers directly or indirectly employed by him all rules which the Owner, Architect and/or Market & Johnson may lay down for conduct of workers on the premises. Add the following subarticle Subarticle 5.5 Owner Direct Purchases 5.5.1 The Owner reserves the right to purchase direct any materials and/or equipment valued at $5,000.00 or greater that will benefit the Owner because of their tax-exempt status or the sequencing and flow of the construction process. Market Materials LLC will purchase these items for re-sale to the Owner on a tax exempt basis. The subcontractor responsible for installing Market Materials, LLC purchased materials as part of their work category shall be fully responsible for submittals, expediting, receiving, inspections, unloading, storage, labor portion of warranties, quantities required, temporary protection and installation of material and/or equipment, and all other requirements of the Specifications. In addition, the Subcontractor responsible for installing Market Materials, LLC purchased materials shall be fully responsible for keeping the material or equipment supplier informed, at all times, of any project revisions which could affect the supplier in any way. The Subcontractor installing the Market Materials, LLC purchased materials and equipment is responsible for full coordination of material and equipment deliveries with suppliers. 5.5.2 Procedures for processing Market Materials, LLC Direct Purchases shall be as follows: 5.5.2.1 At the direction of Market & Johnson, the Subcontractor shall prepare a list of materials or equipment or other items to be purchased tax exempt, including all quantities and description required for developing a purchase order. Subcontractor shall turn this list over to Market & Johnson in a timely fashion. No delays in scheduling will be allowed due to untimely delivery of this list. 5.5.2.2 Items purchased by Market Materials, LLC shall be paid for by Market Materials, LLC, and the cost of these purchases, plus tax, shall be deleted from the Subcontractor’s contract sum. Any additional costs due to changes in item, quantity required, delivery or storage prices shall be borne by the Subcontractor. 5.5.3 Subcontractors shall make their suppliers aware of all Market Materials, LLC direct purchasing requirements, scheduling requirements and all other applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. Any Subcontractor who includes in their bid proposal a material or equipment supplier who later fails to accept all of Market Materials, LLC direct purchasing requirements of these documents shall be fully responsible for any costs incurred by Market Materials, LLC as a result of tax, project delays, or reduced quality. If requested by Market & Johnson, the Supplementary General Conditions 00 73 00 – Page 3
Subcontractor shall provide an alternate supplier who conforms to all requirements of the Contract Documents at no delay or additional expense to Market & Johnson or Market Materials, LLC. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN WORK Subarticle 7.2 Change Orders, add the following paragraph 7.2.2 Subcontractor and Vendor change order amounts shall be limited to the following: 7.2.2.1 Direct cost of materials and trucking directly attributable to the change, plus tax and delivery. 7.2.2.2 Cost of labor directly attributable to the change. Base pay plus employee fringes, payroll taxes and insurance only. 7.2.2.3 Cost of equipment and tools directly attributable to the change. 7.2.2.4 Cost of subcontracts directly attributable to the change. 7.2.3 The change order shall be based on the cost, as stated above, plus a maximum of fifteen percent (15%) for overhead and profit on self-performed labor, material and equipment and seven percent (7%) on sub-subcontracts. Overhead and profit, as stated above, shall include all general administrative expenses, project management, engineering, general supervision, and other labor, materials, and equipment not directly related to the change. 7.2.4 Any change order request from a Market & Johnson Subcontractor or Vendor for a project change, of any kind, initiated by the Owner, Architect, Market & Johnson or another Subcontractor or Vendor must be submitted no later than five (5) working days after notification of such change. A Subcontractor or Vendor failing to meet this time constraint will waive any rights for later claims. Subarticle 7.3 Construction Change Directives, delete Subparagraph 7.3.6 and substitute with the following: 7.3.6 If none of the methods or associated amounts set forth in clauses 7.3.1, 7.3.2 or 7.3.3 are agreed upon by the Owner, the Architect and Market & Johnson prior to the time in which the change must be executed, the Subcontractor shall proceed promptly with the necessary work involved. Any written orders shall only be a directive to proceed with the work and shall not obligate the Owner or Market & Johnson to an associated change order amount until an actual change order for such work has been reviewed and approved by the Owner, Architect and Market & Johnson. 7.3.6.1 The cost of such work shall be determined by the Owner, Architect and Market & Johnson based on the facts and information submitted by the Subcontractor. 7.3.6.2 The method for establishing the change order amount shall not be limited to the methods as outlined in subparagraph 7.3.3. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION Subarticle 9.6.2, add the following paragraph: 9.6.2.1 Payment for invoices relating to Subcontracts and all subsequent Change Orders is contingent upon returning the signed copy of the Subcontract Agreement to Market & Johnson, Inc. 9.6.2.2 Market & Johnson’s pay application form must be used to request payment. Payment requests must be received by Market & Johnson by the 25th of each month in order to be billed in that month’s payment request to the owner. Requests received after the 25th will be billed for the following month therefore paid a month later. Supplementary General Conditions 00 73 00 – Page 4
ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Subarticle 10.3 Hazardous Materials, add the following paragraphs: 10.3.7 In the event the Subcontractor encounters any material on the site reasonably believed to be hazardous, the Subcontractor shall immediately report the condition to Market & Johnson. 10.3.8 “As stated in the outline of the OSHA Standard, a copy of the Subcontractor’s Hazard Communication Program must be located on site prior to starting work. The filing of this program is required whenever laborers/workers are physically working on the project. The Material Safety Data Sheets will be required on any and all materials purchased and used on the project.
ARTICLE 11 – INSURANCE AND BONDS Subarticle 11.1 Contractors Liability Insurance, append and add the following paragraphs: 11.1.2 Contractor’s and subcontractor’s insurance shall be written for the following minimum limits: 11.1.2.1 Workers’ Compensation State: Employer’s Liability
Benefits required by Union labor contracts:
Statutory $100,000 (each accident) $500,000 (disease, policy limit) $100,000 (disease, each employee) As applicable
11.1.2.2 General Liability (including Premises-Operations; Independent Contractor’s Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage): a) Bodily Injury:
$1,000,000 (each occurrence) $2,000,000 (aggregate)
b) Property Damage:
$1,000,000 (each occurrence) $2,000,000 (aggregate)
c) Products and Completed Operations Insurance shall be maintained for a minimum period of one (1) year after final payment and Contractor shall continue to provide evidence of such coverage to Owner on an annual basis during the aforementioned period. d) Property Damage Liability Insurance shall include coverage for the following hazards: X (Explosions) C (Collapse) U (Underground) e) Contractual Liability (Hold Harmless Coverage): Bodily Injury: $1,000,000 (each occurrence) Property Damage: $1,000,000 (each occurrence) $2,000,000 (aggregate) f)
Personal Injury (with employment exclusion deleted, if applicable): $1,000,000 (aggregate)
g) If the General Liability policy includes a General Aggregate, such General Aggregate shall not be less than $2,000,000. Policy shall be endorsed to have General Aggregate apply to this Project only. 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance, add the following: 11.1.3.1 Market & Johnson, Inc. requires that all certificates of insurance specify: Supplementary General Conditions 00 73 00 – Page 5
a) Contractor as a certificate holder with correct mailing address. b) Insured’s name, which must match that on this Agreement. c) Insurance companies affording each coverage, policy number of each coverage, policy dates of each coverage, all coverage’s and limits described herein, and signature of authorized representatives of insurance company. d) Producer of the certificate with correct address and phone number listed. e) Additional insured status required in the Subcontract Agreement. f)
Designated Construction Project(s) Aggregate Limits required in the Subcontract Agreement.
g) Amount of any deductibles and/or retentions. h) Cancellation, non-renewal and material reduction in coverage notification as required by this Agreement. Additionally, the words “endeavor to” and “but failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any kind upon Company, its agents or representatives” shall be deleted from the cancellation provision of the ACORD 25 certificate of insurance form. i)
Primary and non-contributory status required in the Subcontract Agreement.
j)
Waivers of subrogation required in the Subcontract Agreement.
11.1.3.2 Market & Johnson, Inc. further requires that copies of each of the following endorsements shall also be provided in addition to the certificate of insurance. a) General Liability: 1) Additional Insured through a combination of CG 20 10 07 04 and CG 20 37 07 04 or equivalent form, including Primary and Non-Contributory Liability. 2) Designated Construction Project(s) Aggregate Limit CG 25 03 05 09. 3) Notice of Cancellation, Change and Non-renewal. 4) Personal Injury Contractual Liability. 5) Waiver of Subrogation CG 24 04 10 93 b) Auto Liability 1) Cancellation, Change and Non-renewal. 2) Waiver of Subrogation. c) Workers’ Compensation/Employer’s Liability 1) Cancellation, Change and Non-renewal. 2) Waiver of Subrogation. d) Umbrella Liability 1) Confirmation by endorsement of Primary and Non-Contributory coverage. Subarticle 11.4 Performance Bond and Payment Bond, add the following paragraphs: 11.4.3 If requested by Market & Johnson, Subcontractor shall furnish a 100% Performance and Payment Bond and a 100% Labor and Material Bond made in favor of Market & Johnson and for the awarded work categories at the time the subcontract is executed, excluding responsibility for materials purchased directly by the Owner. 11.4.4 Procedure Supplementary General Conditions 00 73 00 – Page 6
11.4.4.1 Subcontractor shall have its surety company execute the performance and payment bonds. 11.4.4.2 The surety on the bonds shall be licensed to do business in the State of Wisconsin. The surety shall be listed by the U.S. Treasury Department as accepted for bonding Federal projects and the bond amount must be within the limit set by the Treasury Department as the maximum amount allowed on any single contract. 11.4.4.3 The surety’s attorney-in-fact signing the bonds shall attach a current and valid certified copy of his power of attorney to each of the bonds. 11.4.4.4 Each bond shall be in a sum equal to 100% of the subcontract price. 11.4.4.5 Each bond shall be dated the same date as the subcontract agreement. 11.4.4.6 The Subcontractor shall return the performance and payment bonds to Market & Johnson. 11.4.4.7 Each Subcontractor shall post the Market & Johnson subcontract number on the upper right hand corner of the Performance Bond and the Labor and Material Payment Bond. ***
Supplementary General Conditions 00 73 00 – Page 7
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 00 73 43 CERTIFICATION OF WAGES Prevailing wage rate determination has been requested from the State of Wisconsin Department of Commerce and is contained in the following pages. Other rules and regulations regarding the payment of prevailing wage rates on public and municipal projects apply to work on this project. Contractors shall contact the Wisconsin Department of Commerce (WDC) to determine the full extent of compliance requirements. All subcontractors performing labor on this project will be required to submit to Market & Johnson’s office the fully completed and executed “Agent or Subcontractor Affidavit of Compliance With Prevailing Wage Rate Determination” (attached) prior to final payment being released.
Certification of Wages 00 73 43 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
State of Wisconsin Department of Workforce Development Equal Rights Division
DEPARTMENTAL ORDER
ISSUE DATE: 7/11/2014 PROJECT: LA CROSSE COUNTY LAKEVIEW HEALTH CENTER WEST SALEM VILLAGE, LA CROSSE COUNTY, WI Determination No. 201402024 [Owner Project No. 13032-2]
PROJECT OWNER: JIM SPEROPULOS, DIRECTOR OF BUILDINGS AND GROUNDS COUNTY OF LA CROSSE 400 4TH STREET NORTH LA CROSSE, WI 54601
REQUESTER: KEVIN RENLEY, VICE PRESIDENT MARKET & JOHNSON, INC. 1652 LAKESHORE DRIVE LA CROSSE, WI 54603
ADDITIONAL CONTACT: NOTE: The Requester must provide a copy of this Project Determination and enclosures to the Project Owner and Additional Contact.
The department received an application for prevailing wage rate determination for the above-captioned project. The department conducted a survey to determine the prevailing wage rate for the trade(s) or occupation(s) needed to complete the project. The survey’s findings appear in the attached project determination. If you believe that the wage rate for any trade or occupation does not accurately reflect the prevailing wage rate in the city, village or town where the project is located, you may ask the department to conduct an administrative review of such wage rate. You must submit this request in writing within 30 days from the date indicated above. Additionally, your request must include wage rate information from at least three similar projects in the city, village or town where the proposed project is located and on which some work has been performed by the contested trade(s) during the current survey period and was previously considered by the department in issuing the attached determination. See DWD 290.10 of the Wisconsin Administrative Code and either s. 66.0903(3)(br), Stats., or s. 103.49(3)(c), Stats., for a complete explanation of the administrative review process. Enclosures
It is hereby ordered that the prevailing wage rates set forth in the attached project determination shall only be applicable to the above referenced project. This order is a FINAL ORDER of the department unless a timely request for an administrative review is filed with the department. ISSUED BY: Equal Rights Division Labor Standards Bureau Construction Wage Standards Section P.O. Box 8928, Madison, WI 53708-8928 (608)266-6861 Web Site: http://dwd.wisconsin.gov/er/
ERD-16866 (R. 06/2013)
PREVAILING WAGE RATE DETERMINATION Issued by the State of Wisconsin Department of Workforce Development Pursuant to s. 66.0903, Wis. Stats. Issued On: 7/11/2014 DETERMINATION NUMBER:
201402024
EXPIRATION DATE:
Prime Contracts MUST Be Awarded or Negotiated On Or Before 1/7/2015. If NOT, You MUST Reapply.
PROJECT NAME:
LA CROSSE COUNTY LAKEVIEW HEALTH CENTER PROJECT NO: 13032-2
PROJECT LOCATION:
WEST SALEM VILLAGE, LA CROSSE COUNTY, WI
CONTRACTING AGENCY:
COUNTY OF LA CROSSE
CLASSIFICATION:
Contractors are responsible for correctly classifying their workers. Either call the Department of Workforce Development (DWD) with trade or classification questions or consult DWD’s Dictionary of Occupational Classifications & Work Descriptions on the DWD website at: dwd.wisconsin.gov/er/prevailing_wage_rate/Dictionary/dictionary_main.htm.
OVERTIME:
Time and one-half must be paid for all hours worked: - over 10 hours per day on prevailing wage projects - over 40 hours per calendar week - Saturday and Sunday - on all of the following holidays: January 1; the last Monday in May; July 4; the 1st Monday in September; the 4th Thursday in November; December 25; - The day before if January 1, July 4 or December 25 falls on a Saturday; - The day following if January 1, July 4 or December 25 falls on a Sunday. Apply the time and one-half overtime calculation to whichever is higher between the Hourly Basic Rate listed on this project determination or the employee's regular hourly rate of pay. Add any applicable Premium or DOT Premium to the Hourly Basic Rate before calculating overtime. A DOT Premium (discussed below) may supersede this time and one-half requirement.
FUTURE INCREASE: When a specific trade or occupation requires a future increase, you MUST add the full hourly increase to the "TOTAL" on the effective date(s) indicated for the specific trade or occupation. PREMIUM PAY:
If indicated for a specific trade or occupation, the full amount of such pay MUST be added to the "HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY" indicated for such trade or occupation, whevenever such pay is applicable.
DOT PREMIUM:
This premium only applies to highway and bridge projects owned by the Wisconsin Department of Transportation and to the project type heading "Airport Pavement or State Highway Construction." DO NOT apply the premium calculation under any other project type on this determination.
APPRENTICES:
Pay apprentices a percentage of the applicable journeyperson's hourly basic rate of pay and hourly fringe benefit contributions specified in this determination. Obtain the appropriate percentage from each apprentice’s contract or indenture.
SUBJOURNEY:
Subjourney wage rates may be available for some of the trades or occupations indicated below with the exception of laborers, truck drivers and heavy equipment operators. Any employer interested in using a subjourney classification on this project MUST complete Form ERD-10880 and request the applicable wage rate from the Department of Workforce Development PRIOR to using the subjourney worker on this project.
Determination No. 201402024
Page 2 of 19
This document MUST BE POSTED by the CONTRACTING AGENCY in at least one conspicuous and easily accessible place on the site of the project . A local governmental unit may post this document at the place normally used to post public notices if there is no common site on the project. This document MUST remain posted during the entire time any worker is employed on the project and MUST be physically incorporated into the specifications and all contracts and subcontracts. If you have any questions, please write to the Equal Rights Division, Labor Standards Bureau, P.O. Box 8928, Madison, Wisconsin 53708 or call (608) 266-6861.
The following statutory provisions apply to local governmental unit projects of public works and are set forth below pursuant to the requirements of s. 66.0903(8), Stats. s. 66.0903 (1) (f) & s. 103.49 (1) (c) "PREVAILING HOURS OF LABOR" for any trade or occupation in any area means 10 hours per day and 40 hours per week and may not include any hours worked on a Saturday or Sunday or on any of the following holidays: 1. January 1. 2. The last Monday in May. 3. July 4. 4. The first Monday in September. 5. The 4th Thursday in November. 6. December 25. 7. The day before if January 1, July 4 or December 25 falls on a Saturday. 8. The day following if January 1, July 4 or December 25 falls on a Sunday. s. 66.0903 (10) RECORDS; INSPECTION; ENFORCEMENT. (a) Each contractor, subcontractor, or contractor's or subcontractor's agent performing work on a project of public works that is subject to this section shall keep full and accurate records clearly indicating the name and trade or occupation of every person performing the work described in sub. (4) and an accurate record of the number of hours worked by each of those persons and the actual wages paid for the hours worked. s. 66.0903 (11) LIABILITY AND PENALTIES. (a) 1. Any contractor, subcontractor, or contractor's or subcontractor's agent who fails to pay the prevailing wage rate determined by the department under sub. (3) or who pays less than 1.5 times the hourly basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of the prevailing hours of labor is liable to any affected employee in the amount of his or her unpaid wages or his or her unpaid overtime compensation and in an additional amount as liquidated damages as provided under subd. 2., 3., whichever is applicable. 2. If the department determines upon inspection under sub. (10) (b) or (c) that a contractor, subcontractor, or contractor's or subcontractor's agent has failed to pay the prevailing wage rate determined by the department under sub. (3) or has paid less than 1.5 times the hourly basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of the prevailing hours of labor, the department shall order the contractor to pay to any affected employee the amount of his or her unpaid wages or his or her unpaid overtime compensation and an additional amount equal to 100 percent of the amount of those unpaid wages or that unpaid overtime compensation as liquidated damages within a period specified by the department in the order. 3. In addition to or in lieu of recovering the liability specified in subd. 1. as provided in subd. 2., any employee for and in behalf of that employee and other employees similarly situated may commence an action to recover that liability in any court of competent jurisdiction. If the court finds that a contractor, subcontractor, or contractor's or subcontractor's agent has failed to pay the prevailing wage rate determined by the department under sub. (3) or has paid less than 1.5 times the hourly basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of the prevailing hours of labor, the court shall order the contractor, subcontractor, or agent to pay to any affected employee the amount of his or her unpaid wages or his or her unpaid overtime compensation and an additional amount equal to 100 percent of the amount of those unpaid wages or that unpaid overtime compensation as liquidated damages. 5. No employee may be a party plaintiff to an action under subd. 3. unless the employee consents in writing to become a party and the consent is filed in the court in which the action is brought. Notwithstanding s. 814.04 (1), the court shall, in addition to any judgment awarded to the plaintiff, allow reasonable attorney fees and costs to be paid by the defendant.
Determination No. 201402024
Page 3 of 19 BUILDING OR HEAVY CONSTRUCTION
Includes sheltered enclosures with walk-in access for the purpose of housing persons, employees, machinery, equipment or supplies and non-sheltered work such as canals, dams, dikes, reservoirs, storage tanks, etc. A sheltered enclosure need not be "habitable" in order to be considered a building. The installation of machinery and/or equipment, both above and below grade level, does not change a project's character as a building. On-site grading, utility work and landscaping are included within this definition. Residential buildings of four (4) stories or less, agricultural buildings, parking lots and driveways are NOT included within this definition.
SKILLED TRADES Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
101
Acoustic Ceiling Tile Installer
30.48
15.90
46.38
102
Boilermaker Future Increase(s): Add $1.50/hr on 1/01/2015; Add $1.50/hr. on 01/01/2016
32.05
28.04
60.09
103
Bricklayer, Blocklayer or Stonemason Premium Increase(s): DOT PREMIUM: Pay two times the hourly basic rate on Sunday, New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day & Christmas Day.
30.28
18.19
48.47
104
Cabinet Installer
30.48
15.90
46.38
105
Carpenter
30.48
15.90
46.38
106
Carpet Layer or Soft Floor Coverer
30.48
15.90
46.38
107
Cement Finisher
26.12
18.68
44.80
108
Drywall Taper or Finisher
29.87
15.09
44.96
109
Electrician
29.13
18.14
47.27
110
Elevator Constructor
42.86
26.33
69.19
111
Fence Erector
15.50
2.15
17.65
112
Fire Sprinkler Fitter
36.07
18.68
54.75
113
Glazier
37.53
14.91
52.44
114
Heat or Frost Insulator
33.68
24.25
57.93
115
Insulator (Batt or Blown)
15.00
9.50
24.50
116
Ironworker
31.25
19.46
50.71
117
Lather
30.48
15.90
46.38
118
Line Constructor (Electrical)
38.25
17.31
55.56
119
Marble Finisher
26.89
18.28
45.17
Determination No. 201402024 Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
Page 4 of 19 HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
120
Marble Mason
30.20
17.49
47.69
121
Metal Building Erector
23.00
0.96
23.96
122
Millwright
32.11
1.28
33.39
123
Overhead Door Installer
20.95
4.94
25.89
124
Painter
28.00
13.30
41.30
125
Pavement Marking Operator
30.00
0.00
30.00
126
Piledriver
30.98
15.90
46.88
127
Pipeline Fuser or Welder (Gas or Utility)
31.82
19.74
51.56
129
Plasterer Premium Increase(s): Employees working on swing scaffolds receive $.25/hr in addition to regular rate.
29.67
17.03
46.70
130
Plumber
33.75
15.97
49.72
132
Refrigeration Mechanic
33.26
16.28
49.54
133
Roofer or Waterproofer
20.53
10.42
30.95
134
Sheet Metal Worker Future Increase(s): Add $1.30/hr on 6/1/2014; Add $1.30/hr on 6/1/2015.
28.00
19.83
47.83
135
Steamfitter
33.75
15.97
49.72
137
Teledata Technician or Installer
16.50
0.61
17.11
138
Temperature Control Installer
21.00
2.33
23.33
139
Terrazzo Finisher
26.89
18.28
45.17
140
Terrazzo Mechanic
30.20
18.42
48.62
141
Tile Finisher
23.85
17.18
41.03
142
Tile Setter
31.34
17.04
48.38
143
Tuckpointer, Caulker or Cleaner
31.34
16.35
47.69
144
Underwater Diver (Except on Great Lakes)
34.48
15.90
50.38
146
Well Driller or Pump Installer
25.32
15.65
40.97
147
Siding Installer
25.92
18.04
43.96
150
Heavy Equipment Operator - ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCTION ONLY
29.16
14.34
43.50
151
Light Equipment Operator -ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCTION ONLY
30.60
14.86
45.46
152
Heavy Truck Driver - ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCTION ONLY
26.78
13.63
40.41
Determination No. 201402024
Page 5 of 19
Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
153
Light Truck Driver - ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCTION ONLY
24.86
12.97
37.83
154
Groundman - ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCTION ONLY
21.75
12.70
34.45
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
TRUCK DRIVERS Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
201
Single Axle or Two Axle
23.16
21.85
45.01
203
Three or More Axle
20.00
7.20
27.20
204
Articulated, Euclid, Dumptor, Off Road Material Hauler
22.00
1.46
23.46
205
Pavement Marking Vehicle
20.00
7.20
27.20
207
Truck Mechanic
20.00
7.20
27.20
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
LABORERS Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
301
General Laborer Premium Increase(s): Add $1.00/hr for certified welder and pipelayer; Add $.25/hr for mason tender.
24.23
14.61
38.84
302
Asbestos Abatement Worker
24.36
14.75
39.11
303
Landscaper
21.01
9.96
30.97
310
Gas or Utility Pipeline Laborer (Other Than Sewer and Water)
19.69
15.05
34.74
311
Fiber Optic Laborer (Outside, Other Than Concrete Encased)
15.00
4.54
19.54
314
Railroad Track Laborer
17.00
2.12
19.12
315
Final Construction Clean-Up Worker
28.31
16.62
44.93
Determination No. 201402024
Page 6 of 19 HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATORS SITE PREPARATION, UTILITY OR LANDSCAPING WORK ONLY
Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
501
Air Track, Rotary or Percussion Drilling Machine &/or Hammers, Blaster; Asphalt Milling Machine; Boring Machine (Directional, Horizontal or Vertical); Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr's Rated Capacity of 130,000 Lbs. or Over; Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr's Rated Capacity of Under 130,000 Lbs., Backhoe (Mini, 15,000 Lbs. & Under); Bulldozer or Endloader (Over 40 hp); Compactor (Self-Propelled 85 Ft Total Drum Width & Over, or Tractor Mounted, Towed & Light Equipment); Concrete Batch Plant, Batch Hopper; Concrete Breaker (Large, Auto, Vibratory/Sonic, Manual or Remote); Crane, Shovel, Dragline, Clamshells; Forklift (Machinery Moving or Steel Erection, 25 Ft & Over); Gradall (Cruz-Aire Type); Grader or Motor Patrol; Master Mechanic; Mechanic or Welder; Robotic Tool Carrier (With or Without Attachments); Scraper (Self Propelled or Tractor Drawn) 5 cu yds or More Capacity; Tractor or Truck Mounted Hydraulic Backhoe; Tractor or Truck Mounted Hydraulic Crane (10 Tons or Under); Tractor (Scraper, Dozer, Pusher, Loader); Trencher (Wheel Type or Chain Type Having Over 8 Inch Bucket). Future Increase(s): Add $1.05 on 6/2/2014; Add $1.55 on 6/1/2015. Premium Increase(s): Add $.25/hr for operating tower crane.
36.06
19.45
55.51
502
Backfiller; Broom or Sweeper; Bulldozer or Endloader (Under 40 hp); Environmental Burner; Forestry Equipment, Timbco, Tree Shear, Tub Grinder, Processor; Jeep Digger; Screed (Milling Machine); Skid Rig; Straddle Carrier or Travel Lift; Stump Chipper; Trencher (Wheel Type or Chain Type Having 8 Inch Bucket & Under).
32.39
18.78
51.17
503
Air Compressor (&/or 400 CFM or Over); Augers (Vertical & Horizontal); Compactor (Self-Propelled 84 Ft Total Drum Width & Under, or Tractor Mounted, Towed & Light Equipment); Crusher, Screening or Wash Plant; Farm or Industrial Type Tractor; Forklift; Generator (&/or 150 KW or Over); Greaser; High Pressure Utility Locating Machine (Daylighting Machine); Mulcher; Oiler; Post Hole Digger or Driver; Pump (3 Inch or Over) or Well Points; Refrigeration Plant or Freeze Machine; Rock, Stone Breaker; Skid Steer Loader (With or Without Attachments); Vibratory Hammer or Extractor, Power Pack.
34.41
3.14
37.55
504
Work Performed on the Great Lakes Including Diver; Wet Tender or Hydraulic Dredge Engineer.
38.80
20.17
58.97
505
Work Performed on the Great Lakes Including Crane or Backhoe Operator; Assistant Hydraulic Dredge Engineer; Hydraulic Dredge Leverman or Diver's Tender; Mechanic or Welder; 70 Ton & Over Tug Operator. Premium Increase(s): Add $.50/hr for Friction Crane, Lattice Boom or Crane Certification (CCO).
41.65
21.71
63.36
Determination No. 201402024 Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
Page 7 of 19 HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
506
Work Performed on the Great Lakes Including Deck Equipment Operator or Machineryman (Maintains Cranes Over 50 Tons or Backhoes 115,000 Lbs. or More); Tug, Launch or Loader, Dozer or Like Equipment When Operated on a Barge, Breakwater Wall, Slip, Dock or Scow, Deck Machinery.
37.10
21.57
58.67
507
Work Performed on the Great Lakes Including Deck Equipment Operator, Machineryman or Fireman (Operates 4 Units or More or Maintains Cranes 50 Tons or Under or Backhoes 115,000 Lbs. or Under); Deck Hand, Deck Engineer or Assistant Tug Operator; Off Road Trucks - Great Lakes ONLY.
34.50
20.04
54.54
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATORS EXCLUDING SITE PREPARATION, UTILITY, PAVING LANDSCAPING WORK Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
508
Boring Machine (Directional); Crane, Tower Crane, Pedestal Tower or Derrick, With or Without Attachments, With a Lifting Capacity of Over 100 Tons, Self-Erecting Tower Crane With a Lifting Capacity of Over 4,000 Lbs., Crane With Boom Dollies; Crane, Tower Crane, Pedestal Tower or Derrick, With Boom, Leads &/or Jib Lengths Measuring 176 Ft or Over; Master Mechanic. Premium Increase(s): Add $.50/hr for >200 Ton / Add $1/hr at 300 Ton / Add $1.50/hr at 400 Ton / Add $2/hr at 500 Ton & Over.
35.62
18.96
54.58
509
Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr's Rated Capacity of 130,000 Lbs. or Over; Boring Machine (Horizontal or Vertical); Caisson Rig; Crane, Tower Crane, Portable Tower, Pedestal Tower or Derrick, With or Without Attachments, With a Lifting Capacity of 100 Tons or Under, Self-Erecting Tower Crane With A Lifting Capacity Of 4,000 Lbs. & Under; Crane, Tower Crane, Portable Tower, Pedestal Tower or Derrick, With Boom, Leads &/or Jib Lengths Measuring 175 Ft or Under; Pile Driver; Versi Lifts, Tri-Lifts & Gantrys (20,000 Lbs. & Over). Premium Increase(s): Add $.25/hr for all >45 Ton lifting capacity cranes
34.62
18.96
53.58
510
Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr.'s Rated Capacity of Under 130,000 Lbs., Backhoe (Mini, 15,000 Lbs. & Under); Concrete Bump Cutter, Grinder, Planing or Grooving Machine; Concrete Laser/Screed; Concrete Paver (Slipform); Concrete Pump (Over 46 Meter), Concrete Conveyor (Rotec or Bidwell Type); Concrete Slipform Placer Curb & Gutter Machine; Concrete Spreader & Distributor; Dredge (NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Forklift (Machinery Moving or Steel Erection, 25 Ft & Over); Gradall (Cruz-Aire Type); Hydro-Blaster (10,000 PSI or Over); Milling Machine; Skid Rig; Traveling Crane (Bridge Type).
33.42
18.96
52.38
Determination No. 201402024 Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
Page 8 of 19 HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
511
Air, Track, Rotary or Percussion Drilling Machine &/or Hammers, Blaster; Bulldozer or Endloader (Over 40 hp); Compactor (Self-Propelled 85 Ft Total Drum Width & Over, or Tractor Mounted, Towed & Light Equipment); Concrete Pump (46 Meter & Under), Concrete Conveyor (Rotec or Bidwell Type); Crane (Carry Deck, Mini) or Truck Mounted Hydraulic Crane (10 Tons or Under); Environmental Burner; Gantrys (Under 20,000 Lbs.); Grader or Motor Patrol; High Pressure Utility Locating Machine (Daylighting Machine); Manhoist; Material or Stack Hoist; Mechanic or Welder; Railroad Track Rail Leveling Machine, Tie Placer, Extractor, Tamper, Stone Leveler or Rehabilitation Equipment; Roller (Over 5 Ton); Scraper (Self Propelled or Tractor Drawn) 5 cu yd or More Capacity; Screed (Milling Machine); Sideboom; Straddle Carrier or Travel Lift; Tining or Curing Machine; Tractor (Scraper, Dozer, Pusher, Loader); Tractor or Truck Mounted Hydraulic Backhoe; Tractor or Truck Mounted Hydraulic Crane (10 Tons or Under); Trencher (Wheel Type or Chain Type Having Over 8-Inch Bucket).
32.89
18.96
51.85
512
Backfiller; Broom or Sweeper; Bulldozer or Endloader (Under 40 hp); Compactor (Self-Propelled 84 Ft Total Drum Width & Under, or Tractor Mounted, Towed & Light Equipment); Concrete Batch Plant, Batch Hopper; Concrete Breaker (Large, Auto, Vibratory/Sonic, Manual or Remote); Concrete Conveyor System; Concrete Finishing Machine (Road Type); Fireman (Pile Driver & Derrick NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Grout Pump; Hoist (Tugger, Automatic); Industrial Locomotives; Jeep Digger; Lift Slab Machine; Mulcher; Roller (Rubber Tire, 5 Ton or Under); Screw or Gypsum Pumps; Stabilizing or Concrete Mixer (Self-Propelled or 14S or Over); Stump Chipper; Trencher (Wheel Type or Chain Type Having 8-Inch Bucket & Under); Winches & A-Frames.
30.82
18.96
49.78
513
Air Compressor (&/or 400 CFM or Over); Air, Electric or Hydraulic Jacking System; Augers (Vertical & Horizontal); Boatmen (NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Boiler (Temporary Heat); Crusher, Screening or Wash Plant; Elevator; Farm or Industrial Type Tractor; Fireman (Asphalt Plant NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Forklift; Generator (&/or 150 KW or Over); Greaser; Heaters (Mechanical); Loading Machine (Conveyor); Oiler; Post Hole Digger or Driver; Prestress Machine; Pump (3 Inch or Over) or Well Points; Refrigeration Plant or Freeze Machine; Robotic Tool Carrier (With or Without Attachments); Rock, Stone Breaker; Skid Steer Loader (With or Without Attachments); Vibratory Hammer or Extractor, Power Pack.
30.19
18.96
49.15
514
Gas or Utility Pipeline, Except Sewer & Water (Primary Equipment).
36.34
21.14
57.48
515
Gas or Utility Pipeline, Except Sewer & Water (Secondary Equipment). Future Increase(s): Add $1.60/hr on 06/01/2014; Add $1.65/hr on 06/01/2015.
32.32
18.55
50.87
516
Fiber Optic Cable Equipment
20.00
8.21
28.21
Determination No. 201402024
Page 9 of 19 SEWER, WATER OR TUNNEL CONSTRUCTION
Includes those projects that primarily involve public sewer or water distribution, transmission or collection systems and related tunnel work (excluding buildings).
SKILLED TRADES Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
103
Bricklayer, Blocklayer or Stonemason Premium Increase(s): DOT PREMIUM: Pay two times the hourly basic rate on Sunday, New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day & Christmas Day.
35.10
18.40
53.50
105
Carpenter Future Increase(s): Add $1.25/hr on 6/2/2014. Premium Increase(s): DOT PREMIUM: Pay two times the hourly basic rate on Sunday, New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day & Christmas Day.
33.68
19.81
53.49
107
Cement Finisher Future Increase(s): Add $1.87 on 6/1/14; Add $1.87 on 6/1/15; Add $1.75 on 6/1/16. Premium Increase(s): DOT PREMIUMS: 1) Pay two times the hourly basic rate on Sunday, New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day & Christmas Day. 2) Add $1.40/hr when the Wisconsin Department of Transportation or responsible governing agency requires that work be performed at night under artificial illumination with traffic control and the work is completed after sunset and before sunrise.
33.51
16.13
49.64
109
Electrician Premium Increase(s): DOT PREMIUM: Pay two times the hourly basic rate on Sunday, New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day & Christmas Day.
32.82
22.61
55.43
111
Fence Erector
15.50
2.15
17.65
116
Ironworker
31.25
19.46
50.71
118
Line Constructor (Electrical)
38.25
17.31
55.56
125
Pavement Marking Operator
16.00
7.35
23.35
126
Piledriver
30.98
15.90
46.88
130
Plumber
33.75
14.07
47.82
135
Steamfitter
33.75
15.97
49.72
137
Teledata Technician or Installer
16.50
0.61
17.11
Determination No. 201402024
Page 10 of 19
Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
143
Tuckpointer, Caulker or Cleaner
31.34
16.35
47.69
144
Underwater Diver (Except on Great Lakes)
38.80
20.17
58.97
146
Well Driller or Pump Installer
25.32
15.65
40.97
150
Heavy Equipment Operator - ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCTION ONLY
29.16
14.34
43.50
151
Light Equipment Operator -ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCTION ONLY
30.60
14.86
45.46
152
Heavy Truck Driver - ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCTION ONLY
26.78
13.63
40.41
153
Light Truck Driver - ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCTION ONLY
24.86
12.97
37.83
154
Groundman - ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCTION ONLY
21.75
12.70
34.45
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
TRUCK DRIVERS Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
201
Single Axle or Two Axle
30.00
15.00
45.00
203
Three or More Axle
16.00
7.35
23.35
204
Articulated, Euclid, Dumptor, Off Road Material Hauler
32.89
18.96
51.85
205
Pavement Marking Vehicle
16.00
7.35
23.35
207
Truck Mechanic
16.00
7.35
23.35
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
LABORERS Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
301
General Laborer Premium Increase(s): Add $1.00/hr for certified welder and pipelayer; Add $.25/hr for mason tender.
24.23
14.61
38.84
303
Landscaper
25.28
11.46
36.74
304
Flagperson or Traffic Control Person
24.70
13.90
38.60
311
Fiber Optic Laborer (Outside, Other Than Concrete Encased)
15.00
4.54
19.54
314
Railroad Track Laborer
17.00
2.12
19.12
Determination No. 201402024
Page 11 of 19 HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATORS SEWER, WATER OR TUNNEL WORK
Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
521
Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr.'s Rated Capacity of 130,000 Lbs. or Over; Caisson Rig; Crane, Tower Crane, Pedestal Tower or Derrick, With Boom, Leads &/or Jib Lengths Measuring 176 Ft or Over; Crane, Tower Crane, Pedestal Tower or Derrick, With or Without Attachments, With a Lifting Capacity of Over 100 Tons, Self-Erecting Tower Crane With a Lifting Capacity Of Over 4,000 Lbs., Crane With Boom Dollies; Master Mechanic; Pile Driver. Future Increase(s): Add $1.05/hr on 6/2/2014; Add $1.55/hr on 6/1/2015. Premium Increase(s): Add $.25/hr for operating tower crane.
36.84
19.45
56.29
522
Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr.'s Rated Capacity of Under 130,000 Lbs., Backhoe (Mini, 15,000 Lbs. & Under); Boring Machine (Directional); Concrete Bump Cutter, Grinder, Planing or Grooving Machine; Concrete Laser/Screed; Concrete Paver (Slipform); Concrete Pump (Over 46 Meter), Concrete Conveyor (Rotec or Bidwell Type); Concrete Spreader & Distributor; Crane, Tower Crane, Portable Tower, Pedestal Tower or Derrick, With Boom, Leads &/or Jib Lengths Measuring 175 Ft or Under; Crane, Tower Crane, Portable Tower, Pedestal Tower or Derrick, With or Without Attachments, With a Lifting Capacity of 100 Tons or Under, Self-Erecting Tower Crane With a Lifting Capacity of 4,000 Lbs. & Under; Dredge (NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Milling Machine; Skid Rig; Telehandler; Traveling Crane (Bridge Type).
33.42
18.96
52.38
523
Air Track, Rotary or Percussion Drilling Machine &/or Hammers, Blaster; Boring Machine (Horizontal or Vertical); Bulldozer or Endloader (Over 40 hp); Crane (Carry Deck, Mini) or Truck Mounted Hydraulic Crane (10 Tons or Under); Concrete Pump (46 Meter & Under), Concrete Conveyor (Rotec or Bidwell Type); Concrete Slipform Placer Curb & Gutter Machine; Gradall (Cruz-Aire Type); Grader or Motor Patrol; Hydro-Blaster (10,000 PSI or Over); Manhoist; Material or Stack Hoist; Mechanic or Welder; Roller (Over 5 Ton); Scraper (Self Propelled or Tractor Drawn) 5 cu yd or More Capacity; Screed (Milling Machine); Sideboom; Straddle Carrier or Travel Lift; Tractor (Scraper, Dozer, Pusher, Loader); Tractor or Truck Mounted Hydraulic Backhoe; Tractor or Truck Mounted Hydraulic Crane (10 Tons or Under); Trencher (Wheel Type or Chain Type Having Over 8-Inch Bucket).
32.39
19.28
51.67
Determination No. 201402024 Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
Page 12 of 19 HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
524
Backfiller; Broom or Sweeper; Bulldozer or Endloader (Under 40 hp); Compactor (Self-Propelled 85 Ft Total Drum Width & Over, or Tractor Mounted, Towed & Light Equipment); Concrete Batch Plant, Batch Hopper; Concrete Breaker (Large, Auto, Vibratory/Sonic, Manual or Remote); Concrete Conveyor System; Concrete Finishing Machine (Road Type); Environmental Burner; Fireman (Pile Driver & Derrick NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Forestry Equipment, Timbco, Tree Shear, Tub Grinder, Processor; Hoist (Tugger, Automatic); Grout Pump; Jeep Digger; Lift Slab Machine; Mulcher; Power Subgrader; Pump (3 Inch or Over) or Well Points; Robotic Tool Carrier (With or Without Attachments); Roller (Rubber Tire, 5 Ton or Under); Screw or Gypsum Pumps; Stabilizing or Concrete Mixer (Self-Propelled or 14S or Over); Stump Chipper; Tining or Curing Machine; Trencher (Wheel Type or Chain Type Having 8-Inch Bucket & Under); Winches & A-Frames. Future Increase(s): Add $1.05/hr on 6/2/2014; Add $1.55/hr on 6/1/2015. Premium Increase(s): Add $.25/hr for operating tower crane.
35.11
19.45
54.56
525
Air Compressor (&/or 400 CFM or Over); Air, Electric or Hydraulic Jacking System; Augers (Vertical & Horizontal); Compactor (Self-Propelled 84 Ft Total Drum Width & Under, or Tractor Mounted, Towed & Light Equipment); Crusher, Screening or Wash Plant; Farm or Industrial Type Tractor; Fireman (Asphalt Plant NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Generator (&/or 150 KW or Over); Heaters (Mechanical); High Pressure Utility Locating Machine (Daylighting Machine); Loading Machine (Conveyor); Post Hole Digger or Driver; Refrigeration Plant or Freeze Machine; Rock, Stone Breaker; Skid Steer Loader (With or Without Attachments); Vibratory Hammer or Extractor, Power Pack.
30.19
20.94
51.13
526
Boiler (Temporary Heat); Forklift; Greaser; Oiler.
29.69
18.46
48.15
527
Work Performed on the Great Lakes Including Diver; Wet Tender or Hydraulic Dredge Engineer.
38.80
20.17
58.97
528
Work Performed on the Great Lakes Including 70 Ton & Over Tug Operator; Assistant Hydraulic Dredge Engineer; Crane or Backhoe Operator; Hydraulic Dredge Leverman or Diver's Tender; Mechanic or Welder.
38.80
20.17
58.97
529
Work Performed on the Great Lakes Including Deck Equipment Operator or Machineryman (Maintains Cranes Over 50 Tons or Backhoes 115,000 Lbs. or More); Tug, Launch or Loader, Dozer or Like Equipment When Operated on a Barge, Breakwater Wall, Slip, Dock or Scow, Deck Machinery.
34.50
20.04
54.54
530
Work Performed on the Great Lakes Including Deck Equipment Operator; Machineryman or Fireman (Operates 4 Units or More or Maintains Cranes 50 Tons or Under or Backhoes 115,000 Lbs. or Under), Deck Hand, Deck Engineer or Assistant Tug Operator; Off Road Trucks - Great Lakes ONLY.
34.50
20.04
54.54
Determination No. 201402024
Page 13 of 19
LOCAL STREET OR MISCELLANEOUS PAVING CONSTRUCTION Includes roads, streets, alleys, trails, bridges, paths, racetracks, parking lots and driveways (except residential or agricultural), public sidewalks or other similar projects (excluding projects awarded by the Wisconsin Department of Transportation).
SKILLED TRADES Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
103
Bricklayer, Blocklayer or Stonemason
30.20
17.49
47.69
105
Carpenter
30.48
5.90
36.38
107
Cement Finisher
31.52
2.36
33.88
109
Electrician
31.27
22.81
54.08
111
Fence Erector
15.50
2.15
17.65
116
Ironworker
31.25
19.46
50.71
118
Line Constructor (Electrical)
38.25
17.31
55.56
124
Painter
28.00
13.30
41.30
125
Pavement Marking Operator
30.00
0.00
30.00
126
Piledriver
30.98
15.90
46.88
133
Roofer or Waterproofer
20.53
10.42
30.95
137
Teledata Technician or Installer
16.50
0.61
17.11
143
Tuckpointer, Caulker or Cleaner
31.34
16.35
47.69
144
Underwater Diver (Except on Great Lakes)
38.80
20.17
58.97
150
Heavy Equipment Operator - ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCTION ONLY
34.43
15.24
49.67
151
Light Equipment Operator -ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCTION ONLY
30.60
14.86
45.46
152
Heavy Truck Driver - ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCTION ONLY
26.78
13.63
40.41
153
Light Truck Driver - ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCTION ONLY
24.86
12.97
37.83
154
Groundman - ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCTION ONLY
21.75
12.70
34.45
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
15.00
45.00
TRUCK DRIVERS Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
201
Single Axle or Two Axle
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $ 30.00
Determination No. 201402024
Page 14 of 19
Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
203
Three or More Axle
14.75
1.41
16.16
204
Articulated, Euclid, Dumptor, Off Road Material Hauler
32.89
18.96
51.85
205
Pavement Marking Vehicle
14.75
1.41
16.16
206
Shadow or Pilot Vehicle
30.00
15.00
45.00
207
Truck Mechanic
14.75
1.41
16.16
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
LABORERS Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
301
General Laborer
26.34
13.90
40.24
303
Landscaper Future Increase(s): Add $1.60/hr on 6/1/14. Premium Increase(s): DOT PREMIUMS: 1) Pay two times the hourly basic rate on Sunday, New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day & Christmas Day. 2) Add $1.25/hr for work on projects involving temporary traffic control setup, for lane and shoulder closures, when work under artificial illumination conditions is necessary as required by the project provisions (including prep time prior to and/or cleanup after such time period).
29.04
14.63
43.67
304
Flagperson or Traffic Control Person Future Increase(s): Add $1.60/hr on 6/1/2014. Premium Increase(s): DOT PREMIUMS: 1) Pay two times the hourly basic rate on Sunday, New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day & Christmas Day. 2) Add $1.25/hr when the Wisconsin Department of Transportation or responsible governing agency requires that work be performed at night under artificial illumination with traffic control and the work is completed after sunset and before sunrise.
25.67
14.63
40.30
311
Fiber Optic Laborer (Outside, Other Than Concrete Encased)
15.00
4.54
19.54
314
Railroad Track Laborer
17.00
2.12
19.12
Determination No. 201402024
Page 15 of 19 HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATORS CONCRETE PAVEMENT OR BRIDGE WORK
Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
541
Crane, Tower Crane, Pedestal Tower or Derrick, With or Without Attachments, With a Lifting Capacity of Over 100 Tons, Self-Erecting Tower Crane With a Lifting Capacity Of Over 4,000 Lbs., Crane With Boom Dollies; Crane, Tower Crane, Pedestal Tower or Derrick, With Boom, Leads &/or Jib Lengths Measuring 176 Ft or Over; Master Mechanic. Future Increase(s): Add $1.75/hr on 6/1/2014); Add $1.25/hr on 6/1/2015); Add $1.30/hr on 6/1/2016); Add $1.25/hr on 6/1/2017. Premium Increase(s): DOT PREMIUMS: 1) Pay two times the hourly basic rate on Sunday, New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day & Christmas Day. 2) Add $1.50/hr night work premium. See DOT'S website for details about the applicability of this night work premium at: http://www.dot.wi.gov/busine ss/civilrights/laborwages/pwc.htm.
36.72
20.40
57.12
542
Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr.'s Rated Capacity of 130,000 Lbs. or Over; Caisson Rig; Crane, Tower Crane, Portable Tower, Pedestal Tower or Derrick, With or Without Attachments, With a Lifting Capacity of 100 Tons or Under, Self-Erecting Tower Crane With a Lifting Capacity of 4,000 Lbs. & Under; Crane, Tower Crane Portable Tower, Pedestal Tower or Derrick, With Boom, Leads &/or Jib Lengths Measuring 175 Ft or Under; Dredge (NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Licensed Boat Pilot (NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Pile Driver. Future Increase(s): Add $1.75/hr on 6/1/2014); Add $1.25/hr on 6/1/2015); Add $1.30/hr on 6/1/2016); Add $1.25/hr on 6/1/2017. Premium Increase(s): DOT PREMIUMS: 1) Pay two times the hourly basic rate on Sunday, New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day & Christmas Day. 2) Add $1.50/hr night work premium. See DOT'S website for details about the applicability of this night work premium at: http://www.dot.wi.gov/busine ss/civilrights/laborwages/pwc.htm.
36.22
20.40
56.62
Determination No. 201402024 Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
Page 16 of 19 HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
543
Air Track, Rotary or Percussion Drilling Machine &/or Hammers, Blaster; Automatic Subgrader (Concrete); Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr.'s Rated Capacity of Under 130,000 Lbs., Backhoe (Mini, 15,000 Lbs. & Under); Boring Machine (Directional, Horizontal or Vertical); Bridge (Bidwell) Paver; Bulldozer or Endloader; Concrete Batch Plant, Batch Hopper; Concrete Breaker (Large, Auto, Vibratory/Sonic, Manual or Remote); Concrete Bump Cutter, Grinder, Planing or Grooving Machine; Concrete Conveyor System; Concrete Laser/Screed; Concrete Paver (Slipform); Concrete Pump, Concrete Conveyor (Rotec or Bidwell Type); Concrete Slipform Placer Curb & Gutter Machine; Concrete Spreader & Distributor; Crane (Carry Deck, Mini) or Truck Mounted Hydraulic Crane (10 Tons or Under); Crane With a Lifting Capacity of 25 Tons or Under; Forestry Equipment, Timbco, Tree Shear, Tub Grinder, Processor; Gradall (Cruz-Aire Type); Grader or Motor Patrol; Grout Pump; Hydro-Blaster (10,000 PSI or Over); Loading Machine (Conveyor); Manhoist; Material or Stack Hoist; Mechanic or Welder; Milling Machine; Post Hole Digger or Driver; Scraper (Self Propelled or Tractor Drawn) 5 cu yds or More Capacity; Shoulder Widener; Sideboom; Skid Rig; Stabilizing or Concrete Mixer (Self-Propelled or 14S or Over); Straddle Carrier or Travel Lift; Tractor (Scraper, Dozer, Pusher, Loader); Tractor or Truck Mounted Hydraulic Backhoe; Trencher (Wheel Type or Chain Type); Tube Finisher; Tugger (NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Winches & A-Frames. Future Increase(s): Add $1.75/hr on 6/1/2014); Add $1.25/hr on 6/1/2015); Add $1.30/hr on 6/1/2016); Add $1.25/hr on 6/1/2017. Premium Increase(s): DOT PREMIUMS: 1) Pay two times the hourly basic rate on Sunday, New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day & Christmas Day. 2) Add $1.50/hr night work premium. See DOT'S website for details about the applicability of this night work premium at: http://www.dot.wi.gov/busine ss/civilrights/laborwages/pwc.htm.
35.72
20.40
56.12
544
Backfiller; Belting, Burlap, Texturing Machine; Broom or Sweeper; Compactor (Self-Propelled or Tractor Mounted, Towed & Light Equipment); Concrete Finishing Machine (Road Type); Environmental Burner; Farm or Industrial Type Tractor; Fireman (Pile Driver & Derrick NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Forklift; Greaser; Jeep Digger; Joint Sawer (Multiple Blade); Launch (NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Lift Slab Machine; Mechanical Float; Mulcher; Power Subgrader; Robotic Tool Carrier (WIth or Without Attachments); Self Propelled Chip Spreader; Shouldering Machine; Skid Steer Loader (With or Without Attachments); Telehandler; Tining or Curing Machine.
30.19
18.96
49.15
545
Air Compressor (&/or 400 CFM or Over); Air, Electric or Hydraulic Jacking System; Automatic Belt Conveyor & Surge Bin; Boiler (Temporary Heat); Concrete Proportioning Plant; Crusher, Screening or Wash Plant; Generator (&/or 150 KW or Over); Heaters (Mechanical); High Pressure Utility Locating Machine (Daylighting Machine); Mudjack; Oiler; Prestress Machine; Pug Mill; Pump (3 Inch or Over) or Well Points; Rock, Stone Breaker; Screed (Milling Machine); Stump Chipper; Tank Car Heaters; Vibratory Hammer or Extractor, Power Pack.
34.41
3.14
37.55
546
Fiber Optic Cable Equipment.
20.00
8.21
28.21
Determination No. 201402024
Page 17 of 19
Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
547
Work Performed on the Great Lakes Including Diver; Wet Tender or Hydraulic Dredge Engineer.
38.80
20.17
58.97
548
Work Performed on the Great Lakes Including 70 Ton & Over Tug Operator; Assistant Hydraulic Dredge Engineer; Crane or Backhoe Operator; Hydraulic Dredge Leverman or Diver's Tender; Mechanic or Welder.
38.80
20.17
58.97
549
Work Performed on the Great Lakes Including Deck Equipment Operator or Machineryman (Maintains Cranes Over 50 Tons or Backhoes 115,000 Lbs. or more); Tug, Launch or Loader, Dozer or Like Equipment When Operated on a Barge, Breakwater Wall, Slip, Dock or Scow, Deck Machinery.
34.50
20.04
54.54
550
Work Performed on the Great Lakes Including Deck Equipment Operator; Machineryman or Fireman (Operates 4 Units or More or Maintains Cranes 50 Tons or Under or Backhoes 115,000 Lbs. or Under); Deck Hand, Deck Engineer or Assistant Tug Operator; Off Road Trucks - Great Lakes ONLY.
34.50
20.04
54.54
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATORS ASPHALT PAVEMENT OR OTHER WORK Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
551
Crane, Tower Crane, Pedestal Tower or Derrick, With or Without Attachments, With a Lifting Capacity of Over 100 Tons, Self Erecting Tower Crane With a Lifting Capacity of Over 4,000 Lbs., Crane With Boom Dollies; Crane, Tower Crane, Pedestal Tower or Derrick, With Boom, Leads and/or Jib Lengths Measuring 176 Ft or Over; Master Mechanic.
35.12
18.46
53.58
552
Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr.'s Rated Capacity of 130,000 Lbs. or Over; Caisson Rig; Crane, Tower Crane, Portable Tower, Pedestal Tower or Derrick, With or Without Attachments, With a Lifting Capacity of 100 Tons or Under, Self-Erecting Tower Crane With a Lifting Capacity Of 4,000 Lbs. & Under; Crane, Tower Crane, Portable Tower, Pedestal Tower or Derrick, With Boom, Leads &/or Jib Lengths Measuring 175 Ft or Under; Dredge (NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Licensed Boat Pilot (NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Pile Driver. Future Increase(s): Add $1.75/hr on 6/1/2014); Add $1.25/hr on 6/1/2015); Add $1.30/hr on 6/1/2016); Add $1.25/hr on 6/1/2017. Premium Increase(s): DOT PREMIUMS: 1) Pay two times the hourly basic rate on Sunday, New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day & Christmas Day. 2) Add $1.50/hr night work premium. See DOT'S website for details about the applicability of this night work premium at: http://www.dot.wi.gov/busine ss/civilrights/laborwages/pwc.htm.
36.22
20.40
56.62
Determination No. 201402024 Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On All Hours Worked
Page 18 of 19 HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY $
HOURLY FRINGE BENEFITS $
TOTAL $
CODE
TRADE OR OCCUPATION
553
Air, Track, Rotary or Percussion Drilling Machine &/or Hammers, Blaster; Asphalt Heater, Planer & Scarifier; Asphalt Milling Machine; Asphalt Screed; Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr.'s Rated Capacity of Under 130,000 Lbs., Backhoe (Mini, 15,000 Lbs. & Under); Bituminous (Asphalt) Plant & Paver, Screed; Boring Machine (Directional, Horizontal or Vertical); Bulldozer or Endloader; Concrete Breaker (Large, Auto, Vibratory/Sonic, Manual or Remote); Concrete Conveyor System; Concrete Laser/Screed; Concrete Slipform Placer Curb & Gutter Machine; Crane (Carry Deck, Mini) or Truck Mounted Hydraulic Crane (10 Tons or Under); Crane With a Lifting Capacity of 25 Tons or Under; Forestry Equipment, Timbco, Tree Shear, Tub Grinder, Processor; Gradall (Cruz-Aire Type); Grader or Motor Patrol; Hydro-Blaster (10,000 PSI or Over); Loading Machine (Conveyor); Manhoist; Material or Stack Hoist; Mechanic or Welder; Milling Machine; Post Hole Digger or Driver; Railroad Track Rail Leveling Machine, Tie Placer, Extractor, Tamper, Stone Leveler or Rehabilitation Equipment; Roller (Over 5 Ton); Scraper (Self Propelled or Tractor Drawn) 5 cu yds or More Capacity; Shoulder Widener; Sideboom; Skid Rig; Stabilizing or Concrete Mixer (Self-Propelled or 14S or Over); Tractor (Scraper, Dozer, Pusher, Loader); Tractor or Truck Mounted Hydraulic Backhoe; Trencher (Wheel Type or Chain Type); Tube Finisher; Tugger (NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Winches & A-Frames.
33.67
19.65
53.32
554
Backfiller; Broom or Sweeper; Compactor (Self-Propelled or Tractor Mounted, Towed & Light Equipment); Concrete Finishing Machine (Road Type); Environmental Burner; Farm or Industrial Type Tractor; Fireman (Asphalt Plant, Pile Driver & Derrick NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Forklift; Greaser; Hoist (Tugger, Automatic); Jeep Digger; Joint Sawer (Multiple Blade); Launch (NOT Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Lift Slab Machine; Mechanical Float; Mulcher; Power Subgrader; Robotic Tool Carrier (With or Without Attachments); Roller (Rubber Tire, 5 Ton or Under); Self-Propelled Chip Spreader; Shouldering Machine; Skid Steer Loader (With or Without Attachments); Telehandler.
33.67
19.65
53.32
555
Air Compressor (&/or 400 CFM or Over); Air, Electric or Hydraulic Jacking System; Augers (Vertical & Horizontal); Automatic Belt Conveyor & Surge Bin; Boiler (Temporary Heat); Crusher, Screening or Wash Plant; Generator (&/or 150 KW or Over); Heaters (Mechanical); High Pressure Utility Locating Machine (Daylighting Machine); Mudjack; Oiler; Prestress Machine; Pug Mill; Pump (3 Inch or Over) or Well Points; Rock, Stone Breaker; Screed (Milling Machine); Stump Chipper; Tank Car Heaters; Vibratory Hammer or Extractor, Power Pack. Future Increase(s): Add $1.75/hr on 6/1/2014); Add $1.25/hr on 6/1/2015); Add $1.30/hr on 6/1/2016); Add $1.25/hr on 6/1/2017. Premium Increase(s): DOT PREMIUMS: 1) Pay two times the hourly basic rate on Sunday, New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day & Christmas Day. 2) Add $1.50/hr night work premium. See DOT'S website for details about the applicability of this night work premium at: http://www.dot.wi.gov/busine ss/civilrights/laborwages/pwc.htm.
35.17
20.40
55.57
556
Fiber Optic Cable Equipment.
20.00
8.21
28.21
Determination No. 201402024
Page 19 of 19
*************************************************************** END OF RATES ***************************************************************
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 10 00 SPECIAL CONDITIONS Index 1. General 2. Protection 3. Roads 4. Use of Site 5. Verification of Anchor Bolt Locations 6. Ventilation
1.
2.
7. 8. 9. 10.
Openings, Embedments, Supports, Blocking, Backing and Grounds Access Panels Demolition Hazardous Materials
General A.
Include all work described in this specification volume to produce the structure and its site appurtenances graphically illustrated on the Contract Drawings.
B.
These Special Conditions are applicable to all Divisions and Sections of the work included herein, and all Subcontractors and Suppliers must abide by the requirements set forth. The Conditions of the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and these Special Conditions shall apply to all Subcontractors and Suppliers engaged in this work.
C.
Each Subcontractor or Material Supplier shall inform himself as to conditions relating to execution of his work. Neglect of this requirement will not be accepted as cause for additional compensation.
D.
The sequence of operations or the place of commencement shall be determined by Market & Johnson as deemed to best serve the needs and convenience of the Owner or as necessity of occasion requires.
Protection Each Subcontractor shall: A.
Notify Market & Johnson of corporate or private property if their property interferes with the work so that arrangements for proper protection can be made.
B.
Provide temporary protection around openings through structural floors and roofs, including elevator openings, stairwells, and edges of slabs.
C.
Repair and replace damaged work. If responsibility cannot be determined, the cost of repair or replacement shall be prorated among Subcontractors on project.
D.
Provide care in work around temporary items installed by Market & Johnson. Subcontractor causing damage shall repair all damage.
E.
Adequately protect surrounding areas and materials, including glass, when welding, flame or abrasive cutting or other operations requiring the use of flame, arcs, or spraying devices that are necessary in the course of the work. Use only flameproof tarpaulins.
F.
WEATHER PROTECTION: Provide protection against rain, snow, wind, ice, storms or heat so as to maintain work, materials, apparatus and fixtures free from injury or damage. At end of day’s work, cover new work likely to be damaged. Remove snow and ice as necessary for safety and proper execution of work.
Special Conditions 01 10 00 – Page 1
G.
WATER PROTECTION: Protect building from damage at all times from rainwater, ground water, backing up drains or sewers or other water. Provide pumps, equipment and enclosures to provide this protection.
H.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED FLOORS: Wheeling loads over a finished floor with or without planks for protection will not be permitted in anything except rubber-tired wheelbarrows, buggies, trucks or dollies. This applies to finished floors and to concrete floors, which are not scheduled to be covered with applied surfacing. Repair of any damages that result will be incurred by the responsible party.
I.
Assume the responsibility for the protection of all finished construction within the limits of this work as well as along designated haul routes and repair and restore any and all damage to finished work to its original state.
J.
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK: Subcontractor shall protect finished floors, stairs, walls, installed products and surfaces from traffic, dust, wear, damage or movement of heavy materials by installing durable sheet materials. 1)
K.
Where responsibility can be fixed, the cost for any corrective work shall be charged to the party responsible. If responsibility cannot be fixed, the cost shall be pro-rated among all Subcontractors in proportion to their activities in the building at the time the damage was done.
Existing Facilities 1) Each Subcontractor shall provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing for existing underground utilities, sewers and building foundations encountered during his/her excavation work, to protect them from collapse or other type of damage until such time as they are to be removed incorporated in the new work, or can be properly backfilled upon completion of new work. 2). Each Subcontractor shall be responsible to provide and maintain protection during site work for all existing lawns, trees, curbs, gutters, drives, walks and buildings not noted for removal.
3.
4.
Roads A.
Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for the necessary cleaning and repairing of adjacent streets resulting from said Subcontractor’s operations.
B.
Entrance and egress routes to and from site will be coordinated by Market & Johnson.
Use of Site Each Subcontractor shall: A.
Confine his equipment, storage of materials and operations of his workmen to limits indicated and shall not bring materials into the site until reasonably required for progress of work. Storage space will be confined to the area of the site or designated storage areas within the facility and as coordinated with Market & Johnson.
B.
Repair damaged areas used for placing of sheds, offices and storage of materials shall be borne by Subcontractor responsible for damage.
C.
Assume full responsibility for damage due to the storing of materials. This also includes Owner purchased materials once they are turned over to the respective Subcontractors for installation. Special Conditions 01 10 00 – Page 2
5.
D.
Not use the Owner’s existing buildings and facilities except as approved by the Owner and Market & Johnson for construction purposes.
E.
Be responsible for the dewatering and keeping their work area dry.
Verification of Anchor Bolt Locations Prior to starting steel erection, the Erection Subcontractor shall verify the dimensional accuracy of all anchor bolt placements. This verification shall be accomplished in time to allow the completion of corrective work without delaying the scheduled erection of structural steel. The Subcontractor who installed the anchor bolts shall be responsible for the cost of corrective work.
6.
Ventilation Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for any ventilation required to complete their work.
7.
Openings, Embedments, Supports, Blocking, Backing and Grounds Each Subcontractor shall:
8.
9.
A.
Be responsible for providing the blocking, backing and grounds in all walls and above ceilings necessary for the installation of his work.
B.
Make suitable preparations for the installation of his work including all piping, conduit, hangers, inserts, anchors, grounds and supports that are to be embedded in concrete, masonry walls, floors, partitions or structural members, or that are to pass through or be attached thereto. Each Subcontractor shall provide and install proper sleeves, boxes, receptacles or chases for all openings or recesses to receive his work occurring in or passing through any such members, all of which shall be located accurately and secured firmly in place before any such masonry has been erected or concrete poured.
C.
Furnish and install all anchors, clips, blocking, sleeves, connections, etc., required for attachment of his/her work to the structure.
Access Panels A.
Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for furnishing the necessary access panels for items of work installed under his/her Subcontract.
B.
Installation of all access panels shall be the responsibility of the Subcontractor erecting the wall or ceiling system.
C.
If not specified, these access panels shall be approved by the Architect prior to installation.
Demolition A.
Rubbish and recycling dumpsters will be provided by Market & Johnson throughout the duration of the project.
B.
The demolition, removal and off-site disposal of all existing buildings (or portions thereof), canopies, retaining walls, pavements, walks and curbs shall be the responsibility of Market & Johnson. The use of a “headache ball” is not permitted. Market & Johnson shall be responsible for providing and maintaining temporary protection of all adjacent property.
C.
The removal and off-site disposal of all existing roofing, insulation and sheet metal required to complete the new construction shall be the responsibility of demolition Subcontractor. Special Conditions 01 10 00 – Page 3
10.
D.
The disconnecting, capping, removal, and disposal of all plumbing fixtures, equipment, piping, and supports shall be the responsibility of the plumbing Subcontractor.
E.
The disconnecting, capping, removal and disposal of all HVAC equipment piping, ductwork, and supports shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Subcontractor.
F.
The disconnecting, capping, removal, Fire Protection equipment, piping, and supports shall be the responsibility of the fire protection Subcontractor.
G.
The disconnecting, capping, electrical equipment, piping, conduit and supports shall be the responsibility of the electrical Subcontractor
H.
All other demolition, removals and disposal, including but not limited to existing doors, windows, borrowed lights, louvers, flooring, ceilings, and partitions, shall be the responsibility of the Subcontractor who is awarded the work. They shall provide and maintain the necessary rubbish removal procedures to facilitate these removals from the existing building. They shall exercise caution to avoid disrupting surrounding surfaces not scheduled for demolition.
I.
All materials and equipment obtained from the demolition operations shall belong to the Subcontractor performing the demolition unless Market & Johnson notifies Subcontractor prior to their removing such material. This material shall then be stored by the Subcontractor at an area designated by Market & Johnson.
Hazardous Materials A.
If hazardous materials are discovered in the execution of work, the following steps are required: 1)
Stop work immediately in the area where hazardous material is found.
2)
Notify Market & Johnson immediately.
***
Special Conditions 01 10 00 – Page 4
SECTION 01 14 00 USE OF THE PREMISES 1.
Description A.
Work Included: This section applies to situations in which the Subcontractor or his/her representatives including, but not limited to Suppliers, Subcontractors, Employees, and Field Engineers, enter the Owner’s property.
B.
Related work: 1)
2.
Site A.
Truck and equipment access: 1)
B.
C.
Must be coordinated with Market & Johnson.
Parking: 1)
Must be coordinated with Market & Johnson and will not necessarily be on site.
Subcontractor’s vehicles: 1)
3.
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 01 of these Specifications.
Must be coordinated with Market & Johnson and will not necessarily be on site.
Facilities A.
Construction personnel will not be allowed to use the Owner’s lunch area, or toilet facilities.
END OF SECTION
Use of Premises 01 14 00 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 14 19 TOBACCO AND ALCOHOL 1.
2.
Description A.
No tobacco of any kind will be permitted on the project site. There are no exceptions to this rule. Any worker found with tobacco on the project site may be permanently removed from the project at the sole discretion of Market & Johnson.
B.
No alcohol of any kind will be permitted to be present on the project site. There are no exceptions to this rule. Any worker found with possession of alcohol or having alcohol present within their vehicle that is parked on the project site may be permanently removed from the project at the sole discretion of Market & Johnson.
C.
Non-prescription drugs are not allowed on this project site. There are no exceptions to this rule. Any worker found in violation of this rule may be permanently removed from the project site at the sole discretion of Market & Johnson.
Warnings A.
Any person work for Market & Johnson, or any subcontractor thereof, observed by Market & Johnson as being in violation will receive a verbal warning for the first offense and will be asked to leave the project for the second offense. Market & Johnson’s Project Superintendent has the authority to ask the offender to leave the project upon the second offense.
B.
The worker may be able to return only after attending a meeting with his/her direct supervisor; the Owner; and Market & Johnson’s Project Manager and Project Superintendent, to state why he/she should be permitted to return to the project.
END OF SECTION
Tobacco and Alcohol 01 14 19 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 14 19 TOBACCO, ALCOHOL AND FIREARMS 1.
2.
Description A.
No tobacco of any kind will be permitted on the project site. There are no exceptions to this rule. Any worker found with tobacco on the project site may be permanently removed from the project at the sole discretion of Market & Johnson.
B.
No alcohol of any kind will be permitted to be present on the project site. There are no exceptions to this rule. Any worker found with possession of alcohol or having alcohol present within their vehicle that is parked on the project site may be permanently removed from the project at the sole discretion of Market & Johnson.
C.
No firearms of any kind are allowed to be present on the project site. There are no exceptions to this rule. Any worker found with possession of any type of firearm or having any firearm present within their vehicle that is parked on the project site may be permanently removed from the project at the sole discretion of Market & Johnson.
D.
Non-prescription drugs are not allowed on this project site. There are no exceptions to this rule. Any worker found in violation of this rule may be permanently removed from the project site at the sole discretion of Market & Johnson.
Warnings A.
Any person work for Market & Johnson, or any subcontractor thereof, observed by Market & Johnson as being in violation will receive a verbal warning for the first offense and will be asked to leave the project for the second offense. Market & Johnson’s Project Superintendent has the authority to ask the offender to leave the project upon the second offense.
B.
The worker may be able to return only after attending a meeting with his/her direct supervisor; the Owner; and Market & Johnson’s Project Manager and Project Superintendent, to state why he/she should be permitted to return to the project.
END OF SECTION
Tobacco, Alcohol and Firearms 01 14 19 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 21 13 ALLOWANCES 1.
Description A.
Work Included: To provide adequate budget and bonding to cover items not precisely determined by the Owner prior to bidding, allow within the proposed contract sum the amounts described below:
B.
Related Work:
C.
1)
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 01 of these Specifications.
2)
Other provisions concerning allowances also may be stated in other sections of these specifications.
Allowances are as follows: None
END OF SECTION
Allowances 01 21 13 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES PART 1: 1.01
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
A. Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of this Project Manual, apply to the Work of this Section as fully as though repeated herein. B. This Section describes the alternates to the project. Refer to the Product/Execution Articles of the Contract Documents for information pertaining to the work of each alternate. C. Each proposal under an alternate shall include all incidental work and all adjustments necessary to accommodate the changes. All work shall meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. D. Each alternate proposal shall be submitted as an individual cost for the particular alternate and shall be proposed under the premise that no other alternates have been accepted. Should the work of an alternate called for by the Bid Form not affect the cost of the work, "No Change" shall be stated. E. Owner may, at his option, vary the scope of the work by authorizing alternates which will add to the work, deduct from the work or substitute materials, equipment or methods. F. Immediately following Award of Contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates, if any. 1.02
ALTERNATES
A. ADD Alternate No. 1: Heat Stack Recovery The following work shall be priced under Alternate No. 1: State the amount to be added to the base bid to install heat recovery unit in the chilled water and hot water piping systems. B. ADD Alternate No. 2: Humidity Control The following work shall be priced under Alternate No. 2: State the amount to be added to the base bid to install equipment to add humidification to the building. C. ADD Alternate No. 3: LED Light Fixtures The following work shall be priced under Alternate No. 3: State the amount to be added to the base bid to replace the (2) 17 watt fluorescent lamps in all type ‘A’ light fixtures with equivalent light output LED lamps. D. ADD Alternate No. 4: Generator The following work shall be priced under Alternate No. 4: State the amount to be added to the base bid to change generator to an EPA interim tier 4 rating (load shedding and standby power).
13032-2
01 23 00 - 1
E.
ADD Alternate No. 5: Solar Panels The following work shall be priced under Alternate No. 5: State the amount to be added to the base bid to remove solar panel system from existing building and relocate to new building at on grade location (see civil drawings). Work shall include, but not be limited to, tanks, piping and required power connections.
F.
ADD Alternate No. 6: Canopies The following work shall be priced under Alternate No. 7: State the amount to be added to the base bid to construct free standing canopies (not connected to building) at SE corner of Segment C and at the south and east ends of Segments E and F. Work shall include, but not be limited to, all foundations, structure and lighting.
G.
DEDUCT Alternate No. 7: Domestic Water Treatment The following work shall be priced under Alternate No. 8: State the amount to be deducted from the base bid to install a State approved chemical feed chlorine system in lieu of base bid ultraviolet system.
PART 2:
PRODUCTS - Not Used
PART 3:
EXECUTION - Not Used
END OF SECTION 01 23 00
13032-2
01 23 00 - 2
SECTION 01 31 13 COORDINATION 1.
2.
Site and Construction Conditions A.
Information pertaining to preliminary investigations appears on Drawings. While such data has been collected with reasonable care, there is no expressed or implied guarantee that conditions so indicated are entirely representative of those actually existing of that unanticipated developments may not occur. Subcontractor must put his own interpretation on results of such investigation and shall satisfy himself as to materials to be excavated and materials upon which fill or other work may be placed. Where underground services, utilities, structure, etc., are located on drawings or given at site, they are based on available records, but not guaranteed to be complete or correct. They are merely given to assist each Subcontractor in determining location.
B.
The Owner and their representatives reserve the right to enter the property or site on which the work herein described is to be constructed or installed to perform work, as the Owner may desire. Such collateral work will be constructed or installed with as little hindrance or interference as possible. The Subcontractors hereby agree not to interfere with, or prevent the performance of such collateral work authorized by the Owner or to claim any extra compensation or damages by delay or hindrance, which may be caused by such construction or installation of such collateral work.
C.
Prior to starting construction, Market & Johnson, Architect, or his representative shall check existing curb, city walk and access site. Except for work shown to be repaired or replaced as part of contract price, any other work such as curbs, drives, sidewalk that has been damaged by Subcontractor during this project will be replaced at the subcontractor’s expense.
D.
Starting of work by the Subcontractor implies his acceptance of the work by others. Removal and replacement of work applied to defective surfaces in order to correct defects shall be done at the expense of the Subcontractor who applied work to defective surfaces.
E.
Each Subcontractor shall give due notice and proper information to other Subcontractors of any special provisions necessary for the placing and setting of his work coming in contact with work of other Subcontractors. If the Subcontractor fails to give proper notice, they shall be held responsible and shall pay for any and all alterations and repairs necessitated by such neglect.
F.
Subcontractors shall perform work in proper sequence and in relation to that of other Subcontractors and as coordinated by Market & Johnson. Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors shall fit their work into structure as job conditions may demand. Market & Johnson shall make final decisions as to right-of-way and run of pipes, ducts, etc., at regularly prearranged meetings with responsible representatives of Architect and Subcontractors. Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible for that work.
G.
Each Subcontractor shall obtain complete data at the site and inspect surfaces and areas that are to receive his work before proceeding with his work; shall be solely responsible for accuracy of measurement taken, information obtained, layout or due to failure report deficiencies.
H.
Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for any required street cleaning made necessary by their respective firms or their suppliers.
Jurisdiction Disputes A.
Market & Johnson will endeavor to specify the work under the proper headings so that it will relate to the separate construction trades in accordance with accepted jurisdictional rulings. Coordination 01 31 13 – Page 1
However, Market & Johnson shall not be responsible for any differences that may arise due to disputes between the trades in this respect. It shall be the responsibility of the Subcontractor, working with the trades, to determine which of the trades is to perform any particular part of work, and the inclusion of any branch under any particular heading in this specification is not to be construed as a directive in any way. 3.
No Interruption of Occupancy A.
4.
5.
Disruption of Existing Services A.
All work relating to the disruption of existing services shall be coordinated with Market & Johnson and the Owner.
B.
If the Owner should require that a portion of the Work to be performed outside of normal working hours, reimbursement shall be made for premium time expenses only, without markup.
Communications A.
6.
All work requiring interruption of occupancy shall be approved by and coordinated with Market & Johnson and the Owner.
All Subcontractors shall forward all communications to Market & Johnson. Direction given directly to the Subcontractor by the Architect and/or Owner will not be considered binding.
Coordination Drawings A.
Subcontractors responsible for the items of work located in or above ceilings shall participate in preparation of Coordination Drawings if required by Market & Johnson. The following, in descending order, is the precedence assigned the work items for space priority. An exception to the precedence listing would be the gravity flow requirements for plumbing waste and roof drainage. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8)
Recessed light fixtures Pneumatic tube and other record or material conveying systems Ductwork and appurtenances Plumbing waste and roof drainage Fire protection (sprinkler system) HVAC piping Plumbing vent, water and medical gas piping Electrical conduit
B.
After award of contracts and prior to start of construction, Market & Johnson will schedule a meeting with the Subcontractors responsible for the work items listed above. The purpose of the meeting is to introduce the coordination program and to determine its implementation in relation to the progress schedule.
C.
Prior to coordination meeting, the HVAC Subcontractor will provide to Market & Johnson coordination drawings showing column center lines, interior partition locations, and ceiling heights. The HVAC Subcontractor, with reference and consideration to the structural, mechanical, electrical, fire protection, plumbing and reflected ceiling plans, will draw, to scale, his proposed installation showing duct sizes, equipment layouts, and dimensions from column lines and from finished floors to bottom of ducts. Ductwork will be maintained as tight as possible to the underside of floor slabs and/or beams. In congested areas, the HVAC Subcontractor will, in addition, prepare drawings in section view. During this phase of the program, it will be the Electrical Subcontractor’s responsibility to furnish the HVAC Coordination 01 31 13 – Page 2
Subcontractor with recessed lighting installation and clearance requirements. This information will be outlined on the drawings by the HVAC Subcontractor. D.
The ductwork layouts will be produced in sequence as mandated by the project schedule. The earliest area indicated in the schedule will receive the first effort, etc.
E.
When the ductwork drawings for the earliest scheduled area have been completed (time limitation as determined at the initial coordination meeting), the HVAC Subcontractor will provide Market & Johnson with one set of coordination drawings for each participant in the effort. Market & Johnson will distribute the drawing to the participating Subcontractors for their use in drawing thereon the major components for their proposed installations using the general scheme shown on the Contract Drawings as a guide. The major components to be indicated include (but are not limited to): 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
Roof drain leaders Large (3 inches and over) waste piping Sprinkler Mains Heating mains Cooling mains Conveying systems Significant conduit runs Cable trays Duct mains and branches
Information delineated will be distance from column center lines, pipe/equipment size and distance from finished floor to bottom of pipe equipment. F.
Within a period not to exceed one (1) week after distribution of the drawings, Market & Johnson will schedule a meeting with the participating Subcontractors at which time, the drawings will be overlaid to identify areas of conflict. All parties will then cooperate in resolving the conflicts. Records of the agreements will be entered on the HVAC Subcontractor’s drawings, acknowledged by all participants by signature in a space provided for this purpose, and two revised copies distributed to all involved parties. All drawing reproduction costs will be borne by the HVAC Subcontractor. The above drawing, review and coordination process will be repeated until all areas on the Project have been coordinated as determined by Market & Johnson.
G.
In the event a Subcontractor fails to cooperate in the Coordination Program, he will be held responsible for all costs incurred for adjustments to the work of others made necessary to accommodate the uncooperative Subcontractor’s installations.
H.
When a Change Order request is issued, the affected Subcontractors shall review the Coordination Drawings and bring to the attention of Market & Johnson any revisions necessary to the work of others not directly affected by the Change Order.
END OF SECTION
Coordination 01 31 13 – Page 3
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 31 19 MEETINGS 1.
Description A.
2.
Meeting Schedule A.
3.
Work Included: In order to enable orderly review during progress of the work and to provide for systematic discussion of problems, Market & Johnson will conduct project meetings throughout the construction period.
Project meetings will be held at times designated by Market & Johnson. Subcontractors shall attend all project meetings required by Market & Johnson and shall furnish regular progress reports on the work and the status of materials and equipment under their contracts. Subcontractors shall send a representative authorized to make binding decisions on behalf of the Subcontractor’s company to all required meetings.
Pre-construction Meeting A.
B.
A pre-construction meeting, if required, will be scheduled to be held after verbal notice to proceed. 1)
Authorized representatives of the Subcontractor shall attend.
2)
Market & Johnson will advise other interested parties, including the Owner and the Architect, and request their attendance.
Agenda: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 21)
4.
Introductions Roles and Responsibilities / Communication Lines Construction Documents Schedule Contract Agreements Tax Exempt Purchase Billing Instructions Changes in the Work / RFI’s Submittals Color Charges / Samples Safety Jobsite Weekly Cleaning Code Approvals Demolition Items LEED Items “By Owner” Site Visits by A/E Team Record Drawings and Closeout Documents Meetings Testing and Inspections
Weekly Progress Meetings A.
Weekly meetings shall be held at the job site. Market & Johnson shall update the CPM schedule to reflect the current status of the project. During the presentation Market & Johnson will specifically address those critical areas of concern as determined by the schedule update where immediate action by the Subcontractors is required. Meetings 01 31 19 – Page 1
To the maximum extent practical, assign the same person or persons to represent the Subcontractor at project meetings throughout the progress of the work. Subcontractors, material suppliers, and others may be invited to attend those project meetings in which their aspect of the work is involved. B.
Agenda for progress meetings shall be as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13)
C.
6.
Additions/Corrections to Last Meeting Minutes Safety Items Completed in Last 5 Days Items Scheduled for Next 5 Days Schedule Submittals RFI’s PR/Change Order Update Owner Issues A/E Issues Contractor Issues Close-out/Quality Control Issues Next Meeting
Subcontractors shall fill out the “Contractor Weekly Status Report” and turn in to M&J’s project superintendent one day prior to weekly meetings. .
Pre-Installation Meetings A.
Pre-Installation meetings shall be held at the job site for all construction activities with on-site labor and for other activities as deemed necessary by Market & Johnson.
B.
Pre-Installation meetings shall be attended by Market & Johnson Superintendent, Project Manager, the Subcontractor Superintendent and Project Manager and (when appropriate) the Owner and Architect’s representative.
C.
Agenda for Pre-Installation meetings shall be as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)
Introduction Review of specifications Shop Drawings/Samples Schedule and job mobilization Coordination Review anticipated punch list items. Recap
Meetings 01 31 19 – Page 2
Meetings 01 31 19 – Page 3
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 1.
Description A.
B.
C.
Work Included: 1)
To ensure adequate planning and execution of the work so that the work is completed within the number of calendar days allowed in the Contract.
2)
To assist Market & Johnson in appraising the reasonableness of the proposed schedule and in evaluating progress of the work.
3)
To prepare and maintain the schedules and reports described in this section.
Related Work: 1)
Documents affecting work of this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 01 of these Specifications.
2)
Requirements for progress schedule: General Conditions.
3)
Construction Period: Form of Agreement.
Definitions: 1)
2.
“Day,” as used throughout the Contract unless otherwise stated, means “calendar day.”
Scheduling Requirements A.
Market & Johnson shall utilize the CPM Schedule to plan, coordinate, and manage all construction activities of the Subcontractors and suppliers. Subcontractors shall complete their work in accordance with the CPM Schedule and/or current job progress. The project CPM schedule supersedes any bid schedule noted in this section at no cost to Market & Johnson.
B.
Market & Johnson reserves the right to assist the various Subcontractors in the expediting of their material and equipment deliveries without assuming the responsibility for said deliveries. Upon request, the Subcontractors shall furnish copies of their equipment and material purchase orders, including scheduled shipping and receiving dates, to Market & Johnson.
C.
Whenever it becomes apparent from the monthly “updated” schedule that any activity completion date may not be met, the responsible Subcontractors shall take some or all of the following actions at no additional cost to the Owner or Market & Johnson. 1)
Increase construction manpower in such quantities that will substantially eliminate the backlog of work and put the project back on schedule and/or keep up with current job progress.
2)
Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working day, working days per week, or the amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the above which will substantially eliminate the backlog of work and put the project back on schedule and/or keep up with current job progress.
3)
Reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrence of activities to put the project back on schedule and/or deep up with current job progress. Construction Schedules 01 32 16 – Page 1
If a Subcontractor fails to take any of the above actions within forty-eight (48) hours after receiving written notice, Market & Johnson shall take action to attempt to put the project back on schedule and/or keep up with current job progress, and deduct the cost of such actions from the compensation which is or will become due the Subcontractor. D.
See the attached schedule for this project.
END OF SECTION
Construction Schedules 01 32 16 – Page 2
ID
Task Name
Duration
1
Preconstruction Construction Documents completed Bidding period Scope review of bids Mobilize equipment County Board Meeting Approve Bids Site work and Building Structure Strip topsoil and rough grading Site utilities Foundation excavation Form and pour foundations Backfill foundations Underground Plumbing and Electrical Prep and Pour slab on grade Layout and framing of bearing walls Wall sheathing Set roof trusses and bracing Roof sheathing Frame non load bearing walls Site work Finishes Rough grading Grade black dirt around permiter of site Seed around perimeter of site Sidewalks Asphalt paving Final grading Landscaping Exterior Finishes Roofing Windows Siding Fascia and Soffit Gutters and downspouts Interior Work Sprinkler rough‐in Sheetrock lids Plumbing rough‐in for walls Electrical rough‐in for walls HVAC rough‐in Insulation in walls and attic space
45 days Fri 7/4/14 2 days Fri 7/4/14 15 days Fri 7/11/14 Thu 7/31/14 7 days Fri 8/1/14 Mon 8/11/14 4 days Mon 9/1/14 Thu 9/4/14 1 day Thu 8/21/14 Thu 8/21/14 209 days Thu 9/4/14 Tue 6/23/15 25 days Thu 9/4/14 Wed 10/8/14 15 days Fri 9/5/14 Thu 9/25/14 24 days Fri 9/26/14 Wed 10/29/14 31 days Mon 9/29/14 Mon 11/10/14 32 days Mon 10/13/14 Tue 11/25/14 45 days Wed 11/5/14 Tue 1/6/15 38 days Wed 11/5/14 Fri 12/26/14 64 days Wed 11/26/14 Mon 2/23/15 52 days Mon 12/8/14 Tue 2/17/15 56 days Wed 12/24/14 Wed 3/11/15 64 days Fri 1/2/15 Wed 4/1/15 62 days Mon 3/30/15 Tue 6/23/15 105 days Tue 5/12/15 Mon 10/5/15 20 days Tue 5/12/15 Mon 6/8/15 14 days Tue 6/9/15 Fri 6/26/15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 62 65 63 64 66 67 68 69 20 21 25 22 24 23 26 32 31 27 28 29 30
Project: Lakeview Preliminary Sch Date: Tue 6/24/14
10 days 24 days 10 days 12 days 25 days 144 days 46 days 35 days 90 days 80 days 10 days 219 days 75 days 64 days 50 days 60 days 80 days 50 days
Start
Finish
July August SeptembeOctober Novembe December January February March April May June July August SeptembeOctober Novembe Decemb B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E Preconstruction Thu 9/4/14 Mon 7/7/14 Construction Documents completed Bidding period Scope review of bids Mobilize equipment Site work and Building Structure Strip topsoil and rough grading Site utilities Foundation excavation Form and pour foundations Backfill foundations Underground Plumbing and Electrical Prep and Pour slab on grade Layout and framing of bearing walls Wall sheathing Set roof trusses and bracing Roof sheathing Frame non load bearing walls Site work Finishes Rough grading Grade black dirt around permiter of site Seed around perimeter of site
Mon 6/29/15 Fri 7/10/15 Mon 7/6/15 Thu 8/6/15 Fri 8/14/15 Thu 8/27/15 Tue 8/18/15 Wed 9/2/15 Tue 9/1/15 Mon 10/5/15 Tue 1/13/15 Fri 7/31/15 Tue 1/13/15 Tue 3/17/15 Mon 2/2/15 Fri 3/20/15 Fri 3/6/15 Thu 7/9/15 Mon 3/30/15 Fri 7/17/15 Mon 7/20/15 Fri 7/31/15 Mon 2/2/15 Thu 12/3/15 Mon 2/2/15 Fri 5/15/15 Wed 2/11/15 Mon 5/11/15 Fri 2/20/15 Thu 4/30/15 Fri 2/20/15 Thu 5/14/15 Fri 2/20/15 Thu 6/11/15 Fri 3/6/15 Thu 5/14/15
Sidewalks Asphalt paving Final grading Landscaping Exterior Finishes Roofing Windows Siding Fascia and Soffit Gutters and downspouts Interio Sprinkler rough‐in Sheetrock lids Plumbing rough‐in for walls Electrical rough‐in for walls HVAC rough‐in Insulation in walls and attic space
Task
Project Summary
Inactive Milestone
Manual Summary Rollup
Deadline
Split
External Tasks
Inactive Summary
Manual Summary
Progress
Milestone
External Milestone
Manual Task
Start‐only
Summary
Inactive Task
Duration‐only
Finish‐only Page 1
ID 33 34 35 36 37 38 41 42 43 39 40 44 54 55 56 47 50 51 57 48 45 58 49 46 52 53 60 59 61 70 71 72 73 74 75 76
Task Name
Duration
Wood blocking Sheetrock walls Taping sheetrock Painting Electrical devices Ceiling grid Kitchen hoods and walk‐in coolers Cabinets and countertops Sprinkler heads Epoxy flooring Ceramic Tile Wall protection Sheet vinyl flooring in rooms Ceiling tile Finish carpentry work Lights, diffusers, grilles Plumbing fixtures Temperature controls Doors and hardware Fire alarm devices Corridor handrails Toilet acc., fire extinguishers, wall protection, etc. Kitchen equipment Install fireplaces Test and balance Carpet in corridors, offices, and RCAC
30 days 62 days 50 days 40 days 50 days 30 days 15 days 40 days 35 days 25 days 24 days 35 days 45 days 30 days 40 days 35 days 35 days 30 days 40 days 35 days 24 days 25 days
Final Cleaning Owner furnishings and equipment Punch list review and completion Occupancy Fire department inspection Plumbing inspection Electrical Inspection State final inspection Owner move supplies and equipment Owner moves residents and occupies building
20 days 20 days 20 days 21 days 2 days 3 days 3 days 5 days 10 days 3 days
Project: Lakeview Preliminary Sch Date: Tue 6/24/14
25 days 5 days 25 days 35 days
Start
Finish
July August SeptembeOctober Novembe December January February March April May June July August SeptembeOctober Novembe Decemb B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E B M E Wood blocking Fri 5/1/15 Sheetrock walls Thu 6/25/15
Mon 3/23/15 Wed 4/1/15 Tue 4/21/15 Tue 5/19/15 Tue 6/16/15 Tue 6/23/15 Tue 6/30/15 Thu 7/2/15 Wed 7/8/15 Thu 7/9/15 Tue 7/14/15 Tue 7/14/15 Fri 7/17/15 Tue 7/21/15 Tue 7/28/15 Tue 8/4/15 Mon 8/17/15 Thu 8/6/15 Thu 8/6/15 Wed 8/26/15 Fri 8/28/15 Tue 9/1/15
Taping sheetrock
Mon 6/29/15 Mon 7/13/15 Mon 8/24/15 Mon 8/3/15 Mon 7/20/15 Wed 8/26/15 Tue 8/25/15 Wed 8/12/15 Fri 8/14/15 Mon 8/31/15 Thu 9/17/15 Mon 8/31/15 Mon 9/21/15 Mon 9/21/15 Fri 10/2/15 Wed 9/16/15 Wed 9/30/15 Tue 10/13/15 Wed 9/30/15 Mon 10/5/15
Painting Electrical devices Ceiling grid Kitchen hoods and walk‐in coolers Cabinets and countertops Sprinkler heads Epoxy flooring Ceramic Tile Wall protection Sheet vinyl flooring in rooms Ceiling tile Finish carpentry work Lights, diffusers, grilles Plumbing fixtures Temperature controls Doors and hardware Fire alarm devices Corridor handrails Toilet acc., fire extinguishe Kitchen equipment
Thu 8/13/15 Wed 9/16/15 Tue 9/1/15 Mon 9/7/15 Tue 9/1/15 Mon 10/5/15 Tue 9/8/15 Mon 10/26/15 Fri 10/23/15 Tue 10/27/15 Fri 11/6/15 Tue 11/24/15 Tue 11/24/15 Tue 11/24/15 Tue 11/24/15 Fri 11/27/15 Fri 12/4/15 Fri 12/18/15
Install fireplaces Test and balance Carpet in corridors, Final Cleani
Thu 11/19/15 Mon 11/23/15 Thu 12/3/15 Tue 12/22/15 Wed 11/25/15 Thu 11/26/15 Thu 11/26/15 Thu 12/3/15 Thu 12/17/15 Tue 12/22/15
Owner fur Punch Fire depa Plumbing Electrical State f Ow
Task
Project Summary
Inactive Milestone
Manual Summary Rollup
Deadline
Split
External Tasks
Inactive Summary
Manual Summary
Progress
Milestone
External Milestone
Manual Task
Start‐only
Summary
Inactive Task
Duration‐only
Finish‐only Page 2
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS 1.
Summary A.
Submittals may be required in the sections of the Specifications for any of the 48 Divisions and may request the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)
2.
Format A.
Each submittal shall have the following identification: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
B.
Project name and number as they appear on the Contract Documents Name and address of the Subcontractor (and submitter if not the same) Name and telephone number of the individual to be contacted for further information CSI section number requiring submittal Date of submittal (or revision) Sequential page numbers for multi-page submittals
The following quantities shall be submitted to Market & Johnson: 1) 2) 3) 4)
For shop drawings: One electronic file in .pdf format For product data and manufacturer’s instructions: One electronic file in .pdf format For samples, schedules, certificates and guarantees: Three hard copies. For other submittals, consult Market & Johnson
C.
For electronic submittals, website site and login information will be forwarded upon award of subcontract.
D.
Items shall be submitted in the following sizes: 1) 2) 3)
E.
3.
Shop drawings Product data Manufacturer’s instructions Samples and colors Schedules Certificates and guarantees Other items
On sheets the same size as the drawings; In 8 ½” x 11” format; or As noted in specific sections of the Specifications.
Items submitted which do not conform to the identification or format standards may be rejected.
Coordination and Timing A.
Within ten (10) days after notification by Market & Johnson, the Subcontractor shall prepare a list of all required submittals and the times when such approvals will be required, and deliver this list to Market & Johnson.
B.
Market & Johnson will coordinate the lists and times for submittals from each Subcontractor and prepare a master list for presentation to the Architect and the Owner.
C.
All submittals shall proceed from the Subcontractor, to Market & Johnson, to Architect, and back again. Each entity must review the submittal. Submittals sent out of sequence or without the appropriate reviews will be rejected. Submittals 01 33 00 – Page 1
4.
5.
D.
Submittals shall be made far enough in advance of the scheduled approval dates to allow adequate time for reviews, approvals, revisions and possible rejections or resubmittals. The time required for approvals by the Architect and his consultants will be fourteen (14) calendar days after receipt of approved submittals from Market & Johnson.
E.
Corrections, modifications and resubmittals (e.g. of shop drawings) will not be considered as extra work. A submittal will not be considered reviewed unless it bears the stamp and signature of the Architect.
F.
The Owner, the Architect and Market & Johnson reserve the right to reject any work, materials, or equipment fabricated or installed without appropriate submittals.
G.
Whenever possible, shop drawings and product data shall be submitted at the same time. Partial lists may not be considered. Identify each drawing with the Market & Johnson subcontract number and complete title of the project.
H.
Shop drawings shall show layout, location, details, attachment means, abutment, joint conditions, installation, schedules, setting and manufacturer’s literature and technical data of parts of work as specified. Make shop drawings accurately to a scale to show pertinent features of the item and the connection to work.
I.
Subcontractor shall note corrections or changes requested by Architect on the previous submittal and shall note revision. Shop drawings or project data, not bearing the approval stamp of the Subcontractor, or containing deviations from the Contract Documents, will be returned to the Subcontractor for resubmittal with necessary requirements. Corrections or changes indicated on shop drawings or product data shall not be considered as extra work. No final drawings will be considered approved unless it bears the stamp of review and the signature of Architect.
J.
Prior to submittal for review, use means necessary to coordinate material, including the following procedures: 1)
Determine and verify the field dimensions and conditions, materials, catalog numbers and similar data. Indicate deviations from Contract Documents.
2)
Coordinate as required with trades involved. Submit copies to other trades whose work is affected.
Architect’s Action A.
Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes where action and return is required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly.
B.
Compliance with specified characteristics is the Subcontractor’s responsibility.
C.
Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked to indicate the action taken..
Samples A.
Samples shall consist of physical examples furnished by the Subcontractor in sufficient size and quantity to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and to establish standards by which the work will be judged.
Submittals 01 33 00 – Page 2
B.
To establish the acceptable level of quality, the applicable Subcontractor shall be responsible for producing various sample construction items when directed by Market & Johnson and as required by the following list: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8)
Architectural concrete (cast-in-place Typical precast concrete wall sections (including window unit and caulked joint) Typical ceramic tile installation Seamless floor joints Painted walls and ceiling Vinyl fabric seams Caulking of casework Caulking of toilet accessories
All sample construction items shall be a part of the permanent work with the location to be determined by Market & Johnson. All sample construction items that do not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents will be removed and reconstructed until made acceptable at no additional cost to Market & Johnson or to the Owner. C.
6.
Submit transmittal letter requesting approval and pre-pay transportation charges to Market & Johnson’s office on samples forwarded. Subcontractor shall submit new samples as required until Architect approves sample.
Certificates A.
Submit all certificates as required by the Contract Documents in triplicate before such portions of the work requiring certificates are scheduled to begin.
B.
Certificates shall be signed by a qualified officer of the Company, and duly notarized.
END OF SECTION
Submittals 01 33 00 – Page 3
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 35 00 SUBCONTRACTOR SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 1.
Implementation A.
Each Subcontractor is responsible for his/her own safety program in accordance with applicable provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act.
B.
Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for payment of all fines and/or claims for damages levied against Market & Johnson and/or the Owner for safety deficiencies relating to conduct of Subcontractor’s work.
C.
Every Subcontractor shall comply with all applicable local, state and federal safety and health regulations.
D.
Safety Procedures for Contractors and/or Subcontractors 1)
As a Subcontractor and employer, you are required by Federal and State Occupational Safety and Health Regulations, Standards, Codes, Rules and Regulations, to provide protection for customers, employees and the public who may come into contact with your operations.
2)
Employee Safety Orientation and Safety Meetings Each Subcontractor or its Subcontractor(s) shall follow OSHA Act 1926.21 (2) requirements that state, “Each employer shall instruct each employee in the recognition and avoidance of unsafe conditions and the regulations applicable to its work environment”.
3)
Accident Reports In the case of an injury to an employee of the Subcontractor or its Subcontractor(s) requiring treatment in addition to first aid, the employer will furnish Market & Johnson the “First Report of Injury” and a Foreman’s Accident Report within 24 hours after the occurrence. In the case of an accident involving property damage or injury to a person who is not an employee of the Contractor, the Subcontractor or its Subcontractor(s), Market & Johnson will be immediately notified and a Foreman’s Accident Report will be submitted within 24 hours after the occurrence.
END OF SECTION
Subcontractor Safety Requirements 01 35 00 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 35 05 FIRE PRECAUTIONS AND PROTECTION 1.
Description A.
2.
3.
Provide adequate fire protection during the construction process.
Fire Extinguishers A.
Market & Johnson will provide and maintain in working order during the entire construction period, fire extinguishers as required and suitable for any possible class or type of fire.
B.
In addition, each Subcontractor who maintains an enclosed shed on the premises for storage of materials or as a workshop, or for the convenience of workmen, shall provide and maintain one fire extinguisher for each shed.
Fire Protection of Construction Activities Each Subcontractor shall:
4.
A.
Provide adequate protection and shielding of workers and materials during welding, flame cutting, sparking devices, etc.
B.
Provide the necessary personnel and fire fighting equipment to effectively control fires resulting from welding flame cutting or other operations involving the use of flame and sparking devices.
C.
Not permit open fires.
D.
Have their Superintendent in charge of the project meet with Market & Johnson to review the entire project on intervals as requested by Market & Johnson to make certain that they adhere to the conditions and requirements set forth herein.
E.
Take all necessary precautions to guard against and eliminate all possible fire hazards in accordance with all fire protection and prevention laws and codes. Also, all necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to any construction work, building materials equipment, temporary field offices, storage shed and all other property.
F.
Use only Underwriter’s Laboratory approved heaters and/or stoves in field offices or storage sheds. They shall have fire resistive materials underneath and at the sides near partitions and walls. Pipe sleeves and a fireproof covering shall be used where a stovepipe runs through wall or roof.
Permanent Fire Protection Systems A.
Permanent fire protection water supply, fire extinguishing equipment, and fire protection systems shall be installed at the earliest possible date.
B.
The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall maintain the existing fire protection system during all remodeling work.
C.
The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish, install, and maintain a temporary standpipe system during new construction. This system shall be in accordance with all local, state and federal requirements.
END OF SECTION
Fire Precautions and Protection 01 35 05 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 35 60 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.
2.
Coordination A.
Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for the cutting and patching of all holes and openings through walls and partitions, and all holes and openings through floors, ceilings, and roofs necessary for the installation of their work. If the location for a hole or opening is through either a new or existing joist, beam or column, the Subcontractor shall notify Market & Johnson who, after consultation with the Architect, will instruct the Subcontractor how to proceed.
B.
In the event of a conflict, precedence or priority in installing piping, ductwork, conduit, etc., in close quarters shall be determined by Market & Johnson. Subcontractor shall confer and cooperate with other trades providing work in confined areas.
C.
Any costs caused by ill-timed work shall be assigned by Market & Johnson to the responsible Subcontractor.
New or Existing Construction A.
Each Subcontractor shall furnish and install all sleeves, anchors, inserts, supports, caulking, fire safing and insulation required for their openings. Where lintels are required for openings but not shown on the Drawings, they shall be provided by the Subcontractor requiring the opening for their work.
B.
All cutting shall be carefully done to minimize repair.
C.
Core drill all holes six (6) inches in diameter or smaller, except for holes in post-tensioned slabs. The use of electrical or pneumatic hammers is not permitted unless approved by Market & Johnson. For larger openings, saw-cut outline and break out; exercise care to prevent spalling on reverse sides. Coring machines shall have warning devices indicating contact with steel or other metals. Subcontractor shall secure any local permits or approvals required for the use of cutting or burning torches.
D.
Each Subcontractor shall include patching of openings both rough (substrate) and finish surfaces (where already existing). All patching shall be done in a neat and workman-like manner and shall match adjacent surfaces. All existing openings less than 12” in any direction and not reused shall be keyed and poured flush with existing floor or roof and reinforced with 6x6 x 6/6 WWM. (Refer to Division 03 specifications for concrete.) Any existing opening more than 12” in any direction, and not to be reused shall receive a 4 x 4 x 1/4 angle around entire opening perimeter, secured to existing slab with 1/2” expansion bolts at 24” o.c., reinforced with #4 bars at 8” each way and poured flush with existing floor or roof. (Refer to specifications for concrete to be used.)
E.
Any sprayed fireproofing damaged by cutting or patching shall be repaired or replaced by the responsible Subcontractor.
F.
The temporary removal and replacement of ceilings not scheduled for replacement shall be the responsibility of the Subcontractor requiring access.
G.
All removals, relocations, and restorations required for the execution of a Subcontractor’s work shall be the responsibility of that Subcontractor, unless noted otherwise in a specific Section of the Specifications and/or on the Drawings.
H.
Painting of patched areas shall not be required unless noted otherwise in the Room Finish Schedule or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Cutting and Patching 01 35 60 – Page 1
I.
The Subcontractor shall be responsible for the cutting and patching of all required beam pocket and slab recesses, for the installation of their work.
J.
Post-tensioned slabs – Written approval must be obtained by Market & Johnson prior to core drilling of post-tensioned slabs. Hole locations are to be laid out, indicating size of hole to be cored, distance from column center lines to center of hole. Any cost associated with verifying hole locations to be paid by subcontractor.
K.
Where mechanical ductwork, piping, conduit, etc., extends below finish line, ceiling contractor shall provide additional ceiling drop and soffit material matching adjacent ceiling to conceal mechanical work. Coordinate work with Architect/Engineer and mechanical trade.
L.
The Subcontractor shall be responsible to seal all openings through fire-rated construction, either horizontal or vertical, caused by their work with the appropriate material to maintain five-rating indicated.
M.
The Roofing Contractor shall include the patching of all openings in existing roof not to be reused to a watertight seal by Roofing Contractor. (Refer to mechanical drawings and actual field conditions for locations.)
N.
Where new finishes or materials are scheduled, Market & Johnson shall remove existing finishes or materials and the Subcontractor who is responsible for the substrate on the project shall prepare existing surfaces for application of new finishes.
O.
Where existing finishes or materials are damaged or distributed by new construction in areas where no new finishes or materials are scheduled, the existing finishes and materials shall be patched to match adjacent finishes. If original existing finish is no longer available, a similar finish, as approved by Architect, may be substituted at no additional cost to Owner.
P.
Each Subcontractor to complete their section of work shall refer to plumbing, HVAC, electrical and other mechanical drawing for patching of existing finishes and materials required because of relocation or removal of existing mechanical and electrical equipment, fixtures, and other work.
END OF SECTION
Cutting and Patching 01 35 60 – Page 2
SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.
2.
Mock-ups A.
Where required by the specifications, the Subcontractor shall provide full scale mock-ups in the sizes required by the section requiring the mock-up.
B.
All materials, fasteners, systems, etc., shall be identical to the products and technique specified for use on the project.
C.
Market & Johnson shall determine when the Subcontractor shall construct each mock-up, but this scheduling shall not delay the project in any way and shall allow adequate time for review by the Architect and the Owner, and adequate time for reconstruction of the mock-up in the event it is found unacceptable.
D.
Market & Johnson shall notify the Architect and the Owner when mock-ups are ready for review. Mock-ups shall be a part of the permanent construction.
References A.
Quality Assurance 1)
For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or federal standard comply with all provisions of the standard for the date of issue specified. Where no issue date is referenced, comply with the issue current at the date of execution of the Contract Agreement.
2)
Where reference standards conflict with other provisions of the Contract Documents, the Subcontractor shall notify Market & Johnson, who shall request a clarification in writing from the Architect before proceeding with any affected work.
3)
It is the responsibility of the Subcontractor to obtain reference standards. Market & Johnson is not required to keep copies of these documents at the site.
4)
The use of reference standards shall not modify or alter the contractual relationship of the parties by any mention or inference contained with any reference document.
END OF SECTION
Quality Assurance 01 40 00 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.
Description A.
B.
Work Included: 1)
Cooperate with the Owner’s selected testing agency and all others responsible for testing and inspecting the work.
2)
Provide such other testing and inspecting as are specified to be furnished by the Subcontractor in this section and/or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Work not included: 1)
2.
3.
Payment for Testing A.
Initial Services: The Owner will pay for initial testing services requested by the Owner.
B.
Re-testing: When initial tests indicate non-compliance with the Contract Documents, subsequent re-testing occasioned by the non-compliance shall be performed by the same testing agency, and costs thereof will be deducted by Market & Johnson from the appropriate Subcontractor.
Code Compliance Testing A.
4.
Representatives of the testing laboratory shall have access to the work at all times and at all locations where the work is in progress. Facilities for such access shall be provided to enable the laboratory to perform its functions properly.
Taking Specimens A.
7.
Inspecting and testing performed exclusively for the Subcontractor’s convenience shall be the sole responsibility of the Subcontractor.
Cooperation with Testing Laboratory A.
6.
Inspections and tests required by codes or ordinances, or by a plan approval authority, and which are made by a legally constituted authority, shall be the responsibility of and shall be paid for by the Subcontractor, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents.
Subcontractor’s Convenience Testing A.
5.
Payment for initial testing: The Owner will pay for all initial services of the testing laboratory as further described in Paragraph 2 of this section.
All specimens and samples for testing, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, shall be taken by the testing personnel. All sampling equipment and personnel Will be provided by the testing laboratory. All deliveries of specimens and samples to the testing laboratory will be performed by the testing laboratory.
Schedules for Testing A.
Establishing Schedule: By advance discussion with the testing laboratory, determine the time required for the laboratory to perform its tests and to issue each of its findings.
B.
Adherence to schedule: When the testing laboratory is ready to test according to the established schedule, but is prevented from testing or taking specimens due to Testing Laboratory Services 01 45 29 – Page 1
incompleteness of the work, all extra charges for testing attributable to the delay may be back-charged to the Subcontractor. C.
Concrete Testing: Slump, Air Content, Water Content, and temperature tests will be performed with each set of compression test cylinders. 1.
2. 3. 4.
D.
Compressive Strength Testing: Comply with ASTM C 31, C172-99, C-39. a. Provide a minimum 4 cylinders from each day’s pour. In excess of 50 cubic yards per day requires 4 cylinders per 50 cubic yards. Slump Testing: Comply with ASTM C 157. Water Content Testing: Comply with AASHTO T318 Flatness/Levelness Testing: Comply with ASTM E 1155, using a “dipstick profiler” within 72 hours of concrete placement.
Sitework/Excavation: 1. 2. 3.
Field Density Testing: Provide (1) test per 2,500 square feet per lift of fill, meeting 95% modified proctor if not otherwise specified. Column Pads: Provide (1) test at each column pad. Foundations: Provide (1) test per each 50 linear feet of foundation.
END OF SECTION
Testing Laboratory Services 01 45 29 – Page 2
SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 1.
Description A.
2.
Temporary Utilities: electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, sanitary facilities and elevators.
Temporary Electricity A.
If any Subcontractor contemplates the use of the equipment that requires a different voltage or greater capacity than that specified, they shall arrange with the Utility for this additional service and pay for installation of the service and the necessary additional switches and wiring required.
B.
Each Subcontractor shall provide and pay for installation of temporary service for lighting of their temporary trailer.
C.
Temporary Construction Lighting: The electrical subcontractor shall provide construction lighting as directed by M&J to provide and maintain minimum lighting and receptacle outlets throughout the construction area to permit safe pursuit and examination of work. 1. Lighting: One 200 watt lamp per 625 sq. ft., maximum spacing of 30 feet on center, or as required by OSHA whichever is greater. 2. Receptacles: One duplex receptacle per 2500 sq. ft., maximum spacing of 60 feet on center. 3. Stairways: One 200 watt lamp per landing. 4. Provide supplemental lighting as required using suitable portable units. 5. Provide and maintain adequate lighting at barricades for safety. 6. Grounding: Comply with applicable codes relating to permanent work. Permanent grounding system may be utilized for temporary system. 7. Overload Protection: Comply with applicable codes relating to permanent work. 8. Task lighting shall be provided by individual subcontractor requiring it.
D.
Market & Johnson will pay for all electrical energy consumed for construction purposes for all trades including that required for operation of ventilating equipment, for heating of buildings, and for testing and operating of all equipment.
E.
All Subcontractors shall furnish their own extension cords and lamps other than those for general lighting.
F.
Subcontractors shall be allowed to use the service provided by the Electrical Subcontractor and coordinated with the Owner and Market & Johnson.
G.
Exterior lighting for security purposes during construction shall be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor and coordinated with the Owner and Market & Johnson.
H.
The Electrical Subcontractor must provide and use G.F.C.I. (ground fault circuit interrupters) as set for the in the latest OSHA regulations 1926 standards.
I.
After substantial completion of the permanent electrical distribution system and building wiring by the Electrical Subcontractor, permanent receptacles may be used during finishing work. Permanent wiring for lighting fixtures, switches, and receptacles will be installed after all masonry and drywall work is completed. This wiring shall not be used for motors larger than 1/2 HP or welding equipment. Circuits for larger motors and welding equipment may be provided with special circuits directly to electrical panels at the expense of the Subcontractors requiring them, provided special permission is obtained from Market & Johnson and installation is made by the Electrical Subcontractor. Temporary Utilities 01 51 00 – Page 1
3.
4.
5.
6.
J.
The Electrical Subcontractor is to provide timely delivery and installation of new electrical service equipment to accommodate equipment power requirements.
K.
Electrical Subcontractor is to provide temporary power and service to Market & Johnson’s job site trailer.
L.
Electrical Subcontractor will provide sufficient security lighting around exterior of project.
M.
The electrical Subcontractor shall provide sufficient outlets throughout and temporary lighting using 120-V power. Note: Temporary usage can not disrupt operations.
Cold Weather Protection A.
All heating and covering required to protect the work from injury due to freezing or moisture during the construction period prior to enclosure of the building shall be classified as Cold Weather Protection. Such protection shall be provided and paid for by each Subcontractor for the protection of his own work until the building is enclosed.
B.
Heating required is to protect materials from injury due to freezing during the construction period prior to enclosure shall be provided by means of portable heating units intended for this purpose.
C.
Proper ventilation must be provided. The use of temporary units whose product of combustion will damage fresh concrete, motor or other building materials will not be allowed. Use of coke or oil salamanders is prohibited.
D.
If electrical power is required for oil or gas portable heating units, it may be taken from the available temporary power source.
E.
Equipment used for heat as well as the entire surrounding area shall be kept clean and in safe condition.
Temporary Heat A.
All heating required after enclosure of the building shall be classified as Temporary Heat.
B.
All temporary heat shall be provided by Market & Johnson as required.
C.
The permanent system will be used as soon as construction allows. Cleaning, maintenance and service of the system during construction is the responsibility of the heating contractor. The warranties for the permanent equipment used during construction will not start until the Owner and Architect approve substantial completion.
Temporary Telephones A.
Subcontractors desiring private telephone installation shall pay for all related costs.
B.
One telephone will be provided by Market & Johnson for Subcontractor use for local calls only.
Temporary Water A.
If water cannot be obtained right away, it will be each Subcontractor’s responsibility to provide the necessary water for their operation until water is available.
Temporary Utilities 01 51 00 – Page 2
7.
B.
Immediately after award of the contract, the Plumbing Subcontractor shall make arrangements for temporary water and provide hose bibs in locations specified by Market & Johnson for use by all Subcontractors.
C.
The Plumbing Subcontractor shall maintain the installation and remove it when directed by Market & Johnson. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide necessary patching of surfaces and of the structure after the temporary service is removed.
D.
Subcontractors shall prevent waste and shall maintain valves, connections and hoses in good condition at all times. Each Subcontractor shall provide his own hose or piping from hose bibs.
E.
The Owner shall not pay cost of water used.
F.
Each Subcontractor shall provide their own drinking water.
Temporary Toilets A.
Market & Johnson will provide and maintain exterior sanitary temporary toilets located where required for the force employed.
B.
The Plumbing Subcontractor, as soon as possible, will provide temporary toilets for use by construction personnel, including both male and female trades people.
END OF SECTION
Temporary Utilities 01 51 00 – Page 3
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 52 13 FIELD OFFICES 1.
Field Offices A.
Market & Johnson shall provide and maintain a temporary watertight office for their operations.
B.
Each Subcontractor shall provide their own temporary field office and equipment as required. The location will be determined by Market & Johnson.
END OF SECTION
Field Offices 01 52 13 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 53 00 BARRICADES AND ENCLOSURES 1.
Temporary Guardrails and Barricades A.
2.
Temporary Partitions A.
3.
Market & Johnson shall provide the necessary temporary partitions for the control of dust and personnel.
Temporary Controls A.
4.
Prior to removal of all shoring and forms, Market & Johnson shall be responsible for temporary protection at the building floor perimeters and openings. Immediately after the removal of all shoring and forms, Market & Johnson shall furnish, install, and maintain all necessary temporary guardrails at the building floor perimeters and openings. All other protection and safety barricades, devises, covers, etc., including at all roof areas, shall be provided by each Subcontractor as it relates to the safe conduct of their work in accordance with all local, state and federal regulations.
Barriers, fences and enclosures: 1)
Market & Johnson shall provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for protection of public rights-of-way for access to the building.
2)
All Subcontractors shall provide whatever items are necessary to protect vehicular traffic, stored materials, existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage due to their demolition or construction operations.
Enclosures A.
Enclosures shall be provided by the Subcontractor whose work requires them.
END OF SECTION
Barricades and Enclosures 01 53 00 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 53 10 CONSTRUCTION AIDS 1.
Stairs, Ladders, Ramps, Runways, Scaffolds A.
The Subcontractor performing the work shall: 1)
Furnish and maintain equipment such as temporary stairs, fixed ladders, ramps, chutes, runways and the like as required for proper execution of work.
2)
Market & Johnson will see that a permanent stair system is installed as soon as possible. Provide stairs with temporary treads, handrails, and shaft protection.
B.
Subcontractors requiring scaffolds shall provide their own and remove them on completion of the work. Underlay interior scaffolds with planking to prevent uprights from resting directly on the slab.
C.
Market & Johnson will provide temporary stairs for overall job access.
END OF SECTION
Construction Aids 01 53 10 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 56 40 SECURITY 1.
Watchmen A.
2.
Watchmen will not be provided by the Owner or Market & Johnson. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for loss or injury to persons or property where his work is involved, and shall provide such watchmen and take such precautionary measures, as he may deem necessary.
Security A.
Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for and make good any loss or damage due to vandalism or robbery during construction.
B.
Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for loss or injury to persons or property wherever his work is involved. Each Subcontractor should take precautionary measures to secure materials, equipment and finished or in-progress work.
END OF SECTION
Security 01 56 40 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.
Description A.
B.
Work Included: 1)
Cooperate with the Owner’s selected testing agency and all others responsible for testing and inspecting the work.
2)
Provide such other testing and inspecting as are specified to be furnished by the Subcontractor in this section and/or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Work not included: 1)
2.
3.
Payment for Testing A.
Initial Services: The Owner will pay for initial testing services requested by the Owner.
B.
Re-testing: When initial tests indicate non-compliance with the Contract Documents, subsequent re-testing occasioned by the non-compliance shall be performed by the same testing agency, and costs thereof will be deducted by Market & Johnson from the appropriate Subcontractor.
Code Compliance Testing A.
4.
Representatives of the testing laboratory shall have access to the work at all times and at all locations where the work is in progress. Facilities for such access shall be provided to enable the laboratory to perform its functions properly.
Taking Specimens A.
7.
Inspecting and testing performed exclusively for the Subcontractor’s convenience shall be the sole responsibility of the Subcontractor.
Cooperation with Testing Laboratory A.
6.
Inspections and tests required by codes or ordinances, or by a plan approval authority, and which are made by a legally constituted authority, shall be the responsibility of and shall be paid for by the Subcontractor, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents.
Subcontractor’s Convenience Testing A.
5.
Payment for initial testing: The Owner will pay for all initial services of the testing laboratory as further described in Paragraph 2 of this section.
All specimens and samples for testing, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, shall be taken by the testing personnel. All sampling equipment and personnel Will be provided by the testing laboratory. All deliveries of specimens and samples to the testing laboratory will be performed by the testing laboratory.
Schedules for Testing A.
Establishing Schedule: By advance discussion with the testing laboratory, determine the time required for the laboratory to perform its tests and to issue each of its findings.
B.
Adherence to schedule: When the testing laboratory is ready to test according to the established schedule, but is prevented from testing or taking specimens due to Testing Laboratory Services 01 45 29 – Page 1
incompleteness of the work, all extra charges for testing attributable to the delay may be back-charged to the Subcontractor. C.
Concrete Testing: Slump, Air Content, Water Content, and temperature tests will be performed with each set of compression test cylinders. 1.
2. 3. 4.
D.
Compressive Strength Testing: Comply with ASTM C 31, C172-99, C-39. a. Provide a minimum 4 cylinders from each day’s pour. In excess of 50 cubic yards per day requires 4 cylinders per 50 cubic yards. Slump Testing: Comply with ASTM C 157. Water Content Testing: Comply with AASHTO T318 Flatness/Levelness Testing: Comply with ASTM E 1155, using a “dipstick profiler” within 72 hours of concrete placement.
Sitework/Excavation: 1. 2. 3.
Field Density Testing: Provide (1) test per 2,500 square feet per lift of fill, meeting 95% modified proctor if not otherwise specified. Column Pads: Provide (1) test at each column pad. Foundations: Provide (1) test per each 50 linear feet of foundation.
END OF SECTION
Testing Laboratory Services 01 45 29 – Page 2
SECTION 01 65 00 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1.
2.
3.
4.
Summary A.
Delivery, storage and handling.
B.
Product options and substitutions.
Products A.
Products means new material, components, equipment, fixtures and systems forming the work. It does not include machinery or equipment used for the fabrication, conveyance, or installation of the work. Products may also include existing materials or components slated for reuse.
B.
Do not reuse materials or equipment removed from the premises unless specifically permitted or required by the Contract Documents.
C.
Standardization and uniformity is desired in all parts of the work. Wherever possible provide products of one manufacturer to simplify maintenance and spare parts inventories.
Transportation and Handling A.
Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.
C.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.
Storage and Protection A.
Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures.
B.
For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground.
C.
Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection.
D.
Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation.
E.
Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Provide no mixing with foreign matter.
F.
Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.
G.
The Owner assumes no responsibility for materials stored in building or on the site. The Subcontractor assumes full responsibility for damage due to the storing of materials. This also includes Owner purchase materials.
END OF SECTION Material and Equipment 01 65 00 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 74 23 CLEANING 1.
Description A.
2.
3.
Work Included: Throughout the construction period, maintain the buildings and site in a standard of cleanliness as described in this Section.
Cleaning Up A.
It is the responsibility of each Subcontractor to maintain the premises free of accumulations of waste materials, debris and rubbish caused by their operations or the operations of his Sub-subcontractors.
B.
Each subcontractor shall remove their rubbish and debris from the building site promptly upon its accumulation, and in no case later than the regular Friday general cleanup.
C.
Remove all debris from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces and other closed or remote spaces prior to enclosing the space.
D.
Each Subcontractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish, debris, and mud caused by his/her employees from slab forms prior to the placement of concrete.
E.
Each Subcontractor shall be responsible to remove from the site waste materials of suitable size and shape or weight to make use of dumpster type box unreasonable.
F.
Market & Johnson will provide containers for progress cleaning. The total cost of these services will be determined prior to release of final payment. Market & Johnson will deduct the value of these services from the subcontractor’s contract via Change Order. The value will be determined on a prorated basis according to the Subcontractor’s percentage of the total contract amount. Each Friday afternoon, and as required by Market & Johnson, each Subcontractor shall perform an overall broom cleaning of appropriate areas. Each contractor on site to supply one person at 12:30 for afternoon clean-up. This requirement applies to each week that you have personnel on site. The amount of this labor shall be listed on the schedule of values and will only be paid when participation requirements are satisfied; otherwise the amount will be deducted from the contract.
G.
Market & Johnson will not provide any progress cleaning. All progress cleaning shall be the responsibility of each Subcontractor.
H.
If a Subcontractor fails to comply with the requirements, Market & Johnson shall perform the necessary clean-up and deduct the cost of such work from the compensation due or to become due said Subcontractor.
Final Cleaning A.
Other Subcontractors shall perform a thorough cleaning of work and equipment provided under their contracts.
B.
Each Subcontractor shall perform a thorough cleaning of all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view. Remove temporary labels, spots, soil, stains, and foreign substances. Polish transparent and glossy surfaces. Wash and polish hard surface floors and bases; vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean all equipment and fixtures: leave in a sanitary condition. Clean or replace all filters. Clean roofs, gutters, downspouts and drainage systems.
Cleaning 01 74 23 – Page 1
C.
If a Subcontractor does not remove rubbish or clean the buildings as specified above, Market & Johnson reserves the right to have work done by others. The cost of work done by others will be deducted from monies due the Subcontractor involved.
D.
The Owner reserves the right to hire a professional cleaning service or use their owner employees to perform final cleaning.
END OF SECTION
Cleaning 01 74 23 – Page 2
SECTION 01 77 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.
2.
3.
Cleaning A.
In addition to progress cleaning, each Subcontractor shall provide a comprehensive final cleaning immediately prior to substantial completion of work.
B.
Final cleaning for each Subcontractor shall be coordinated by Market & Johnson and must occur before any Punch Lists will be prepared by the Architect. Final cleaning which can in no way be assigned to individual contractors shall be performed by a professional cleaning service hired by the Owner.
C.
Each Subcontractor shall perform a thorough cleaning of all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view. Remove temporary labels, spots, soil, stain, and foreign substances. Polish transparent and glossy surfaces. Wash and polish hard surface floors and bases; vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean roofs, gutters, downspouts and drainage systems.
D.
Clean site and bridge areas by sweeping, hosing, etc. Remove excess dirt and landscaping materials.
E.
Remove any waste, rubbish, surplus materials and construction facilities from the Project.
F.
Interiors of sewers, water mains and appurtenances affected by the Work shall be freed of all dirt and extraneous material.
G.
If the Subcontractor fails to perform any cleaning operation as specified, Market & Johnson shall have this work accomplished and shall deduct the cost of the same from the Contract Sum.
H.
Repairing of damaged areas used for placing of sheds, offices, and storage of materials shall be done by Subcontractor responsible.
Record Documents A.
As the work progresses, each Subcontractor shall maintain a set of Record Drawings recording any changes to the Work. Such changes shall include changes of size, location, elevation and any variations from the original Drawings, whether covered by Change Order or not. Drawings will be furnished by the Owner through Market & Johnson.
B.
Documents shall be kept current. No work shall be permanently concealed until all changes have been recorded. Market & Johnson shall verify on a monthly basis that record documents are current.
C.
At project closeout the information contained on mechanical and electrical record documents will be furnished by the Owner through Market & Johnson. Subcontractor shall submit record documents with transmittal letter indicating date, Project title, Subcontractor’s name, list of documents, and signature of Subcontractor.
Spare Parts and Extra Material A.
Prior to application for final payment Subcontractor shall deliver to Market & Johnson all spare parts and extra materials in quantities required in the Specifications. Extra material shall be identical to that provided for the Project.
B.
Delivery shall include a transmittal indicating all items furnished. Market & Johnson shall issue a receipt verifying quantities and materials. Contract Closeout 01 77 00 – Page 1
C.
4.
The Subcontractor shall retain all loose and small detachable parts of apparatus and equipment furnished under this Contract until completion of the work and shall turn them over to the Owner or his representative designated to receive them and shall obtain from him an itemized receipt for his files and shall attach a copy to his request for final payment.
Training A.
The Subcontractor will hold training and equipment demonstrations to effectively train the owner’s staff. Compliance will be monitored by the Subcontractor having the individuals sign a statement that they have been adequately trained.
B.
General Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of operating equipment and other work that requires regular or continuing maintenance, to meet at the site with the Owner’s personnel to provide necessary basic instruction in the proper operation and maintenance of entire Work. Where installers are not experienced in the required procedures, include instruction by the manufacturer’s representatives. Arrange to have a minimum of two verbal instruction periods at such times as determined by Owner. As part of this instruction, provide a detailed review of the following items: -
Maintenance manuals Record documents Spare parts and materials Tools Lubricants Fuels Identification systems Hazards Cleaning Warranties, bonds, maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments
As part of this instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: -
Start-up Shut-down Emergency operations Noise and vibration adjustments Safety procedures Economy and efficiency adjustments Effective energy utilization
Retain all loose and small detachable parts of apparatus and equipment furnished under this contract, until completion of the work and turn them over to the Owner or his representative designated to receive them and obtain from him an itemized receipt thereof in triplicate. Retain one copy of this receipt for Contractor’s files and attach the other two to the request for final payment for the work. END OF SECTION
Contract Closeout 01 77 00 – Page 2
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1.
Description A.
2.
Work Included: To aid the continued instruction of operating and maintenance personnel, and to provide a positive source of information regarding the products incorporated into the Work, furnish and deliver the data described in this section and in pertinent other sections of these Specifications.
Maintenance and Operations Manual and Demonstration A.
Prior to final inspection the Subcontractor shall provide full details for the care, maintenance and operation of all mechanical, electrical, food service and fire suppression equipment and controls, and for any other materials or equipment where required by the Specifications.
B.
Submit one electronic copy in .pdf format and one hard copy to Market & Johnson for each system in the following format: 1)
Furnish 8-1/2 x 11 typed text, illustrations, and pertinent material.
2)
Provide a table of contents if multiple items are included.
3)
Provide operating and maintenance instruction by system with lists of the following: a)
Names, addresses and phone numbers of any subcontractors or material suppliers
b)
All system design criteria
c)
All items of equipment
d)
All parts lists
e)
All operating instructions
f)
All maintenance instructions
g)
All shop drawings and product data
h)
All warranties, guarantees and bonds
C.
In each of these, the correct model number shall be checked off in ink where the literature covers more than one model number.
D.
For items assembled by the Subcontractor for special functions, the Subcontractor shall write up and provide duplicate operating and maintenance instructions.
E.
For temperature control equipment, the manual shall contain a narrative of the control cycle for the control equipment.
END OF SECTION
Operation and Maintenance Manuals 01 78 23 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 1.
Related Documents A.
2.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
Summary A.
This section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer’s standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1) 2) 3)
4) 5)
B.
Disclaimers and Limitations: 1)
3.
Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor’s special warranty of workmanship and materials. General close-out requirements are included in Section “Project Close-out”. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 02 through 48. Certification and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. All Contractor Performance and Payment Bonds shall remain in force a minimum of two (2) years after final payment or as dictated by Divisions 02 through 48.
Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor or the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
Definitions A.
The term “Warranty”: 1)
B.
Standard Product Warranties: 1)
C.
As defined in AIA “Glossary of Construction Industry Terms”, May, 1982 edition: “A warranty is a legally enforceable assurance of quality or performance of a product or Work, or the duration of satisfactory performance.”
Standard Project Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and where indicated are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.
Special Warranties: 1)
Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. Refer to “Form of Special Warranty” elsewhere herein.
Warranties and Bonds 01 78 36 – Page 1
4.
Warranty Requirements A.
Related Damages and Losses: 1)
B.
Reinstatement of Warranty: 1)
C.
5.
Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements or Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
Owner’s Recourse: 1)
E.
When work covered by a warranty has failed and has been corrected by replacement or building, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty.
Replacement Cost: 1)
D.
When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.
Written Warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights or remedies.
Rejection of Warranties: 1)
The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
2)
The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special Warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitment are willing to do.
3)
In case repairs become necessary, the Owner will give written notice to the Contractor to make same. In case of failure of the Contractor to commence such repairs within 48 hours for environmental equipment, such as heating, air conditioning, air handling, water systems, and within 30 days for all other work, after such notice, the Owner may make the repairs either by its own employees or by independent contract and may thereupon recover from the Contractor and its sureties the cost of the supervision and inspection thereof. The Owner will have sixty (60) days after the expiration of said warranty period in which to notify the Contractor of any such repairs necessary on the date of such expiration. The determination of the necessity for repairs shall rest entirely with the Owner’s Representative whose decision upon the matter shall be final and obligatory upon the Contractor.
Submittals A.
Submit sample warranty with all original submittals at the beginning of the project for review with product data as per Section 01 33 00.
B.
Submit final written warranties endorsed by the manufacturer and the contractor to the Market & Johnson prior to the date determined for Substantial Completion. Warranties and Bonds 01 78 36 – Page 2
C.
If the Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupies or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Market & Johnson within fifteen (15) days of completion of that designated portion of the Work along with a quotation to extend the warranty for six (6) month’s time.
D.
When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and Subcontractor, Supplier or Manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Market & Johnson for approval along with original submittals prior to final execution.
E.
Form of Special Warranty: 1)
Where special warranty is specified, the Contractor, as a condition precedent to final payment, shall submit to the Owner’s Representative the warranty in triplicate on 8-1/2” x 11” paper in the following format:
Warranties and Bonds 01 78 36 – Page 3
SPECIAL WARRANTY Date Architect Project Number and Name Market & Johnson’s Job Number Guaranteed Work Specification Section Number Reference Specification Page and Paragraphs Describing Warranty Length of Warranty (Years) Contractor’s Name Subcontractor’s Name The undersigned herewith warrant(s) that the Work to which this Warranty applies has been performed in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and guaranties the Work to perform as specified without failure for the stated period of time after Substantial Completion or as otherwise agreed to it by the Owner. This Warranty does not apply to failure to perform due to abuse or neglect by the Owner, or his successor in interest, or damage by vandalism. SUBCONTRACTOR/MANUFACTURER Signed Title Notary Date CONTRACTOR Signed Title Notary Date
Warranties and Bonds 01 78 36 – Page 4
F.
2)
Responsibility for the securing, verifying, recording, transmitting to the Market & Johnson and all other actions regarding the specified special warranties rests with the Contractor.
3)
Refer to individual Sections of Divisions 02 through 48 for specific requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties.
Form of Submittal: 1)
At Final Completion compile two (2) copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, Subcontractor, Supplier, or Manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.
2)
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2” by 11” paper.
3)
When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.
***
Warranties and Bonds 01 78 36 – Page 5
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.
Description A.
2.
Work Included: 1)
Throughout the progress of the work, maintain an accurate record of changes in the Contract Documents.
2)
Upon completion of the work, transfer the recorded changes to a set of Record Documents, as described below.
Record Drawings A.
As the work progresses, each Subcontractor shall maintain a set of drawings recording any changes to the work. Such changes shall include changes of size, location, elevation and any variations from the original drawings, whether covered by change order or not.
B.
Documents shall be kept current. No work shall be permanently concealed until all changes have been recorded. Market & Johnson shall verify on a monthly basis that record documents are current.
C.
The daily record of changes shall be the responsibility of each Subcontractor’s field superintendent. No arbitrary mark-ups will be permitted.
D.
At the completion of the project, each Subcontractor shall transfer as-built records to a set of prints for use by the Owner. The record drawings to be checked by Market & Johnson and the Architect. The Architect will turn record drawings over to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Project Record Documents 01 78 39 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 80 00 TESTING, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING 1.
Description A.
2.
Work Included: Make final adjustments for all equipment and various systems as required.
Testing, Balancing and Adjusting A.
The complete installation consisting of the several parts and systems and all equipment installed according to the requirements of the specifications and as shown on the drawings, shall be ready in all respects for use by the Owner and shall be subjected to a test at full operating conditions and pressures for normal conditions of use.
B.
The Subcontractor shall make all necessary adjustments and replacements affecting his work which are necessary documents to comply with the directions and recommendations of the manufacturer of the several pieces of equipment, and to comply with all codes and regulations which may apply to the entire installation. The Subcontractor shall also make all required adjustments to comply with all provisions of the drawings and specifications.
C.
Records or reports of system start-up and testing shall be submitted to Market & Johnson as part of the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
D.
Each Subcontractor required to maintain Record Documents shall allow four to seven hours each for instruction and demonstration of equipment to the Owner’s personnel. Instruction and demonstration periods shall be arranged through Market & Johnson.
END OF SECTION
Testing, Balancing and Adjusting 01 80 00 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 01 90 00 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 1.
Section Includes Starting systems Manufacturer’s Instructions
2.
3.
Starting Systems A.
Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B.
Notify Architect/Engineer seven days prior to start-up of each item.
C.
Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive, rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. Record evidence and data.
D.
Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. Record evidence and data.
E.
Verify wiring and support components for equipment that is complete and tested. Record evidence and data.
F.
Execute start-up in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Record evidence of full compliance with C, D, and E above, in a written start-up test report for each piece of equipment and for each system as a whole, within the O&M manual required in Section 01 78 23.
Manufacturer’s Instructions A.
Provide manufacturer’s printed instructions for start-up, adjusting, include description of equipment, method of operation and control including motors, pump units, signals, and special or nonstandard features provided.
B.
Provide parts catalogs with complete list of equipment replacement parts with equipment description and identifying numbers.
C.
Provide schematic diagrams covering electrical equipment installed, including changes made in final work, with symbols listed corresponding to identity of markings on equipment.
D.
Compile information as required by provisions of Section 01 77 00.
E.
Provide factory authorized representative training services to the Owner’s designated personnel after testing, adjusting and balancing is complete and substantial completion certification has been received from the Architect/Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Starting of Systems 01 90 00 – Page 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.
B.
Openings for other work.
C.
Form accessories.
D.
Form stripping.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.
C.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
D.
Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel: Placement of embedded steel anchors and plates in cast-in-place concrete.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute; 2010.
B.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute; 2011.
C.
ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 2004.
D.
PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints and ties.
1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A.
Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 347, ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B.
Designer Qualifications: Design formwork under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of concrete formwork and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.
Conform to applicable code for design, fabrication, erection and removal of formwork.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver prefabricated forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging.
B.
Store prefabricated forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL A.
Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast-in-place concrete work.
B.
Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions.
C.
Comply with applicable State and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removal of formwork.
13032-2
03 10 00 - 1
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A.
Softwood Plywood: PS 1, C Grade, Group 2.
2.03 REMOVABLE PREFABRICATED FORMS A.
Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gage matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces.
2.04 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A.
Form Ties: Snap-off type, galvanized metal, fixed length, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface.
B.
Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete and form materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied.
C.
Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil that will not stain concrete.
D.
Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
E.
Embedded Anchor Shapes, Plates, Angles and Bars: As specified in Section 05 12 00.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings.
3.02 ERECTION - FORMWORK A.
Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301.
B.
Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads.
C.
Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
D.
Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
E.
Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on drawings.
F.
Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork.
G.
If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Architect before proceeding.
3.03 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A.
Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.04 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A.
Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work.
B.
Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.
C.
Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.
D.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
3.05 JOINTS AND EDGE FORMING A.
Locate construction joints per industry standards. Form construction joints with keyway, including joint between footings and foundation wall. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement and continue reinforcement through joint.
B.
Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface.
3.06 FORM CLEANING A. 13032-2
Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms. 03 10 00 - 2
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
B.
Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. 1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. 2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.
3.08 FORM REMOVAL A.
Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads.
B.
Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
C.
Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged forms. END OF SECTION
13032-2
03 10 00 - 3
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete.
B.
Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.
C.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
B.
ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute International; 2004.
C.
ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2007.
D.
ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2012.
E.
AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society; 2011.
F.
CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 2009.
G.
CRSI (P1) - Placing Reinforcing Bars; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices. 1. Show sizes and dimensions for fabrication and placing of reinforcing steel and bar supports. a. Show type size and location of all accessories. b. Indicate bar schedules, stirrup spacing, and diagrams of bent bars, arrangements and assemblies. c. Indicate yield strength of bars being provided. d. Show required bar laps on all strings of horizontal bars. e. All lap splices shall develop the full strength of the bar unless lesser laps are permitted drawings.
C.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel and accessories supplied for this project meet or exceed specified requirements.
D.
Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301.
B.
Welders' Certificates: Submit certifications for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A.
Deliver reinforcing steel to Project Site bundled, tagged and marked. Use metal tags indicating bar size, lengths and other information corresponding to markings shown on placement diagrams. Do not remove tags until reinforcing is in place.
B.
Store reinforcement materials at Project Site in manner to prevent damage, accumulation of dirt and excessive rust.
13032-2
03 20 00 - 1
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420). 1. Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Unfinished.
B.
Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type. Electrically welded 65,000 psi yield strength. 1. Mesh Size and Wire Gage: As indicated on drawings.
C.
Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. Supports over waterproofing shall be chairs with plates.
2.02 UNACCEPTABLE MATERIALS A.
Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be permitted in the work: 1. Bar lengths, depths and bends exceeding specified fabrication tolerances. 2. Bends or kinks not indicated on drawings or final shop drawings. 3. Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other cause.
2.03 FABRICATION A.
Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice.
B.
Welding of reinforcement is permitted only with the specific approval of Architect. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.4.
C.
Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A.
Comply with CRSI's "Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars".
B.
Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
C.
Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position.
D.
Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.
E.
Accommodate placement of formed openings. Provide additionally a minimum of two #5 bars all around openings.
F.
Provide two #3 bars, 3 inches apart four sides of floor drains in slabs-on-grade.
G.
Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows: 1. Column Ties: 1 1/2 inch. 2. Walls (exposed to weather or backfill): 1 1/2 inch. 3. Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth: 3 inch. 4. Slabs on Fill: 3/4 inch.
H.
Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement.
I.
Bond and ground all reinforcement to requirements of Section 26 05 26.
3.02 SPLICES A.
Provide standard reinforcement splices as detailed by lapping ends, placing bars in contact, and tightly wire tying.
B.
Comply with requirements of ACI 318 for minimum lap dimensions.
3.03 WELDED WIRE FABRIC A.
Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths and cut to fit all penetrations.
B.
Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh but not less than 6 inches. Tie splices with 16 gauge wire or standard metal clip. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams, or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps.
C.
Place mesh flat, without roll or curling.
13032-2
03 20 00 - 2
CONCRETE REINFORCING
D. 3.04
When detailed to include welded wire fabric in slabs on grade and structural topping concrete, place mesh at mid-point of slab and topping thickness. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Bar Placement Tolerance 1. 1/4 inch (plus or minus) between bars. 2. 1/4 inch (plus or minus) vertically for members 8 inches deep or less. 3. 1/4 inch (plus or minus) vertically for members over 8 inches deep and less than 2 feet deep. 4. 1 inch (plus or minus) vertically for members 2 feet or deeper.
B.
Notify Architect/Engineer when reinforcing is in place so a review of reinforcement placement can be made prior to placement of concrete. END OF SECTION
13032-2
03 20 00 - 3
CONCRETE REINFORCING
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Floors and slabs on grade.
B.
Concrete walls and footings.
C.
Underslab vapor barrier.
D.
Concrete curing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork.
C.
Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.
D.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealants for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs.
E.
Section 09 67 00 – Fluid Applied Flooring: Coordination to prevent contamination of concrete with curing/sealing products.
F.
Division 21 Plumbing: Plumbing items requiring sleeves through concrete.
G.
Division 26 Electrical: Electrical items requiring sleeves through concrete.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002).
B.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
C.
ACI 302.1R-04 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (errata 2007).
D.
ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000.
E.
ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
F.
ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
G.
ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001 (Reapproved 2008).
H.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2011.
I.
ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011a.
J.
ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2012a.
K.
ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2012.
L.
ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2012.
M. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012. N.
ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007.
O.
ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a.
P.
ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2012.
Q.
ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2012.
R.
ASTM C881/C881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2010.
S.
ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2008).
13032-2
03 30 00 - 1
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
T.
ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2011.
U.
ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004 (Reapproved 2008).
V.
ASTM E 96-05 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor transmission of Materials.
W. ASTM 154-99 (2005) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs. X.
ASTM E 1643-98 (2005) Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
Y.
ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011.
Z.
IBC 2009
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions. 1. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility with floor covering adhesives.
C.
Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used.
D.
Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.
E.
Laboratory design of concrete mixes and laboratory test reports for concrete materials to Architect/Engineer for approval prior to proceeding with any concrete work Including but not limited to the following: 1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity. 2. Admixtures required to meet job and environment requirements.
F.
Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturer's: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures.
G.
Concrete placement schedule. Submit to Architect/Engineer for review prior to placing any concrete.
H.
Copies of delivery tickets to Architect/Engineer for each load of concrete delivered to Project. Include items of information as specified herein.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318 and ASTM F710-05 appendix IX.
B.
Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
C.
Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
D.
Contractor shall confirm and coordinate various requirements, restrictions or special conditions (i.e. slump, surface finish, curing and sealing compatibility) with floor finish suppliers prior to placing concrete.
E.
Floor flatness shall not exceed 1/8" in 10 feet unless noted otherwise.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A.
Comply with requirements of Section 03 10 00.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT A.
Comply with requirements of Section 03 20 00.
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A.
13032-2
Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source. 03 30 00 - 2
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
B.
Air Entraining Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1A.
C.
Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. 1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source.
D.
Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C.
E.
Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C 618, Class C.
F.
Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.04 ADMIXTURES A.
Except for air entraining and water reducing, admixtures are not permitted without approval of Architect/Engineer. Submit manufacturer's information to A/E with historical stress testing.
B.
Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement.
C.
Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. Air entrainment not allowed in floor slabs. 1. Products: a. Darex II - W.R. Grace. b. AEA 92S - Euclid. c. Catexol AE 260 - Axium Concrete Technologies. d. Micro-Air – BASF Admixtures, Inc. e. MB AE 90 – BASF Admixtures, Inc. f. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
D.
High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type G. 1. Products: a. Daracem 19 - W.R. Grace. b. ADVA 100 - W.R. Grace. c. Eucon 37 - Euclid. d. Catexol 1000SP-MN – Axim Concrete Technologies e. Rheobuild 1000 - BASF Admixtures, Inc. f. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
E.
High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type F. 1. Products: a. Daracem 65 - W.R. Grace. b. Eucon MR - Euclid. c. Catexol 3500N - Axium Concrete Technologies. d. Polyheed 997 - BASF Admixtures, Inc. e. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
F.
Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type C or E. 1. Products: a. Polarset - W.R. Grace. b. Accelguard 80 - Euclid. c. Catexol 2000RHE - Axium Concrete Technologies. d. Pozzutec 20 - BASF Admixtures, Inc. e. See Division 1 for substitution procedure..
G.
Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type D. 1. Products: a. Daratard 17 - W.R. Grace. b. Eucon Retarder 100 - Euclid. c. Catexol 1000R - Axium Concrete Technologies. d. Pozzolith 100XR - BASF Admixtures, Inc. e. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
H.
Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A. 1. Products: a. WRDA 82 - W.R. Grace. b. Eucon WR-91 - Euclid. c. Catexol 1000N - Axim Concrete Technologies.
13032-2
03 30 00 - 3
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
d. e.
Pozzolith 200N – BASF Admixtures, Inc See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.
Underslab Vapor Barrier: Multi-layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum-reinforced polyethylene or equivalent, with permeance rating less than.01 perms after mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E 154, Sections 8, 11, 12 and 13 and complying with ASTM E 1745, Class A minimum thickness 15 mil; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. Single ply polyethylene is prohibited. 1. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2. Products: a. Insulation Solutions, Inc; Viper VaporCheck II 15-mil (Class A): www.insulationsolutions.com. b. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier 15-mil (Class A): www.stegoindustries.com. c. Premolded Membrane Vapor Seal with Plasmatic Core by W.R. Meadows. www.wrmeadows.com. d. Zero-Perm by Alumiseal. www.alumiseal.com. e. Iron Barr 15 by Flatiron Films: www.flatiron-films.com f. Reef Industries; Vaporguard: www.reefindustries.com g. Greenbloc by Ardex: www.ardex.com h. Vaporblock VB15 by Raven Industries: www.vaporblock.com i. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
B.
Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. ASTM C1107/C1107M; Grade A, B, or C. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours, ASTM C109/C109M: 2,400 pounds per square inch. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days, ASTM C109/C109M: 8,000 pounds per square inch. 4. Flowable Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; SC Precision Grout: www.specchemllc.com. b. W. R. Meadows, Inc.; 588-10K, 1428 HP, or CG-86: www.wrmeadows.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 00 21 13 – Instructions to Bidders. 5. Low-Slump, Dry Pack Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; SC Multipurpose Grout: www.specchemllc.com. b. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
C.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf.
D.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171; clear polyethylene, white polyethylene, or white burlappolyethylene sheet.
E.
Bond Breaker: 4 mil plastic, 15# building paper, or vapor retarder returned up on wall.
2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A.
Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059 Type II. 1. Products: a. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; ACRY-LOK-: www.wrmeadows.com. b. Or comparable
B.
Epoxy Bonding System: Complying with ASTM C881/C881M and of Type required for specific application. 1. Products: a. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Rezi-Weld Gel Paste, Rezi-Weld Gel Paste State, Rezi-Weld 1000, or Rezi-Weld 1000 State: www.wrmeadows.com. b. Or comparable
C.
Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top section that will form 1/2 inch deep sealant pocket after removal. 1. Material: ASTM D1751, cellulose fiber. 2. Products: a. W.R. Meadows, Inc; Fiber Expansion Joint Filler with Snap-Cap: www.wrmeadows.com. b. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
13032-2
03 30 00 - 4
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
D.
Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM D 1751, 1/2 inch thick and full depth of slab less 1/2 inch.
2.07 CURING MATERIALS A.
Evaporation Reducer: Liquid thin-film-forming compound that reduces rapid moisture loss caused by high temperature, low humidity, and high winds; intended for application immediately after concrete placement. 1. Products: a. W.R. Meadows, Inc; Evapre or Evapre-RTU: www.wrmeadows.com. b. BASF Admixtures, Inc.; Confilm. c. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
B.
Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane-forming compound, that dissipates within 3 to 5 weeks; complying with ASTM C309. 1. Products: a. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; 1100-Clear: www.wrmeadows.com. b. Or comparable c. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
C.
Curing and Sealing Compound, Low Gloss: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, non-yellowing acrylic; complying with ASTM C1315 Type 1 Class A. 1. Vehicle: Water-based. 2. Solids by Mass: 25 percent, minimum. 3. Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; Cure and Seal WB: www.specchemllc.com. b. SpecChem, LLC; Cure and Seal WB 25: www.specchemllc.com. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; VOCOMP-25: www.wrmeadows.com. d. Masterseal - Master Builders. e. Kure-N-Seal - Sonneborn. f. Tri-Kote 18 Clear CRECT - TK Products g. Cure and Seal - Symons Corp. h. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
D.
Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C171. 1. Curing paper, regular. 2. Polyethylene film, clear, minimum nominal thickness of 0.0040 in.. 3. White-burlap-polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 10 oz/per linear yd, 40 inches wide.
E.
Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.
2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A.
Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B.
Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Normal Weight Concrete: Design all concrete mixes from the following table of requirements: W/C MAX 1. Concrete backfilled or protected from weather: a. Footings:
0.5 Max .48 0.42
b. Foundation walls: c. Slabs-interior on grade
13032-2
03 30 00 - 5
%AIR +-1%
6
MAX SLUMP (inches)
MIN f'c(psi) 28 day
3
3000
4 4
4000 4000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
2. Concrete exposed to weather: a. Sidewalks/slabs
1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
0.45
6
4
4000
Fly Ash Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight. Calcined Pozzolan Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight. a. Note: Total of combination of flyash and calcined pozzalon shall not exceed 20 percent. Minimum Cement Content: a. f'c=3 ksi: 5 sacks b. f'c=3.5 ksi & 4 ksi: 5 1/2 sacks Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: For footings 1 1/2 inch. Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: For slabs, walls and piers: 3/4 inch.
2.09 MIXING A.
Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M except where requirements in table above are more restrictive.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Inspect all excavations and/or prepared subgrade for suitability of pouring concrete. No standing water, organic material, debris, etc., should be present. Slab subgrade should be compacted as specified and have optimum moisture content.
B.
Points of concrete placement shall be clean, damp but not wet surfaces, or properly consolidated fills, but never soft mud, dry porous earth, or frozen ground.
C.
Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.
D.
Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories.
E.
Contractor shall make certain that references to all related sections for floor finishes and their substrate finish requirements are complied with including but not limited to; mix/slump, flatness, curing/sealing compounds, curing timeframe, aggregate colors etc.
F.
Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required. 2. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications.
G.
Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Sheet shall lap up at all wall surfaces and be secured by tape or with control joint material where it is indicated to be installed. Lap joints minimum 6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering. Vapor retarder may perform as the required bond break at slab edge. 1. Vapor Retarder Over Granular Fill: Install compactible granular fill before placing vapor retarder as shown on the drawings. Do not use sand.
H.
Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A.
Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B.
Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.
C.
Ensure reinforcement, inserts, and embedded parts will not be disturbed during concrete placement.
D.
Addition of water or admixtures to concrete on site without written approval of Architect/Engineer is prohibited and shall be grounds for rejection.
13032-2
03 30 00 - 6
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
E.
Convey concrete from mixing to point of placement rapidly and continuously until unit of operation is completed using methods which prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. Deposit at or very near final placement position. Use chutes such that the concrete slides in the chute and does not flow. For vertical drops more than 5 feet, utilize tremies or similar devices to prevent segregation of concrete ingredients. Do not convey or handle concrete in containers or devices made of aluminum.
F.
Place concrete continuously without construction (cold) joints wherever possible; where construction joints are necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing laitance and exposing the sand and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure water jetting.
G.
Consolidate placed concrete by vibration so the concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, around embedded items, and into corners of forms, eliminating air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. Use mechanical vibrators with a minimum frequency of 7,000 revolutions per minute, operated by competent workmen. Use of vibrators to move concrete within forms is not permitted. Insert and withdraw vibrators at many points, from 18 to 30 inches apart for 5 to 10 seconds duration. Keep a spare vibrator on the Project Site during all concrete placement operations. Use vibrators of internal type, apply directly to concrete, not through formwork, except in sections too thin to permit insertion of internal type, in which case, employ use of form vibrators approved by Architect/Engineer.
H.
Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.
I.
Concrete in vertical members shall have been in place at least four hours before concrete in horizontal or vertical members resting thereon is placed.
J.
Placing concrete shall be continuous between vertical construction joints. Make vertical construction joints at approximately the center of a panel or beam, in a straight line to the full depth. See Project Drawings for location of architecturally delineated construction joints.
3.04 SLAB JOINTING A.
Locate joints as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.
C.
Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab. 1. Install wherever necessary to separate slab from other building members, including columns, walls, equipment foundations, footings, stairs, manholes, sumps, and drains. 2. Conform to Section 07 90 05 for finish joint sealer requirements.
D.
Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours after placing; use 3/16 inch thick blade and cut at least 1 inch deep but not less than one quarter (1/4) the depth of the slab.
E.
Construction Joints: Where not otherwise indicated, use metal combination screed and key form, with removable top section for joint sealant.
F.
Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with bond break of #15 felt or 6 mil poly.
3.05 STRUCTURAL COMPONENT JOINTS A.
Construction joints for walls and continuous wall footings shall have reinforcing cross joints so that shear keys will not be necessary. Construction joints will be located at Contractor's discretion and will be at such locations that each section can be filled in one continuous operation.
3.06 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES A.
Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1. Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. 2. Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. 3. Under Carpeting: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
B.
Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified.
C.
Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.
3.07 EXTERIOR CONCRETE WORK A.
Use air-entrained concrete for all exterior work such as sidewalks and slabs.
B.
Exterior walks & slabs:
13032-2
03 30 00 - 7
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
Construct 4 inches thick in panels with control and expansion joints spaced as indicated below. Control Joints: Not more than 1/8 inch in width, Sawcut to a depth of 1/4 of walk thickness. Space not more than 6 feet on center for walks and 8 feet on center for curb and gutter. Expansion Joints: 1/2 inch thick expansion joint filler. Construct between walk and any abutting masonry or concrete. Construct transverse expansion joints at uniform intervals of not more than 40 feet. Slope sidewalks a minimum of 1/8 inch per foot for drainage. Finish: Wood float with joints and edges tooled with edging tool. Surface shall not vary more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
3.08 COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A.
Cold weather requirements govern when minimum ambient temperature is expected to fall below 40 degrees F. 1. Concrete will not be placed on frozen ground. 2. Mix, place, protect and cure concrete in strict accordance with ACI 306 R-88 "cold Weather Concreting".
3.09 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A.
Hot weather requirements govern when maximum ambient temperature is expected to rise above 85 degrees F.
B.
Mix, place, protect and cure concrete in strict accordance with ACE 305 R-91 "Hot Weather Concreting".
C.
Admixtures proposed for construction under these conditions, such as water-reducing retarders, shall be tested thoroughly with concrete mixes for this job. All aspects of concrete construction applicable shall be considered before approval. Submit specifications on retarder to Engineer for approval with concrete mix designs.
D.
Batch, mix and transport concrete per ACI 304.
E.
Water curing will be required for hot weather construction.
3.10 CONCRETE FINISHING A.
Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows: 1. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R; thin floor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, and thin set quarry tile. High gloss finish from power trowel not acceptable.
B.
Exterior Foundation Wall Surface Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Fill tie break-off holes with grout flush with wall.
C.
Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows: 1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not more than 24 hours after form removal.
D.
Grout Cleaned Finish: At wall areas exposed above grade wet areas to be cleaned and apply grout mixture by brush or spray; scrub immediately to remove excess grout. After drying, rub vigorously with clean burlap, and keep moist for 36 hours.
E.
In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains as indicated on drawings.
3.11 CURING AND PROTECTION A.
Take every precaution to insure that all concrete operations are performed promptly and without interruption.
B.
Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
C.
Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days.
D.
Begin final curing after initial curing but before surface is dry.
E.
Moisture cure slabs where curing compounds are prohibited by finish floor requirements.
13032-2
03 30 00 - 8
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
F.
Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to flooring manufacturer's satisfaction. 2. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than seven days by water-fog spray or saturated burlap or sheet plastic. 3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches and sealed by waterproof tape. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. b. Curing Compound: Apply a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by manufacturer. c. At floor areas not receiving floor finish and garage slab apply curing/sealer compound following manufacturer's instructions.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Project Coordinator shall complete required testing.
B.
Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
C.
Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations.
D.
Record time, place, mix design, quantity, slump, concrete temperature, air temperature and weather conditions, cylinders taken, date shoring is removed, curing and other data pertaining to concrete placement.
E.
Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements.
F.
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure four concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for first 50 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. Cast one set of four test cylinders for each additional 100 cu. yd. 1. Test one (1) cylinder at 7 days and two (2) cylinders at 28 days and (1) on hold. 2. For first set of cylinders cast for slab-on-grade, test one (1) cylinder at 3 days. Analyze probable 28 day strength. Inform Architect/Engineer immediately by telephone if there appears to be concern for achieving required 28 day strength. 3. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C143/C143M. 4. If reasonable consistency of slump and air tests is recorded on 4 consecutive tests, testing company may reduce requirements to test every 150 cu. yds.
G.
Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents.
H.
Deviation from specifications shall be grounds for rejection.
I.
Addition of water or admixtures to concrete on site without written approval of Architect/Engineer is prohibited and shall be grounds for rejection.
3.13 MOISTURE TESTING A.
13032-2
Testing requirements are addressed in Division 9 flooring sections requiring moisture emission analysis.
03 30 00 - 9
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
3.14 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A.
Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test.
B.
Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements.
C.
Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.
D.
Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area.
3.15 PROTECTION A.
Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured. END OF SECTION
13032-2
03 30 00 - 10
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SECTION 03 41 13 PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Precast floor planks.
B.
Connection plates with brackets and hangers.
C.
Grout for plank joint keys.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete topping
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
B.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2011.
C.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
D.
ASTM A416/A416M - Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed Concrete; 2012a.
E.
ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2012.
F.
ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011.
G.
ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010.
H.
ASTM C1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout; 2013.
I.
AWS B2.1 - Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification; American Welding Society; 2009.
J.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
K.
AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society; 2011.
L.
PCI MNL-116 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 1999, Fourth Edition.
M. PCI MNL-120 - PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; Seventh Edition, 2010. N.
PCI MNL-123 - Design and Typical Details of Connections for Precast and Prestressed Concrete; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 1988, Second Edition.
O.
PCI MNL-124 - Design for Fire Resistance of Precast Prestressed Concrete; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 1989, Second Edition.
P.
PCI MNL-126 - Manual For The Design of Hollow Core Slabs; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 1998.
Q.
PCI MNL-135 - Tolerance Manual For Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 2000.
R.
PCI (CERT) - PCI Plant Certification; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; online at www.pci.org
13032-2
03 41 13 - 1 PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Indicate standard component configuration, design loads, deflections, and cambers.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate plank locations, unit identification marks, connection details, edge conditions, bearing requirements, support conditions, dimensions, openings, and relationship to adjacent materials.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum 3 years of documented experience.
C.
Welder Qualifications: Qualified within previous 12 months in accordance with AWS B2.1.
D.
Precast concrete units shall be designed by a registered professional engineer experienced in precast prestressed concrete design; calculations and drawings shall bear designer's seal and signature licensed in the State in which the Project is located. .
E. Precast concrete units shall be designed to support the loads indicated on Drawings and to withstand stresses due to erection. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Lifting or Handling Devices: Capable of supporting member in positions anticipated during manufacture, storage, transportation, and erection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Precast Concrete Hollow Core Planks: 1. Any manufacturer with PCI Plant Certification. 2. Any manufacturer with NPCA Plant Certification.
2.02 PRECAST UNITS A.
Precast Hollow Core Planks: Comply with PCI MNL-120, PCI MNL 126, PCI MNL-124, ACI 318, and ACI 301. 1. Dimensions as indicated on drawings. 2. Design components to withstand dead loads and design loads in the configuration indicated on the drawings and as follows: 3. Design connections in accordance with PCI MNL-123. 4. Design components to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of other building structural members and clearances of intended openings. 5. Grouted Keys: Capable of transmitting horizontal shear force of 2,000 lb/ft.
2.03 MATERIALS A.
Concrete Materials: ACI 301.
B.
Tensioning Steel Tendons: ASTM A416/A416M, Grade 250 (1725); seven-wire stranded steel cable; low-relaxation type; full length without splices; uncoated.
C.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280) deformed steel bars.
D.
Non-Shrink Grout: Non-metallic, minimum compressive strength of 10,000 psi at 28 days.
E.
Cement Grout: Minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days.
2.04 GROUT MIX DESIGNS: A.
13032-2
Engineered Masonry: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; provide premixed type in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M. 1. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less. 2. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. 03 41 13 - 2 PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS
2.05 GROUT MIXING A.
Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.
B.
Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C476 for fine and coarse grout.
C.
Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
D.
Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.
2.06 ACCESSORIES A.
Connecting and Supporting Devices: Plates, angles, items cast into concrete, items connected to steel framing members, and inserts: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel; unfinished.
B.
Core Hole End Plugs: Cardboard insert with stiff concrete fill.
C.
Bearing Pads: High density plastic, 1/8 inch thick, smooth on one side. Vulcanized elastomeric compound molded to size.
D.
Sill Seal: Compressible glass fiber strips.
2.07 FABRICATION A.
Weld reinforcing in accordance with AWS D1.4.
B.
Embed anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other items at locations indicated.
C.
Provide openings required by other sections, at locations indicated.
D.
Cut exposed ends flush.
E.
Plant Finish: Finish members to PCI MNL-116 Standard Grade.
F.
Connecting and Supporting Steel Devices: Do not paint surfaces in contact with concrete or surfaces requiring field welding.
2.08 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A.
Conform to PCI MNL-116 and PCI MNL-135.
2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.
Produce planks in accordance with requirements of PCI MNL-116. Maintain plant records and quality control program during production of precast planks. Make records available upon request.
B.
Inspect and test stressing tendons before delivery for compliance with specified standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Prepare support devices for the erection procedure and temporary bracing.
3.03 ERECTION A.
Erect members without damage to structural capacity, shape, or finish. Replace or repair damaged members.
B.
Install bearing pads and sill seal at bearing ends of planks as indicated.
C.
Align and maintain uniform horizontal and end joints, as erection progresses.
D.
Maintain temporary bracing in place until final connection is made. Protect members from staining.
E.
Adjust differential camber between precast members to tolerance before final attachment and grouting.
F.
Adjust differential elevation between precast members to tolerance before final attachment.
G.
Secure units in place. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
H.
Grout longitudinal keys as indicated.
I.
Install sealant backer rod in plank joints to prevent grout leakage.
J.
Make plank-to-plank joints smooth using grout, troweled smooth. Transition differential elevation of adjoining planks with grout to a maximum slope of 1:12.
13032-2
03 41 13 - 3 PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS
3.04 TOLERANCES A.
Erect members level and plumb within allowable tolerances. Conform to PCI MNL-135.
3.05 CLEANING A.
Clean weld marks, dirt, and blemishes from surface of exposed members. END OF SECTION
13032-2
03 41 13 - 4 PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS
SECTION 04 70 00 MANUFACTURED MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Cut manufactured stone veneer at exterior and interior walls.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wall substrate
C.
Section 07 25 00 - Air Barriers
D.
Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
E.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for perimeter joints.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2009.
B.
ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
C.
ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2010.
D.
ASTM C778 - Standard Specification for Standard Specification for Standard Sand.
E.
ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath.
F.
ASTM C979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.
G.
ASTM E 2556/ E 2556M Standard Specification for Vapor Permeable Flexible Sheet Water
H.
Resistive Barriers Intended for Mechanical Attachment.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufactured masonry and application materials including mortar color charts, and water resistive barrier.
C.
Samples: 12" x 12" minimum panel containing full-size samples of specified manufactured masonry showing full range of colors and textures complete with specified mortar.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Minimum five years experience in producing manufactured masonry.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company with documented experience in installation of manufactured masonry including minimum 5 projects within 400 mile radius of this Project.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Store moisture-sensitive materials in weather protected enclosures.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
During temporary storage on site, at the end of working day, and during rainy weather, cover stone work exposed to weather with non-staining waterproof coverings, securely anchored.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A.
Basis of Design: Boral Stone Products, Ledgestone as distributed by County Concrete.
B.
Comparable products by: Bolder Creek Stone Products, 8282 Arthur St. NE, Minneapolis, MN 55432. 763-786-7138
2.02 MANUFACTURED MASONRY MATERIALS A.
13032-2
Compressive Strength: ASTM C 39, 5000 psi (12.4 MPa) minimum. 1. Bond Between Stone Unit, Type N Mortar, and Backing: ASTM C 482, 50 psi (345 kPa). 2. Freeze/Thaw: 0.9% loss 04 70 00 - 1
MANUFACTURED MASONRY
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Fire Hazard Test, UL 723: Flame spread: 0. Flexural Strength: 660 psi. Tensile Strength: 320 psi. Absorption: 12.2%. Thickness: 1 to 3 1/2 inches.
2.03 COMPONENTS A. Including, but not limited to: sills and pier caps. 2.04 MORTAR A.
Mortar: ASTM C270, Type S, Property specification, using portland cement of grey color. Follow manufactured masonry manufacturer's installation instructions.
B.
Grout: Type N as recommended by Manufacturer..
2.05 ACCESSORIES A.
Water Resistive Barrier: #15 felt.
B.
Metal Lath: 2.5 lb galvanized expanded diamond metal lath.
C.
Fasteners Into Wood Studs: Minimum 1.75 inch galvanized roofing nails or crown staples of sufficient length to penetrate 1 inch minimum into the stud.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that support work and site conditions are ready to receive work of this section.
B.
Verify that weather barrier installed under Section 07 25 00 is complete.
3.02 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A.
Comply with masonry manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, product carton installation instructions and SPEC-DATA sheets.
3.03 PREPARATION A.
Install water resistive barrier over weather barrier in layers as required by stone supplier. Install horizontally, from the bottom up, shingle fashion overlapping minimum 2 inches and lapping ends minimum 6 inches. Follow manufactured stone manufacturer recommendations for all conditions.
B.
Install metal lath horizontally with the cups up-rough side up, smooth side down, per manufacturer's instructions and should overlap a minimum 1 inch. Stagger adjoining ends. Lathe should be wrapped around inside and outside corners to the next stud. Fasten lathe every 6 inches vertically to studs.
3.04 INSTALLATION A.
Comply with cold or hot weather installation instructions.
B.
Install flashings of longest practical length and seal watertight to back-up. Lap end joint minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. All flashings shall be integrated with water resistive barriers.
C.
Apply a scratch coat layer of mortar over the lath, ensuring the lath is completely covered to allow for scoring of the surface. The mortar should be applied with sufficient pressure and thickness to fully embed the lath in mortar. Once the mortar is thumbprint hard scratch (score) the surface horizontally to create the mortar scratch coat.
D.
Lay out stone to arrange sizes and colors for fit and appearance.
E.
Work from the top down to prevent mortar dripping to work below. When necessary protect work below with plastic to prevent drips from attaching to stone. Immediately clean mortar that falls on stone.
F.
Size the stone to be placed prior to applying mortar.
G.
Moisten the scratch coat and back of stone thoroughly prior to setting the mortar bed and stone.
H.
Apply full thick layer of mortar to back of stone and work stone in place to thoroughly set mortar into scratch coat. Maintain approximately 3/8" minimum grout joints.
I.
Install mortar at joints utilizing a grout bag. Once grout is firm but not completely dry strike joints with a non-metallic tool. Use a masonry brush to remove excess material.
13032-2
04 70 00 - 2
MANUFACTURED MASONRY
3.05 CLEANING A.
Follow manufacturer recommendations on cleaning and maintenance. Do not use harsh chemicals, such as acid, for cleaning, or use abrasive tools such as wire brushes or powered tools.
B.
Remove excess mortar upon completion of work.
C.
Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D.
Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. END OF SECTION
13032-2
04 70 00 - 3
MANUFACTURED MASONRY
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Structural steel framing members, support members.
B.
Base plates, anchor bolts.
C.
Grouting under base plates.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 03 41 13 - Precast Concrete Hollow Core Planks
C.
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2011.
B.
AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005.
C.
AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004.
D.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
E.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.
F.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.
G.
ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2012.
H.
ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010.
I.
ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2013.
J.
ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a.
K.
ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011.
L.
ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2013.
M. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2012. N.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners. 2. Connections not detailed. 3. Indicate cambers and loads. 4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
C.
Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
D.
Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural strength, destructive test analysis and non-destructive test analysis.
E.
Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
13032-2
05 12 00 - 1
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual."
B.
Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.
Steel Angles, Plates, and Channels: ASTM A36/A36M.
B.
Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M.
C.
Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M.
D.
Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.
E.
Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Finish black.
F.
Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
G.
High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, medium carbon, plain.
H.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
I.
Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M and capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 8,000 psi at 28 days. 1. Master Builders product: Master Flow 713 2. US Grout Corporation product: Five Star Grout 3. Sonneborn Building Products product: Sonogrout 4. Sika product: Grout 212 5. L & M product: Crystex
J.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
K.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.02 FABRICATION A.
Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.
B.
Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth.
C.
Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.
D.
Develop required camber for members.
2.03 FINISH A.
Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP SP 1 & 2.
B.
Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed.
3.02 ERECTION A.
Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".
B.
Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.
C.
Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.
D.
Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts".
13032-2
05 12 00 - 2
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
E.
Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.
F.
After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
G.
Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees. END OF SECTION
13032-2
05 12 00 - 3
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Roof deck.
B.
Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 18 inches.
C.
Bearing plates and angles.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches.
C.
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel angle concrete stops at deck edges.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
B.
ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, HighStrength Low Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2013.
C.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
D.
AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 2008.
E.
SDI (DM) - Publication No.31, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks; Steel Deck Institute; 2007.
F.
SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); The Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
G.
SSPC-Paint 25 - Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel, Type I and Type II; Society for Protective Coatings; 1997 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement, pertinent details, and accessories.
C.
Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and finishes.
D.
Certificates: Certify that products furnished meet or exceed specified requirements.
E.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
F.
Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation.
B.
Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
13032-2
Steel Deck: 1. Canam Steel Corporation: www.canam-steeljoists.ws. 2. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com. 3. Wheeling Corrugating Co: www.wheelingcorrugating.com. 4. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
05 31 00 - 1
STEEL DECKING
2.02 STEEL DECK A.
All Deck Types: Select and design metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual. 1. Calculate to structural working stress design and structural properties specified.
B.
Roof Deck: Type B (Wide Rib); Non-composite type, fluted steel sheet: 1. Ungalvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation SS. Minimum yield of 33,000 psi. a. Grade as required to meet performance criteria. 2. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and phosphatized substrate. 3. Structural Properties: a. Span Design: 3 span condition minimum. b. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: See Structural Documents. c. Nominal Height: See Structural Documents. d. Profile: Fluted; SDI B. 4. Formed Sheet Width: 36 inch. 5. Side Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened. 6. End Joints: Lapped, welded.
2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.
Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M steel, unfinished.
B.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1.
C.
Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self tapping.
D.
Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, 3/4 inch outside diameter, 1/8 inch thick.
E.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
F.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
G.
Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 1/2 inch thick; profiled to fit tight to the deck.
2.04 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES A.
Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips and cover plates, 20 gage thick sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck.
B.
Roof Sump Pans: 14 gage sheet steel, flat bottom, sloped sides, recessed 1-1/2 inches below roof deck surface, bearing flange 3 inches wide, sealed watertight.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align and level.
B.
On concrete and masonry surfaces provide minimum 4 inch bearing.
C.
On steel supports provide minimum 1-1/2 inch bearing.
D.
Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports at 12 inches on center maximum, parallel with the deck flute and at each transverse flute using methods specified. 1. Welding: Use fusion welds through weld washers.
E.
At mechanically fastened male/female side laps fasten at 24 inches on center maximum.
F.
At welded male/female side laps weld at 18 inches on center maximum.
G.
Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3.
H.
At deck openings from 6 inches to 18 inches in size, provide 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch steel angle reinforcement. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each side of opening and fusion weld to deck at each flute.
I.
Where deck (other than cellular deck electrical raceway) changes direction, install 6 inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same thickness as deck. Fusion weld 12 inches on center maximum.
13032-2
05 31 00 - 2
STEEL DECKING
J.
At floor edges, install concrete stops upturned to top surface of slab, to contain wet concrete. Provide stops of sufficient strength to remain stationary without distortion.
K.
At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings.
L.
Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with double row of foam cell closures.
M. Position roof drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck flute. N.
Position floor drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck flute.
O.
Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer. END OF SECTION
13032-2
05 31 00 - 3
STEEL DECKING
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Shop fabricated steel items.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.
C.
Section 03 41 13 - Precast Concrete Hollow Core Planks: Placement of metal fabrication in precast planks.
D.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
B.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.
C.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2013.
D.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.
E.
ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2013.
F.
ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010.
G.
ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2013.
H.
ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.
I.
AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2012.
J.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
K.
IBC 2009
L.
SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
M. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). N.
SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
C.
Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
13032-2
Design under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
05 50 00 - 1
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL A.
Steel Angles, Plates and Channels: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A 992/A 992M
C.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.
D.
Plates: ASTM A 283.
E.
Pipe For Handrails: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.
F.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components.
G.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
H.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
I.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.02 FABRICATION A.
Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
B.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C.
Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
D.
Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.
E.
Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.
2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS A.
Bollards: Steel pipe; galvanized finish. Fabricated of 6 inch diameter Extra Strong steel pipe. Fill with concrete and set as detailed.
B.
Ledge Angles and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metal decking and precast plank; prime paint finish.
C.
Pipe Rails: 1 1/4 inch nominal (1.66 inch O.D.) Round pipe unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Door framing for enclosure gate: Tube sections; prime paint finish.
2.04 FINISHES - STEEL A.
Prime paint all steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete, items to be imbedded in masonry, items specified for _______ finish, and exposed steel lintels. 2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing.
B.
Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2.
C.
Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
D.
Prime Painting: One coat.
E.
Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements.
F.
Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements.
2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A.
Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.
B.
Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.
D.
Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.
E.
Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.
13032-2
05 50 00 - 2
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B.
Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry.
3.03 INSTALLATION A.
Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B.
Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C.
Field weld components indicated.
D.
Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
E.
Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
F.
After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. END OF SECTION
13032-2
05 50 00 - 3
METAL FABRICATIONS
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Structural dimension lumber framing.
B.
Non-structural dimension lumber framing.
C.
Sheathing.
D.
Rigid insulation sheathing.
E.
Roofing nailers.
F.
Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.
G.
Communications and electrical room mounting boards.
H.
Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.
I.
Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 06 20 00 - Finished Carpentry: Finish items with wood blocking requirements.
C.
Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework: Wood blocking requirements for cabinet installation.
D.
Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Batt insulation and interior vapor barrier at exterior envelope framing.
E.
Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.
F.
Section 07 31 13 - Asphalt Shingles: Confirm special requirements for sheathing installation for asphalt shingle system.
G.
Section 07 53 00 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Wood blocking requirements.
H.
Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sill flashings.
I.
Section 10 21 23 – Cubicles: Ceiling mounted tracks.
J.
Section 11 73 10 – Ceiling Gantry Lift: Ceiling mounted tracks for lift.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.
B.
APA PRP-108 - Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural-Use Panels (Form E445); 2001.
C.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.
D.
ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2014.
E.
ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2013.
F.
ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.
G.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2013a.
H.
PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; National Institute of Standards and Technology, U.S. Department of Commerce; 2010.
I.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology, Department of Commerce; 2010.
J.
WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2011.
13032-2
06 10 00 - 1
ROUGH CARPENTRY
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
See Division 1 for submittal procedures.
C.
Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, application instructions, and fire treated materials.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
C.
Lumber fabricated from recovered timber (abandoned in transit) is permitted in lieu of sustainably harvested lumber, unless otherwise noted, provided it meets the specified requirements for new lumber and is free of contamination; identify source.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A.
Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).
B.
Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
C.
Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
D.
Stud Framing ( 2 by 2 through 2 by 6 ): 1. Species: Any allowed under referenced grading rules. 2. Grade: No. 2.
E.
Joist and Small Beam Framing ( 2 by 6 through 4 by 16 ): 1. Machine stress-rated (MSR) as follows: a. Fb-single (minimum extreme fiber stress in bending): See Structural Drawings. b. E (minimum modulus of elasticity): See Structural Drawings. 2. Species: See Structural Drawings.
F.
Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.
G.
Sill Board: Bottom plate of exterior wall framing shall provide protection against moisture, fungal growth and termites. Basis of Design: Bluwood. www.bluwood.com.
2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A.
Roof Sheathing: Any PS 2 type, rated Structural I Sheathing. 1. Bond Classification: Exterior. 2. Span Rating: 24. 3. Performance Category: 5/8 PERF CAT.
B.
Wall Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum, ASTM C1177/C1177M, square long edges, 5/8 inch Type X fire-resistant. 1. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Edges: Square, for vertical application. 4. Glass Mat Faced Products: a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc Brand: www.certainteed.com.
13032-2
06 10 00 - 2
ROUGH CARPENTRY
b. c. d.
Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensGlass Sheathing: www.gpgypsum.com. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand eXP Extended Exposure Sheathing. See Division 1 for Substitution procedure.
C.
Wall Sheathing: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) insulation board, ASTM C578, Type IV; tongue and groove long edges; 1 inch thick.
D.
Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.04 ACCESSORIES A.
Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete.
B.
Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions.
C.
Metal Framing Anchors: Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2. Manufacturer's: a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. b. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. c. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. d. KC Metals Products, Inc. e. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. f. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. g. USP Structural Connectors. h. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
D.
Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from continuous rolls.
E.
Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 25 00.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A.
Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasket cleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts.
B.
Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.
C.
Where wood framing is in contact with concrete or masonry, separate wood with No.15 felt bond break.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A.
Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B.
Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A.
Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.
B.
Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.
C.
Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.
D.
Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame Construction Manual.
13032-2
06 10 00 - 3
ROUGH CARPENTRY
E.
Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed.
F.
Provide bridging at framing in excess of 8 feet span as detailed. Fit solid blocking at ends of members.
G.
Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs.
3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A.
Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
B.
In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking.
C.
In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated.
D.
Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.
E.
Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. 5. Towel and bath accessories. 6. Wall-mounted door stops. 7. Wall paneling and trim. 8. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.
3.05 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A.
Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation.
B.
Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A.
Roof Sheathing: Secure panels with long dimension perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered and over firm bearing. 1. At long edges use sheathing clips where joints occur between roof framing members. 2. Nail panels to framing; staples are not permitted.
B.
Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples. 1. Place water-resistive barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and ends.
C.
Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly. 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps. 4. Size and Location: As indicated on drawings.
3.07 TOLERANCES A.
13032-2
Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.
06 10 00 - 4
ROUGH CARPENTRY
3.08 CLEANING A.
Waste Disposal: 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.
B.
Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.
C.
Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION
13032-2
06 10 00 - 5
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 06 17 33 WOOD I-JOISTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Wood I-joists for roof framing.
B.
Bridging, bracing, and anchorage.
C.
Framing for openings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Installation requirements for miscellaneous framing.
C.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Material requirements for blocking, plates, and miscellaneous framing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM D5055 - Standard Specification for Establishing and Monitoring Structural Capacities of Prefabricated Wood I-Joists; 2013.
B.
PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; 2010.
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's literature describing materials, dimensions, allowable spans and spacings, bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing requirements, and installation instructions; identify independent inspection agency.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes and spacing of joists, bracing and bridging, bearing stiffeners, holes to be cut (if any), and framed openings between joists.
D.
Certificate: Certification by joist manufacturer that products delivered are of the same design and construction as those evaluated by the independent inspection agency.
E.
Provide shop drawings stamped or sealed by design engineer for the state of Wisconsin
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver products to site in manufacturer's original packaging with manufacturer's name and product identification intact and legible.
B.
Protect products from damage due to weather and breakage.
C.
Protect joists from warping or other distortion by stacking in upright position, braced to resist movement, with air circulation under coverings and around stacks.
D.
Handle individual joists in the upright position.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Wood I-Joists: 1. Georgia-Pacific Corporation: www.gp.com. 2. LP Building Products: www.lpcorp.com. 3. Weyerhaeuser: www.woodbywy.com. 4. Timberweld Manufacturing: 406-652-3600.
[email protected]. 5. Structural Wood Corp.: www.structural-wood.com 6. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 MATERIALS A.
13032-2
Wood I-Joists: Solid lumber top and bottom flanges and oriented strand board (OSB) webs bonded together with structural adhesive, with published span rating to meet project requirements. 06 17 33 - 1
WOOD I-JOISTS
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 7.
Span Rating: Established and monitored in accordance with ASTM D5055 by independent inspection agency. Oriented Strand Board: Comply with PS 2. Adhesive: Tested for wet/exterior service in accordance with ASTM D2559. Depth: As indicated on drawings. Fabrication Tolerances: a. Flange Width: Plus/minus 1/32 inch. b. Flange Thickness: Minus 1/16 inch. c. Joist Depth: Plus 0, minus 1/8 inch. Marking: Mark each piece with depth, joist spacing, and allowable span for joist spacing. Provide bearing stiffeners if required by span rating or joist hanger manufacturer.
B.
Joist Bridging: Type, size and spacing recommended by joist manufacturer.
C.
Wood Blocking, Plates, and Miscellaneous Framing: As specified in Section 06 10 00.
D.
Fasteners: Electrogalvanized steel, type to suit application.
E.
Bearing Plates: Electrogalvanized steel, unfinished.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive joists.
B.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Coordinate placement of bearing items.
3.03 ERECTION A.
Install joists in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position.
C.
Make provisions for erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.
D.
Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.
E.
Install permanent bridging and bracing.
F.
Install headers and supports to frame openings required.
G.
Frame openings between joists with lumber in accordance with Section 06 10 00.
H.
Coordinate installation of sheathing/decking with work of this section. END OF SECTION
13032-2
06 17 33 - 2
WOOD I-JOISTS
SECTION 06 17 53 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Shop fabricated wood trusses for roof framing.
B.
Bridging, bracing, and anchorage.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Installation requirements for miscellaneous framing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
B.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012.
C.
SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002.
D.
TPI 1 - National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction; Truss Plate Institute; 2007 and errata (ANSI/TPI 1).
E.
TPI DSB-89 - Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses; Truss Plate Institute; 1989.
F.
WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2011.
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A.
Comply with applicable code for structural loading criteria.
1.05 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on plate connectors, bearing plates, and metal bracing components.
C.
Shop Drawings: Show truss configurations, sizes, spacing, size and type of plate connectors, cambers, framed openings, bearing and anchor details, and bridging and bracing. 1. Include identification of engineering software used for design. 2. Provide shop drawings stamped or sealed by design engineer for the state of Wisconsin
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Truss Design, Fabrication, and Installation: In accordance with TPI 1, TPI DSB-89, and BCSI 1.
B.
Designer Qualifications: Perform design by or under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
C.
Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Handle and erect trusses in accordance with TPI BCSI 1.
B.
Store trusses in vertical position resting on bearing ends.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Truss Plate Connectors: 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc: www.alpeng.com. 2. MiTek Industries, Inc: www.mii.com. 3. Truswal Systems: www.truswal.com. 4. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 TRUSSES A. 13032-2
Wood Trusses: Designed and fabricated in accordance with TPI 1 and TPI DSB-89 to achieve structural requirements indicated. 06 17 53 - 1
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
1. 2. 3. 4.
Species and Grade: Southern Pine, SPIB Grade No. 1 or better. Species and Grade: Douglas Fir, WWPA Grade no. 1 or better. Connectors: Steel plate. Structural Design: Comply with applicable code for structural loading criteria. See Structural Documents for loads and deflection limits.
2.03 MATERIALS A.
Lumber: 1. Moisture Content: Between 7 and 9 percent. 2. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B.
Steel Connectors: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with G90/Z275 coating; die stamped with integral teeth; thickness as required.
C.
Truss Bridging: Type, size and spacing recommended by truss manufacturer.
2.04 ACCESSORIES A.
Wood Blocking, Bridging, Plates, and Miscellaneous Framing: As specified in Section 06 10 00.
B.
Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel, type to suit application.
C.
Bearing Plates: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
2.05 FABRICATION A.
Fabricate trusses to achieve structural requirements specified.
B.
Brace wood trusses in accordance with TPI DSB-89 and BCSI 1.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.
Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Coordinate placement of bearing items.
3.03 ERECTION A.
Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TPI DSB-89 and TPI BCSI 1; maintain a copy of each TPI document on site until installation is complete.
B.
Set members level and plumb, in correct position.
C.
Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.
D.
Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.
E.
Install permanent bridging and bracing.
F.
Install headers and supports to frame openings required.
G.
Frame openings between trusses with lumber in accordance with Section 06 10 00.
H.
Coordinate placement of decking with work of this section. END OF SECTION
13032-2
06 17 53 - 2
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Finish carpentry items.
B.
Wood extension jambs, interior window frames, casings and moldings.
C.
Wood handrails and wall bumpers
D.
Hardware and attachment accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.
C.
Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework: Plastic laminate and MDF specifications.
D.
Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework: Custom wood cabinets and casework
E.
Section 06 61 00 - Simulated Stone Fabrications: Countertops.
F.
Section 06 66 10 - Manufactured Trim: Trim for interior installations.
G.
Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors: Coordinate need of door jambs in this section if pre-hung doors are provided.
H.
Section 08 71 00 - Finish Hardware: Door hardware.
I.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing of custom casework and interior windows.
J.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.
B.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
C.
HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; 2009.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Protect work from moisture damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A.
Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade.
B.
Interior Woodwork Items: 1. Moldings, Bases, Casings, and Miscellaneous Trim: Red oak; prepare for stain finish. 2. Loose Shelving: Oak plywood; prepare for stain finish.
2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A.
Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B.
Wood fabricated from timber recovered from riverbeds or otherwise abandoned is permitted, unless otherwise noted, provided it is clean and free of contamination; identify source; provide lumber regraded by an inspection service accredited by the American Lumber Standard Committee, Inc.
13032-2
06 20 00 - 1
FINISH CARPENTRY
2.03 LUMBER MATERIALS A.
Hardwood Lumber: oak species, quarter sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.
B.
Handrails and Wall Bumpers: Solid oak, size as detailed on plans.
2.04 SHEET MATERIALS A.
Hardwood Plywood: Face species Red oak, plain sawn, book matched, medium density fiberboard core; HPVA HP-1, Front Face Grade AA, Back Face Grade 1; glue type as recommended for application.
B.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; composed of wood chips, sawdust, or flakes of medium density, made with waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded faces.
2.05 ACCESSORIES A.
Wood Filler: Oil base, tinted to match surface finish color.
2.06 HARDWARE A.
Installation of door hardware by trained personnel as directed in 08 71 00.
B.
Shelf Standards and Brackets: K & V 87/187 (or equivalent) heavy duty standards and brackets.
2.07 FABRICATION A.
Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
B.
When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
C.
At wood window frames, rabbet corners, glue and nail or screw. Pre-drill as required.
2.08 SHOP FINISHING A.
Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B.
Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.
C.
On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and is of type recommended for the applicable finish. Install specified glazing by interior dry method, tape and tape per Section 08 80 00.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards requirements for grade indicated.
B.
Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
C.
Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
D.
Install wood windows square and plumb
3.03 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A.
Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.
B.
Site Finishing: See Section 09 90 00.
3.04 TOLERANCES A.
Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
B.
Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
13032-2
06 20 00 - 2
FINISH CARPENTRY
3.05 CLEANING A.
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B.
Remove labels after Work is complete.
C.
Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION
13032-2
06 20 00 - 3
FINISH CARPENTRY
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Specially fabricated cabinet units.
B.
Countertops.
C.
Cabinet hardware.
D.
Preparation for installing utilities.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.
C.
Section 06 61 00 - Simulated Stone Fabrications: Cast plastic countertops.
D.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
E.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for cabinetry.
F.
Division 22 - Required plumbing fixtures and connections.
G.
Division 26 - Required electrical fixtures and connections.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004.
B.
ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.
C.
ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2009.
D.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
E.
BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).
F.
HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; 2009 (ANSI/HPVA HP-1).
G.
NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.
H.
NHLA G-101 - Rules for the Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress; National Hardwood Lumber Association; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations of casework layout, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, rough-in locations, hardware location and schedule of finishes. Show details of countertop construction including backsplash, endsplash and edge details, and type of substrate core material. 1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot. 2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
C.
Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.
D.
Samples: Plastic laminate surfacing in manufacturers standard colors.
E.
Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets, demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
13032-2
Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this Project.
06 41 00 - 1
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
B.
Perform cabinet construction in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Premium quality for wood cabinets and custom quality for plastic laminate cabinets.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Protect units from moisture damage.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.
1.08 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A.
Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of manufactured wood casework that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Delamination of components or other failures of glue bond. b. Warping of components. c. Failure of operating hardware. d. Deterioration of finishes. 2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINETS AND DISPLAY CASES A.
Wood Veneer Faced Cabinets: Premium grade. 1. Exposed Surfaces: Grade AA, Red Oak, plain sliced, book-matched. 2. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Grade A, Red Oak, plain sliced, random-matched. 3. Concealed Surfaces: Grade B, Birch, rotary cut, random-matched.
B.
Cabinets and Display Cases other than Plastic Laminate: 1. Finish - Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Wood. 2. Finish - Exposed Interior Surfaces: Wood. 3. Finish - Concealed Surfaces: Manufacturer's option.
2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS A.
Hardwood Lumber: oak species, quarter sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish. 1. Grading: In accordance with NHLA Grading Rules; www.natlhardwood.org.
B.
Cabinet Rib Materials, Base Frames and Kicks: Kiln dried hardwood or softwood with a moisture content of 5-10% or 3/4" APA B-B G-2 Exp 1 exterior plywood. Construction lumber (s-dry) not allowed.
2.03 PANEL MATERIALS A.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; medium density industrial type as specified in AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, composed of wood chips bonded with waterproof resin binders under heat and pressure; sanded faces; thickness as required; use for countertops and back splash.
B.
Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as required. 1. Use for components not indicated as another material. 2. Use as backing for plastic laminate unless otherwise indicated.
2.04 LAMINATE MATERIALS A.
Manufacturers: 1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com. 2. Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar : www.nevamar.com. 3. Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com. 4. Nevemar/Pionite. www.nevemar.com 5. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
B.
High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications.
13032-2
06 41 00 - 2
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
C.
Provide specific types as follows: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness, color as selected, finish as selected. 2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, color as selected, finish as selected. 3. Post-Formed Horizontal Surfaces: HGP, 0.048 nominal thickness, color as selected, finish as selected. 4. Post-Formed Vertical Surfaces: VGP, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, colors as scheduled, finish as scheduled. 5. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness (melamine), color as selected, finish as selected. 6. Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch nominal thickness (melamine), undecorated; for application to concealed backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate.
2.05 COUNTERTOPS A.
Solid Surfaces: Specified in Section 06 61 00.
B.
Plastic Laminate Countertops: Medium density industrial particle board substrate covered with HPDL. Back/end splash shall be coved joint. Countertop edge shall be post formed with self edge economy.
2.06 ACCESSORIES A.
Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI/AWMAC to suit application.
B.
Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded 3mm PVC, flat shaped; smooth finish; of width to match component thickness. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Use at all door, drawer and front edge of shelves (except wood shelves receive hardwood edge) and all face frames.
C.
Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
D.
Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome-plated finish in exposed locations.
E.
Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
F.
Fabric wrapped cork for back wall of display case. 1. 1/8 inch cork mounted on ¼ inch hard board. 2. Burlap: Tightly woven, flame retardant treated. Color as selected by A/E.
2.07 HARDWARE A.
Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as indicated for quality grade specified.
B.
Adjustable Shelf Supports: Double pin side-mounted system using multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated shelf rests, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. Load rating to be 300 lbs. per support without failure. 1. Product: #55 Double Pin or HD Double Pin manufactured by Allenfield Manufacturing and Development.
C.
Drawer and Door Pulls: U-shaped, 4" centers. 1. Product: Model No. 38, B26D manufactured by Ives. Comparable products by: 2. Hafele
D.
Recessed door pulls. 1. Ives 227 flush pull 2. Hafele 58551 recessed pull. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
E.
Cabinet Locks: Surface mount deadbolt or cam lock with keyed cylinder 5 pin tumbler, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finishsteel with satin finish. Coordinate any required grouping with owner and adjust master key quantities as required. 1. Olympus locks or comparable. www.olympus-lock.com
F.
Catches: Magnetic. Install one at base and wall cabinets, two at tall storage units. 1. Product: 326 Mighty Might Heavy Duty Magnetic Latch or comparable, manufactured by Ives.
G.
Catches: Elbow; Ives #2 Elbow Latch. Install at double doors with locks.
13032-2
06 41 00 - 3
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
H.
Drawer Slides: 1. Type: Combination metal and roller bearing, three-quarter extension. 2. File Drawers: Combination metal and roller bearing, full extension with over travel, 150 lb. Accuride 4034 Series or comparable. 3. All other drawers: 100 lb. 4. Mounting: Side mounted. 5. Stops: Integral type. 6. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type. a. Products: 1) Blum; Product 230 Series or comparable by; 2) Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com. 3) Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com. 4) Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com. b. See Division 1 for substitution procedure
I.
Hinges: 5 knuckle type, institutional style, hospital tipped, stainless steel with satin finish. 1. Products: a. Rockford Process Control (RPC): www.rockfordprocess.com. b. Hardware Resources: www.hardwareresources.com. c. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
J.
Sliding Glass Door Track Assemblies: Upper and lower track of satin anodized aluminum, with matching shoe equipped with nylon rollers. 1. Product comparable to components available from CR Laurence Co. Inc. www.crlaurence.com
2.08 FABRICATION A.
Cabinet Style: Flush overlay.
B.
Base Cabinets: 1. Construct in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom quality.
C.
Wall Cabinets: 1. Underside of wall cabinets shall be Type "C" flush with finish applied after assembly. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard construction to reinforce cabinets for wall attachment, minimum two, full width 3/4" thick x 3", glued and mechanically fastened at cabinet back. 3. Wall cabinet doors shall extend beyond the bottom of cabinet the depth of recess for under cabinet light. See detail on drawings.
D.
Drawer Construction Technique: dovetail or doweled. 1. Bottoms: 1/4" Veneer core panel product, "B" face hardwood veneer or 1/4" medium density fiberboard with thermoset decorative overlay. 2. Bottoms shall be rabbeted into sides, front and back. Staple and glue. 3. Reinforcement; 1/2 inch thick under-bottom stiffners, one at 24 inch drawers, two at 36 inch drawers and four at 48 inch drawers.
E.
Shelves-3/4": Finish to match inside face of cabinet. All shelves shall be full depth of cabinet. 1. Solid Lumber to 36" long 2. Veneer Core Plywood to 36" long with hardwood edge regardless of finish. 3. Medium Density Particleboard/Fiberboard to 32" long
F.
Shelves-1": Finish to match inside face of cabinet. All shelves shall be full depth of cabinet. 1. Solid lumber 36" to 48" long 2. Veneer Core Plywood 36" to 48" long with hardwood edge regardless of finish. 3. Medium Density Particleboard/Fiberboard 32" to 42"
G.
Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings.
H.
Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length.
I.
Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.
13032-2
06 41 00 - 4
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
J.
Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Where countertop length exceeds manufacturer's maximum sheet length Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cutouts. 1. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. 2. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.
K.
Matching Wood Grain: Comply with requirements of quality standard for specified Grade exclusively.
L.
Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center.
M. Coordinate cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify that specified fixtures fit in base cabinets. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges. 2.09 SHOP FINISHING A.
Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B.
On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B.
Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.
B.
Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.
C.
Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.
D.
Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
E.
Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
F.
Coordinate placement of fixtures and items required in other divisions.
G.
Where casework meets wall surfaces, set with uniform space not to exceed 1/8 inch. Seal all joints to a slightly concave joint. Use backer rod where required. Refer to Section 07 90 05 for sealant type.
H.
Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
I.
Site glaze glass materials using the Interior Dry method specified in Section 08 80 00.
3.03 ADJUSTING A.
Adjust installed work.
B.
Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
3.04 CLEANING A.
Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. END OF SECTION
13032-2
06 41 00 - 5
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 06 61 00 SIMULATED STONE FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Cast plastic washroom vanities with integral sink, counter top, and protection panels.
B.
Composition Window Sills
C.
Solid surface shower wall panels.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2013a.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, thicknesses, required clearances, tolerances, materials, colors, finishes, fabrication details, field jointing, adjacent construction, methods of support, integration of components, and anchorages.
C.
Product Data: Provide data on specified component products, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples representative of, 6x6 inch in size, illustrating color, texture, and finish.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation of opening required, rough-in sizes; tolerances for item placement, temporary bracing of components.
F.
Maintenance Data: Indicate list of approved cleaning materials and procedures required; list of substances that are harmful to the component materials. 1. Include instructions for stain removal, surface and gloss restoration.
G.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
H.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 WARRANTY A.
Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Provide ten year manufacturer warranty for countertops against defects in workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Cast Plastic Fabrications: Vanities and window sills shall be single sourced.
B.
Vanity countertop with integral sink. Provide apron and back/endsplash as detailed. Sinks and countertops shall be same color. Refer to Master Color Shedule on ID Drawings for basis of design. Comparable products by prior approval from: 1. Dupont Corian. 2. Formica Surell 3. Nevemar Fountainhead 4. Vendura 5. LG Hi-Macs 6. Quarry Stone 7. InPro Decorative Surfaces 8. Sta-Care 9. Hanex
13032-2
06 61 00 - 1
SIMULATED STONE FABRICATIONS
10. See Division 1 for substitution procedure. C.
Window Sills: One piece 1/2 inch solid color composite material. Refer to Master Color Shedule on ID Drawings for basis of design. Comparable products by prior approval from: 1. Dupont Corian, Avonite, Formica Surell, Nevamar Fountainhead, LG Hi-Mac, Inpro Decorative Surfaces, Sta-Care, Heritage Stonecrafters.. 2. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 SHOWER WALL PANELS A.
Refer to Master Color Schedule for basis of design.
B.
Provide wet wall panel system of solid polymer components to include: panels, corner trim and panel edge trim. Dimensions of all components shall be as indicated on the drawings. Panels shall be formed from manufacturer's standard 1/4 inch thick wall panel products. Panels shall be full width and height with seams occurring only at the inside corners of the enclosure.
C.
Thickness: 1/4" minimum. 1. Hardness: 60, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2583. 2. Tensile strength: 4,200psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D638. 3. Water Absorption after 24 hours:.07%, when tested in accordance with ASTM D570. 4. Impact Resistance 1/2 Pound: No Fracture, when tested in accordance with NEMA LD3-3.3 5. Linear Thermal Expansion: 2.0 x 10-5, when tested in accordance with ASTM D696 6. High Temperature Resistance: Slight Effect, when tested in accordance with NEMA LD3-3.6 7. Boiling Water Resistance: No Effect, when tested in accordance with NEMA LD3-3.5 8. Stain Resistance: No Effect, when tested in accordance with NEMA LD3-3.9 9. Weight per sq. ft., 1/4 inch thickness: 2.2 pounds 10. Flame Spread: Class I, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84
D.
Provide matching inside corner trim molding to protect and conceal corner sealant.
E.
Provide matching finish trim from 1/2 thick solid surface material.
F.
Provide matching corner shampoo and soap holder cast from solid surface.
2.03 MATERIALS A.
Provide finished products having flame spread index of 35 and smoke developed index of 15, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 in thickness of 1/2 inch.
B.
Resin: Proprietary type, with integral coloring, stain resistant to domestic chemicals and cleaners.
C.
Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard two part type, cartridge dispensed.
2.04 FABRICATION - COUNTERTOPS A.
Fabricate components by mold to achieve shape and configuration.
B.
Drain location at sinks shall be towards back of sink to allow for ADA pipe protection panel installation under countertop.
C.
Gel coat the finish exposed surfaces smooth and polish to a gloss sheen.
D.
Radius corners and edges.
E.
Coordinate necessary penetrations with plumbing requirements. One piece fixture required.
F.
No cracked, chipped, broken, stained or defective material will be accepted.
G.
Color selections shall be minimum of 6 solid colors and 12 non-solid colors. Sinks and countertops shall be same color.
H.
Color match differences: Minimal
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.
Verify that joint preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable.
C.
Verify plumbing, mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work.
13032-2
06 61 00 - 2
SIMULATED STONE FABRICATIONS
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Provide anchoring devices for installation.
B.
Provide templates and rough-in measurements.
3.03 INSTALLATION A.
Install components in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Align work plumb and level.
C.
Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment.
D.
Shower panels shall be provided to heights shown on the drawings with no horizontal seaming. 1. Panels shall be full width and height with seams occurring only at the inside corners of the enclosure. Soap dish and shampoo shelf shall be of a configuration, shape, and location [as standard with the manufacturer's system. 2. Field cut panels as required for plumbing fixtures and bath accessories. 3. Apply a bead of adhesive around perimeter of solid surface panels, approximately 2 inches from panel edge. Apply another bead of adhesive across the center forming an X. Utilize panel manufacturer recommended hot melt glue for temporary adhesion of panels to substrate while adhesive cures. 4. Allow required curing time.
E.
Install window sills with clear silicone.
3.04 CLEANING A.
Clean and polish surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.05 PROTECTION A.
Do not permit construction near unprotected surfaces.
B.
After setting protect window sills with non-staining, easily removed covering.
C.
Replace damaged and defective work. END OF SECTION
13032-2
06 61 00 - 3
SIMULATED STONE FABRICATIONS
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 06 66 10 MANUFACTURED TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.
Section includes the furnishing and installation of textured wood grain look, stainable polyurethane trim products including but not limited to: 1. Flat Trim Boards 2. Corner Boards 3. Pot shelf 4. Brackets and corbels. 5. Beams 6. Column wraps 7. Rafter tails 8. Bottom trim board below cement board siding.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section - 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
C.
Section - 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry
D.
Section - 07 46 46 - Fiber Cement Siding: Installation of applicable trim from this section.
E.
Section - 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers
F.
Section - 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating
1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS A.
ASTM D256- Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics.
B.
ASTM D570- Water Absorption of Plastics.
C.
ASTM D635- Rate of Burning and/or Extent of Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
D.
ASTM D638- Tensile Properties of Plastics.
E.
ASTM D648- Deflection Temperature of Plastics under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position.
F.
ASTM D696- Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between 3 degrees C and 30 degrees C with a vitreous Silica Dilatometer.
G.
ASTM D790- Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
H.
ASTM D792- Density and Specific Gravity of Plastics by Displacement.
I.
ASTM D1761- Mechanical Fasteners in Wood.
J.
ASTM D2863- Limited Oxygen Index.
K.
ASTM D5420- Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight.
L.
ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
M. IBC 2009 1.04 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: A.
Tolerances - Finished surfaces for PVC flatness and cupping shall not vary more than >1/4 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3.05 m) and squareness 1/8 inch corner to corner when tested with a straight edge and shall be free from cracks, pits, chips, voids, depressions, bumps, ridges, waves, scratches, discoloration, and of other defacements.
B.
Products in this section shall comply with all requirements stipulated in the 2009 IBC.
C.
Trim shall be designed, engineered, fabricated and installed to conform to all state and local codes and the project drawings and specifications
13032-2
06 66 10 - 1
MANUFACTURED TRIM
1.05 SUBMITTALS: A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used including: storage and handling requirements and recommendations; preparation instructions and recommendations and installation methods.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing locations, profiles and product components, including but not limited to anchorage requirements, accessories and provisions for achieving desired finishes. Submit one set of CAD files for approval.
D.
Product Samples: For each finish profile and product specified, provide two samples representing the actual profile, product, pattern and finish specified. One set of approved samples will be returned to the contractor.
E.
Manufacturer’s Certificates: Provide manufacturer’s documentation to certify products submitted meet or exceed specified requirements.
F.
Test Reports: Submit manufacturer’s test reports for trim products from an accredited independent testing agency.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have not less than 10 years successful experience in producing the type of prefabricated components required for project applications equivalent to the requirements for this project.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Installer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience installing the type of prefabricated components specified.
C.
Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Include mock-up for each profile combination indicated on the drawings. 3. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color and sheen are approved by Architect. 4. Rework mock-up areas as required to produce acceptable work. 5. Mock-up may remain as finished work if approved by Architect. 6. Pre-installation meetings: Conduct a pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions and manufacturer’s warranty requirements.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A.
Deliver all materials in original packaging, unopened with no visible damage.
B.
Label each package with product contents and stock number of contents, with warranty, installation, handling and storage recommendations enclosed, on-line or on packaging.
C.
Allow for receiving, unloading, handling, and movement to approved storage areas within the project, and final movement to point of installation.
D.
Store and protect all materials in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements for environmental and physical protection. Keep temporary protective covering in place.
E.
Store products on flat level surface to prevent warping.
F.
Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A.
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s recommendations.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements and openings by field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings.
C.
Allow at least 24 hours for materials to adapt to conditions at project site prior to installation.
D.
Protect uncoated portions of materials from ultraviolet exposure.
13032-2
06 66 10 - 2
MANUFACTURED TRIM
1.09 WARRANTY: A.
Upon completion of work, provide a written Manufacturer’s Limited Warranty for products installed as part of this project to the Original Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Basis of Design: Fypon, LLC, Timber Polyurethane products. www.fypon.com.
B.
CertainTeed Corp.: www.certainteed.com/products/trim
C.
See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 MATERIALS: A.
Manufactured trim shall be homogenous and free of voids, cracks and foreign inclusions and other defects. Edges must be square and top and bottom surfaces shall be flat with no convex or concave deviations.
B.
Provide wood grain finish.
C.
Manufactured trim and features: 1. Trim and features in sizes as detailed on drawings. Contractors option to install features that apply to applicable conditions in lieu of constructing from individual boards, i.e. column or beam wraps in lieu of boards.
2.03 ACCESSORIES: A.
Fasteners: 1. Use stainless steel, smooth shank, screw, annular threaded, or spiral nails. Hot dip galvanized nails may also be used. 2. Staples, small brads wire nails and ring shank nails not allowed. 3. Fasteners should be long enough to penetrate the substrate a minimum of 1 inch. 4. Use of power nail guns is acceptable when adjusted to prevent overdriving the nail into the product. 5. Use two fasteners per every framing member of trim board applications. Use additional fasteners for trim boards 12 inches or greater. 6. Install fasteners no more than 2 inches from the end of the board 7. Fasten trim into a flat, solid substrate. Fastening trim into hollow or uneven areas must be avoided. 8. Pre-drilling is recommended when using large fasteners or if product is being installed in temperatures below 40 degrees F. 9. Adhesives: a. Glue all trim joints with a urethane based adhesive approved by the manufacturer. b. Glue joints should be secured with a fastener and/or fastened on each side of the joint to allow adequate bonding time. c. Surfaces to be glued should be smooth, clean and in complete contact with each other. 10. Sealants: a. As specified in section 07 90 05.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: A.
13032-2
Site Verification of Conditions. 1. Prior to the start of installation, inspect all preceding work to ensure that there are no conditions which will cause an unsatisfactory installation of work that would affect performance of installed trim. 2. Notify Architect in writing of any unacceptable condition. 3. Do not install any work involving trim products until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected and acceptable for proper installation of work. 4. Contractor shall be responsible for correcting or replacing all unacceptable work involving trim products, which was installed over unsatisfactory conditions at no cost to Owner.
06 66 10 - 3
MANUFACTURED TRIM
3.02 PREPARATION: A.
Protect surrounding and adjacent work as required to prevent damage to preceding work during execution of this work.
B.
Perform all preparation necessary for a successful installation of products as specified in manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION: A.
Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions applicable to the products and applications indicated in this section.
B.
Coordinate installation of products with other contractors and provide proper accommodation for following work by other trades.
C.
Cutting: 1. Use blades that are designed for cutting wood or plastic. 2. Carbide tipped blades are recommended. fine tooth blades 3. Drilling: a. Use standard wood or metal drill bits. b. Avoid heat build up from friction. c. Drill bits designed for drilling rigid PVC pipe should not be used. 4. Routing: a. Use standard router bits machining the product. b. Multi-fluted carbide bits are recommended. 5. Edge Finishing: a. Edges can be finished by sanding, grinding or filing with standard woodworking tools. 6. Nail Location: a. Minimum of 16 inch center nailing pattern to studs shall be used. b. Fasteners shall be kept ¾ inch away from the board edge and staggered slightly to reduce the chance of cracking along the line of fasteners as the material expands and contracts. 7. Gluing: a. All joints shall be glued to prevent joint separation. Provide fasteners on each side of the joint to allow adequate bonding time. b. Whenever possible, adhesives should be applied to the backside of the trim at the joints to help hold the trim at the joints forcing it to expand and contract in the center preventing unsightly gaps at the joints. c. When bonding together two smooth or non-machined surfaces of the PVC board clean the surfaces with acetone. d. On long lengths of trim, like corner boards or fascia, a scarf joint should be used. 8. Thermal Expansion and Contraction: a. Allow 3/16 inch per 18 foot for expansion and contraction. 9. Sealant: a. Install sealant as specified in section 07 90 05. 10. Finishing: a. For small blemishes, file holes with an approved exterior spackling. b. For larger holes or gaps, fill with an approved urethane acrylic sealant. c. Trim may be painted to achieve a custom color. Choose a paint color with a Light Reflectance Value (LRC) of 55% or higher to avoid excessive solar heating of installed products. Using paint with a LRV of 54% or lower will void the product warranty. Refer to Section 09 90 00. d. Follow paint manufacturer’s recommendations for applying paint. 11. Adhesives: a. Install adhesives at trim joints and for fastening in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for proper installation of products. Use only adhesives approved for use by manufacturer.
13032-2
06 66 10 - 4
MANUFACTURED TRIM
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A.
After installation, check all work for flaws and defects.
B.
Repair all defective work.
C.
Remove and replace all damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by the Project Architect.
3.05 PROTECTION: A.
Install temporary protective materials necessary to prevent significant damage to materials installed in this work. Remove protection when required to permit project completion.
3.06 FINISH A.
See Section 09 90 00 for finish application.
3.07 CLEANING: A.
Remove all labels and protection materials.
B.
Clean all surfaces following manufacturer’s recommendations prior to final project completion. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish.
C.
Dispose properly of all debris generated by this work, protection materials and cleaning materials.
3.08 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS: A.
Follow manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations on painting, repairing, and maintaining all material installed under this Section. END OF SECTION
13032-2
06 66 10 - 5
MANUFACTURED TRIM
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 06 82 00 DECORATED THERMOPLASTIC SHEETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
High impact thermoplastic sheets.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
ASTM E 84
C.
ASTM D 5420
1.03 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on specified component products.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, adjacent construction, materials, thicknesses, fabrication details, required clearances, field jointing, tolerances, colors, finishes, methods of support, integration of adjacent components, and anchorages.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in architectural glass fiber and resin components with 3 years documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Glass Fiber and Resin Fabrications: 1. Refer to Master Color Schedule on ID Drawings for basis of design. 2. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 MATERIALS A.
High impact thermoplastic.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install fabrications in accordance with shop drawings and fabricator's instructions.
3.03 CLEANING A.
Clean components of foreign material without damaging finished surface.
B.
Hand rub smooth surfaces with polishing cream.
C.
Clean fabrications in accordance with fabricator's instructions.
3.04 PROTECTION A.
Place protective structural covering over installed units.
3.05 SCHEDULES END OF SECTION
13032-2
06 82 00 - 1
DECORATED THERMOPLASTIC SHEETS
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 07 18 00 TRAFFIC COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Coating for waterproofing and traffic surface
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers- Tension; 2006a (Reapproved 2013).
C.
ASTM D903 - Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds; 1998 (Reapproved 2010).
D.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2013a.
E.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Include product characteristics and limitations. Identify dissolving solvents, fuels, and potential destructive compounds.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include special field conditions required to install traffic membrane and potential incompatibilities with adjacent materials.
D.
Maintenance Data: Include procedures for stain removal, repairing surface, and cleaning.
E.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing installation of traffic membrane, with minimum 3 years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Maintain storage area at minimum ambient temperature of 55 degrees F.
B.
Keep away from fire or open flame.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Do not install materials when temperature is below 50 degrees F or above 90 degrees F.
B.
Maintain this temperature range, 24 hours before, during and 72 hours after application.
C.
Restrict traffic from area where materials are being installed or are curing.
1.07 WARRANTY A.
Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Polyurethane Traffic Coating: 1. Neogard Division of Jones-Blair Company: Floor Tuff. www.neogard.com. 2. Pacific Polymers International, Inc: Elasto-Deck 5000 M.R.. www.pacpoly.com. 3. Tremco Global Sealants: Vulkem 360NF/951NF. www.tremcosealants.com. 4. Carlisle. CCW-5113. www.carlisle-ccw.com 5. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 TRAFFIC COATINGS A.
13032-2
Pedestrian Coating: Fluid-applied polyurethane with slip-reducing aggregate surface. 1. Finished Coating Thickness: 50 mils, minimum. 07 18 00 - 1
TRAFFIC COATINGS
2.03 MATERIALS A.
Membrane: Fluid applied polyurethane; waterproof; color as selected; 1. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 400 minimum psi. 2. Moisture Vapor Permeability (ASTM E96/E96M): 1.0 perms. 3. Adhesive Bond Peel Strength (ASTM D903): 14 lb/in width maximum.
B.
Topping: Polyurethane compound.
C.
Surfacing: Aggregrate recommended and supplied by manufacturer.
D.
Filler and Primer: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
E.
Sealant: type, as recommended by membrane manufacturer, and compatible with system and adjacent materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that substrate is ready to receive work, surface is clean, dry and free of substances that could adversely affect bond.
B.
Do not begin work until concrete substrate has cured at least 28 days and moisture content is 10 percent or less.
C.
Test concrete surfaces with litmus paper for acceptable level of alkalinity.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Clean substrate surface free of foreign matter.
B.
Patch concrete substrate with filler to produce surface conducive to bond.
C.
Protect adjacent surfaces.
3.03 INSTALLATION A.
Apply system materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Apply primer to prepared substrate to a dry film thickness of as recommended by manufacturer mils.
C.
When primer is tack free, apply one base coat of membrane to a total minimum dry film thickness of 10 mils.
D.
Extend primer, base and top coats up intersecting and perimeter vertical surfaces, 4 inches. Terminate top edge in a straight line.
E.
Apply surfacing to top coat before set.
F.
Apply sealant to junction of horizontal and intersecting surfaces to achieve watertight seal.
3.04 PROTECTION A.
Do not permit traffic over unprotected surfaces for 24 hours. Protect from heavy pedestrian traffic for 4 days. END OF SECTION
13032-2
07 18 00 - 2
TRAFFIC COATINGS
SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Board insulation at perimeter foundation wall.
B.
Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall, ceiling, and roof construction.
C.
Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof.
D.
Low rise expanding foam for joint and crevice filling.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt insulation.
C.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Rigid insulation sheathing at exterior wall.
D.
Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Separate weather barrier materials.
E.
Section 07 53 00 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Insulation specified as part of roofing system.
F.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Insulation as part of fire-rated through-penetration assemblies.
G.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2014.
B.
ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.
C.
ASTM D1621 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics
D.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2013a.
E.
ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2012.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation.
1.06 SEQUENCING A.
Sequence work to ensure weather barrier materials are in place before beginning or continuation of work in this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPLICATIONS A.
Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Extruded polystyrene board.
B.
Insulation in Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.
C.
Insulation in Wood Framed Ceiling Structure: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.
2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A.
13032-2
Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation (Foundation Walls): ASTM C 578, Type IV; at foundation walls. Extruded polystyrene board with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 07 21 00 - 1
THERMAL INSULATION
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
7.
Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. Board Thickness: As noted on drawings. Compressive Resistance: 25 psi at foundation walls. Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com. b. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. c. Pactiv Building Products: www.pactiv.com/green-guard/. d. DiversiFoam Products: www.diversifoam.com See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A.
Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit. 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for facing, if any. 4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero. 5. Facing: Aluminum foil, flame spread 25 rated; one side. 6. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. d. or equal. 7. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
B.
Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible or semi-rigid preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Manufacturers: a. Johns Manville International, Inc.; MinWool Sound Attenuation Fire Batts: www.jm.com. b. Thermafiber, Inc: www.thermafiber.com. c. ROXUL, Inc; ComfortBatt: www.rspec.com. d. ROXUL, Inc; Roxul AFB: www.rspec.com. 3. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.04 FOAMED-IN PLACE INSULATION A.
Insulation joint and gap filler. 1. PUR FILL Fireblock Foam: www.todol.com 2. BASF Polyurethane Foam Enterprises LLC; CF-178 Series and Zerodraft: www.foamenterprises.com. 3. Demilec (USA) LLC; SEALection 500: www.demilecusa.com. 4. North Carolina Foam Industries; ThermalStop: www.ncfi.com. 5. Dow; Great Stuff Pro: www.greatstuff.dow.com 6. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.05 ACCESSORIES A.
Sheet Vapor Retarder: Clear polyethylene film for above grade application, 6 mil thick.
B.
Tape: Polyethylene self-adhering type, 2 inch wide.
C.
Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation and adhesive.
B.
Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond.
13032-2
07 21 00 - 2
THERMAL INSULATION
3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER A.
Insulation Over Waterproofing: Installed under Section 07 12 00.
B.
Adhere a 6 inch wide strip of polyethylene sheet over construction, control, and expansion joints with double beads of adhesive each side of joint. 1. Tape seal joints. 2. Extend sheet full height of joint.
C.
Apply manufacturer's recommended adhesive to back of boards: 1. Three continuous beads per board length. 2. Full bed 1/8 inch thick.
D.
Install boards vertical or horizontal to maximize material use on foundation perimeter. 1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact. 2. Install in running bond pattern. 3. Tape joints. 4. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions.
E.
Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. Fill all gaps and voids with expanding foam insulation.
3.03 BATT INSTALLATION A.
Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
C.
Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
D.
Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation.
E.
Install with factory applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members.
F.
Staple or nail facing flanges in place at maximum 6 inches on center.
G.
Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.
H.
At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face.
I.
Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder.
J.
Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place.
K.
Coordinate work of this section with construction of weather barrier seal specified in Section 07 25 00.
3.04 GAP AND CREVICE FILLING FOR AIR SEALING A.
Low Rise Expanding Foam: Where applicable install low rise foam to fill gaps and crevices. Follow manufacturer recommendations at windows and doors to prevent swelling of frames and causing doors or windows to become inoperable.
3.05 PROTECTION A.
Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION
13032-2
07 21 00 - 3
THERMAL INSULATION
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Air Barriers: Materials that form a system to stop passage of air through exterior walls, joints between exterior walls and roof, and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Vapor barrier under concrete slabs on grade.
C.
Section 04 70 00 - Manufactured masonry: Water resistive barrier behind stone system.
D.
Section 07 21 00 - Thermal Insulation: Vapor retarder installed in conjunction with batt insulation.
E.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and installation techniques.
1.03 DEFINITIONS A.
Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water-resistive barriers, air barriers, or vapor retarders.
B.
Air Barrier: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vapor permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. Note: For the purposes of this specification, vapor impermeable air barriers are classified as vapor retarders.
C.
Water-Resistive Barrier: Water-shedding barrier made of material that is moisture-resistant, to the degree specified, intended to be installed to shed water without sealed seams.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
AATCC Test Method 127 - Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test; 2008.
B.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012.
C.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2012.
D.
ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2011.
1.05 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics.
C.
Shop Drawings: Provide drawings of special joint conditions.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation methods.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before, during and after installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR BARRIER ASSEMBLIES A.
Air Barrier: 1. On outside surface of sheathing of exterior stud walls, use air barrier sheet, mechanically fastened type.
2.02 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER-RESISTIVE) A.
13032-2
Air Barrier Sheet, Mechanically Fastened: 1. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. 2. Water Vapor Permeance: 5 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M Procedure A (desiccant method). 3. Water Penetration Resistance: Withstand a water head of 21 inches, minimum, for minimum of 5 hours, when tested in accordance with AATCC 127. 4. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimum of 9 months weather exposure. 07 25 00 - 1
AIR BARRIERS
5. 6.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Products: a. DuPont Building Innovations; Tyvek Commercial Wrap with FlexWrap NF, StraightFlash, StraightFlash VF, Tyvek Commercial Sealant, Tyvek Wrap Caps, and Tyvek Tape: www.dupont.com. b. National Shelter Products, Inc.; DRYLine RainDrain: www.drylinewrap.com. c. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.03 ACCESSORIES A.
Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive sheet flashing complying with ASTM D1970, except slip resistance requirement is waived if not installed on a roof. 1. Products: a. DuPont Building Innovations; FlexWrap NF: www.dupont.com. b. DuPont Building Innovations; StraightFlash: www.dupont.com. c. DuPont Building Innovations; StraightFlash VF: www.dupont.com. d. Intertape Polymer Group, Inc; NovaFlash SA Universal Self-Adhered Flashing (25 mil): www.itape.com. e. Intertape Polymer Group, Inc; NovaFlash SA Ultra Self-Adhered Flashing (7-8 mil): www.itape.com. f. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
B.
Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by material manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with proper installation.
B.
Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION A.
Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Air Barriers: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.
C.
Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior: 1. Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal. 2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches. 3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12 inches. 4. Attach to framed construction with fasteners extending through sheathing into framing. Space fasteners at 12 to 18 inches on center along each framing member supporting sheathing. 5. For applications specified to be air tight, seal seams, laps, penetrations, tears, and cuts with selfadhesive tape; use only large-headed, gasketed fasteners recommended by the manufacturer. 6. Where stud framing rests on concrete or masonry, extend lower edge of sheet at least 4 inches below bottom of framing and seal to foundation with sealant. 7. Install water-resistive barrier over jamb flashings. 8. Install air barrier and vapor retarder UNDER jamb flashings. 9. Install head flashings under weather barrier. 10. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into opening; at head, seal sheet over flange and flashing.
D.
Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Air Barriers: 1. Install self-adhesive flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches onto air barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges. 2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with at least 4 inches wide; do not seal sill flange.
13032-2
07 25 00 - 2
AIR BARRIERS
3. 4. 5. 6.
At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal air barrier to all sides of opening framing, using self-adhesive flashing at least 9 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing. At head of openings, install self-adhesive flashing under air barrier extending at least 2 inches beyond face of jambs; seal air barrier to flashing. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing, using joint sealant over backer rod. Service and Other Penetrations: Fill all annular space with spray foam insulation and trim flush with surface. Form self-adhesive flashing around penetrating item and seal to air barrier surface.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Do not cover installed air barriers until observation by A/E have been completed.
3.05 PROTECTION A.
Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION
13032-2
07 25 00 - 3
AIR BARRIERS
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 07 31 13 ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
SBS modified asphalt shingle roofing.
B.
Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment, and valley protection.
C.
Associated metal flashings and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing.
C.
Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Edge and cap flashings, Miscellaneous flashings and soffits.
D.
Section 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013.
B.
ASTM D3161 - Standard Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Asphalt Shingles (Fan-Induced Method); 2013.
C.
ASTM D3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced With Mineral Granules; 2010a.
D.
ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2012)e1.
E.
ICC-ES AC188 - Acceptance Criteria for Roof Underlayments; 2012.
F.
NRCA MS104 - The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; 2001, Fifth Edition, with interim updates.
G.
SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2012.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish texture/pattern; for color selection.
D.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation criteria and procedures.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Shingles: Two bundles of each type and color.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Perform Work in accordance with the recommendations of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Do not install shingles or eave protection membrane when surface temperatures are below 45 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHINGLES A.
13032-2
Manufacturers: 1. Malarky; Legacy & Legacy. Local distribution-Insulation Plus 608-781-0500 2. Atlas Roofing Corporation: www.atlasroofing.com. 3. See Division 1 for substitution procedure. 07 31 13 - 1
ASPHALT SHINGLES
B.
SBS Modified Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt-coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM D3462; Class A fire resistance. 1. Wind Resistance: Class F, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3161 or Class 4 protection per ASTM 2218.. 2. Warranted Wind Speed: 110 mph. 3. 20 year 3M Scotch Guard protection. 4. Weight: 275 lb/100 sq ft. 5. Self-sealing type. 6. Style: Laminated overlay. 7. Color: As selected by A/E.
2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A.
Eave Protection Membrane: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D1970; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene sheet top surface. 1. Manufacturers: a. Grace Construction Products; Ice and Water Shield. b. GAF; Weather Watch XT c. Carlisle; WIP 100. d. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
B.
Underlayment: Synthetic non-asphaltic sheet, intended by manufacturer for mechanically fastened roofing underlayment without sealed seams. 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with requirements of ICC-ES AC188 for non-self-adhesive sheet. 2. Self Sealability: Passing nail sealability test specified in ASTM D1970. 3. Ultraviolet Resistance and Weatherability: Approved in writing by manufacturer for exposure to weather for minimum of 6 months. 4. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passing test specified in ASTM D1970. 5. Fasteners: Synthetic underlayment shall be secured with cap nails or coil nails.
C.
Flexible Flashing: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D1970; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene sheet top surface.
2.03 ACCESSORIES A.
Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, of hot dipped zinc coated steel, minimum 3/8 inch head diameter and 0.105 inch shank diameter, 1-1/4 inch long.
B.
Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, asphalt roof cement.
C.
Ridge Vents and Roof to Wall Vents: Plastic, extruded with vent openings that do not permit direct water or weather entry; flanged to receive shingles. 1. GAF: Cobra Snow Country. 2. OwensCorning: VentSure Heat and Moisture Ridge Vents with Weather PROtector Moisture Barrier. 3. Metal Era: High Perf Ridge Vent and High Perf Ridge Vent-Slope to High Wall Version. 4. Lomanco; LOR30/OR4 5. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
D.
Roof Vents: Prefinished aluminum attic vent installed on shingle roof surface. 1. Active Ventilation Products Inc, Pop Vent. 2. Empire Ventilation Equipment Co. Inc.: 40RLA. 3. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.04 METAL FLASHINGS A.
Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal eave edge, gable edge, and valley flashings. 1. Form flashings to protect roofing materials from physical damage and shed water. 2. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. 3. Coat concealed surfaces of flashings with bituminous paint.
B.
Shingle Tins: Industry standard for installation at walls adjacent to roof slope.
C.
Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color.
13032-2
07 31 13 - 2
ASPHALT SHINGLES
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
B.
Verify that deck is of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners.
C.
Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface.
D.
Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
At areas where eave protection membrane is to be adhered to substrate, cover knot holes with sheet metal.
B.
Broom clean deck surfaces before installing underlayment or eave protection.
C.
Install eave edge flashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches and seal with plastic cement. Secure flange with nails spaced 12 inches on center.
3.03 INSTALLATION - EAVE PROTECTION MEMBRANE A.
Install eave protection membrane from eave edge to minimum 3 ft up-slope beyond interior face of exterior wall.
B.
Install eave protection membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.04 INSTALLATION - UNDERLAYMENT A.
At Roof Slopes Greater Than 4:12: Install underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof, with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place. Weather lap minimum 4 inches over eave protection.
B.
Items projecting through or mounted on roof: Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic cement.
3.05 INSTALLATION - VALLEY PROTECTION A.
Install valley protection in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
B.
Install one layer of sheet metal flashing, minimum 24 inches wide, centered over open valley and crimped to guide water. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inch wide band of lap cement along each edge of first, press roll roofing into cement, and nail in place minimum 18 inches on center, 1 inch from edges.
C.
Install eave edge protection membrane at both sides of all valleys overlapping 6 inches at valley.
3.06 INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES A.
Install flashings in accordance with NRCA requirements and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements.
B.
Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic cement.
C.
Secure in place with nails at 12 inches on center. Conceal fastenings.
D.
Items Projecting Through or Mounted on Roofing: Flash and seal weather tight with plastic cement.
3.07 INSTALLATION - SHINGLES A.
Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce double thickness over full roof area. Provide double course of shingles at eaves.
C.
Project first course of shingles 1/4 inch beyond roof edge flashing.
D.
Extend shingles 1/4 inch beyond face of gable roof edge flashing.
E.
Extend shingles on both slopes across valley in a weave pattern and fasten. Extend shingles a minimum of 12 inches beyond valley center line to achieve woven valley, concealing the valley protection.
F.
Cap ridges with individual shingles, maintaining 5 inch weather exposure. Place to avoid exposed nails.
G.
Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting through roof with weather tight placement of counterflashings.
H.
Complete installation to provide weather tight service. END OF SECTION
13032-2
07 31 13 - 3
ASPHALT SHINGLES
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 07 46 46 FIBER CEMENT SIDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Wood-fiber cement siding.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section..
B.
Section 01 23 00 - Alternates: Alternate bid for fiber cement siding.
C.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Siding substrate.
D.
Section 06 66 20 - Manufactured Trim: Exterior manufactured trim.
E.
Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Weather barrier under siding.
F.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
G.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Fiber Cement Sheets; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Manufacturer's requirements for related materials to be installed by others. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods, including nail patterns.
C.
Test Report: Applicable model code authority evaluation report (e.g. ICC-ES).
D.
Maintenance Instructions: Periodic inspection recommendations and maintenance procedures.
E.
Warranty: Submit copy of manufacturer’s warranty, made out in Owner’s name, showing that it has been registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section with minimum 3 years of experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Store products under waterproof cover and elevated above grade, on a flat surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIDING A.
13032-2
Lap Siding: Individual horizontal boards made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II; with machined edges, for nail attachment. 1. Style: Standard lap style. 2. Texture: Wood grain. 3. Length: 12 ft, nominal. 4. Height (as required for 7 inch exposure). 5. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal. 6. Finish: Factory applied primer. 7. Warranty: 50 year limited; transferable. 8. Lap Siding Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. James Hardie Building Products, Inc: www.jameshardie.com. c. Nichiha USA, Inc: www.nichiha.com. d. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
07 46 46 - 1
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
B.
Shingle Panels: Panels giving appearance of multiple shingles made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II; with machined edges, for nail attachment. 1. Style: Random width, straight edge. 2. Texture: Wood grain. 3. Length: 48 inches. 4. Height (as required for 7 inch exposure). 5. Width (Height): 7 inches. 6. Thickness: 1/4 inch, nominal. 7. Finish: Factory applied primer. 8. Warranty: 50 year limited; transferable. 9. Shingle Panel Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. James Hardie Building Products, Inc: www.jameshardie.com. c. Nichiha USA, Inc: www.nichiha.com. d. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 ACCESSORIES A.
Trim: As specified in Section 06 66 10 Manufactured Trim.
B.
Fasteners: Galvanized or corrosion resistant; length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4 inch.
C.
Joint Sealer: As specified in Section 07 90 05.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A.
Examine substrate and clean and repair as required to eliminate conditions that would be detrimental to proper installation.
B.
Verify that air barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly.
C.
Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
D.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Install sheet metal flashing: 1. Above door and window trim and casings. 2. Above horizontal trim in field of siding.
3.03 INSTALLATION A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 1. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage. 2. Install in accordance with conditions stated in model code evaluation report applicable to location of project. 3. Use trim details indicated on drawings. 4. Touch up all field cut edges before installing. 5. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage.
B.
Over Wood and Wood-Composite Sheathing: Fasten siding through sheathing into studs.
C.
Over Foam Sheathing: Read and comply with sheathing manufacturer's recommendations. 1. For sheathing of 1 inch (25 mm) thickness or less, nail through sheathing into studs using correspondingly longer nails.
D.
Coordinate installation of all head and sill flashings installation as detailed.
E.
Allow space between both ends of siding panels that butt against trim for thermal movement; seal joint between panel and trim with exterior grade sealant.
F.
Joints in Horizontal Siding: Avoid joints in lap siding except at corners; where joints are inevitable stagger joints between successive courses.
G.
Do not install siding less than 6 inches from surface of ground nor closer than 1 inch to roofs, patios, porches, and other surfaces where water may collect.
13032-2
07 46 46 - 2
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
H.
After installation, seal all joints except lap joints of lap siding. Seal around all penetrations. Paint all exposed cut edges.
I.
Finish Painting: Specified in Section 09 90 00.
3.04 PROTECTION A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
13032-2
07 46 46 - 3
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 07 53 00 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Elastomeric roofing membrane, adhered conventional application.
B.
Insulation, flat and tapered.
C.
Vapor retarder.
D.
Flashings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 05 31 00 - Steel Deck: Acoustical deck insulation.
C.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers and curbs.
D.
Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2014.
B.
ASTM D4637/D4637M - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof Membrane; 2013.
C.
FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2007.
D.
NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation, surfacing, and fasteners.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate joint or termination detail conditions and conditions of interface with other materials.
D.
Certification that roof system meets 72 mph wind warranty, Class 1 FM I-90 requirements.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
F.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures, humidity, wind velocity during application, and supplementary instructions given.
H.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
C.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section: 1. With minimum five years documented experience. 2. Approved by membrane manufacturer.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact.
B.
Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
C.
Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight.
13032-2
07 53 00 - 1
ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather.
B.
Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or above 90 degrees F.
C.
Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring.
D.
Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day.
1.08 WARRANTY A.
See General Requirements, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Type/Term: 1. Provide a 20 year Roofing System (NDL) Warranty. Warranty shall include membrane, roof insulation, and all other products supplied by manufacturer/installer. (ALL DETAILS TO BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURERS SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 20 YEAR WARRANTY.)
C.
Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
EPDM Manufacturers/Installers: 1. Any of the following are acceptable using comparable systems and materials to the Firestone system as described herein. 2. “Sure Seal Black" (60 mil), Class “A”, Carlisle SynTec Inc. 3. "RubberGard" (60 mil), Class “A”, Firestone Ind. Products. 4. “Versigard Adhered” (60 mil), Class “A”, Versico. 5. “Ultragard Adhered” (60 mil), Class "A", Johns Manville. 6. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
B.
Insulation: 1. Product/Producer: ISO 95+ Polyisocyanurate Insulation by Firestone or comparable product that complies with full system warranty. 2. Atlas Roofing Corporation: www.atlasroofing.com. 3. Hunter Panels, LLC: www.hpanels.com. 4. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 ROOFING - UNBALLASTED APPLICATIONS A.
Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: One ply membrane fully adhered.
2.03 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS A.
Membrane: Ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer (EPDM); externally reinforced with fabric; complying with minimum properties of ASTM D4637. 1. Thickness: 0.060 inch.
B.
Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
C.
Vapor Retarder: Plastic, 6 mil minimum; compatible with roofing and insulation materials.
D.
Flexible Flashing Material: Material approved by manufacturer for warranty compliance;
2.04 INSULATION A.
13032-2
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, cellulose felt or glass fiber mat both faces; Grade 2 and with the following characteristics: 1. Compressive Strength: 20 psi 2. Board Edges: Square. 3. Roof Areas with flat structure which require Tapered Insulation: a. Base Layer: 1) Nominal Thickness: As noted on plan. 2) Nominal Size: 48" x 48". b. Tapered Layer: 07 53 00 - 2
ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
c.
1) Nominal Thickness: tapered at ¼" per foot unless noted otherwise. 2) Nominal Size: 48" x 48". 3) Crickets where indicated on drawings. Crickets 1) Tapered polyisocyanurate.
2.05 ACCESSORIES A.
Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer. 1. Length as required for thickness of insulation material and penetration of deck substrate,a minimum of 1/2" for steel.
B.
Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer to meet stated warranty.
C.
Surface Conditioner for Adhesives: Compatible with membrane and adhesives.
D.
Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with membrane.
E.
Insulation Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
F.
Roofing Nails: Galvanized, hot dipped type, size and configuration as required to suit application.
G.
Strip Reglet Devices: Galvanized steel, maximum possible lengths per location, with attachment flanges.
H.
Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify deck is supported and secure.
C.
Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system.
D.
Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.
E.
Verify that roof openings, curbs, including those provided by mechanical contractor, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and wood blocking/nailers are in place.
3.02 INSULATION - UNDER MEMBRANE A.
Install vapor barrier over deck. Lap at intersecting vertical wall surfaces 6 inches and tape to wall. Tape seams.
B.
Attachment of Insulation: 1. Mechanically fasten first layer of insulation to deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions and Factory Mutual requirements.
C.
Lay subsequent layers of insulation with joints staggered minimum 6 inch from joints in both directions of preceding layer. Use manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
D.
Place tapered insulation to the required slope pattern in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof.
F.
Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day.
3.03 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A.
Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching.
B.
Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage.
C.
Fully Adhered Application: Apply adhesive to substrate at rate of as required by manufacturer gal/square. Fully embed membrane in adhesive except in areas directly over or within 3 inches of expansion joints. Fully adhere one roll before proceeding to adjacent rolls.
D.
Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by contact adhesive, minimum 3 inches. Seal permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge.
E.
At intersections with vertical surfaces: 1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 8 inches onto vertical surfaces. 2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to nailing strips.
13032-2
07 53 00 - 3
ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
3. F.
At parapet walls extend and adhesive apply membrane over top of parapet wall and secure to continuous flashing reglet at opposite side.
At gravel stops, extend membrane under gravel stop and to the outside face of the wall.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Field inspection and testing shall be performed as required by the manufacturer.
B.
Correct identified defects or irregularities.
3.05 CLEANING A.
Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.
B.
In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions.
C.
Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section.
3.06 PROTECTION A.
Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations.
B.
Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials.
3.07 INSPECTION/CERTIFICATION A.
Contact A/E within 48 hours of manufacturer's representatives inspection.
B.
Provide owner with certificate of compliance with warranty upon completion of inspection. END OF SECTION
13032-2
07 53 00 - 4
ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, and soffits and fascia.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 07 53 00 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Roofing system membrane flashings.
C.
Section 07 71 23 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts.
D.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.
B.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
C.
ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2012)e1.
D.
SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2012.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate soffit material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, terminations, and installation details.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples 4x4 inch in size illustrating metal finish color.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and CDA Copper in Architecture Handbook requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated.
B.
Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 3 years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
B.
Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.
1.07 WARRANTY A.
Manufacturer's 20 year warranty on flashing finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A.
Pre-Finished 24 gage Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.028 inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating. 1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of colors.
B.
Soffit material: Aluminum, 0.019 inch thick, perforated for ventilation with channels/receivers for installation.
2.02 ACCESSORIES A.
Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers.
B.
Primer: Zinc chromate type.
13032-2
07 62 00 - 1
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
C.
Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.
D.
Sealant: Type specified in Section 07 90 05.
E.
Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.
2.03 FABRICATION A.
Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B.
Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
C.
Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.
D.
Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
E.
Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.
F.
Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip.
G.
Overflow Scuppers: 24 gage formed to perimeter of scupper openings. Flash/form per SMACNA standards. Coordinate tie-in to roof system.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located.
B.
Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
B.
Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.
3.03 INSTALLATION A.
Conform to drawing details. 1. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
B.
Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted.
C.
Apply recommended sealant/adhesive compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
D.
Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.
E.
Seal metal joints watertight.
F.
At extended lengts of soffit, install sub-framing as required by manufacturer. Install in single lengths where possible. END OF SECTION
13032-2
07 62 00 - 2
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
SECTION 07 71 23 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Seamless, Pre-finished aluminum gutters and downspouts.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.
B.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010.
C.
ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010.
D.
SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2012.
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A.
Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for sizing components for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 10 years. Layout shall include required expansion joints. Design shown on plans shall be confirmed using above standards.
B.
Conform to applicable code for size and method of rain water discharge.
1.05 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Samples: Submit two samples, 6 inch long illustrating component design, finish, color, and configuration.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope to drain.
B.
Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration, staining, or damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.
Pre-Finished Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 0.032 inch thick. 1. Finish: Plain, shop pre-coated with PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride) coating. 2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
2.02 COMPONENTS A.
Gutters: SMACNA Style J or K.
B.
Downspouts: Open face Rectangular profile.
C.
Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchoring Devices: Type recommended by fabricator. 2. Gutter Supports: Spikes and ferrules as recommended by fabricator. 3. Downspout Supports: Brackets.
D.
Fasteners: Stainless steel, with soft neoprene washers.
2.03 ACCESSORIES 2.04 FABRICATION A.
Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated. Confirm size design as noted above.
B.
Fabricate with required connection pieces.
C.
Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints.
13032-2
07 71 23 - 1 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
D.
Hem exposed edges of metal.
E.
Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight.
2.05 FACTORY FINISHING A.
Fluoropolymer Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories per SMACNA guidelines, including, but not limited to recommended slope, expansion joint locations and construction and downspout connections and attachments. END OF SECTION
13032-2
07 71 23 - 2 MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Firestopping materials, labor, services and incidentals necessary for the completion of this section of the work. Section applies to all Divisions (General, Plumbing, Firesprinkler/Standpipe, HVAC, Electrical, etc.)
B.
Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-resistant assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2012.
B.
ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems; 2013a.
C.
ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems; 2007 (Reapproved 2011).
D.
ASTM E2837 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Continuity Head-of-Wall Joint Systems Installed Between Rated Wall Assemblies and Nonrated Horizontal Assemblies; 2011.
E.
ASTM E 2174, Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of Installed Firestops.
F.
ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.
G.
FM 4991 - Approval of Firestop Contractors; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2001.
H.
FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.
I.
UL 2079 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2004.
J.
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
K.
2009 IBC.
L.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
M. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Develop a plan(s) showing each location where fire stopping is required. Identify each location on the plan with a number or letter. Contractor/Installer may use the construction set of drawings to indicate which UL system is to be used for each penetration. Develop an as-built schedule that corresponds to each of the numbers or letters shown on the plan(s). The schedule shall provide the following information for each number or letter: 1. Number(s) or letter(s) corresponding to each shown on the developed plan(s). 2. Type of approved fire stopping system to be used (UL number, etc.). 3. Type of construction of the fire-rated wall or floor and its fire rating. 4. Pipe size, material and system of penetrating item (4”, PVC, DWV, etc.). 5. Size of wall or floor opening. 6. Size of annular space (0” min., 1/2” max., etc.). 7. Backing material.
C.
Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number.
D.
Product Data: Provide data on materials, devices, description, listing agency test number and drawing.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.
F.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G.
Qualification certificate for installing mechanics.
13032-2
07 84 00 - 1
FIRESTOPPING
1.05 DEFINITIONS A.
Annular Space: Opening around penetrating item.
B.
Construction Gaps: Any gap, joint, or opening, whether static or dynamic, where the top of a wall may meet a floor; wall to wall applications; edge to edge floor configurations; floor to exterior wall; or any linear breach in a rated barrier. Where movement is required, the firestopping system must comply with E 1399, E 1966, or UL 2079 for dynamic joints.
C.
F Rating: The time period that the through-penetration firestop system limits the spread of fire through the penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 814.
D.
Fire Barrier: A fire-resistance-rated vertical or horizontal assembly of materials designed to restrict the spread of fire in which openings are protected.
E.
Fire Partition: A vertical assembly of materials designed to restrict the spread of fire in which openings are protected.
F.
Fire-Protection Rating: The period of time that an opening protective assembly will maintain the ability to confine a fire as determined by tests prescribed in Section 714 of the IBC. Ratings are stated in hours or minutes.
G.
Fire Resistance: That property of materials or their assemblies that prevents or retards the passage of excessive heat, hot gases, or flames under conditions of use.
H.
Fire-Resistance Rating: The period of time a building element, component or assembly maintains the ability to confine a fire, continues to perform a given structural function, or both as determined by the tests, or the methods based on tests, prescribed in Section 703 of the IBC.
I.
Fire Wall: A fire-resistance-rated wall having protected openings, which restricts the spread of fire and extends continuously from the foundation to or through the roof, with sufficient structural stability under fire conditions to allow collapse of construction on either side without collapse of the wall.
J.
Fireblocking: Building materials installed to resist the free passage of flame to other areas of the building through concealed spaces.
K.
Membrane Penetration: An opening made through one side (wall, floor or ceiling membrane) of an assembly.
L.
Membrane-Penetration Firestop: A material device or construction installed to resist for a prescribed time period, the passage of flame and heat through openings in a protective membrane in order to accommodated cables, cable trays, conduit, tubing, pipes or similar items.
M. Penetration Firestop: A through-penetration firestop of a membrane-penetration firestop. N.
T-Rating: The time period that the penetration firestop system, including the penetrating item, limits the maximum temperature rise to 325°F (163°C) above its initial temperature through the penetration on the nonfire side when tested in accordance with ASTM E 814.
O.
Through Penetration: An opening that passes through an entire assembly.
P.
Through-Penetration Firestop System: An assemblage of specific materials or products that are designed, tested and fire-resistance rated to resist for a prescribed period of time the spread of fire through penetrations. The F and T rating criteria for penetration firestop systems shall be in accordance with ASTM E 814.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Comply with all Federal, State and Local codes, laws, ordinances and regulations.
B.
Source Limitation: When possible obtain through-penetration firestop systems for each type of penetration and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer. It is recognized that all manufacturer's do not supply fire stopping for all conditions, so more than one manufacturer may be required.
C.
Fire testing results of firestopping assemblies of designs which provide the scheduled fire ratings when tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 and ASTM E 119 shall conform to the following: 1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock Hersey) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 2. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) at www.icc-es.org will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.
13032-2
07 84 00 - 2
FIRESTOPPING
D.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
E.
The prime contractor shall secure the services of a single Certified Firestopping Contractor, as described in Paragraph F, for all work (general, MEP and Fire Protection) OR the Prime Contractor, MEP and Fire Protection contractors shall secure a certified firestopping contractor, as described in Paragraph F, or a Trained Firestopping Installer, as described in paragraph G, for their penetration work. With separate certified firestopping contractors, the prime contractor shall be responsible for top of wall systems and any other penetrations not a part of MEP or Fire Protection work.
F.
Certified Firestopping Contractor/Inspector: 1. Company specializing in performing the work of this section and; 2. Approved by Factory Mutual Research under FM Standard 4991, Approval of Firestop Contractors, or passed UL Certification: a. With minimum 3 years documented experience installing work of this type. b. Able to show at least 5 satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type.
G.
Trained Firestopping Installer Qualifications: 1. Have at least 3 years documented experience installing work of this type. 2. Able to show at least 5 satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type. 3. Trained, certified and approved by firestopping manufacturer.
H.
FM/UL Certified Contractors shall arrange to complete the following three sub-paragraphs. Trained Firestopping Installers that are not FM/UL certified shall arrange for an independent FM/UL Certified Contractor or manufacturer's representative to complete the following: (at no additonal cost to the owner). Confirm with manufacturer their ability to provide inspection services. 1. Inspect the installation for compliance with the approved UL systems and the manufacturer's recommendations at the necessary stages of construction. 2. Witness at least three different fire stopping system installations to confirm compliance with UL approved drawings. 3. Submit a copy of the inspection report to the A/E within ten days of substantial completion.
I.
FM or UL Certified Contractors: 1. Superl, Inc., Fridley, Minnesota, (Mike Pautsch) 763-571-7464 2. American Firestop Solutions, Inc., Waukee, Iowa (Mark Gilchrist) 515-987-0215 3. Nelson Insulation Company, Wauconda, Illinois (Ted Christ) 847-526-8333 4. Rite-Way Caulk, Inc., Fridley, Minnesota 763-780-4102 5. Luse Thermal Technologies, Aurora, Illinois 630-862-2672 6. Firestopping Specialists, LLC, Menasha, Wis., 920-722-1280 7. Other certified FM or UL installers accepted by prior approval process.
J.
Manufacturer Trained Contractors: 1. Lee's System Seven, 1171 La Porte Rd, Brandon, Iowa 52210. 319-269-3152 2. Hess Caulk and Restoration, Rochelle, Illinois 815-562-6060 3. Other trained installers accepted by prior approval process.
K.
Installing Mechanic's Qualifications: Trained by firestopping manufacturer and able to provide evidence thereof.
L.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins and product catalog installation instructions.
M. Certified contractor(s)/installer(s) and manufacturer's representative, shall attend a pre-installation meeting. Said meeting shall also include general contractor's representative, each subcontractor requiring penetration protection and A/E.
13032-2
07 84 00 - 3
FIRESTOPPING
N.
Each respective trade shall confirm that their work is completed correctly. No fire stopping shall be allowed to be concealed until the inspection has verified the installation for compliance and no corrections are required. If required, the contractor shall correct the installation and have it re-inspected by the appropriate representative as described above, as often as required until the installation is correct, at no additional cost to the owner. The represented inspector shall perform random testing of a minimum of three completed installations as required to provide the certification. Include all costs to complete this testing. Locations to be determined by independent representative. Upon completion of correct installation, submit a copy of the manufacturer's certificate of compliance within ten days of substantial completion to the A/E. Coordinate scheduling of this work with the General Contractor as required.
O.
Maintain jobsite file and comply with Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each product delivered to jobsite.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials.
B.
Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Manufacturers: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. 2. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. 3. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. 4. Nelson FireStop Products: www.nelsonfirestop.com. 5. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. 6. Bio FireShield: www.biofireshield.com 7. Metacaulk: www.metacaulk.com 8. Tremco: www.tremcosealants.com 9. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
B.
Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
C.
Materials: Use any material meeting requirements.
D.
Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design.
E.
Fire Ratings: See Drawings for required systems and ratings.
2.02 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS A.
Head-of-Wall Firestopping at Joints Between Non-Rated Floor and Fire-Rated Wall: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E2837 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of floor or wall, whichever is greater. 1. Movement: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show movement capability as indicated.
B.
Floor-to-Floor, Wall-to-Wall, and Wall-to-Floor Joints, Except Perimeter, Where Both Are Fire-Rated: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of the assembly in which the joint occurs. 1. Movement: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show movement capability as indicated. 2. Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as indicated. 3. Watertightness: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show W Rating as indicated. 4. Listing by UL, FM, or Intertek in their certification directory will be considered evidence of successful testing.
C.
Through Penetration Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E814 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of penetrated assembly. 1. Temperature Rise: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show T Rating as indicated.
13032-2
07 84 00 - 4
FIRESTOPPING
2. 3. 4.
Air Leakage: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show L Rating as indicated. Watertightness: In addition, provide systems that have been tested to show W Rating as indicated. Listing by UL, FM, or Intertek in their certification directory will be considered evidence of successful testing.
2.03 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A.
Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. 1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock Hersey) or tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified requirements. 2. For systems not provided by any manufacturer for a particular situation, an engineering judgment from a manufacturer shall be allowed.
B.
Top of wall systems to comply with rated wall system.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material.
B.
Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.
C.
Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
3.03 INSTALLATION A.
Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings.
B.
Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction. Each respective trade shall confirm that their work is completed correctly before the General Contractor conceals any of their fire stopping located in walls, behind cabinets or above ceilings, etc. and to submit a letter, indicating the compliance prior to the concealment, to the General Contractor and/or to the A/E.
C.
Tool or trowel exposed fire stopping surfaces to a neat finish. Void spaces or gaps found in the annular space will not be acceptable.
D.
Affix a sticker to the surface being penetrated at each penetration indicating UL number, fire-rating, Frating, etc.
E.
Install labeling required by code.
F.
Record each system on a floor plan for as-built and schedule development per instructions under Submittals above
3.04 CLEANING A.
Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.05 PROTECTION A.
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION
13032-2
07 84 00 - 5
FIRESTOPPING
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Sealants and joint backing.
B.
Precompressed foam sealers.
C.
Field adhesion testing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Sealants required in conjunction with air barriers and vapor retarders:
C.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.
D.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.
E.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Installation of acoustic sealant.
F.
Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Sealant used as tile grout.
G.
Section 09 90 00 - Paints and Coatings
H.
Division 22: Sealants required in conjunction with HVAC work.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM C 510 - Standard Test Method for Staining and Color Change of Single- or Multicomponent Joint Sealants.
B.
ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010.
C.
ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2012.
D.
ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
E.
ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
F.
ASTM C 1311 - Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants.
G.
ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2005 (Reapproved 2010).
H.
ASTM D 2203 - Standard Test Method for Staining from Sealants.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability.
C.
Color charts for each sealant type for initial selection.
D.
Test Reports: 1. Results of laboratory pre-construction testing. 2. Results of field pre-construction testing. 3. Manufacturer's recommendations for joint preparation, priming, and joint accessory materials based on test results. 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedure modifications resulting from field adhesion tests.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
F.
Submit instructions for repairing and replacing failed sealant joints.
G.
Manufacturer's Certificate: 1. Certify products are suitable for intended use and products meet or exceed specified requirements.
13032-2
07 90 05 - 1
JOINT SEALERS
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years experience, minimum three successfully completed projects of similar scope and complexity, and approved by manufacturer.
D.
Designate one individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all times during installation.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
Accept materials on site in manufacturers unopened original packaging. Inspect for damage.
B.
Store primers and sealants in cool dry location with ambient temperature range of 60 to 80 degrees F
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.
1.08 COORDINATION A.
Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.
1.09 WARRANTY A.
Correct defective work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 2.02 SEALANTS A.
Interior Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.
B.
General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses M, G, and A; single component. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between metal frames and other materials. c. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.
C.
General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic latex (Elastomeric); ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. 3. Products: a. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 + Silicone Acrylic Latex Caulking Compound: www.pecora.com. c. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. d. Sherwin-Williams Company; White Lightning 3006 Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk: www.sherwin-williams.com. e. Sherwin-Williams Company; 850A Acrylic Latex Caulk: www.sherwin-williams.com. f. See Division 1 for substitution procedure
D.
Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M, A, O; single component, solvent release curing, non-skinning. 1. Applications: Use for concealed locations only:
13032-2
07 90 05 - 2
JOINT SEALERS
a.
2.
Sealant bead between top of wall gypsum board and structure, between bottom of gyp bd and floor and at wall corners between vertical stud and wall and to seal end of gyp board at corner. b. Refer to Section 09 21 16 for additional application directions. Products: a. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. b. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919 Acoustical and Insulation Latex Sealant: www.pecora.com. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant: www.pecora.com. d. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems; www.buildingsystems.basf.com. e. Tremco Global Sealants; Tremco Acoustical Sealant: www.tremcosealants.com. f. Hilti, Inc.; CP 506 Smoke and Acoustical Sealant: www.us.hilti.com. g. Hilti, Inc.; CP 572 Smoke and Acoustical Spray Sealant: www.us.hilti.com. h. See Division 1 for substitution procedure
E.
Polyurea Concrete Floor Joint Filler: Self-leveling, pourable, semi-rigid sealant intended for filling cracks and control joints not subject to significant movement; rigid enough to support concrete edges under traffic. 1. Composition: Single or multi-part,100 percent solids by weight. 2. Hardness: 75, minimum, after 7 days, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240 Shore A. 3. Color: Concrete gray. 4. Joint Width, Minimum: 1/8 inch. 5. Joint Width, Maximum: 3/4 inch. 6. Applications: Use for: a. Control joints in concrete slabs and floors not filled with filler placed in form. b. Construction joints in concrete slabs and floors. 7. Products: a. Adhesives Technology Corporation; Crackbond JF-311: www.atcepoxy.com. b. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDISEAL RAPID PLUS: www.ardexamericas.com. c. Nox-Crete; DynaFlex JF-85: www.nox-crete.com d. See Division 1 for substitution procedure
F.
Acrylic Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, O; single component, solvent curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent. 3. Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 degrees F. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 25 to 50. 5. Applications: Use for: a. Interior door frames. b. Countertop and casework locations.
G.
Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311; single component, solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent. 3. Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 degrees F. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 10 to 30. 5. Applications: Use for: a. Glazing applications. b. Exterior metal lap joints.
H.
Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component, neutral curing, non-sagging, non-staining, non-bleeding. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent. 3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35. 5. Applications: Use for: a. Gypsum sheathing joint sealer. b. Exterior metal panel joints. 6. Products:
13032-2
07 90 05 - 3
JOINT SEALERS
a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. I.
Dow Corning Corporation; 795: www.dowcorning.com. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (GE Silicones products): www.momentive.com. Pecora Corporation; 864NST Low Modulus Architectural Silicone Sealant - Class 50: www.pecora.com. Pecora Corporation; 895NST Medium Modulus Structural Glazing & Weatherproofing Silicone Sealant - Class 50: www.pecora.com. Pecora Corporation; PCS Pecora Contractor Silicone: www.pecora.com. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. Sherwin-Williams Company; Silicone Rubber All Purpose Sealant: www.sherwinwilliams.com. Bondaflex: SIL 265 LS. www.bondaflex.com Novagard Solutions See Division 1 for substitution procedure
Silicone rubber based, single component, elastomeric sealant with integral fungicide complying with Fed. Spec. TT-S-001543, Class A and specifically recommended by the manufacturer for interior joints in wet areas around plumbing fixtures and in ceramic tile. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Acceptable Products: a. General Electric: Sanitary 1700 Sealant b. Dow Corning Corporation: Silicone 786 mildew resistant c. Pecora Corporation: 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant d. See Division 1 for substitution procedure. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Joints in ceramic tile walls and floors, around equipment and plumbing fixtures.
2.03 ACCESSORIES A.
Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B.
Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
C.
Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
D.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B.
Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.
D.
Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
3.03 TESTING A.
Testing shall be performed by an Independent Testing Agency or manufacturer's representative.
B.
Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Perform test on-site, on field-constructed mock-ups or on actual construction, and far enough in advance of sealant work to allow curing of sealants and re-testing if necessary. 2. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. a. Including but not limited to control joints and fenestration frame perimeters. b. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3. Where required, remove existing sealant, clean joint, and install new sealant using manufacturer's recommended joint preparation methods. 4. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.
13032-2
07 90 05 - 4
JOINT SEALERS
5. 6. 7.
8.
Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.
3.04 INSTALLATION A.
Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.
B.
Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.
D.
Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
F.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
G.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
H.
Do not block weep holes at windows or other locations.
I.
Spillage. Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces.
J.
Tool joints concave.
K.
Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.
L.
Compression Gaskets: Avoid joints except at ends, corners, and intersections; seal all joints with adhesive; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.
M. Concrete Floor Joint Filler: Install concrete floor joint filler per manufacturer's written instructions. After floor joint filler is fully cured, shave joint filler flush with top of concrete slab. 3.05 CLEANING A.
Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.06 PROTECTION A.
Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION
13032-2
07 90 05 - 5
JOINT SEALERS
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames.
B.
Steel frames for wood doors.
C.
Fire-rated steel doors and frames.
D.
Thermally insulated steel doors.
E.
Steel glazing frames.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
C.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.
D.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.
B.
ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003 (R2008).
C.
ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2011).
D.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
E.
BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.
F.
NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007.
G.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.
H.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
I.
UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
J.
UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard.
C.
Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any.
D.
Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Supplier: A company experienced in the builders' hardware industry representing hollow metal products for a minimum of two (3) years, and can call upon an AHC, registered Architectural Hardware Consultant, for consultation during the full extent of the project.
13032-2
08 11 13 - 1
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.
B.
Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com. 3. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand; www.allegion.com/us. 4. Amweld. www.amweld.com 5. Mesker Door: www.meskerdoor.com. 6. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A.
Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 4. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 7. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
B.
Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.
2.03 STEEL DOORS A.
Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless. 2. Core: Polystyrene foam. 3. 16 gage. 4. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 5. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00.
B.
Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless. 2. 18 gage. 3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
C.
Interior Doors, Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless. 2. 18 gage 3. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C ("positive pressure"). a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL. b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit. 4. Core: Mineral fiberboard.
D.
Interior Smoke and Draft Control Doors (as noted on door schedule): Same construction as fire-rated doors with indicated fire rating, plus: 1. Maximum Air Leakage: 3.0 cfm per sq ft of door opening at 0.10 inch w.g. pressure, when tested in accordance with UL 1784 at both ambient and elevated temperatures. 2. Gasketing: No added gasketing or seals allowed. 3. Label: UL "S" label.
13032-2
08 11 13 - 2
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
2.04 STEEL FRAMES A.
General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. a. ANSI A250.8 Level 1 Doors: 16 gage frames. b. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 1, 16 gage 2. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted. 4. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top.
B.
Exterior Door Frames: Fully welded. 14 gage. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Provide applied metal drip at head of frame. 3. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00.
C.
Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Fully welded type. 16 gage
D.
Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Fully welded type. 16 gage 1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.
E.
Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.
Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
B.
Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.
C.
Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.
2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A.
Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
B.
Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION A.
Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840.
B.
In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.
C.
Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
D.
Coordinate installation of conduit box at head of frame and flexible conduit in frame to electric strike doors at electrified doors identified in Hardware Schedule with Division 26.
E.
Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames.
F.
Coordinate installation of hardware.
G.
Coordinate installation of glazing.
H.
Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.
13032-2
08 11 13 - 3
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
3.04 TOLERANCES A.
Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.
B.
Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.05 ADJUSTING A.
Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION
13032-2
08 11 13 - 4
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non-rated in wood and hollow metal frames. Contractor's option to supply pre-hung wood door and frame.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry
C.
Section 08 12 13 - Hollow Metal Frames.
D.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
E.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
B.
ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2012.
C.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.
D.
NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
E.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
F.
UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics.
C.
Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.
D.
Specimen warranty.
E.
Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 12x12 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen.
F.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
G.
Warranty, executed in Owner's name.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and finishing.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
C.
Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated.
D.
Supplier: A company experienced in the builders' hardware industry representing wood door products for a minimum of two (2) years, and can call upon an AHC, registered Architectural Hardware Consultant, for consultation during the full extent of the project.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B.
Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
C.
Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. 13032-2
Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 08 14 16 - 1
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
1.08 WARRANTY A.
Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
B.
Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 1. Graham Wood Doors; Mason City, Iowa; (515) 423-2444: www.grahamdoors.com. 2. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com. 3. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com. 4. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.; Algoma, Wisconsin; (800) 678-8910. 5. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company; Oshkosh, Wisconsin; (920) 233-6161. 6. Mohawk; South Bend, Indiana; (219) 288-4621. 7. VT Industries; Holstein, Iowa; (651) 464-1230. 8. Streko; www.strekodoors.com 9. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 DOORS A.
All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Level: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards. 2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with NFPA 252, UL 10B, or UBC Standard 7-2-94 ("neutral pressure"); UL labeled without any visible seals when door is closed.
2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A.
Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as indicated above. Species of rails and stiles to match face veneer.
B.
Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core, Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above. Edge banding-laminated. Species of rails and stiles to match face veneer.
2.04 DOOR FACINGS A.
Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Red oak, veneer grade as specified by quality standard, plain sliced, book veneer match, balance assembly match; unless otherwise indicated. 1. Vertical Edges: laminated.
B.
Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.
2.05 ACCESSORIES A.
Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style screws.
B.
Astragals for Non-Rated Double Doors: As noted in Hardware Schedule, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge.
C.
Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge, specifically for double doors.
2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A.
Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
B.
Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:
C.
Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement.
D.
Where supplementary protective edge trim is required, install trim after veneer facing has been applied full-width.
E.
Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions.
13032-2
08 14 16 - 2
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
F.
Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard.
G.
Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.
2.07 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS A.
Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.
B.
Seal door top edge with sealer to match door facing.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C.
Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. 1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.
B.
Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.
C.
Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
D.
Coordinate installation of new doors with installation of frames and hardware.
E.
Coordinate installation of glazing.
F.
Seal all job site sawn surfaces with two coats of polyurethane.
3.03 TOLERANCES A.
Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
B.
Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.
3.04 ADJUSTING A.
Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B.
Adjust closers for full closure.
3.05 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS END OF SECTION
13032-2
08 14 16 - 3
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 08 14 23 HIGH IMPACT RESISTANT DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Non-fire-rated high impact resistant doors.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Hollow metal frames for doors.
C.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
D.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.
B.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010b.
C.
Quality Test Standards: 1. WDMA Industry Standard I.S.1A-04. a. WDMA TM-7 Test method to determine the physical endurance of wood doors & associated hardware connections under accelerated operating conditions, Window and Door Manufacturers Association. b. WDMA TM-8 Test methods to determine hinge loading resistance of wood door stiles, Window and Door Manufacturers Association. c. WDMA TM-10 - Test method to determine the screw holding capacity of wood door stiles, Window and Door Manufacturers Association. 2. WDMA I.S. 10-05 Industry Specification for Testing Cellulosic Materials for Use in Fenestration Products. 3. ANSI/BHMA A156.115-W-2006 American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: For each type of door, submit manufacturer’s data sheets including details of core and edge construction.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit complete schedule indicating location, size, hardware sets, swing of each door; elevation of each type of door and construction details not covered in product data and other pertinent information. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware, fire ratings, and location of cutouts for glass.
D.
Samples for verification of edge wrapping and edge replace ability. Banded edges will not be approved.
E.
Manufacturer’s lifetime warranty.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Source Limitations: Obtain high impact resistant flush doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Quality Standard: Comply with WDMA Industry Standard (I.S. 1A-04 “Architectural Wood Flush Doors”). 1. Doors shall meet performance attributes for the following performance duty level: Extra Heavy Duty. 1. Doors shall meet performance attributes for the following performance duty level: Extra Heavy Duty. 2. Tolerances for warp, telegraphing, squareness and prefitting dimensions as per the latest edition of WDMA I.S.1A-04.
13032-2
08 14 23 - 1
HIGH IMPACT RESISTANT DOORS
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products under guidelines of WDMA and manufacturer’s care and handling instructions.
B.
Package doors individually using foam interleaf and stack on pallet, not exceeding 15 doors per pallet.
C.
Mark each door with opening number used on shop drawings.
D.
Accept doors on site in manufacturer’s standard packaging. Inspect for damage.
E.
Do not store doors in damp or wet areas. HVAC systems should be operating and balanced prior to arrival of doors. Acceptable humidity shall be no less than 25% or greater than 55%.
F.
Do not subject doors to extreme conditions or changes in heat, dryness or humidity in accordance with the latest edition of WDMA I.S.1A-04.
G.
Protect doors from exposure to natural and artificial light after delivery.
H.
Doors should be lifted and carried when being moved, not dragged across one another.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver store, or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
HVAC systems should be operating and balanced prior to arrival of doors. Acceptable humidity shall be no less than 25% or greater than 55%. Note: Any claim for warp, bow, twist, or telegraphing may be denied if required humidity requirements are not maintained.
1.08 WARRANTY A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship. Conditions are subject to the terms set forth in the manufacturer’s warranty. 1. Solid-Core Interior Doors: provide manufacturer’s limited lifetime written warranty guarantee against warpage, delamination and defects in materials and workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Product based on Construction Specialties, Inc. Acrovyn® Door Systems (800) 972-7214.
B.
See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 MATERIALS A.
Door Construction 1. Non Fire Rated Doors interior flush doors conforming to WDMA I.S.1A-04 and the following: a. Thickness: 1-3/4” (+/- 1/16”) b. Core: Solid, bonded core. c. Horizontal Edges: Rails bonded to core to increase structural performance. d. Fixed Vertical Door Stiles: fixed interior stile bonded to core to increase structural performance. e. Replaceable Vertical Door Stiles: ¾” replaceable custom stiles shall be removable in the field in order to allow for easy field replacement if ever damaged. f. Replaceable Vertical Edges: Fully wrapped door edge shall be replaceable, exclusive of fasteners to improve appearance. g. WDMA I.S.1A-04 Performance Duty Level: Extra Heavy Duty.
B.
Door Faces: 1. Door faces to be high impact resistant Acrovyn finish: As selected from manufacturer's standard line. 2. Base color must be integral throughout to eliminate discoloration caused by scratching. 3. Face Veneer Wear Index - Abrasion Resistance Testing - ASTM D4060-90: 28,000 cycles to prove out resistant to scuffing and scratching. 4. Face Veneer Impact Resistance - ASTM D-4226: 86 in/lb. to confirm impact resistance of face finish.
13032-2
08 14 23 - 2
HIGH IMPACT RESISTANT DOORS
C.
Door stiles to meet or exceed the following Extra Heavy Duty WDMA I.S.1A-04 performance testing to ensure hardware fastener holding strength: 1. WDMA TM-8 "Hinge Loading Resistance" Extra Heavy Duty. 2. WDMA TM-10 Screw Holding Capacity" Extra Heavy Duty.
D.
Door Edges: 1. Same as door faces. 2. Edges are to fully wrap the door vertical stiles to eliminate banded edges thus improving durability and impact resistance. 3. Door edges shall be exclusive of fasteners to improve appearance. 4. Edges must be flush with face of door thus eliminating raised edges that could be torn off. 5. Edges to include ¼” radius edges to improve impact deflection. Square edges shall not be permitted. 6. Edges to be provided as part of the construction of the door from single source manufacturer.
E.
Adhesives: 1. Crossbanding to core adhesives shall be urea formaldehyde free Type II to improve structural integrity of door. 2. Door faces are to be applied to the crossbanded core using Type I urea formaldehyde free adhesives to eliminate delamination.
F.
Cores: 1. Non Rated Doors: a. Particleboard grade LD-2, 32 lb/ft3 density, CARB Phase I compliant.
2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL A.
Doors shall be prefit and beveled at the factory to fit the openings to reduce handling an onsite labor costs. Prefit tolerances shall be in accordance with the requirements of WDMA I.S.1A-04, latest edition.
B.
Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames. Contractor or door distributor to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.
C.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame shop drawings, and hardware templates.
D.
Light openings must be cut by the manufacturer or by a certified machining distributor.
E.
To ensure proper fit of the doors bevel on both strike and hinge edges to be 1/8” in 2”.
F.
Top and bottom rails shall be factory sealed with an approved wood sealer to eliminate moisture from entering into core thus eliminating warpage.
G.
Blocking: provide blocking approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting for surface applied hardware.
2.04 ACCESSORIES A.
Glazing Stops-Non-rated: 1. Wood beads. 2. Metal vision frames. 3. Veneer wrapped metal finished frames stained or painted to match the door faces AMS 110. 4. Manufacturer's Vision Panels
B.
Glass: As specified in 08 80 00, factory installed.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Inspect all doors prior to hanging. Repair noticeable marks or defects that may have occurred from improper storage or handling. Field repairs and touchups are the responsibility of the installing contractor upon completion of the initial installation. Field touchup shall include repair of job inflicted mars and final cleaning of finished doors.
B.
Examine door frames and verify that they comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
C.
Adjust frames to plumb condition before door installation. Tolerances for warp, squareness and prefitting dimensions shall be as per latest edition of WDMA I.S.1A-04.
13032-2
08 14 23 - 3
HIGH IMPACT RESISTANT DOORS
D.
Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out of tolerance for size or alignment.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Handle doors in accordance with recommendations of WDMA I.S.1A-04 “Care and Installation at Job Site.”
B.
Condition doors to average temperature and humidity in area of installation for not less than 48 hours prior to installation.
C.
Install doors to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions, referenced quality standard and as indicated. 1. Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA-80 and ITS/WH requirements.
D.
Factory fitted doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E.
Set doors plumb, level, square and true.
F.
In the field trimming: 1. Trim door height by cutting door bottom edges to a maximum of ¾”.
G.
Drill pilot holes for screws and bolts using templates provided by hardware manufacturer.
H.
Exercise caution when drilling pilot holes and installing hinges so that pilot holes are not over drilled and screws are not over torqued. Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions.
I.
Reseal exposed tops and bottom rails of any doors that required site alteration with an approved wood sealer.
J.
Hardware installation: See Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”.
K.
Clean prefinished doors with a rag in concert with water or household cleaners such as Fantastik , , or an equivalent Formula 409 be “rinse wiped” with clean water and wiped dry to remove any remaining residue.
3.03 ADJUSTING A.
Operating: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
3.04 CLEANING A.
Clean door surfaces at completion of installation.
3.05 PROTECTION A.
Protect installed doors from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION
13032-2
08 14 23 - 4
HIGH IMPACT RESISTANT DOORS
SECTION 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Ceiling access door and frame units.
B.
Access door and frame units, fire-rated and non-fire-rated, in wall and ceiling locations.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Openings in walls.
C.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Access Doors; Non-rated: 1. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com. 2. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com. 3. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc: www.milcorinc.com. 4. BarCo. www.alfabinc.com 5. Cesco Products. www.cescoproducts.com 6. J.L. Industries. www.jlindustries.com 7. Elmdor Mfg. Co.. www.elmdorstoneman.com 8. Cierra Products. www.cierraproducts.com 9. Nystrom: www.nystrom.com 10. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 ACCESS DOOR AND PANEL APPLICATIONS A.
Walls, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. Material: Steel. 2. Size: 12 x 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Standard duty, hinged door. 4. Tool-operated spring or cam lock; no handle. 5. In Gypsum Board: Drywall bead frame with door surface flush with wall surface.
B.
Fire Rated Walls: See drawings for wall fire ratings. 1. Material: Steel. 2. Size: 12 x 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tool-operated spring or cam lock; no handle.
C.
Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated: Same type as for walls. 1. Material: Steel. 2. Size in Other Ceilings: 20 x 24 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Standard duty, hinged door. 4. Tool-operated spring or cam lock; no handle.
D.
Fire Rated Ceilings: See drawings for ceiling fire ratings. 1. Material: Steel. 2. Size: 20 x 24 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Standard duty, hinged door. 4. Tool-operated spring or cam lock; no handle. Note: Provide tamper proof screws at all access panels in Segment D.
E.
13032-2
08 31 00 - 1
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.
C.
Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access. END OF SECTION
13032-2
08 31 00 - 2
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
SECTION 08 33 13 COILING COUNTER DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Non-fire-rated coiling counter doors and operating hardware.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Openings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard literature showing materials and details of construction and finish. Include data on electrical operation.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate rough and actual opening dimensions, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details.
D.
Samples: Submit two slats, 4 inches long illustrating shape, color and finish texture.
E.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and installation, adjustment, and alignment procedures.
F.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Indicate modes of operation, lubrication requirements and frequency, and periodic adjustments required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 2.02 COILING COUNTER DOORS A.
Coiling Counter Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: Aluminum slat curtain. 1. Mounting: Interior face mounted. 2. Nominal Slat Size: 1 3/4 inches wide. 3. Slat Profile: Flat. 4. Finish: Clear Anodized. 5. Guides: Formed track; same material and finish unless otherwise indicated. 6. Hood: Manufacturer's standard; 7. Operation: Manual push up operation. 8. Slide bolt lock.
2.03 MATERIALS A.
Curtain Construction: Interlocking, single thickness slats. 1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to prevent lateral movement. 2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with aluminum extrusion to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed position.
B.
Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place, with mounting brackets of same metal.
C.
Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape.
D.
Latching: Inside mounted, sliding deadbolt.
E.
Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and torsion steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate.
13032-2
08 33 13 - 1
COILING COUNTER DOORS
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress.
C.
Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure.
D.
Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.
E.
Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Section 07 90 05.
3.03 TOLERANCES A.
Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
B.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch.
D.
Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge.
3.04 ADJUSTING A.
Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.
3.05 CLEANING A.
Clean installed components.
B.
Remove labels and visible markings. END OF SECTION
13032-2
08 33 13 - 2
COILING COUNTER DOORS
SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Overhead coiling doors, operating hardware, fire-rated, electric operation.
B.
Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
A.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Openings.
B.
Division 26 - Equipment wiring.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
B.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
C.
ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.
D.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008.
E.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated 600 2000 Volts; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2008).
F.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.
G.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
H.
UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical equipment,.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details.
D.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures, adjustment and alignment procedures.
E.
Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency and periodic adjustments required.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Overhead Coiling Doors: 1. Clopay Corporation: www.clopaydoor.com. 2. Cornell Iron Works, Inc: www.cornelliron.com. 3. The Cookson Company: www.cooksondoor.com. 4. Wayne-Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation: www.wayne-dalton.com. 5. Overhead Door Co. 6. Raynor. 7. See Division 1 for substitution procedure
2.02 COILING DOORS A.
13032-2
Fire-Rated Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain; conform to NFPA 80. 1. 3/4 hour fire rating.
08 33 23 - 1
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
2.
Provide products listed and labeled by UL or ITS (Warnock Hersey) as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 3. Oversized Openings: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of fire rated units and operating hardware assembly. 4. Single thickness slats. 5. Nominal Slat Size: 2 inches wide x required length. 6. Finish: Factory painted, color as selected. 7. Guides: Angles; primed steel. 8. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel. 9. Release Mechanism: Fire alarm system activated with automatically governed closing speed. 10. Electric operation. 11. Mounting: Within framed opening. 12. Interior latch only. 2.03 MATERIALS A.
Curtain Construction: Interlocking slats. 1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to prevent lateral movement. 2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed position.
B.
Steel Slats: Minimum 20 gage ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet.
C.
Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place with snap-on trim, mounting brackets of same metal.
D.
Steel Guides: ASTM A36/A36M steel angles, size as indicated, prime painted.
E.
Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape. 1. Prime paint.
F.
Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate.
2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION A.
Electric Operators: 1. Mounting: Side mounted. 2. Motor sized per manufacturers requirement. 3. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter. 4. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1. 5. Opening Speed: 12 inches per second. 6. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller. 7. Manual override in case of power failure.
B.
Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE) constant pressure control for each operator. 1. 24 volt circuit. 2. Surface mounted.
C.
Entrapment Protection: Photoelectric sensors.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
In addition, install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80.
C.
Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress.
D.
Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only.
E.
Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.
13032-2
08 33 23 - 2
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
F.
Coordinate installation of electrical service. Service and control wiring shall be installed by Division 26.
G.
Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components.
H.
Complete wiring from fire alarm system.
3.03 ADJUSTING A.
Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.
3.04 CLEANING A.
Clean installed components.
B.
Remove labels and visible markings. END OF SECTION
13032-2
08 33 23 - 3
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 08 33 36 PLASTIC STRIP DOORS AND CURTAINS PART 1: 1.01
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Conditions of the Contract and portions of Division One of this Project Manual apply to this Section as though repeated herein. 1.02
WORK INCLUDED
A. Plastic Strip Doors. 1.03
RELATED WORK
A. Section 08 33 23 – Overhead Sectional Doors.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accord with Section 01 33 00 1. Manufacturer's technical product data. 2. Include sizes, types, finishes, scheduled locations and details of adjoining work. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A Follow special storage and handling requirements of the manufacturer. PART 2: 2.01
PRODUCTS
PLASTIC STRIP DOORS/CURTAINS
A. 8” wide clear, 0.120” (min) thick PVC door curtains. B. Frommelt Industries; www.fdandd.com C. Chase Doors; www.chasedoors.com D. Cool Curtains Industries; www.coolcurtain.com PART 3: 3.01
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Verify rough openings for door are correctly sized and located. 3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install strips and curtains and its accessories plumb and level in wall openings. 13032-2
08 33 36-1
B. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access. C. Attach strip door and strip curtains to wall/overhead structure with manufacturer supplied framing in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION 08 33 36
13032-2
08 33 36-2
SECTION 08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Overhead sectional doors, electrically operated.
B.
Operating hardware and supports.
C.
Electrical controls.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel channel opening frame.
C.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Rough wood framing for door opening.
D.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Lock cylinders.
E.
Division 26:Equipment wiring
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
B.
ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.
C.
DASMA 102 - American National Standard Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors; Door & Access Systems Manufacturers' Association, International; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details.
C.
Product Data: Show component construction, anchorage method, and hardware.
D.
Samples: Submit two panel finish samples, 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating color and finish.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include any special procedures required by project conditions.
F.
Operation Data: Include normal operation, troubleshooting, and adjusting.
G.
Maintenance Data: Include data for motor and transmission, shaft and gearing, lubrication frequency, spare part sources.
H.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.06 WARRANTY A.
Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
13032-2
Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Clopay Corporation: www.clopaydoor.com. 2. Wayne-Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation: www.wayne-dalton.com. 3. Overhead Door Co.. 4. Cornell. 5. Raynor Garage Doors. 6. Pugleasa Company. 7. See Division 1 for Substitution procedure.
08 36 13 - 1
SECTIONAL DOORS
2.02 STEEL DOOR COMPONENTS A.
Steel Doors: Flush steel, insulated; standard lift operating style with track and hardware; complying with DASMA 102, Commercial application. 1. Performance: Withstand positive and negative wind loads equal to 1.5 times design wind loads specified by local code without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using 10 second duration of maximum load. 2. Door Nominal Thickness: 2 inches thick. 3. Exterior Finish: Pre-finished with baked enamel of color as selected. 4. Operation: Pull rope.
B.
Door Panels: Flush steel construction; outer steel sheet of 0.018 inch (26 ga) thick, flat profile; inner steel sheet of 0.018 inch (26 ga) thick, flat profile; core reinforcement of 0.060 inch thick sheet steel roll formed to channel shape, rabbeted weather joints at meeting rails; insulated.
2.03 DOOR COMPONENTS A.
Track: Rolled galvanized steel, 0.060 inch thick; 2 inch wide, continuous one piece per side; galvanized steel mounting brackets 1/4 inch thick.
B.
Hinge and Roller Assemblies: Heavy duty hinges and adjustable roller holders of galvanized steel; floating hardened steel bearing rollers, located at top and bottom of each panel, each side.
C.
Lift Mechanism: Torsion spring on cross head shaft, with braided galvanized steel lifting cables. 1. For Manual Operation: Requiring maximum exertion of 25 lbs force to open.
D.
Sill Weatherstripping: Resilient hollow rubber strip, one piece; fitted to bottom of door panel, full length contact.
E.
Jamb Weatherstripping: Roll formed steel section full height of jamb, fitted with resilient weatherstripping, placed in moderate contact with door panels.
F.
Head Weatherstripping: EPDM rubber seal, one piece full length.
G.
Panel Joint Weatherstripping: Neoprene foam seal, one piece full length.
H.
Interior Latch: Provide hand turn interior latch at electrified doors.
I.
Lock Cylinders: Keyed alike.
2.04 MATERIALS A.
Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G60/Z180 coating, plain surface.
B.
Insulation: Rigid polyurethane, bonded to facing. Minimum total R14.
C.
Glazing: Manufacturer's standard insulating tempered clear glass.
2.05 ELECTRICAL OPERATION A.
Electrical Characteristics: 1. Motor sized as required for door size.
B.
Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
C.
Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch outside of control panel.
D.
Electric Operator: Center mounted draw bar assembly, adjustable safety friction clutch; brake system actuated by independent voltage solenoid controlled by motor starter; enclosed gear driven limit switch; enclosed magnetic cross line reversing starter; mounting brackets and hardware.
E.
Entrapment Protection: Photoelectric sensors.
F.
Control Station: Standard three button (open-close-stop) continuous pressure type control for each electric operator. 1. 24 volt circuit. 2. Surface mounted. 3. Locate at inside door jamb.
13032-2
08 36 13 - 2
SECTIONAL DOORS
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are within specified limits.
B.
Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit to perimeter air and vapor barrier seal.
3.03 INSTALLATION A.
Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress.
C.
Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members only.
D.
Fit and align door assembly including hardware.
E.
Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete power and control wiring from disconnect to unit components.
F.
Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Section 07 90 05.
3.04 ADJUSTING A.
Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weatherstripping.
3.05 CLEANING A.
Clean doors and frames.
B.
Remove temporary labels and visible markings.
3.06 PROTECTION A.
Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.
B.
Clean doors, frames.
C.
Remove temporary labels and visible markings.
D.
Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and cleaning. END OF SECTION
13032-2
08 36 13 - 3
SECTIONAL DOORS
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass.
B.
Aluminum doors and frames.
C.
Weatherstripping.
D.
Perimeter sealant.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
A.
Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Steel attachment members.
B.
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel attachment devices.
C.
Section 07 25 00 - Air Barrier: Perimeter air and vapor seal between glazing system and adjacent construction.
D.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
E.
Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section.
F.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
B.
AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009.
C.
AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.
D.
ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; 2011.
E.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.
F.
ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.
G.
ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
H.
ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.
I.
ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).
J.
ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required.
D.
Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering calculations, dimensional limitations.
13032-2
08 43 13 - 1
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements.
F.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience.
B.
Window and door assemblies shall meet the air leakage requirements stated in the International Energy Code 502.4.1 in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 or NFRC 400 by an accredited independent laboratory labeled and certified by the manufacturer.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B.
Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.
1.08 WARRANTY A.
Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Provide twenty year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.
C.
Provide ten year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Aluminum-Framed Storefront and Doors: High Performance Thermal Break.for Window Framing. 1. Kawneer North America: Trifab 451UT. www.kawneer.com. 2. Manko Window Systems, Inc: 5450i Series. www.mankowindows.com. 3. Tubelite, Inc.: TU24000. www.tubeliteinc.com. 4. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 STOREFRONT A.
13032-2
Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Glazing Position: Centered (front to back). 2. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep. 3. Finish: Superior performance organic coating. a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. b. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. 4. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and secured; prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads. 5. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibration harmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces. 6. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. 7. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 8. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 08 43 13 - 2
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
9.
Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction while allowing expected movement. 10. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glazing and heel bead of glazing compound. B.
Performance Requirements: 1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7. b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. 2. Water Penetration Resistance: No uncontrolled water on interior face, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at pressure differential of 6 lbf/sq ft. 3. Air Leakage: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at 6.27 pounds per square foot pressure differential across assembly. 4. Condensation Resistance Factor of Framing: 50, minimum, measured in accordance with AAMA 1503. 5. Overall U-value Including Glazing: 0.30 Btu/(hr sq ft deg F), maximum.
2.03 COMPONENTS A.
Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Framing members for interior applications and exterior canopy clerestory need not be thermally broken. 2. Glazing stops: Applied.
B.
Swing Doors: Glazed aluminum. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Wide stile. 3. Bottom Rail: 10 inches wide. 4. Glazing Stops: Square. 5. Finish: Same as storefront.
2.04 MATERIALS A.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
B.
Fasteners: Stainless steel.
C.
Perimeter Sealant: Type specified in Section 07 90 05.
D.
Glass: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
E.
Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements.
2.05 FINISHES A.
Superior Performance Organic Coating System: AAMA 2605 multiple coat, thermally cured polyvinylidene fluoride system.
B.
Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.06 HARDWARE A.
Other Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
B.
Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors.
C.
Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors.
2.07 FABRICATION A.
Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B.
Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
C.
Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
D.
Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.
13032-2
08 43 13 - 3
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
E.
Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
F.
Reinforce components internally for door hardware and door operators.
G.
Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.
H.
Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.
Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.
C.
Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
D.
Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
E.
Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
F.
Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.
G.
Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing.
H.
Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
I.
Pack fibrous insulation or apply expanding foam in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.
J.
Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure.
K.
Install glass in accordance with Section 08 80 00, using exterior wet/dry glazing method.
L.
Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 90 05.
M. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.02 ADJUSTING A.
Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation.
3.03 CLEANING A.
Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B.
Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
C.
Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. END OF SECTION
13032-2
08 43 13 - 4
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Extruded aluminum windows with fixed sash and integral blinds.
B.
Factory glazing.
C.
Operating hardware for venetian blinds inside glazing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Rough opening framing.
C.
Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Perimeter air and vapor seal between window frame and adjacent construction.
D.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
E.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - (NAFS) North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights; American Architectural Manufacturers Association/Window & Door Manufacturers Association; 2011.
B.
AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009.
C.
AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.
D.
AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
E.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2013.
F.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.
G.
ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide component dimensions and information on glass and glazing.
C.
Grade Substantiation: Provide specified Grade Substantiation before submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication.
D.
Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, method for achieving air and vapor barrier seal to adjacent construction, anchorage locations,, and installation requirements.
E.
Samples: Submit one samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating typical corner construction, accessories, and finishes.
F.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include complete preparation, installation, and cleaning requirements. Include recommendations for maintenance and repair.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication of commercial aluminum windows of types required, with not fewer than three years of experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Comply with requirements of AAMA CW-10.
B.
Protect finished surfaces with wrapping paper or strippable coating during installation. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate when exposed to sunlight or weather.
13032-2
08 51 13 - 1
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.
B.
Maintain this minimum temperature during and 24 hours after installation of sealants.
1.08 WARRANTY A.
Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Insulated Glass Warranty: Provide insulating glass manufacturer's written twenty (20) year warranty, agreeing to, within specified warranty period, furnish FOB project site, replacement units for insulating glass units which have defective hermetic seals (excluding that due to glass breakage); defined to include intrusion of moisture or dirt, internal condensation at temperatures above -20°F, deterioration of internal glass coatings, and other visual evidence of seal failure or performance failure; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installation, protection and maintenance have been adhered to during warranty period.
C.
Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for performance and installation. Any additional warranty requirements desired by the owner shall be negotiated with window supplier separate from the building contract.
D.
Provide twenty year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Aluminum Windows for Behavioral Health occupancy, with removable blind crank for venetian blinds inside glazing: 1. Oldcastle (Moduline) 2. EFCO, a Pella Company: www.efcocorp.com. 3. Wausau Window and Wall Systems: www.wausauwindow.com. 4. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 WINDOWS A.
Aluminum Windows: Extruded aluminum frame and sash, factory fabricated, factory finished, thermally broken, vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices and able to accept interior pane of glass flush with inside of frame. 1. Frame Depth: 3 1/2 inches. 2. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and secured; prepared to receive anchors; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for operating hardware and imposed loads. 3. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction while allowing expected movement. 4. Movement: Accommodate movement between window and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 5. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system.
B.
Performance Requirements: Provide products that comply with the following: 1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 with Performance Class AW and Performance Grade 40. 2. Grade Substantiation: Either AAMA Certification Label or independent test report itemizing compliance will constitute acceptable evidence of compliance. 3. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. 4. Condensation Resistance Factor of Frame: 50, measured in accordance with AAMA 1503. 5. Overall U-value, Including Glazing: 0.45, maximum, measured on the window size required for this project. a. Window U-value factors shall meet the Fenestration Product Rating in the International Energy Code 303.1.3 which requires testing and labeling in accordance with NFRC 100.
C.
Fixed, Non-Operable Type: 1. Construction: Thermally broken. Frame size as indicated on plans. 2. Glazing: See Section 08 80 00.
13032-2
08 51 13 - 2
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
3. 4.
Venetian blind installed between glazing shall operate up and down and rotate. Operation shall be remote at interior face of window without having to open the window. Finish: Superior performance organic coating.
2.03 COMPONENTS A.
Frames: 2 inch wide x 3 1/2 inch deep profile, of 1/8 inch thick section; thermally broken with interior portion of frame insulated from exterior portion; flush glass stops of snap-on type.
B.
Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
C.
Sills: extruded aluminum; sloped for positive wash; fit under sash and connect to frame as designed by window manufacturer; one piece full width of opening.
D.
Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08 80 00.
E.
Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07 90 05.
2.04 MATERIALS A.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
B.
Concealed Steel Items: Profiled to suit mullion sections; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M.
2.05 HARDWARE A.
Provide wrenches, keys or removable operating handles as required for specific window.
2.06 FABRICATION A.
Fabricate components with smallest possible clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly that will enable window installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B.
Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
C.
Prepare components to receive anchor devices.
D.
Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view.
E.
Provide steel internal reinforcement in mullions as required to meet loading requirements.
F.
Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.
G.
Assemble insect screen frames with mitered and reinforced corners. Secure wire mesh tautly in frame. Fit frame with four, spring loaded steel pin retainers.
H.
Factory glaze window units.
2.07 FINISHES A.
Superior Performance Organic Coating System: AAMA 2605 multiple coat, thermally cured polyvinylidene fluoride system; color as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive aluminum windows.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.
C.
Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
D.
Install sill.
E.
Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Apply expanding foam insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.
F.
Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier and vapor retarder materials.
G.
Install operating hardware not pre-installed by manufacturer.
H.
Install glass in accordance with requirements specified in Section 08 80 00.
13032-2
08 51 13 - 3
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
I.
Install perimeter sealant in accordance with requirements specified in Section 07 90 05.
3.03 CLEANING A.
Remove protective material from factory finished aluminum surfaces.
B.
Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean.
C.
Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer. END OF SECTION
13032-2
08 51 13 - 4
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
SECTION 08 54 13 FIBERGLASS WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Factory fabricated all fiberglass and fiberglass/wood windows with fixed and operating sash.
B.
Factory glazed.
C.
Insect screens.
D.
Perimeter sealant.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry: Extension jambs.
B.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
C.
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2011.
B.
ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
C.
ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
D.
ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.
E.
ASTM E 547 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential.
F.
ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation.
G.
National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC): 101: Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Thermal Properties.
H.
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufactures Association / Insulating Glass Certification Council (SIGMA / IGCC).
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, glass, internal drainage details.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related work, installation requirements.
D.
Submit 2 samples of window corner/frame section.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements.
F.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Meet code requirements for basement egress window and other required egress locations.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
13032-2
08 54 13 - 1
FIBERGLASS WINDOWS
1.08 WARRANTY A.
Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Provide twenty year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. Include coverage for degradation of color finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Fiberglass Windows: 1. Basis of Design: Marvin Integrity All Ultrex and Wood-Ultrex 2. Pella Impervia 3. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 WINDOW UNITS A.
Fiberglass Windows: Hollow, tubular, multi-layer fiber reinforced material; factory fabricated; with vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Performance Requirements: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/ A440 - 05. 2. Configuration: Fixed non-operable. 3. Color: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's standard line..
B.
Performance Requirements: 1. System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind acting normal to plane of window. a. Calculate design pressures in accordance with applicable code 2. Assembly: To accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement between window and perimeter framing, deflection of lintel. 3. U-value: 0.33 maximum. 4. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.3 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E283. 5. Vapor Seal: No vapor seal failure at interior static pressure of 1 inch, 72 degrees F, and 40 percent relative humidity. 6. System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network. 7. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound. 8. Thermal Movement: Design sections to permit movement caused by thermal expansion and contraction of fiberglass to suit glass, infill, and perimeter opening construction.
2.03 COMPONENTS A.
Frame Size: Manufacturer's standard.
B.
Sash shall tilt to interior for cleaning.
C.
Insect Screen: Charcoal fiberglass.
2.04 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A.
Insulating glass, high performance low-e with argon gas.
B.
Factory glazed, manufaturer's standard installation.
2.05 SEALANT MATERIALS A.
Perimeter Sealant and Backing Materials: Type as specified in Section 07 90 05.
2.06 HARDWARE A.
13032-2
Double Hung Sash: Metal and nylon spiral friction slide cylinder, each sash, each jamb. 1. Sash Lock: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Provide stop limits for upper sash.
08 54 13 - 2
FIBERGLASS WINDOWS
2.07 FABRICATION A.
Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B.
Arrange fasteners to be concealed from view.
C.
Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.
D.
Double weatherstrip operable units.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.
Install window units in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B.
Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.
C.
Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
D.
Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.
E.
Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
F.
Install perimeter sealant and backing materials in accordance with Section 07 90 05.
3.02 ADJUSTING A.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.
3.03 CLEANING A.
Remove protective material from pre-finished surfaces.
B.
Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean.
C.
Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer. END OF SECTION
13032-2
08 54 13 - 3
FIBERGLASS WINDOWS
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 08 56 59 SERVICE AND TELLER WINDOW UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Service and teller window units.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.
B.
ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for specified products indicating materials, operation, glazing, finishes, and installation instructions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration, sizes, rough-in, mounting, anchors and fasteners, and installation clearances.
D.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, with ability to provide test reports showing that their standard manufactured products meet the specified requirements.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver units in manufacturer's original packaging and unopened containers with identification labels intact.
1.07 WARRANTY A.
See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide manufacturer's warranty agreeing to repair or replace units and their components that fail in materials or workmanship within one from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SERVICE AND TELLER WINDOW UNITS A.
Pass-Through Window: 1. Location: Interior. 2. Window: Single horizontal sliding. a. Operation: Manual. b. Mounting: Flush with the wall surface. c. Size: As indicated on drawings. d. Finish: Natural anodized. 3. Glazing: As indicated on Drawings, clear. 4. Products: a. CR Laurence Co. Inc.: Daisy Model D1041 or comparable. www.crlaurence.com b. See Division 1 for Substitution procedures.
2.02 COMPONENTS A.
13032-2
Windows: Factory-fabricated, -finished, and -glazed, extruded aluminum frame and glazing stops; complete with hardware and anchors.
08 56 59 - 1
SERVICE AND TELLER WINDOW UNITS
1. 2. 3. 4.
Provide window units that are re-glazable from the secure side without dismantling the non-secure side of framing. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners with internal reinforcement. Make joints and connections flush, hairline, and weatherproof. Fully weld corners. Apply factory finish to all exposed surfaces. Horizontal Sliding Windows: Top-hung operable sash, no bottom track; hook bolt locking device with thumb-turn release.
2.03 MATERIALS A.
Aluminum Extrusions: Minimum 0.125 inch thick frame and sash material complying with ASTM B221 and ASTM B221M.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that window openings are ready for installation of windows.
B.
Verify that correct embedded anchors are in place and in proper location; repair or replace anchors as required to achieve satisfactory installation.
C.
Notify Architect if conditions are not suitable for installation of units; do not proceed until conditions are satisfactory.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install units in correct orientation (inside/outside or secure/non-secure).
C.
Anchor units securely in manner so as to achieve performance specified.
D.
Seal perimeter joints as specified in Section 07 90 05.
3.03 ADJUSTING A.
Adjust operating components for smooth operation while also maintaining a secure, weather-tight enclosure and a tight fit at the contact points; lubricate operating hardware.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces promptly after installation without damaging finishes.
C.
Remove and replace defective work.
D.
Provide temporary protection to ensure that security windows are without damage at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
13032-2
08 56 59 - 2
SERVICE AND TELLER WINDOW UNITS
SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1: 1.01
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Conditions of the Contract and portions of Division One of this Project Manual apply to this Section as though repeated herein. 1.02
WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all finish hardware specified herein, listed in the hardware schedule, or required by the drawings. B. Where items of hardware are not definitely or correctly specified and are required for the intended service, such omission, error, or other discrepancy should be directed to the Architect prior to the bid date for clarification by addendum. Otherwise, furnish such items in the type and quantity established by this specification for the appropriate service intended. 1.03
RELATED WORK
A. Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section. B. Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. C. Section 08 42 29 – Automated Entrances D. Section 08 43 13 – Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: All hardware including cylinders to be supplied by 08 71 00. Manufacturer’s standard weatherstrip and sweeps shall be supplied by aluminum door and frame supplier. E. Electrical coordination at electrified doors 1.04
REFERENCES
A. A.D.A. - Americans with Disabilities Act. B. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for making facilities accessible to physically handicapped people. C. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design). D. NFPA 80 - Standards for Fire Doors and Windows. E. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. F. U.L. - Building Material Directory. G. D.H.I. - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware. H. Applicable State and Local Building Codes, including IBC 2009.
13032-2
08 71 00 - 1
DOOR HARDWARE
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit five (5) copies of a detailed hardware schedule, vertical format. Prepare under the supervision of an AHC, registered Architectural Hardware Consultant, and under provisions of Division One. 1. Itemize hardware in the sequence and format established by this specification. 2. List and describe each opening separately. Include all doors with identical hardware, except hand, in a single heading. Include door number, room designations, degree of swing, and hand. 3. List related details. Include dimensions, door and frame material, and other considerations affecting hardware. 4. List all hardware items to be supplied. Include manufacturer's name, quantity, product name, catalog number, size, finish, attachments, and related details where applicable. 5. Resubmit five (5) copies of the corrected schedule when required. B. Keying Schedule: After receipt of approved hardware schedule submit a copy of keying schedule as a result of a keying meeting between the Owner and the hardware supplier. C. Samples: If so directed by the Architect, submit samples of finish hardware items for approval. Properly identify each sample as to make and number, and furnish in the specified finish. D. Templates: Furnish a copy of approved hardware schedule, along with applicable templates for factory-prepared hardware to each door and frame fabricator. E. Electrical Hardware: Submit electrical specifications and applicable information to the electrical contractor after receipt of the approved hardware schedule. F. Substitutions: Submit under provisions of Division One. Provide detailed information and catalog cuts indicating the comparison to the specified hardware. If requested by the Architect, provide a sample accompanied by a sample of the specified item for comparison. 1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Except where specified in the hardware schedule, furnish products of only one manufacturer for each type of hardware. 2. Supplier: A company experienced in the builders' hardware industry for a minimum of two (2) years, and can call upon an AHC, registered Architectural Hardware Consultant, for consultation during the full extent of the project B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Furnish UL or Warnock Hersey listed hardware for all fire labeled and 20 minute openings in conformance with requirements for class of opening scheduled, whether specifically called for in this specification or not. 2. Furnish hardware that conforms to all applicable state and local building codes, including IBC 2000 positive pressure testing requirements. Where specified hardware is not in conformance with applicable codes, such omission or error should be directed to the Architect prior to the bid date for clarification by addendum; otherwise furnish hardware as required by code. C. Training and Inspection: 1. Hold pre-installation meeting to coordinate training of installation personnel. Installers shall be trained by manufacturer’s representative. 13032-2
08 71 00 - 2
DOOR HARDWARE
2. Manufacturer’s representative shall inspect installation of hardware as part of substantial completion requirements. 1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Division One. Mark each original container with a door number that corresponds to the approved hardware schedule for the installation location. B. Receive, inventory and store hardware in a secure and dry environment; protect against loss and damage. C. Report any shortages to the hardware supplier no later than 48 hours after receipt of delivery to the job site. D. Stockpile items sufficiently in advance to ensure their availability. Coordinate delivery, handling, and installation of hardware items to ensure orderly progress of total work, and minimize or eliminate losses and damage. PART 2: 2.01
PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Products Hinges Flush Bolts Locks and Latches Push/Pull Latches Exit Devices Door Closers Protective Plates Overhead Stops/Holders Wall Stops/Floor Stops Electromagnetic Door Holders Thresholds, Sweeps, Weatherstrip
Specified Stanley Rockwood Schlage Rockwood Von Duprin LCN Rockwood Glynn Johnson Rockwood Lcn Reese
Acceptable Ives, McKinney, Hager DCI, Trimco, Ives Sarent,Best Ives,ABH Sargent,Precision No Substitutions Sargent,Stanley Rockwood, ABH Trimco, Hager, DCI Stanley, Rixson National Guard Products, Pemko
See Division 1 for Substitution procedures. 2.02
HINGES
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Description Std. Wt. Plain Bearing - Steel Std. Wt. Ball Bearing - Steel Std. Wt. Ball Bearing -non ferrous Hvy. Wt. Ball Bearing Steel Hvy. Wt. Ball Bearing – non ferrous
Ives 5PB1 5BB1 5BB1 5BB1HW 5BB1HW
Stanley F179 FBB179 FBB191 FBB168 FBB179
McKinney T2714 TA2714 TB2314 T4B3786 T4B3386
Hager 1279 BB1279 BB1191 BB1168 BB1199
B. Hinges supplied must be tested and comply with ANSI/BHMA standards for consistency, wear and corrosion resistance. C. Quantity: Furnish hinges for each door leaf as follows, unless otherwise noted in groups: 1. Doors up to and including 90" high - 3 hinges. 2. Doors over 90" high through 120" high - 4 hinges. D. Type: Furnish as follows, unless otherwise noted in groups: 13032-2
08 71 00 - 3
DOOR HARDWARE
1. Standard weight, plain bearing hinge for interior openings through 36" wide without a door closer. 2. Standard weight, ball bearing hinge for interior openings over 36" through 40" wide with a door closer, and for interior openings through 40" wide with a door closer. 3. Heavy weight, four ball bearing hinge for all exterior openings unless noted in groups. E. Size: Furnish as follows, unless otherwise noted in groups: 1. 1 3/4" doors: 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" 2. Provide proper hinge width to clear trim and allow full 180° swing. F. Hinges for all lockable doors opening outward shall have non-removable pin (NRP). All other hinges shall have non-rising pins. 2.03
FLUSH BOLTS
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Description Manual - Metal Door Manual - Wood Door Automatic - Metal Door Automatic - Wood Door Self Latching - Metal Door Self Latching - Wood Door Dust Proof Strike
Rockwood 555 557 1842 1962 1845 1945 570
Ives FB458 FB358 FB31P ----FB51P FB61P DP2
Trimco 3917 3913 3810 ---3820 3825 3911
DCI 780F 790F 842 962 845 945 82
B. Furnish a dustproof strike for all bottom bolts. 2.04
LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Description Heavy Duty Mortise Hvy. Duty Grade 1 Cylindrical Std. Duty Grade 2 Cylindrical
Schlage L SERIES ND SERIES AL SERIES
Sargent 8200 10LINE 7 LINE
Best 45 H 93K 7KC
B. Furnish lock types and functions as specified in the hardware schedule, and as follows: 1. Provide 2-3/4" backset. 2. Provide 2-3/4" x 1-1/8" “T” strike with a dust box for use in wood doors or frames. 3. Provide 4-7/8" x 1-1/4" ANSI strike for installation in a hollow metal door or frame. 4. Locksets to conform to ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 and be UL listed. 2.05
EXIT DEVICES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Description Von Duprin Wide Stile Rim 98/99 RIM Wide Stile Surf. Vert. Rod 98/9927 Wide Stile Conc. Vert. Rod 98/9947 Wide Stile Mortise 98/9975 Narrow Stile Rim 33/35 RIM Narrow Stile Conc. Vert. Rod 33/3547 13032-2
08 71 00 - 4
respective Sargent 8800 8700 8600 8300 AD8500 AD8600
catalog Precision 2100 2200 2800 2300 2400
numbers:
DOOR HARDWARE
B. Furnish exit device types and functions as specified in the hardware schedule. C. Lever handles supplied with exit devices shall match the design specified for locks and latches. 2.06
PULLS, PUSHBARS, PUSH/PULL PLATES
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Description See hardware groups
Rockwood
Trimco
Burns
B. Supply product as listed in groups or equal to acceptable manufacturers. 2.07
DOOR CLOSERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Description Heavy Duty Reg. Arm Heavy Duty Parallel Arm Heavy Duty Stop Arm Medium Duty Standard Duty-No Cover
LCN Sargent 4011 281 Series 4111 EDA 4111 SCUSH 1460 1070
Stanley 4550 Series
B. Furnish complete with mounting brackets, drop plates, spacers, special shoes, and thru bolts as may be required by the door and frame conditions. 2.08
PROTECTIVE PLATES
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Rockwood, Trimco, Burns, Hager. B. All kickplate heights shall be as listed in groups and 2" less door width single doors and 1" less for pairs. C. Thickness shall be .050" (16 gauge). 2.09
OVERHEAD STOPS/HOLDERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Description Heavy Duty Surface Heavy Duty Concealed Standard Duty Surface Standard Duty Concealed
A.B.H. 9000 1000 4400 4000
Rockwood 1000 series
Glynn Johnson 90 100 450 410
B. Furnish an overhead stop if a door opens against equipment, casework, sidelights, or other objects that would make wall bumpers inappropriate, and as specified in the hardware groups. 2.10
WALL STOPS
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Description Wrought Convex Wall Wrought Concave w/Toggle
Rockwood 407 409
Hager 232W 237W
Ives Various per conditions
B. When "wall stop" is called for in hardware group, provide 407 or 409. When overhead stops are required, they will be specified by product number in the group. 13032-2
08 71 00 - 5
DOOR HARDWARE
C. Wall stops shall not be mounted to casework, cabinet work, sidelights, or equipment. 2.11
ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Description LCN Rixson Floor Mounted - Single SEM7820 FM980 Floor Mounted - Double ---FM981 Flush Wall Mount - Std. Catch Plate SEM7850 FM998 Surface Wall Mount SEM7830 FM996 B. Provide the voltage as required by electrical. 2.12
THRESHOLDS, SWEEPS, WEATHERSTRIP, DRIP CAPS, GASKET, ASTRAGALS
A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Description Threshold Sweep Sweep Weatherstrip Weatherstrip Gasket
Reese S205 323 967 970 DS78 797B
Pemko 171A 315N 18133CP 45100CP 315CR S88
National Guard 425A 200N OV633 603 130N 1010
B. Where specified in groups, furnish the above products unless otherwise detailed. 2.13
DOOR HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Unless indicated otherwise in the groups provide finishes as follows: 1. Hinges, exterior: US32D 2. Hinges, interior: US26D 3. Flush Bolts: US26D 4. Exit Devices: US32D 5. Locks and Latches: US26D 6. Pulls, Pushbars, Push/Pull: US32D 7. Door Closers: Painted Aluminum 8. Protective Plates: US32D 9. Overhead Stops: Painted Aluminum 10. Wall Stops: US32D 11. Gasket: Black 12. Thresholds: Mill Aluminum 13. Weatherstrip, Sweeps: Clear Anodized Aluminum 2.14
KEYING
A. The Hardware Supplier, in consultation with the Owner's authorized representative, shall prepare a detailed keying schedule. A copy of the final approved keying schedule bearing the signature of approval of the Owner's Representative shall be filed with the Architect. All locks shall be keyed into the same system as is used on the existing buildings. EXISTING IS SCHLAGE E KWY. B. Key locks in sets or subsets. Hardware supplier shall provide (6) each grand master key(s) and 2 each master keys under the base bid. Additional keys requested by the the Owner shall be an additional cost. 13032-2
08 71 00 - 6
DOOR HARDWARE
C. Hardware supplier shall provide two (2) change keys per lockset. Additional keys for each keyed group requested by the Owner shall be an additional cost. D. Grand master and master keys shall be delivered by registered mail direct from the manufacturer to the Owner. PART 3: 3.01
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors, frames, and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper application of finish hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected. 3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install each hardware item in strict compliance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations, using only fasteners supplied by, or called for by the manufacturer. B. Set units level, plumb and true to the line and location. Prepare and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. C. Mortise and cut to close tolerance and conceal evidence of cutting in the finished work. Drill and countersink units which are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. D. If manufacturer’s instructions do not call out a mounting location, refer to the Door and Hardware Institute's publication Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware. E. Deliver to the Owner one (1) complete set of installation and adjustment instructions, as well as all tools that were furnished with the hardware. 3.03
ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. At final completion, adjust and check each operating item of hardware at each door to ensure proper operation and function of every unit. Lubricate any moving parts that do not operate freely, smoothly, and quietly using only lubricant as recommended by the manufacturer of the hardware item. Replace units that cannot be adjusted or lubricated to operate properly. B. Instruct the Owner’s personnel in the proper adjustments of the hardware as needed. C. Clean and restore hardware to the original finish.
13032-2
08 71 00 - 7
DOOR HARDWARE
Page Intentionally Left Blank
3.04
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
HARDWARE GROUP 1 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. ALL UNIT ENTRIES TO ROOMS-80 EA, 5009A, 5105A, 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS PASSAGE LOCKSET KICK PLATES WALL STOP SMOKE GASKET
BY PREHUNG SUPPLIER ND10S X RHO 626 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 409 US32D F797B17
SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD REESE
HARDWARE GROUP 2 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. ALL COMMUNICATING DR TO HAVE-1118B, 1216B, 1318B 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS COMMUNICATING LK KICK PLATES SURFACE OHS GASKET
BY PREHUNG SUPPLIER ND72PD RHO 626 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 450 SERIES F797B17
SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD GLYNN JOHNSON REESE
HARDWARE GROUP 3 EACH SINGLE SLIDING DR TO HAVE: DR. ALL UNIT BATHROOMS-80 EA, 5052, 5148 1 EA 2 EA
TRACK/HRDW PULLS
200WM961 106 BTB US32D
JOHNSON HARDWARE ROCKWOOD
HARDWARE GROUP 4 EACH PAIR OF BI-PASS DOORS TO HAVE: DR. ALL UNIT BI-PASS CLOSETS-30 EA, 3059 1 EA
TRACK/HRDW
2004482DR
JOHNSON HARDWARE
HARDWARE GROUP 5 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 1033, 1131, 1231, 1333, 2039, 5034 (CLEAN LINEN) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS CLASSROOM LOCKSET CLOSER KICK PLATES GASKET
13032-2
TA2714-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND70PD X RHO 626 4111 SCUSH 689 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 F797B17
08 71 00 - 8
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE LCN ROCKWOOD REESE
DOOR HARDWARE
HARDWARE GROUP 6 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 1038, 1136, 1236, 1338, 5125, 5029 (SOILED UTILITY) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS CLASSROOM LOCKSET CLOSER KICK PLATES WALL STOP GASKET
TA2714-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND70PD X RHO 626 4011 REG 689 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 409 US32D F797B17
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE LCN ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD REESE
TA2714-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND70PD X RHO 626 4111 EDA 689 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 409 US32D F797B17
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE LCN ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD REESE
HARDWARE GROUP 7 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 2036 (SOILED UTILITY) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS CLASSROOM LOCKSET CLOSER KICK PLATES WALL STOP GASKET
HARDWARE GROUP 8 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR.1034, 1132, 1232, 1334, 4009, 5124, 5131(SMALL CLOSETS,OFFICES) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS CLASSROOM LOCKSET KICK PLATES SURFACE OHS
TA2714-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND70PD X RHO 626 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 450 SERIES 652
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD GLYNN JOHNSON
HARDWARE GROUP 9 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR.1022,1037,1040,1120,1135,1138,1220.1235,1238,1322,1337,1340,2000,2004,2040,3009,3002,30 03,3004,3006,3007,3013,3016,3017,3022,3024,3026,3027,3028,3029,3030,3039,3042,3043,3044,304 6A,3046B,3047,3048,3049,3050B,3051,3053,3054,3055A,3055B,3056,3057A,3057B,3058A,3058B,40 12,4020B,5003,5053,5149, (HOUSE KEEPING, FAMILY ROOM, DEN, OFFICES, MULTIPURPOSE, CONFERENCES, CHAPEL) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS CLASSROOM LOCKSET KICK PLATES WALL STOP
13032-2
PER SPECIFICATION ND70PD X RHO 626 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 409 US32D
08 71 00 - 9
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD
DOOR HARDWARE
HARDWARE GROUP 10 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 1032,1035,1036,1130,1133,1134,1230,1233,1234,1332,1335,1336,3008,3034A,3034B,4002,5135,503 9, (STORAGE,STAIRS,ELECTRICAL ROOMS) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS STORERM LOCKSET CLOSER KICK PLATES WALL STOP GASKET
TA2714-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND80PD X RHO 626 4011 REG 689 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 409 US32D F797B17
HARDWARE GROUP 11 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 2001, 3012A, 5002, 5028 (STORAGE, DATA) 3 EA BUTTS SEE SPECIFICATION 1 EA STORERM LOCKSET ND80PD X RHO 626 1 EA KICK PLATES 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 1 EA WALL STOP 409 US32D 1 EA GASKET F797B17 NO GASKET FOR 2001, 3012A
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE LCN ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD REESE
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD REESE
HARDWARE GROUP 12 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR.1041,1139,1239, 1341, 2035, 3005, 3035, 3036, 3037, 3052, 4004, 5134, 5038 (BATHROOM) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS PRIVACY LOCKSET KICK PLATES WALL STOP GASKET
T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND40 X RHO 626 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 409 US32D F797B17
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD REESE
HARDWARE GROUP 13 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 1016,1017,1114,1115,1214,1215,1316,1317, 2002, 3001,5122, 5123,5026,5027, 5035, 5130 (BATHER,LAUNDRY,LIFT) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS PASSAGE LOCKSET KICK PLATES WALL STOP
13032-2
T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND10S X RHO 626 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 409 US32D
08 71 00 - 10
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD
DOOR HARDWARE
HARDWARE GROUP 14 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 3014 (KITCHEN), 3032 (KITCHEN) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS STORERM LOCKSET CLOSER CONCEALED OHS KICK PLATES GASKET
TA2714-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND80PD X RHO 626 4011 REG 689 100 SERIES 630 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 F797B17
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE LCN GLYNN JOHNSON ROCKWOOD REESE
HARDWARE GROUP 15 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 1044, 1142, 1242, 1344 (KITCHEN) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS STORERM LOCKSET CLOSER ELECTRIC STRIKE CONCEALED OHS KICK PLATES GASKET
TA2714-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND80PD X RHO 626 4011 REG 689 6211 630 100 SERIES 630 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 F797B17
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE LCN VONDUPRIN GLYNN JOHNSON ROCKWOOD REESE
HARDWARE GROUP 16 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 3010, 3011, 3012B (CHAPEL STORAGE) 3 EA BUTTS TA2714-26D 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA STORERM LOCKSET ND80PD X RHO 626 1 EA KICK PLATES 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 1 EA CONCEALED OHS 100 SERIES 630 HEAVY WIEGHT HINGES DR 3011
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD GLYNN JOHNSON
HARDWARE GROUP 17 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR.2003, 2147, 3015, 3031, 5051 (MEDS ROOMS) 3 EA BUTTS TA2714-26D 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 1 EA MORT STORERM LK L9480P X 06A 626 1 EA CLOSER 4011 REG 689 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6216 630 1 EA KICK PLATES 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 1 EA WALL STOP 409 US32D FOLLOW HINGE SPEC FOR DRS OVER 3’
13032-2
08 71 00 - 11
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE LCN VONDUPRIN ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD
DOOR HARDWARE
HARDWARE GROUP 18 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 3054A (COORIDOR) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS PASSAGE LOCKSET CLOSER KICK PLATES GASKET
TA2714-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND10S X RHO 626 4111 SCUSH 689 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 F797B17
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE LCN ROCKWOOD REESE
TA2714-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND70PD X RHO 626 4111 SCUSH 689 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 F797B17
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE LCN ROCKWOOD REESE
HARDWARE GROUP 19 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 3050A (CORRIDOR) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS CLASSROOM LOCKSET CLOSER KICK PLATES GASKET
HARDWARE GROUP 20 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR.3018, 3020 (PUBLIC RESTROOMS) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS PUSH PULL CLOSER KICK PLATES WALL STOP
T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 70C US32D 110 X 70C US32D 4111 EDA 689 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 409 US32D
MCKINNEY ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD LCN ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD
HARDWARE GROUP 21 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 4006, 4020B (SOILED UTILITY,RATED OFFICE) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS CLASSROOM LOCKSET CLOSER WALL STOP KICK PLATES GASKET
T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND70PD X RHO 626 4011 REG 689 409 US32D 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 F797B19
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE LCN ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD REESE
T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND70PD X RHO 626 4111 SCUSH 689 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 F797B19
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE LCN ROCKWOOD REESE
HARDWARE GROUP 22 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 4007 (CLEAN LINEN) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS CLASSROOM LOCKSET CLOSER KICK PLATES GASKET
13032-2
08 71 00 - 12
DOOR HARDWARE
HARDWARE GROUP 23 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR.4018A, 4018B (KITCHEN) 3 EA BUTTS T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 MCKINNEY 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCKSET ND70PD X RHO 626 SCHLAGE 1 EA CLOSER 4040SE 24VDC 689 LCN 1 EA CONCEALED OHS 100 SERIES 630 GLYNN JOHNSON 1 EA KICK PLATES 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 ROCKWOOD 1 EA GASKET F797B19 REESE DOOR CLOSERS TO BE TIED INTO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM TO ALLOW DOORS TO BE HELD OPEN WHEN REQUIRED
HARDWARE GROUP 24 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR.4015 (HOUSEKEEPING) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS CLASSROOM LOCKSET CLOSER WALL STOP KICK PLATES GASKET
T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND70PD X RHO 626 4111 EDA 689 409 US32D 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 F797B19
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD REESE
HARDWARE GROUP 25 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 4021B (DRY STORAGE) 3 EA BUTTS T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 MCKINNEY 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCKSET ND70PD X RHO 626 SCHLAGE 1 EA CLOSER 4111 H 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATES 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 ROCKWOOD 1 EA WALL STOP 409 US32D ROCKWOOD HOLD OPEN CLOSER TO BE MOUNTED TO ALLOW 180 DEGREE SWING
HARDWARE GROUP 26 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 4008, 4021A, 5004, 5101 (DRY STORAGE, MAINTENANCE, PARLOR) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS CLASSROOM LOCKSET KICK PLATES WALL STOP
13032-2
T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND70PD X RHO 626 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 409 US32D
08 71 00 - 13
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD
DOOR HARDWARE
HARDWARE GROUP 27 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 4013 (OXYGEN) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS STOREROOM LOCKSET CLOSER KICK PLATES GASKET
T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND80PD X RHO 626 4111 SCUSH 689 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 F797B19
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE LCN ROCKWOOD REESE
T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND70PD X RHO 626 4011 H 689 FB458 626 DP2 626 100 SERIES 652 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 F797B25 F797B7
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE CLOSER IVES IVES GLYNN JOHNSON ROCKWOOD REESE REESE
T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND70PD X RHO 626 4011 REG 689 FB42 626 CORP52 US28W/FL20 100 SERIES 652 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 F797B25 S773D7
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE CLOSER IVES IVES GLYNN JOHNSON ROCKWOOD REESE PEMKO
T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND80PD X RHO 626 4011 REG 689 100 SERIES 630 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 F797B19
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE LCN GLYNN JOHNSON ROCKWOOD REESE
HARDWARE GROUP 28 EACH PAIR OF DOORS TO HAVE: DR. 4003A, 4014A (RECEIVING) 6 EA 1 EA 2 EA 2 EA 1 EA 2 EA 2 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS CLASSROOM LOCKSET CLOSER FLUSHBOLTS DUST PROOF STRIKE CONCEALED OHS KICK PLATES SMOKE GASKET SMOKE GASKET
HARDWARE GROUP 29 EACH PAIR OF DOORS TO HAVE: DR. 4011 (CENTRAL SUPPLY) 6 EA 1 EA 2 EA 1 EA 1 EA 2 EA 2 EA 1 EA 2 EA
BUTTS CLASSROOM LOCKSET CLOSER AUTO FBS COORDINATOR CONCEALED OHS KICK PLATES SMOKE GASKET SMOKE ASTRAGALS
HARDWARE GROUP 30 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 4010 (RES STORAGE) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS STORERM LOCKSET CLOSER CONCEALED OHS KICK PLATES GASKET
13032-2
08 71 00 - 14
DOOR HARDWARE
HARDWARE GROUP 31 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 4001 (DATA) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS STORERM LOCKSET CLOSER ELECTRIC STRIKE KICK PLATES WALL STOP GASKET
TA2714-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND80PD X RHO 626 4011 REG 689 6211 630 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 409 US32D F797B17
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE LCN VONDUPRIN ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD REESE
T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 ND80PD X RHO 626 4011 REG 689 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 409 US32D F797B19
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE LCN ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD REESE
HARDWARE GROUP 32 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 4001 (STORAGE) 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS STORERM LOCKSET CLOSER KICK PLATES WALL STOP GASKET
HARDWARE GROUP 33 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR.2005 (LAUNDRY) 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
CONT HINGE MCK-FM300HT 79-3/16 630 MORT STORERM LK L9080P X SL1 626 FLOOR STOP /WALL STOP 467
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD
HARDWARE GROUP 33 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR.2006, 2032 (PARLOR, CONFERENCE) 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
CONT HINGE MCK-FM300HT 79-3/16 630 MORT CLASSRM LK L9070P X SL1 626 FLOOR STOP /WALL STOP 467
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD
HARDWARE GROUP 34 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR.2008, 2010, 2012, 2014, 2016, 2018, 2020, 2024, 2026, 2028(UNIT ENTRY) 1 EA CENTER HUNG PIVOTS 128-3/4 626 RIXSON 1 EA MORT CLASSRM LK L9070P X SL1 626 SCHLAGE 1 EA COMBINATION STK&STOP CSS-9 626 MCKINNEY 1 EA FLOOR STOP /WALL STOP 467 ROCKWOOD DOOR TO BE OFFSET IN CASED OPEN FRAME TO INSIDE OF ROOM.
13032-2
08 71 00 - 15
DOOR HARDWARE
HARDWARE GROUP 35 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR.2007, 2009, 2011, 2013, 2015, 2017, 2019, 2023, 2025, 2027 (BATHROOMS) 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
CONT HINGE MCK-FM300HT 79-3/16 630 MORT CLASSRM LK L9070P X SL1 626 FLOOR STOP /WALL STOP 467
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD
HARDWARE GROUP 36 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 2032 (STAFF RM) 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
CONT HINGE MORT CLASSRM LK FLOOR STOP
MCK-FM300HT 79-3/16 630 L9070P X SL1 626 467
MCKINNEY SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD
HARDWARE GROUP 37 EACH SINGLE ALUM DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 3045B 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
CONT HINGE EXIT DEVICE FSIC RIM CYLINDER OFFSET PULL CLOSER DROP PLATE SHOE SUPPORT BLADE STOP SPACER ELECTRIC STRIKE DR POSITION SWITCHES KICK PLATES THRESHOLD RAINDRIP SWEEPS WEATHERSTRIP
13032-2
BY ALUM DR & FR SUPPLIER 99NL-OP X 110MD 4’ 626 20-057 626 BF157 US32D 4111 SCUSH 689 4110-18 689 4110-30 689 4110-61 689 6300 630 679-05HM 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 S425A48 R201A48 BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER
08 71 00 - 16
VONDUPRIN SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD LCN LCN LCN LCN VONDUPRIN SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD REESE REESE
DOOR HARDWARE
HARDWARE GROUP 38 EACH PAIR OF DOUBLE EGRESS DOORS TO HAVE: DR.1100 6 EA BUTTS T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 MCKINNEY 2 EA PUSH 70C US32D ROCKWOOD 1 EA CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 1 EA SENTRONIC CLOSER 4040SE REG 689 24VDC LCN 1 EA MAG HOLD OPEN 7850 689 LCN 2 EA DR POSITION SWITCHES 679-05WD SCHLAGE 1 EA ALARM 1910-1 SCHLAGE 2 EA WALL STOP 409 US32D ROCKWOOD 2 EA KICK PLATES 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 ROCKWOOD 1 EA SMOKE GASKET F797B25 REESE 2 EA SMOKE ASTRAGALS S773D7 PEMKO DOORS TO BE HELD OPEN DURING DAILY HOURS BY MAG HOLD OPENS AND SENTRONIC CLOSER. AFTER HOURS ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TO RELEASE MAG HOLD OPENS AND SENTRONIC CLOSER. DOORS AFTER HOURS TO BE MONITORED BY THE ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM. IN THE EVENT SOMEONE ENTERS OR EXITS THRU THESE DRS DR POSTION SWITCHES WILL SINGLE THE ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM AND SOUND THE ALARM. ENTRY AND EXIT BY CARD READER AFTER HOURS WILL SHUNT THE ALARM.
HARDWARE GROUP 39 EACH PAIR OF DOUBLE EGRESS DOORS TO HAVE: DR.1000, 1200, 1300 6 EA BUTTS T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 MCKINNEY 2 EA PUSH 70C US32D ROCKWOOD 1 EA CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 1 EA CLOSER 4011 REG 689 LCN 2 EA MAG HOLD OPEN 7850 689 LCN 2 EA DR POSITION SWITCHES 679-05WD SCHLAGE 1 EA ALARM 1910-1 SCHLAGE 2 EA KICK PLATES 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 ROCKWOOD 2 EA WALL STOP 409 US32D ROCKWOOD 1 EA SMOKE GASKET F797B25 REESE 2 EA SMOKE ASTRAGALS S773D7 PEMKO DOORS TO BE HELD OPEN DURING DAILY HOURS BY MAG HOLD OPENS. AFTER HOURS ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TO RELEASE MAG HOLD OPENS. DOORS AFTER HOURS TO BE MONITORED BY THE ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM. IN THE EVENT SOMEONE ENTERS OR EXITS THRU THESE DRS DR POSTION SWITCHES WILL SINGLE THE ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM AND SOUND THE ALARM. ENTRY AND EXIT BY CARD READER AFTER HOURS WILL SHUNT THE ALARM.
13032-2
08 71 00 - 17
DOOR HARDWARE
HARDWARE GROUP 40 EACH SINGLE ALUM DOORS TO HAVE: DR.3000A, 5150B, 5054B 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 2 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
CONT HINGE PUSH/PULL COMBO AUTO OPERATOR ACTUATORS THRESHOLD RAINDRIP SWEEPS WEATHERSTRIP
BY ALUM DR & FR SUPPLIER BF15747 US32D 4642 REG 689 8310-852 S425A48 R201A48 BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER
ROCKWOOD LCN LCN REESE REESE
HARDWARE GROUP 41 EACH SINGLE ALUM DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 3000C, 5150A, 5054A 1 EA CONT HINGE W/EPT PREP BY ALUM DR & FR SUPPLIER 1 EA EXIT DEVICE CX99NL-OP X 110MD 4’ 626 VONDUPRIN 1 EA FSIC RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCHLAGE 1 EA FSIC MORT CYLINDER 26-091 626 SCHLAGE 1 EA OFFSET PULL BF157 US32D ROCKWOOD 1 EA AUTO OPERATOR 4632 REG 689 LCN 2 EA ACTUATORS 8310-852 LCN 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6300 630 VONDUPRIN 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS914 X 900-4RL-FA VONDUPRIN 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 SP28 VONDUPRIN 1 EA DR POSITION SWITCHES 679-05HM SCHLAGE 1 EA THRESHOLD S425A48 REESE 1 EA SWEEPS BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER 1 EA WEATHERSTRIP BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER DOOR TO HAVE DELAYED EGRESS PANIC DEVICE WHICH WILL BE CONTROLLED BY ACCESS CONROL SYSTEM. DURING OPERATING HOURS ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM WILL DISARM DELAYED EGRESS DEVICE AND POWER UP OUTSIDE ACTUATOR. AFTER HOURS DELAYED EGRESS WILL BE ACTIVE AND INSIDE/OUTSIDE ACTUATOR WILL BE DEACTIVATED. AFTER HOURS ENTRY AND EXIT BY CARD READER WILL SHUNT DELAYED EGRESS AND ALARM, AND ACTIVATE INSIDE AND OUTSIDE ACTUATORS. HARDWARE GROUP 42 EACH PAIR OF DOUBLE EGRESS DOORS TO HAVE: DR.3033, 4000, 5000A 6 EA 2 EA 1 EA 1 EA 2 EA 2 EA 2 EA 1 EA 2 EA
BUTTS VERTICAL ROD PANICS CLOSER CLOSER MAG HOLD OPEN KICK PLATES WALL STOP SMOKE GASKET SMOKE ASTRAGALS
T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 9927EO-F LBR4’ 626 4111 EDA 689 4011 REG 689 7850 689 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 409 US32D F797B25 S773D7
MCKINNEY VONDUPRIN LCN LCN LCN ROCKWOOD ROCKWOOD REESE PEMKO
DOORS TO BE HELD OPEN BY MAG HOLD OPENS IN THE EVENT OF A FIRE, FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WILL RELEASE MAG HOLD OPENS 13032-2
08 71 00 - 18
DOOR HARDWARE
HARDWARE GROUP 43 EACH SINGLE ALUM DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 3000B 1 EA CONT HINGE BY ALUM DR & FR SUPPLIER 1 EA DEADLATCH 4511W 628 ADAMS RITE 2 EA MORTISE CYLINDERS 20-022 626 SCHLAGE 1 EA PUSH/PULL COMBO BF15747 US32D ROCKWOOD 1 EA AUTO OPERATOR 4632 REG 689 LCN 2 EA ACTUATORS 8310-852 LCN 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 8300C 630 HES 1 EA DR POSITION SWITCHES 679-05HM SCHLAGE 1 EA THRESHOLD S425A48 REESE 1 EA SWEEPS BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER 1 EA WEATHERSTRIP BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER DOOR TO BE LOCKED BY KEY FROM BOTH SIDES. ACCESS FROM EITHER SIDE BY CARD READER. ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM ABLE TO HAVE DOOR UNLOCKED AT ANY TIME VIA RELEASING THE ELEC STRIKE AND ALLOWING USE OF AUTO OPERATOR DURING THIS TIME. DOOR CAN BE UNLOCKED BY KEY AND LATCH HELD IN RETRACTED POSITION. DURING LOCKDOWN OF DOOR ACTUATOR FROM BOTH SIDES TO BE INACTIVE. ACTIVE CARD READ TO UNLOCK DOOR AND PWR ACTUATORS,THUS ALLOWING AUTO OPERATOR TO WORK. HARDWARE GROUP 44 EACH SINGLE ALUM DOORS TO HAVE: DR.3045A 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
CONT HINGE PUSH/PULL COMBO CLOSER THRESHOLD SWEEPS WEATHERSTRIP
BY ALUM DR & FR SUPPLIER BF15747 US32D ROCKWOOD 4011 REG 689 LCN S425A48 REESE BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER
HARDWARE GROUP 45 EACH SINGLE ALUM DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 2029, 3023 1 EA CONT HINGE BY ALUM DR & FR SUPPLIER 1 EA DEADLATCH 4511W 628 ADAMS RITE 2 EA MORTISE CYLINDERS 20-022 626 SCHLAGE 1 EA PUSH/PULL COMBO BF15747 US32D ROCKWOOD 1 EA CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA DROP PLATE 4110-18 689 LCN 1 EA SHOE SUPPORT 4110-30 689 LCN 1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4110-61 689 LCN 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 8300C 630 HES 1 EA DR POSITION SWITCHES 679-05HM SCHLAGE 1 EA THRESHOLD S425A48 REESE 1 EA RAIN DRIP R201A48 REESE 1 EA SWEEPS BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER 1 EA WEATHERSTRIP BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER DOOR TO BE LOCKED FROM BOTH SIDES AT ALL TIMES UNLESS UNLOCKED FOR USE BY STAFF. PREPPING FRAME FOR ELECTRIC STRIKE FOR FUTURE USE OF CARD READER. 13032-2
08 71 00 - 19
DOOR HARDWARE
HARDWARE GROUP 46 EACH PAIR OF DOUBLE EGRESS DOORS TO HAVE: DR.2030, 2037 2 EA CONT HINGE MCK-FM300HT 79-3/16 630 MCKINNEY 2 EA PUSH 70C US32D ROCKWOOD 1 EA CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 1 EA CLOSER 4011 REG 689 LCN 2 EA MAG HOLD OPEN 7850 689 LCN 1 EA MAG LOCK M490P SCHLAGE 1 EA MAG LOCK M490P X TJ490 SCHLAGE 1 EA ARMOR PLATES 34 X 1” LDW CS B4E 630 ROCKWOOD 2 EA WALL STOP 409 US32D ROCKWOOD 1 EA SMOKE GASKET F797B25 REESE 2 EA SMOKE ASTRAGALS S773D7 PEMKO DOORS TO BE HELD OPEN WHEN REQUIRED BY MAG HOLD OPENS. WHEN DOORS ARE CLOSED AND ACCESS CONROL ACTIVATES MAG LOCKS, ACCESS TO AND FROM TO BE BY CARD ACCESS ONLY. DR POSITION SWITCH BUILT INTO MAG LOCKS. BRACKET FOR PULL SIDE MAG LOCK WILL NEED TO BE MODIFIED TO WORK WITH DOUBLE EGRESS FRAME AND DOORS.
HARDWARE GROUP 47 EACH SINGLE EXT DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 2021, 2041 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
CONT HINGE COMMUNICATING LK CLOSER LATCH GUARD DR POSITION SWITCHES KICK PLATES THRESHOLD RAIN DRIP SWEEPS WEATHERSTRIP
BY ALUM DR & FR SUPPLIER ND72PD RHO 626 4111 SCUSH 689 320CXL 630 679-05HM 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 S425A48 R201A48 BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER
SCHLAGE LCN ROCKWOOD SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD REESE REESE
HARDWARE GROUP 48 EACH SINGLE ALUM DOORS TO HAVE: DR.5005B, 5100B 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 2 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
CONT HINGE EXIT DEVICE FSIC RIM CYLINDER POWER SUPPLY POWER TRANSFER AUTO OPERATOR ACTUATORS THRESHOLD RAINDRIP SWEEPS WEATHERSTRIP
13032-2
BY ALUM DR & FR SUPPLIER EL99NL-OP X 110MD 626 20-057 626 PS914 X 900-4RL-FA EPT10 SP28 4642 REG 689 8310-852 S425A48 R201A48 BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER 08 71 00 - 20
VONDUPRIN SCHLAGE VONDUPRIN VONDUPRIN LCN LCN REESE REESE
DOOR HARDWARE
HARDWARE GROUP 49 EACH SINGLE DOOR TO HAVE: DR.2034 (SECLUSION) 1 EA CONT HINGE MCK-FM300HT 79-3/16 630 MCKINNEY 1 EA SHEAR LOCK GF3000TRD-DSM/MBS SCHLAGE 1 EA MAG LOCK M490P SCHLAGE 1 EA FLUSH PULL 94 US32D ROCKWOOD 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 X 900-4RL-FA VONDUPRIN 1 EA PUSH BUTTONS 701RD SCHLAGE MAG LOCKS TO BE RELEASED WHEN POWER TAKEN AWAY. POWER APPLIED WHEN PUSH BUTTON HELD IN. POWER DROPPED WHEN PUSH BUTTON RELEASED. MAGNETIC LOCKS ARE MOUNTED IN VERTICAL JAMB.
HARDWARE GROUP 50 EACH SINGLE EXT DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 5000B 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
BUTTS EXIT DEVICE FSIC RIM CYLINDER PULL CLOSER DR POSITION SWITCHES KICK PLATES THRESHOLD RAIN DRIP SWEEPS WEATHERSTRIP
T4A3386-32D 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 99NL-OP X 110MD 626 20-057 626 BF157 US32D 4111 SHCUSH 689 679-05HM 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 S425A48 R201A48 323C48 815A4884
MCKINNEY VONDUPRIN SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD LCN SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD REESE REESE REESE REESE
HARDWARE GROUP 51 EACH SINGLE EXT DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 4014C 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
CONT HINGE EXIT DEVICE FSIC RIM CYLINDER PULL CLOSER ELECTRIC STRIKE DR POSITION SWITCHES KICK PLATES THRESHOLD RAIN DRIP SWEEPS WEATHERSTRIP
13032-2
MCK-FM300 83-1/8” US32D 99NL-OP X 110MD 626 20-057 626 BF157 US32D 4111 SHCUSH 689 6300 630 679-05HM 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 S425A48 R201A48 323C48 815A4884
08 71 00 - 21
MCKINNEY VONDUPRIN SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD LCN VONDUPRIN SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD REESE REESE REESE REESE
DOOR HARDWARE
HARDWARE GROUP 52 EACH PAIR OF DOUBLE EGRESS DOORS TO HAVE: DR.5005A, 5100A 6 EA BUTTS T4A3786-26D 4.5 X 4.5 MCKINNEY 2 EA VERTICAL ROD PANICS CX9927EO-F LBR4’ 626 VONDUPRIN 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS914 X 900-4RL-FA VONDUPRIN 2 EA FSIC MORT CYLINDER 26-091 626 SCHLAGE 2 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 SP28 VONDUPRIN 1 EA CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 1 EA CLOSER 4011 REG 689 LCN 2 EA MAG HOLD OPEN 7850 689 LCN 2 EA DR POSITION SWITCHES 679-05WD SCHLAGE 2 EA KICK PLATES 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 ROCKWOOD 2 EA WALL STOP 409 US32D ROCKWOOD 1 EA SMOKE GASKET F797B25 REESE 2 EA SMOKE ASTRAGALS S773D7 PEMKO DOORS TO BE HELD OPEN DURING DAILY HOURS BY MAG HOLD OPENS. AFTER HOURS ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TO RELEASE MAG HOLD OPENS. DOORS AFTER HOURS TO BE MONITORED BY THE ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM. IN THE EVENT SOMEONE ENTERS OR EXITS THRU THESE DRS AFTER HOURS WITHOUT CREDENCIALS CHEXIT EXIT DEVICE WILL SOUND ALARM AFTER 15 SEC OF HOLDING IN CRASH BAR. ENTRY AND EXIT BY CARD READER AFTER HOURS WILL SHUNT THE ALARM. ACCESS CONTROL CAN BE SET UP TO HAVE CARD READER RESET SYSTEM IN THE EVENT OF AN ALARM.
HARDWARE GROUP 53 EACH SINGLE ALUM DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 5009B, 5105B 1 EA 1 EA 2 EA 1 EA 1 EA 2 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
CONT HINGE DEADLATCH MORTISE CYLINDERS PUSH/PULL COMBO AUTO OPERATOR ACTUATORS ELECTRIC STRIKE DR POSITION SWITCHES THRESHOLD SWEEPS WEATHERSTRIP
BY ALUM DR & FR SUPPLIER 4511W 628 20-022 626 BF15747 US32D 4632 REG 689 8310-852 8300C 630 679-05HM S425A48 BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER
ADAMS RITE SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD LCN LCN HES SCHLAGE REESE
DOOR TO BE LOCKED BY KEY FROM BOTH SIDES. ACCESS FROM EITHER SIDE BY CARD READER. ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM ABLE TO HAVE DOOR UNLOCKED AT ANY TIME VIA RELEASING THE ELEC STRIKE AND ALLOWING USE OF AUTO OPERATOR DURING THIS TIME. DOOR CAN BE UNLOCKED BY KEY AND LATCH HELD IN RETRACTED POSITION. DURING LOCKDOWN OF DOOR ACTUATOR FROM BOTH SIDES TO BE INACTIVE. ACTIVE CARD READ TO UNLOCK DOOR AND PWR ACTUATORS,THUS ALLOWING AUTO OPERATOR TO WORK.
13032-2
08 71 00 - 22
DOOR HARDWARE
HARDWARE GROUP 54 EACH SINGLE ALUM DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 5024,5120,1042, 1140,1240,1342 1 EA CONT HINGE W/EPT PREP BY ALUM DR & FR SUPPLIER 1 EA EXIT DEVICE CX99NL-OP X 110MD 4’ 626 VONDUPRIN 1 EA FSIC RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCHLAGE 1 EA FSIC MORT CYLINDER 26-091 626 SCHLAGE 1 EA OFFSET PULL BF157 US32D ROCKWOOD 1 EA CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA DROP PLATE 4110-18 689 LCN 1 EA SHOE SUPPORT 4110-30 689 LCN 1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4110-61 689 LCN 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS914 X 900-4RL-FA VONDUPRIN 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 SP28 VONDUPRIN 1 EA DR POSITION SWITCHES 679-05HM SCHLAGE 1 EA THRESHOLD S425A48 REESE 1 EA RAINDRIP R201A48 REESE 1 EA SWEEPS BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER 1 EA WEATHERSTRIP BY ALUM DR AND FR SUPPLIER DOOR TO HAVE DELAYED EGRESS PANIC DEVICE WHICH WILL BE CONTROLLED BY KEY CYLINDER IN PANIC DEVICE RAIL OR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM.
HARDWARE GROUP 55 EACH SINGLE ALUM DOOR TO HAVE: DR. EXTERIOR GATES-2 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
LOCK BRACKET COMMUNICATING LK ELECTRIC STRIKE DR POSITION SWITCHES
TO BE DETERMINED ND72PD RHO 626 8300C 630 679-05HM
SCHLAGE VONDUPRIN SCHLAGE
HARDWARE GROUP 56 EACH SINGLE EXT DOOR TO HAVE: DR. 4003B 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA
CONT HINGE EXIT DEVICE FSIC RIM CYLINDER PULL CLOSER DR POSITION SWITCHES KICK PLATES THRESHOLD RAIN DRIP SWEEPS WEATHERSTRIP
MCK-FM300 83-1/8” US32D 99NL-OP X 110MD 626 20-057 626 BF157 US32D 4111 SHCUSH 689 679-05HM 10 X 2” LDW CS B4E 630 S425A48 R201A48 323C48 815A4884
MCKINNEY VONDUPRIN SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD LCN SCHLAGE ROCKWOOD REESE REESE REESE REESE
END OF SECTION 08710
13032-2
08 71 00 - 23
DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Glass.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry: Cabinetry components and interior wood windows with requirement for glass.
B.
Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework: Cabinets with requirements for glass shelves.
C.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material.
D.
Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites.
E.
Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed lites in doors.
F.
Section 08 36 13 - Sectional Doors: Glazed lites in doors.
G.
Section 08 43 13 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Glazing furnished by storefront manufacturer.
H.
Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows: Glazing furnished by window manufacturer.
I.
Section 08 54 13 - Fiberglass Windows: Glazing furnished by window manufacturer.
J.
Section 08 83 00 - Mirrors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.
B.
ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011).
C.
ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
D.
ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.
E.
ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012.
F.
ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2009e1.
G.
ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
H.
ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010.
I.
GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009.
J.
GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
C.
Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C.
Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide glass produced by a single primary manufacturer for each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each type and class required.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
13032-2
Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
08 80 00 - 1
GLAZING
B.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds.
1.07 WARRANTY A.
Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a twenty (20) year warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, Buildup of visible internal moisturediscoloration of veil material by more than 2.0 ∆E (ASTM D 2244-02e- 2005 including replacement of failed units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GLAZING TYPES 2.02 GLASS MATERIALS A.
Float Glass Manufacturers: 1. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc: www.us.agc.com. 2. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com. 3. Zeledyne: www.versaluxglass.com. 4. Guardian Industries Corp: www.sunguardglass.com. 5. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na. 6. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com. 7. Oldcastle Glass: www.oldcastleglass.com 8. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
B.
Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048. 3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated. 4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind load design regardless of specified thickness.
C.
Laminated Glass: Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172. 1. Plastic Interlayer: 0.030 inch thick, minimum. 2. Where fully tempered is specified or required, provide glass that has been tempered by the tongless horizontal method. 3. Manufacturers: a. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com. b. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com. c. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.03 GLASS TYPES: A.
GLT 4: 1/4" tempered, clear, FS DD-G-451, Grade B, Style 1, Type I, class 1, quality q3, free of tong marks, ANSI Z97.1.
B.
GLT 8: 1/4" laminated safety, clear, FS DD-G-451, Class 1/Class 1, ANSI Z97.1. 0.030 PVB layer.
C.
GLT 12: 1" float insulated glass, consisting of 1/4" tinted outer lite, separated by a 1/2 inch dehydrated gas filled air space with inner lite of 1/4 inch clear. Apply Low E on #3 surface.
D.
GLT 13: 1" tempered insulating glass consisting of outer lite of 1/4 inch clear tempered glass, 1/2 inch dehydrated air space, inner lite of 1/4 inch clear tempered glass. Apply Low E on #3 surface.
E.
GLT 18: 45 minute "fire protective" safety glass. Non-temperature rise, tested per NFPA 252. 1. Manufacturer's: a. SaftiFirst SuperLite I-XL b. Vetrotech Swissflam N2 c. or comparable.
F.
GLT 27: 7/16" laminated safety glass, clear.
G.
GLT 33: 1" tempered insulating glass consisting of outer lite of 1/4 inch clear glass, 1/2 inch dehydrated air space, inner lite of 1/4 inch clear laminated glass. Apply Low E on #3 surface.
2.04 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A.
13032-2
Manufacturers: 1. Any of the manufacturers specified for float glass. 2. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com. 08 80 00 - 2
GLAZING
3. 4.
Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
B.
Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Locations: Exterior, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 3. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 4. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. 5. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 6. Insulating Glass Units: a. Low-e shall be PPG Solarban 60. b. Install argon gas in air space. 7. Double Pane: LoE on #3.
C.
Performance Values-Double Pane: 1. Glass U-value; 0.24 2. Visible Light Transmission: 70% 3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.38
D.
Sealed Glass Surface Identification-Double Pane 1. Sealed Insulating Glass Unit Surfaces & Coating Orientation: a. Surface 1 - Exterior surface of outer pane (surface facing outdoors of outboard lite). b. Surface 2 - Interior surface of outer pane (surface facing indoors of outboard lite). c. Surface 3 - Exterior surface of inner pane (surface facing outdoors of inboard lite). d. Surface 4 - Room side surface of inner pane (surfacing facing indoors of inboard lite
2.05 FIRE RATED GLASS A.
Manufacturers: 1. VETROTECH Saint-Gobian Glass Solutions www.vetrotech.com 2. "Pyrostop" by Pilkington Glass as distributed by Technical Glass Products www.fireglass.com 3. Schott North America, Inc.: www.us.schott.com 4. O'Keeffe's Saftifirst: www.saftifirst.com
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean and free of obstructions.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B.
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
C.
Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA Sealant Manual.
D.
Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) A.
Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch above sight line.
B.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
C.
Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.
D.
Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.
E.
Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact.
F.
Knife trim protruding tape.
3.04 INSTALLATION A.
13032-2
Install glass in accordance with glass manufacturer's recommended instructions.
08 80 00 - 3
GLAZING
3.05 CLEANING A.
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B.
Remove labels after Work is complete.
C.
Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
3.06 PROTECTION A.
After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. END OF SECTION
13032-2
08 80 00 - 4
GLAZING
SECTION 08 83 00 MIRRORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Glass mirrors.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009.
C.
GANA (TIPS) - Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors; National Association of Mirror Manufacturers; 2004 (http://www.mirrorlink.org/members/technical.h
1.03 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data on Mirror Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods.
B.
Perform work in accordance to requirements of ADA American Disabilities Act and ANSI Standards.
C.
Fabricate, store, transport, receive, install, and clean mirrors in accordance with recommendations of GANA (TIPS) "Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
1.06 WARRANTY A.
Provide one year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.
Mirror Glass - General: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirrored glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less.
B.
Mirror Glass: Clear float type with copper and silver coating, organic overcoating, square and lapped edges, 1/4 inch thick minimum with satin stainless steel frame or frame and shelf as scheduled. 1. Sizes noted on Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A.
Install mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations.
B.
Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical distortion.
C.
Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or backsplashes.
3.02 CLEANING A.
Remove wet glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B.
Remove labels after work is complete.
C.
Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces.
13032-2
08 83 00 - 1
MIRRORS
3.03 PROTECTION A.
After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste.
B.
Do not apply markers to mirror surface.
C.
Replace damaged units. END OF SECTION
13032-2
08 83 00 - 2
MIRRORS
SECTION 08 87 17 SAFETY AND SECURITY GLAZING FILMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Glazing assemblies to receive film are indicated on Drawings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM D882 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting; 2012.
B.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2013a.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Record of product certification for safety requirements. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods.
C.
Samples: For each film product to be used, minimum size 4 inches by 6 inches, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
D.
Specimen warranty.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Glazing film manufacturer specializing in manufacture of safety glazing films with minimum 10 years successful experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Certified by glazing film manufacturer.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.08 WARRANTY A.
Provide 10 year manufacturer's replacement warranty to cover film against peeling, cracking, discoloration, and deterioration.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Product selection based on CPFilms, Inc: www.cpfindusprod.com. Comparable products;
B.
3M Window Film: www.3m.com/us/arch_construct/scpd/windowfilm.
C.
Madico, Inc: www.madico.com.
D.
or equal.
13032-2
08 87 17 - 1
SAFETY AND SECURITY GLAZING FILMS
2.02 MATERIALS A.
Glazing Film: Polyester film for permanent bonding to glass. NRM M PS3 by CPFilms.
B.
Accessory Materials: As recommended or required by film manufacturer.
C.
Glass Cleaner: As recommended by glazing film manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Field -Applied Film: Verify that existing conditions are adequate for proper application and performance of film.
B.
Examine glass and frames. Verify that existing conditions are adequate for proper application and performance of film.
C.
Verify glass is not cracked, chipped, broken, or damaged.
D.
Verify that frames are securely anchored and free of defects.
E.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Clean glass of dust, dirt, paint, oil, grease, mildew, mold, and other contaminants that would inhibit adhesion.
B.
Immediately prior to applying film, thoroughly wash glass with neutral cleaning solution.
C.
Protect adjacent surfaces.
D.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
3.03 INSTALLATION A.
Do not apply glazing film when surface temperature is less that 40 degrees F or if precipitation is imminent.
B.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, without air bubbles, wrinkles, streaks, bands, thin spots, pinholes, or gaps, as required to achieve specified performance.
C.
Accurately cut film with straight edges to required sizes allowing 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch gap at perimeter of glazed panel unless otherwise required by anchorage method.
D.
Seams: Seam film only as required to accommodate material sizes; form seams vertically without overlaps and gaps; do not install with horizontal seams.
E.
Clean glass and anchoring accessories following installation. Remove excess sealants and other glazing materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
F.
Remove labels and protective covers. END OF SECTION
13032-2
08 87 17 - 2
SAFETY AND SECURITY GLAZING FILMS
SECTION 09 05 61 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
This section applies to all floors identified in the contract documents as to receive the following types of floor coverings: 1. Resilient tile and sheet. 2. Carpet tile. 3. Thin-set ceramic tile and stone tile.
B.
Preparation of new concrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings.
C.
Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and pH.
D.
Remediation of concrete floor slabs due to unsatisfactory moisture or pH conditions. 1. Contractor shall perform all specified remediation of concrete floor slabs. If such remediation is indicated by testing agency's report and is due to a condition not under Contractor's control or could not have been predicted by examination prior to entering into the contract, a contract modification will be issued.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Limitations on curing requirements for new concrete floor slabs and coordination of any other special requirements affecting concrete floor preparations.
1.03 REFERENCES A.
ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2013.
B.
ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2009).
C.
ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2011.
D.
ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; 2011.
E.
ASTM F2170 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes; 2011.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.
Coordinate scheduling of cleaning and testing, so that preliminary cleaning has been completed for at least 24 hours prior to testing.
1.05 SUBMITTALS A.
Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers' Product Literature: For each specific combination of substrate, floor covering, and adhesive to be used; showing: 1. Moisture and pH limits and test methods. 2. Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure.
B.
Testing Agency's Report: Include: 1. Description of areas tested; include floor plans and photographs if helpful. 2. Summary of conditions encountered. 3. Moisture and pH test reports. 4. Copies of specified test methods. 5. Recommendations for remediation of unsatisfactory surfaces. 6. Submit report to Architect. 7. Submit report not more than two business days after conclusion of testing.
C.
Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Moisture and pH testing will be performed by an independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner.
13032-2 PREPARATION
09 05 61 - 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING
B.
Contractor's Responsibility Relating to Independent Agency Testing: 1. Provide access for and cooperate with testing agency. 2. Confirm date of start of testing at least 10 days prior to actual start. 3. Allow at least 4 business days on site for testing agency activities. 4. Achieve and maintain specified ambient conditions. 5. Notify Architect when specified ambient conditions have been achieved and when testing will start.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F.
B.
Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.
Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for conditions, and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product with the following characteristics: 1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali-resistant compound, compatible with floor, floor covering, and floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing at edges. 2. Latex or polyvinyl acetate additions are permitted; gypsum content is prohibited. 3. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate.
B.
Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for the moisture and pH conditions present; low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as suitable for substrate and floor covering and for conditions present.
C.
Remedial Floor Coating: Single- or multi-layer coating or coating/overlay combination intended by its manufacturer to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooring manufacturer's emission limits, resistant to the level of pH found, and suitable for adhesion of flooring without further treatment. 1. Thickness: 1/8 inch, maximum. 2. If testing agency recommends any particular products, use one of those. 3. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX MC ULTRA, with ARDEX FEATHERFINISH: www.ardexamericas.com. b. Floor Seal Technology, Inc; MES 100, with ARDEX K-15 or Mapei Ultraplan 1 Plus: www.floorseal.com. c. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; Moisture Guard Max: www.prospec.com. d. Aquafin, Vaportight Coat Series. www.aquafin.com e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION A.
Refer to Section 03 30 00 for responsibilities of all contractors to protect concrete floors from contamination. Start of work by flooring contractor indicate acceptance of conditions.
B.
Follow recommendations of testing agency.
C.
Perform following operations in the order indicated: 1. Preliminary cleaning. 2. Internal relative humidity tests; 3 tests in the first 1000 square feet and one test in each additional 1000 square feet, unless otherwise indicated or required by flooring manufacturer. 3. pH tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Specified remediation, if required. 5. Patching, smoothing, and leveling, as required to meet manufacturer's requirements. 6. Other preparation specified by floor ing manufacturer. 7. Adhesive bond and compatibility test. 8. Protection of installed flooring. 13032-2 09 05 61 - 2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
D.
Remediations: 1. Active Water Leaks or Continuing Moisture Migration to Surface of Slab: Correct this condition before doing any other remediation; re-test after correction. 2. Excessive Moisture Emission or Relative Humidity: If an adhesive that is resistant to the level of moisture present is available and acceptable to flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation of the flooring; if not, apply remedial floor coating over entire suspect floor area. 3. Excessive pH: If remedial floor coating is necessary to address excessive moisture, no additional remediation is required; if not, if an adhesive that is resistant to the level present is available and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation of the flooring; otherwise, apply a skim coat of specified patching compound over entire suspect floor area.
3.02 PRELIMINARY CLEANING A.
Clean floors of dust, solvents, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, residual adhesive, adhesive removers, film-forming curing compounds, sealing compounds, alkaline salts, excessive laitance, mold, mildew, and other materials that might prevent adhesive bond.
B.
Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning.
3.03 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING A.
Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B.
Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirements of this section.
C.
Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F1869. obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits: 1. Moisture emission rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours when tested using calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours. 2. See Article 3.04, D, 2 for testing locations.
D.
Plastic sheet test and mat bond test may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method, as those methods do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently.
E.
In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as required. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if test values exceed 3 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24 hours.
F.
Report: Report the information required by the test method.
3.04 INTERNAL RELATIVE HUMIDITY TESTING A.
Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B.
Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirements of this section.
C.
Test in accordance with ASTM F2170-09 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes and as follows.
D.
Verify that new concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. Testing procedures shall be: 1. Maximum allowable moisture levels for each type of floor finish shall be received from flooring suppliers prior to testing. 2. At floors to receive finish materials, perform three tests for the first 1000 square feet and at least one additional test for each additional 1000 square feet. 3. Select test locations to provide information about moisture distribution across the entire floor slab, especially areas of potential high moisture. For slabs on-grade and below-grade, include a test location within three feet of each exterior wall.
E.
Testing with electrical impedance or resistance apparatus may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method, as the values determined are not comparable to the ASTM test values and do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently.
13032-2 PREPARATION
09 05 61 - 3 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING
F.
In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as required. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if any test value exceeds 75 percent relative humidity.
G.
Report: Report the information required by the test method.
3.05 PH TESTING A.
Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B.
Note: This procedure is the equivalent of that described in ASTM F710, repeated here for the Contractor's convenience.
C.
Use a wide range pH paper, its associated chart, and distilled or deionized water.
D.
Place several drops of water on a clean surface of concrete, forming a puddle approximately 1 inch in diameter. Allow the puddle to set for approximately 60 seconds, then dip the pH paper into the water, remove it, and compare immediately to chart to determine pH reading.
E.
In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if any test value is over 10.
3.06 PREPARATION A.
See individual floor covering section(s) for additional requirements.
B.
Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.
C.
Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non-moving joints, and other irregularities with patching compound.
D.
Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints, or other moving joints.
3.07 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING A.
Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.
3.08 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING A.
Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer.
3.09 PROTECTION A.
Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering. END OF SECTION
13032-2 PREPARATION
09 05 61 - 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING
SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.
B.
Acoustic insulation.
C.
Gypsum wallboard.
D.
Joint treatment and accessories.
E.
Installation of acoustic accessories, (sealants, insulation, etc.).
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing.
C.
Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.
D.
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire rated walls.
E.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant.
F.
Section 09 90 00 - Paints and Coatings
G.
Section 09 30 00 - Tiling: Cement board tile backer.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971)
B.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
C.
ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2012.
D.
ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2013.
E.
ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive ScrewAttached Gypsum Panel Products; 2011.
F.
ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.
G.
ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2011.
H.
ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2007 (Reapproved 2013).
I.
ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2010a.
J.
ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.
K.
ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.
L.
ASTM E72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction; 2010.
M. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009. N.
ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.
O.
GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2013.
P.
ICC (IBC) - International Building Code 2006.
13032-2
09 21 16 - 1
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals.
C.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements.
D.
UL or Gypsum Association system descriptions for rated assemblies indicated on drawings.
E.
Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or C754, provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum 3 years of documented experience.
B.
Copies of Documents at Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A.
Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
B.
Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies as noted on drawings. 1. ICC IBC Item Numbers: Comply with applicable requirements of ICC IBC for the particular assembly. 2. Gypsum Association File Numbers: Comply with requirements of GA-600 for the particular assembly. 3. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular assembly in the current UL Fire Resistance Directory.
2.02 BOARD MATERIALS A.
Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board: Note: No offshore produced gypsum board allowed. 1. American Gypsum: www.americangypsum.com. 2. Certainteed Gypsum Inc.: www.certainteed.com. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com. 4. Lafarge North America Inc: www.lafargenorthamerica.com. 5. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 6. Temple-Inland Building Product by Georgia-Pacific, LLC: www.temple.com. 7. USG Corporation: www.usg.com. 8. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. b. Ceilings: 1/2 inch. c. Multi-Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings. 3. Paper-Faced Products: a. American Gypsum; EagleRoc Regular Gypsum Wallboard and FireBloc Type X Gypsum Wallboard. b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Gypsum Board. c. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board. d. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock. e. Lafarge North America Inc; Regular Drywall and Firecheck Type X and Type C. f. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Gypsum Wallboard. g. Temple-Inland Building Product by Georgia-Pacific, LLC; Gypsumboard and Gypsum Board Fire Resistant Panels Type X and Type TGC. h. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels. 4. Mold-Resistant Paper-Faced Products: a. American Gypsum; M-Bloc.
13032-2
09 21 16 - 2
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l.
American Gypsum; M-Bloc Type X. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Mold-Guard. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Fireguard X Mold-Guard. Lafarge North America Inc; Mold Defense Drywall. Lafarge North America Inc; Protecta AR 100 Type X with Mold Defense. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Abuse Brand XP Wallboard. Temple-Inland Building Product by Georgia-Pacific, LLC; ComfortGuard Mold Resistant Gypsum Board. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels AR. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
C.
Impact-Resistant Wallboard: 1. Application: High-traffic areas indicated. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Paper-Faced Type: Gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M. 4. Unfaced Type: Interior fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1278/C1278M. 5. Type: Fire-resistance rated Type X, UL or WH listed. 6. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 7. Edges: Tapered. 8. Products: a. American Gypsum; M-Bloc IR Type X. b. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Impact Brand XP Wallboard. c. USG Corporation; Mold Tough--VHI Abuse-Resistant. d. ProRoc Extra Abuse Gypsum Board with M2Tech. e. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
D.
Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 4. Type: Regular and Type X, in locations indicated. 5. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch. 6. Regular Board Thickness: 5/8 inch. 7. Edges: Tapered. 8. Products: a. American Gypsum; M-Bloc. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensShield Tile Backer. d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels. e. Temple-Inland Building Product by Georgia-Pacific, LLC; ComfortGuard WR.
E.
Ceiling Board: Special sag-resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Edges: Tapered. 4. Products: a. American Gypsum; Interior Ceiling Board. b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Interior Ceiling. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Span 24 Ceiling Board. d. Lafarge North America Inc; Sagcheck. e. National Gypsum Company; High Strength Brand Ceiling Board. f. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific, LLC; Span24 Ceiling Board. g. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Sag-Resistant Interior Gypsum Ceiling Board.
F.
Exterior Sheathing Board: As specified in Section 06 10 00.
13032-2
09 21 16 - 3
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
2.03 ACCESSORIES A.
Acoustic/Fire Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber or rockwool, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness as indicated on plans or as required by wall rating assembly. 1. Product: Sound attenuation fire blankets (SAFB) manufactured by Thermafiber, Inc., www.thermafiber.com. 2. Rock/slagwool Insulation: Of thickness and density to meet required UL ratings where indicated. a. Manufacturer's: 1) Thermafiber. 2) American Rockwool (800) 792-3539.
B.
Acoustic insulation: 1. CertainTeed: Sound Control Batts. 2. Johns Mansville: Sound-Shield. 3. Knauf: QuietTherm Batts. 4. Owens-Corning: Sound Attenuation Batts.
C.
Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 07 90 05.
D.
Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. 2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide U-bead, Lbead, and LC-bead at exposed panel edges. 3. Manufacturers - Finishing Accessories: a. Same manufacturer as framing materials. b. Phillips Manufacturing Co: www.phillipsmfg.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
E.
Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.
F.
Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
3.02 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A.
Acoustic Insulation in Non-Fire-Rated Construction: seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes. Tape oversized piece of 2 inch sound blanket over backside of boxes. See plans for additional instruction. Seal pipe and conduit penetrations with acoustical sealant backed with backer rod or acoustic insulation. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for control of annular space. HVAC contractor responsible for sound attenuation controls in duct work.
B.
Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. and according to directions on plan. 1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members. 2. Cut gypsum board or hold away for a space of 1/8-1/4 inch wide at perimeter of partition. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board. 3. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes. 4. Follow rating requirements for fire rated walls that are sound walls as well. Firestopping contractor shall install required materials at rated walls.
3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION A.
Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations.
B.
Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board perpendicular to framing, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing.
13032-2
09 21 16 - 4
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
C.
Double-Layer Non-Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed perpendicular to framing or furring members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Place second layer perpendicular to framing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. 1. Exception: Confirm layout instruction for structural shear walls.
D.
Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing.
E.
Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A.
Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls maximum. 50 feet on center each way at ceilings. 2. Install continuous from each door jamb to top of partition.
B.
Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
C.
Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.
3.05 JOINT TREATMENT A.
Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive flat or eggshell paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas specifically indicated. 3. Level 3: Walls to receive textured wall finish. 4. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish. 5. Level 1: Wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. 6. Level 0: Temporary partitions and surfaces indicated to be finished in later stage of project.
B.
Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile and fixed cabinetry. 3. Taping, filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications.
3.06 FINISH A.
Kitchen and restroom painted gypsum board walls shall have a smooth finish.
3.07 TEXTURE FINISH A.
Apply finish texture coating by means of spraying apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's instructions except as noted above for smooth finish locations.
B.
Wall Texture Required: orange peel.
C.
Ceiling Texture Required: Fine finish.
3.08 TOLERANCES A.
Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION
13032-2
09 21 16 - 5
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 09 30 00 TILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Tile for floor applications.
B.
Tile for wall applications.
C.
Cementitious backer board as tile substrate.
D.
Non-ceramic trim.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 06 61 00 - Simulated Stone Fabrications: Solid surface wall panels at showers.
C.
Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers.
D.
Section 09 05 61 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile - Version; 2013.1. 1. ANSI A108.1A - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1. 2. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with DrySet Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1. 3. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 2013.1. 4. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1. 5. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2013.1. 6. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for High Performance Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 2013.1. 7. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1. 8. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile - Version; 2013.1.
B.
TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation - Version; 2013.1.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E.
Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and TCNA (HB) on site.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. 13032-2
Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 09 30 00 - 1
TILING
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.
B.
Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A.
Manufacturers: Refer to Master Color Schedule on ID drawings for product selection.
2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A.
Non-Ceramic Trim: Brushed stainless steel, style and dimensions to suit application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive. Refer to Master Color Schedule on ID Drawings for basis of design.
2.03 SETTING MATERIALS A.
Provide setting materials made by the same manufacturer as grout.
B.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4. 1. Application(s): Use this type of bond coat where indicated and where no other type of bond coat is indicated. 2. Products: a. AVM Industries, Inc; Thin-Set 780: www.avmindustries.com. b. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 254 Platinum: www.laticrete.com. c. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete 720 Marble Pro: www.merkrete.com. d. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; Permalastic System: www.prospec.com. e. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. f. Mapei Corporation: www.mapei.com. g. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com. h. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.04 GROUTS A.
Manufacturers: 1. ARDEX Engineered Cements: www.ardexamericas.com. 2. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; ProColor Sanded Tile Grout: www.prospec.com. 3. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 4. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Grout: www.laticrete.com. 5. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 6. TEC; www.tecspecialty.com 7. Mapei Corporation: www.mapei.com. 8. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
B.
Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout. 1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is indicated. 2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less than 1/8 inch wide. 3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. 4. Products: a. Bostik Inc Hydroment 425: www.bostik-us.com. b. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PermaColor: www.laticrete.com. c. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Non-Sanded Color Grout: www.merkrete.com. d. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand; ProColor Sanded Tile Grout: www.prospec.com. e. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
C.
Tile Sealant: Gunnable, silicone, siliconized acrylic, or urethane sealant; moisture and mildew resistant type. 1. Applications: Between tile and plumbing fixtures. 2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
D.
Grout Sealer: Liquid-applied, moisture and stain protection for existing or new Portland cement grout. 1. Composition: Water-based colorless silicone. 2. Products: a. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Grout Sealer: www.merkrete.com. b. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
13032-2
09 30 00 - 2
TILING
2.05 THIN-SET ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.
Crack Control: Self adhering membrane or liquid applied crack control product. 1. Install membrane over construction and expansion control joints in existing concrete as recommended by manufacturer and according to TCA recommendations. Install soft joint at tile as recommended. 2. Install full coverage membrane over tile areas on new concrete slabs on grade and topping slabs over structural framing (except as noted below) per manufacturer's recommendation. 3. Manufacturer's: a. Custom Building Products: RedGard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane or Crack Buster Pro Crack Prevention Mat Underlayment. www.custombuildingproducts.com b. NAC Products: ECB Anti-Fracture Membrane. www.nacproducts.com c. Laticrete: Hydro Ban or Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane. www.laticrete.com d. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc.; Merkrete Fracture Guard 5000: www.merkrete.com. e. or comparable.
B.
Backer Board: Cementitious type complying with ANSI A118.9; high density, glass fiber reinforced, 1/2 inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. 1. Products: a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. b. National Gypsum Company; PermaBase Brand Cement Board. c. National Gypsum Company; PermaBase Flex Brand Cement Board. d. USG Corporation; Durock Brand Cement Board. e. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile.
B.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.
C.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces.
D.
Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for tile installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Test in accordance with Section 09 05 61. 2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile and mortar manufacturer.
E.
Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Protect surrounding work from damage.
B.
Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
C.
Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances.
D.
Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge. Coordinate installation of backer board at shower panels with Section 06 61 00.
E.
Install waterproofing membrane in accordance to manufacturer's recommendations and TCNA guidelines.
F.
Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A.
Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1A thru A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations.
B.
Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
13032-2
09 30 00 - 3
TILING
C.
Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints.
D.
Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.
E.
Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.
F.
Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
G.
Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
H.
Locate appropriate movement joints in accordance to TCNA recommendations. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
I.
Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.
J.
Grout tile joints.
K.
Apply grout sealer to all joints.
L.
Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.
3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS A.
Type A: Over interior concrete slab on grade substrates, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method F113, dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat, with crack isolation membrane, with polymer modified grout per ANSI A118.7, unless otherwise indicated.
3.05 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE A.
Type E: Over tile backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method W244 with standard grout per ANSI A118.6 with applied sealer.
3.06 CLEANING A.
Clean tile and grout surfaces.
3.07 PROTECTION A.
Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 2 days after installation. END OF SECTION
13032-2
09 30 00 - 4
TILING
SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B.
Acoustical units.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Mechanical Supply and Return Devices Division 23
B.
Electrical Light Fixtures Division 26
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2013a.
B.
ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2013.
C.
ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2014.
D.
ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2008e1.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning.
C.
Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples 12x12 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A.
Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com. 2. Acoustic Ceiling Products, Inc.: www.acpideas.com. 3. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 4. Hunter Douglas Contract: www.hunterdouglascontract.com. 5. USG: www.usg.com. 6. National Gypsum. www.nationalgypsum.com 7. Interior Systems: Frameworks Ceiling Systems, www.interiorsystems.com 8. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
B.
Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.
C.
BOARD ACT-1: 2'x2' Tegular 1. Armstrong: Cortega 704. 2. Certainteed Corp: Vantage 10, VAN-154. 3. U.S. Gypsum: Radar.
D.
BOARD ACT-2: 2'x2' Vinyl Faced Gyp Bd 1. Certainteed Corp: Capual, Vinylrock-X 2. U.S. Gypsum: ClimaPlus 3260-Sheetrock Lay-In 3. National Gypsum: Gridstone
13032-2
09 51 00 - 1
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
E.
BOARD ACT-3: 2'x2' Standard Square Edge 1. Armstrong: Cortega 770. 2. Certainteed Corp: Vantage 10, VAN-157. 3. U.S. Gypsum: Radar.
2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A.
Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Product Prelude: www.armstrong.com. 2. Acoustic Ceiling Products, Inc.: www.acpideas.com. 3. CertainTeed Corporation; Product 15/16" Classic Hook System: www.certainteed.com. 4. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Product 211 Main/229-209 Cross Tees Snap Grid: www.chicagometallic.com. 5. Hunter Douglas Contract: www.hunterdouglascontract.com. 6. Donn Grid Systems; DX/DXL 7. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
B.
Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required.
C.
Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; intermediate-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face. 2. Construction: Double web.
D.
Exposed Aluminum Suspension System: Extruded aluminum; intermediate-duty. Installed at Restrooms. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face. 2. Finish: Painted white.
2.03 ACCESSORIES A.
Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.
B.
Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A.
Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360.
B.
Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.
C.
Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.
D.
Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
E.
Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
F.
Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability.
G.
Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently.
H.
Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
I.
Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Miter corners.
13032-2
09 51 00 - 2
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A.
Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function.
C.
Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
D.
Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.
E.
Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
F.
Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. 2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
G.
Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding.
H.
Provide tegular edge at walls and other abutting vertical surfaces. Field paint cut edges to surface color and sheen. END OF SECTION
13032-2
09 51 00 - 3
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Resilient sheet flooring.
B.
Resilient tile flooring.
C.
Resilient base.
D.
Installation accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors.
C.
Section 09 05 61 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Independent agency testing of concrete slabs, removal of existing floor coverings, cleaning, and preparation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2011.
B.
ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).
C.
RFCI (RWP) - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings; Resilient Floor Covering Institute; October 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Sectioin 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan.
D.
Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection.
E.
Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable.
F.
Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
G.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Flooring Material: 50 square feet of each type and color.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Deliver stock of extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed and enclosed in protective packaging with appropriate identifying labels. 1. Furnish one box for each type, color, pattern and size installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET FLOORING A.
Vinyl Sheet Flooring: Refer to Master Color Schedule on ID Drawings for basis of design.
B.
Vinyl Welding Rod: Solid vinyl bead produced by manufacturer of vinyl flooring for heat welding seams, in color matching field color.
13032-2
09 65 00 - 1
RESILIENT FLOORING
2.02 TILE FLOORING A.
Luxury Vinyl Tile: Plank type tile as indicated on Master Color Schedule on ID Drawings. Comparable products by prior approval of submitted samples showing color match and equal performance criteria.
2.03 RESILIENT BASE A.
Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TV, vinyl, thermoplastic; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows: 1. Height: 4 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 3. Finish: Satin. 4. Length: Roll. 5. Color: As selected by A/E from standard colors. 6. Manufacturers: a. Refer to Master Color Schedule on ID Drawings for basis of design. b. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com. c. Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com. d. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com. e. Armstrong. www.armstrong.com f. Azrock. www.tarkett-commercial.com g. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.04 RUBBER BASE A.
Resilient Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows: 1. Height: 4 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 3. Finish: Satin. 4. Length: Roll. 5. Color: As selected by A/E from standard colors. 6. Manufacturers: a. Refer to Master Color Schedule on ID Drawings for basis of design. b. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com. c. Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com. d. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com. e. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.05 ACCESSORIES A.
Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.
B.
Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
C.
Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.
D.
Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.
B.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.
C.
Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Test in accordance with Section 09 05 61. 2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
D.
Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
13032-2
09 65 00 - 2
RESILIENT FLOORING
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Remove existing flooring and flooring adhesives; follow the recommendations of RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings.
B.
Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.
C.
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.
D.
Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
E.
Clean substrate.
F.
Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-through" or interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be removed.
3.03 INSTALLATION A.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
D.
Fit joints tightly.
E.
Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
F.
Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door.
G.
Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. 1. Resilient Strips: Attach to substrate using adhesive.
H.
Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints.
3.04 SHEET FLOORING A.
Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns carefully at seams.
B.
Lay flooring with tightly butted seams, without any seam sealer unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Finish seams in sheet vinyl by heat welding.
3.05 TILE FLOORING A.
Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless manufacturer's instructions say otherwise.
3.06 RESILIENT BASE A.
Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.
B.
Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units.
C.
Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 1. Adhesive shall cover a minimum of 90 percent of ribbed back of base. 2. Leave 1/4 inch uncovered at top edge of base to prevent oozing. 3. Roll base firmly, roll back toward starting point.
D.
Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
3.07 CLEANING A.
Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B.
Clean, seal, and wax in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.08 PROTECTION A.
Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION
13032-2
09 65 00 - 3
RESILIENT FLOORING
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 09 67 00 FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Fluid-applied flooring and base.
B.
Moisture testing of concrete floors.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Proper curing sequence to prevent contamination with products that will affect floor preparation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; 2011.
B.
ASTM F 2170-02 - Standard Specification Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns and colors available.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
D.
Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, procedures for stain removal, repairing surface, and suggested schedule for cleaning.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years experience.
C.
Supervisor Qualifications: Trained by product manufacturer, under direct full time supervision of manufacturer's own foreman.
1.06 MOCK-UP A.
Construct mock-up of flooring system illustrating appearance of finished work. Size mock-up to be not less than 3 by 3 feet.
B.
Locate where directed.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Store resin materials in a dry, secure area.
B.
Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Maintain minimum temperature in storage area of 55 degrees F.
B.
Maintain ambient temperature required by manufacturer 72 hours prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.
13032-2
Trowel applied nominal 1/8" thick, three part, cementitious polyurethane slurry system. 1. Basis of Design: Tennant Company, www.tennantfloorcoatings.com; a. Overlay: Tennant Eco-CUR-G 1/8 inch Cementitious Slurry. 1) VOC; ASTM D3960, 0.04 lb/gal 2) Tensile Strength; ASTM D2370, 6250 psi. 3) Percent Elongation; ASTM D2370, 6%. 09 67 00 - 1
FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING
b. c.
2.
Broadcast Quartz: Tenant Decorative Quartz. Topcoat: Tennant Company, MMA Clear Topcoat-High-Build Topcoat. 1) VOC; ASTM D3960, 0 g/L. 2) Tensile Strength; ASTM D3960, 2100 psi. 3) Percent Elongation; ASTM D2370, 5%. d. Cove: Tenant Eco-CUR-C Cementitious Urethane Cove. Comparable products by prior approval.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Allow for minimum 30 day concrete curing time.
B.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive flooring.
C.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive flooring.
D.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of materials to sub-floor surfaces.
E.
Verify that new concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for system installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. Testing procedures shall be as follows: 1. Owners independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests. 2. Test methods shall follow ASTM F 2170-02 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. 3. Maximum allowable moisture levels shall be at or below 70% relative internal concrete humidity. 4. At floors to receive finish materials, perform three tests for the first 1000 square feet and at least one additional test for each additional 1000 square feet. 5. Select test locations to provide information about moisture distribution across the entire floor slab, especially areas of potential high moisture. For slabs on-grade and below-grade, include a test location within three feet of each exterior wall.
F.
Or verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity per ASTM F1869; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits: 1. Moisture emission rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours when tested using calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours.
G.
Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Dislodge dirt, mortar spatter and other dry surface accumulations and contamination by scraping, brushing, sweeping, vacuuming or compreesed air blow down.
B.
Scrub floor with detergent recommended by system supplier. Use recommended methods for areas contaminated with petroleum or other process products. Rinse with clean water.
C.
Floor and joints shall be completely dry prior to commencing mechanical cleaning.
D.
Floor drains, proximate equipment and any other items sensitve to dust shall be masked and protected.
E.
Remove coatings, curing membranes and loose materials by shot blasting or scarification to a minimum profile of 30 mils.
F.
Prepare and treat all cracks and deformities as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
G.
Vacuum clean substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION - FLOORING A.
Apply overlay coating, broadcast quartz and apply top coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Cove shall installed to 6 inch height.
C.
Cove at vertical surfaces.
13032-2
09 67 00 - 2
FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING
3.04 PROTECTION A.
Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation.
B.
Barricade area to protect flooring until cured. END OF SECTION
13032-2
09 67 00 - 3
FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Carpet tile, fully adhered.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors.
B.
Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring: Resilient base.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).
B.
ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2010e1.
C.
ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2011.
D.
CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009.
E.
CRI (GLA) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Adhesive Products; Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition.
F.
CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Carpet Testing Program - Approved Products; Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition.
G.
NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
C.
Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
E.
Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum 3 years experience who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board (FCIB) or who can demonstrate compliance with FCIB certification program requirements.
B.
Single Source Responsibility: Obtain carpet tile from one source and by a single manufacturer.
1.06 WARRANTY A.
Provide carpet manufacturer's 5 year warranty against defects in materials. Warranty coverage shall include: 1. Surface Wear: Not more than 10 percent by weight throughout life of project. 2. Static: Maintain static generation at less than 3.5 kV at 70 degrees F, and 20 percent R.H. throughout life of product. 3. No delamination throughout life of product. 4. No edge ravel throughout life of product. 5. Provide tuft bind consistent with industry standards. 6. No dimensional instability (i.e. shrinkage, curling and doming), which adversely affects ability of carpet tile to lie flat throughout life of product.
B.
Provide carpet installer's one (1) year warranty against defects in installation.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. 13032-2
Provide one full carton of carpet tiles of each color and pattern selected. 09 68 13 - 1
TILE CARPETING
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.
Carpet Tile: Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot. 1. Refer to Master Color Schedule on ID Drawings for basis of design. 2. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test"). 3. VOC Content: Provide CRI Green Label Plus certified product; in lieu of labeling, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable.
2.02 ACCESSORIES A.
Edge Strips: Vinyl, Selected by A/E color.
B.
Adhesives: Acceptable to carpet tile manufacturer, compatible with materials being adhered; maximum VOC of 50 g/L; CRI Green Label certified.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile.
B.
If surfaces cannot be put into proper condition for carpet tile installation by customary cleaning and prepping operations, Contractor shall report defects immediately to Architect in writing. Application of carpet tile materials is considered acceptance of surfaces condition by this Contractor and any subsequent repairs and/or refinishing required shall be performed at this Contractor's expense.
C.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.
D.
Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Test in accordance with Section 09 05 61. 2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Prepare floor substrates for installation of flooring in accordance with Section 09 05 61.
3.03 INSTALLATION A.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B.
Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation Standard.
C.
Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.
D.
Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
E.
Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines.
F.
Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
G.
Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate.
H.
Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.
I.
Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.
3.04 CLEANING A.
Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces.
B.
Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. END OF SECTION
13032-2
09 68 13 - 2
TILE CARPETING
SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Surface preparation.
B.
Field application of paints, stains, and varnishes.
C.
Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Polyurethane trim. 2. Wood trim. 3. Mechanical and Electrical: a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated. b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items. c. On the roof and outdoors, paint all factory primed equipment that is exposed to weather or to view, except that which is factory-finished.
D.
Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factoryapplied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number, capacity labels, Underwriter's Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plate.. 5. Non-metallic roofing and flashing. 6. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead items. 7. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 8. Ceramic and other tiles. 9. Brick, architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster and stucco. 10. Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS). 11. Glass. 12. Concrete masonry in utility, mechanical, and electrical spaces unless noted otherwise. 13. Acoustical materials, unless specifically so indicated. 14. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 15. Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated. 16. Painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.
C.
Section 06 20 00- Finish Carpentry: Architectural woodwork to be stained.
D.
Section 06 66 10 - Manufactured Trim: Polyurethane trim to be stained or painted.
E.
Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Frames and doors to be field painted.
1.03 DEFINITIONS A.
Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
B.
ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2012.
13032-2
09 90 00 - 1
PAINTING AND COATING
C.
Master Painters Institute: MPI(a), Jul 2007, 'Architectural Painting Specification Manual.' and MPI(r), Aug 2004, 'Maintenance Repainting Manual.'
D.
SSPC (PM1) - Good Painting Practice: SSPC Painting Manual, Vol. 1; Society for Protective Coatings; Fourth Edition.
1.05 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. 4. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 5. If proposal of substitutions is allowed under submittal procedures, explanation of all substitutions proposed.
C.
Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. 1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. 2. Where sheen is not specified, discuss sheen options with Architect before preparing samples, to eliminate sheens definitely not required.
D.
Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.
E.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
F.
Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B.
Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.
C.
Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B.
Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions.
B.
Paints: 1. Diamond Vogel Paints: www.diamondvogel.com. 2. Glidden Professional, a product of PPG Architectural Coatings: www.gliddenprofessional.com. 3. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com. 5. Pratt & Lambert Paints: www.prattandlambert.com. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com. 7. Hallman-Lindsay 8. Special paint finishes as scheduled.
C.
See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
13032-2
09 90 00 - 2
PAINTING AND COATING
2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A.
Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating. 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 3. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color. 4. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. 6. Paint for insulated piping shall be latex based. If the insulation taping is rippled due to oil based application, the Painter shall be responsible for replacement of the insulation. Certain Class A, non-combustible paints may maintain a 25/50 smoke rating for the painted pipe insulation, PVC jacketing and fittings. Check with state and local building codes and fire marshal for approved practice before painting.
B.
Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C.
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited: 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.
E.
Colors: As indicated in Color Schedule 1. An average of one or two wall colors will be used per room. Ceilings generally will be different color than walls. Finished closets will usually be same as adjoining rooms. 2. Job painted metal items such as diffusers, grilles and registers will generally be same color as adjacent surface. 3. Hardwood generally will be the same color stain throughout. Painted wood surfaces will be a different color and/or sheen than adjacent surfaces. 4. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under. 5. Surfaces in unfinished areas: Paint all woodwork, doors and metal frames, convectors, ladders, railings, gratings and the like in unfinished areas.
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A.
13032-2
EPS 1 Ferrous Material Primed & Un-primed (i.e. steel handrails, hollow metal, exposed angles, steel guard posts, louvers, etc.): Acrylic Semi-Gloss 1. (SW) Prep surface with SSPC-SP2. One coat ProCryl Universal Primer and two coats Sher-Cryl HPA High Performance Acrylic B66-300 Series. 2. (DV) Prep surface with SSPC-SP2. One coat MC Series V-Cote 200 Acrylic Maintenance Primer/Finish and two coats MC Series V-Cote 222 Acrylic Maintenance Finish. 3. (PPG) Prep surface with SSPC-SP2. One coat Pitt-Tech 90-712 Series Int/Ext Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel, two coats Pitt-Tech 7-374 Series Int/Ext Semi-Gloss Acrylic Metal Finish. 09 90 00 - 3
PAINTING AND COATING
B.
EPS 2 Galvanized Metal and Aluminum (bollards, lintels, equipment housings, louvers, etc.): Acrylic Semi-Gloss 1. (SW) One coat ProCryl Universal Primer B66-310 Series, two coats Sher-Cryl HPA High Performance Acrylic B66-300 Series. 2. (DV) One coat MC Series V-Cote 200 Acrylic Maintenance Primer/Finish and two coats MC Series V-Cote 222 Acrylic Maintenance Finish. 3. (PPG) One coat Pitt-Tech 90-712 Series Int/Ext Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel, two coats Pitt-Tech 7-374 Series Int/Ext Semi-Gloss Acrylic Metal Finish.
C.
EPS 3 Manufactured Polyurethane Trim-Interior and Exterior. 1. Stain or paint recommended by product manufacturer.
2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A.
IPS 3 Wood: Oil Base Stain and Waterborne Polyurethane 1. (SW) One coat Wood Classics Stain A49 Series, two coats Wood Classics 250Stain A49 Series. 2. (DV) One coat Old Masters Fast Drying Penetrating Stain and two coats Old Masters Waterborne Satin Polyurethane. 3. (PPG) 77-560 interior ST stain base 50 and two coats 77-49 Series Rez Interior Acrylic Polyurethane Satin.
B.
IPS 4 Ferrous Metal (Unprimed): 100% Acrylic Latex Satin/Semi-Gloss, Non-blocking 1. (SW) One coat ProCryl Universal Primer B66-310 Series, two coats ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss B31 Series. 2. (DV) One coat MC1501 Acrylic Maintenance Prime/Finish and two coats MS Series Nu-cling Satin. 3. (PPG) One coat 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Primer/Finish. Two coats 7-374 series Int/Ext Semi-gloss Metal Finish.
C.
IPS 5 Ferrous Metal (Primed): 100% Acrylic Latex Satin/Semi-Gloss, Non-blocking 1. (SW) Spot prime with DTM Acrylic Primer B66W1, two coats ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic SemiGloss B31 Series. 2. (DV) Spot prime with MC1501 Acrylic Maintenance Primer/Finish. Two coats MS Series Nu-cling Satin. 3. (PPG) Spot prime with 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Primer/Finish. Two coats 7-374 series Int/Ext Semi-gloss Metal Finish.
D.
IPS 10 Gypsum Board: Vinyl Acrylic Latex Eggshell over Vinyl Acrylic Primer 1. (SW) One coat PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W8200, two coats ProMar 200 0 VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20W2600 Series. 2. (DV) One coat DU1507 primer/surface, two coats Health Kote Interior Latex Eg Shel, DE-1591 Series. 3. (PPG) One coat Speedhide 6-2 primer and two coats Pure Performance Interior Eg-Shel, 9-310 Series.
E.
IPS 11 Gypsum Board: Water based Catalyzed Epoxy Semi-Gloss over Acrylic Latex Primer 1. (SW) One coat ProMar 200 0 VOC Latex Wall Primer B28W2600, two coats Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70/B60V25. 2. (DV) One coat DU1507 primer/surfacer, two coats MC Series Aqua pox Waterborne Epoxy (2 Component) 3. (PPG) One coat 6-2 Speedhide primer, two coats 16-551 A/16-599 B.
F.
IPS 12 Gypsum Board-Ceilings and Soffits: Latex Flat 1. (SW) One coat ProMar 200 0 VOC Latex Wall Primer B28W2600, two coats ProMar 400 Flat Latex B30W400 Series. 2. (DV) One coat DU1507 primer/surface, two coats DE series Pro Plus flat. 3. (PPG) One coat Speedhide 6-2 primer and two coats Speedhide 6-70 Flat.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.
Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality.
B.
Patching Material: Latex filler.
13032-2
09 90 00 - 4
PAINTING AND COATING
C.
Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
C.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.
D.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
E.
Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
F.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C.
Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D.
Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
E.
Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
F.
Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. 1. This includes preparing/repairing defects in existing gyp bd surfaces.
G.
Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
H.
Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-SP 2 (hand tool cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning).
I.
Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs.
J.
Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
K.
Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner.
L.
Exterior Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after sealer has been applied. Prime concealed surfaces.
M. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A.
Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately.
B.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.
D.
Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
13032-2
09 90 00 - 5
PAINTING AND COATING
E.
Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F.
Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.
G.
Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
3.04 CLEANING A.
Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site.
3.05 PROTECTION A.
Protect finished coatings until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
13032-2
09 90 00 - 6
PAINTING AND COATING
SECTION 10 21 13.19 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Solid plastic toilet compartments.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports, door swings.
C.
Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments: 1. Ampco Products, Inc: www.ampco.com. 2. Scranton Products Co., Inc: www.scrantonproducts.com. 3. Accurate Partitons Corp: www.accuratepartitions.com 4. American Sanitary Partitions: www.am-sanitary-partition.com 5. General Partitions: www.genpartitions.com 6. Hadrian: www.hadrian-inc.com 7. Knickerbocker Partition Corp: www.knickerbockerpartition.com 8. Metpar: www.metpar.com 9. Legacy Polymer products, Inc.: www.legacypoly.com 10. PSiSC: www.psisc.com 11. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.02 SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS A.
Toilet Compartments: Factory fabricated doors, pilasters, and divider panels made of solid molded high density polyethylene (HDPE), floor-mounted headrail-braced. 1. Color: Basis of design noted in Master Color Schedule on Drawings.
B.
Doors: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Width: 24 inch. 3. Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch. 4. Height: 55 inch.
C.
Panels: 1. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Height: 55 inch. 3. Depth: As indicated on drawings.
D.
Pilasters: 1. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Width: As required to fit space; minimum 3 inches (76 mm).
2.03 ACCESSORIES A.
13032-2
Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 5 in high, concealing floor fastenings.
10 21 13.19 - 1
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
B.
Head Rails: Hollow anodized aluminum, 1 x 1-1/2 inch size, with anti-grip profile and cast socket wall brackets.
C.
Wall and Pilaster Brackets: Satin stainless steel.
D.
Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. 1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through-bolts and nuts; tamper proof.
E.
Hardware: Satin stainless steel: Unless noted otherwise. 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. 2. Door Latch: Slide type with exterior emergency access feature. Zamac w/ brushed polished chrome plated finish. 3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. Zamac w/ brushed polished chrome plated finish. 4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 5. Provide door pull for out swinging doors. 6. Provide wall bumper where doors swing towards adjacent wall.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.
Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures.
C.
Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters.
C.
Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.
D.
Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines.
E.
Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials.
3.03 TOLERANCES A.
Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch.
B.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch.
3.04 ADJUSTING A.
Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch.
B.
Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out-swinging doors to closed position.
C.
Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. END OF SECTION
13032-2
10 21 13.19 - 2
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
SECTION 10 21 23 CUBICLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Surface mounted overhead metal curtain track and guides.
B.
Cubicle curtains.
C.
Shower privacy curtains.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports for track.
C.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum board ceilings.
D.
Section 09 51 00 - Acoustical Ceilings: Suspended ceiling system to support track.
E.
Section 10 28 00 - Toilet Bath and Laundry Accessories: Shower curtains and rod
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2013a.
B.
NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films; National Fire Protection Association; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data for curtain fabric characteristics.
C.
Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods and materials and stain removal methods.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Accept curtain materials on site and inspect for damage.
B.
Store curtain materials on site and deliver to Owner for installation when requested.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TRACKS AND TRACK COMPONENTS A.
Track: Extruded aluminum sections; one piece per cubicle track run; I-beam profile.
B.
Curtain Carriers: Nylon slider to accurately fit track; designed to eliminate bind when curtain is pulled; fitted to curtain to prevent accidental curtain removal; 3 carriers per foot of track length.
C.
Wand: Plastic hollow section, attached to lead carrier, for pull-to-close action.
2.02 CURTAINS A.
All Curtain Materials: 1. Flame spread index of 25, maximum; smoke developed index of 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Naturally flame resistant or flameproofed; capable of passing NFPA 701 test.
B.
Open Mesh Cloth: Open weave to permit air circulation; flameproof material, same color as curtain.
C.
Curtain Fabrication: 1. Manufacture curtains of one piece, sized 10 percent wider than track length. Terminate curtain 15 inches from floor. 2. Include open mesh cloth at top 24 inches of curtain for room air circulation. 3. Curtain Heading: Triple thickness 2 inches wide, with stitched button holes for carriers 6 inches on center, double fold bottom hem 2 inches wide with lead weights included. Lock stitch seams in two rows. Turn seam edges and lock stitch.
D.
Curtains and Track shall be single source: 1. Refer to Master Color Schedule on ID Drawings for basis of design.
13032-2
10 21 23 - 1
CUBICLES
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that surfaces and supports above ceiling are ready to receive work of this Section.
B.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install curtain track to be secure, rigid, and true to ceiling line.
B.
See Section 06 10 00 for track supports above ceiling.
C.
Install end cap and stop device.
D.
Secure track to ceiling system. END OF SECTION
13032-2
10 21 23 - 2
CUBICLES
SECTION 10 22 26.33 FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manually operated, top mounted, single panel acoustical partitions. B. Ceiling track and operating hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section. B. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel: Overhead track structural support framing. C. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Acoustical sealant. D. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic barrier placed between top of partition track and roof deck above. E. Section 09 51 00 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings: Adjacent ceiling finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2013a. B. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009. C. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010. D. ASTM E557 - Standard Guide for Architectural Design and Installation Practices for Sound Isolation between Spaces Separated by Operable Partitions; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on partition materials. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Comply with design loads, include structural analysis data for attachments, signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer licensed in the State where project is located. 2. Identify storage and operating clearances. Show locations and describe installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel. 3. Track and anchorage to overhead structure. 4. Panel carriers, locations and operating details. 5. Retractable seals with method of activation and location of operating mechanism. 6. Vertical seals on panels and expandable jamb attached to last panel for final closure. show actual nesting depth of panel vertical seals. 7. Panel construction showing gauges and thicknesses of all materials. 8. Details of pocket doors including specified hardware. 9. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support-beam, mounting-hole template. a. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Samples for Selection: Submit two samples of full manufacturer's color range for selection of colors. D. Samples for Review: Submit two samples of surface finish, 12 x 12 inches size, illustrating quality. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special procedures. F. Certificates: Certify that partition system meets or exceeds specified acoustic requirements. G. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain removal methods. Describe cleaning materials detrimental to finish surfaces and hardware finish. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience.
14001
10 22 26.33 - 1
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Design is based on Hufcor; Product Model 641. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Modernfold, a DORMA Group Company: Acousti-Seal 941. www.modernfold.com. 2. Panelfold, Inc: Moduflex Model 810PP. www.panelfold.com. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Operable Panel Partition: Top supported, manually operated, remote stacking. 1. Panel Finish: Factory applied polyolefin fabric face. 2. Sound Transmission Class (STC): 50 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90, on panel size of 100 sq ft. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics of Panel Finish: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Installed partition system track capable of supporting imposed loads, with maximum deflection of 1/360 of span. B. Core: 16 gage formed sheet steel frame top, bottom, jambs, and intermediates; welded construction. 1. Thickness with Finish: nominal 4 inches. 2. Factory applied surface finish. 3. Trim: Trimmed with manufacturers standard, color selected by A/E. 4. Panel Hinges: 18 ga. minimum, shall be integral with or concealed by metal edge frame. Butt type hinges protruding more than 1/4" from panel face shall not be acceptable. 5. Panel to Panel Seals: Grooved and gasketed astragals; continuous flexible ribbed vinyl seal fitted to panel edge construction; color to match panel finish. 6. MDF plywood with full height steel sound backer installed in lieu of gypsum board. C. Track and Suspension System: Furnish manufacturer's standard heavy-duty aluminum track. Track joints to be keyed to assure proper alignment. Furnish track with integral supports for adjoining soffit. Provide one 4-wheel self-lubricating ball bearing carrier for every panel sized to carry imposed loads, with threaded pendant bolt for vertical adjustment. Track or carriers requiring lubrication at time of installation or at any future time shall not be permitted. Tracks incorporating rub or guide rails not permitted. No floor tracks permitted. Partition Contractor to furnish and install header panels from track to bottom of beam. Header panels to match basic panel finish. D. Acoustic Seals: Flexible acoustic seals at jambs, ceilings, retractable floor seals. Bottom seals shall automatically drop as panels are positioned or be activated from the lead panel. Above track work by others. E. To provide a positive vertical seal between the partition and the building, the panel at the stacking end of each opening shall be provided with an expandable jamb. Panel consists of a basic panel equipped with an expanding jamb member and is operated from either face by a removable handle. Panels shall be capable of compensating for out-of-plumb condition or minor wall irregularities. Expanding jamb member to have approximately 5" of travel. Lead panels to have 1" vinyl bulb type compression seal. F. Fabric Wall Covering Basis of Design: Hufcor-Revelations polyolefin fabric. G. Wood Veneer faces: Unfinished rotary cut white birch veneer, book match. Contact adhesive laminated to panel substrate. H.
Pocket Enclosures: Door, frame, and trim to have standard vinyl laminated to steel face. Trim shall be dark brown to match panels. All operating hardware to be concealed and provided by door manufacturer. Exposed foot or floor bolts not acceptable. Panels shall seal against pocket door faces. Coordinate core hardware with type specified in section 08 70 00.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify track supports are laterally braced and will permit track to be level within 1/4 inch of required position and parallel to the floor surface. C. Verify floor flatness of 1/8 inch in 10 feet, non-cumulative. D. Verify wall plumbness of 1/8 inch in 10 feet, non-cumulative.
14001
10 22 26.33 - 2
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E 557. B. Fit and align partition assembly level and plumb. C. Lubricate moving components. D. Apply acoustic sealant to achieve required acoustic performance. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Complete break-in operation as recommended by door supplier. B. Adjust partition assembly to provide smooth operation from stacked to full open position. Do not overcompress acoustic seals. C. Visually inspect partition in full extended position for light leaks to identify a potential acoustical leak. D. Adjust partition assembly to achieve lightproof seal. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean finish surfaces and partition accessories. END OF SECTION
14001
10 22 26.33 - 3
FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 10 26 01 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Bumper rails.
B.
Corner guards.
C.
Corridor handrails.
D.
Wall protection panels.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking for wall and corner guard anchors.
C.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Substrate preparation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.
B.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2013a.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, anchorage details, and rough-in measurements.
C.
Samples: Submit two sections of corner guard, bumper rail, hand rai and wall protection materiall, 12 inch long, illustrating component design, configuration, color and finish.
D.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Coordinate the work with wall or partition sections for installation of concealed blocking or anchor devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Wall and Corner Guards: Refer to Master Color Schedule on ID Drawings for basis of design. Comparable products from: 1. Korogard Wall Protection Systems. www.korogard.com. Comparable products by: 2. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc: www.ardenarch.com. 3. Construction Specialties, Inc: www.c-sgroup.com. 4. Inpro: www.inprocorp.com. 5. Pawling Corp.: 800-431-3456 6. Alpar Architectural Products,LLC. www.alpararch.com 7. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 COMPONENTS A.
Bumper Rails: Factory- or shop-fabricated, with preformed end caps and internal and external corners: 1. Performance of Installed Assembly: a. Support vertical live load of 100 lb/lineal ft with deflection not to exceed 1/50 of span between supports. b. Resist lateral force of 250 lbs at any point without damage or permanent set. 2. Material: High impact vinyl, color as scheduled. 3. Mounting: Surface.
B.
Corridor Handrails: Factory- or shop-fabricated, with preformed end caps and internal and external corners: 1. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/ICC A117.1.
13032-2
10 26 01 - 1
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
2.
3. 4.
Performance of Installed Assembly: a. Support vertical live load of 100 lb/lineal ft with deflection not to exceed 1/50 of span between supports. b. Resist lateral force of 250 lbs at any point without damage or permanent set. Material: High impact vinyl, color as scheduled. Mounting: Surface.
C.
Corner Guards - Surface Mounted: High impact vinyl with extruded aluminum full height retainer and integral impact absorbing device. 1. Performance: Resist lateral impact force of 100 lbs at any point without damage or permanent set. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide assemblies with flame spread index of 25 or less and smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Corner: Radiused. 4. Color: As scheduled. 5. Length: One piece. 6. Preformed end caps.
D.
Mounting Brackets and Attachment Hardware: Appropriate to component and substrate.
2.03 WALL PROTECTION SHEETS A.
Product: 1. Refer to Master Color Schedule on ID Drawings for basis of design.
B.
Class A fire rating.
2.04 FABRICATION A.
Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams.
B.
Pre-drill holes for attachment.
C.
Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.
Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in position to wall framing members only. END OF SECTION
13032-2
10 26 01 - 2
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Accessories for toilet rooms.
B.
Grab bars.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed supports for accessories, including in wall framing and plates.
C.
Section 08 83 00 - Mirrors:
D.
Section 10 21 13.19 - Plastic Toilet Compartments.
E.
Section 10 21 23 - Cubicles: Shower privacy curtains.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).
B.
ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2013.
C.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
D.
ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Toilet Accessories: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories Inc: www.ajwashroom.com. 2. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com. 3. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. 4. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc: www.bobrick.com 5. Gamco: www.gamecousa.com 6. PSiSC Manufacturer of Columbia Accessories: www.psisc.com 7. See Division 1 for substitution procedures
B.
All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer.
2.02 MATERIALS A.
Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.
B.
Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.
C.
Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Type 304 or 316.
D.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating.
13032-2
10 28 00 - 1 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
E.
Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof.
F.
Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof.
G.
Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.
2.03 FINISHES A.
Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.
B.
Baked Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy baked enamel.
2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A.
Grab Bars - Concealed Flange 1. American Specialties, Inc. 3200 Series. 2. Bobrick B-6806.99. 3. Bradley 812-2. 4. Gamco: 150S-T a. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-1/2 inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. b. Length and configuration: As indicated on drawings. 5. See Division 1 for substitution procedures
B.
Security Grab Bars - Concealed Flange 1. Bradley SA70; Comparable products by: 2. Bobrick 3. American Specialties, Inc. 4. Gamco: a. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-1/2 inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, nonslip grasping surface finish, exposed flange mounting with torx head screws; 11 ga closure plate at bottom of bar. b. Length and configuration: As indicated on drawings. 5. See Division 1 for substitution procedures
C.
Single Robe/Towel Hook 1. American Specialties, Inc. 0751. 2. Bobrick B-2116. 3. Bradley 9119. 4. Gamco: 2116 5. See Division 1 for substitution procedures
D.
Security Single Robe/Towel Hook 1. American Specialties, Inc. 123. 2. Bobrick B-B-983. 3. Bradley SA36 4. See Division 1 for substitution procedures
E.
Double Coat Hook 1. American Specialties, Inc.: 0745Z 2. Bobrick: B-212 3. Bradley: 912 4. Gamco: 753 5. See Division 1 for substitution procedures
F.
Shower Curtain Rod (verify length on plan) 1. American Specialties, Inc.: 1224. 2. Bobrick: B-207. 3. Bradley: 9538. 4. Gamco: 107/110. 5. Provide break away shower rod flanges at Segment D. 6. See Division 1 for substitution procedures
13032-2
10 28 00 - 2 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
G.
Sanitary Napkin Disposal-Surface Mounted 1. American Specialties, Inc.: 0852 2. Bobrick: B-270 3. Bradley: 4781-15 4. Gamco: ND-1. 5. See Division 1 for substitution procedures
H.
Mop and Broom Holder-24" 1. American Specialties, Inc.: 8215 Series (3). 2. Bobrick: B-223x24. 3. Bradley: 9953 4. Gamco: MS-1. 5. See Division 1 for substitution procedures
I.
Stainless Steel Shelf (see drawings for length) 1. Bradley: 755 and 756 2. Gamco: S-5 and S-6 3. See Division 1 for substitution procedures
J.
Surface Mounted Medicine Cabinet 1. Basis of Design: Ketcham 126-SM 16 x 30 2. See Division 1 for substitution procedures
K.
Baby Changing Station: Wall-mounted folding diaper changing station for use in commercial toilet facilities, meeting or exceeding ASTM F 2255. 1. Koala Corp.: Horizontal Design. www.koalabear.com 2. American Specialties: 9012 www.americanspecialties.com 3. Bradley: 961 www.bradleycorp.com 4. Brocar Products, Inc.: www.brocar.com. 5. Diaper Deck & Company: www.diaperdeck.com. 6. Safe-Strap Co Inc.: www.diaperdepot.com. 7. Or approved comparable. 8. See Division 1 for substitution procedures Dryer Vent Box; Metal vent receptacle box recessed in wall to transition dryer vent. 1. Dryer Vent Solutions; www.cleanmyventtoday.com 877-999-4950 2. DBX Products; www.dryersolutions.com 866-270-8240 3. Or comparable
L.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
C.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.
D.
See Section 06 10 00 for installation of blocking and concealed anchors in walls and ceilings.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.
B.
Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION A.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on the drawings.
B.
Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C.
Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, and indicated on accessoy schedule on drawings.
D.
Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on drawings END OF SECTION
13032-2
10 28 00 - 3 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 10 31 00 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Electric Fireplace-Wall Mount
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A.
See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
B.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that fireplace components meet or exceed UL requirements.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and component installation sequence, clearances and tolerances from adjacent construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufactured Fireplaces: 1. Hearth & Home Technologies, Inc; Simplifier 30 inch, Model SF-B136-E and SF-B130. www.fireplaces.com. 2. Or Comparable 3. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 COMPONENTS A.
2 Heat settings and 2 heater ratings
B.
Radio Frequency remote control
C.
Less than 6" in depth
D.
BTU Output: 1706 BTU low and 3412 BTU high
E.
Heater Rating: 500 watt low and 1000 watt high
F.
120V AC, 60 HZ
G.
Total Amps: 7.9
H.
Total Watts: 1050
I.
Total Illumination: 2 X 20W low energy bulb
2.03 ACCESSORIES A.
Remote control
2.04 FACTORY FINISHING A.
Exposed to View Surfaces; Black color.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that prepared openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on drawings.
B.
Verify that proper power supply is available.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and UL requirements. END OF SECTION
13032-2
10 31 00 - 1
MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Fire extinguishers.
B.
Fire extinguisher cabinets.
C.
Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.
B.
UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, and anchorage details.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E.
Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories: FX-1, Surface Mounted 1. Basis of Design: JL Industries, Inc; Panorama 1017 semi-recessed, 3" return w/ P43 door and SFC-11 Security and Detention Cabinet: www.jlindustries.com. Comparable products from: 2. Ansul, a Tyco Business: www.ansul.com. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com. 4. Potter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com. 5. Pyro-Chem, a Tyco Business: www.pyrochem.com. 6. Strike First Corporation of America: www.strikefirstusa.com. 7. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A.
Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent.
B.
Type A,B,C Fire Extinguishers, 10 lb.
C.
Type 'K' Kitchen Area Fire Extinguishers, 6 liter K class.
2.03 ACCESSORIES A.
Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated. FX-2
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
13032-2
10 44 00 - 1
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Mount fire extinguishers in cabinets or on brackets so top of extinguisher is not higher than 48 inches above the floor.
C.
Secure rigidly in place.
D.
Place extinguishers in cabinets. END OF SECTION
13032-2
10 44 00 - 2
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10 51 00 LOCKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Welded locker units with hinged doors.
B.
Metal tops and filler panels.
C.
Locker benches.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on locker types, sizes, color selections and accessories.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan and combination lock code.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate component installation assembly.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Metal Lockers: 1. Art Metal Products: www.artmetalproducts.com. 2. Lyon Workspace Products: www.lyonworkspace.com. 3. Penco Products, Inc: www.pencoproducts.com. 4. Republic Storage Systems Co: www.republicstorage.com. 5. ASI Storage Solutions. www.asilockers.com 6. Hallowell Standard Quiet. www.hallowell-list.com 7. Hadrian. www.hadrian-inc.com 8. General Storage Systems. www.generalstoragesystems.com 9. Olympus Lockers, Hercules: www.olympuslockers.com 10. See Division 1 for substitution procedures
2.02 LOCKER APPLICATIONS A.
Locker Room: Two tier metal lockers, wall mounted with matching closed base. 1. Width: 12 inches. 2. Depth: 18 inches. 3. Height: 72 inches. 4. Fittings: 2 coat hooks. 5. Locking: Padlock hasps, for padlocks provided by Owner.
2.03 MATERIALS A.
13032-2
Locker Room Lockers: Sheet steel ASTM A 653/A 653M SS Grade 50/340, with G90/Z275 coating. Minimum requirements below. 1. Body and Shelf, including required finished end panels: 16 gage. 2. Door: 14 gage. 3. Back: 18 gage. 4. Single point latch. 5. Sloping Top (unless noted otherwise): 20 gage, 0.036 inch. 6. Finished End Panels: 20 gage, 0.036 inch 1 inch boxed, attached so no hardware is exposed. 10 51 00 - 1
LOCKERS
B.
Accessories For Each Locker: Two single prong wall hooks, hat shelf at lockers 48 inches or higher.
C.
Locker Benches: Free standing; bench top of laminated birch species wood, stained, sealed and varnished; pedestals of chrome steel, 16 inches high.
2.04 TYPICAL ALL LOCKER UNITS A.
Mounting: Surface mounted.
B.
Base: Metal base.
C.
Top: Sloped metal with closures.
D.
Single point latch, recessed cup.
E.
Locking: Equipped for combination locks.
F.
Class: Quiet.
G.
Locker Body: Formed and flanged; with steel stiffener ribs; electric spot welded.
H.
Frames: Formed channel shape, welded and ground flush, welded to body, resilient gaskets and latching for quiet operation.
I.
Doors: Hollow channel edge construction, 1-3/16 inch thick; welded construction, channel reinforced top and bottom with intermediate stiffener ribs, grind and finish edges smooth.
J.
Hinges: Full length, 14 gauge continuous piano hinge.
K.
Number Plates: Provide oval shaped brass plates. Form numbers 0.5 inch high of block font style, in contrasting color.
L.
Provide ventilated doors.
2.05 FINISHING A.
Clean, degrease, and neutralize metal; prime and finish with one coat of baked enamel.
B.
Paint locker units one custom color as selected by A/E.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and configuration.
B.
Verify bases and embedded anchors are properly sized.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install lockers plumb and square.
C.
Place and secure on prepared base.
D.
Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation.
E.
Install end panels, filler panels, and sloped tops.
F.
Install accessories.
G.
Replace components that do not operate smoothly.
3.03 CLEANING A.
Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces. END OF SECTION
13032-2
10 51 00 - 2
LOCKERS
SECTION 10 56 23 WIRE STORAGE SHELVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Wall mounted wire closet shelving.
B.
Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking in walls for attachment of shelving.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, with installation instructions.
C.
Selection Samples: For each color selection required, submit color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and finish.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Store products under cover and elevated above grade.
C.
Store flat to prevent warpage and bending.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Wire Storage Shelving: 1. ClosetMaid Corporation: www.closetmaid.com. 2. RubberMaid Closet and Organization Products: www.rubbermaidcloset.com. 3. or comparable.
2.02 SHELVING APPLICATIONS A.
See plans for shelving depth and length.
2.03 MATERIALS A.
Wire Shelving: Factory-assembled coated wire mesh shelf assemblies for wall-mounting, with all components and connections required to produce a rigid structure that is free of buckling and warping. 1. Construction: Cold-drawn steel wire with average tensile strength of 100,000 psi resistance welded into uniform mesh units, square, rigid, flat, and free of dents or other distortions, with wires trimmed smooth. 2. Coating: PVC or epoxy, applied after fabrication, covering all surfaces. 3. PVC Coating: 9 to 11 mils thick. 4. Epoxy Coating: Non-toxic epoxy-polyester powder coating baked-on finish, 3 to 5 mils thick. 5. Standard Mesh Shelves: Cross deck wires spaced at 1 inch.
B.
Mounting Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard mounting hardware; include support braces, wall brackets, back clips, end clips, poles, and other accessories as required for complete and secure installation; factory finished to match shelving.
C.
Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer for mounting substrates.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with shelf surfaces level.
B.
Cap exposed ends of cut wires.
C.
Install back clips, end clips at side walls, and support braces at open ends. Install intermediate support braces as recommended by manufacturer.
13032-2
10 56 23 - 1
WIRE STORAGE SHELVING
3.02 PROTECTION A.
Protect installed work from damage.
B.
Clean soiled surfaces after installation.
C.
Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion in a manner that eliminates evidence of replacement. END OF SECTION
13032-2
10 56 23 - 2
WIRE STORAGE SHELVING
SECTION 11 13 19.13 LOADING DOCK LEVELERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Prefabricated steel lift with guard rails.
B.
Operating hardware.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Coordination of placement of frame into concrete slab.
C.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete pad.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide materials and finish, installation details, roughing-in measurements, and operation of unit and safety lock device.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate required opening dimensions, tolerances of opening dimensions, placement dimensions of safety lock device, perimeter conditions of construction.
D.
Operation Data: Provide operating instructions, identify unit limitations.
E.
Maintenance Data: Provide unit maintenance information, lubrication cycles, spare parts manual.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Elevating Dock Lift: 1. Basis of Design: Rite-Hite Corp: Level-Rite LRL Series 9672. www.ritehite.com. 2. Comparable products from: 3. Kelly. www.kelleycompany.com. 4. Blue Giant Equipment Corporation: www.bluegiant.com. 5. McGuire. 6. Poweramp 7. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 COMPONENTS A.
Dock Lift: 1. Operation: Hydraulic. 2. Deck Width: 72 inch. 3. Deck Length: 96 inch. 4. Lowered Height: 10 inches. 5. Raised Height: 68 inches. 6. Travel: 58 inches. 7. Electrical Power Requirements: 480 volts, three phase. a. Remote NEMA 4X/IP65 push button controls on 12 foot cord from power pack. b. 24 volt control voltage. c. NEMA 12 motor enclosure. d. TEFC continuous duty motor with pressure relief, check flow control and solenoid valves in aluminum manifold. Steel reservoir with oil level gauge and drain, reservoir and in-line filters.
B.
Steel checker plate deck and lips.
C.
Entry/Exit Plates: 18 inch by width of unit with lifting chains.
D.
Railing: 42 inches high bolt on with intermediate rail and 4 inch side kick plates.
E.
Safety chains with hooks on both ends.
F.
Pit frame: Manufacturer's standard fitted for anchoring to concrete slab.
13032-2
11 13 19.13 - 1
LOADING DOCK LEVELERS
2.03 FINISHES A.
Lift Platform: Hot dip galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq ft finish.
B.
Lift Frame: Hot dip galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq ft finish.
C.
Railing: Factory enameled finish.
D.
Pit Frame: Hot dip galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq ft finish.
E.
Vehicle Restraint: Yellow painted hook, galvanized steel operating mechanism.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that rough-in openings are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install dock lift unit on prepared concrete slab in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Set square and level.
3.03 ADJUSTING A.
Adjust installed unit for smooth and balanced operation. END OF SECTION
13032-2
11 13 19.13 - 2
LOADING DOCK LEVELERS
SECTION 11 40 00 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. FSEC shall furnish all labor, materials and service necessary for the installation of foodservice equipment in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and local codes that is reasonably inferred. Unless otherwise noted all scope within this section is the responsibility of the FSEC. No extra charge will be allowed for that which the Food Service Equipment Contractor (FSEC) should have been familiar. Include all applicable provisions of Division 1. It shall be the responsibility of the FSEC and all trade contractors for this project to review Division 1 and all portions of this section to determine scope. B. FSEC shall remove, store and relocate all existing foodservice equipment as necessary and specified for remodeling, renovation and reconfiguration of the related project. All existing equipment not scheduled for relocation shall be relocated to the Owner's storage area as directed. Follow Article 3.3 for description of responsibilities. C. Coordinate mechanical, electrical and plumbing rough-in services, manufactured equipment and custom fabricated equipment construction, equipment bases, curbs, ceiling heights, depressed areas, sleeves, wall openings, refrigeration lines, service access, existing building conditions that affects equipment, and all other building conditions required to accommodate the Section 11 40 00 equipment including new, existing, Owner furnished and future equipment with other trades. Cut holes in equipment to accommodate pipes, drains, electrical conduit and outlets as required. D. Supervise and furnish required instructions for work to be performed by other trade contractors in connection with requirements for all equipment under this section. E. Perform work in a timely manner consistent with the construction schedule, submit written notice of any manufacturer or construction related problem that can or will cause a delay in the equipment delivery or installation; substitution for failure to order equipment in a timely manner understanding all lead times is not acceptable. F. The FSEC for this project must have completed a minimum of two projects of similar size and complexity within the past five years. The project must have been a consultant specified project and the project must have been completed to the Owner’s satisfaction. G. Obtain and pay for all required permits, tests and inspections as required by State and local jurisdictions for the completion of this project. H. Mackesey and Associates, LLC is the Foodservice Consultant for this project and represents the Owner in all matters included and also acts as a technical advisor to the Architect. In order to function effectively, Mackesey and Associates, LLC shall be advised of any modifications proposed by any party to this project which may affect the performance of this project. I.
All contracts documents furnished by Mackesey and Associates, LLC are the property of Mackesey and Associates. They are not to be used by any other person or business entity, wholly or in part.
J.
Drawings and specifications are intended to complement each other, so that neither is complete without the other. The FSEC should not submit pricing or bid, enter agreements or entertain execution of this contract without complete access to all contract documents. In the event of conflict between the drawings and the specifications, provide the greater scope between the drawings and specifications.
K. All drawings produced by Mackesey and Associates are definitive only and are not to be used for construction or shop details. Consultant drawings are to be used to develop scope, bidding values, special condition details and coordination of the mechanical, electrical and plumbing requirements.
13032-2
11 40 00-1
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
L. Drawings and specifications are for assistance and guidance of the FSEC and indicate the arrangement and location of foodservice equipment. Exact locations, distances and levels will be governed by the building and final coordination of the FSEC. Any deviances of the intended layout and foodservice equipment configuration must be brought to the attention of the Foodservice Consultant before installation is completed. The FSEC shall accept this and all requirements of the specifications with full knowledge and understanding of the requirements. M. FSEC must be bondable in the amount of the Food Service Contract as required. The FSEC must have the financial capability for the procurement of the equipment specified and all necessary logistic costs including installation without any delay to the project. N. Any publicity given to this project by FSEC in the form of articles, video recordings, visits, etc., shall be approved by the Owner and or Architect. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFIED WORK BY OTHER CONTRACTORS A. Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. B. The General Contractor (GC) shall provide the following: 1. Floors and settings beds, quarry tile and base, masonry pads, protective curbing, walls and finished ceilings and related building work by the General Contractor. 2. Transit-level recesses, sub-floor, water proofing, floor depressions, wire cloth, concrete setting bed, floor tile and base, wearing floor and coved base, and related building work including cold storage rooms by the General Contractor. 3. Concealed wall backing to support all wall mounted equipment shall be provided by the GC. (Drywall and stud type construction only). 4. Provide closure panels above walk-in cold storage rooms and ventilation hoods with materials matching unless otherwise specified. 5. Install floor troughs and floor pans furnished by the FSEC. 6. Provide roof curb or concrete pad for foodservice refrigeration systems. 7. All related work by the GC shall meet or exceed applicable codes and government standards. C. The Mechanical Contractor (MC) shall provide the following: 1. All hood or ventilator duct work upstream from the duct collar. 2. Provide ducts, fans, dampers, etc. as required for ventilation systems including exhaust hoods. 3. Disconnection of existing foodservice equipment and interconnection of new equipment. 4. All related work by the MC shall meet or exceed applicable codes and government standards. D. The Plumbing Contractor (PC) shall provide the following: 1. All water, waste, indirect waste piping from sinks and ventilators, steam and gas services to the equipment including all shut-off valves, plumbing trim, traps, gas pressure reducing and regulation valves for pressures above 14” W.C., grease traps and PVC conduit for beverage or refrigeration lines, etc. and final connections to the equipment except as specified herein shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor. 2. Install all faucets, pre-rinse spray assemblies, lever drains, vacuum breakers, flow control valves, check valves, water inlets, traps, filters, pressure reducing valves, strainers, temperature/pressure gauges, gas valves, flexible gas hoses, gas pressure regulators, etc. that are furnished by the FSEC. Provide special care in installation to eliminate tool marks from installation. Horizontal piping shall be a minimum of 6” AFF. Water pressure range for foodservice equipment shall be between 35 psi and 65 psi. 3. Provide all eye wash stations, emergency showers, floor sinks, mop sinks, hose bibbs and floor drains. 4. Provide 1" cooler/freezer condensate drain line piping. Trap line(s) outside of box. Walk-in cooler drain piping cannot pass through freezer compartments. 13032-2
11 40 00-2
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
5. Final connection of the recirculating and municipal water to refrigeration equipment. 6. Make plumbing connections between sections of modular equipment such as utility distribution system, exhaust hoods, remote refrigeration systems or walk-in coolers and freezers. 7. Provide all reduced pressure backflow, pressure reducing valves except where included as specified within this section. 8. Disconnection of existing foodservice equipment and interconnection of new equipment. 9. All related work by the PC shall meet or exceed applicable codes and government standards. E. The Electrical Contractor (EC) shall provide the following: 1. All electrical services and components including wiring to and final connections to all equipment except as specified herein including rough-in and final connections for all services. Make electrical connections between sections of modular equipment such as utility distribution system, exhaust hoods, remote refrigeration systems or walk-in coolers and freezers. 2. Connect and install electrical devices furnished by the FSEC. 3. Provide receptacles, conduit, contactors, controllers, switches, disconnects, starters, etc. unless otherwise indicated. 4. Conduit to and within cold storage rooms in cooperation with the Food Service Equipment Contractor. Wire from all compressor timers to evaporators coils as indicated on the Schedule. Wire to all remote condensers or packaged refrigeration systems. Wire to all components of the walk-in cooler and freezer including door assemblies, power door openers, lights, switches, condensate line heater outlets, heated air vents and audio/visual alarms. 5. Provide main power lines to foodservice refrigeration systems control panel and wiring for controls/defrost heaters between panels and coils according to factory supplied diagrams and local codes. 6. Connection of light fixtures installed by the FSEC in cold storage/work rooms. 7. Connection of cold storage rooms temperature alarm systems to the building security system. 8. Grounding type receptacles for all wall mounted outlets to be used for plug-in equipment. 9. Disconnection of existing foodservice equipment and interconnection of new equipment. 10. Shunt trip breakers as indicated and/or required by code. Where shunt trip breakers are indicated on the Electrical schedule or within this specification, provide shunt trips and/or contactors with 120 volt coils with contact ratings matching the electrical appliance or device. Wire from the micro switch relay on the fire control system head to the contactors / shunt trip breakers. 11. All related work by the GC shall meet or exceed applicable codes and government standards. 1.03 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS A. “INSTALL” as used in this section means to set in place, complete, secure, anchor and connect and in operable condition. B. “FURNISH” as used in this section means to supply and deliver to the project ready for installation and in operable condition. C. “PROVIDE” as used in this section means to supply all necessary material, labor and equipment to furnish and install for final connection by appropriate trades. D. Abbreviations:
13032-2
Americans with Disabilities
ADA
Above finished floor
AFF
American Gas Association 11 40 00-3
AGA FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
American Society for Mechanical Engineers
ASME
American Society for Refrigeration Engineers
ARE
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASHRAE
Cubic feet per minute
CFM
Construction Manager
CM
Duplex convenience outlet
DCO
Electrical Contractor
EC
Floor drain
F.D.
Food Service Equipment Contractor
FSEC
General Contractor
GC
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Contractor
HVAC
Mechanical Contractor
MC
One thousand British Thermal Units
MBTU
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NECA
National Fire Protection Association
NFPA
National Sanitation Foundation
NSF
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
OSHA
Plumbing Contractor
PC
Stainless Steel
S/S
Temperature Differential
T.D.
Underwriters Laboratories
UL
1.04 OWNER / PURVEYOR FURNISHED EQUIPMENT A. Obtain and coordinate manufacturer and model number not less than 120 days before equipment is required. B. Obtain and coordinate utility requirements. 1.05 REGULATIONS A. All work and materials shall be in accordance with the latest rules, codes and/or regulations of agencies/authorities having jurisdiction. Furnish all foodservice equipment-related permits, approvals and installation as required. B. All regulations, including building codes and other codes applying to this jurisdiction should be followed. In addition all equipment shall comply with the following: 1. National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). 2. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.), and must bear label. 3. National Electric Code, (NEC). 4. National Sanitation Foundation, (NSF) and must bear label. 5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) and must carry the ASME stamp. 6. American Gas Association (AGA). 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) including #70, 96 and 54. 8. American Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 9. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineering (ASHRAE). 10. American Society of Tested Materials (ASTM). 11. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 12. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). 13032-2
11 40 00-4
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
13. American Disabilities Act (ADA). 14. Uniform Building Code (UBC). 15. Safe Drinking Water Act. C. The Contract Documents shall govern whenever they require larger size or higher standard than required by regulations. When requirements of the Drawings exceed the written Specifications, the Drawings shall govern and when the written Specifications exceed the Drawings, the Specifications shall govern. D. Should it appear that the work intended or required to be described or any of the matters relative thereto are not sufficiently detailed or explained on the Drawings or in the specifications, the FSEC shall apply to the Foodservice Consultant so additional information questions can be answered before contracting the work. E. When seismic regulations are applicable, all equipment shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with those regulations. All seismic requirements shall be shown on all submittals. Submit required information to the agencies and authorities having jurisdiction. F. No extra charge will be paid for furnishing items required by the regulations, but not specified and/or shown on the Drawings. G. Ruling and interpretations of the enforcing agencies shall be considered a part of the regulations. H. Substitutions or alternate manufacturer requests: 1. Substitution requests must be supplemented by sufficient information in the form of manufacturer technical specifications, drawings, pictures and or samples to evaluate equality, appearance and all other rated conditions. 2. Written substitution requests must be made by FSEC and shall be submitted to the Foodservice Consultant a minimum of 10 days prior to bid date. Substitution will not be allowed if submitted at bid date without prior approval. 3. Where substitutions are made by the FSEC, with the approval of the Foodservice Consultant, the FSEC shall be responsible and pay the cost of any consequential modifications which may result from the substitution. 4. Any approval of an alternate manufacturer will not relieve the FSEC of any costs resulting from changes to size, weight, mechanical, electrical or plumbing requirements. The FSEC shall be responsible for all costs associated with the approved alternate item if it requires additional space or specific utilities that differ from the Specifications and Drawings. The FSEC shall be responsible to the Owner and GC for any retrofitting, such as building changes, utility changes and engineering changes. All substitution and alternates must be approved by Mackesey and Associates in writing. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide all labor, materials, refrigerant and incidental expenses to maintain proper operation of all related equipment. Systems to be kept in full working condition for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance by the Owner. Any parts requiring replacement during warranty period shall be replaced with new parts and installed at no cost to the Owner. B. Equipment shall be serviced within a reasonable period of time by a competent and factorytrained local service agency. Service shall be performed within 24 hours of request of service. Repairs not completed within 24 hours will allow the Owner to contract with an outside agency and charge the costs to the FSEC. C. A pro rata basis extension shall be included for the condensing units for four (4) additional years, exclusive of labor. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. After award of contract and before proceeding with the purchase of manufactured equipment, develop the information listed below and submit a printed copy and an electronic copy in Adobe Acrobat PDF format complete as directed by the Foodservice Consultant with: 13032-2
11 40 00-5
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
a. Cover sheet including the name of the project with date of submission. b. Title Sheet including an index, name and address for the Architect, General Contractor, Client Contact, Food Service Equipment Contractor. c.
Provide a separate page for each manufactured piece of equipment showing: Item number, quantity, description, manufacturer’s name and telephone, model number, optional finishes, equipment, accessories and modifications, utilities required and special notes.
d. Consultant shall comment and insert the Consultant’s stamp on the cover sheet indicating review of the documents. e. Brochure booklets will be returned with comments for distribution by FSEC. The FSEC shall provide up to 10 copies of the brochure when requested. f.
No printed copies of the brochure booklets should be provided as part of the submittal review process. Printed material will be returned to the FSEC.
g. Provide confirming statement of completion of code review and code compliance of submitted documents. 2. Based on the request of the Foodservice Consultant provide submittals in one of the requested formats listed below: a. Provide two (2) sets shop and rough-in drawings, and equipment schedules within 30 days of award of the contract or as required by the Architect. Submit 1/4” scale reproducible paper rough-in drawings for review. Drawings shall be dimensioned, showing ventilation requirements, floor and wall sleeves, plumbing, gas, steam, and electrical connections, including those items supplied by the Owner. Provide concrete pad dimensions, depressions and special conditions as required for equipment. Elevations and sections of special work shall be prepared for use by the respective trades. The FSEC shall be responsible for the accuracy of all information on their drawings. Consultant shall comment and stamp drawings and return to FSEC for duplication. Provide an adequate number of drawings (up to 10 sets) as directed by the GC or Owner. b. Provide an electronic copy of the equipment and utility schedules, shop drawings, rough-in and detail drawings in Adobe Acrobat PDF format within 30 days of award of the contract or as required by the Architect. Drawings shall be dimensioned, showing ventilation requirements, floor and wall sleeves, plumbing, gas, steam, and electrical connections, including those items supplied by the Owner. Provide concrete pad dimensions, depressions and special conditions as required for equipment. Elevations and sections of special work shall be prepared for use by the respective trades. The FSEC shall be responsible for the accuracy of all information on their drawings. Consultant shall comment and insert Consultant’s stamp on drawings and return to FSEC. No printed copies of the brochure booklets should be provided as part of the submittal review process. Printed material will be returned to the FSEC. FSEC shall be responsible for providing the adequate number of approved submittal documents and drawings (up to 10 sets) as directed by the GC or Owner. NOTE: The reproduction of the drawings from Mackesey and Associates are prohibited. i.
The following shall each be produced on separate sheets and/or plans: Plumbing; Electrical: Building Works and Ventilation; Refrigeration and Beverage systems.
ii.
Utilities shall be stubbed out of walls whenever possible.
iii. Verify mechanical, plumbing, electrical and ventilation rough-in and sleeve locations before walls and floor slabs are poured.
13032-2
11 40 00-6
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
iv. In the event rough-in has been accomplished before the award of the contract, check existing facility and furnish all equipment to suit building conditions and utilities. If inspection reveals that the existing conditions seriously interfere with the execution of the Work, the FSEC shall report these conditions to the Architect and await instruction before proceeding with that portion of the work. No extra charges shall be allowed for utility changes to fit equipment during installation and connection. 3. Prepare and submit wall backing drawings in the format listed above. The drawings shall show the location and size of all wall backing required. The drawings shall be submitted for review and submitted to the General Contractor in time for the wall backing to be installed prior to the closing of the walls. (This applies to drywall and stud wall systems only). 4. Prepare and submit shop drawings in the format listed above for all custom (special) items of work included in this contract. The detail drawings shall be submitted at minimum of ¾” scale for elevations and 1 ½” scale for sections. Drawings shall show all dimensions, all details of construction, installation and relation to adjoining and related work. Drawings shall show all reinforcements, anchoring and other related work required for the complete installation of all fixtures. Include size and strength for type, size and location of concealed anchorage of an adequate size and strength to securely mount any ceiling-hung equipment. Shop drawing paper shall be a minimum of 24” x 36”. 5. Checking product data sheets, rough-in drawings, wall backing drawings, shop drawings and refrigeration drawings by Consultant is for design concept only, and does not relieve the FSEC of the responsibility for compliance with Contract Documents, verification of utilities with equipment requirements for conformity and location, verification of all dimensions of equipment and building conditions or reasonable adjustments due to deviations. Review of submittals by the Foodservice Consultant is for design concept only and does not relieve the FSEC of the responsibility for compliance with design drawings, details, specifications and verifications of utilities with equipment requirements for conformity, location and verifications of all dimensions of equipment biding conditions or reasonable adjustments due to deviations. 6. All checking of submittals shall be accomplished before ordering equipment or starting fabrication. Corrected brochure booklets and drawing sheets will be returned by the Foodservice Consultant for revisions by the FSEC. Repeat until all corrections are made satisfactorily. 7. Submit complete detail factory engineered shop drawings including system description, configuration, system component locations, proposed piping routes; after review by design team, incorporate review comments and submit to fire authorities having jurisdiction for exhaust hood and fire suppression system approval prior to fabrication of both the exhaust hood and the fire suppression system. 8. All drawings provided for the GC or Owner shall be delivered rolled in a mailing tube when requested. Folded drawings shall be returned. 9. After final approvals have been received, supply one printed copy of the approved submittals and drawings to the Foodservice Consultant. 10. Provide all samples of materials requested by Foodservice Consultant for test purposes or comparisons. Samples used for testing shall not be used on the project without the approval of the Foodservice Consultant. 1.08 PARTS AND SERVICE WARRANTY A. Prior to demonstration and final inspection submit three (3) copies of the Operations and Maintenance manuals to the Architect or GC for approval. Manuals shall be in hard cover three-ring binders and shall include replacement part lists and a typewritten sheet listing name, address and phone numbers of all service agencies to be involved, with reference to the names and item numbers of the pieces of equipment each services. Provide a typewritten index sheet showing, in numerical order, the item numbers and corresponding model and serial number of each piece of equipment. Provide a cover sheet listing the 13032-2
11 40 00-7
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
name, address and phone for the Architect, General Contractor, FSEC and the Foodservice Consultant. B. Manuals must be submitted before the Owner issues final acceptance of the installation and starts the warranty. C. Provide the information listed above in both PDF and printed form. 1.09 VERIFICATION AND COORDINATION OF PROJECT / DATA A. All front manifolded range lines shall be assembled and aligned at the factory before shipment, including back guards, high shelves and salamanders. B. Verify sizes with the Owner on the following items before ordering or fabrication: 1. Steam pans 2. Sheet pans 3. Trays 4. Glass and cup racks 5. Plates, bowls, platters and all other dinnerware including requirements for disposables. C. Quietness of operation of all foodservice refrigeration equipment is a requirement of the equipment. Remove or repair any equipment producing objectionable noises. D. Verify all conditions at the building site(s), particularly door openings and passageways to avoid delivering items too large for entry. Coordinate with the General Contractor access to insure delivery of equipment to the required areas. Coordination shall include, but not be limited to, early delivery, hoisting, window removal and/or delay of wall construction. All special equipment handling charges, window removal, etc. shall be paid for by the FSEC. Do not deliver equipment until authorized by the GC. Verify storage location prior to delivery. If jobsite is not adequate to insure proper installation of the equipment, notification shall be in writing with sufficient time to effect corrective measures to meet the installation schedule. E. Verify and coordinate with trades, the height and location of piping and duct work in areas above exhaust hoods and cold rooms. F. All shipments shall be made freight prepaid. Equipment shall be wrapped and crated at the factory and shall be delivered in undamaged condition. Store all equipment and materials in such a manner as to prevent damage due to moisture, foreign materials, impact or unintended use. G. Coordinate the timely installation of the wearing floors inside the cold storage rooms with the General Contractor to prevent prolonged exposure of the floor insulation. Notify trades that cold storage areas are not to be used by any other trades for storage or work areas. Repair or replace any damaged areas on the interior of the cold storage room before Owner occupancy. H. Determine the acceptability of the location of the remote refrigeration condensing units in regards to ambient temperature, noise, vandalism and accessibility. If the condensing unit location is determined to be unacceptable for any reason, advise Architect/Owner and request direction in writing.
13032-2
I.
FSEC shall be responsible for the equipment until a review and inventory of the completed installation has been accomplished by the FSEC. Any damage to equipment prior to Owner acceptance will be corrected by FSEC with no additional cost to Owner. It is the sole responsibility of the FSEC to keep the equipment safe from use or damage while on site and before acceptance by the Owner. Store all equipment and materials in such a manner as to prevent damage due to moisture, foreign material and impact.
J.
FSEC shall be responsible for maintaining the code approvals for all exhaust hoods including protecting the hoods from any penetrations during the building construction. The FSEC shall provide signs for all sides of the hood stating – ANY PENETRATIONS OR INSTALLATION OF FASTENERS WILL VIOLATE AGENCY APPROVALS.
11 40 00-8
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
1.10 SCHEDULE AND SPECIAL HANDLING A. Time is of the essence in the completion of this project. Acceptance of the project constitutes a guarantee that upon notice to proceed the FSEC can and will obtain all materials, equipment and manpower to permit overall completion of the entire building project on schedule. FSEC shall coordinate its work with the progress schedule, as prepared and updated periodically by the GC. B. Any anticipated delays outside of the FSEC control shall be the subject of written notification to the Architect and GC. Such notification must be presented immediately upon FSEC realization that delays are imminent. C. Failure of manufacturers to meet promised delivery dates will not indemnify FSEC for failure to meet schedules, unless FSEC can establish, in writing, that order were received by the manufacturer with reasonable lead times. D. Extra charges resulting from special handling or air shipment shall be paid by the FSEC if insufficient time was allowed in placing lead items. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMMERCIALLY MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT A. All items of standard equipment shall be the latest model available at time of delivery. B. Manufacturer’s directions shall be followed in cases where the manufacturer of articles used in this contract furnishes direction or covers points not shown on the drawings or specifications. C. All doors shall be hinged as shown on the drawings. D. FSEC shall be responsible for execution of all articles of Part II unless otherwise specified. E. All refrigeration equipment whether self-contained or refrigerated by use of remote equipment shall be designed and installed to maintain the following general temperatures unless otherwise specified: 1. Walk-in Refrigerator
35 degrees Fahrenheit
2. Walk-in Freezer
-10 degrees Fahrenheit
3. Reach-in Refrigerator
35 degrees Fahrenheit
4. Reach-in Freezer
-10 degrees Fahrenheit
5. Undercounter Refrigerator
35 degrees Fahrenheit
6. Undercounter Freezer
-10 degrees Fahrenheit
7. Cold pan
0 degrees Fahrenheit
2.02 PLUMBING WORK A. Provide suitable pipe slots, chases and/or do all drilling, punching and cutting of equipment required to provide access for appropriate trade to make connections and/or runs. Such work performed at the job site shall be of the same quality as similar to the factory or fabrication shop. B. To insure proper clearance for cleaning, all horizontal piping lines shall be run at the highest possible elevation and not less than 6” above the finished floor, through equipment whenever possible. C. Indirect waste piping (except from sinks and ventilators) shall be installed in accordance with the codes in effect at the job site. Piping shall run as described hereinafter, and shall discharge into open site drains and floor sinks. Extend piping to a point at least 2” above the rim for the drain/floor sink and with a cut bottom on 45 degree angle. All indirect waste piping shall be installed and routed in a manner to insure proper drainage and shall conform to shelves, spaces, equipment or building conditions. Secure all indirect waste piping as required to achieve same. D. Indirect waste piping from ice bins, ice pans or similar items shall be insulated and installed to prevent condensation.
13032-2
E. Trough and disposer cone water inlets shall be located above positive water level to prevent siphoning of liquids in the water systems. Wherever conditions shall require a submerged 11 40 00-9 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
inlet, a suitable and code approved back flow device such as a reduced pressure backflow, check valve and vacuum breaker shall be placed on the fixture to form part of same to prevent siphoning. Include ¼ turn valves for each of the water inlets to control water volume. For all backflow devices not specifically specified by the FSEC, the code compliant units shall be provided by the PC. F. Where exposed, FSEC shall provide S/S or chrome plated piping and fittings to PC for installation. G. Based on the maximum allowed incoming line pressure per gas-fired piece of equipment, the FSEC shall provide the necessary gas pressure regulator to reduce pressure from 14" W.C. to the factory recommended gas pressure. H. All valves where required shall be American made to insure availability of replacement parts. I.
FAUCETS 1. Faucets shall be furnished by the FSEC for all sinks, bain maries, water stations, and other fixtures as specified and shall be supplied with non-splash aerator, and water saving devices where required by local codes. Faucets shall be EPAct 2005 compliant. Unless otherwise specified, faucets shall be provided as follows to match elevation drawings. PC to install and plumb to fixtures. a. Deck mount sink faucet – T & S Model B-0201 faucet with B-0199-01 aerator. b. Splash mount sink faucet – T & S Model B-0231 faucet with B-0199-01 aerator. c.
Deck mount pre-rinse spray – T & S Model B-0123-0156-109 with B-0199-01 aerator.
d. Splash mount pre-rinse spray – T & S Model B-0131-0156-109 with B-0199-01 aerator. e. Splash mount fast fill pre-rinse spray – T & S Model B-0287-109 “Big-Flo” pre-rinse spray assembly with faucet with 12” spout. f.
Splash mounted fast fill faucet – T & S Model B-0290.
g. Hand sink – touchless – T&S Model EC-3100, deck-mounted electronic faucet with mixing valve, #GN2AH8 spout and aerator. Include two sets of alkaline batteries for each faucet. h. Fill faucet – T & S Model B-0208 faucet with B-0199 aerator. Acceptable alternate – Chicago Faucet and Fisher, wherever not already specified. Owner reserves the option to require either T & S Brass and Bronze, Chicago Faucet or Fisher. With the exception of the hand wash sink, faucet brand shall be consistent throughout the project. J.
DRAINS AND WASTES 1. The FSEC shall furnish all necessary drains and wastes with the equipment as follows unless otherwise specified. PC to install and plumb as required. a. Drain (2”) – rotary lever – T & S Model B-3900 or approved equal Component Hardware model. b. Drain (2”) – rotary lever drain with rear overflow – T & S Model B-3902 or approved equal Component Hardware model. c.
Drain (1 ½”) – Basket strainer – Component Hardware Model E38-1012.
Acceptable alternate manufacturer for drain and waste items – Franklin Products. Owner reserves the option to require a specific brand. The brand shall be consistent throughout the project. K. FLEXIBLE GAS AND WATER LINES Flexible gas and water supply hoses shall be furnished by the FSEC for all cooking, beverage dispensing and other fixtures as specified with casters or noted on the Mechanical / Electrical / Plumbing Schedule in the mobile configuration as required by local codes. Unless otherwise specified, flexible lines shall be furnished as follows to match Drawings and include quick disconnect features. Furnish devices to PC for final installation: 13032-2
11 40 00-10
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
1. One Dormont Model1675KITCF2S48PS flexible gas hose kit. positioning system / wheel locators for all equipment with casters.
Include Safety Set
2. One Dormont Series HW, Dormont Model HW37BP2Q72 flexible water hose kit. 3. Verify hose length based on equipment location and connection location, confirm length with Consultant. Provide one hose per connection. L. WATER FILTERS Furnish Everpure or Cuno complete filter assemblies for the following equipment: 1. Steamers. 2. Combination ovens. 3. Rack style baking ovens. 4. Beverage equipment, including Beverage vendor supplied equipment. 5. Ice makers. 6. Ice makers / soda dispensers. Filter assemblies shall be sized based on factory recommendations including required service flow, peak water demand and water quality. 2.03 VENTILATION WORK A. Provide all labor, material and service required to install hoods, vent ducts and other specified capture devices; verify size and location of duct connections and provide all exposed S/S duct work from hoods, ventilators and dishwashers to building duct work, including trim and watertight or grease tight connections. B. Coordinate with appropriate trade requirements for ducts, fans, dampers, starters, etc., necessary for the operation of all required exhaust and ventilation systems, as specified. 2.04 ELECTRICAL WORK A. For all fabricated equipment, the FSEC will provide all outlets, switches, controls, service fittings and load centers. Load centers shall be complete with individual “visi-trip” circuit breakers for each device built in for forming an integral part of the unit. Furnish to Division 16 a wiring schematic including circuit breaker diagram for each required load center. B. Insure that all equipment furnished under this contract shall be so wired, wound and constructed as to conform to the characteristics of electrical and other service at the premises. C. Appliances shall be new, of manufacturers current production and furnished complete with motor drive mechanism, starters and controllers, including master switches, timers, cut-outs, reversing mechanism and other electrical equipment if and as applicable. Wiring and connection diagrams shall be furnished with electrically operated machines and for all fabricated equipment. D. Only rigid steel conduit shall be used, zinc coated where unexposed and chrome plated where exposed on fabricated equipment. All conduits/wiring shall be run concealed wherever possible. Conduit shall be continuous between outlets and from outlet to load center or pull boxes and shall enter and be secured in such a manner that each system shall be electrically continuous throughout. All conduits shall be thoroughly and substantially supported by accepted industry practices and meet all codes. E. Supply on each motor drive appliance or electrical heating unit, a suitable control switch or starter of proper type whenever such equipment is not provided with same. F. All plug-in equipment shall be plugs and neoprene cords (of adequate length) factory installed. Coordinate with Division 16 so that the receptacles provided will match the specific plugs installed as part of the plug-in equipment. Any changes of cords or plugs required in the field due to lack of coordination between Division 16 and the FSEC shall be the responsibility of the FSEC. G. All surface mounted receptacles indicated for fabricated equipment are to be Component Hardware series R58-1010 or equal aluminum outlet boxes complete with satin finish stainless steel cover and receptacles as indicated below: 13032-2
11 40 00-11
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
1. 2-pole, 3 wire grounding, 20 amp, 120V; Hubbell #5352 or equal (NEMA 5-20R) 2. 2-pole, 3 wire grounding 20 amp; 250V; Hubbell #5461 or equal (NEMA 6-20R) 3. 2-pole, 3 wire grounding 30 amp; 250V; Hubbell #9330 or equal (NEMA 6-30R) H. All built-in receptacles indicated for fabricated equipment are to be 2” x 4 ½” deep, S/S “Handy Box” tack welded to fixture and fitted with receptacle indicated above and satin finish stainless steel cover. Splash mounted receptacles to be horizontal with all others installed vertically. 30 amp, 250v receptacles required at 2⅛" deep. Coordinate installation by increasing splash depth to 2 ½”. I.
All switches, controls etc. shall be conspicuously labeled as to use with phenolic plastic name plates screwed to adjacent surfaces, with white recessed lettering on black background. Submit a sample to the Foodservice Consultant for approval as part of submittal process.
J.
All electrically heated, fabricated equipment shall be internally wired to a thermostat control and an “on/off” red neon light indicator, both to be mounted in a terminal box with a removable access panel and located outside the heated area. Wiring to be nickel-plated copper properly insulated.
K. All cold storage room electrical components shall be provided with conduit, splice boxes, switches, fittings, etc. concealed within the insulated panel at time insulation is foamed in place. Conduit shall extend up within wall panels, through ceiling panels ready for EYS fittings and final connection by Division 16. Sealing and insulation of all electrical penetrations shall be provided by the EC. L. Provide all incandescent and fluorescent tubes required for equipment under this section. Unless otherwise specified, all tubes shall be fluorescent or LED. 2.05 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT A. All specially fabricated equipment must be by one manufacturer acceptable to the Foodservice Consultant. As described in the Item Specifications the equipment shall be of uniform design and finish. All work must be completed in an approved manner to the satisfaction of the Foodservice Consultant. B. Standard details included as part of the drawings are to be considered guides to quality and scope of work involved for all custom fabricated equipment. Where shop practices indicate, alternate construction methods and component items of equal manufacturer may be substituted. It will be the responsibility of the FSEC to prove the quality of the proposed alternate methods. C. All fabricated equipment shall be fabricated in accordance with the Contract Documents and shall bear the NSF seal. D. Upon request, the fabricator shall submit evidence of completion of comparable contracts. E. No nameplates or stickers other than NSF, UL or manufacturers name shall be permitted. Any damages caused by correction shall be borne by the FSEC. F. All seams and joints shall be shop welded and soldered as the nature of the material may require. Welds to be ground smooth and polished to match original finish. Field joints in stainless steel and/or brass tops shall be welded or fused and finished as specified. Body joints shall be draw type with hairline joints. Provide extra angle bracing on each side of body joint, ⅜” diameter draw bolts, lock washers and lock nuts. G. Framework of galvanized steel shall be welded construction. Where galvanizing has been burned off, the weld shall be sealed with high grade aluminum paint. H. Metal Top Construction 1. All seams and joints shall be one-piece welded construction, reinforced on the underside with galvanized steel welded in place so tops can support heavy weights without deflection. Cross braces to be not more than 30” on center lengthwise and front to back. Fully welded intersections of channels are required. Tack welding of channel intersection will not be acceptable. 13032-2
11 40 00-12
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
2. Tabletops shall have edges turned down square 1 ½” with ¼” turn back angled downward 15 to 30 degrees. Provide alternate top edges as indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. If inverted hat sections are used in lieu of channels, close ends. 4. As indicated on the Drawings - provide sound dampening, NSF certified, non-adsorbent, hard-drying, sound deadening coating. Provide coating compounded for permanent adhesion to metal in ⅛“ (3mm) thickness that does not chop, flake or blister. I.
Wood Table Tops Table tops specified as wood top tables shall be a minimum of 1 ¾" thick, sectional, hard rock, kiln dried maple construction. Non island tables shall have 1" thick x 6" high cover maple backsplash on the back and ends unless otherwise specified. Top to be NSF approved. In lieu of maple tops, Richlite composite materials may be provided as specified.
J.
Fasteners 1. Exposed bolt heads will not be permitted on fixtures. 2. Butt joints made by riveting straps under seams and then filled with solder will not be acceptable. 3. Rivets of any kind, including pop-rivets, will not be acceptable. 4. Exposed screw heads, when necessary, shall be one of the same materials as the pieces joined and countersunk flush. 5. Fasten reinforcing to tops with studs welded to underside and capped with locking chrome acorn nuts. No exposed bolt or stud threads will be permitted on fabricated equipment.
K. Rolled Edges 1. Rolls shall be as detailed with corners bullnosed, welded, ground and polished. 2. Fabricate rolled edges as shown on the details in the Construction Documents. L. Corners Dishtables, drainboards, backsplashes and turned up edges shall be ½” or larger radius bends in all horizontal and vertical corners, coved at intersections unless specified otherwise. M. Enclosed Cabinet Bases 1. Bases shall be made of 18 gauge stainless steel sheets reinforced by forming the metal. Sides and partitions shall terminate at front in a 2” wide fully enclosed mullion and welded at all intersections. Shelves are to be removable where detailed and supported by adjustable shelf standards. Exposed ends, partitions and shelves are stainless steel. Concealed partitions to be galvanized. Vertical partitions shall be #4 finish. 2. Maximum shelf width of 30” will be acceptable. N. Legs and Crossrails 1. Equipment legs and crossrails shall be 1⅝”, 16 gauge stainless steel tubing unless otherwise specified. All welding at crossrails shall be continuous and ground smooth. Tack welded is not acceptable. Tops of legs to be fitted with Component Hardware Model A18-9912-C, 14 gauge stainless steel gussets or approved equal. Gussets are to be secured as follows: a. Whenever sectional, removable undershelves are specified, the crossrail configuration shall allow the crossrails to be extended to the wall and attached to the wall with S/S wall flanges in lieu of S/S feet. b. For sink basins, weld gussets to triangular stainless steel gusset plates, which are in turn welded to underside of sinks. c.
13032-2
For tables and dishtables, utilize gussets which shall be welded to reinforcing channel/hat channels 14 gauge or heavier.
11 40 00-13
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
d. For wood or composite tops provide welded stainless steel hat channel sections to support the top and to be held in place with stainless steel metal screws in slotted holes of flanges. 2. Bottom of legs to be fitted with Component Hardware Model A10-0851-C adjustable stainless steel foot or approved equal. Foot plug to be welded, ground and polished. When flanged feet are specified, use Component Hardware Model A10-0854-C adjustable stainless steel foot or approved equal. 3. Enclosed cabinet bases mounted on 6” high legs are to be equipped with Component Hardware Model A48-5048-C adjustable stainless steel counter legs or approved equal. O. Stainless steel shall be 18-8 Type 304, ASTM Specification A167, #4 finish, ASTM Specification A480. Sheets shall be free of warps, buckles, pits and scratches. Galvanized steel shall meet ASTM Standard A#46. Unless specified otherwise the following metal gauges shall be used: Description
Metal
Gauge
Finish
Dishtables, tables and counter tops
S/S
14
#4
Hat Channel - Unexposed
Galvanized
14
#4
Hat Channel - Exposed
S/S
14
#4
Exposed - Framework
S/S
18
#4
Exposed - Aprons, Partitions
S/S
18
#4
Unexposed - Framework
Galvanized
18
#4
Unexposed - Aprons, Partitions
Galvanized
18
#4
Shelves
S/S
16
#4
Refrigerated interiors
S/S
20
#4
Doors - Inside face
S/S
20
#4
Doors - Outside face
S/S
18
#4
Drawer Pans
S/S
20
2B
Shelf - wall or fixture mounted
S/S
16
#4
Shelf - Refrigerated areas
S/S
wire
Shelf Brackets
S/S
14
#4
Wall Flashing
S/S
20
#4
Wall Flashing tee strips
S/S
Component Hardware
Equipment Legs & Crossrails
S/S tubing
Counter Body
J64-1450 series 16
#4
As required by the Consultant, submit a certified copy of the mill analysis of materials. P. Closure Backs of all exposed fixtures, backsplashes, endsplashes, shelves, etc. shall be closed with matching materials. Q. Casters Casters shall be Jarvis and Jarvis or equal Colson Caster Corporation, Series 2, nonmarking, ball bearing NSF approved type with greaseproof neoprene or polyurethane tires. Wheels shall be 5” diameter as further described below: 1. Stem casters - Model 5-405-213G-19A. 2. Locking stem casters - Model 5-405-213G-19A including "Vertilok" brake. 3. Plate caster - Model 5-305-213G-2. 4. Locking plate caster. Model 5-305-213G-2 including "Vertilok" brake. 13032-2
11 40 00-14
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
All casters shall have a minimum capacity of 300# per caster. R. Sinks 1. Fabricated sinks shall have corners same as for table tops. One piece welded construction with bottom sloped to drains. Multiple compartments shall have double wall partitions and one-piece front panels providing continuous exterior. Use of trim bands as well as opening between compartments or applied panels will not be accepted. 2. Sinks shall be 14 gauge S/S with intersections and corners coved a minimum of ¾”. The use of soldered filleted corners will be not accepted. 3. Provide 10” backsplash for all fabricated units with sinks. 4. Provide brackets for rotary lever drain handles, attached to the bottom of the sink base with welded studs and chrome acorn nuts. 5. For sink compartment with disposer compartments, coordinate the shipment of the disposer collar/cone to the fabricator for factory installation. 6. Include fully welded 12 gauge brackets for control panels, switches, disposer controls, faucet bodies, mixing valves and outlet boxes welded to a full depth U-channel which is attached to the unit by spot-welded studs 6” on center. 7. Sink inserts shall be of same gauge as the top, integrally welded and with #4 finish where exposed. 8. Provide rotary lever drains with rear overflows. S. Drawers All drawer pans shall have all corners coved and constructed from 20 ga. S/S 20” x 20” x 5” deep. Pans to be mounted to S/S welded frame supported by Component Hardware Series S52 heavy duty slides, 200# load capacity per pair. Install at an angle of ½” in 12” to provide self-closing operation. Mount slides to a 16 ga. S/S channel type three sided housing with an open style bottom with two welded S/S cross braces. Construct the overlay drawer front of 18 ga. S/S double pan construction with a fiberboard insulation between. As shown on the Drawings, each drawer shall have a continuous top pull. Recessed drawer pulls are not acceptable. All assemblies shall include drawer stops and rubber cushion bumpers. Pan to be easily removable without the use of tools. T. Doors 1. All metal doors to be ¾” thick, double pan type reinforced and stiffened to prevent flexing and filled with sound deadening material. 2. Sliding doors shall be mounted on large ball-bearing quiet rollers in 14 ga. S/S overhead tracks and shall have bottom guides and nylon rollers. Provide travel limit device to prevent sliding doors from telescoping. The doors shall be removable without the use of tools. Slide doors shall be self-closing without assistance from the operator. 3. All hinged doors shall be flush mounted and attached with heavy duty S/S lift-off hinges. Provide cylinder locks as specified. 4. Provide recessed S/S handles and friction latches. Match door profile and door pull configuration as specified and/or shown on the Drawings. Magnetic door latches are not acceptable. U. Hardware 1. All hardware shall be of heavy duty construction and identified on shop drawings by manufacturer and model number and shall be subject to final approval by the Foodservice Consultant. 2. All hardware shall be identified with manufacturer’s name and number so that broken or wrong parts may be replaced. 3. All hardware and buy-out accessories shall be listed on submittals with a bill of materials.
13032-2
11 40 00-15
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
4. Specified locks shall be flush fitting, cylinder dead bolt locks. Component Hardware Model P30 Series or equal. The Owner shall have the ability to request the keying configuration. 5. Confirm with the Owner all glass, dish, and pan sizes, weights and other related items to be stored or dispensed from drop-in style holders and dispensers. V. Breaker Strips All ice pans, ice bins, refrigerated pans and cabinets shall be provided with breaker strips where adjoining top or cabinet faces to prevent condensation. Breaker strips shall be fastened with stainless steel counter sunk screws. Pop rivets are not acceptable. W. Insulation 1. All insulation for refrigerated areas shall be foamed in-place polyurethane. For normal temperature applications, such as fabricated undercounter refrigerators, use urethane material 2” thick, bounded at all joints. Fiberglass insulation shall not be used for any refrigerated storage areas. 2. Heated areas shall have minimum of 2” thick block-type rock wool insulation or 2” thick polyurethane. 3. Cold areas shall be minimum thickness indicated on Details and Drawings and shall be of adequate thickness to prevent condensation. Insulation shall be bonded to all surfaces. 4. At counter tops subject to heat from cooking equipment and/or refrigeration compressors, use 1” thick John Manville’s Martinite 36, or equal, to insulate underside of top. Martinite material shall be added between freezer or refrigerator and 14 gauge stainless steel top. X. Refrigerated Areas 1. All reach-in refrigerators and freezers with remote refrigeration systems shall be complete with factory installed thermostatic expansion valves at the evaporator. 2. Fabricated compartments, refrigerated shelves, plates, etc. shall be provided with a 20 gauge steel box to house expansion valves when valve is remote from the evaporator. Install in base of fixtures or in a concealed position. 3. All fabricated refrigerators shall be provided with an adequately sized refrigeration system in accordance with Energy Independence and Security Act of 2009 / H. R. 6 and ASHRAE standards. Direct expansion type refrigeration system shall be utilized with replaceable type vinyl coated or S/S evaporator coils. Verify adequate ventilation for aircooled refrigeration system and service access for all units. All units shall have ruby colored on/off switch for each unit. 4. All refrigerated compartments shall be fitted with dial type exterior thermometers with chrome-plated bezels. Thermometers shall be adjustable and shall be calibrated after installation. 5. The entire perimeter including the doors shall have 2” urethane insulation and continuous plastic breaker strips. Adjustable S/S shelving and Component Hardware or approved equal hardware. All cavities shall include incandescent light with dooractivated light switch including light bulb. The bottom of the unit shall be sloped to a 1” drain. Thresholds shall be S/S. Infitting doors shall include self-closing door hinges, edge-mounted magnetic gaskets, cylinder locks if specified. Y. Breath Guards 1. Breath guards shall be ¼” Plexiglas with Keil Model 137D-1010-1251 stainless steel trim on exposed edges. 2. Breath guard brackets on display and self-service shelves shall be Keil Model 15301010-1251 or similar custom built bracket with 16 gauge stainless steel bodies. 3. Breath guard brackets on serving shelves and other enclosed areas shall be Keil Model 1536-1010-1251 or similar custom built brackets with 18 gauge stainless steel bodies. 4. Breath guard brackets shall be Keil Model 1572 or Capital with 21” high posts. 13032-2
11 40 00-16
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
5. Shielded lights shall be installed below each shelf. All wiring for light shall be concealed. 6. Exposed end/s shall include full height end panels. 7. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, King FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select). Provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1, manufactured by horizontal (roller hearth) process and ¼" (6mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated. Provide exposed safety edges, if any, seamed before tempering. Z. Electrical Panels / Components 1. Where UL Listed equipment assemblies with electrical circuit breaker panels are specified for custom fabricated equipment, the equipment shall be fabricated in a UL Listed shop and meet the requirements of UL 165. Provide certifying label for all UL approved work. 2. Field wiring and UL field certification shall not be acceptable. Identify all circuits by typewritten index. Provide all panel specs with breakers and spare breakers. 3. Internal wiring specified for custom fabricated equipment shall be identified with tags indicating item number and electrical characteristics. Furnish wiring diagrams. All wiring shall run in rigid conduits, zinc coated where concealed and chrome or S/S where exposed. Wire wet areas in Sealtite Type EF conduit or equal. Provide conduit raceways where possible. NEMA34 standards shall apply to all splash areas. Final connections by EC. 4. Exposed junction boxes for switches and receptacles shall be S/S or cast aluminum Bell boxes and shall be furnished with S/S cover plates. Provide NEMA #4 water proof boxes for wet areas. All wiring between boxes shall be in rigid conduit. 5. When electrical load centers / electrical panels are specified, provide compartment with electrical subpanel which shall be pre-wired in conduit concealed in cabinet body construction and connected to all electrical components built into or set upon the counter. Electrical sub-panel shall be UL / ETL / CSA listed, three phase, four (4) wire circuit breaker type with a ground buss main breaker and individual breakers for each serviced load. Buss shall be copper and the circuit breakers shall be the molded case, bolt-on type with thermo magnetic quick-make, quick-break trip. Multi-pole circuit breakers shall have an internal trip bar. The circuit breakers shall have an interrupting capacity of 10,000 amperes at 120 volts and there shall be a separate breaker for each connected load. Each breaker shall be sized for 125% of the connected load and a minimum of two (2) extra, single pole, 20 amp circuit breakers shall be provided. The loads shall be connected through the breakers in a phased sequence to balance the load on each phase. 2.06 ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK EQUIPMENT A. The following general requirements shall govern the construction of millwork built fixtures, except where otherwise noted. Work shall be performed by skilled mechanics of the trade and shall be of the highest quality throughout, in such a manner as to fulfill the intent of the Contract Documents. All work shall conform to custom grade, as defined in the latest edition of the AWI Quality Standards, unless detailed as a higher grade. Perform architectural woodwork in accordance with “Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards” published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). Fabricator shall have a demonstrated ability in fabricating woodwork items similar in type and quality to those required for this project. 1. All fixtures shall be made by one manufacturer and assembled in a single, complete unit as the dimensions will permit shipment to and installation of at the building. Large pieces requiring sectional construction shall have their parts accurately fitted and aligned with all others, and provided with ample screws, glue and bolt blocks, tongues, grooves and splines, dowels, mortises and tenons, screws, bolts or suitable means of concealed fastening, as required to render the work substantial, rigid and permanently secured in proper position to each related section. 2. Sufficient additional material shall be allowed to permit accurate scribing to walls, floor and related work, and due allowance made whenever possible for such shrinkage as 13032-2
11 40 00-17
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
may develop after installation. Single and sectional units shall be provided with adequate cleating, blocking, crating and other forms of protection as required to preclude damage during shipping and handling. 3. Framing and blocking members shall be assembled with bolted and screwed connections and should be secured to the structural backing with cinch, expansion screws or toggle bolts, as required; spaced and installed to insure ample strength and rigidity. Rails and stiles shall be mortised and tenoned, work neatly mitered and membered, all butt joints made flush and smooth, and all permanent joints made up with water resistant glue. All fixtures shall be assembled without face screws or nails, except where it may be necessary to attach items. All face screws or nails which are necessary shall be counter sunk and plastic wood or wood plugs used to cover head, and the plug neatly touched up. The heads of all screws used in any assembly shall be counter sunk below the surface. 4. The core material shall be marine grade, 7 ply substrate or MEDEX exterior resin medium density fiberboard substrate; conform to ANSI A208.2.3.3.4, as manufactured by Medite Corporation (Phone 503-773-2522) or equal by Norbord MDF-MR (Phone 800-367-6338). All substrate materials shall be LEED certified and meet the LEED requirements for the project. 5. Back sheet shall be NEMA LD .020” thick, Type V, Grade 91 plastic laminate; apply on all surfaces not covered with plastic laminate; coordinate color with exposed surface color; comply with NSF Standard 35. B. Construction / Joints Follow AWI Premium Grade Standards; factory assembled parts and prefinished; flush type fronts and overlapping ends; ¾” core material base cabinet, end and dividers with corner joints between framed members fully lock-jointed, glued and screwed; dado and glue cabinet backs into sides and bottom; scribe counter top and backsplashes; secure countertops to base cabinet from underside; fully cure surfaces prior to installation. Mortise and tenon, spline, dowel and/or pin lock and glue work to avoid use of nails wherever practical. Make butt joints with an approved device for prevention of separation of members. Blind nail and conceal. C. Plastic Laminate 1. Plastic laminate shall be bonded to all exposed surfaces with Urac 185 adhesive or equal, to minimum ¾” fir faced, close grain marine grade plywood applied under high pressure. In accordance with AWI 1600A-G-1, use horizontal grade on all exposed surfaces, vertical grade on semi-exposed surfaces and sealed paint on all concealed surfaces. Reject plastic laminate or plastic backing shall be used to prevent warping, unless otherwise specified. All edges shall be carefully sanded to smooth finish, removing burns, nicks and cur marks. Plastic laminate joints shall be finished without wavy and unsightly joints. Joints need not be mitered except as specified. Hand sand edges to a slight chamfer. 2. Top sheet shall be placed on and over finished edge. Ease exposed edge to overlap sheet. Use largest sheet possible in order to minimize seams. 3. Coved backsplashes shall be a minimum of ¼”. Endsplashes may have a square intersection with tabletops unless specified otherwise. 4. Plastic laminated shelves shall be laminated with horizontal grade laminate on the side and vertical grade at all edges. D. Doors, Hinged Hinged doors shall be fabricated of ¾” thick marine grade plywood with hardwood full perimeter edge with plastic laminate on face and self-edging on exposed sides. Door hinges, pulls and catches shall be supplied and detailed. Provide Grass 1200, 176 degree opening concealed casework hinges or equal by Blum or Amerock. Door catches shall be Component Hardware Model M22-2420 for non-magnetic and Model M30-2400, heavy duty, self-aligning for magnetic.
13032-2
11 40 00-18
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
Utilize EPCO Model MC 4023.5 or as specified in the Item Specifications. Door locks shall be Component Hardware Model P30 Series; stainless faced; master keyed as specified. E. Doors, Sliding Sliding doors shall be fabricated of solid core marine grade plywood with hardwood edges and constructed similar to hinged doors. Doors shall be mounted on E-Z Glides track. Doors shall be removable without the use of tools. Rubber stops shall be provided concealed in end stile or mullion. F. Access Panels Access panels shall be fabricated of ¾” nominal thick hardwood and shall be fabricated as a door. Each access panel shall be provided with 2 (two) magnetic catches at top and 2 (two) 3/16” positioning pins at bottom. G. Drawers Drawers shall have dovetail construction, well glued and blocked. Fronts shall be not less than ¾” thick hardwood. Sides and back shall be ½” thick fabricated of Birch, Maple, or Sycamore except where extension slides are used, in which the side shall be ⅝” thick. Bottom shall be milled into fronts and sides. Drawers shall be provided with suitable stops. Provide pulls as detailed or specified. The inside surfaces of all drawers shall receive one coat of penetrating primer and one coat of glass lacquer. H. Painted Finishes Painted finishes shall have exposed surfaces free from defects and blemishes that would show after being finished, regardless of grade specified. All surfaces specified to receive a paint or enamel finish shall receive one crosscoat of lacquer type undercoat. The undercoat shall be of appreciably different color from that of the finish coat, and of proper ground color with relation to the finish coat. After the undercoat has been thoroughly dried, surfaces shall be sanded smooth and two coats of enamel shall be applied. Back painting shall be provided for all cabinet and woodwork prior to installation. I.
Interior & Wall Shelves Interior shelves shall be adjustable with flush routed-in shelf standards. Wall shelves to be fabricated as specified and as per “Standard Detail”.
J.
Fire Retarding Where required by code, all required materials are to be treated with fire retardant chemicals to achieve the required flame spreading performance rating. Retardant chemicals must be a type approved by local authorities.
2.07 SOLID SURFACE A. Solid surface material shall be Formica or approved equal product in the thickness stated in the Item Specifications. Joint adhesive and sealant shall be of the same manufacturer of solid surface materials. B. Provide silicone, epoxy or polyester adhesive of type recommended by manufacturer for application and conditions of use. C. Install drop-in equipment in a manner that will allow for extreme temperature changes and as not to affect the integrity of the surrounding materials. D. Fabricators must have a minimum of five years experience in fabricating solid polymer materials; experience must be based on foodservice projects of similar size and complexity. E. All solid surface materials shall carry the NSF seal. 2.08 COLD STORAGE ROOMS A. All prefabricated cold storage rooms shall be manufactured by one manufacturer and installed by a factory supervised installer. All refrigerated rooms shall conform to the Energy Independence and Security Act of 2009 (EISA) / H. R. 6. B. Interior finished ceiling height shall be 8’ - 6” unless otherwise specified. 13032-2
11 40 00-19
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
C. Materials 1. Insulation shall be UL / ETL rated, non-burning urethane, foamed in place, not frothed or rigid board-foam. a. Insulation shall be fluorocarbon filled (F-11) 95% closed cell content, nominal density of 2.0 pounds + 0.1 per cubic foot. Dimensional stability shall be from -45 degrees F to 200 degrees F. b. Insulation shall have a thermal conductivity (K-factor) not to exceed (0.14 BTU/hour/square foot) as tested on ASTM C-177, at 75 degrees F mean temperature and an overall coefficient of heat transfer factor (U) not to exceed 0.029. c.
Insulation shall be rated as self extinguishing and fire retardant type. Flammability characteristics per ASTM E-84 shall be less than 25 flame spread and less than 450 smoke density, in accordance with U.B.C. Section 1717. Insulation shall meet and comply with the 1989 Montreal Protocol Agreement for reduced CFC content.
d. Classification; Class 1 Uniform Building Code, U.B.C. Part Viii, Section 4201-4203. Class A National Fire protection Association, NFPA Number 101, “Life Safety Code”. e. Fire hazard classification shall be in accordance with ASTME-84 (UL723) and have a UL label. 2. Aluminum sheets used as a fascia for wall and ceiling panels shall be stucco aluminum not less than 0.040” thick. 3. Stainless steel sheets used as a fascia for wall and ceiling panels shall be 20 gauge. Other stainless steel shall be the gauge specified. All stainless steel shall be Type 18-8, Type 304, #4 finish unless otherwise specified. 4. Galvanized steel sheets used as a fascia for wall and ceiling panels shall be prime finish, not less than 22 gauge complying with ASTM 525 and with G90 coating. D. Panel Construction 1. Panels shall consist of precision die format metal pans with ½” to ¾” flanged perimeter, foamed in place urethane insulation between interior and exterior pans, thoroughly checked for gauge and accuracy. Panels shall be of same size wherever possible and shall be interchangeable with panels of like size. Metal pans shall be treated on the inside with a preparation coating of bonding agent to ensure a stable adhesion with the chemical bonding capabilities of the insulation. 2. Wall and ceiling panels shall be a minimum of 4” thick and contain 100% foamed in place insulation and shall not have any internal wood or metal structural members. To ensure tight fitting joints, all panel edges shall have foamed in place urethane tongues and grooves and a flexible vinyl gasket foamed in place on the interior and exterior of all edges. 3. Panels shall be rigidly coupled by a cam action hooked locking device. Locking device shall be foamed in place, a minimum of three locking devices per panel, maximum 36” on center. Locking device shall be accessible from the inside to facilitate installation in confined areas and shall be provided with press-fit caps to close wrench holes. Joints between panels shall be sealed at interior and exterior edges with a PVC gasket and an odorless nontoxic, synthetic polymerized sealant, to maintain continuity. a. Wall panels up to 8’ 0” high shall have a minimum of three (3) locking devices between each panel, located at the center, lower corner and upper corner. Panels above 8’ 0” high shall have a minimum of four (4) locking devices. b. Ceiling panels shall have a minimum of two (2) locking devices between ceiling panels and at wall panels, located at each corner of the wall panel. Ceiling panel joints shall be off-set from wall panel joints. c.
Pre-fabricated floor panels shall have a minimum of two (2) locking devices between each floor panel and at wall panels, located at each corner of the wall panel.
4. All interior vertical corners shall be coved with a ½” radius having an NSF approval. 13032-2
11 40 00-20
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
5. Exterior panels, interior partitions, corner panels, ceiling panels and “T” intersection panels shall be matching construction. 6. Section lock parts, joints between floor panels and floor and wall panels shall be filled with silicone sealant. 7. Interior/exterior ramps with non-slip treads shall be furnished where specified and/or shown on drawings. 8. Every panel shall be UL, NSF and Factory Mutual approved and bear a certifying label. E. Metal Finishes 1. Interior ceiling shall be 26 gauge galvalume with baked white painted surface. 2. Exterior floor, ceiling and unexposed exterior wall shall be 22 gauge galvalume steel. 3. Interior walls and exposed exteriors shall be 20 gauge stainless steel. F. Wall / Ceiling Support System 1. Ceiling panels shall have a maximum deflection of 1/240 of the span under uniform loading of twenty (20) pounds per square foot. When the ceiling panels require a support system, the Manufacturer shall submit details and structural calculations to an engineer for approval prior to fabrication. A copy of the approved submittal shall be forwarded to Owner and Foodservice Consultant. 2. An indoor ceiling panel support system, when required, shall be finished and installed using a hanger wire network attached to hanger brackets, designed to engage with the female locking pins imbedded within the roof panel foam core, space 4’ 0” on center. G. Floor Types and Conditions Floor construction as stated below or as specified in the Item Specifications: 1. TYPE I – Insulated Depressed Building Floor with finished floor to be as follows: a. The floor shall be constructed at the job site in a 7” deep depressed slab by the GC. b. Cold storage room wall panels shall extend down into the bottom of the depression. GC to provide two (2) 2” thick layers of rigid board form urethane with staggered joints in depression over 6 mil polyurethane vapor barrier, installed after the walls are in place. c.
On top of floor insulation provide a protective covering of 15 pounds felt. Overlap joints 6”. Flash up side to the height of wall base for the finished floor.
d. Coordinate the installation of the topping and finished flooring with the GC. FSEC is responsible to protect the interior surface with adequate ventilation of the space during installation and cleaning of the finished flooring. e. Metal panel surfaces as described for TYPE II – Pre-Fabricated floor installations. 2. TYPE II – Pre-Fabricated Floor to be as follows: a. The floor shall be pre-fabricated metal clad, foamed in place urethane insulated panels. Floor panel construction and insulation to match that of wall and ceiling panels. Floor panels shall be fully coved with a minimum of ½” radius. b. Pre-fabricated metal panel on the surfaces of the insulated panels are as follows unless otherwise specified: 1. For exposed wearing flooring: 16 gauge stainless steel with additional concealed reinforcement fabricated to withstand loads of 5,000 pounds per square foot utilizing a minimum of a 12” on-center structural grid reinforced construction to provide the required support. Utilize 3/16” thick S/S plate on top of structural grid. NO WOOD UNDERLAYMENT may be used in the floor construction. The floor sections shall include an integral 36” deep reinforced ramp with non-skid strips as shown. Coordinate all shop drawings and submittals to match. Floor surface shall be fabricated as an NSF approved floor surface. Provide 4” x 6” long non-skid, adhesive strips on 6” centers in traffic aisles as manufactured by 3-M Company. Install as per the manufacturer’s instructions to provide a safe walking surface. 13032-2
11 40 00-21
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
H. Door and Door Frames 1. Entrance door shall have a net door opening of 36” x 78” and shall be flush-type with interior and exterior finish matching that specified for the wall panels. Other door sizes shall be as specified, hinged as indicated on the Drawings. Provide heated relief ports in freezers and non-heated in refrigerators, located in exposed wall for accessibility. 2. Doors, door panels, door opening for bi-parting or sliding doors shall be UL Listed and equipped with the following: a. Magnetic gasket, Posi-Seal door closure and latch. Provide inside safety release to prevent entrapment of personnel within the box. b. Self-closing mechanism with three Standard-Keil Model 2838 Series or approved Kason model, strap camlift hinges and with NSF approved double sweep gaskets. c.
Doorjamb of extruded aluminum with thermal break. An isolated, low wattage heater strip covered by magnetically attracted S/S shall be fitted into jamb. Strip shall provide perfect sealing of magnetic gasket and prevent frost and condensation buildup.
d. Fluorescent vapor-proof light, pilot light switch and rigid conduit between switch box and outlet box. Concealed wiring shall be standard on each entrance door section. e. Heavy gauge S/S threshold with non-skid stripping heater wire shall continue beneath the threshold. f.
Solid-state digital thermometer to indicate inside temperature. Extend the probe to the furthest distance from the door.
g. Curtron Model M-200 strip curtain having 6” wide strips for each doorway and / or opening including all swing and bi-parting doors. h. Heated viewport approximately 14” wide x 24” high, minimum triple Thermopane glass for all refrigerated storage areas. Viewport wiring to be concealed within the door, complete with flex cable to recessed splice box with door section. i.
Temperature alarms as follows: Modularm Model 75LC-IP-1 four digit display with a temperature range of -40 degrees to 193 degrees F including battery back-up. Recess the alarm housing adjacent to the door housing, not more that 6’ from an entrance door. Extend the probe a minimum of 6’ from the entrance door. Alarms to be completely recessed with conduit running within the wall panel, installed and set to sound at +35 degrees F and +50 degrees F for the cooler; +15 degrees F for the freezer. ALL INTERWIRING WITHIN THE BOX FOR THE TEMPERATURE AND ENTRAPMENT ALARMS IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE FSEC. Each door shall be monitored by a Modularm Model IP-1 illuminated push button with the DAC-55 box providing an entrapment alarm system mounted inside of each box, adjacent to the door. The alarm button shall be red in color and shall be connected to the Modularm system to provide a visual and audible alarm annunciation indicating the entrapment has been indicated. The alarm shall include contact points for connection with building systems.
I.
Provide the following accessories for each refrigerated storage compartment: 1. Factory-installed 16 gauge S/S kick plates on each side of the door, up to a height of 36” AFF. 2. Provide 18” wide x 36” high, 3/16” diamond treadplate on both sides of the door on the interior and the exterior for a total of four pieces, installed. 3. Trim the refrigerated compartment to the wall at the exposed vertical junctures with walls and columns. 4. Furnish removable closure panels to enclose the space between the top of the box and the finished ceiling. Panels to be fabricated to match adjoining surfaces. Closure panels to be lift out type with side turned in to form a pan for added strength. At ceilings, securely fasten a channel and at face of cold storage room, securely fasten an angle for panel to slip into. Channel and angle to match panel material.
13032-2
11 40 00-22
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
5. Corner guards on the exterior outside corners shall be 4” x 4” x 48”, 14 gauge stainless steel secured to the wall panels with a full bed of contact adhesive. No fasteners shall be used. J.
Light Fixtures and Switches 1. Quantity and type of light fixtures shall be as indicated on Electrical Rough-in plan. Only fluorescent light or LED fixtures are allowed. 2. Fluorescent light fixtures shall be T-8 style, 48” two-lamp type fixtures, for wet location. Provide cool white lamps, with enclosed insulation jacket. Each fixture shall be provided with a -20 degree F G.E. 8E3736 ballast. 3. Light Emitting Diodes (LED) light fixtures shall be either 24" or 48" long as shown on the Drawings and as specified below: a. Keil Model LED48X6215W, 48" long LED light fixtures with two - 15w lamps. b. Keil Model LED24X418W, 24" lone LED light fixture with 1-8W lamp. c. Operating range for the light fixtures shall be -40 degree F to 104 degree F. 4. Light switches shall be three way or four way where applicable, AC, pre-switch, mounted in recessed “FS” boxes with gray Hypolan, weatherproof plate, press switch cover and unbreakable red plastic pilot light lens constantly lit on interior with indication on exterior. 5. Cold storage rooms with doors at each end shall have three way switches on the exterior and four way on the interior. 6. Light switches shall be factory mounted on the latch side of doors and pre-wired with rigid conduit and wiring run within the wall panel, terminated in a vapor tight splice box mounted on the inner wall near the ceiling. Manufacturer shall provide a 1 ¼” diameter hole in ceiling panel with a loose escutcheon through which Division 16 shall make final connections. FSEC shall coordinate that requirements for sealing penetrations from light fixtures have been sealed to prohibit any moisture migration into the refrigerated area or light fixtures.
K. Door Fan Switch 1. Door fan switch shall be provided for each low-temperature cold storage room to shut off the evaporator fan motors when the door is opened. 2. Door fan switch shall be factory mounted on the door jamb and pre-wired with rigid conduit and wiring within the wall panels to a splice box located on the interior near the ceiling. Manufacturer shall provide a 1 ¼” hole in the ceiling panel with a loose escutcheon through which Division 16 shall make interconnection to the evaporator coil(s) motors. L. Utility Penetrations 1. Coordinate openings in ceiling and wall panel to accommodate all electrical, refrigeration and drain lines. Coordinate installation of required sealant to prevent moisture from collecting in light fixtures. 2. Provide sleeves for refrigeration piping, electrical conduit and condensate piping whenever it passes through an insulated wall panel. Provide sufficient quantity of stainless steel escutcheons or proper sizes to trim all interior and exposed exterior penetrations. M. Corner Guards 1. Corner guards on the exterior outside corners shall be 4” x 4” x 48”, 16 gauge stainless steel secured to wall panels with a full bed of contact adhesive. 2. Rub rails for all exposed surfaces, mounted at 8” AFF. N. Identification Signs At the exterior of each cold storage room provide permanently affixed, engraved plastic name plates with the maximum ¾” high letters and the number identifying each cold storage room. Minimum sign size is 2” x 12”. Confirm text for each sign before fabrication. Name plate to be mounted with adhesive below respective digital thermometer alarm. 13032-2
11 40 00-23
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
2.09 REMOTE REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS A. All remote refrigeration systems shall be provided by one contractor, unless otherwise specified. B. All systems shall comply with the requirements of the Energy Independence and Security Act of 2009 / H. R. 6. C. Verify the requirements of and provide any and all additional refrigeration specialty(s) or components(s) required or recommended by the manufacturer for the proposer operation under the specified operation conditions and locations of each system specified. D. Compressor and Condensing Units 1. Units shall be factory assembled complete semi-hermetic air or water cooled condenser as specified, high-low pressure controls, suction accumulator on low temperature systems, sight glass, liquid line dryer, suction and discharge service valves, liquid receiver with inlet and outlet valves and electrical control panel. The electrical control panel shall be furnished with magnetic motor starter, defrost timer clock, and contactors in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation. 2. Refrigeration systems shall be installed by a knowledgeable, skilled and where applicable licensed refrigeration contractor who shall perform the work according to ASHRAE and ASRE standards and the conditions of the Contract Documents. Systems shall be installed, charged, started, tested and fully operational. 3. Capacities shall be based on the following: a. Compartment temperature and evaporator temperature greater than 32 degrees, 18 to 20 hours of operation. b. Compartment temperature greater than 32 degrees and evaporating temperature less than 32 degrees, 16 hours of operation. c.
Compartment temperature and evaporator temperature less than 32 degrees, 18 hours of operation.
d. Systems shall be designed to operate not more than 18 hours per day in a 100 degree ambient condensing temperature. Walk-in compartment shall operate at 35 degrees F with an evaporator at 10 degrees T.D. Walk-in freezer compartments shall operate at -10 degrees F with a 10 degree T.D. at -20 degree suction temperature. Suction lines shall be sized for maximum pressure drop of 2# on medium temperature and 1# on low temperature systems. 4. Condensing units shall be mounted on a steel base to effect a quiet operation. All rotating parts to be carefully balanced for minimum vibration and lubricated with forced or splash system. Receiver shall be sized for a complete pump down of the system and shall be shell type with fusible plug. E. Compressor Racks 1. Racks shall be of the number of tiers and quantity to accommodate the number of condensing units specified for each rack assembly and allow for service clearance and ventilation. 2. Racks shall be fabricated with structural steel of size, rigidity and quantity to properly support the equipment to be installed on the rack. 3. Racks shall be all welded construction with welds ground smooth. 4. After the completion of fabrication, the rack shall be cleaned, primed and painted with top quality oil based enamel, two coats. 5. Racks shall be pre-wired to a circuit breaker panel requiring a single point of electrical connection and preplumbed to a header (when specified water cooled) for single point water and waste connection. All units shall be UL Listed. F. Coils and Cooling Units 1. Units shall be direct expansion type of size and design to affect required temperature, humidity and to suit application intent with expansion valves factory installed. 13032-2
11 40 00-24
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
2. Units shall be hung from the ceiling with ½” nylon rods with plated steel nuts and washers. Rods shall extend through the ceiling to bracing adequate for the suspended weight. Bracing shall be furnished as required; penetrations shall be sealed and trimmed with escutcheon plates. 3. Units shall be installed tight to the ceiling. All installations adjacent to wall shall be set out a minimum distance conforming to manufacturers directions, to ensure proper air circulation and performance. 4. Units with fan and blower and motor shall have thermal overload protection. 5. Freezer coils to be 4 fins per inch. 6. Coils shall include factory installed T-stats solenoids, thermostats and TX valves. All freezer coils shall include adjustable defrost termination, time initiated and temperature terminated and fan delay starters, Ranco F25-107 or equal. 7. Defrost cycle shall be provided on both medium and low temperature systems. Provide defrost systems on evaporator coils that are scheduled to operate at 35 degrees F and below. Freezer defrost cycles shall be time initiated and temperature terminated. 8. Locations of coils shall be coordinated with shelving and drain lines. 9. All coils for fabricated refrigerators and freezers shall be installed for accessibility and replacement. G. Penetration Sleeves and Plates 1. All required wall and floor penetrations shall be provided by the FSEC. Service line penetrations of insulation to accommodate electrical conduit, refrigeration and drain lines, shall be limited to a minimum with service stubbed through insulation to locations predetermined by respective divisions. 2. Where service lines penetrate insulated wall and ceiling, the opening shall be lined with PVC sleeve, packed with caulking, before trimming with escutcheon plates. 3. All exposed ends of sleeves, both inside and outside of the compartments, are to be trimmed with 24 gauge stainless steel escutcheon plates, furnished as blanks in which respective work division shall cut required line holes and install. H. Refrigerant Piping 1. Copper tubing for refrigeration piping shall conform to ASHRAE, ASTM or National Board of Fire Underwriters standard specifications whichever is greater. All piping shall be Type “L” ACR hard copper or cleaned and sealed soft type “L” tubing, dry seal or equal as indicated. Forged or wrought copper fitting with sweat soldered joints shall be used. 2. Tubing shall be cut only with a tube cutter and sized with a sizing tool. 3. Piping shall be exposed to view as required by the standard safety code for mechanical refrigeration. 4. The liquid and suction lines from condensing units to coils shall be sized and run as shown on the submittals approved for this project. 5. Exposed piping run with cold storage rooms shall be finished with aluminum paint. 6. For exposed areas, accessible furred ceiling spaces and in wall or excavated trench type installations, hard copper tubing shall be used. Exposed tubing shall be run in a manner to preclude damage by activities in the area; or shall be protected by conduit, furnished and installed as part of this contract. Conduit shall have water evacuated and both ends completely sealed. 7. For piping runs in conduit through inaccessible areas, such as under slab on grade, soft copper tubing shall be used. In lieu of large piping in conduit, especially vertical runs, random line sizes may be used, carefully fabricated and assembled to ensure equal pressure drop. 8. Ends of lines shall be capped to prevent contamination and open only at time of final connection. 13032-2
11 40 00-25
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
9. Suction lines shall be sized for a maximum pressure drop from evaporator to compressor of 3 lbs. For high and medium temperature systems, and of 1 lb. for low temperature systems and shall allow gas velocities of not less than 750 FPM in horizontal runs and 1500 FPM in vertical risers. Liquid lines shall be sized for a maximum pressure drop of 3 lbs. from receiver to evaporator. 10. Tubing runs shall be graded or pitched to prevent trapping of oil. Suction lines shall pitch a minimum of ½” for every 10’ of pipe run back to the compressor. I.
Joints and Connections 1. Fittings shall be long radius wrought copper only as manufactured by Mueller Brass Company. 2. Vertically run suction lines shall have oil “P” traps constructed of two (2) 90 degree ells or one (1) piece Mueller “P” trap, of the same size as the vertical lines. 3. ⅛” NPT by ¼ fl. half union for all suction and discharge service valves with ¼ fl. cap. 4. Reduction in piping size shall be made with a manufactured reducer coupling. 5. Flare nuts shall be short forged or frost proof. 6. All surfaces to be joined must be prepared and cleaned. When soldering stop or solenoid valves, wrap valves with moist fabric to absorb excessive heat. Stop valves shall be partly open. When soldering expansion valves or pressure regulating valves, remove power assembly, if necessary, to prevent damage by excessive heat. 7. Copper joints shall be made with Handy & Marmon “sil-fos” brazing, “Phoson 15” allow, “Silvaloy 15” or equal; melting point of 1185-1350 degrees F; silver content of not less than 15%. 8. Copper to brass joints shall be made with Handy & Marmon “Easy Flo 45” brazing allow “Silvaloy 45”, Mueller 122 or equal; melting point of 1125-1145 degrees F, silver content not less than 45%.
J.
Hangers and Supports 1. For all piping not run in conduit, provide adjustable hangers, anchors or straps as required. Hanger spacing shall not exceed 8’ -0”. 2. Insulated copper piping shall be provided with approved type sleeves at hanger points. 3. All insulated copper piping shall be insulated from supports by means of felt wrapping or with “Trisolater” by Semco or approved equal. 4. Vertical piping shall be supported at intervals with spring type hangers of substantial spacing to support the pipe. All horizontal pipe runs connected to vertical risers must be adequately supported. 5. For suspended conduit, support shall be by means of hanger permitting screw adjustments. Sufficient hangers shall be used to provide support, allow expansion and limit vibration. 6. The slope of the suction lines shall allow for adequate return of the oil to the compressors based on factory recommendations.
K. Piping Sleeves 1. Provide sleeves through wall which allow for fully insulated lines. Extend sleeves entirely through wall and dress each end with a chromium plated wall plate neatly fitted against the wall, securely fastened and sealed in place. All sleeves through walls shall be of standard weight steel pipe. 2. Piping lines and sleeves at wall or floor penetrations shall be fully sealed and caulked and made vermin proof at all locations. L. Piping Insulation 1. Suction lines run in conduit shall be insulated according to ambient and humidity conditions to prevent condensation and freezing. 2. Refrigeration suction lines outside of refrigerated compartments, not run in conduit, shall be insulated back to the compressor with Armstrong Armaflex AP foamed plastic 13032-2
11 40 00-26
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
insulation or as determined by code. Thickness of material shall suit service, ambient and humidity conditions, to prevent condensation, minimum thickness 1”. 3. Cold storage room freezer drain lines extended through adjacent cooler compartment shall be installed with 1” minimum thickness of Armstrong Armaflex AP foamed plastic installation to prevent condensation. Carefully seal end of insulation tight against cooler wall surface. 4. Piping for cooling water services or refrigeration piping exposed to external ambient temperature and / or outdoor conditions shall be installed with minimum 22 ga. thickness of S/S jackets or Armstrong Armaflex AP formed plastic jackets over the insulation for complete protection of the insulation. Paint exterior insulation with Armaflex paint to match building exterior. 5. Thickness of material shall suit service, ambient and humidity conditions to prevent condensation. 6. Joints shall be sealed with Armstrong 520 adhesive. Insulation shall be continuous through clamps. Provide additional insulation where suction lines must be run 12” or less of water or underground water lines. Provide additional insulation to compensate for insulation compression at clamps or other methods of securing. 7. Refrigeration submittals shall confirm with the ambient temperatures for each area that refrigeration piping will travel through and state insulation size. M. Valves and Accessories 1. All valves and controls shall be standard weight and suitable for service purpose intended, and subject to approval by the Foodservice Consultant. 2. Each system shall include condensing unit with standard valving, refrigerant piping, refrigerant, evaporator(s), liquid and suction lines isolation valves with 5’ -0” of evaporators, thermostatic expansion valve for evaporator, heat exchanger, filter-fryer, liquid lines solenoids for Cold Storage Rooms and liquid indicator. 3. Vibration eliminators on compressor suction and discharge lines, size same as piping, as manufactured by Anaconda. 4. Refrigerant shut-off valves shall be as manufactured by Henry or Superior Valve Company. Valves shall be placed in liquid line at each condensing unit and in liquid line for each evaporator. 5. Expansion valves shall be Sporlan or equal, provided factory installed in the liquid line at the evaporator. 6. Each liquid line sight shall be Sporlan or equal “see all” moisture and liquid indicator and shall be full line size. 7. Solenoid valves shall be Sporlan line voltage, manual lift stem type, to operate at maximum of 2 lbs. Pressure drop across the valve. Valves shall be full line size, using silver solder connection as applicable. A liquid line solenoid, normally closed, shall be used with temperature control for each Cold Storage Room compartment on a system. 8. Include a suction line filter with access valve adjacent to compressor. Filter shall be a Superior “F” series or equal. 9. Time clocks shall be Paragon. N. Drain Lines 1. PC to provide Type “L” copper coil drain lines extended to exterior of refrigerated compartments over floor sinks / open site drains with “S” traps at termination ends. 2. Provide clean out “T” and cap at each change of direction in the lines. Provide individual drain lines for each coil unless otherwise specified. Drain lines shall be run tight to the refrigeration compartment walls with minimum pitch of 2” per foot. Provide union in drain line by coil for ease of removal. 3. Drain lines on the exterior of refrigerated compartment shall be covered by 16 ga. S/S pipe chase/cover. The S/S covers shall extend from the ceiling to the floor and 13032-2
11 40 00-27
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
completely cover the piping, condensate line trap and condensate hub drain. necessary, scribe the covers to cove base of the floor system.
As
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY AND INSTALLATION A. Delivery 1. The equipment shall be delivered and installed on schedule. Coordinate all work with the General Contractor and other divisions as required. 2. Extra charges resulting from special handling or shipment shall be paid by the FSEC if sufficient time was allowed in placing factory orders to ensure normal shipment. B. Installation 1. A competent superintendent or project manager, representing the FSEC, shall be present during progress of FSEC work. The work shall be accomplished so as not to delay the project construction schedule, interfere or conflict with the work being performed by other contractors. Work shall be coordinated and integrated to prevent conflict of work necessitating changes to work already completed. Should conflicts occur, notify the Owner for their coordination in its resolution. 2. Verify all required field dimensions before fabrication. 3. Include all alterations to walls, floors and ceilings necessary for work, except otherwise shown or specified, accomplished in a manner satisfactory to the Architect and the Foodservice Consultant. Holes through structural beams shall be prohibited unless written approval has been granted by the Architect. 4. Cut holes in equipment for pipes, drains, electrical outlets, etc. as required for this installation. Work shall conform to the highest standards of workmanship and shall include welded sleeves, collars, ferrules or escutcheons. 5. Repair all damage to the premises as a result of this installation. 6. Remove daily all debris from the site related to this installation. 7. Trim shall not be an acceptable substitute for accuracy and neatness. When trim is required and accepted by the Consultant in lieu of rejection of items of equipment, it shall be the FSEC's responsibility to provide same at no additional cost. 8. Space between all equipment to wall, ceiling, floors, masonry pads, and adjoining units not portable and with enclosed bodies shall be completely sealed against entrance of food particles or vermin by means of trim strips, welded, soldering or mastic. Mastic shall be clear General Electrical Silicone Construction Sealant Services, SE 1200. 9. Trademarks and names of fabricator shall not be fastened to any items without written approval of Mackesey and Associates, LLC. 10. Exposed fire suppression piping shall be chrome plated. 11. All items shall be installed plumb, level and in proper elevation, plane location and in alignment with other work. C. Cold Storage Rooms 1. The cold storage rooms shall be delivered and installed on schedule by factory supervised and approved installers. Coordinate the work with the General Contractor and other trades as necessary. 2. Become fully familiar with the job site and the architectural drawings and specifications. Provide the necessary job site coordination with the various trades to insure job site conditions will meet the requirements of the cold storage rooms. 3. Establish a time schedule with the General Contractor that will insure the job site coordination with the various trades to insure job site conditions will meet the requirement of the cold storage rooms. 4. All work shall be designed and manufactured to comply with field conditions and fitted with proper joints and sections. 13032-2
11 40 00-28
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
5. During curing and cleaning of the wearing floor inside the cold storage rooms, the cold storage room doors shall be removed or blocked open and the rooms well ventilated to prevent damage to the interior. “KEEP OUT” signs shall be posted at each open door. 6. After the installation of the cold storage rooms and prior to the installation of the wearing floor and after the wearing floor has cured, the cold storage room doors are to be closed and locked. Verify the door perimeter heater strip has not been activated and the circuit will remain off until the refrigeration system has been started. 7. Where the insulated floor sections are depressed or floorless wall panels are specified, walls shall be anchored to the building floor with a concealed 18 gauge galvanized steel floor track or vinyl screed with drive pins 2’ -0” on center and sealed at interior and exterior edges with a bead of sealant. D. Refrigeration Systems 1. Refrigeration systems and connecting piping shall be installed as indicated in contract documents in a manner that provides complete and operational systems and eliminates any noise and vibration being transmitted to any part of the building. 2. Piping shall be installed to permit normal installation, service, removal of the condensing units and their components and view sight glasses and allow expansion and contraction without damage to the systems. 3. Extreme care shall be taken to keep the entire system clean and dry. 4. Nitrogen gas shall flow through piping being welded to prevent scaling. The Owner or Foodservice Consultant shall have the option of cutting a maximum of three (3) welded fittings to inspect for the proper use of nitrogen. FSEC shall replace all fittings at their cost where scaling is present. 5. All refrigeration lines shall be factory extended to one end of the compressor rack in a neat and orderly manner and shall be supported and anchored with “Unistrut” or equal clamps and channels. Ends of lines shall be capped against contamination. 6. Compressors and all accessories on the compressor rack shall be factory mounted and pre-wired to a main circuit breaker control panel and with individual circuit breakers wired to a main breaker disconnect requiring a single power connection. All wiring shall be run inside a code approved raceway. If, in the opinion of the FSEC, additional ventilation is required to ensure correct operation temperatures, the FSEC shall so state in a letter to Owner and Foodservice Consultant for evaluation and decision before installation. E. Refrigeration System Instruction and Identification FSEC shall at each component for every system identify it with the letter/number shown on the approved Refrigeration Shop drawing. The identification shall be with black paint, decal, or other approved permanent method. Plastic tape labels are not acceptable. Identification shall be in an easily seen location. F. Refrigeration Piping Testing 1. Notify Owner and/or Foodservice Consultant in advance when a test is being made and ready for inspection. 2. Each system shall be pressure tested for leaks. The test for R-404a refrigeration shall be 250 PSI on the high side and 150 PSI on the low side. All valves shall be fully opened during the test. 3. Test to be accomplished as follows: a. Charge the systems with refrigerant through the port of liquid shut off valves of the receivers to a pressure of 10 to 20 PSI. b. Add dry nitrogen, the supply of which shall be equipped with pressure regulating valve to provide the specified pressure. c.
Carefully test all points for leaks using either a Halide torch or an electric Halogen leak detector.
4. The Owner and Foodservice Consultant shall approve all tests. 13032-2
11 40 00-29
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
5. Precautions shall be taken to disconnect the low pressure controls for protection of the bellows during testing. G. Refrigeration System Evaluation 1. Advise Owner and/or Foodservice Consultant when the evacuation of the system is to start so the procedures can be checked. 2. Evacuation shall be Airserco, Stroke KC8r or Robinaire, 150021 vacuum pumps with an indicating gauge registering pressure in microns. Pump shall be connected to the system with a 5/8” O.D. line or larger. 3. Evacuate the high and low sides to 500 microns. Break the vacuum with refrigerant to 0 p.s.i. Evacuate the high and low sides below 500 microns; and then break vacuum to 0 p.s.i with the refrigerant to be used in the system. 3.02 START-UP AND DEMONSTRATION A. All equipment under this section shall be cleaned and ready for operation at time building is turned over to the Owner. B. Provide a competent factory trained representative of the FSEC to be present when installation is put into operation. The FSEC shall lubricate and put into proper operation all equipment and instruct the Owner’s employees in the proper use and maintenance of all items in this contract and set up a maintenance schedule to be followed thereafter. Three (3) copies of the schedule shall be provided before final acceptance of the installation. C. When cleaning, testing and adjusting have been completed and operation and maintenance manuals approved, arrange for demonstration times at Owner’s convenience but during normal working hours. Demonstration shall be done by competent, trained personnel, thoroughly familiar with the operation, techniques of usage, capacities and maintenance of the equipment. D. The FSEC contract representative for this Project shall be present at all equipment demonstrations. E. Furnish all warranty cards and advise Owner to complete and file the registrations. Demonstration and instruction may take up to two full days. F. Refrigeration System Start-Up 1. Charge each system with the refrigerant listed on the “approved” refrigeration shop drawings. 2. All systems and controls shall be set and checked for proper operation temperature. 3. Check compressor for proper oil level. Refrigeration oil shall be Suniso 3G, inhibited only, delivered to the job site in sealed containers. Oil shall be added to the system to maintain ¼” to ½” sight glass. 4. Check all electrical circuits by Division 16 for compliance with the manufacturer’s specifications. Division 16 shall make corrections to wiring as required. The FSEC shall be responsible for corrections to his wiring and/or components as required. 5. The manufacturer’s requirement for lubrication shall be checked and followed before the operation of fan and pump motors, and/or associated equipment. 6. Furnish a set of “As Built Drawings” to the Owner upon completing the installation. The drawings shall include refrigeration line runs and wiring diagrams. Drawings shall be submitted in the form of a reproducible format. 7. Review the refrigeration systems, operation, maintenance, emergency procedures, and proper service procedures with the Owner’s Engineering Staff. Provide a competent serviceman who shall remain for a minimum of eight (8) hours during the first day of operations.
13032-2
G. Where concrete has been poured inside a low temperature cold storage room it shall be allowed to cure twenty-eight (28) days, minimum seven (7) days before starting the refrigeration system. Check moisture level before energizing refrigeration system. After the curing period the temperature shall be brought down in regulated stages. The temperature shall be brought down as follows: to 40 degrees and held for twenty-four (24) hours; to 20 degrees and held for twenty-four (24) hours; and then to the specified temperature. 11 40 00-30 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
H. During start-up provide all required instructions for the operation and maintenance of the equipment, after one year warranty period. I.
The fire suppression system shall be tested in the Owner’s presence. Certificate shall be obtained and provided to the Owner from the authorities and from the Fire Insurance Rating Bureau. Include six month system check.
J.
After installation and hook-up, verify air volumes at each exhaust and make-up air duct by a factory trained specialist. A report shall be submitted to the Owner and the Foodservice Consultant of all readings. All incorrect air volumes shall be rechecked after adjustments.
K. Provide a complete set of “As Built Drawings” including foodservice layout, rough-ins, special conditions, manufacturer's shop drawings, technical bulletins, etc. for a comprehensive record set of drawings for the installation of the foodservice equipment package. L. To prepare the installation ready for final review and punch list, assure the following: 1. All new foodservice equipment is in the plan location, fully assembly, leveled, cleaned and has been operational for over one week. 2. All existing equipment is in the plan location and fully operational. 3. All equipment must have all mechanical, electrical and plumbing connections completed, operational and fully calibrated. 4. Fire protection systems must be tested and approved by the local Fire Authority. 5. All requisite approvals from local officials, including the Health Department has been received prior to request for punch list. 3.03 EXISTING EQUIPMENT A. All existing foodservice equipment that is affected by the project shall be disconnected by the appropriate trade. B. Existing foodservice equipment scheduled and specified for reuse shall be handled as follows: 1. Disassemble the equipment as required, remove and store the equipment until appropriate locations are ready for installation of existing equipment. 2. Reassemble and set existing equipment in place ready for final connection as required for new equipment. 3. Identify the equipment and schedule as part of submittal process with picture of equipment. 4. Install existing equipment in the same manner as it was before relocation. C. Existing foodservice equipment not scheduled for reuse shall be handled as follows: 1. Contact the Owner's representative to confirm the final disposition of the unscheduled equipment. 2. When equipment is to be relocated to a storage location, deliver the equipment to the appropriate storage area within the existing building or site. 3. When FSEC is requested to dispose of existing equipment, the FSEC shall take possession and dispose of the equipment. The FSEC must receive written authorization before removing any equipment from the site. 3.04 CLEANING Remove masking and protective covering from all finished surfaces; wash, clean and polish equipment, provide finish to glass, solid surface, plastic, laminate and other wearing surfaces, accessories, fixtures, etc. prior to the inspection and final acceptance of the completed installation. 3.05 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
13032-2
A. Provide operation and service inspections 180 days after start-up during warranty period. Provide a final inspection 30 days before the end of the warranty period of each piece of equipment. Any service or report requirements shall be performed before the end of the warranty period. Schedule 180 day and 335 day inspections within 30 days of the start of operations. Inform Consultant of time and date. 11 40 00-31 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
B. Copies of all warranty service calls and inspection reports shall be mailed to the Owner and Building Operations Engineer. C. The Owner may call an outside company at the expense of the FSEC, if the repair technician does not arrive within four (4) hours of the time called, in response to an emergency call. PART 4 EQUIPMENT LAKEVIEW HEALTH CENTER WEST SALEM, WISCONSIN NOTE 1: Where multiple names and model numbers of foodservice equipment manufacturers are provided within the Equipment Schedule, the first named manufacturer shall be utilized to determine the design, capacity, materials and performance standards upon which other approved manufacturers shall be tested. Similar equipment types shall be of the same manufacturer. NOTE 2: Point of connection or rough-in drawings for this project have been prepared by Mackesey and Associates, LLC. It shall be the responsibility of the FSEC to verify all dimensions, plumbing and electrical services and prevailing codes as they relate to this Project and to show any required changes on the documents submitted for approval. Use of M & A drawings is not allowed for construction. NOTE 3: Schedules of plumbing, electrical and ventilation specifications for foodservice equipment have been provided with the set of construction document drawings. Where the plumbing, electrical or ventilation requirements of equipment provided by the FSEC exceed those requirements or cause any added costs to the owner, construction manager, trade contractor, architect or engineers, the added cost shall be borne by the FSEC. NOTE 4: All items shall be provided with standard accessories for the first named manufacturer. Approved fabricators: Albers Commercial Kitchen Services 200 West Plato Blvd. St. Paul, Minnesota 55107 651-224-5428
Best Way th 603 19 Avenue, NE Saint Joseph, Minnesota 56374 320-363-4600
BSI / Kevry 5125 Race Court Denver, Colorado 80216 800-662-9595
Eagle Group 100 Industrial Blvd. Clayton, DE 19938 800-441-8440
FRED, Inc. P. O. Box 5716 Traverse City, MI 49636 231-947-4580
Institutional Equipment (IEI) 704 Veterans Parkway, Unit B Bolingbrook, Illinois 60440-5094 630-771-0990
Nationwide Fabrication, Inc. 10923 Leroy Drive Northglenn, Colorado 80233 303-853-0107
Two Rivers Enterprises 490 River St W Holdingford, MN 56340 320-746-3156
ITEM 1 MOBILE CHEMICAL SHELVING Lot required InterMetro or approved equal Amco, Eagle, Focus or Nexel model
13032-2
11 40 00-32
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
Provide the following: A. Five Model 2460NK3 shelves. B. Four Model 63UPK3 posts. C. Two Model 5M swivel casters. D. Two Model 5MB locking swivel casters. ITEM 2 FLUSH MOP SINK / TROUGH WITH GRATE Provided by GC. ITEM 3 HOSE BIBB Provided by PC. ITEM 4 HOSE BIBB Provided by PC. ITEM 5 FLUSH FLOOR TROUGH WITH GRATE Provided by GC. ITEM 6 FLOOR MACHINE Provided by Owner. ITEM 7 WALK-IN COOLER One required Norlake or approved equal Brown, Imperial, Master-Bilt or Thermalrite equal A. General: One assembly of 5” thick prefabricated panels in accordance with NSF Standard #7 including all requirements from Articles 2.8 and 2.9 from Section 11 40 00 including the requirements for Item 16. B. Sizes: Overall size as shown on the Drawings, 9’ 6” high as shown on the Drawings including Item 16, floorless box with flat bottom wall panels for the cooler and freezer panels. C. Metal Finishes: Exterior ceiling and exterior walls shall be 20 ga. galvalume steel. Exposed exterior and interior walls shall be 20 ga. stainless steel. Interior ceiling shall be 20 gauge smooth baked white enamel. D. Floor: Floorless box. Recessed in 7” deep pit. GC to provide insulation and topping as shown on sheet FS4.1. Coordinate all shop drawings and submittals to match. GC to provide finished floor with coved base in all cooler and freezer floor areas. FSEC shall provide and coordinate the installation of the vinyl channel and insulated wall panels with the GC. E. Entrance Doors and Door Panels: Each door shall have a net opening of 36" x 78" and shall be a flush-type with interior and exterior finish to match walk-in wall finish. F. Lighting: Standard lighting with door assemblies plus additional fluorescent light fixtures in quantities shown on Electrical Rough-in Drawing, with light bulbs. G. Remote refrigeration system: Specified as part of Item 19. H. EC shall provide heat tape for condensate drain lines and required insulation. Refer to Section 2 and 3 for additional information. ITEM 8 MOBILE PAN RACKS Two required Piper Products or approved equal Channel and New Age model Two Model RIU64-11 mobile pan racks. ITEM 9 WALK-IN COOLER DUNNAGE RACKS Two required InterMetro or approved equal Cambro model One Model HP2248PD dunnage rack and one Model HP2260PD dunnage rack. ITEM 10 WALK-IN COOLER MOBILE SHELVING Lot required InterMetro or approved equal Amco, Eagle, Focus or Nexel model Provide the following: A. Ten Model 2148NK3 shelves. 13032-2
11 40 00-33
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
B. C. D. E.
Twenty Model 2160NK3 shelves. Twenty-four Model 63UPK3 posts. Twelve Model 5M swivel casters. Twelve Model 5MB locking swivel casters.
ITEM
11
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM
12
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM
13
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM
14
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM
15
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM 16 WALK-IN FREEZER Specified as part of Item 7. ITEM
17
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM 18 MOBILE FREEZER SHELVING Lot required InterMetro or approved equal Amco, Eagle, Focus or Nexel model Provide the following: A. Five Model 2136NK3 shelves. B. Thirty Model 2148NK3 shelves. C. Fifteen Model 2160NK3 shelves. D. Forty Model 63UPK3 posts. E. Twenty Model 5M swivel casters. F. Twenty Model 5MB locking swivel casters. ITEM 19 REMOTE REFRIGERATION SYSTEM One lot of two system required ColdZone or approved equal Cooltec, Kairak, Keeprite, RDI or RDT model One Model UNI-PAK, interior, water cooled, remote refrigeration systems including multi-compressor packages each with a water cooled condenser utilizing R-404a refrigerant. Each system supporting one walk-in box will have one compressor. Provide a complete installation including provisions of Section 11 40 00, Article 2.9. Include the following: A. Painted steel rack for mounting of both condensing units for the interior units as shown on the Drawings. Verify the exact location and method of installation with the Architect and Consultant. B. Each water cooled condenser sized for 90 degree cooling water. C. Each refrigeration system/circuit shall be complete with oversized receivers equipped with service inlet and outlet valves capable of pumping down the entire circuit, discharge check valve and fusible pressure relief, pre-piping of liquid line driers, moisture indicating sight glasses, suction and discharge service valves, vibration eliminators, oil separators, suction accumulators on low temperature systems and head pressure controls. D. Each system shall include a factory mounted pre-wired electrical disconnect complete with 208/3 main fused disconnect, separate compressor and fan motor circuit breakers, contactors, defrost clock for the low temp system, adjustable dual pressure controls and replaceable core suction filters. E. Compressors shall be Copeland semi-hermetic for the medium temperature storage units and Copeland scroll compressor for the low temperature applications in ratings as follows: 1. Item 7, Walk-in Cooler: One Copeland 2 HP, R404A refrigerant operating at +38F degree suction temperature for a fixture temperature of +35F degrees. 2. Item 16, Walk-in Freezer: One Copeland 3 HP, R-404A refrigerant operating at -10 degree suction temperature for a fixture temperature of -15 degrees. F. Matching evaporator coils shall be manufactured by Chandler or equal Bohn or Russell model complete with factory installed thermostats, liquid line solenoids and TX valves as indicated on FS 4.1. Provide electric defrost for freezer coils. 13032-2
11 40 00-34
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
G. H. I. J. K. L. M.
N. O. P.
1" copper condensate lines by PC. The freezer shall have heat tape and insulation by FSEC. Procedure for completing the system shall follow the requirements for Section 11 40 00 specifications. Warranty shall follow Article 1.6 of the Section 11 40 00 Specifications. Wall sleeves and pitch pocket for refrigeration and electrical lines shall be provided by the GC. Verify vertical rise in excess of 50 feet and provide complete engineering solution to allow for the efficient and long term trouble free operation. Procedure for completing the system shall follow the requirements of the Section 11 40 00 specifications. Wall or pitch pocket for the passage of the electrical and refrigeration lines through all walls, ceiling or other building components shall be provide by the GC, FSEC to coordinate the requirements before installation. Refrigeration rack weight shall not exceed 1100#. Review the requirements of Section 11 40 00, Article 1.6.D for the Guaranteed Service Period. Each system shall include a water regulating valve, water piping isolation valves, flow control valves, temperature / pressure gauges, flow control gauge all factory installed.
ITEM 20 HAND SINKS Three required Eagle or approved equal fabricated equal model Three Model YHSA-SPEC*2 wall-mounted hand sinks, 16 ga. #304 S/S, each with a Z-bracket, 14 gauge S/S three-sided apron. Include the following accessories for each: A. One T&S Model EC-3100, deck-mounted touch free electronic faucets with mixing valve, #GN2AH8 gooseneck spout and aerator. Include two sets of alkaline batteries for each faucet. B. Pre-cut hole for the faucet. C. 17 1/2" high backsplash installed on a S/S Z-clip. Mount to the wall with S/S anchors. D. Custom bowl size - 14" x 12" x 10" deep bowl. E. Chrome P-trap with offset rear overflow. F. Marine edge on the front and both sides. G. ADA approved 14 ga. S/S apron mounted with S/S anchors. H. 1 1/2" S/S basket strainer. I. FSEC shall provide the GC with detailed drawings for wall blocking to support the S/S anchors for this item. ITEM 21 SOAP AND PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS Provided by Owner. ITEM 22 SMALL WASTE BASKETS Provided by Owner. ITEM 23 DISHTABLE WITH POT AND PAN SINKS One required Fabricate One 31 ½” x 20’ 6” long x 34” high custom fabricated dishtable / utensil sinks as shown on the Drawings with the following accessories: A. Four 20” x 28” x 12” deep sinks with one-piece front panel. B. One T & S Model B-0290 splash mounted fast fill faucet. C. Provisions for the installation of Items 24, 25 and 39. D. Welded disposer collar and booster heater slides. E. 10” high backsplash. F. Welded disposer bracket. G. Legs, feet and crossrails as shown on the Drawings. Extend the crossrails to the rear and attach to the wall with S/S wall flanges. This applies to all wall mounted fabricated tables for this project. H. Three 2” rotary lever drains. I. Welded field joints as required by building access or fabrication technique. J. 20 ga. S/S wall panels as shown on the Drawings. K. Sectional removable undershelves as shown on the Drawings. 13032-2
11 40 00-35
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
ITEM 24 DISPOSER One required In-Sink-Erator or approved equal Salvajor model One Model SS-150-7-AS101 “short body” complete disposer package with the following: A. Syphon breaker. B. Solenoid valve. C. Flow control valve. D. Short body. E. 7” collar adaptor. F. One T & S Model B-0455 vacuum breaker assembly. ITEM 25 SPRAY AND FILL ASSEMBLY One required T&S Brass or approved equal Chicago model One Model B-0133B pre-rinse spray with a Model B-0156 Add-a-Faucet with aerator. ITEM 26 MOBILE UTILITY CARTS Four required Lakeside Four Model 522 mobile utility carts. ITEM 27 WORKTABLE WITH SINKS One required Fabricate One 30” wide x 11’-6” long x 34” high S/S worktable with sinks as shown on the Drawings, with the following accessories: A. 10” high backsplash. B. Two 20” x 21” x 12” deep sink bowls with separating drain trough with welded one-piece front panel. C. Pre-cut holes for pre-rinse spray and vacuum breaker. D. Legs, feet and crossrails as shown on the Drawings. Extend the crossrails to the wall and attach to the wall with S/S wall flanges. E. Provisions for the installation of Items 28, 30 and 31. F. One T&S Model B-3952 waste drain. G. Welded disposer collar and control bracket. H. Raised channel edge. I. Sectional, removable undershelves as shown on the Drawings. J. Two 12” wide wall mounted overshelves as shown on the Drawings. K. One drawer. ITEM 28 LARGE WASTE BASKETS Provided by Owner. ITEM 29 WALL SHELVES Specified as part of Item 27. ITEM 30 DISPOSER One required In-Sink-Erator or approved equal Salvajor model One Model SS-150-7-AS101 “short body” complete disposer package with the following: A. Syphon breaker. B. Solenoid valve. C. Flow control valve. D. Short body. E. 7” collar adaptor. F. One T & S Model B-0455 vacuum breaker assembly. ITEM 31 One required 13032-2
SPRAY AND FILL ASSEMBLY 11 40 00-36
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
T&S Brass or approved equal Chicago model One Model B-0133B pre-rinse spray with a Model B-0156 Add-a-Faucet with aerator. ITEM
32
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM
33
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM
34
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM 35 MOBILE SLICER STAND One required Piper Products or approved equal Eagle model One Model 331-3424 mobile slicing stand with locking casters. ITEM 36 SLICER One required Hobart or approved equal Berkel or Globe model One Model HS9 automatic slicer. ITEM 37 40 QUART MIXER (FLOOR MOUNTED) One required Hobart One Model HL400 40 quart mixer with standard accessory package. Mount to floor per factory recommendation. ITEM
38
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM 39 BOOSTER HEATER One required Hubbell or approved equal Hatco model One Model J615R electrically heated compact booster heater with the following accessories: A. Complete S/S body. B. Leak detection sensor. C. Resettable circuit breakers limit controls. D. Bronze pressure reducing valves, provide to the PC for installation. E. Booster heater slides. F. UL, CUL, UL EPH and ASME listings. G. 10 year tank warranty without limitation of proration. H. Factory installed dielectric unions. I. Shock absorber. J. Two pressure/temperature gauges, provide to the PC for installation. K. ¼ turn drain valve, provide to the PC for installation. L. 208 / 3, 15 kw. Electrical capacity / configuration. ITEM 40 CONDENSATE HOOD One required Captive Aire or approved equal Avtec, Gaylord, Halton or Streivor approved equal One Model 4230 VHB-G, 42” wide x 4’-6” long x 24” high S/S dishwasher hood with condensate drain. FSEC shall coordinate with the EC the recessed J-box for all requirements for electrical connections. Trim the area between the top of the hood and the finish ceiling with matching S/S. Mount the bottom of hood at 80" above finished floor. Coordinate the installation of Item 46 S/S wall flashing with this item. ITEM 41 WAREWASHER One required Hobart or approved equal Jackson, Meiko or Stero model One Model AM15T “tall height” rack style warewasher with the following accessories: A. Electric tank heat. B. Flanged feet. C. Drain water tempering kit. 13032-2
11 40 00-37
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
D. E. F. G.
Two combination racks, four peg style racks and two P-1400 sheet pan racks. Water hammer kit. S/S splash guards. Water pressure regulator.
ITEM 42 SOILED DISHTABLE One required Fabricate One 31 ½” wide x 6’ 0” long x 34” high custom fabricated soiled dishtable as shown on the Drawings with the following accessories: A. Welded disposer collar and control bracket. B. 10” high backsplash. C. Pre-cut holes for vacuum breaker and pre-rinse spray. D. Wall mounted rack shelf as shown on the Drawings. E. One 20” x 20” x 10” scrap sink with removable rack guides. F. 6” wide quick drainer with removable scrap basket. ITEM 43 DISPOSER One required In-Sink-Erator or approved equal Salvajor model One Model SS-200-7-AS101 complete disposer package with the following: A. Syphon breaker. B. Solenoid valve. C. Flow control valve. D. Short body. E. 7” collar adaptor. F. One T & S Model B-0455 vacuum breaker assembly. ITEM 44 SPRAY AND FILL ASSEMBLY One required T&S Brass or approved equal Chicago model One Model B-0131-ADF12-BC pre-rinse spray with a Model B-0156 Add-a-Faucet with aerator. ITEM 45 SLANTING RACK SHELF Specified as part of Item 42. ITEM 46 STAINLESS STEEL WALL FLASHING Specified as part of Item # 23. ITEM
47
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM 48 MEAT GRINDER One required Hobart or approved equal Berkel model One Model 4812 meat grinder with #12 tinned chopping end and #12 S/S rectangular feed pan. ITEM 49 WORKTABLE WITH SINK One required Fabricate One 30” wide x 7’ 0” long x 34” high custom fabricate worktable with sink with wall shelf as shown on the Drawings and further specified for Item 27. ITEM 50 WALL SHELF Specified as part of Item 49. ITEM 51 SOILED PAN SHELVING Lot required InterMetro or approved equal Amco, Eagle, Focus or Nexel model Provide the following: 13032-2
11 40 00-38
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
A. B. C. D.
Five Model 2460NK3 shelves. Four Model 63UPK3 posts. Two Model 5M swivel casters. Two Model 5MB locking swivel casters.
ITEM 52 DRY STORAGE DUNNAGE RACK One required InterMetro or approved equal Cambro model One Model HP2248PD dunnage rack. ITEM 53 MOBILE DRY STORAGE SHELVING Lot required InterMetro or approved equal Amco, Eagle, Focus or Nexel model Provide the following: A. Ten Model 1836NK3 shelves. B. Ten Model 2154NK3 shelves. C. Twenty Model 2160NK3 shelves. D. Thirty-two Model 63UPK3 posts. E. Sixteen Model 5M swivel casters. F. Sixteen Model 5MB locking swivel casters. ITEM
54
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM 55 MOBILE WORKTABLE One required Fabricate One 24” x 30” x 34” high S/S custom fabricated mobile worktable as shown on the Drawings with the following accessories: A. 10” high backsplash. B. Full undershelf. C. Locking casters. ITEM 56 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM One required Ansul or approved equal Kidde or Range Guard model One Model R-102-3 (system size as determined by protected equipment) fire suppression system with automatic and manual activation, along with means for simultaneous automatic shutting down of protected cooking equipment upon activation of said system to be included. System shall be designed to provide plenum and duct collar protection only. All exposed piping to be stainless steel or chrome plated. Fusible link detection system shall be built into ventilator sections by ventilator manufacturer. All exposed fusible links are to be recessed into top of hoods with no visible conduit. Provision shall be made for manual actuation by readily accessible and plainly marked remote manual release station in each cooking area, located no less than 54" and no more than 78" above floor. System to be sized in accordance with most recent U. L. 300 Test Standards. System shall be furnished and installed by authorized Ansul distributor in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance with U. L. listings and shall conform to NFPA Pamphlet 96 and local and/or state codes and standards. This shall include mounting of system units, remote manual releases, nozzles, actuating devices and running of all pipe and control tubing appurtenant to systems. Exhaust system shall be protected against fire by installation of automatic fire extinguishing system. Unit shall be stored pressure type, of sufficient capacity as determined by published standards to provide high concentration of liquid agent in plenum areas and duct collars. Liquid agent to be stored in containers equipped with pressure gauge to verify operational readiness. Nozzles located in plenum and ductwork shall be capable of functioning with heavy accumulation of grease. Up to 2” mechanical gas shut-off valve shall be furnished by the ventilator manufacturer. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible to interconnect gas valve to fire suppression system in accordance with Ansul’s recommendations and O & M Manual. Valve shall be located as close to the system as possible. Valve shall be 120/60/1, normally closed. 13032-2
11 40 00-39
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
Micro switches for electrical equipment shut off and/or actuation of fire alarm system shall be furnished as part of the fire protection system by the Kitchen Equipment Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install shunt trip breakers for electrically operated cooking equipment as required to interface with micro switches furnished by the authorized distributor of the fire protection system. The Electrical Contractor is to interface with the building alarm system and/or the fire command station and the micro switches as specified by others. The authorized fire protection system installer is to verify the quantity of micro switches required and furnish same. All access openings, holes, sleeves, chases, etc. in building structure necessary to permit piping and control tubing to be run between system unit, ventilator, and ductwork are to be provided by the General Contractor. Provision shall be made to shut off the gas and electric supply to all cooking equipment upon actuation of the system. System to be U. L. listed. Ansulex storage container to be I. C. C. approved. Layout to be approved prior to installation by authority having jurisdiction. Provide all required submittal drawings for approval of system prior to start-up of hood systems. The Building Alarm System Contractor is to furnish and install control relay to detect operation of the system by connection to the Micro switches supplied by the Fire Protection System Contractor. The Electrical Contractor is to furnish and install the necessary wiring required for the systems as specified. Fire Protection System Installer is to provide all necessary micro switches for interfacing with gas valve and/or shunt trip breakers as installed by the Plumbing Contractor and Electrical Contractor, respectively, to shut down all cooking equipment in the event of a fire. Include the following accessories: A. S/S cabinet to enclose complete system for protection of cooking equipment, exhaust ducts and plenum. Provide Chrome piping for all exposed fire suppression piping. This applies to all fire suppression piping for this project. B. Coordination the location of the remote pull located in path of egress where indicated on Foodservice Plan. C. FSEC shall furnish gas shut off valve to PC for installation. Verify size required. D. EC to provide shunt trip relays for all electrical connections. ITEM 57 EXHAUST HOOD WITH REAR SUPPLY PLENUM One set of three hoods required Captive Aire or approved equal Avtec, Gaylord, Halton or Streivor approved equal Three Model 6030 EX-2 exhaust hood each with a 630 back/rear supply air plenum as shown on Sheet FS4.1 with a typical hanging height of 6'-8" above finished floor with a maximum hood height of 30”, this applies for all hoods for this project, including the requirements for Item 56. Provide a complete kitchen exhaust canopy in the location shown on the Drawings including all requirements for installation of rear supply air plenum. The canopy shall bear either the ETL or Underwriters Laboratories UL label, for listed range hood without exhaust fire damper per standard 710 and be fabricated in compliance with NFPA-96-2001, and shall bear the National Sanitation Foundation seal of approval. Trim the area above the hood and finished ceiling with matching materials. The installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and conform to NFPA-96 guidelines and all applicable local codes. The size and maximum exhaust volumes shall be as indicated on drawings and/or equipment schedule. The canopy exposed areas and inner liner shall be 18-gauge #300 series stainless steel with a #4 finish. Each canopy shall have a filter housing of the same material as the canopy liner. The filter housing shall be equipped with a concealed drip tray the full length of the canopy and with a concealed grease cup for easy removal and daily cleaning.
13032-2
11 40 00-40
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
LED light fixtures with the following certifications U.L., CSA, NSF and CE for use in grease exhaust hoods in quantity shown on the Drawings and as sufficient to provide 50 foot candles at the cooking surface when hood is mounted 84” AFF LED light fixture is complete with die cast aluminum junction box with integral fins for natural heat dissipation. Input voltage of 24V DC with a power consumption not to exceed 20 watts. The housing encases 24 LED light emitters with a brightness of 1000 lumens. Lamp body is stainless steel ring with a high temperature silicone seal. Junction box to accept standard ½” NPT fitting. Fixture shall come complete with integral power supply with an input voltage of 108VAC – 305VAC and input frequency of 50/60 Hz. Input current rating shall be 0.57A @ 120VAC. Fixture shall contain no mercury or lead. It shall be grease, heat and water proof and UL certified for kitchen grease hood application. Hood manufacturer must include bulbs with fixtures. Exhaust and make up air volumes with rear supply plenum as shown on the Drawings. Provide 18 ga. #4 finish S/S panels covering the wall (both sides and wall end caps) below the exhaust hood. The paneling shall extend from the top of the flooring base material to the bottom edge of the hood. Joints between the panels shall be covered with Component Hardware Model J64-1450 “H” strips. Exposed edges of the panels shall be ground and polished smooth. Attach the exposed edges with S/S flat head screws. Seal the panels with clear silicone. All panels shall be securely attached with a generous amount of clear silicone on the full perimeter of each panel (blind caulking) and on the rear surfaces in order to achieve a tight, flat, bonding of the panels to the walls. ITEM 58 FOOD PROCESSOR One required Hobart or approved equal One Model HCM62-1 food processor. ITEM 59 CONVECTION OVENS One set of two ovens required South Bend or approved equal Montague, Blodgett or Vulcan model One Model GS/25CCH full size, double stacked set of convection ovens with the following accessories: A. 6” locking casters. B. Gas manifold. C. S/S front and sides. D. Gas hose with quick disconnect and restraining device as specified in Article 2.02.K. This applies to all gas fired equipment installed on casters. ITEM 60 COMBINATION OVENS One set of two ovens required Alto Shaam or approved equal Rational model Two Model 7 ● 14 ESG stacked, gas fired combination ovens with the following accessories for each: A. Stacking kit. B. Locking casters. C. CombiTouch water filtration system. D. Convo clean cleaning system. E. Factory start-up and a minimum of eight hours of demonstration. F. Separate boiler and condenser water connections. G. Gas and water lines per Article 2.02.K. H. Door hinged as shown on the Drawings. I. Automatic grease collection system. ITEM 61 10 PAN STEAMER One required Market Forge or approved equal One Model ETP-10G 10 pan gas fired steamer with the following accessories: A. One case of Total Concept Descaler. B. Built-in water filter with Three additional water filters. C. Flanged feet. D. Factory start-up and demonstration. 13032-2
11 40 00-41
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
ITEM 62 2-BURNER RANGE One required South Bend or approved equal One Model P18C-X gas fired 2-burner range with cabinet base including the following accessories: D. S/S front and sides. E. Extra deep 24’ high rear-extending flue riser with S/S shelf. F. Gas pressure regulator. G. Cap the front manifold and provide rear gas connection. Include gas hose per Article 2.02.K. H. Locking casters. I. Gas lines per Article 2.02.K. ITEM 63 FLUSH FLOOR TROUGH WITH GRATE One required Fabricate Furnish one approximately 12 ga. S/S floor trough and grate as shown on the Drawings. Unit to be complete as follows: A. Include beehive strainer for 3" drain. B. Include equal sized 1" thick FRP fiberglass reinforced grating with 1" x 4" x 1" rectangular grid and non-skid surface. The grating shall be of consistent 1" thick material and shall not use fiberglass rod as tie-bars. C. Give to GC for early installation. Refer to Building Works Plan and Details for additional information D. Coordinate the installation with PC and GC. ITEM 64 40 GALLON TILTING STEAM KETTLE One required Cleveland or approved equal Market Forge or Vulcan model One Model KGL-40-T gas fired tilting 40 gallon steam kettle with the following accessories: A. Type 316 S/S (stainless steel) kettle liner for high acid food products. B. 3” diameter tangent draw-off valve with drain strainer. C. Spring-assisted, hinged, rotatable, domed stainless steel cover. D. Hot and cold water faucet with swing spout with faucet mounting bracket. E. Kettle accessory kit to include: clean-up brush, 36” whip, 36” paddle, 36” brush, 24 oz. ladle and draw-off brush. F. Heat deflector shield. J. Drain strainer. K. Pan carrier. L. Flow diverter. M. Kettle markings. N. Measuring strip. ITEM 65 20 QUART STEAM KETTLE WITH STAND One required Groen or approved equal One Model TDBC electrically heated 20 quart steam kettle installed on a Model T/S9 stand with the following accessories: A. Double pantry water fill faucet with swing spout. B. Lift-off cover. C. One T/S9 stand with pull out drain pan and flanged feet. D. 316 stainless steel interior E. Kettle brush kit. F. Lip strainer. G. Hand crank style kettle tilting mechanism. ITEM 66 SPRAY HOSE WITH WALL BRACKET One required T & S Brass and Bronze One Model B-1436 spray hose with wall bracket with the following components and accessories: A. Enclosed coated hose reel with 35 feet of 3/8” braided hose with S/S mounting bracket. 13032-2
11 40 00-42
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
B. C. D. E. F. G. H.
EB-0107 blue spray valve. Vacuum breaker. 3/8” NPT water connector. 8” wall mounted mixing valve with Eterna cartridges with spring checks, control valves in riser and lever handles with color coded indexes. Two B-0109-07 wall brackets. S/S quick disconnect at hose reel. B-0963 continuous pressure vacuum breaker with integral check valve.
ITEM 67 30 GALLON TILTING BRAISING PAN One required Groen or approved equal Market Forge model One Model BPM-30G 30 gallon tilting braising pan with the following: A. Double pantry water fill faucet with mounting bracket. B. 2” tangent draw-off valve with strainer. C. Pouring lip strainer. ITEM 68 S/S WALL FLASHING Lot required Fabricate 20 ga. S/S wall flashing as shown on the Drawings and further specified for Item 57. ITEM 69 WORKTABLE WITH WALL SHELF One required Fabricate One S/S worktable as shown on the Drawings and further specified for Item 27 and 49. ITEM 70 500 POUND ICE MAKER WITH BIN One required Manitowoc or approved equal Hoshizaki model One Model ID-0522A air cooled ice maker on a B-420 S/S bin with the following accessories: A. Artic Pure factory approved water filtration system. B. Factory start-up. C. Luminice growth inhibitor. D. AuCS cleaning system. ITEM
71
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM 72 ROLL-IN REFRIGERATOR One required Traulsen or approved Continental or Utility equal One Model RRI232LUT-FHS two section roll-in refrigerator with the following accessories: A. Floorless cabinet, seal to the floor with clear food grade silicone. B. Coordinate the installation of Item 8. C. S/S interior and exterior. ITEM 73 ISLAND WORKTABLE WITH SINK One required Fabricate One 30” wide x 10’ 6” long x 34” high custom fabricated S/S worktable with sink as shown on the Drawings and further described below: A. One 16” x 20” x 10” deep sink with 2” rotary lever drain. B. Undershelves as shown. C. Table mounted outlets as shown. D. One T & S table mounted faucet. E. Marine edge as shown. F. Flanged feet. G. Table supported overhead spice shelf and pot rack. Extend the support legs for the overhead unit to the crossrails for secure mounting. 13032-2
11 40 00-43
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
H. I.
Two drawers. Provisions for the installation of 28.
ITEM 74 OVERHEAD SPICE SHELF AND POT RACK Specified as part of Item 73. ITEM 75 MOBILE SHELVING Lot required InterMetro or approved equal Amco, Eagle, Focus or Nexel model Provide the following: A. Fifteen Model 1848NK3 shelves. B. Twelve Model 63UPK3 posts. C. Six Model 5M swivel casters. D. Six Model 5MB locking swivel casters. ITEM 76 PASS-THRU HOT CABINET One required FWE or approved equal Cres Cor model One Model UHST-10D HO mobile pass-thru hot cabinet with the following accessories: A. Pass thru configuration. B. Universal pan slides. C. Locking casters. D. Floor lock. E. Doors hinged a shown on the Drawings. F. Manual controls with digital thermometer. ITEM 77 MOBILE WORKTABLE One required Fabricate One 30” wide x 54” long x 34” high custom fabricated mobile worktable with the following accessories: A. Locking casters. B. One drawer. C. Full length undershelf, welded to the legs. ITEM 78 MOBILE HOT AND COLD FOOD TRANSPORT CARTS Four required Cambro or approved equal Four Model CMBHC1826TSF and four Model CMBHC1826TBF hot and cold food transport carts. Verify color with Owner before ordering. ITEM 79 OFFICE FURNITURE Provided by Owner. ITEM
80-95 OPEN NUMBERS
ITEM 96 FOUR SLICE TOASTER One required Hatco or approved equal One Model TPT-120 toaster. ITEM 97 BEVERAGE DISPENSER Provided by Owner’s Beverage Supplier. ITEM 98 JUICE DISPENSER Provided by Owner’s Beverage Supplier. ITEM 99 DROP-IN DRIP PAN One required Atlas Metal or approved equal 13032-2
11 40 00-44
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
One Model WU-44 drop-in drip pan, field verify length before ordering. FSEC shall coordinate the requirements of the drop-in pan with the fabricated millwork counters / tops. This applies to all drop-in style foodservice equipment for this project. ITEM 100 DROP-IN HEATED PLATE DISPENSER One required Piper Products or approved equal One Model ATH-75 drop-in heated plate dispenser, verify plate size before ordering. ITEM 101 DROP-IN HOT FOOD WELLS One required Wells Manufacturing or approved equal Duke or Eagle model One Model MOD-300TDM/AF drop-in hot food wells for wet or dry operation. Include drain manifold to single gate valve connection draining to a floor sink below the unit. In addition to the drain manifold vale – provide an isolation valve for each well. Provide the required reinforced S/S control panel for the mounting of the control panel for the hot food wells. ITEM 102 SMALL WASTE BASKETS Provided by Owner. ITEM 103 SOAP AND PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS Provided by Owner. ITEM 104 DROP-IN HAND SINK WITH ELECTRONIC FAUCET One required Eagle Group or approved equal One Model SR14-10-5-1 drop-in hand sink. Provide the following: A. Electronic eye faucet. B. P-trap. ITEM 105 REACH-IN FREEZER One required Traulsen or approved equal Continental or Utility model One Model RLT132WUT-HHS reach-in freezer with the following accessories: A. Provide a set of four (4) 6” casters in lieu of legs. B. Half doors hinged as shown on the Drawings. C. Two extra shelves. ITEM 106 REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR One required Traulsen or approved equal Continental or Utility model One Model RHT132WUT-HHS reach-in refrigerated and heated cabinet with the following accessories: A. Set of four (4) 6” casters in lieu of legs. B. Universal type tray slides adjustable to 4” O.C. to accommodate 18” x 26” sheet pans. C. Doors hinged as shown on the Drawings. ITEM
107
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM 108 DROP-IN STAINLESS STEEL SINK WITH FAUCET One required Eagle Group or approved equal One Model SR19-16-13.5-1 drop-in hand sink with the following: A. One T&S Model 313303 faucet with 12” spout. B. P-trap. ITEM 109 DISPOSER One required In-Sink-Erator or approved equal Salvajor model One Model LC50-11 disposer with optional direct water connection kit including the following: 13032-2
11 40 00-45
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
A. B. C. D.
Water shut-off valve. Solenoid valve. One T & S Model B-0455 vacuum breaker assembly, verify backsplash or deck mounted style before ordering. Wall switch provided by EC.
ITEM 110 UNDERCOUNTER DISHWASHER One required Hobart or approved equal Jackson or Stero model One Model LXeR undercounter dishwashers with the following accessories: A. Power cord kits. B. DWT-LXe drain water tempering kit. C. Maximum unit height of 32 1/2” AFF. D. 70 degree rise internal booster heater. E. Coordinate the placement of detergent, rinse and deliming chemicals. F. A total of two peg and two combination racks. ITEM 111 COFFEE BREWER Provided by Owner’s Beverage Supplier. ITEM 112 ICE MAKER DISPENSER WITH WATER One required Hoshizaki or approved equal One Model DCM-270 ice maker dispenser with water dispenser with the following accessories: A. Water filtration system meeting factory recommendations. B. Factory start-up. ITEM 113 DROP-IN HEATED PLATE DISPENSER One required Piper Products or approved equal One Model ATH-75 drop-in heated plate dispenser. ITEM 114 DROP-IN HOT FOOD WELLS One required Wells Manufacturing or approved equal One Model MOD-300TDM/AF drop-in hot food well as further specified for Item 101. ITEM 115 SMALL WASTE BASKETS Provided by Owner. ITEM 116 SOAP AND PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS Provided by Owner. ITEM 117 One required
DROP-IN HAND SINK WITH ELECTRONIC FAUCET
Eagle Group or approved equal One Model SRU14-10-5-1 drop-in hand sink. Provide the following: A. Electric eye faucet. B. P-trap. ITEM 118 REACH-IN FREEZER One required Traulsen or approved equal Continental or Utility model One Model RLT132WUT-HHS reach-in freezer as further specified for Item 105. ITEM 119 REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR One required Traulsen or approved equal Continental or Utility model 13032-2
11 40 00-46
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
One Model RHT132WUT-HHS reach-in refrigerated and heated cabinet as further specified for Item 106. ITEM
120
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM 121 DROP-IN STAINLESS STEEL SINK WITH FAUCET One required Eagle Group or approved equal One Model SR19-16-13.5-1 drop-in hand sink with the following: A. One T&S Model 313303 faucet with 12” spout. B. P-trap. ITEM 122 DISPOSER One required In-Sink-Erator or approved equal Salvajor model One Model LC50-11 disposer as further specified for Item 109. ITEM 123 UNDERCOUNTER DISHWASHER One required Hobart or approved equal One Model LXeR undercounter dishwasher as further specified for Item 110. ITEM 124 COFFEE BREWER Provided by Owner’s Beverage Supplier. ITEM 125 ICE MAKER DISPENSER WITH WATER One required Hoshizaki or approved equal One Model DCM-270 ice maker dispenser with water dispenser as further specified for Item 112. ITEM
126
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM 127 FOUR SLICE TOASTER One required Hatco or approved equal One Model TPT-120 toaster. ITEM 128 BEVERAGE DISPENSER Provided by Owner’s Beverage Supplier. ITEM 129 JUICE DISPENSER Provided by Owner’s Beverage Supplier. ITEM 130 DROP-IN DRIP PAN One required Atlas or approved equal One drop-in drop pan as previously specified for Item 99. ITEM 131 HAND SINK WITH ELECTRONIC FAUCET One required Eagle or approved equal fabricated equal model One Model YHSA-SPEC*2 wall-mounted hand sink, 16 ga. #304 S/S, each with a Z-bracket, 14 gauge S/S three-sided apron. Include the following accessories: A. One T&S Model EC-3100, deck-mounted touch free electronic faucets with mixing valve, #GN2AH8 gooseneck spout and aerator. Include two sets of alkaline batteries for each faucet. B. Pre-cut hole for the faucet. C. 17 1/2" high backsplash installed on a S/S Z-clip. Mount to the wall with S/S anchors. D. Custom bowl size - 14" x 12" x 10" deep bowl. E. Chrome P-trap with offset rear overflow. 13032-2
11 40 00-47
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
F. G. H. I.
Marine edge on the front and both sides. ADA approved 14 ga. S/S apron mounted with S/S anchors. 1 1/2" S/S basket strainer. FSEC shall provide the GC with detailed drawings for wall blocking to support the S/S anchors for this item.
ITEM 132 SOAP AND PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS Provided by Owner. ITEM 133 SMALL WASTE BASKET Provided by Owner. ITEM 134 DROP-IN HEATED PLATE DISPENSER One required Piper Products or approved equal One Model ATH-75 drop-in heated plate dispenser. ITEM 135 DROP-IN HOT FOOD WELLS One required Wells Manufacturing or approved equal One Model MOD-200TDM/AF drop-in hot food well as previously specified for Item 101. ITEM 136 SHEET PANS Provided by Owner. ITEM 137 DROP-IN STAINLESS STEEL SINK WITH FAUCET One required Eagle Group or approved equal One Model SR19-16-13.5-1 drop-in hand sink with the following: A. One T&S Model 313303 faucet with 12” spout. B. P-trap. ITEM 138 DISPOSER One required In-Sink-Erator or approved equal Salvajor model One Model LC50-11 disposer as previously specified for Item 109. ITEM 139 UNDERCOUNTER DISHWASHER One required Hobart or approved equal One Model LXeR undercounter dishwasher as previously specified for Item 110. ITEM 140 FOUR SLICE TOASTER One required Hatco or approved equal One Model TPT-120 toaster. ITEM 141 ICE MAKER DISPENSER WITH WATER One required Hoshizaki or approved equal One Model DCM-270 ice maker dispenser with water dispenser as previously specified for Item 112. ITEM 142 FOUR SLICE TOASTERS Two required Hatco or approved equal Two Model TPT-120 toasters. ITEM 143 Two required 13032-2
45 # ICE AND WATER DISPENSERS 11 40 00-48
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
Servend or approved equal Two Model M-45 ice and water dispensers with the following accessories for each: A. Push button ice dispenser. B. Water dispenser. C. 4” leg kit. D. Manual fill from Item 162. ITEM
144
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM 145 HAND SINKS WITH ELECTRONIC FAUCETS Two required Eagle or approved equal fabricated equal model Two Model YHSA-SPEC*2 wall-mounted hand sink, 16 ga. #304 S/S, each with a Z-bracket, 14 gauge S/S three-sided apron. Include the following accessories for each: A. One T&S Model EC-3100, deck-mounted touch free electronic faucets with mixing valve, #GN2AH8 gooseneck spout and aerator. Include two sets of alkaline batteries for each faucet. B. Pre-cut hole for the faucet. C. 17 1/2" high backsplash installed on a S/S Z-clip. Mount to the wall with S/S anchors. D. Custom bowl size - 14" x 12" x 10" deep bowl. E. Chrome P-trap with offset rear overflow. F. Marine edge on the front and both sides. G. ADA approved 14 ga. S/S apron mounted with S/S anchors. H. 1 1/2" S/S basket strainer. I. FSEC shall provide the GC with detailed drawings for wall blocking to support the S/S anchors for this item. ITEM 146 SOAP AND PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS Provided by Owner. ITEM 147 SMALL WASTE BASKETS Provided by Owner. ITEM 148 DROP-IN HOT FOOD WELLS Two required Wells Manufacturing or approved equal Two Model MOD-300TDM/AF drop-in hot food wells as previously specified for Item 101. ITEM 149 DROP-IN HEATED PLATE DISPENSERS Two required Piper Products or approved equal Two Model ATH-75 drop-in heated plate dispensers with plate cover. ITEM 150 MOBILE PAN SHELVING Lot required InterMetro or approved equal Amco, Eagle, Focus or Nexel model Provide the following: A. Five Model A2436NK3 shelves. B. Four Model 63UPK3 posts. C. Two Model 5M swivel casters. D. Two Model 5MB locking swivel casters. ITEM 151 SLANTING RACK SHELF Specified as part of Item 153. ITEM 152 DISPOSER One required In-Sink-Erator or approved equal Salvajor model One Model SS-150-7-AS101 complete disposer package with the following: A. Syphon breaker. 13032-2
11 40 00-49
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
B. C. D. E. F.
Solenoid valve. Flow control valve. Short body. 7” collar adaptor. One T & S Model B-0455 vacuum breaker assembly.
ITEM 153 DISHTABLE One required Fabricate One custom fabricated dishtable with slanting rack shelf as shown on the Drawings. ITEM 154 SPRAY AND FILL ASSEMBLY One required T&S Brass or approved equal Chicago model One Model B-0131-ADF12-BC pre-rinse spray with a Model B-0156 Add-a-Faucet with aerator. ITEM 155 ELEVATED UNDERCOUNTER DISHWASHER ON STAND One required Hobart or approved equal One Model LXeR undercounter dishwasher as previously specified for Item 110 with 17” stainless steel stand with storage. ITEM 156 COOKING COUNTER WITH SINK One required Fabricate One custom fabricated S/S cooking counter with sink with a 14 ga. S/S top as shown on the Drawings with the following accessories: A. One 20” x 21” x 10” deep sink with T & S splash-mounted faucet. B. 10” high backsplash. C. S/S wall flashing as previously specified for Item 56 for the entire wall surface between doorways. D. Provisions for the installation of 167 and 168. E. Full undershelf. F. Legs, feet and crossrails as shown on the Drawings. G. Control panel for Item 168 mounted in a reinforced vertical panel as shown on the Drawings. H. 12” wide cutting board (not shown) mounted on counter with plate shelf below. ITEM 157 EXHAUST HOOD WITH FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM One required Captive Aire or approved equal Avtec, Gaylord, Halton or Streivor approved equal One Model 4824 ND-2-PSP-F, 5’ 6” long exhaust hood as shown on Sheet FS8.1 with a typical hanging height of 6'-8" above finished floor with a maximum hood height of 30”, this applies for all hoods for this project. Provide a complete kitchen exhaust canopy with fire suppression system and S/S wall flashing in the locations shown on the Drawings and further specified for Items 56 and 57. ITEM 158 WORKCOUNTER WITH WALL SHELF One required Fabricate One custom fabricated S/S workcounter with a 14 ga. S/S top as shown on the Drawings with the following accessories: A. 10” high backsplash. B. Provisions for the installation of 159. C. Full undershelf. D. Legs, feet and crossrails as shown on the Drawings. E. 12” wide wall-mounted overshelf as shown on the Drawings. F. Partial undershelf. ITEM 13032-2
159
UNDERCOUNTER FREEZER 11 40 00-50
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
One required Traulsen or approved equal Continental or Utility model One Model ULT27-R undercounter freezer with front breathing condenser and 2½” casters. ITEM 160 S/S WALL FLASHING Lot required Fabricate One lot of S/S wall flashing as previously specified for Item 57. ITEM 161 REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR One required Traulsen or approved equal One Model RHT132WUT-HHS reach-in refrigerator as previously specified for Item 106. ITEM 162 ICE MAKER WITH BIN One required Manitowoc or approved equal One Model QD-0272A ice maker with bin with factory recommended water filter. ITEM 163 JUICE DISPENSERS Provided by Owner’s Beverage Supplier. ITEM 164 COFFEE MAKERS Provided by Owner’s Beverage Supplier. ITEM 165 BREATH GUARDS Two required Brass Smith or approved equal English model (this applies to all breath guards for this project) Two Z guard complete breath guard systems including Model ZG9500-4 – single service, adjustable front panel breath guard protector and vertical top panel with 3/8” thick tempered glass as shown on the Drawings with the following accessories for each: A. Full length breath protector as shown with slim line heat lamp and light above Item 148 with remote controls and switches for heat lamp and lights mounted in the control panel of the base cabinet. B. Brushed S/S supports in the Architect’s choice of color. C. Field coordinate post configuration with counter fabrication. D. Minimum number of four support posts, coordinate the breath guard posts to provide adequate support for the breath protectors and accessories. E. Full end protector for each end exposed to customer service. This applies to all breath guards for this project. F. MWU5 or SSU undercounter post mounting with reinforced attachment to counter body. This applies to all Brass Smith breath guards for this project. Provide angle bracket mounting devices with adequate reinforcement for supporting the weight of the breath guard and associated heat lamp and lights for each of the stainless or millwork counters. Coordination of the post mounting is the responsibility of the FSEC. G. Coordinate the breath guard posts to provide adequate support for the breath protectors. ITEM
166
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM 167 INDUCTION COOKTOP One required CookTek or approved equal One Model MC1800 induction cooktop. ITEM 168 DROP-IN GRIDDLE One required Well Manufacturing or approved equal One Model G-196 drop-in griddle with the following accessories: A. Chrome plated griddle surface. 13032-2
11 40 00-51
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
B. C. D. ITEM
Coordinate control mounting requirements with Item 156. Removable side and rear splashguard. 208/1 electrical configuration. 169
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM 170 FOUR SLICE TOASTERS Two required Hatco or approved equal Two Model TPT-120 toasters. ITEM
171
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM 172 45 # ICE AND WATER DISPENSERS Two required Servend or approved equal Two Model M-45 ice and water dispensers with the following accessories for each: A. Push button ice dispenser. B. Water dispenser. C. 4” leg kit. D. Manual fill from Item 162. ITEM 173 HAND SINKS WITH ELECTRONIC FAUCETS Two required Eagle or approved equal fabricated equal model Two Model YHSA-SPEC*2 wall-mounted hand sink, 16 ga. #304 S/S, each with a Z-bracket, 14 gauge S/S three-sided apron. Include the following accessories for each: A. One T&S Model EC-3100, deck-mounted touch free electronic faucets with mixing valve, #GN2AH8 gooseneck spout and aerator. Include two sets of alkaline batteries for each faucet. B. Pre-cut hole for the faucet. C. 17 1/2" high backsplash installed on a S/S Z-clip. Mount to the wall with S/S anchors. D. Custom bowl size - 14" x 12" x 10" deep bowl. E. Chrome P-trap with offset rear overflow. F. Marine edge on the front and both sides. G. ADA approved 14 ga. S/S apron mounted with S/S anchors. H. 1 1/2" S/S basket strainer. I. FSEC shall provide the GC with detailed drawings for wall blocking to support the S/S anchors for this item. ITEM 174 SOAP AND PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS Provided by Owner. ITEM 175 SMALL WASTE BASKETS Provided by Owner. ITEM 176 DROP-IN HOT FOOD WELLS Two required Wells Manufacturing or approved equal Two Model MOD-300TDM/AF drop-in hot food wells as previously specified for Item 101. ITEM 177 DROP-IN HEATED PLATE DISPENSERS Two required Piper Products or approved equal Two Model ATH-75 drop-in heated plate dispensers. ITEM 178 MOBILE PAN SHELVING Lot required InterMetro or approved equal Amco, Eagle, Focus or Nexel model Provide the following: 13032-2
11 40 00-52
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
A. B. C. D.
Five Model A2436NK3 shelves. Four Model 63UPK3 posts. Two Model 5M swivel casters. Two Model 5MB locking swivel casters.
ITEM 179 SLANTING RACK SHELF Specified as part of Item 181. ITEM 180 DISPOSER One required In-Sink-Erator or approved equal Salvajor model One Model SS-150-7-AS101 “short body” complete disposer package with the following: A. Syphon breaker. B. Solenoid valve. C. Flow control valve. D. Short body. E. 7” collar adaptor. F. One T & S Model B-0455 vacuum breaker assembly. ITEM 181 DISHTABLE One required Fabricate One custom fabricated dishtable as shown on the Drawings and further specified for Item 153. ITEM 182 SPRAY AND FILL ASSEMBLY One required T&S Brass or approved equal Chicago model One Model B-0131-ADF12-BC pre-rinse spray with a Model B-0156 Add-a-Faucet with aerator. ITEM 183 ELEVATED UNDERCOUNTER DISHWASHER ON STAND One required Hobart or approved equal One Model LXeR undercounter dishwasher as previously specified for Item 155. ITEM 184 WORKCOUNTER WITH WALL SHELF One required Fabricate One custom fabricated workcounter as shown on the Drawings and further specified for Item 158. ITEM 185 UNDERCOUNTER FREEZER One required Traulsen or approved equal One Model ULT27-R undercounter freezer as previously specified for Item 159. ITEM 186 S/S WALL FLASHING Lot required Fabricate One lot of S/S wall flashing as previously specified for Item 160. ITEM 187 REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR One required Traulsen or approved equal Continental or Utility model One Model RHT132WUT-HHS reach-in refrigerator as previously specified for Item 161. ITEM 188 COOKING COUNTER WITH SINK One required Fabricate One cooking counter with sink as previously specified for Item 156. 13032-2
11 40 00-53
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
ITEM 189 EXHAUST HOOD WITH FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM One required Fabricate One exhaust hood with fire suppression system as previously specified for Item 157. ITEM 190 ICE MAKER WITH BIN One required Manitowoc or approved equal One Model QD-0272A ice maker with bin as previously specified for Item 162. ITEM 191 JUICE DISPENSERS Provided by Owner’s Beverage Supplier. ITEM 192 COFFEE MAKERS Provided by Owner’s Beverage Supplier. ITEM 193 BREATH GUARDS Two required BSI or approved equal Two Model ZG9500-4 breath guards systems as previously specified for Item 165. ITEM
194
OPEN NUMBER
ITEM 195 INDUCTION COOKTOP One required CookTek or approved equal One Model MC1800 induction cooktop. ITEM 196 DROP-IN GRIDDLE One required Well Manufacturing One Model G-196 drop-in griddle as further specified for Item 168. END OF SECTION 11 40 00 070614
13032-2
11 40 00-54
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
SECTION 11 73 10 CEILING GANTRY LIFT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Ceiling mounted gantry lift with accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
B.
Division 26: Electrical connections.
1.03 REFERENCES A.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
Ceiling mounted lift system consisting of two fixed rails and one traversing rail with an electric traversing lift mounted to track.
1.05 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for each component of lift system specified. Include component dimensions, configurations, construction details, attachments, utility and service requirements and locations.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate track locations, cross sections, rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances, all required clearances, power requirements, utility connections and control locations.
D.
Operation Data: Provide documentation of operation and maintenance requirements.
E.
Warranty: Provide one year manufacturer's warranty for scale equipment.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of experience.
C.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A.
Deliver equipment to project site in protective packaging. Store in clean, dry and moisture controlled environment.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Coordinate lift installation with size, location and installation of service utilities.
1.09 WARRANTY A.
Provide one year manufacturer warranty for scale equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Basis of Design: Waverly Glen C-625 www.prismmedicalinc.com
B.
or comparable.
2.02 COMPONENTS A.
Provide required fixed ceiling track with anchor brackets suited for building structure along with necessary accessories for attachment..
B.
Aluminum track sized for load applications and span.
C.
Traverse Boom: Aluminum track that moves along the fixed track rails.
13032-2
11 73 10 - 1
FLOOR SCALES
D.
Ceiling Lift Unit: Powered lift with the following: 1. Weight capacity: 625 lbs. 2. Traverse wheel set. 3. Programmable speeds. 4. Charger contact. 5. Hand controllor connected to pneumatic lift controls. 6. Retracting cord connected to hand control. 7. Carry Bar: Sized to meet lift use/capacity and with locking clips. Connects to and suspends sling. 8. Lift Strap and Lanyard: Shall exceed lift capacity by 4 times minimum. 9. Slings: To be ordered separately by the Owner. 10. Emergency Pull Cord: Allows for instant disconnect of power to the lift unit. Shall allow lowering of the carry bar in case of hand control failure. 11. Manual lowering capability. 12. Digital readout of lift operation, battery life, lift counter and diagnostics. Capability of user input options. 13. Removable cover for access to lift components. 14. Traverse arrow directions. 15. "Charging" and "on" LED indicators. 16. Lifting Height: 80 inches.
E.
Charging Station: To allow parking of lift for recharge.
2.03 ACCESSORIES A.
Carry Bar Holder: Wall mounted accessory to hold carry bar and store slings.
B.
Sling: Manufacturer's recommended sling for capacity and use.
C.
Transport End Stop: For transfer lift at opposite side of wall without modifying door header.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A.
Coordinate structural requirements with truss manufacturer for point load locations and loading requirements.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 SYSTEMS STARTUP A.
Provide manufacturer's field representative to prepare, calibrate and start equipment.
B.
Adjust for proper operation within manufacturer's published tolerances.
C.
Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to Owner's designated representative.
3.04 CLEANING A.
Clean exposed surfaces.
B.
Protect installed unit from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION
13032-2
11 73 10 - 2
FLOOR SCALES
SECTION 12 22 16 DRAPERY TRACK AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Drapes
B.
Extruded aluminum track.
1.02 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide track profiles, acceptable load data, and finishes available.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate end track location, width of window opening, location of blocking for anchors, appurtenances and interferences, adjacent construction, operating hardware, and support bracket details.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.
Drapery and Track: Refer to master Color Schedule on ID Drawings for basis of design. 1. Comparable Supplier: Inn Fashion, 800-209-0156 www.barwickinnfashion.com 2. See Division 1 for Substitution procedure.
2.02 COMPONENTS A.
Tracks: Extruded aluminum, bi-parting operating traverse rods, heavy duty channel track.
B.
Track Brackets: Manufacturer's standard formed steel with screws and inserts for attachment.
C.
Carriers: Nylon roller
D.
Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic; square shape; removable type; 48 inches long.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Verify that concealed anchors are in correct position.
3.02 INSTALLATION A.
Install drapes and tracks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Extend track 12 inches both sides with window trim for single track; 18 inches for double track where exposed. END OF SECTION
13032-2
12 22 16 - 1
DRAPERY TRACK AND ACCESSORIES
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 12 24 00 WINDOW SHADES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.
Window shades and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern the work of this section.
A.
Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrail brackets.
B.
12 22 16 - Drapery Track and Accessories.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; 2009.
B.
NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films; 2010.
C.
WCMA A100.1 - Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Window Covering Manufacturers Association; 2012. (ANSI/WCMA A101.1)
1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including materials, finishes, fabrication details, dimensions, profiles, mounting requirements, and accessories.
C.
Shop Drawings: Include shade schedule indicating size, location and keys to details.
D.
Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed warranty completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver shades in manufacturer's unopened packaging, labeled to identify each shade for each opening.
B.
Handle and store shades in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS-SHADE CLOTH SYSTEM A.
Manual operated transparent solar shading product. 1. Basis of Design: Pfiffer Sheer Weave, Style 2000 5% open, chain control mechanism with round fabric insert fascia. 2. MechoShade 3. Kirsch; www.kirsch.com 4. SWF Contract Shading Systems: www.swfcontract.com 5. The Blindman Commercial 651-485-2731 6. Graber, Division of Springs Industries, Inc.; www.graberblinds.com 7. Wisconsin Draperies; www.wiscdrapery.com 8. The C-Mor Co.; 800-631-3830. www.cmorcompany.com 9. Inn Fashion, 800-209-0156 www.barwickinnfashion.com 10. See Division 1 for substitution procedure.
2.02 WINDOW SHADE APPLICATIONS A.
Shades: Privacy shades. 1. Type: Pleated shades. 2. Basis of Design: Hunter Douglas, Duette Honeycomb, 3/8 inch double cell pleates with cord loop easy rise controls. 3. Mounting: Inside (between jambs).
2.03 FABRICATION A.
Field measure finished openings prior to ordering or fabrication.
B.
Fabricate shades to fit openings within specified tolerances.
13032-2
12 24 00 - 1
WINDOW SHADES
1. 2.
Vertical Dimensions: Fill openings from head to sill with 1/2 inch space between bottom bar and window stool. Horizontal Dimensions - Inside Mounting: Provide symmetrical light gaps on both sides of shade not to exceed 0.25 inches total.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.
Examine finished openings for deficiencies that may preclude satisfactory installation.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
C.
Start of installation shall be considered acceptance of substrates.
3.02 PREPARATION A.
Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving best result for substrate under the project conditions.
B.
Coordinate with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support shades.
3.03 INSTALLATION A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings, using mounting devices as indicated.
B.
Installation Tolerances: 1. Inside Mounting: Maximum space between shade and jamb when closed of 1/16 inch. 2. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/16 inch.
C.
Replace blinds that exceed specified dimensional tolerances at no extra cost to Owner.
D.
Adjust level, projection and shade centering from mounting bracket. Verify there is no telescoping of shade fabric. Ensure shades for smooth operation.
3.04 CLEANING A.
Clean soiled shades and exposed components as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Replace shades that cannot be cleaned to "like new" condition. END OF SECTION
13032-2
12 24 00 - 2
WINDOW SHADES
SECTION 21 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division 21 & 22 – Fire Protection & Plumbing Section Number
Title
21 00 00
TABLE OF CONTENTS
21 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
21 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
21 10 00
WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION
22 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 05 14
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
22 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
22 07 00
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 11 12
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
22 13 92
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
22 16 00
GENERAL SERVICE NATURAL GAS SYSTEM
22 30 00
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES
END OF DOCUMENT 21 00 00
13032-2
21 00 00- 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
SECTION 21 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL SCOPE This section includes information common to two or more technical fire protection specification sections or items that are of a general nature, not conveniently fitting into other technical sections. Included are the following topics: PART 1 - GENERAL Scope Related Work Related Documents Regulatory Requirements Reference Standards Quality Assurance Abbreviations and Symbols Definitions Coordination Protection of Finished Surfaces Sleeves and Openings Sealing and Firestopping Equipment Furnished By Others Provisions for Future Off Site Storage Submittals Operating and Maintenance Instructions Record Drawings Training of Owner Personnel Testing Cleaning Warranty PART 2 - PRODUCTS Access Panels and Doors Pipe Penetrations Identification Equipment Accessories Gauges Sealing and Firestopping PART 3 - EXECUTION Concrete Work Openings, Cutting and Patching Building Access Equipment Access Coordination of Work Pipe Penetrations Identification 13032-2
21 05 00 - 1
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Lubrication and Maintenance Sleeves RELATED WORK Provisions of Division 01 shall govern work under this Section. This section applies to all Division 21 Sections of Fire Suppression. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Refer to Division 01 of the Project Manual. Codes and Standards: Fire Protection work shall conform to the requirements of Wisconsin Building Code (SPS), NFPA Standards, and local regulations regarding design, materials and installation. Materials and workmanship shall comply with applicable Codes, local ordinances, industry standards and utility regulations. In case of differences between Codes, and the Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Non-Compliance: Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with the above requirements, he shall bear all costs necessary to correct the deficiencies. Permits, Inspections, and Fees: Request and obtain permits and inspection appointments. Provide fees and charges for approvals, reviews, or other inspections. Include copies of the certificates in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions. Fees and charges assessed by local utilities for water or other services shall be included in the bid. REFERENCE STANDARDS Abbreviations of standards organizations referenced in this and other sections are as follows: AGA American Gas Association ANSI American National Standards Institute ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPE American society of Plumbing Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWWA American Water Works Association AWS American Welding Society CGA Compressed Gas Association CS Commercial Standards, Products Standards Sections, Office of Engineering Standards Service, NBS EPA Environmental Protection Agency FM Factory Mutual System 13032-2
21 05 00 - 2
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
FS Federal Specifications, Superintendent of Documents, U.S.Government Printing Office IAPMO International Association of Plumbing & Mechanical Officials IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers ISA Instrument Society of America MCA Mechanical Contractors Association MICA Midwest Insulation Contractors Association MSS Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve & Fitting Industry, Inc. NBS National Bureau of Standards NEC National Electric Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association SPS Department of Safety and Professional Services STI Steel Tank Institute UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Division 01 of the Project Manual. All products and materials used are to be new, undamaged, clean and in good condition. Existing products and materials are not to be reused unless specifically indicated. Where equipment or accessories are used which differ in arrangement, configuration, dimensions, ratings, or engineering parameters from those indicated on the contract documents, the contractor is responsible for all costs involved in integrating the equipment or accessories into the system and for obtaining the intended performance from the system into which these items are placed. ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS Key to abbreviations and symbols shall be on the Drawings. The following are additional abbreviations used in the Specifications: A/E GC PC FPC HC EC FSEC
Architect/Engineer General Contractor Plumbing Contractor Fire Protection Contractor Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractor Electrical Contractor Food Service Equipment Contractor
DEFINITIONS Furnish: Supply and deliver to Project site ready for unpacking, assembly and installation Install: Operations at Site including unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, finishing, cleaning, and connecting related devices required for product fully functional for intended use after installation.
13032-2
21 05 00 - 3
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Provide: Furnish and install, such that product is fully functional for intended use. COORDINATION The Drawings show the general arrangement of piping and equipment and shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and the work of other trades permits. Architectural and Structural Drawings shall take precedence. Because of the scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required. PROTECTION OF FINISHED SURFACES Refer to Division 01, of the Project Manual. SEALING AND FIRESTOPPING Sealing and firestopping of sleeves/openings between piping, etc. and the sleeve or structural opening shall be the responsibility of the contractor whose work penetrates the opening. The contractor responsible shall hire individuals skilled in such work to do the sealing and fireproofing. These individuals hired shall normally and routinely be employed in the sealing and fireproofing occupation. EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS Drawings indicate equipment to be furnished or installed by Others. When providing utility connections, coordinate exact requirements, including quantity, location, elevation size, material, flow and pressure. PROVISIONS FOR FUTURE Equipment and systems shall be sized for future expansion or extension when indicated on Contract Documents or described herein. OFF SITE STORAGE Refer to Division 01 of the Project Manual. SUBMITTALS Refer to Division 01, of the Project Manual. Submit shop drawings with space for approval stamps of GC and A/E. Refer to Division 01, of the Project Manual. Not more than two weeks after award of contract but before any shop drawings are submitted, contractor to submit the following fire protection system data sheet. List piping material types, ASTM number, schedule or pressure class, joint type, manufacturer and model number where appropriate. List valves, specialties and equipment with manufacturer and model number. The approved fire protection system data sheet(s) will be made available to the Owners Project Representative for their use on this project.
13032-2
21 05 00 - 4
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM DATA SHEET Item Pipe Service/Sizes Manufacturer/Model No. Pipe Fittings Hangers & Supports Sprinkler Heads Valves Specialty Valves Pipe Specialties Fire Protection Specialties Fire Protection Equipment
Remarks
Shop drawing submittals are to be bound in a three ring binder, labeled, contain the project manual cover page and a material index list page showing item designation, manufacturer and additional items supplied with the installation. Submit for all equipment and systems as indicated in the respective specification sections, marking each submittal with that specification section number. Mark general catalog sheets and drawings to indicate specific items being submitted and proper identification of equipment by name and/or number, as indicated in the contract documents. Include wiring diagrams of electrically powered equipment. Submittals shall be sent to the local Fire Chief or Fire Marshal for review prior to the Architect/Engineer. Include copy of approval letter in submission to Architect/Engineer. Submit plans indicating water supply location and size, piping layout and size, sprinkler locations and type, hanger locations and type, equipment locations and type, valve locations and type, occupancy classes, hydraulic reference points, design areas and discharge densities. Submit hydraulic calculations for water supply and sprinkler systems. Include summary sheet and detailed work sheets. Describe characteristics of water supply and location of effective point used in calculations. Include graph illustration of water supply, hose demand, and sprinkler demand. Submit sufficient quantities of data sheets and shop drawings to allow the following distribution: Operating and Maintenance Manuals 2 copies Architect/Engineer 2 copies Local Fire Chief or Marshal 1 copy Firestop Systems: Contractor shall submit product data for each firestop system. Submittals shall include product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria, test data, MSDS sheets, installation details and procedures for each method of installation applicable to this project. For non-standard conditions where no UL tested system exists, submit manufacturer's drawings for UL system with known performance for which an engineering judgement can be based upon. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Refer to Division 01 of the Project Manual. 13032-2
21 05 00 - 5
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Assemble material in three-ring or post binders, using an index at the front of each volume and tabs for each system or type of equipment. In addition to the data indicated in the General Requirements, include the following information: Copies of all approved submittals along with approval letters. Manufacturer's wiring diagrams for electrically powered equipment. Records of tests performed to certify compliance with system requirements. Certificates of inspection by regulatory agencies. Parts lists for equipment and specialties. Manufacturer’s installation, operation and maintenance recommendations for equipment and specialties. Valve schedules Lubrication instructions, including list/frequency of lubrication Warranties Additional information as indicated in the technical specification sections RECORD DRAWINGS Refer to Division 01 of the Project Manual. In addition to the data indicated in the General Requirements, maintain fire protection layout record drawings and hydraulic calculations on originals prepared by the installing contractor/subcontractor. Include copies of these record drawings and calculations with the Operating and Maintenance manuals. TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper operation, maintenance and testing of systems and equipment provided as part of this project. Include not less than 4 hours of instruction, using the Operating and Maintenance manuals and record drawings during this instruction. Demonstrate testing, startup and shutdown procedures for all equipment. All training to be during normal working hours. Videotape all instructions and provide Owner with copy. TESTING Equipment, material and labor required for testing, shall be provided by the Contractor. Contractor shall notify Inspector(s) one day prior to the time when the test is ready to be performed. Contractor shall notify the A/E of date and time for tests. After the test, indicate in writing the time, date, name and title of the person approving the test. This shall also include the description and what portion of the system has been tested. The person approving the test shall sign the certification. Records shall be maintained of testing that has been completed, and shall be made available at the job site to authorities. Upon completion of the work, records and certifications approving testing requirements shall be submitted. Defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired, and the test repeated. Repairs shall be made with new materials.
13032-2
21 05 00 - 6
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
CLEANING Contractor shall keep the premises broom clean and free of all surplus materials, rubbish and debris which is caused by his employees or resulting from his work. Foreign matter shall be blown out, or flushed out, of pipes, tanks, pumps, strainers, motors, devices, switches, and panels. Identification plates on equipment shall be free of paint and dirt. The Contractor shall leave his portion of the work ready for operation. WARRANTY Warrant that work functions for one year following acceptance of the system(s). The Contractor shall keep the system in good working order at no expense, unless defects are clearly the result of improper or abnormal usage. The Contractor shall submit to the A/E upon request for acceptance of the work, written certification that the entire system has been installed and adjusted for operation in accordance with the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS General: Work shall conform to requirements of Division 26. Provide wiring diagrams. Motors: Motors smaller than ½ HP shall be NEMA standard motors rated for 120 volts, AC, single phase, 60 Hz. Motors shall be capacitor start and capacitor run type and shall have internal overload protection. Motors ½ HP and larger shall be NEMA standard motors rated for specified voltage, AC, three phase and 60 Hz. Motors shall be Design B, squirrel cage, open drip-proof construction with standard T frame, ball bearings, Class B insulation, single winding, continuous duty rated and 1.15 service factor unless noted otherwise. Minimum power factor for motors one HP and larger is 85% at rated capacity. Capacitors for power factor correction are not acceptable. Provide devices for motor overload protection unless integral with equipment. Devices shall be sized according to actual measured current draw with motor operating under normal load conditions. Provide temporary protective devices where installation is not complete.
13032-2
21 05 00 - 7
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
Motor Starters: Provide a combination starter for each motor. Starter shall conform to Allen-Bradley Co. Bulletin 512, consisting of a Bulletin 509 full voltage starter and non-fusible disconnect switch mounted in a NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosure. Starter shall be equipped as standard with block type overload relays and external reset buttons. Starter shall be equipped as standard with a transformer to provide a 120V, 60 Hz, secondary control circuit. Provide a three position Hand-Off-Auto selector switch for field installation in the enclosure flange: A-B Catalog No. 1481-N51A or 1481-N51B. ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS Provide access panels at locations requiring access to mechanical equipment. Locations include, but are not limited to areas above drywall ceilings, shaft enclosures and other furred-in spaces concealing valves, ducts or equipment. Provide UL listed, fire rated access panels when penetrating fire rated chase or shaft areas. Access panels shall be of size required to provide adequate access to equipment. Minimum size shall be 12 inch by 12 inch for hand access and 24 inch by 24 inch for body access. Panels shall be Milcor brand or equivalent. Panels shall include concealed hinges, cam type locking devices, and have frame/border type necessary for particular wall or ceiling construction they are installed. Access panels shall be flush mounted, recessed frame type units. Access panels shall be prime coated steel, able to accept field painting for general applications and stainless steel for use in toilet rooms, shower rooms and similar wet areas. Refer to Architectural Room Finish Schedule for wall and ceiling surfaces and finishes. For non-security applications, panel construction shall utilize 16 gauge frame with not less than 18 gauge hinged door panel. Door locks shall be screwdriver operated for panels in general location applications and shall be key locked for public area applications. For security area applications, panel construction shall utilize 16 gauge frame with not less than 14 gauge hinged door panel. Door locks shall be locking type. Furnish and install locking devices in accordance with types specified in Division 11. PIPE PENETRATIONS Refer to Division 01 requirements as well as the following.
13032-2
21 05 00 - 8
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Fire, Smoke And Fire/Smoke Rated Surfaces: 3M CP 25N/S or CP 25S/L caulk, 3M FS 195 wrap/strip with restricting collar, 3M CS 195 composite sheet, Pipe Shields Inc. Series F fire barrier kits, Proset Systems fire rated floor and wall penetrations, Insta-Foam Products Insta-Fire Seal Firestop Foam or Dow Corning Fire Stop System. All fire stopping systems shall be provided by the same manufacturer. UL listed or tested by independent testing laboratory, approved by State and Local Code jurisdictions. Use product that has a rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. Reference architectural drawings for identification of fire and/or smoke rated walls and floors. Sleeves in concrete to be Schedule 40 steel pipe with integral water stop unless fire stop material used includes a sleeve that is an integral part of rated assembly. Use firestop putty, caulk sealant, intumescent wrapstrips, intumescent firestop collars, firestop blocks, firestop mortar or a combination of these products to provide a UL listed system for each application required for this project. Provide mineral wool backing where specified in manufacturer's application detail. Non-Rated Surfaces: Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor/ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied spaces. In exterior wall openings below grade, use modular mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the un-insulated pipe and cored opening or a water-stop type wall sleeve. At interior partitions where pipe penetrations are sealed, use Tremco Dymonic, Sika Corp. Sikaflex 1a, Sonneborn Sonolastic NPI, or Mameco Vulken 116 urethane caulk to effectively seal. Use galvanized sheet metal sleeves in hollow wall penetrations. EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION Equipment Labels: After painting and covering, identify equipment, including pumps, tanks, compressors, and control panels. Locate identification conspicuously. Identification of equipment shall be by engraved white letters on a black 1/16 inch thick plastic laminate panel, beveled edges, screw mounting, permanently attached to the equipment. Minimum size: 3/4" x 2 1/2" with 3/8" letters. Manufacturers: Setonply ® Style 2060 by Seton Name Plate Company or Emedolite Style EIP by EMED Co., or equal by W. H. Brady.
13032-2
21 05 00 - 9
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Pipe Identification: Pipe identification shall conform to ANSI A13.1 "Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems". Printed labels identifying the fluid conveyed and direction of flow shall be attached to pipes in accessible locations, at intervals not to exceed 20 feet, not less than once in each room, at each branch, adjacent to each access door or panel, at each valve and where exposed piping passes through walls and floors. Outside Diameter of Pipe Covering up to 1¼" 1½" to 2" 2½" to 6"
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Minimum Size of Letters ½" ¾" 1½"
Manufacturers: EMED Co., Seton Name Plate Company, or W. H. Brady. Stencils: Not less than 1 inch high letters/numbers for marking pipe and equipment. Valve Tags: Identify each valve by means of 1½" diameter brass tag fastened to body of valve with copper or brass chain. Identification number shall be stamped thereon with letters a minimum of ½" high. System identification abbreviation shall be stamped with letters a minimum of ¼” high. The following prefixes shall be used: SPKR - Sprinklers Manufacturers: EMED Co., Seton Name Plate Company, or W. H. Brady. Valve Charts: Furnish three charts listing each valve. Two charts shall be delivered to A/E. An additional chart shall be framed behind glass and hung in location selected by Owner. Charts shall show the following: Valve number Manufacturer Type of service
Size Type of valve Location
Furnish typewritten chart indicating equipment or areas served by each numbered valve and incorporate in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES Provide equipment accessories, connections, and incidental items. Install piping connecting to pumps and other equipment without strain at the piping connection. If requested by the A/E, remove the bolts in these flanged connections, or disconnect piping, to demonstrate that piping has been properly connected. 13032-2
21 05 00 - 10
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
GAUGES Acceptable Manufacturers: American, Taylor, Trerice, U.S. Gauge, Weiss, or Winters Instruments. Pressure Gauges: Industrial quality with phosphor bronze bourdon tube, brass socket, 3½ inch dial face, bronze bushed movement, aluminum case with black finish, white background, black figures readable by person standing on floor. Ranges shall be as follows: Fire Protection Water: 0 to 200 psig
PART 3 - EXECUTION GENERAL Coordination Of Work: Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications and report discrepancies to the A/E. Obtain written instructions for changes necessary. Coordinate with each trade prior to beginning installation and make provisions to avoid interferences. Changes required caused by neglect to coordinate shall be made without expense to the project. Piping shall not be located above electrical panels. Anchor Bolts, Sleeves, and Supports: These items required for the Work shall be furnished by the FPC for proper installation of his work. They shall be installed (except as otherwise specified) by the trade furnishing and installing the material in which they are to be located. Location of anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and supports shall be directed by the trade requiring them. Expense resulting from the improper location or installation of anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and supports shall be paid for by the Contractor for the trade with responsibility for directing their proper location. Adjustments In Locations: Locations of pipes and equipment, shall be adjusted to accommodate the work interferences anticipated and encountered. Prior to fabrication determine the exact route and location of each pipe (subject to A/E's approval). Right Of Way: New lines which pitch shall have the right-of-way over those which do not pitch. For example: Gravity drains shall normally have right-of-way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have the right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed. Notify A/E and other trades of conflicts. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction of electrical raceways, pipes, and ducts shall be made to maintain proper room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the Drawings.
13032-2
21 05 00 - 11
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
CONCRETE WORK Cast-in-place concrete within the building will be performed by the Division 03 Contractor unless otherwise noted. Provide all layout drawings, anchor bolts, metal shapes, and/or templates required to be cast into concrete or used to form concrete for support or installation of plumbing piping, fixtures, specialties and equipment. Coordinate locations of equipment, pipe penetrations in wet areas, etc. with the Division 03 Contractor. Plumbing related cast-in-place concrete on the exterior of the building to be provided by this Contractor in conformance with requirements of Division 03. This includes piping thrust restraints, pipe supports, hydrant supports, manholes, catch basins, grease traps, septic tanks, distribution boxes, valve pits, meter pits, cleanout cover pads, yard hydrant pads, etc. OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING Refer to Division 01 requirements. Provisions for openings including chases, holes and clearances through walls, floors, and roof, ceilings and partitions shall be made in advance of construction of each part of the building. Openings shall (except for pipe sleeves) be provided by the GC for the respective materials in which openings occur, during the construction of the building with the exception of pipe sleeves. Furnish required opening dimensions and locations. If the FPC neglects to inform the GC of his opening requirements before that portion of the building is complete, the FPC shall cut the openings, provide framing and lintels. In the event holes must be cut through reinforced concrete, drill so as to avoid spalling and unnecessary damage or weakening of structural members. No chopping or breaking out is permitted. Before cutting or drilling, the Contractor shall obtain permission from the A/E. Patch adjacent materials and repair damage resulting from the cutting. BUILDING ACCESS Arrange for the necessary openings in the building to allow for admittance of all apparatus. When the building access was not previously arranged and must be provided by this contractor, restore any opening to its original condition after the apparatus has been brought into the building. EQUIPMENT ACCESS Install all piping, valves, and accessories to permit access to equipment for maintenance. Coordinate the exact location of wall and ceiling access panels and doors with the General Contractor, making sure that access is available for all equipment and specialties. Where access is required in plaster walls or ceilings, furnish the access doors to the General Contractor. Accessible ceilings, (i.e. lay-in ceilings) do not require access panels. Provide color coded thumb tacks or screws, depending on surface, for use in accessible ceilings. COORDINATION OF WORK Install systems, equipment and piping in cooperation with other trades. Locations of pipes, equipment, fixtures, etc., shall be adjusted to accommodate the work interferences anticipated and encountered. Prior to fabrication determine the exact route and location of each pipe (subject to A/E's approval). 13032-2
21 05 00 - 12
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
Any work that is not coordinated and that interferes with other contractor's work shall be removed or relocated at the installing contractor's expense. Verify that all devices are compatible for the type of construction and surfaces on which they will be used. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction of electrical raceways, pipes and ducts shall be made as required whether or not indicated on the Drawings. Provide appropriate sections of work with required wall, roof and floor opening locations and dimensions. If Contractor neglects to coordinate information, openings shall be the responsibility of Contractor. PIPING INSTALLATION General: Expansion and contraction of piping shall be provided for by expansion loops, bends, swing joints, or expansion joints to prevent damage to connections, piping, and equipment of the building. Installation Arrangement: Install work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of parts requiring replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes and equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, traps, starters, motors, and control components and to clear the openings of swinging and overhead doors and of access panels. Connections Different From Those Shown: Where equipment requiring different arrangement or connections from those shown is used, install the equipment to operate properly and in harmony with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications. When requested by the A/E, submit drawings showing the proposed installation. Upon approval of the revisions, make changes in piping, ductwork, supports, insulation, wiring, and panelboards. Provide additional motors, controllers, valves, fittings and other additional equipment required for the proper operation of the system resulting from the selection of equipment, including required changes in affected trades. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location of rough-in and connections by other trades. Changes shall be made at no increase in the Contract amount or additional cost to the other trades. LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE Lubricate bearings with lubricant as recommended by manufacturer before equipment is operated for any reason. Once equipment has been run, maintain lubrication in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions until the work is accepted by the Owner. Maintain log of all lubricants used and frequency of lubrication. Include information in Operating and Maintenance Manuals at completion of project.
13032-2
21 05 00 - 13
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
SLEEVES Provide galvanized sheet metal sleeves for fire rated pipe penetrations through interior and exterior walls to provide a backing for sealant or firestopping. Patch wall around sleeve to match adjacent wall construction and finish. Grout area around sleeve in masonry construction. In finished spaces where pipe penetration through wall is exposed to view, sheet metal sleeve shall be installed flush with face of wall. In existing poured concrete walls where penetration is core drilled, pipe sleeve is not required. Grout holes directly around steel pipe. In all piping floor penetrations, fire rated and non-fire rated, top of sleeve shall extend 3/4 inch above the adjacent finished floor. In existing floor penetrations, core drill sleeve opening large enough to insert schedule 40 sleeve and grout area around sleeve with hydraulic setting, non-shrink grout. If the pipe penetrating the sleeve is supported by a pipe clamp resting on the sleeve, weld a collar or struts to the sleeve that will transfer weight to existing floor structure. PIPE PENETRATIONS General: Coordinate location of building surface penetrations with appropriate contractors. Furnish sleeves, inserts, and devices to be built into structure to contractor performing Work. Prepare Shop Drawings for approval for penetrations of structural elements, including floor slabs, shear walls, and bearing walls. Do not allow penetrations to be made until Shop Drawings are approved. Fire Rated Surfaces: Install products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions where pipe penetrates a fire rated surface. When pipe is insulated, use product that maintains integrity of insulation and vapor barrier. Where sleeve must be installed in existing floor, grout area around sleeve to restore floor integrity. In wet area floor penetration, top surface of penetration to be 2 inches above adjacent floor with additional height obtained by means of concrete pad poured integral with floor. Non-Rated Surfaces: Install escutcheons or floor/ceiling plates where pipe penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Size units to accommodate insulation, where applicable. Escutcheons are not required when insulation completely covers wall opening and insulation end is trimmed in a neat manner. Occupied spaces for this Paragraph include only those rooms with finished ceilings and penetration occurs below ceiling. In exterior wall openings below grade, place water-stop type wall sleeve before concrete pour or core drill opening after pour. Assemble rubber links to proper size for pipe and tighten in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install galvanized sheet metal sleeve in hollow wall penetrations to provide backing for sealant. Apply sealant to both sides of penetration in a manner that annular space between pipe sleeve and pipe or insulation is completely blocked. Completely seal (or caulk) around pipe penetrations through non-rated, smoke tight corridor walls in healthcare facilities. Refer to architectural drawings for additional information. 13032-2
21 05 00 - 14
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Completely seal pipe penetrations, as specified below, for walls of the following rooms below: Non-fire rated mechanical rooms Isolation rooms Conference rooms Private offices ESCUTCHEON PLATES Provide plates on pipes passing through finished floors, walls and ceilings, with outside diameter to cover sleeve opening and inside diameter to fit snugly around pipe. Set tight to building surface. Escutcheon plates shall be chromium plated metal. PAINTING Refer to Division 09. IDENTIFICATION Identify equipment in mechanical equipment rooms by stenciling equipment number and service with one coat of black enamel against a light background or white enamel against a dark background. Use a primer where necessary for proper paint adhesion. Where stenciling is not appropriate for equipment identification, engraved name plates may be used. Identify interior piping mains not less than once every 25 feet, not less than once in each room, adjacent to each access door or panel, and on both sides of the partition where exposed piping passes through walls or floors. Place flow directional arrows at each pipe identification location. Use one coat of black enamel against a light background or white enamel against a dark background or approved pipe marking label systems. Identify valves with signs per NFPA rulings. Provide hydraulic design information sign of permanently marked weatherproof metal or engraved nameplate material. Secure to main fire risers/valves with brass chain. Information to include location of the design areas, discharge densities, required flow and residual pressure at the base of riser, hose stream demand and sprinkler demand.
END OF SECTION
13032-2
21 05 00 - 15
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
Page Intentionally Left Blank
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
SECTION 21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL SCOPE This section includes specifications for supports of all fire protection equipment and materials as well as piping system anchors. Included are the following topics: PART 1 - GENERAL Scope Related Work Reference Standards Quality Assurance Description Design Criteria Submittals PART 2 - PRODUCTS Manufacturers Structural Supports Pipe Hangers and Supports Beam Clamps Riser Clamps Concrete Inserts Anchors Equipment Stands Corrosive Atmosphere Coatings PART 3 - EXECUTION Installation Hanger and Support Spacing Riser Clamps Concrete Inserts Anchors RELATED WORK Provisions of Division 01 shall govern work under this Section. Division 03 - Concrete Section 21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire-Suppression Section 21 10 00 – Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems REFERENCE STANDARDS MSS SP-58 MSS SP-69 NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems ( Latest prevailing addition ). UL Underwriters' Laboratories Listed. FM Factory Mutual Approved
13032-2
21 05 29 - 1
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRESUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Division 01 of the Project Manual. DESCRIPTION Provide all supporting devices as required for the installation of mechanical equipment and materials. All supports and installation procedures are to conform to the latest requirements of the ANSI Code for building piping. Do not hang any mechanical item directly from a metal deck or run piping so its rests on the bottom chord of any truss or joist. Fasteners depending on soft lead for holding power or requiring explosive powder actuation will not be accepted. Support apparatus and material under all conditions of operation, variations in installed and operating weight of equipment and piping, to prevent excess stress, and allow for proper expansion and contraction. DESIGN CRITERIA Materials and application of pipe hangers and supports shall be in accordance with MSS Standard Practice SP-58 and SP-69 unless noted otherwise. Materials and application of pipe hangers and supports shall be in accordance with NFPA rulings and be UL/FM listed and approved. Piping connected to compressors, or other rotating or reciprocating equipment is to have vibration isolation supports for a distance of one hundred pipe diameters or three supports away from the equipment, whichever is greater. Standard pipe hangers/supports as specified in this section are required beyond the 100 pipe diameter/3 support distance. SUBMITTALS Submit data in accordance with Section 21 05 00 and Division 01 of the Project Manual. Schedule of all hanger and support devices indicating attachment methods and type of device for each pipe size and type of service. Provide details on the working drawings submitted for approval with all pertinent information listed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS B-Line, Fee and Mason, Grinnell, Hilti, Michigan Hanger, Pate, PHD Manufacturing, Piping Technology, Powers/Rawl, Proset, Roof Products & Systems, Unistrut, or Victaulic. STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS Provide all supporting steel required for the installation of mechanical equipment and materials, including angles, channels, beams, etc. to suspended or floor supported tanks and equipment. All of this steel may not be specifically indicated on the drawings.
13032-2
21 05 29 - 2
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRESUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2" through 4": Carbon steel, adjustable swivel ring with 3/8" min. UL/FM approved hanger rods. B-Line B3170NF, Grinnell 69 or 70. Carbon steel, adjustable clevis, standard, with UL/FM approved size hanger rods. BLine B3100, Grinnell 260. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 4" Through 8": Carbon steel adjustable swivel ring with ½" min. UL/FM approved hanger rods. B-Line B3170NF, Grinnell 69 or 70. Carbon steel, adjustable clevis, standard with UL/FM approved size hanger rods. B-Line B3100, Grinnell 260. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Manufactured steel channel system with manufacturers slotted interlocking pipe clamps with screw/nut securing and threaded hanger rods or steel channels with welded spacers and threaded hanger rods. Steel channel, 12-gauge thickness, Dura-Green epoxy coating, B-Line B11. Restrain individual pipes with B-Line B2000 series or Vibraclamp series strut clamps. Wall Support: Carbon steel welded bracket with hanger. B-Line 3060 Series, Grinnell 190 Series. Steel channels with pipe clamps. Vertical Support: Carbon steel riser clamp. B-Line B3373, Grinnell 261 for above floor use. Grinnell 40 with bolts and concrete anchors for attachment to underside of concrete floor deck. Floor Support: Carbon steel pipe saddle, stand and bolted floor flange. B-Line B3088T/B3093. Copper Pipe Supports: All supports, fasteners, clamps, etc. directly connected to copper piping shall be copper plated or polyvinylchloride coated. Where steel channels are used, provide flexible elastomeric/thermoplastic isolation cushion material to completely encircle the piping and avoid contact with the channel or clamp, equal to B-Line B1999 Vibra Cushion or provide manufacturers clamp and cushion assemblies, B-Line BVT series, Grinnell PS 1400 series. PIPE HANGER RODS Steel Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded, complete with adjusting and lock nuts. Steel, electro-plated, threads on both ends, B-Line B3205 Size rods for individual hangers and trapeze support as indicated in the following schedule:
13032-2
21 05 29 - 3
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRESUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Pipe Size: Up to and Including 4"
Diam. Of Rod: 3/8" or 9.5mm min.
5",6" and 8"
½" or 12.7mm min.
BEAM CLAMPS MSS SP-69 Types 19 & 23 malleable black iron clamp for attachment to beam flange to 0.62 inches thick with a retaining ring and threaded rod of 3/8, 1/2, and 5/8 inch diameter. Furnish with a hardened steel cup point set screw. B-Line B3036L/B3034, Grinnell 86/92. MSS SP-69 Type 28 or Type 29 forged steel jaw type clamp with a tie rod to lock clamp in place, suitable for rod sizes to 1-1/2 inch diameter. B-Line B3054, Grinnell 228. CONCRETE INSERTS Poured in Place: MSS SP-69 Type 18 wedge type to be constructed of a black carbon steel body with a removable malleable iron nut that accepts threaded rod to 7/8 inch diameter. Wedge design to allow the insert to be held by concrete in compression to maximize the load carrying capacity. B-Line B2505, Grinnell 281. MSS SP-69 Type 18 universal type to be constructed of black malleable iron body with a removable malleable iron nut that accepts threaded rod to 7/8 inch diameter. B-Line B3014N, Grinnell 282. Drilled Fasteners: Carbon steel expansion anchors, vibration resistant, with ASTM B633 zinc plating. Use drill bit of same manufacturer as anchor. Hilti, Powers/Rawl, Redhead. ANCHORS Use welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to secure piping to the structure. EQUIPMENT SUPPORT Support equipment plumb, rigid, and true to line. Examine Drawings, and manufacturer's data to determine how equipment and piping are to be supported, mounted, or suspended. Provide rods, bolts, inserts, pipe stands, brackets and accessories for proper support. Equipment Stands: Use structural steel members welded to and supported by pipe supports. Clean, prime and coat with three coat rust inhibiting alkyd paint or one coat epoxy mastic. Where exposed to weather, treat with corrosive atmosphere coatings. CORROSIVE ATMOSPHERE COATINGS Factory coat supports and anchors used in corrosive atmospheres with hot dip galvanizing after fabrication, ASTM A123, 1.5 ounces/square foot of surface each side. Mechanical galvanize threaded products, ASTM B695 Class 50, 2.0 mil coating. Field cuts and damaged finishes to be field covered with zinc rich paint of comparable thickness to factory coating. Corrosive atmospheres include the following locations: Chemical storage and hazardous waste storage rooms
13032-2
21 05 29 - 4
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRESUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
Food service/kitchen areas Walk-in coolers/freezers PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION Size, apply and install supports and anchors in compliance with manufacturers recommendations. Secure pipe in place to prevent vibration, maintain proper slope and provide for expansion and contraction. Design supports of strength and rigidity to suit loading, service, and manner which do not unduly stress the building construction. Where support is from concrete construction, take care not to weaken concrete or penetrate waterproofing. Fasten supports and hangers to building steel framing wherever practical. Do not use another pipe for support. Do not use perforated iron, chain or wire as hangers. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs wherever practical. Where inserts are not practical, provide channels or angles from which to suspend hangers/supports. Fasten structural steel to concrete with expansion bolts. Provide expansion anchors in concrete slabs for installation of threaded support rods. Provide hangers capable of vertical adjustment after piping is erected. Do not pierce ductwork with hanger rods. On threaded support rods and bolts, weld nuts to rods, peen threads, or provide double set of nuts with lock washers to prevent loosening. Use beam clamps for attaching hangers to structural steel. Coordinate hanger and support installation to properly group piping of all trades. Where piping can be conveniently grouped to allow the use of trapeze type supports, use standard structural shapes or continuous insert channels for the supporting steel. Where continuous insert channels are used, pipe supporting devices made specifically for use with the channels may be substituted for the specified supporting devices provided that similar types are used and all data is submitted for prior approval. Perform welding in accordance with standards of the American Welding Society. HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING Support horizontal piping per NFPA 13. Provide vertical support at each floor level as the pipe passes through the floor. For piping that does not pass through the floor, provide adequate support to stabilize the vertical portion of the piping. Provide galvanized steel supports for steel piping. Provide CPVC dipped hangers or provide Unistrut “Uni-Cushion” vinyl strip at galvanized hangers for copper lines.
13032-2
21 05 29 - 5
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRESUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Adjust hangers to obtain the slope specified in the piping section of these specifications. Space hangers for pipe as follows: Pipe Material: Copper Copper Copper Copper Steel Steel
10 11 12
3/4" through 1" 1-1/4" through 1-1/2" 2" through 3" 3-1/2" through 8" 1" through 1-1/4" 1-1/2" through 8"
Max. Horiz. Spacing: 8'-0" 10'-0" 12'-0" 15'-0" 12'-0" 15'-0"
Max. Vert. Spacing: 10'-0" 10'-0" 10'-0" 10'-0" 15'-0" 15'-0"
Unsupported length from the last hanger and an end sprinkler shall be as follows: Pipe Size: 1" piping 1-1/4" piping 1-1/2" piping
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Pipe Size:
Length: Not greater than 36" Not greater than 48" Not greater than 60" or larger
RISER CLAMPS Support vertical piping with clamps secured to the piping and resting on the building structure or secured to the building structure below at each floor. Use method of securing the vertical risers to the building structure below in stairwell locations. ANCHORS Install where indicated on the drawings and details. Where not specifically indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. CONCRETE PADS, CURBS, SUPPORTS AND BALLAST Provide concrete equipment pads for floor-mounted equipment. Minimum 3½" thick, sized for purpose intended. Equipment pads shall extend 6 inches beyond the edge of equipment footprints. Provide 3½" high concrete curbs around pipe and equipment sleeves in suspended slabs. Curbs shall prevent water leaks around sleeves. Concrete work shall conform with Division 03. Provide structural steel stands or supports for equipment requiring support. Steel work shall conform to Division 05. END OF SECTION
13032-2
21 05 29 - 6
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRESUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
SECTION 21 10 00 WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL SCOPE This section contains specifications for an Automatic Fire Sprinkler System for this project. Included are the following topics: PART 1 – GENERAL Scope Related Work Reference Standards Description System Description Design Standards Quality Assurance Submittals PART 2 – PRODUCTS Pipe Fittings Joints Cross Connection Control Device Valves Flow Switches Tamper Switches Sprinklers Dry System Specialties Fire Department Connection Local Alarm Bell Miscellaneous Equipment PART 3 – EXECUTION Installation General Valves Gauges Switches Sprinklers Dry system Specialties Fire Department Connection Testing RELATED WORK Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work under this Section. Section 21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire-Suppression Section 21 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment
13032-2
21 10 00 - 1
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
REFERENCE STANDARDS Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work under this section. Local and State Codes and Regulations. National Fire Codes (NFC) published by NFPA; latest edition of standards listed: NFPA 13 - Sprinkler Systems Local Fire Department requirements. All items to be UL listed or FM approved for intended usage. DESCRIPTION Fire Protection Contractor shall furnish all calculations, design, drawings, material, equipment, labor and related items required to complete the work indicated on drawings and specifications. The work under this Section includes, but is not limited to the following: Provide all components for a complete wet pipe automatic sprinkler system including shutoff valves with supervisory switch, fire department connection, main drain valve, test valve(s), alarms, piping, and all necessary components to make a complete, operational, and approved system. Provide complete, approved automatic sprinkler system(s) to give fire suppression coverage to all areas/rooms, including electrical rooms, elevator shafts, and elevator equipment rooms. Provide a dry pipe system as required in attic spaces and indicated rooms. This portion of the project is design build. The contractor shall follow the specifications for type of systems, materials and equipment to use. The contractor will be the Engineer of Record and shall prepare, seal and submit drawings and calculations as required to obtain approval and building permit from State, Insurance Company, and local authority. Submit drawings and calculations to all authorities as required. These documents, along with local regulations and codes, will be the basis for the Fire Protection design and construction. The contractor shall calculate, size and select all systems as defined by the documents. This shall include coordination with other trade contractors including wiring of flow switch(es) and supervisory switch(es). All calculations, sizes, and system layouts shall include provisions for future additions. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Connect to the combination fire protection/domestic water supply service provided by the PC. Provide a cross connection control device and include a shutoff valve and flow switch on main riser. Provide a wet pipe automatic sprinkler riser, cross main, and branch piping to connect to sprinkler heads in all spaces of building. Provide a fire department connection (coordinate location with local Fire Marshall). See Fire Protection Drawings for location of main, riser, and Fire Department Connection.
13032-2
21 10 00 - 2
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Dry Pipe System: Provide dry pipe valve and accessories as required to install a dry pipe sprinkler system for coverage of all attic spaces as well as canopy as indicated on the Fire Protection Scope Drawings. DESIGN STANDARDS Sprinkler system shall be designed and hydraulically calculated by the Contractor to provide densities as indicated below and listed on the drawings. Design system for the most hydraulically remote area based on the following: Space Type/ Location: Common Areas Office Spaces Mech. Rooms Storage Kitchens
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Occupancy Classification Light Hazard
Density Area (GPM/Ft²) (Ft.²) 0.10 1,500
Hose (GPM) 100
Max Vel. Duration (Ft./Sec.) (Min.) 20 60
Light Hazard Ordinary (Group 1) Ordinary (Group 1) Ordinary (Group 1)
0.10 0.15
1,500 1,500
100 250
20 20
60 90
0.15
1,500
250
20
90
0.15
1,500
250
20
90
Available water supply data for system design is as follows: 75 psi Residual Pressure in Street. Contractor shall conduct a hydrant flow test with the city. Water test data is preliminary for bidding purposes. Contractor shall perform a field flow and pressure test on municipal water supply main to verify existing conditions, as well as conditions of any new municipal main installation, in the adjacent street, and obtain any additional test data required for design. Tests to be representative of high water use periods. Contractor shall submit seven (7) copies of hydraulic calculations with shop drawings on standard form specified in NFPA No. 13, Chapter 7, Sections 7-2 through 7-3.5 inclusive and Figures A-7-3.3 and A-7- 3.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Section 21 05 00 and Division 01 of the Project Manual. Fire protection system components shall be rated for a minimum operating pressure of 175 psig. To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components in grooved piping systems, all grooved products utilized shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be supplied from the same manufacturer as the grooved components.
13032-2
21 10 00 - 3
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all fire sprinkler system components. Plans: Submit contractor-prepared plans/drawings. Submit per NFPA 13; installation plans, working plans, shop drawings, hydraulic calculations, and manufacturer's data on devices, etc., indicating by model and number to be used for review and approval. Contractor shall obtain the necessary insurance underwriters, State and Local Fire Department approvals prior to submitting shop drawings. Include copy of approval letter in submission to Architect/Engineer. Prepare drawings at minimum scale of 1/8” per foot for plans and 1/4" per foot or larger for details. Show all piping, lighting, equipment, ductwork, sprinklers, hangers, roof construction and occupancy of each area, including ceiling and roof heights. Installation shall be coordinated with the latest architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing and electrical drawings. Contractor shall submit drawings to Engineer which have been reviewed and stamped "approved" by the authority having jurisdiction. No work shall commence until all approvals have been obtained. Allow sufficient time in the construction schedule for the approvals. As-Built Drawings: Maintain at the site an up-to-date marked set of as-built drawings which shall be corrected and delivered to the Architect upon completion of the work. Furnish the Architect one (1) reproducible print of corrected shop drawings, including plans, revised to show "as built" conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS PIPE Wet Systems: Carbon steel pipe, black, thickness per NFPA 13, conforming to ASTM A53, A135, A795. Sprinkler piping shall be schedule 40 threaded up to 2” in size. Schedule 10 threaded light wall not allowed. Dry Systems: Carbon steel pipe with galvanized finish, thickness per NFPA 13, conforming to ASTM A53, A135, A795, A123. Sprinkler piping shall be schedule 40 threaded up to 2” in size. Schedule 10 threaded light wall not allowed. 13032-2
21 10 00 - 4
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
FITTINGS Malleable iron, Class 150, threaded, ANSI B16.3. Ductile iron, grooved end, 1000 lb/in2 working pressure rating, UL listed or FM approved for automatic sprinkler. Ductile or malleable iron, plain end with EPDM gasket, carbon steel bolts or locking lugs UL listed or FM approved for automatic sprinkler, Grinnell "Sock-it". Carbon steel, butt-welded, class 150, ASTM A234. Carbon steel, Class 150, flanged, ASTM A105. Fittings used on galvanized piping shall have galvanized finish. JOINTS Iron Pipe: Tapered pipe threads, with Teflon tape, ANSI B2.1. Mechanical coupling, EPDM gasket, UL listed or FM approved for automatic sprinkler. Rigid Type: Housings shall be cast with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with NFPA 13. Tongue and recess rigid type couplings shall only be permitted if the contractor uses a torque wrench for installation. Required torque shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest recommendations. Victaulic FireLock® EZ Style 009H (1-1/4” thru 4”) and Victaulic Style 107H QuickVic™ (2” thru 8”) shall be installation ready stab-on design, for direct ‘stab’ installation onto grooved end pipe without prior field disassembly and no loose parts. 10” and larger sizes shall be Victaulic Style 07 Zero-Flex standard rigid coupling. Flexible Type: Use in seismic areas and where required by NFPA 13. Victaulic Style 177 QuickVic™ (2” thru 8”) shall be installation ready stab-on design, for direct ‘stab’ installation onto grooved end pipe without prior field disassembly and no loose parts. 10” and larger sizes shall be Victaulic Style 75 or 77 standard flexible coupling. CROSS CONNECTION CONTROL DEVICE Manufacturers: Cla-Val, Conbraco, Febco, Watts (Ames), or Wilkins. Double Detector Check Valve: Stainless steel, double cam-check assemblies, bypass meter (per Water Utility requirements), conforming to ASSE 1048, UL Listed, FM approved, Watts/Ames Model 3000ss. VALVES Manufacturers: Grinnell, Nibco, TYCO, Victaulic, or Wilkins.
13032-2
21 10 00 - 5
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Shutoff Valve: Butterfly Valve: Ductile iron body, epoxy coated, EPDM encapsulated ductile iron disc, 300 psi maximum working pressure, indicating type, with tamper switch in actuator, grooved end connections, UL Listed or FM approved, Victaulic Figure 705-W. Check Valve: Ductile iron body, rubber-encapsulated disc, 250 psi maximum working pressure, grooved end connections. Victaulic style 717. Test Drain Valve: Ball valve type, bronze, combination test and drain, with site glass, Sure-Test by G/J Innovations. If design flow cannot be reached through the inspector’s test drain, then the FPC shall install forward flow by-pass around the fire department connection check valve. FLOW SWITCHES UL listed and FM approved vane type waterflow switch with metal enclosure, adjustable pneumatic retard and electrical characteristics compatible with alarm system. Equal to Potter Model VSR-F. TAMPER SWITCHES For O S & Y valve or post indicator installations, UL listed, FM approved, to monitor position of valve, tamper resistant cover screws, single or double SPDT switch contacts, corrosion resistant, for indoor or outdoor use, NEMA 4 & 6P enclosures. Equal to Potter Model PCVS-1, -2 and OSYSU-1, 2. SPRINKLERS Manufacturer: Products of the following manufacturers determined to be equal by Architect/Engineer will be accepted: Grinnell, Reliable, TYCO, Victaulic and Viking.
the
General: Fusible link or glass bulb type, cast brass or bronze construction. Provide heads with nominal 1/2" discharge orifice except where greater than normal density requires large orifice. Select fusible link or glass bulb temperature rating to not exceed maximum ambient temperature rating allowed under normal conditions at installed location. Provide ordinary temperature (165 degree) fusible link or glass bulb type except at skylights, sealed display windows, unventilated attics and roof spaces, over cooking equipment, adjacent to diffusers, unit heaters, uninsulated heating pipes or ducts, mechanical rooms, storage rooms, or where otherwise indicated. Provide quantity of spare heads as noted below and 1 wrench for each type of head and each temperature range installed. Provide 6 spare heads per 300 or less installed heads, 12 per 1000 or less and 24 for more than 1000. Provide steel cabinet for storage of heads and wrenches.
13032-2
21 10 00 - 6
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Types: Refer to Sprinkler Schedule on plans for sprinkler head types and finishes in each area. Provide sprinkler guards in areas where sprinklers may be subject to damage (i.e. mechanical rooms). Finished Areas: Factory white painted, bronze body quick response pendent, concealed, or side-wall sprinklers with glass bulb heat sensor as noted on drawings. Semi-recessed and sidewall sprinklers shall have adjustable recessed escutcheon. Concealed sprinklers shall have adjustable cover plates. Cover plates shall match ceiling color. Design Basis: Victaulic Model V27. Behavior Units (Segment D on Drawings): Fully concealed for secure institutional applications, bronze body quick response, white finish, glass bulb heat sensor as noted on drawings. Unfinished Areas: Plain bronze body, upright or pendent, quick response sprinklers, with solder link or glass bulb for wet system. Plain bronze, upright or pendent open sprinkler for dry system. Design Basis: Victaulic Model V27 or V36. Ratings: See sprinkler ratings indicated on Sprinkler Schedule on plans. Use higher temperaturerated sprinkler heads in areas near heat sources, elevator equipment rooms, and elevator shafts. DRY SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES Manufacturer: Central Sprinkler, Grinnell, Reliable, Star Sprinkler, TYCO, or Viking. Dry Pipe Valve: Cast or ductile iron body, flanged or grooved ends, 175 PSIG, bronze grooved seat with O-ring seal, single hitch pin and latch design. Provide trim for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, pressure gauges, priming chamber attachment, ball drip valves, drip cup assembly piped to floor or hub drain, fill line attachment with strainer. Equal to Viking Model E. Include pressure switches on alarm connections as required to allow for connection to fire alarm system. Air Pressure Maintenance Device: Automatic control capable of maintaining system air pressure, rated for 175 PSIG, adjustable air pressure range of 15 PSIG to 60 PSIG, complete with isolation valves, bypass fill valve, pressure regulator or pressure switch and strainer. Equal to Viking Model D-2. Air Compressor: Simplex electric direct drive, oil-less, pressure switch, motor, fused disconnect switch, relief valve, check valve, shut-off valve, pressure gauge and adjustable operating control. 5 hp, 480 volt, 3 ph compressor.
13032-2
21 10 00 - 7
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION Manufacturer: Badger-Powhatan, Croker, Elkhart Brass, J.W. Moon, Potter-Roemer, and W.D. Allen. Flush: Wall mounted, flush, two-way inlet, cast brass construction with pin lug swivel plugs, labeled backplate, with drop clappers, threads to match local fire department and polished brass finish to match building color scheme. Potter-Roemer 5021. General: Mounting height, distance from curb, etc., shall be as specified by local fire department. LOCAL ALARM BELL UL listed and FM approved weatherproof electric alarm bell with red painted metal housing, mounting base and gong, solenoid operator, weatherproofing O-ring seal and electrical characteristics compatible with alarm system. Equal to Potter Model PBA. MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Provide other equipment and accessories, not listed, but required for a complete sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA and FM requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install sprinkler system in accordance with requirements of NFPA 13 and local regulations of the fire marshal. Grooved joint piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines and recommendations. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended service as specified. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by Victaulic. Grooved end shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing. A Victaulic factory-trained field representative shall provide on-site training for contractor's field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools and installation of grooved piping products. Factory-trained representative shall periodically review the product installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products. The sprinkler bulb protector must remain in place until the sprinkler is completely installed and before the system is placed in service. Remove bulb protectors carefully by hand after installation. Do not use any tools to remove bulb protectors.
13032-2
21 10 00 - 8
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
GENERAL Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights which do not obstruct any portion of window, doorway, stairway or passageway. Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences. Coordinate locations of fire protection piping with piping, ductwork, conduit and equipment of other trades to allow sufficient clearances. In all cases, consult drawings for exact location of pipe spaces, ceiling heights, ceiling grid layout, light fixtures and grilles before installing piping. All exposed overhead piping shall be installed above the bottom chord of roof joists. Maintain piping in clean condition internally during construction. Provide clearance for access to valves and piping specialties. Install piping so that system can be drained. Where possible, slope to main drain valve. Piping may be installed level (WET SYSTEMS ONLY). Where piping cannot be fully drained, install nipple and cap for drainage of less than 5 gallons or valve/nipple/cap for drainage over 5 gallons. Do not install piping within exterior walls. Do not route piping above transformers, panelboards, or switchboards, including the required service space for this equipment, unless the piping is serving this equipment. VALVES Properly align piping before installation of valves. Do not support weight of piping system on valve ends. Mount valves in locations which allow access for operation, servicing and replacement. Install all valves with the stem in the upright or horizontal position. Valves installed with the stems down will not be accepted. All system shut-off valves shall have a supervisory switch. GAUGES Provide a valved pressure gauge in main sprinkler risers. SWITCHES Provide valved test connection for flow switch adjacent to flow switch. Test flow switch to verify proper operation. SPRINKLERS Locate sprinklers maintaining clearances from obstructions, ceilings and walls. Install sprinklers level in locations not subject to spray pattern interference. Sprinklers shall be centered in all ceiling panels and tiles. A 1” tolerance for sprinkler placement is acceptable. DRY SYSTEM SPECIALTIES Dry Valve: Install in vertical position in sprinkler riser. Install trim recommended by manufacturer including drains and test valves. Pipe drains to hub or floor drains. Test and adjust operation of valves, alarms, pressure maintenance devices, and emergency pull boxes.
13032-2
21 10 00 - 9
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Air Compressor: Install securely on wall or riser, leveled and bolted in place. Pipe automatic drain to hub or floor drain. Install ball valve and check valve in discharge line. Install pressure gauge upstream of ball valve. FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION Support from structure independent of piping. Locate 24” above grade or as directed by local Fire Marshall. Fill wall penetration with insulation and caulk exterior and interior face of wall opening weather tight. TESTING Refer to Section 21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire Suppression. Hydro-statically pressure test the fire sprinkler system piping as required in NFPA 13. Keep records of all testing for submission in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
END OF SECTION
13032-2
21 10 00 - 10
WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
SECTION 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL SCOPE This section includes information common to two or more technical plumbing specification sections or items that are of a general nature, not conveniently fitting into other technical sections. Included are the following topics: PART 1 – GENERAL Scope Related Work Regulatory Requirements Reference Standards Quality Assurance Abbreviations and Symbols Definitions Coordination Electronic Drawings Protection of Finished Surfaces Sealing and Firestopping Equipment Furnished by Others Provisions for Future Off Site Storage Submittals Specified Materials and Equipment Equipment Installation Operating and Maintenance Manuals Record Drawings Training of Owner Personnel Testing Cleaning Warranty Certified Startup Reports PART 2 - PRODUCTS Electrical Requirements Access Panels and Doors Pipe Penetrations Equipment, Piping, and Valve Identification Equipment Accessories Thermometers and Gauges Bedding and Backfill PART 3 - EXECUTION General Excavation and Backfill Dewatering Rock Excavation 13032-2
22 05 00 - 1
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Surface Restoration Concrete Work Openings, Cutting and Patching Building Access Equipment Access Coordination of Work Piping Installation Lubrication and Maintenance Sleeves Pipe Penetrations Escutcheon Plates Flashing of Roof and Wall Penetrations Painting Identification RELATED WORK Applicable provisions of Division 01 govern work under this Section. This section applies to all Division 22 sections of plumbing. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Codes and Standards: All plumbing work shall conform to the requirements of Wisconsin Administrative Code SPS 382 and SPS 384, Wisconsin Uniform Plumbing Code. All materials and workmanship shall comply with applicable Codes, local ordinances, industry standards and utility regulations. In case of differences between such Codes, and the Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Promptly notify the A/E in writing of any such difference. Non-Compliance: Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with the above requirements, without having notified the A/E, he shall bear all costs necessary to correct the deficiencies. Permits, Inspections and Fees: All required, permits, and inspections shall be requested and obtained by the Contractor. All fees and charges for approvals, reviews, or other inspections shall be paid by the Contractor. All fees and charges assessed by local utilities for water, sewer, gas or other services shall be included in the bid and shall be paid by the Contractor(s). REFERENCE STANDARDS Standards cited in the Specifications shall be the most recent editions. Abbreviations of standards organizations referenced in this and other sections are as follows: ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association AGA American Gas Association 13032-2
22 05 00 - 2
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association ANSI American National Standards Institute ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPE American society of Plumbing Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWWA American Water Works Association AWS American Welding Society CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CGA Compressed Gas Association CS Commercial Standards, Products Standards Sections, Office of Eng. Standards Service, NBS EPA Environmental Protection Agency FS Federal Specifications, Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office GAMA Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association IAPMO International Association of Plumbing & Mechanical Officials IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers ISA Instrument Society of America MCA Mechanical Contractors Association MICA Midwest Insulation Contractors Association MSS Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve & Fitting Industry, Inc. NBS National Bureau of Standards NEC National Electric Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NSF National Sanitation Foundation PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute STI Steel Tank Institute UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Standards referenced in this section: ACI 614 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing and Placing of Concrete ASTM D1557 Standard Test Method for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils ASTM E814 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials UL1479 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops UL723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Division 01 of the Project Manual. All products and materials used are to be new, undamaged, clean and in good condition. Existing products and materials are not to be reused unless specifically indicated.
13032-2
22 05 00 - 3
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Where equipment or accessories are used which differ in arrangement, configuration, dimensions, ratings, or engineering parameters from those indicated on the contract documents, the contractor is responsible for all costs involved in integrating the equipment or accessories into the system and for obtaining the intended performance from the system into which these items are placed. ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS Key to abbreviations and symbols shall be on the Drawings. The following are additional abbreviations used in the Specifications: A/E Architect/Engineer GC General Contractor PC Plumbing Contractor FPC Fire Protection Contractor FSEC Food Service Equipment Contractor HC Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractor EC Electrical Contractor DEFINITIONS Furnish: Supply and deliver to Project site ready for unpacking, assembly and installation. Install: Operations at Site including unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, finishing, cleaning, and connecting related devices required for product fully functional for intended use after installation. Provide: Furnish and install, such that product is fully functional for intended use. COORDINATION The Drawings show the general arrangement of piping and equipment and shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and the work of other trades permits. Architectural and Structural Drawings shall take precedence. Because of the scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required. Investigate conditions affecting the Work and arrange accordingly, providing offsets, fittings and accessories as may be required to meet conditions. ELECTRONIC DRAWINGS Drawings in electronic format will be made available to successful Plumbing contractor at a non-refundable cost specified under Division 01 of Specifications. If no cost is specified in Division 01, default cost shall be $75 per drawing. Drawings provided may or may not be updated to reflect Addenda items. Use of Drawings is limited to this Project and may not be forwarded to any other party for any purpose. Use of files will be at Contractor’s sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to JDR Engineering, Inc or its employees. Architectural drawings or any other drawings not produced by JDR Engineering will not be provided. PROTECTION OF FINISHED SURFACES Refer to Division 01 of the Project Manual.
13032-2
22 05 00 - 4
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Furnish one can of touch-up paint for each different color factory finish to be finished surface of product. Deliver touch-up paint with other "loose and detachable parts" as covered in General Requirements. SEALING AND FIRESTOPPING Sealing and firestopping of sleeves/openings between piping, etc. and the sleeve or structural opening shall be the responsibility of the contractor whose work penetrates the opening. The contractor responsible shall hire individuals skilled in such work to do the sealing and fireproofing. These individuals hired shall normally and routinely be employed in the sealing and fireproofing occupation. EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS Drawings indicate equipment to be furnished or installed by Others. When providing utility connections, coordinate exact requirements, including quantity, location, elevation size, material, flow and pressure. Coordinate with FEC for kitchen equipment locations and connections. PROVISIONS FOR FUTURE Equipment and systems shall be sized for future expansion or extension when indicated on Contract Documents or described herein. OFF SITE STORAGE Refer to Division 01 of the Project Manual. SUBMITTALS Refer to Division 01, of the Project Manual. Submit shop drawings with space for approval stamps of GC and A/E. Submit the following plumbing system data sheet for approval by the GC and A/E. List piping material type for each piping service on the project, ASTM number, schedule or pressure class, joint type, manufacturer and model number where appropriate. List valves and specialties for each piping service, fixture and equipment with manufacturer and model number. PLUMBING SYSTEM DATA SHEET Item Pipe Service/Sizes Pipe Fittings Unions Valves: Ball Butterfly Balancing Check Other Pipe Specialties: Thermometers Press Gauges Strainers 13032-2
Manufacturer/Model No.
22 05 00 - 5
Remarks
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
Building Penetrations Hangers & Supports Insulation Plbg. Specialties: Floor Drains Cleanouts Water Hammer Arrestors Backflow Preventers Wall Hydrants Hose Bibbs Wash Machine Boxes Plbg. Fixtures: Lavatory Faucet Shower Bathtub Water Closet Urinal Sinks Stop/Supplies Waste/Trap Plbg. Equipment: Water Softener Water Heater UV System Circulating Pump Submit manufacturer's color charts where finish color is specified to be selected by Architect/Engineer. Shop drawing submittals are to be bound, labeled, contain the project manual cover page and a material index list page showing item designation, manufacturer and additional items supplied with the installation. Submit for all equipment and systems as indicated in the respective specification sections, marking each submittal with that specification section number. Mark general catalog sheets and drawings to indicate specific items being submitted and proper identification of equipment by name and/or number, as indicated in the contract documents. Include wiring diagrams of electrically powered equipment. Submit sufficient quantities of data sheets and shop drawings to allow the following distribution: Operating and Maintenance Manuals 2 copies Architect/Engineer 2 copies Local Fire Chief or Marshal 1 copy
13032-2
22 05 00 - 6
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Firestop Systems: Contractor shall submit product data for each firestop system. Submittals shall include product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria, test data, MSDS sheets, installation details and procedures for each method of installation applicable to this project. For non-standard conditions where no UL tested system exists, submit manufacturer's drawings for UL system with known performance for which an engineering judgement can be based upon. SPECIFIED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Design is based on equipment specified by manufacturer and model number as specified on Drawing Schedules. Where certain items are specified by manufacturer or trade name, Contractor's bid shall be based on use of named item. Where one (1) make is described and other makes are listed, comparable models of other named equipment may also be used, provided they meet requirements of Specifications. When equipment or accessories used differ in arrangement, configuration, dimensions, ratings, or engineering parameters from those on Drawing schedules, Contractor shall be responsible for costs involved in integrating equipment or accessories into system. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining original design performance from system into which items are placed, regardless of whether manufacturer/model is specified equivalent or substitute. If Contractor wishes to use items other than those named in Specifications in base bid, request for approval of substitution must be made in writing to A/E at least 14 days prior to opening of bids. Include complete technical and descriptive data with request. If approved, an Addendum will be issued notifying bidders of approval. Request for approval will be considered only if requested by prime bidding Contractor. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION Drawings show general arrangement and location of equipment and appurtenances. It is Contractor’s responsibility to install equipment in a location and manner that allows for proper service and maintenance access to equipment. Work shall generally conform to requirements shown on Drawings. However, location of equipment may require field adjustments to obtain required service space. DO NOT SCALE OFF PLANS to determine proper location of equipment. Because of scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate exact routing of piping, and offsets, fittings and accessories required to provide proper service access to equipment. Contractor shall route and install ductwork and piping to provide required service access to equipment. If, during construction phase of Project, contractor feels inadequate space exists, or equipment locations must be substantially modified to provide proper service and maintenance access, prior to installing equipment, contractor shall notify engineer in writing, outlining general concerns and proposed modifications. Equipment installed without providing manufacturer’s required maintenance and service clearance shall be considered defective. Contractor shall remove and relocate piping, ductwork and equipment, to provide required service clearances at contractor’s expense. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Refer to Division 01 of the Project Manual.
13032-2
22 05 00 - 7
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Assemble material in three-ring or post binders, using an index at the front of each volume and tabs for each system or type of equipment. In addition to the data indicated in the General Requirements, include the following information: Copies of all approved shop drawings. Manufacturer's wiring diagrams for electrically powered equipment Records of tests performed to certify compliance with system requirements Certificates of inspection by regulatory agencies Parts lists for fixtures, equipment, valves and specialties. Manufacturer’s installation, operation and maintenance recommendations for fixtures, equipment, valves and specialties. Valve schedules Lubrication instructions, including list/frequency of lubrication Warranties Additional information as indicated in the technical specification sections RECORD DRAWINGS Refer to Division 01 of the Project Manual. Maintain Record Drawings on daily basis to be turned over at completion of Project. TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper operation and maintenance of systems and equipment provided as part of Project, using Operating and Maintenance manuals during instruction. Demonstrate startup and shutdown procedures for equipment. Training shall be during normal working hours. Provide a total of 4 hours of training (minimum) over a total of 1 training session. Coordinate with Owner at least 2 weeks prior to scheduling training systems. TESTING Provide materials, labor, and equipment required for testing. Notify Inspector(s) one day prior to the time when the test is ready to be performed. After testing, submit in writing the time, date, name and title of the person approving the test. This shall also include the description and what portion of the system has been tested. The person approving the test shall sign the submittal. Records shall be maintained of testing that has been completed, and shall be made available at the job site. Upon completion of the work, records and certifications approving testing requirements shall be submitted. Defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired, and the test repeated. Repairs shall be made with new materials. CLEANING Keep the premises broom clean and free of surplus materials, rubbish and debris.
13032-2
22 05 00 - 8
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
After fixtures and equipment have been installed, remove stickers, rust stains, labels, and temporary covers. Foreign matter shall be blown out, or flushed out, of pipes, tanks, pumps, strainers, motors, devices, switches, fixtures, and panels. Boilers and water heaters shall be cleaned, drained, flushed and recleaned until free of oil and debris. Identification plates on equipment shall be free of paint and dirt. Leave the work in a condition ready for operation. WARRANTY Warrant that work shall function for one year immediately following acceptance of the system(s). Keep the system in good working order at no expense, unless defects are clearly the result of improper or abnormal usage. Submit for acceptance of the work, written certification that the entire system has been installed and adjusted for operation in accordance with the Contract Documents. CERTIFIED STARTUP REPORTS The Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer of equipment in the following systems, four (4) copies of certified startup reports prepared and signed by the manufacturer's representative in responsible charge. The four copies of the startup reports shall be submitted to the A/E along with or prior to the Contractor's certification of completion. The following systems require manufacturer's startup reports: Water Treatment Systems Water Heaters UV System
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS General: Work shall conform to requirements of Division 26. Power wiring shall be provided by the EC. Control wiring shall be provided by the PC. Plumbing Contractor shall provide wiring diagrams for use by the Electrical Contractor. Motors: Motors smaller than ½ HP shall be NEMA standard motors rated for 120 volts, AC, single phase, 60 Hz. Motors shall be capacitor start and capacitor run type and shall have internal overload protection.
13032-2
22 05 00 - 9
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS Provide access panels at locations requiring access to mechanical equipment. Locations include, but are not limited to areas above drywall ceilings, shaft enclosures and other furred-in spaces concealing valves, ducts or equipment. Provide UL listed, fire rated access panels when penetrating fire rated chase or shaft areas. Access panels shall be of size required to provide adequate access to equipment. Minimum size shall be 12 inch by 12 inch for hand access and 24 inch by 24 inch for body access. Panels shall be Milcor brand or equivalent. Panels shall include concealed hinges, cam type locking devices, and have frame/border type necessary for particular wall or ceiling construction they are installed. Access panels shall be flush mounted, recessed frame type units. Access panels shall be prime coated steel, able to accept field painting for general applications and stainless steel for use in toilet rooms, shower rooms and similar wet areas. Refer to Architectural Room Finish Schedule for wall and ceiling surfaces and finishes. For non-security applications, panel construction shall utilize 16 gauge frame with not less than 18 gauge hinged door panel. Door locks shall be screwdriver operated for panels in general location applications and shall be key locked for public area applications. For security area applications, panel construction shall utilize 16 gauge frame with not less than 14 gauge hinged door panel. Door locks shall be locking type. Furnish and install locking devices in accordance with types specified in Division 11. PIPE PENETRATIONS Refer to Division 01 requirements as well as the following. Fire, Smoke And Fire/Smoke Rated Surfaces: 3M CP 25N/S or CP 25S/L caulk, 3M FS 195 wrap/strip with restricting collar, 3M CS 195 composite sheet, Pipe Shields Inc. Series F fire barrier kits, Proset Systems fire rated floor and wall penetrations, Insta-Foam Products Insta-Fire Seal Firestop Foam or Dow Corning Fire Stop System. All fire stopping systems shall be provided by the same manufacturer. UL listed or tested by independent testing laboratory, approved by State and Local Code jurisdictions. Use product that has a rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. Reference architectural drawings for identification of fire and/or smoke rated walls and floors. Sleeves in concrete to be Schedule 40 steel pipe with integral water stop unless fire stop material used includes a sleeve that is an integral part of rated assembly.
13032-2
22 05 00 - 10
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Use firestop putty, caulk sealant, intumescent wrapstrips, intumescent firestop collars, firestop blocks, firestop mortar or a combination of these products to provide a UL listed system for each application required for this project. Provide mineral wool backing where specified in manufacturer's application detail. Non-Rated Surfaces: Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor/ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied spaces. In exterior wall openings below grade, use modular mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the un-insulated pipe and cored opening or a water-stop type wall sleeve. At interior partitions where pipe penetrations are sealed, use Tremco Dymonic, Sika Corp. Sikaflex 1a, Sonneborn Sonolastic NPI, or Mameco Vulken 116 urethane caulk to effect seal. Use galvanized sheet metal sleeves in hollow wall penetrations. EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION Equipment Labels: After painting and covering, identify equipment, including pumps, tanks, compressors, and control panels. Locate identification conspicuously. Identification of equipment shall be by engraved white letters on a black 1/16 inch thick plastic laminate panel, beveled edges, screw mounting, permanently attached to the equipment. Minimum size: 3/4" x 2 1/2" with 3/8" letters. Manufacturers: Setonply ® Style 2060 by Seton Name Plate Company or Emedolite Style EIP by EMED Co., or equal by W. H. Brady. Pipe Identification: Pipe identification shall conform to ANSI A13.1 "Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems". Printed labels identifying the fluid conveyed and direction of flow shall be attached to pipes in accessible locations, at intervals not to exceed 20 feet, not less than once in each room, at each branch, adjacent to each access door or panel, at each valve and where exposed piping passes through walls and floors. Outside Diameter of Minimum Size of Pipe Covering Letters up to 1¼" ½" 1½" to 2" ¾" 2½" to 6" 1½" 8" to 10" 2½"
43
13032-2
22 05 00 - 11
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Manufacturers: EMED Co., Seton Name Plate Company, or W. H. Brady. Stencils: Not less than 1 inch high letters/numbers for marking pipe and equipment. Valve Tags: Identify each valve by means of 1½" diameter brass tag fastened to body of valve with copper or brass chain. Identification number shall be stamped thereon with letters a minimum of ½" high. System identification abbreviation shall be stamped with letters a minimum of ¼” high. The following prefixes shall be used: PLBG - Plumbing Manufacturers: EMED Co., Seton Name Plate Company, or W. H. Brady. Valve Charts: Furnish three charts listing each valve. Two charts shall be delivered to A/E. An additional chart shall be framed behind glass and hung in location selected by Owner. Charts shall show the following: Valve number Manufacturer Type of service
Size Type of valve Location
Furnish a typewritten chart indicating equipment or areas served by each numbered valve and incorporate in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES Provide equipment accessories, connections, and incidental items. Install piping connecting to pumps and other equipment without strain at the piping connection. If requested by the A/E, remove the bolts in these flanged connections, or disconnect piping, to demonstrate that piping has been properly connected. THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES Acceptable Manufacturers: American, Taylor, Trerice, U.S. Gauge, Weiss, or Winters Instruments. Thermometers: Industrial type with separable sockets, adjustable angles, black cast aluminum 9" case, frame, glass front, with red appearing mercury tube. Readable by person standing on floor. Provide extension necks for equipment with 2" or thicker insulation. Ranges shall be as follows: Domestic Water: 30 to 200 degrees Fahrenheit.
13032-2
22 05 00 - 12
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Pressure Gauges: Industrial quality with phosphor bronze bourdon tube, brass socket, 3½ inch dial face, bronze bushed movement, aluminum case with black finish, white background, black figures readable by person standing on floor. Ranges shall be as follows: Domestic Water: 0 to 150 psig BEDDING AND BACKFILL Bedding up to a point 12-inches above the top of the pipe shall be thoroughly compacted sand or crushed stone chips meeting the following gradations: Gradation for Bedding Sand Sieve Size 1 inch No. 16 No. 200
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
% Passing (by Wt) 100 45 - 80 2 - 10
Gradation for Crushed Stone Chip Bedding Sieve Size % Passing (by Wt) 1/2 inch 100 No. 4 75 - 100 No. 100 10 - 25
Backfill above the bedding in lawn areas shall be thoroughly compacted excavated material free of large stones, organic, perishable, and frozen materials. Backfill above the bedding under existing and future utilities, paving, sidewalks, curbs, roads and buildings shall be granular materials, pit run sand, gravel, or crushed stone, free from large stones, organic, perishable, and frozen materials.
PART 3 – EXECUTION GENERAL Coordination Of Work: Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications and report discrepancies to the A/E. Obtain written instructions for changes necessary. Coordinate with each trade prior to beginning installation and make provisions to avoid interferences. Changes required caused by neglect to coordinate shall be made without expense to the project. Piping shall not be located above electrical panels. Anchor Bolts, Sleeves, and Supports: These items required for the Work shall be furnished by the FPC for proper installation of his work. They shall be installed (except as otherwise specified) by the trade furnishing and installing the material in which they are to be located. Location of anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and supports shall be directed by the trade requiring them. Expense resulting from the improper location or installation of anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and supports shall be paid for by the Contractor for the trade with responsibility for directing their proper location.
13032-2
22 05 00 - 13
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
Adjustments In Locations: Locations of pipes and equipment, shall be adjusted to accommodate the work interferences anticipated and encountered. Prior to fabrication determine the exact route and location of each pipe (subject to A/E's approval). Right Of Way: New lines which pitch shall have the right-of-way over those which do not pitch. For example: Gravity drains shall normally have right-of-way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have the right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed. Notify A/E and other trades of conflicts. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction of electrical raceways, pipes, and ducts shall be made to maintain proper room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the Drawings. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL Install lines passing under foundations with minimum of 1-1/2 inch clearance to concrete and insure no disturbance of bearing soil. Before burying piping, mark up Record Drawings and dimensionally locate piping. Deliver information to A/E Field Representative. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on Drawings, trenches for utilities shall be of depth that provides the following minimum depths of cover from existing grade or from indicated finish grade, whichever is lower: Storm and sanitary sewers: As described in DPS 382.30 (11) (b). Provide insulation for sewers installed at less than minimum depth. Water service and/or fire service piping: The top of pipe shall be installed not less than six (6) feet below grade. Existing utility lines to be retained shown on Drawings or locations of which are made known to Contractor prior to excavation, as well as utility lines uncovered during excavation operations, shall be protected from damage during excavation and backfilling and if damaged, shall be repaired by Contractor at his expense. Perform excavation and backfill work to accomplish indicated mechanical systems installation in accordance with Section 312000 – Earth Moving. DEWATERING Provide, operate and maintain all pumps and other equipment necessary to drain and keep all excavation pits, trenches and the entire subgrade area free from water under all circumstances. Obtain general permit from the Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources district office for discharge of construction dewatering effluent. Obtain well permit from the Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources district office for dewatering wells discharging more than 70 GPM. Comply with permit requirements.
13032-2
22 05 00 - 14
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
ROCK EXCAVATION Remove rock encountered in the excavation to a minimum dimension of six (6) inches outside the pipe. Rock excavation includes all hard, solid rock in ledges, bedded deposits and unstratified masses, all natural conglomerate deposits so firmly cemented as to present all the characteristics of solid rock; which material is so hard or so firmly cemented that in the opinion of the Engineer it is not practical to excavate and remove same with a power shovel except after thorough and continuous drilling and blasting. Rock excavation includes rock boulders of 1/2 cubic yard or more in volume. Rock excavation will be computed on the basis of the depth of rock removed and a trench width two (2) feet larger than the outside diameter of the pipe where one (1) pipe is laid in the trench and three (3) feet larger than the combined outside diameter where two (2) pipes are laid in the trench. Include 6 inch pipe and structure bedding in rock excavation. Include rock excavation shown on the plans in the Base Bid. SURFACE RESTORATION Completely restore the surface of all disturbed areas to a like condition of the surface prior to the work. Level off all waste disposal areas and clean up all areas used for the storage of materials or the temporary deposit of excavated earth. Remove all surplus material, tools and equipment. CONCRETE WORK Cast-in-place concrete within the building will be performed by the Division 03 Contractor unless otherwise noted. Provide all layout drawings, anchor bolts, metal shapes, and/or templates required to be cast into concrete or used to form concrete for support or installation of plumbing piping, fixtures, specialties and equipment. Coordinate locations of equipment, pipe penetrations in wet areas, etc. with the Division 03 Contractor. OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING Refer to Division 01 of the Project Manual. Provisions for openings including chases, holes and clearances through walls, floors, and roof, ceilings and partitions shall be made in advance of construction of each part of the building. Openings shall be provided by the GC for the respective materials in which openings occur, during the construction of the building with the exception of pipe sleeves. The PC shall furnish to the GC opening dimensions and locations. If the PC neglects to inform the GC of his opening requirements before that portion of the building construction is complete, the PC shall cut the openings and provide framing and lintels. In the event holes must be cut through reinforced concrete, avoid spalling and unnecessary damage or weakening of structural members. No chopping or breaking out is permitted. Before cutting or drilling, obtain permission from the A/E. Patch adjacent materials and repair damage resulting from the cutting. Patch interior trench excavation to match existing slab-on-grade with concrete: 3500 PSI at 28 days, 3" slump, 3/4" maximum aggregate size, 5.5 bags of cement per cubic yard.
13032-2
22 05 00 - 15
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
BUILDING ACCESS Arrange for necessary openings in building to allow for admittance of all apparatus. When building access was not previously arranged and must be provided by Contractor, restore opening to original condition after the apparatus has been brought into building. Coordinate with Architect/Engineer. EQUIPMENT ACCESS Install piping, conduit, fixtures, and accessories to permit access to equipment for maintenance. Coordinate exact location of wall and ceiling access panels and doors with General Contractor, making sure access is available for equipment and specialties. Where access is required in plaster walls or ceilings, furnish and install access doors required. Coordinate for installation of access doors utilizing General Contractor and other appropriate on-site subcontractor for access door installation. Accessible ceilings, (i.e. lay-in ceilings) do not require access panels. Provide color coded thumb tacks or screws, depending on surface, for use in accessible ceilings. COORDINATION OF WORK Install systems, equipment and piping in cooperation with other trades. Locations of pipes, equipment, fixtures, etc., shall be adjusted to accommodate the work interferences anticipated and encountered. Prior to fabrication determine the exact route and location of each pipe (subject to A/E's approval). Any work that is not coordinated and that interferes with other contractor's work shall be removed or relocated at the installing contractor's expense. Verify that all devices are compatible for the type of construction and surfaces on which they will be used. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction of electrical raceways, pipes and ducts shall be made as required to maintain proper room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the Drawings. Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc., as required to effect the offsets, transitions and changes in direction. New lines which pitch shall have the right-of-way over those which do not pitch. For example: Gravity drains shall normally have right-of-way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have the right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed. Notify A/E and other trades of any conflicts. Provide appropriate sections of work with required wall, roof and floor opening locations and dimensions. If Contractor neglects to coordinate information, openings shall be the responsibility of Contractor. PIPING INSTALLATION General: Expansion and contraction of piping shall be provided for by expansion loops, bends, swing joints, or expansion joints to prevent damage to connections, piping, equipment of the building.
13032-2
22 05 00 - 16
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Unions or flanges shall be installed on all by-passes, ahead of all traps, adjacent to screw connection valves, and at all connections to equipment, whether or not shown on drawings. Installation Arrangement: Install all Work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of all parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes and equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, traps, starters, motors, control components and to clear the openings of swinging and overhead doors and of access panels. Connections Different From Those Shown: Where equipment requiring different arrangement or connections from those shown is used, install the equipment to operate properly and in harmony with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications. When requested by the A/E, submit drawings showing the proposed installation. If the proposed installation is approved, make all incidental changes in piping, ductwork, supports, insulation, wiring, panelboards, etc. Provide any additional motors, controllers, valves, fittings and other additional equipment required for the proper operation of the system resulting from the selection of equipment, including all required changes in affected trades. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location of rough-in and connections by other trades. All changes shall be made at no increase in the Contract amount or additional cost to the other trades. LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE Lubricate all bearings with lubricant as recommended by the manufacturer before the equipment is operated for any reason. Once the equipment has been run, maintain lubrication in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions until the work is accepted by the Owner. Maintain a log of all lubricants used and frequency of lubrication; include this information in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals at the completion of the project. SLEEVES Provide galvanized sheet metal sleeves for pipe penetrations through interior and exterior walls to provide a backing for sealant or firestopping. Patch wall around sleeve to match adjacent wall construction and finish. Grout area around sleeve in masonry construction. In finished spaces where pipe penetration through wall is exposed to view, sheet metal sleeve shall be installed flush with face of wall. In existing poured concrete walls where penetration is core drilled, pipe sleeve is not required. Pipe sleeves are not required in existing poured concrete walls where penetrations are core drilled. Pipe sleeves in new poured concrete construction shall be schedule 40 steel pipe (sized to allow insulated pipe to run through sleeve), cast in place.
13032-2
22 05 00 - 17
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
In all piping floor penetrations, fire rated and non-fire rated, top of sleeve shall extend 1 inch above the adjacent finished floor. In existing floor penetrations, core drill sleeve opening large enough to insert schedule 40 sleeve and grout area around sleeve with hydraulic setting, non-shrink grout. If the pipe penetrating the sleeve is supported by a pipe clamp resting on the sleeve, weld a collar or struts to the sleeve that will transfer weight to existing floor structure. For floor penetrations through floors in mechanical and wet locations listed below, core drill opening and provide 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x 1/8” galvanized steel angles fastened to floor surrounding the penetration or group of penetrations to prevent water from entering the penetration. Provide urethane caulk between angles and floor and fasten angles to floor a minimum of 8” on center. Seal corners water tight with urethane caulk. Or, core drill sleeve openings large enough to insert schedule 40 sleeve and grout area around sleeve with hydraulic setting non-shrink grout/cement. Wet locations include: Upper level mechanical rooms. PIPE PENETRATIONS General: Coordinate location of building surface penetrations with appropriate contractors. Furnish sleeves, inserts, and devices to be built into structure to contractor performing Work. Prepare Shop Drawings for approval for penetrations of structural elements, including floor slabs, shear walls, and bearing walls. Do not allow penetrations to be made until Shop Drawings are approved. Fire Rated Surfaces: Install products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions where pipe penetrates a fire rated surface. When pipe is insulated, use product that maintains integrity of insulation and vapor barrier. Where sleeve must be installed in existing floor, grout area around sleeve to restore floor integrity. In wet area floor penetration, top surface of penetration to be 2 inches above adjacent floor with additional height obtained by means of concrete pad poured integral with floor. Non-Rated Surfaces: Install escutcheons or floor/ceiling plates where pipe penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Size units to accommodate insulation, where applicable. Escutcheons are not required when insulation completely covers wall opening and insulation end is trimmed in a neat manner. Occupied spaces for this Paragraph include only those rooms with finished ceilings and penetration occurs below ceiling. In exterior wall openings below grade, place water-stop type wall sleeve before concrete pour or core drill opening after pour. Assemble rubber links to proper size for pipe and tighten in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install galvanized sheet metal sleeve in hollow wall penetrations to provide backing for sealant. Apply sealant to both sides of penetration in a manner that annular space between pipe sleeve and pipe or insulation is completely blocked.
13032-2
22 05 00 - 18
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
Completely seal (or caulk) around pipe penetrations through non-rated, smoke tight corridor walls in healthcare facilities. Refer to architectural drawings for additional information. Completely seal pipe penetrations, as specified below, for walls of the following rooms below: Non-fire rated mechanical rooms Isolation rooms Conference rooms Private offices ESCUTCHEON PLATES Provide plates on pipes passing through finished floors, walls and ceilings, with outside diameter to cover sleeve opening and inside diameter to fit snugly around pipe. Set tight to building surface. Escutcheon plates shall be chromium plated metal. FLASHING OF ROOF AND WALL PENETRATIONS Flashings on the roof shall be closely coordinated. Install flashings to insure proper vapor barrier. Roof attachments, equipment supports, piping systems and other roof penetrations shall be waterproofed. PAINTING Refer to Division 09. All exposed steel support structures (all metal surfaces located both inside and outside the building) shall be painted after installation with one coat of a compatible metal primer coat and two coats of a finish coat of paint for the application. Color shall be gray unless otherwise specified. IDENTIFICATION Identify equipment in mechanical equipment rooms by stenciling equipment number and service with one coat of black enamel against a light background or white enamel against a dark background. Use a primer where necessary for proper paint adhesion. Where stenciling is not appropriate for equipment identification, engraved name plates may be used. Identify interior piping not less than once every 30 feet, not less than once in each room, adjacent to each access door or panel, and on both side of the partition where accessible piping passes through walls or floors. Place flow directional arrows at each pipe identification location. Use one coat of black enamel against a light background or white enamel against a dark background.
13032-2
22 05 00 - 19
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Identify all exterior buried piping for entire length with underground warning tape except for sewer piping which is routed in straight lines between manholes or cleanouts. Place tape 6"-12" below finished grade along entire length of pipe. Extend tape to surface at building entrances, meters, hydrants and valves. Where existing underground warning tape is broken during excavation, replace with new tape identifying appropriate service and securely spliced to ends of existing tape. Identify valves with brass tags bearing a system identification and a valve sequence number. Identify medical gas and vacuum valves with brass tags and wall or cabinet mounted color coded engraved nameplate with the following "(Type of Gas) Shutoff Valve for (Location or Zone)". Valve tags are not required at a terminal device unless the valves are greater than ten feet from the device, located in another room or not visible from device. Provide a typewritten valve schedule and pipe identification schedule indicating the valve number and the equipment or areas supplied by each valve and the symbols used for pipe identification; locate schedules in mechanical room and in each Operating and Maintenance manual. Schedule in mechanical room to be framed under clear plastic.
END OF SECTION
13032-2
22 05 00 - 20
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
SECTION 22 05 14 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL SCOPE This section includes specifications for backflow preventers, hose bibs, water hammer arrestors and other miscellaneous plumbing specialties. Included are the following topics: PART 1 - GENERAL Scope Related Work Reference Standards Quality Assurance Submittals PART 2 - PRODUCTS General Backwater Valves Backflow Prevention Devices Pressure Regulating Valves (PRV) Hose Bibbs/Wall Hydrants Washing Machine Wall Boxes PART 2 - EXECUTION Installation RELATED WORK Requirements of Division 01 shall govern work under this Section. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing Section 22 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Section 22 07 00 – Plumbing Insulation Section 22 11 00 – Facility Water Distribution Section 22 13 00 – Facility Sanitary Sewerage Section 22 30 00 – Plumbing Equipment Section 22 40 00 – Plumbing Fixtures REFERENCE STANDARDS ANSI A112.14.1 - Backwater Valves ANSI A112.26.1/PDI WH-201 - Water Hammer Arrestors. ASSE 1001 - Pipe Applied Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers. ASSE 1010 - Water Hammer Arrestors. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. ASSE 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers. ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining, Anti-Backflow Type.
13032-2
22 05 14 - 1
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Section 22 05 00 and Division 01 of the Project Manual. Plumbing products requiring approval by the State of Wisconsin Dept. of Commerce must be approved or have pending approval at the time of shop drawing submission. SUBMITTALS Submit product data sheets in accordance with Division 01 and Section 22 05 00. Submit and pay all fees to State of Wisconsin for reduced pressure zone backflow prevention device review. Submit State approval of reduced pressure zone backflow prevention device with product data sheets in accordance with Division 01 and Section 22 05 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS GENERAL Refer to Plumbing Equipment Schedule for specific model numbers and sizing information regarding the plumbing fittings and specialties specified herein. BACKWATER VALVES Acceptable manufacturers shall be Josam, JR Smith, Wade, or Zurn. BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICES Acceptable Manufacturers: Cash-Acme, Chicago, Cla-Val, Conbraco, Febco, Nidel, Watts, Wilkins, or Woodford. Vacuum Breakers: For use in finished areas with concealed piping, brass construction, chromium plated, Chicago Faucet No. 892-G (½"). For exposed piping in unfinished areas, brass construction, Watts series 288A. Hose thread inlet and outlet, non-removable hose connection, vacuum breaker for use on service sink faucets, Chicago Faucet No. E27, ¾ inch. Reduced Pressure Zone Type (RPBP): Sizes ¾ Inch thru 3 Inch: Bronze body, replaceable seats, ball valve shutoff valves, strainer, union connections, ball valve test ports, ASSE 1013, Watts series 009, 909, or 919. Sizes 4 Inch and Larger: Cast iron body, epoxy coated, bronze check seats, stainless steel relief seat, ball valve test ports, ASSE 1013, Watts series 909. Include butterfly shutoff valves, EPDM encapsulated disc, Nibco FC-27 series. Stainless steel body, replaceable check seats, ball valve test ports, ASSE 1013, Watts Series 994. Include butterfly shutoff valves, EPDM encapsulated disc, Nibco FC-27 series. 13032-2
22 05 14 - 2
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
General: All backflow preventers 3" and smaller shall have ball valve shut-off. All backflow preventers 4" and larger shall have butterfly valve shut-off, unless gate valves are required by water Utility. PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES (PRV) Pressure regulating valves shall be manufactured by Cash Acme, Wilkins, or Watts. Directing acting, spring regulating, bronze body, high temperature resistant diaphragm, ASSE 1003. Include strainer with stainless steel mesh screen and pressure gauges on inlet and outlet of PRV. Size strainer for flow rate in main with 10 lb/in2 drop off, not line size. HOSE BIBBS/WALL HYDRANTS Hose bibbs and wall hydrants shall be manufactured by Chicago Faucet, MIFAB, Woodford, or Zurn. WASHING MACHINE WALL BOXES Automatic clothes washing machine wall boxes shall be manufactured by Guy Gray or Oatey.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Backwater Valves: Install per Plumbing Code. Vacuum Breaker/Backflow Preventers: Install per Plumbing Code. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventers: Install in conformance with requirements of Wisconsin Plumbing Code, manufacturer’s recommendations and as shown. After installation and initial testing submit the proper paperwork to the Department of Professional Services, Plumbing Bureau. Pressure Regulating Valves: Adjust PRV to regulate outlet water pressure to pressure required for kitchen dishwasher. Coordinate with FSEC. Hose Bibbs/Wall Hydrants: Install 24 inches above finished grade or floor.
END OF SECTION
13032-2
22 05 14 - 3
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Page Intentionally Left Blank
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
SCOPE This section includes specifications for supports of all plumbing equipment and materials as well as piping system anchors. Included are the following topics: PART 1 - GENERAL Scope Related Work Reference Standards Quality Assurance Design Criteria Submittals PART 2 - PRODUCTS Manufacturers Pipe Hangers and Supports Pipe Hanger Rods Beam Clamps Riser Clamps Concrete Inserts Anchors Equipment Support Corrosive Atmosphere Coatings PART 3 - EXECUTION Installation Structural Supports Hanger and Support Spacing Riser Clamps Concrete Inserts Anchors RELATED WORK Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work under this section. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing Section 22 07 00 – Plumbing Insulation Section 22 11 00 – Facility Water Distribution Section 22 13 00 – Facility Sanitary Sewerage Section 22 30 00 – Plumbing Equipment Section 22 40 00 – Plumbing Fixtures REFERENCE STANDARDS MSS SP-58 MSS SP-69 13032-2
22 05 29 - 1
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to Division 01, of the Project Manual. DESIGN CRITERIA Materials and application of pipe hangers and supports shall be in accordance with MSS Standard Practice SP-58 and SP-69 unless noted otherwise. Piping connected to pumps, compressors, or other rotating or reciprocating equipment is to have vibration isolation supports for a distance of one hundred pipe diameters or three supports away from the equipment, whichever is greater. Standard pipe hangers/supports as specified in this section are required beyond the 100 pipe diameter/3 support distance. Do not hang any mechanical item directly from a metal deck or run piping so its rests on the bottom chord of any truss or joist. General: Secure pipe in place to prevent vibration, maintain proper slope and provide for expansion and contraction. Design supports of strength and rigidity to suit loading, service, and manner which do not unduly stress the building construction. Where support is from concrete construction, take care not to weaken concrete or penetrate waterproofing. Fasten supports and hangers to building steel framing wherever practical. Do not use another pipe for support. Do not use perforated iron, chain or wire as hangers. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs wherever practical. Where inserts are not practical, provide channels or angles from which to suspend hangers/supports. Fasten structural steel to concrete with expansion bolts. Provide expansion anchors in concrete slabs for installation of threaded support rods. Provide hangers capable of vertical adjustment after piping is erected. Do not pierce ductwork with hanger rods. On threaded support rods and bolts, weld nuts to rods, peen threads, or provide double set of nuts with lock washers to prevent loosening. Use beam clamps for attaching hangers to structural steel. On piping insulated with vapor barrier covering, use protection shield to cover bottom one-half of insulated pipe. Shield to be a minimum of 12" long and of 16 gauge galvanized steel. Exception: For insulated drain pipe, the pipe may rest on the hanger and the insulation to wrap around the hanger and pipe. Submit anchor drawings for approval upon request.
13032-2
22 05 29 - 2
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Hangers, supports, and support methods other than those specified shall not be used without obtaining approval on method of support by the Structural Engineer prior to installing piping systems. Submit support method arrangement, pipe weight and spacing scheme for approval. Hanger and Support Spacing: Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow, valve, strainer, or similar piping specialty item. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Adjust hangers to obtain the slope specified in the piping section of these specifications. Space hangers for pipe as follows: Pipe Material
Pipe Size
Cast Iron Copper Copper Copper Copper Copper Ductile Iron Steel Steel Plastic Plastic Plastic
2" and larger 1/2" through 3/4" 1" through 1-1/4" 1-1/2" through 2-1/2" 3" 4" and larger All 1/2" through 1-1/4" 1-1/2" through 6" Drain and Vent 1" or less 1-1/4" and over
Max. Spacing 5'-0" 5'-0" 6'-0" 8'-0" 10'-0" 12'-0" 10'-0" 7'-0" 10'-0" 4'-0" 32" 4'-0"
Horiz. Max. Spacing 15'-0" 10'-0" 10'-0" 10'-0" 10'-0" 10'-0" 20'-0" 15'-0" 15'-0" 10'-0" 4'-0" 6'-0"
Vert.
SUBMITTALS Submit data in accordance with Section 22 05 00 and Division 01 of the Project Manual. Schedule of all hanger and support devices indicating attachment methods and type of device for each pipe size and type of service. Submit anchor drawings to the A/E for approval upon request.
13032-2
22 05 29 - 3
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
PART 2 - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS B-Line, Fee and Mason, Grinnell, Michigan Hanger, Pate, PHD Manufacturing, Piping Technology, Powers/Rawl, Proset, Roof Products & Systems, Unistrut, or Victaulic. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Overhead Supports: Adjustable clevis hanger, steel, Dura-Green epoxy coating or electro-plated, B-Line Figure B3100. Adjustable J hook hanger, steel, Dura-Green epoxy coating or electro-plated, B-Line figure B3690. Adjustable band hanger, steel, Dura-Green epoxy coating or electro-plated, B-Line Figure B3172. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Where several pipes are running parallel and pitching in the same direction, strut style support may be used. Steel channel, 12-gauge thickness, Dura-Green epoxy coating or electro-plated, B-Line B11. Restrain individual pipes with B-Line B2000 series or Vibraclamp series strut clamps. Wall Support: Carbon steel welded bracket with hanger. B-Line 3068 Series, Grinnell 194 Series. Perforated, epoxy painted finish, 16-12 gauge, min., steel channels securely anchored to wall structure, with interlocking, split-type, bolt secured, galvanized pipe/tubing clamps. B-Line type S channel with B-2000 series clamps, Grinnell type PS 200 H with PS 1200 clamps. When copper piping is being supported, provide flexible elastomeric/thermoplastic isolation cushion material to completely encircle the piping and avoid contact with the channel or clamp, equal to B-Line B1999 Vibra Cushion or provide manufacturers clamp and cushion assemblies, B-Line BVT series, Grinnell PS 1400 series. Vertical Support: Riser clamp, steel, Dura-Green epoxy coating or electro-plated, B-Line Figure B3373. Riser clamp, flexible sleeve with stainless steel band, Proset PS #33. Floor Support: Carbon steel pipe saddle, stand and bolted floor flange. B-Line B3088T/B3093. Copper Pipe Supports: All supports, fasteners, clamps, etc. directly connected to copper piping shall be copper plated or polyvinylchloride coated. Where steel channels are used, provide isolation collar between supports/clamps/fasteners and copper piping.
13032-2
22 05 29 - 4
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
PIPE HANGER RODS Steel Hanger Rods: Steel, electro-plated, threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded, complete with adjusting and lock nuts. B-Line B3205. Size rods for individual hangers and trapeze support as indicated in the following schedule: Total weight of equipment, including valves, fittings, pipe, pipe content, and insulation, are not to exceed the limits indicated. Maximum Load (Lbs.) (650°F Maximum Temp.) 610 1130 1810 2710
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Rod Diameter (inches) 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4
BEAM CLAMPS MSS SP-69 Types 19 & 23 malleable black iron clamp for attachment to beam flange to 0.62 inches thick with a retaining ring and threaded rod of 3/8, 1/2, and 5/8 inch diameter. Furnish with a hardened steel cup point set screw. B-Line B3036L/B3034, Grinnell 86/92. MSS SP-69 Type 28 or Type 29 forged steel jaw type clamp with a tie rod to lock clamp in place, suitable for rod sizes to 1-1/2 inch diameter. B-Line B3054, Grinnell 228. CONCRETE INSERTS Poured in Place: MSS SP-69 Type 18 wedge type to be constructed of a black carbon steel body with a removable malleable iron nut that accepts threaded rod to 7/8 inch diameter. Wedge design to allow the insert to be held by concrete in compression to maximize the load carrying capacity. B-Line B2505, Grinnell 281. MSS SP-69 Type 18 universal type to be constructed of black malleable iron body with a removeable malleable iron nut that accepts threaded rod to 7/8 inch diameter. B-Line B3014N, Grinnell 282. Drilled Fasteners: Carbon steel expansion anchors, vibration resistant, with ASTM B633 zinc plating, minimum tension load of 3200 pounds. Use drill bit of same manufacturer as anchor. Manufactured By: Hilti, Powers/Rawl, Redhead. ANCHORS Use welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to secure piping to the structure.
13032-2
22 05 29 - 5
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
EQUIPMENT SUPPORT Examine Drawings, and manufacturer's data to determine how equipment, fixtures, and piping are to be supported, mounted or suspended. Support all equipment plumb, rigid, and true to line. Provide rods, bolts, inserts, pipe stands, brackets and accessories for proper support. Equipment Stands: Use structural steel members welded to and supported by pipe supports. Clean, prime and coat with three coat rust inhibiting alkyd paint or one coat epoxy mastic. Where exposed to weather, treat with corrosive atmosphere coatings. CORROSIVE ATMOSPHERE COATINGS Factory coat supports and anchors used in corrosive atmospheres with hot dip galvanizing after fabrication, ASTM A123, 1.5 ounces/square foot of surface each side. Mechanical galvanize threaded products, ASTM B695 Class 50, 2.0 mil coating. Field cuts and damaged finishes to be field covered with zinc rich paint of comparable thickness to factory coating. Corrosive atmospheres include the following locations: Chemical storage and hazardous waste storage rooms Food service/kitchen areas Walk-in coolers/freezers
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Size, apply and install supports and anchors in compliance with manufacturers recommendations. Install supports to provide for free expansion of the piping system. Support all piping from the structure using concrete inserts, beam clamps, ceiling plates, wall brackets, or floor stands. Fasten ceiling plates and wall brackets securely to the structure and test to demonstrate the adequacy of the fastening. Coordinate hanger and support installation to properly group piping of all trades. Where piping can be conveniently grouped to allow the use of trapeze type supports, use standard structural shapes or continuous insert channels for the supporting steel. Where continuous insert channels are used, pipe supporting devices made specifically for use with the channels may be substituted for the specified supporting devices provided that similar types are used and all data is submitted for prior approval. Size and install hangers and supports, except for riser clamps, for installation on the exterior of piping insulation. Where a vapor barrier is not required, hangers may be installed either on the exterior of pipe insulation or directly on piping. Perform welding in accordance with standards of the American Welding Society.
13032-2
22 05 29 - 6
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS Provide all supporting steel required for the installation of mechanical equipment and materials, including angles, channels, beams, etc. to suspended or floor supported tanks and equipment. All of this steel may not be specifically indicated on the drawings. RISER CLAMPS Support vertical piping with clamps secured to the piping and resting on the building structure or secured to the building structure below at each floor. CONCRETE INSERTS Select size based on the manufacturer's stated load capacity and weight of material that will be supported. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inch size. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts that are flush with the slab surface. ANCHORS Install where indicated on the drawings and details. Where not specifically indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.
END OF SECTION
13032-2
22 05 29 - 7
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Page Intentionally Left Blank
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
SECTION 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL SCOPE This Section includes insulation specifications for plumbing systems. Included are the following requirements: PART 1 – GENERAL Scope Related Work Description Quality Assurance Definitions Submittals PART 2 – PRODUCTS Acceptable Manufacturers Insulation and Jackets PART 3 - EXECUTION General Installation Pipe Insulation Schedule RELATED WORK Requirements of Division 01 shall govern work under this Section. Section 22 05 00 - Common Work Results for Plumbing Section 22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Section 22 11 00 - Facility Water Distribution Section 22 13 00 - Facility Sanitary Sewerage Section 22 30 00 - Plumbing Equipment DESCRIPTION Furnish and install insulating materials, fittings, finishes, and accessories specified for piping and related equipment. The following types of insulation are specified in this Section: Pipe insulation Install insulation materials in accordance with the latest edition of MICA (Midwest Insulation Contractors Association) Standard and manufacturer's installation instructions. Exceptions to these standards will only be accepted where specifically modified in these Specifications, or where prior written approval has been obtained from Engineer. QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Section 22 05 00 and Division 01 of the Project Manual.
13032-2
22 07 00 - 1
PLUMBING INSULATION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Label insulating products delivered to construction site with the manufacturer's name and description of materials. DEFINITIONS Concealed: Shafts, furred spaces, space above finished ceilings, utility tunnels and crawl spaces. Other areas, including walk-through tunnels, shall be considered as exposed. Exposed to weather: Located outdoors, either on grade, on a wall, or on a roof, in location where sun, wind, rain, snow and other elements will come in contact with it. Unconditioned spaces: Unheated or non-cooled attics, utility tunnels and crawl spaces were ambient temperatures may rise above 90 degrees F, or drop below 50 Degrees F. Ducts in these instances are considered to be located outside of building thermal envelope. SUBMITTALS Submit data in accordance with Section 22 05 00 and Division 01 of the Project Manual Include manufacturer's data for the following: Pipe insulation Submittal shall include the following information: Manufacturer’s technical data sheets for each product with the following information: Density Thermal characteristics Temperature limitations Jacket type Materials of composition Material safety data sheets Schedule of all insulating materials to be used including: Application / intended use of each insulation type Insulation type and thickness Jacket type Fastening methods and adhesive type
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Armstrong, Halstead, Johns-Manville, Knauf, or Owens-Corning.
13032-2
22 07 00 - 2
PLUMBING INSULATION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
INSULATION AND JACKETS Glass Fiber: Manville Micro-Lok meeting ASTM C547; rigid molded, non-combustible, "K" Value: 0.23 at 75 F, maximum service temperature: 850 F, with vapor Retarder Jacket: AP-T Plus White Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum foil, secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or AP Jacket with outward clinch expanding staples or vapor barrier mastic as needed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION GENERAL Application of insulation to piping equipment shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's installation recommendations. Where thickness of insulation is not specified, use thickness recommended by manufacturer or required by applicable Codes. Insulation shall be applied in as warm an environment as possible, and in no instance below 25 F. No pipe shall be covered until after it has been installed, inspected, tested and approved. INSTALLATION All pipe insulation shall be installed with joints butted firmly together. All valves and fittings shall be insulated with mitered sections of insulation equal in density and thickness to the adjoining insulation, or with insulating cement equal in thickness to the adjoining insulation, or with "Zeston" type, premolded PVC fittings installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Fittings are to be finished with 8 oz. glass mesh and mastic (use breather mastic on systems operating above 50 F except where Zeston PVC covers are used). Jackets on pipe insulation may be stapled using outward clinch staples spaced 3" apart at least ¼" in from the lap edge on systems operating at 60 F and above; below 50 F the laps are to be vapor sealed using selfsealing lap, lap-seal tape gun or adhesive such as Armstrong 520. All insulation ends are to be tapered and sealed regardless of service. On all piping insulated with vapor barrier covering, use protection shield to over bottom one-half of insulated pipe. Shield to be minimum of 12" long and 16 gauge galvanized steel. Provide half-round, 12" long, hanger block at the bottom half of the pipe in place of the fiberglass pipe insulation. The hanger blocks shall be molded cork or calcium silicate pipe insulation of the same thickness as the adjoining fiberglass pipe insulation. The vapor barrier jacket shall be continuous through the hanger location. Vapor barrier jackets shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal. Pipe hangers shall be sized large enough to be installed over the outer surfaces of the insulation. Exception: For insulated drain pipe, the pipe may rest directly on the hanger and the insulation to wrap around the hanger and pipe.
13032-2
22 07 00 - 3
PLUMBING INSULATION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Omit insulation for: Unions and flanges. Vents to atmosphere, discharges from safety and relief valves and drain pipes. Provide finished edges at all access doors and end. PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE Provide insulation on new and remodeled piping. Minimum Insulation Thickness:
SYSTEMS Clearwater Waste* Domestic Cold Water Domestic Hot Water Domestic Hot Water Return Non-Potable Cold Water Tempered Water 12 13 14 15 16 17
1” or less --1/2” 1” 1” 1/2” 1/2”
PIPE SIZE 1-1/4” to 2” 2-1/2” to 4” 1” 1” 1/2” 1” 1” 1-1/2” 1” 1-1/2” 1/2” 1” 1/2” 1”
5” and up 1” 1” 1-1/2” -------
* Provide pipe insulation on above ground horizontal storm and clearwater drain piping, underside of roof drain, and initial 5 feet of vertical conductors.
END OF SECTION
13032-2
22 07 00 - 4
PLUMBING INSULATION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
SECTION 22 11 00 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL SCOPE This section contains specifications for plumbing pipe and pipe fittings for this project. Included are the following topics: PART 1 – GENERAL Scope Related Work Description Quality Assurance Submittals PART 2 – PRODUCTS Water Distribution Pipe and Fittings Valves Unions and Flanges Dielectric Couplings Water Hammer Suppressors PART 3 – EXECUTION Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting Water Piping System Testing RELATED WORK Requirements of Division 01 shall govern work under this Section. 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 14 – Plumbing Specialties DESCRIPTION Provide a domestic water distribution system including hot and cold water supply piping, hot water return piping, tempered water piping, pure water piping, valves, fittings, hardware, and specialties. Connect to plumbing fixtures, specialties, and equipment. Work under this section shall commence 5’-0” outside the building structure with a connection to the combination water supply lateral provided by the site utility contractor. QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Section 22 05 00 and Division 01 of the Project Manual. Order all pipe with each length marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer and type of pipe; with each shipping unit marked with the purchase order number, metal or alloy designation, temper, size, and name of supplier. 13032-2
22 11 00 - 1
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Any installed material not meeting the specification requirements must be replaced with material that meets these specifications without additional cost to the Owner. To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components in grooved piping systems, all grooved products utilized shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be supplied from the same manufacturer as the grooved components. SUBMITTALS Submit valve product data sheets in accordance with Section 22 05 00 and Division 01 of the Project Manual. Include materials of construction, dimensional data, ratings/capacities/ranges, approvals, test data, and identification as referenced in this section and/or on the drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE AND FITTINGS Under Ground: 2" and Smaller: Copper tube, type K, soft temper, ASTM B88, with wrought copper fittings. ANSI B16.22. Join using lead free flux and solder, ASTM B32, flux ASTM B813. 3" and Larger: Ductile iron pipe, mechanical or push on joint, thickness class 53 conforming to AWWA C-151 with standard thickness cement mortar lining AWWA C-104; ductile iron or gray iron mechanical joint cement mortar lined fittings, Class 250, AWWA C110; ductile iron restrained joint compact fittings, class 350, AWWA C-153; rubber gasket joints with nontoxic gasket lubricant, AWWA C-111. Joints shall have ASTM A506 steel clamps and straps for restraints with ASTM A307 steel bolts and ASTM A575 steel rods. Provide 8mil tube or sheet polyethylene encasement of iron pipe and pipe fittings, AWWA C105. Above Ground: Copper tube, Type L, hard temper, ASTM B88; with wrought copper fittings, ANSI B16.22. Join using lead free flux, ASTM B813, and solder, ASTM B32. Wrought copper, ANSI B16.22 or cast bronze, ANSI B16.18 fittings, copper tube dimensioned grooved ends (flaring of tube and fitting ends to IPS dimensions is not permitted), joined with mechanical couplings, synthetic rubber gasket seal, Victaulic style 607 QuickVic™ Installation Ready stab-on design, for direct ‘stab’ installation onto roll grooved copper tube without prior field disassembly and no loose parts. VALVES Manufacturer: Valves throughout the project shall be by one manufacturer, unless otherwise specified. Standard valves are based on Nibco models. Equivalent style valves as manufactured by Apollo, Crane, DeZurik, Gustin-Bacon, Grinnell, Hammond, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, Milwaukee Valve, Stockham, Victaulic, or Watts are acceptable. Valves shall be of standard dimensions, comparable to the number specified. 13032-2
22 11 00 - 2
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Balancing valves are based on Bell & Gossett models. Equivalent style valves by Armstrong, Flowset, Nibco, Taco, or Victaulic/TA Hydronics are acceptable. Shutoff Valves: Except as otherwise specified, all shutoff valves 2-1/2 inch and smaller shall be ball valves and shutoff valves 3 inch and larger shall be butterfly valves, unless required otherwise by local Water Utility specifications. Ball Valves: Bronze, two piece full port ball valves with bronze body, solder or threaded ends, chromium plated brass or stainless steel ball, reinforced Teflon seats and seals, blowout proof stem design, rated at 600 PSI non-shock WOG, Nibco model T/S-585-70. Include handle extension for insulated piping, NIB-SEAL by Nibco. Bronze, two piece full port ball valves with bronze body, solder or threaded ends, stainless steel ball, reinforced Teflon seats and seals, blowout proof stem design, rated at 600 PSI non-shock WOG, Nibco model T/S-585-70-66. Include handle extension for insulated piping, NIB-SEAL by Nibco. Bronze, three piece full port ball valves with bronze body, solder or threaded ends, stainless steel ball, reinforced Teflon seats and seals, blowout proof stem design, rated at 600 PSI non-shock WOG, Nibco model T/S-595-66. Include handle extension for insulated piping, NIB-SEAL by Nibco. Butterfly Valves: Ductile iron butterfly valve, polymid coated, EPDM elastomer coated disc, extended neck, grooved ends, 300 psi WOG pressure rated, Nibco GD 4765. Include lever handle through 6-inch size and gear operator for 8 inch and larger size. Cast bronze butterfly valve, EPDM elastomer coated ductile iron disc, copper tube dimensioned grooved ends, 300 psi maximum pressure rated, Victaulic Series 608. Include lever handle through 6-inch size. Check Valves: 3” and Smaller: Bronze body, Class 125, Y-pattern, swing type, check valve with solder ends, all bronze internal components and renewable seat and disc, Nibco model S-413-B. 4” and Larger: Cast iron body, Class 125, horizontal swing type, check valve with flanged ends, bronze trim and renewable seat and disc, Nibco model F-918-B. 2” and Smaller: Bronze body, ASTM B62, in-line lift type, spring, Buna-N disc, 250 psig WOG rating. Nibco 480 2-1/2” and Larger Iron body, bronze seat with Buna-N, bronze disc, in-line lift type, spring, 250 psig WOG rating, Nibco W960
13032-2
22 11 00 - 3
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Balancing Valves: ½” thru 2”: Bronze body balancing valve with sweat or threaded ends, calibrated brass orifice, integral adjustment knob with calibrated scale, memory stop indicator, drain tapping and differential pressure metering connections, Bell & Gossett "Circuit Setter". Ametal® brass copper alloy, y-pattern, globe type balancing valve with soldered or threaded ends, EPDM o-ring seals, 4-turn digital readout hand wheel with locking, tamper-proof setting, and differential pressure metering connections, separate shutoff valve not required, 300 psi at 250 deg F. Victaulic/Tour & Andersson Series 786, 787 & 78K balancing valves with Victaulic Series 799 or 79V Koil-Kit™ coil pack consisting of Victaulic Series 78U union port fitting, Series 78Y strainer/ball valve or Series 78T union/ball valve combination, and flexible hoses to complete terminal hookup at coil outlet. Gauge Valves: ¼” Size: Bronze body, rising stem gauge/globe valve with renewable seat and disc and malleable iron hand-wheel, Nibco T-235. Valve shall be rated for 300 PSI non-shock WOG. Water pressure reducing valves: Bronze body, diaphragm operated, with an integral thermal expansion bypass valve, inlet union, stainless steel strainer, renewable monel or stainless steel seat and adjustable reduced pressure range, 300 psig at 160 degrees F. Pre-set for the scheduled pressure, ASSE 1003. A. W. Cash, Conbraco, Watts, Wilkins. UNIONS AND FLANGES Unions: Bronze, solder connection, Nibco figure 733. Flanges: Cast copper alloy, class 125, MSS SP-106, Nibco figure 741. DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS Steel casing, zinc electroplated, with inert thermoplastic lining, various end types, Clearflow, style 47 by Victaulic. Dielectric flanges 2” and larger; with iron female pipe thread to copper solder joint or brass female pipe thread end connections, non-asbestos gaskets and pressure rating of not less than 175 psig at 180 degrees Fahrenheit. Watts Regulator Company, Lochinvar, Wilkins, Epco Sales, Inc. WATER HAMMER SUPPRESSORS Acceptable manufacturers are MIFAB, PPP, Sioux Chief, and Watts. Piston compressed air column type, with sealed air chamber.
13032-2
22 11 00 - 4
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
Water supply piping serving fixtures, appliances, equipment and devices with quick closing and/or solenoid-actuated valves shall be provided with water hammer arrestors. Also provide where indicated on the water supply piping as shown on the water supply isometrics. Devices shall be mechanical arrestors installed in accordance with PDI Standard WH201. Air chambers are not considered to be equal. Shop drawings are required. Submit to A/E for approval prior to installation. Water hammer arrestors must be accessible for inspection and replacement. Provide access panel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING See Section 22 05 00. WATER PIPING SYSTEM Piping shall be pitched to drain entire system; install drain valves at low points. Provide unions at equipment and valves. Provide offsets and transition fittings as required. Avoid dips or depressions in pipe runs. No water piping shall be installed in exterior walls, unless adequately protected from freezing. Two inch insulation shall be installed on back and sides of chase, front shall be open to room heat, covered only by finished wall material. Install unions, couplings, or flanges at all final equipment connections and as required to facilitate removal of equipment. Install dielectric couplings at every connection between copper pipe and other metals. Use dielectric unions for connecting copper and steel piping. Provide backflow devices as required by Code on water connections to HVAC equipment and other equipment. Extend hot water piping from water heater and connect to all fixtures and equipment as required. Hot water and cold water lines shall be kept at least 6 inches apart whenever possible.
13032-2
22 11 00 - 5
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
Grooved Joints: Grooved joint piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines and recommendations. Grooved couplings, fittings and valves shall be of the same manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended service as specified. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the grooved coupling manufacturer. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained field representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the proper use if grooving tools, application of groove, and installation of grooved piping products. Factory trained representative shall periodically inspect the product installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products. Push-To-Connect Fittings: Install in accordance with Manufacturer's latest recommendations. Follow the latest published literature as provided by Manufacturer. Pipe ends shall be cleaned, free from indentations, projections, burrs, and foreign matter. Use a tube preparation tool as supplied by Manufacturer to clean. Apply installation mark in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions. Push copper tube into fittings to installation depth mark, per Manufacturer’s installation instructions. Keep fittings free of dirt and oil; use only on potable water or oil-free compressed air systems. Pressure-Sealed Fittings: Stainless steel pipe shall be square cut, +/- 0.030", properly deburred and cleaned. Pipe ends shall be marked at the required location, using a manufacturer-supplied gauge, to ensure full insertion into the coupling or fitting during assembly. Use a tool provided by the Manufacturer with the proper sized jaw for pressing (Victaulic “PFT” Series). Hot Water Re-Circulating System: Install return system including check valves, balancing valves, and pumps. Pitch and grade all lines as required to ensure satisfactory circulation. Adjust each balancing valve and set position stop. Balance system to minimum flow in return piping branches needed to maintain even supply water temperature and to provide continuous circulation throughout building. Provide balancing report along with O&M manual submittals. Test and demonstrate to A/E upon request. Valve Installation: Install shutoff valves with stem vertical. Exception; the stem may be horizontal if a vertical installation would not allow access to the valve handle All valves with screwed ends shall be installed using "Teflon" tape applied on male portion of piping fitting.
13032-2
22 11 00 - 6
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Each individual fixture or piece of equipment shall have an independent shut-off valve adjacent to fixture in addition to the required branch shut-off. Where valves are installed in walls an access panel shall be provided. Branches: Valve shut-off full size of branch for each branch take-off to supply stack or fixture group. Drains: Provide valved drains at low points of systems as required or directed. All piping shall be arranged to drain through valved drains. Flushing Mains and Branch Piping: Upon completion of the water distribution system, test all valves to insure their full opening and flush out the system progressively by opening drain valves and building outlets and permitting the flow to continue from each until the water runs clear. Pipe Insulation: Provide pipe insulation for all domestic water piping per Section 22 07 00. Sterilization of Water Distribution System: As soon as the water distribution system has been flushed out as above specified, it shall be sterilized in accordance with the requirements of the local Health Department/Water Utility or in the absence of such, by the following method: Introduce chlorine or a solution of calcium or sodium hypochlorite, filling the lines slowly and applying the sterilizing agent at a rate of 50 parts per million of chlorine, as determined by residual chlorine tests at the ends of the lines. Open and close all valves and hydrants while the system is being chlorinated. After the sterilizing agent has been applied for 24 hours, test for residual chlorine at the ends of the lines. If less than 5 PPM as indicated, repeat the sterilization process. When tests show at least 5 PPM of residual chlorine flush out the system until all traces of the chemical used are removed. Samples After disinfecting the water distribution system, take water samples to check for bacteria. Take 5 water samples from remote faucets, plus the main entrance. Send the samples to the Wisconsin Department of Health Lab to sample for a safe water supply system. TESTING Refer to Division 01, "Starting of Systems" and Section 22 05 00. Hydro-statically pressure test water piping to 150 psig for 4 hours. No decrease in pressure is allowed. Provide pressure gauge with shutoff and a bleeder valve at the highest point of the system tested. Inspect joints in system under test. No leaks allowed. Systems with a combination water supply fire protection service shall have the service portion of the system tested per NFPA 24. 13032-2
22 11 00 - 7
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Do not conceal pipe until satisfactorily tested. Testing with air will not be allowed.
END OF SECTION
13032-2
22 11 00 - 8
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
SECTION 22 13 00 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL SCOPE This section contains specifications for plumbing pipe and pipe fittings for this project. Included are the following topics: PART 1 – GENERAL Scope Related Work Description Quality Assurance Submittals PART 2 – PRODUCTS Underground Pipe Fittings Above Ground Pipe and Fittings Drains and Cleanouts PART 3 - EXECUTION Drain and Vent Piping System Pipe Joints Safings Vent Flashing Cleanouts Traps Testing RELATED WORK Requirements of Division 01 shall govern work under this Section. 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 14 – Plumbing Specialties 22 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment DESCRIPTION Interior sanitary waste and vent and acid drain and vent piping systems including branches, drains, cleanouts, stacks, fittings and hardware. Work under this section shall commence from 5 feet outside the building wall with connections to sanitary building sewer lateral(s). QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Section 22 05 00 and Division 01 of the Project Manual.
13032-2
22 13 00 - 1
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Order all pipe with each length marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer and type of pipe; with each shipping unit marked with the purchase order number, metal or alloy designation, temper, size, and name of supplier. Any installed material not meeting the specification requirements must be replaced with material that meets these specifications without additional cost to the Owner. SUBMITTALS Submit data in accordance with Section 22 05 00 and Division 01 of the Project Manual. Schedule from the contractor indicating the ASTM, or CISPI specification number of the pipe being proposed along with its type and grade, and sufficient information to indicate the type and rating of fittings for each service. Include materials of construction, dimensional data, ratings/capacities/ranges, approvals, test data, and identification as referenced in this section and/or on the drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS UNDERGROUND PIPE AND FITTINGS Cast iron, no-hub, service weight, ASTM A888, CISPI 301, with rubber gasket couplings, ASTM C564, and stainless steel clamp, CISPI 310. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute or receive prior approval of the engineer. Piping and fittings shall be manufactured by AB&I, Charlotte, or Tyler. Cast iron soil pipe, bell and spigot, service weight, coated, ASTM A74, with rubber gaskets, ASTM C564. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute or receive prior approval of the engineer. Piping and fittings shall be manufactured by AB&I, Charlotte, or Tyler. PVC, Schedule 40, Type I, ASTM D-1785, and PVC drain-waste-vent fittings, ASTM D-2665, with solvent weld joints, ASTM D2855. Solid wall PVC only. ABOVE GROUND PIPE AND FITTINGS Cast iron, no-hub, service weight, ASTM A888, CISPI 301, with rubber gasket couplings, ASTM C564, and stainless steel clamp, CISPI 310. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute or receive prior approval of the engineer. Piping and fittings shall be manufactured by AB&I, Charlotte, or Tyler. PVC, Schedule 40, Type I, ASTM D-1785, and PVC drain-waste-vent fittings, ASTM D-2665, with solvent weld joints, ASTM D2855. Solid wall PVC only. Optional Materials for Piping 2” and Smaller: Copper drainage tube, Type DWV, ASTM B-306; wrought copper and cast brass drainage fittings with soldered joints. Galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A53 or A120; galvanized cast iron threaded DWV fittings ANSI B16.4 and ANSI B16.12.
13032-2
22 13 00 - 2
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS Drains and cleanouts manufactured by J.R. Smith, Josam, MIFAB, Sioux Chief, Wade, Watts, or Zurn. Install trap-seal barrier type on floor drains in mechanical rooms. Refer to Plumbing Drain and Cleanout Schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION DRAIN AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM Connect all drain and vent piping to each fixture and piece of equipment and install all required piping as shown on drawings. Provide all necessary fittings and hardware to make required offsets and transitions. Changes in direction of drainage piping shall be made by the appropriate use of 45 degree wyes, long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, 1/16 bends or combination. Fittings to be installed to make for the least possibility of stoppage. All horizontal drainage piping less than 3 inches shall be pitched a minimum of 1/4 inch per foot of run. Pitch drainage piping 3 inch and larger a minimum of 1/8" per foot of run. When running drain piping below a footing and parallel to it, piping shall be in all cases be at least one foot greater in distance away from footing than below its bottom. Where possible, run sewers at centerpoint between two parallel footings and maintain abovementioned distances at a minimum. When running drain piping under a footing, disturb as little of the soil under footing as possible. Provide concrete fill under all footings where excavations wider than 18" are required. When running drain piping through a footing, provide a steel pipe sleeve with 2" thick minimum compressible wrap. Connect to all drains, fixtures and equipment as required. PIPE JOINTS Install cast iron pipe and fittings, hubless pattern, as recommended by CISPI standards 301, 310, and in their publication "Installation Suggestions for Cast Iron No-Hub Pipe and Fittings". Prepare PVC pipe ends as recommended by manufacturer. Use a P-70 type primer (for PVC) and a PVC solvent cement appropriate to the pipe size and temperature range. Soldered joints shall be as described in Section 22 05 00. SAFINGS Manufacturers: Noble, Oatey. Chlorinated polyethylene sheeting, 40 mils thick, ASTM D4068, joined with CPE solvent; or 3 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead.
13032-2
22 13 00 - 3
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Install safing at floor drains above grade. Extend 12" beyond drains in all directions. Cover entire floor in showers and extend 6" up in walls above curbs and to a height of 6' (3" wide each direction) in corners. Install on concrete floor that is smooth and free of debris. Seal all joints and connect to drain body clamp. Safing is subject to standing water leak test. Install safing at all built-up shower installations. (Note: spray-on and brush applied liquid safing is not acceptable). VENT FLASHING All vent pipes passing through roof shall be covered with sheet lead weighing not less than 4 pounds per square foot. Sheet lead shall be well flashed onto the roof, 12" around pipe. Vent pipes shall extend a minimum of 12" above roof. CLEANOUTS Provide and install cleanouts as shown on plans and as required by Code. TRAPS Trap all fixtures and equipment. Trap seals shall be standard depth, except when deep seals are required by Code. Traps shall be set true and level and located within the limits of the Code requirements. A trap shall not be used as a separator, interceptor or other type of device to retain solids. All traps above grade shall be provided with approved screw-type cleanout plugs. Traps shall be protected during construction and sealed to prevent foreign matter from entering. Provide adjustable expansion plug, plastic cap, or approved equivalent. Install trap-seal protection barrier type on floor drains in mechanical rooms during trim out stage of floor drain installation. TESTING Refer to Testing paragraph of Section 22 05 00. Hydro-statically pressure test all piping to 10 feet of water column pressure for 2 hours. No leaks allowed. Provide mint test of entire system as required by local inspector.
END OF SECTION
13032-2
22 13 00 - 4
FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
SECTION 22 16 00 GENERAL SERVICE NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL SCOPE This section contains specifications for plumbing pipe and pipe fittings for this project. Included are the following topics: PART 1 – GENERAL Scope Related Work Description Reference Standards Quality Assurance Welder Qualifications Natural Gas Service Design Criteria Delivery, Storage, and Handling Submittals PART 2 – PRODUCTS Natural Gas Vents and Relief Valves Unions and Flanges PART 3 – EXECUTION Preparation Erection Welded Pipe Joints Threaded Pipe Joints Installation Vents and Relief Valves Unions and Flanges Piping System Leak Tests RELATED WORK Applicable provisions of Division 01 govern work under this section. Section 22 05 00 – Common work Results for Plumbing Section 22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment DESCRIPTION Provide Natural Gas system to locations indicated on the drawings, including fittings, valves, regulators, hardware, and controls. REFERENCE STANDARDS ANSI B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless
13032-2
22 16 00 - 1 GENERAL SERVICE NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
ASTM A234 ANSI B31.9
Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures Pipe Material Requirements
QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Section GC – General Conditions of the Contract, Equals and Substitutions. Order all Type E and Type S steel pipe with heat numbers rolled, stamped, or stenciled to each length or each bundle, depending on the size of the pipe, and in accordance with the appropriate ASTM specification. Any installed material not meeting the specification requirements must be replaced with material that meets these specifications without additional cost to the Owner. WELDER QUALIFICATIONS Before any metallic welding is performed, Contractor to submit his Standard Welding Procedure Specification together with the Procedure Qualification Record as required by Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and/or the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. Before any polyethylene fusion welding is performed, Contractor to submit certification that the welders to be used on this project have successfully demonstrated proper welding procedures in accordance with the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 49, Part 192, Section 192.285. The A/E reserves the right to test the work of any welder employed on the project, at the Contractor's expense. If the work of the welder is found to be unsatisfactory, the welder shall be prevented from doing further welding on the project. NATURAL GAS SERVICE All charges for the gas service as shown on the plans, including the connection from the main in the street or other location to the gas meter, shall be paid by this Contractor, including setting of gas meter(s) and all work performed by the gas company. DESIGN CRITERIA Use only new material, free of defects, rust and scale, and meeting the latest revision of ASTM specifications as listed in this specification. Construct all piping for the highest pressures and temperatures in the respective system in accordance with ANSI B31, but not less than 125 psig unless specifically indicated otherwise. Non-metallic piping will be acceptable only for the services indicated. It will not be acceptable in occupied spaces and ventilation plenum spaces, including plenum ceilings. Where weld fittings or mechanical grooved fittings are used, use only long radius elbows having a centerline radius of 1.5 pipe diameters.
13032-2
22 16 00 - 2 GENERAL SERVICE NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Where ASTM A53 grade A pipe is specified, ASTM A53 grade B pipe may be substituted at Contractor's option. Where the grade or type is not specified, Contractor may choose from those commercially available. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Promptly inspect shipments to insure that the material is undamaged and complies with specifications. Cover pipe to eliminate rust and corrosion while allowing sufficient ventilation to avoid condensation. Do not store materials directly on grade. Protect pipe, tube, and fitting ends so they are not damaged. Where end caps are provided or specified, take precautions so the caps remain in place. Offsite storage agreements will not relieve the contractor from using proper storage techniques. Storage and protection methods must allow inspection to verify products. SUBMITTALS Refer to Division 01 of the Project Manual. Contractor shall submit schedule indicating the ASTM specification number of the pipe being proposed along with its type and grade and sufficient information to indicate the type and rating of fittings for each service. Type E or S Steel Pipe: Mill certification papers, also known as material test reports, for the pipe furnished for this project, in English. Heat numbers on these papers to match the heat numbers stenciled on the pipe. Chemical analysis indicated on the mill certification papers to meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced ASTM specification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS NATURAL GAS Gas piping and fittings 2” and smaller: ASTM A53, type E or S, standard weight (schedule 40) black steel pipe with ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 class 150 black malleable iron threaded fittings or ASTM A234 grade WPB/ANSI B16.9 standard weight, carbon steel weld fittings. Gas piping and fittings 2-1/2” and larger: ASTM A53, type E or S, standard weight black steel pipe with ASTM A234 grade WPB/ANSI B16.9 standard weight, carbon steel weld fittings. Valves: Crane, Walworth, Jenkins, Nibco, Milwaukee or DeZurik are acceptable manufacturers. Crane No. 320 or 325 cast iron gas cocks (ASTM A-126) screwed or flanged ends; 125 psig rated.
13032-2
22 16 00 - 3 GENERAL SERVICE NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Pressure Regulating Valve (PRV): Manufacturers: Spence or Fisher. Valve: Fisher Model No. S-202 with 8.5 inch to 18-inch water column spring, 0.75-inch orifice, internal relief valve, size 1.5 inch. Inlet Pressure: 2 psig. Outlet Pressure: 14-inch water column. Capacity: 7000 cfh (natural gas). VENTS AND RELIEF VALVES Use pipe and pipe fittings as specified for the system to which the relief valve or vent is connected. UNIONS AND FLANGES 2" and Smaller: ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3 malleable iron unions with brass seats. Use black malleable iron on black steel piping and galvanized malleable iron on galvanized steel piping. Use unions of a pressure class equal to or higher than that specified for the fittings of the respective piping service but not less than 250 psi. 2-1/2" and Larger: ASTM A181 or A105, grade 1 hot forged steel flanges of threaded, welding and of a pressure class compatible with that specified for valves, piping specialties and fittings of the respective piping service. Flanges smaller than 2-1/2" may be used as needed for connecting to equipment and piping specialties. Use raised face flanges ANSI B16.5 for mating with other raised face flanges on equipment with flat ring or full face gaskets. Use ANSI B16.1 flat face flanges with full face gaskets for mating with other flat face flanges on equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION PREPARATION Remove all foreign material from interior and exterior of pipe and fittings. ERECTION Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings and at heights which do not obstruct any portion of a window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where interferences develop in the field, offset or reroute piping as required to clear such interferences. In all cases, consult drawings for exact location of pipe spaces, ceiling heights, door and window openings, or other architectural details before installing piping.
13032-2
22 16 00 - 4 GENERAL SERVICE NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Provide anchors, expansion joints, swing joints and/or expansion loops so that piping may expand and contract without damage to itself, equipment, or building. Mitered ells, notched tees, and orange peel reducers are not acceptable. On threaded piping, bushings are not acceptable. "Weldolets" and "Threadolets" may be used for branch takeoffs up to one-half (1/2) the diameter of the main. Do not route piping through transformer vaults or above transformers, panelboards, or switchboards, including the required service space for this equipment, unless the piping is serving this equipment. Install all valves, and piping specialties, including items furnished by others, as specified and/or detailed. Make connections to all equipment installed by others where that equipment requires the piping services indicated in this section. WELDED PIPE JOINTS Make all welded joints by fusion welding in accordance with ASME Codes, ANSI B31, and State Codes where applicable. Electrodes shall be Lincoln, or approved equal, with coating and diameter as recommended by the manufacturer for the type and thickness of work being done. THREADED PIPE JOINTS Use a Teflon based thread lubricant or Teflon tape when making joints; no hard setting pipe thread cement or caulking will be allowed. INSTALLATION Natural Gas: Piping and equipment shall be installed according to the latest revision of NFPA 54 (National Fuel Gas Code), local codes, and the serving utility requirements. Connect to gas meter furnished and installed by Utility, or to existing system. Full size scale pockets with removable caps shall be provided before connections to equipment. Provide drip pockets at low points. Pitch horizontal piping down 1" in 60 feet in the direction of flow. Install a 4" minimum depth dirt leg at the bottom of each vertical run and at each appliance. When installing mains and branches, cap gas tight each tee or pipe end which will not be immediately extended. All branch connections to the main shall be from the top or side of the main. Teflon tape is acceptable for use on natural gas lines. Do not install gas pipe in a ventilation air plenum. If an above ground vent terminates in an area subject to snow accumulation, terminate the line at least five feet above grade. Install a shut off valve at each appliance. Provide a valved connection at the main for equipment and appliances furnished by others.
13032-2
22 16 00 - 5 GENERAL SERVICE NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Piping through a roof shall be run through an approved roof penetration with flashing and counter flashing. Each gas pressure reducing valve vent and relief valve vent shall be run separately to a point outside of the building, terminated with a screened vent cap, and located according to gas utility regulations. Clean all welded piping before all regulators and control valves. Test by placing target cloth over piping and blow with compressed air. Clean piping until target cloth is clean and free of debris. VENTS AND RELIEF VALVES Install vent and relief valve discharge lines as indicated on the drawings, as detailed, and as specified for each specific valve or piping specialty item. In no event is a termination to occur less than six feet above a roof line. UNIONS AND FLANGES Install a union or flange, as required, at each automatic control valve and at each piping specialty or piece of equipment which may require removal for maintenance, repair, or replacement. Where a valve is located at a piece of equipment, locate the flange or union connection on the equipment side of the valve. Concealed unions or flanges are not acceptable. PIPING SYSTEM LEAK TESTS Verify that the piping system being tested is fully connected to all components and that all equipment is properly installed, wired, and ready for operation. If required for the additional pressure load under test, provide temporary restraints at expansion joints or isolate them during the test. Verify that hangers can withstand any additional weight load that may be imposed by the test. Provide all piping, fittings, blind flanges, and equipment to perform the testing. Conduct pressure test with test medium of air or water unless specifically indicated. Minimum test time is indicated in the table below; additional time may be necessary to conduct an examination for leakage. Each test must be witnessed by the Division's representative. If leaks are found, repair the area with new materials and repeat the test; caulking will not be acceptable. Do not insulate pipe until it has been successfully tested. For hydrostatic tests, use clean water and remove all air from the piping being tested by means of air vents or loosening of flanges/unions. Measure and record test pressure at the high point in the system. For air tests, gradually increase the pressure to not more than one half of the test pressure; then increase the pressure in steps of approximately one-tenth of the test pressure until the required test pressure is reached. Examine all joints and connections with a soap bubble solution or equivalent method. The piping system exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing shall show no evidence of leaking. After testing is complete, slowly release the pressure in a safe manner.
13032-2
22 16 00 - 6 GENERAL SERVICE NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Test natural gas piping system in accordance with NFPA 54, Part 4. Measure test pressure with a water manometer or an equivalent device calibrated in increments not greater than 0.1 inch water column. System will not be approved until it can be demonstrated that there is no measurable loss of test pressure during the test period. Conduct fuel oil system test so as not to impose a pressure of more than 10 psig on the tank. Instead of a pressure test, suction lines may be tested under a vacuum of not less than 20 inches of mercury maintained for at least one hour. System Natural gas
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Pressure 100 psig
Medium Air
Duration 24 hr
On piping that cannot be tested because of connection to an active line, provide temporary blind flanges and hydrostatically test new section of piping. After completion of test, remove temporary flanges and make final connections to piping. Die penetrate test pass weld or x-ray the piping that was not hydrostatically tested up to the active system.
END OF SECTION
13032-2
22 16 00 - 7 GENERAL SERVICE NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
Page Intentionally Left Blank
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
SECTION 22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL SCOPE This section includes specifications for water heaters, water softeners, pumps and other equipment used for plumbing applications. Included are the following topics: PART 1 - GENERAL Scope Related Work Description Quality Assurance Submittals Operation and Maintenance PART 2 - PRODUCTS General Exterior Grease Interceptors Water Softeners Water Heaters Hot Water Circulation Pumps Storage Tanks Expansion Tanks UV System (Base Bid) Chemical Dosing System (Alternate Bid) PART 3 - EXECUTION Installation Exterior Grease Interceptors Water Softeners Water Heaters and Circulating Pumps RELATED WORK Applicable provisions of Division 01 shall govern work under this section. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing Section 22 05 14 - Plumbing Specialties Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation Division 26 - Electrical DESCRIPTION Provide plumbing equipment as listed in this section and as scheduled on the drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Division 01 - General Conditions of the Contract, Article 7.
13032-2
22 30 00 - 1
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Plumbing products requiring approval by the State of Wisconsin Dept. of Commerce must be approved or have pending approval at the time of shop drawing submission. SUBMITTALS Include data concerning dimensions, capacities, materials of construction, ratings, certifications, weights, pump curves with net positive suction head requirements, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE All operations and maintenance data shall comply with the submission and content requirements specified under section GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. In addition to the general content specified under GENERAL REQUIREMENTS supply the following additional documentation:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS GENERAL Refer to Plumbing Equipment Schedule for specific model numbers and sizing information of the plumbing equipment specified herein. EXTERIOR GREASE INTERCEPTORS Acceptable Manufacturers: Crest Precast, Dalmaray, or Weiser Interceptor: Heavy duty precast reinforced concrete tank ASTM C913, minimum 5” thick walls and base, minimum 6” thick top. Gasketed inlet and outlet openings, polyethylene inlet and outlet baffles and trademark capacity label above outlet. Top shall have 24” diameter manhole openings with 24” diameter concrete manhole risers. Neenah R-6462-GH heavy duty cast iron frames, bolted lids, and “grease interceptor” label. Crest Model as scheduled on drawings. WATER SOFTENERS Water softening systems, equipment, and components shall be manufactured by Bruner, Culligan, Diamond, Hellenbrand, North Star, or Marlo. Mineral/Resin Tank: Fiberglass reinforced tank, cation exchange resin, automatic regeneration, meter actuated, internal bypass, flow control backwash, 150 psi operation, N.S.F. approved, U.L. listed. Valve: Solid brass type, with hydraulically balanced piston valves, dual drive motors, backwash flow control, automatic bypass and sample clock. Brine/Salt Storage Tank: Polyethylene tank construction, float system to limit brine, with salt platform and separate well for brine valve. Include cover on tank assembly. 13032-2
22 30 00 - 2
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Regeneration Control: Delayed regeneration system set to regenerate on off hours. 120 volt, A.C. with 3-prong plug and cord. Set regeneration for early a.m. operation. WATER HEATERS High Efficiency Stainless Steel Commercial Gas Fired Water Heater: Manufacturers: Heat Transfer Products, National Combustion, Rheem, Voyager. Type: Gas fired sealed combustion condensing commercial water heater, minimum 94% thermal efficiency. Design to be AGA certified with 3 year tank warranty and 1 year parts warranty. Tank: 316L stainless steel tank rated for 150 psig complete with submerged combustion chamber, 90/10 cupronickel heat exchanger, foam insulation, plastic jacket, brass drain valve and temperature and pressure relief valve. Burner: Side mounted power burner. Controls: 120 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hz self-diagnostic electronic controls, intermittent spark or hot surface ignition, operating thermostat with 70o-180oF adjustable temperature control, energy cutoff with manual reset, blower pressure switch, gas valve and pressure regulator. Vent: 3" CPVC or ABS flue gas outlet and PVC, CPVC or ABS combustion air intake with DWV solvent weld fittings. HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS Pump shall be manufactured by Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Taco, or Thrush. Pump shall be 120 volt, single phase, 3450 RPM, in-line bronze pump, with brass impeller. Refer to Plumbing Equipment Schedule on drawings for model number and capacity. Time Control: Time controls shall be manufactured by Paragon Electric Co. or equivalent. Provide a 120 VAC electronic programmable time controller for each circulating pump. Unit shall include seven day, 365 day per year programmable features and rechargeable battery backup; Paragon Electric Co. model number EC72. Motor Starter: Starters shall be manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Cutler-Hammer, G.E., or Square D. Provide a single phase manual motor starter switch for starting and controlling each pump, with internal overload protection, general purpose enclosure, neon pilot light and HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch; Allen-Bradley Model 600-TAX142.EXPANSION TANKS 13032-2
22 30 00 - 3
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Expansion tanks shall be manufactured by Amtrol, Bell and Gossett, or Wessels. Vertical steel precharged hydro-pneumatic expansion tank, 125 psi ASME labeled construction, including a replaceable flexible butyl rubber bladder, system connection fitting, Schrader type air charge fitting, steel base ring stand, factory prime and enamel painted exterior finish, ASME relief valve. Materials exposed to water to be NSF or FDA approved for potable water service. ULTRAVIOLET SYSTEMS (BASE BID) Systems shall be provided by Hellenbrand, Total Water, or equal. Ultraviolet system equipped with UV lamp technology for disinfection and ozone destruction. Coordinate all electrical connections with EC. Performance: UV Disinfection System: Performance rating shall be greater than 99.9% (3-Log) bacterial reduction across UV Disinfection System, providing the water UV transmittance (UVT) is greater than or equal to 90% (measured at 254 nm at 1cm path length). UV design dosage shall be equal to or greater than 30 mJ/cm² and based on end of lamp life. End of Lamp Life (EOL) intensity shall be not less than 80% of Beginning of Lamp Life (BOL) at 9,000 hours of operation. UV Ozone Destruction System: Performance rating shall be a reduction in residual ozone to an outlet undetectable level. In addition, provide greater than 99.9% (3-Log) bacterial reduction across UV Ozone Destruction System, providing the water UV transmittance (UVT) is greater than or equal to 90% (measured at 254 nm at 1cm path length). : UV design dosage shall be equal to or greater than 90 mJ/cm² per one part per million ozone, and based on end of lamp life. End of Lamp Life (EOL) intensity shall be not less than 80% of Beginning of Lamp Life (BOL) at 9,000 hours of operation. Provide system and controls as scheduled on drawings. Place system on 3-1/2” concrete equipment pad. CHEMICAL DOSING SYSTEM (ALTERNATE BID) Systems shall be provided by Hellenbrand, Total Water, or equal. Provide chemical feed system with 3” remote meter, PCM, 10 GPD feed pump and solution tank. Chlorine shall be 6% - 8% sourced locally to meet NSF standards. Connect to piping feeding water heaters.
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install plumbing equipment where indicated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate equipment location with piping, ductwork, conduit and equipment of other trades to allow sufficient clearances. Locate equipment and arrange plumbing piping to provide access space for servicing all components.
13032-2
22 30 00 - 4
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Set commercial water heaters, commercial water softeners, storage tanks and booster pumps on concrete housekeeping pads. Adjust and level equipment. Connect equipment to water and drain piping using unions or flanges and isolation valves. Size temperature and relief valves per CSA ratings. Pipe temperature and pressure relief valves to floor drain or floor as indicated. Startup and test equipment adjusting operating and safety controls for proper operation. Cycle softeners and adjust for specified exchange rate, regeneration time, consumption, backflow rate, etc. Provide initial salt fill of brine tank. Lubricate pumps before startup. Adjust pumps for rated flow. Clean and blowdown strainers after 8 hours of operation. EXTERIOR GREASE INTERCEPTORS Excavate for interceptors and tanks setting on 6” thick granular base. Seal joints between sections, tops, collars, and castings with gasketing materials for tightly packed waterproof seals. Adjust castings to finished grade. Place piping into interceptors and tanks providing full support of piping on exterior bedding and insuring pipe seals are properly installed. Backfill and compact the soil around interceptors and tanks. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for bedding, backfill, and compaction. Interceptors shall be vacuum tested prior to backfill. WATER SOFTENERS Provide full size valved bypass and valved inlet/outlet piping. Pipe backwash to nearby hub drain. Install softener per manufacturer's recommendation. Provide 1000 lb. of pelletized salt for initial start-up and operation. WATER HEATERS AND CIRCULATING PUMPS Provide piping, unions, valves, thermometers, relief valves, and hardware. Locate water heaters with controls, relief valves, and access holes accessible for service and replacement without moving heaters. Install relief valve and extend relief piping individually and full size to the nearest floor drain. Install the domestic water heater(s) and circulator(s) in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Power wiring shall be provided by the EC. Mount each domestic water heater and storage tank on a 3½" high concrete pad.
13032-2
22 30 00 - 5
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
The manufacturer shall provide a written service warranty which shall provide factory service for a period of one year following the acceptance of the installation. The one-year service warranty shall be submitted at the time of the certified shop drawings submittal. The one-year service warranty by the manufacturer shall provide free parts and labor to correct malfunctions of the boiler-burner unit during the warranty period. Gas Fired Water Heaters: Provide the services of a local factory authorized representative for gas fired equipment startup. A letter of compliance with factory recommendations and installation instructions shall be submitted with operation and maintenance instructions. The discharge of boiler relief or safety valves shall be piped individually and full size to the nearest floor drain. Extend a condensate drain line from the boiler and also the boiler venting individually to the nearest floor drain. The vent connections on pressure regulating valves, shall be piped separately to the outside atmosphere and terminated with an insect screened, weatherproof cap. Venting: Vent the gas fired units in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. Vent piping and fittings shall be provided by the boiler manufacturer in a single kit specific for this boiler and for this project. Install venting to maintain appliance sealed combustion rating.
END OF SECTION
13032-2
22 30 00 - 6
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL SCOPE This section includes specifications for plumbing fixtures, faucets and trim for this project. Included are the following topics: PART 1 – GENERAL Scope Related Work Description Reference Standards Quality Assurance Submittals PART 2 – PRODUCTS General Manufacturers PART 2 - EXECUTION Installation RELATED WORK Requirements of Division 01 shall govern work under this Section. Division 11 – Foodservice Equipment Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results for Plumbing Section 22 05 14 – Plumbing Specialties Section 22 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Section 22 11 00 – Facility Water Distribution Section 22 13 00 – Facility Sanitary Sewerage DESCRIPTION Furnish and install plumbing fixtures with traps, drains, stops, faucets, flush valves, carriers and hardware. REFERENCE STANDARDS ANSI A112.6.1M-88 Supports for Off-the Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use. ANSI A112.18.1-94 Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings. ANSI A112.19.1-90 Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures. ANSI A112.19.2M-82 Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. ANSI A112.19.5-79(R1990) Trim for Water Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals. ANSI Z124.1-87 Plastic Bathtub Units. ANSI Z124.2-87 Plastic Shower Receptors and Shower Stalls. ARI-1010-94 Drinking Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking Water Coolers. ASSE 1011-93 Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. ASSE 1014-90 Handheld Showers.
13032-2
22 40 00 - 1
PLUMBING FIXTURES
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to 22 05 00 and Division 01 of the Project Manual. Plumbing products requiring approval by the State of Wisconsin Dept. of Safety and Professional Services must be approved or have pending approval at the time of shop drawing submission. SUBMITTALS Submit product data sheets in accordance with Division 01 and Section 22 05 00. Include data concerning sizes, utility sizes, rough in-dimensions, capacities, materials of construction, ratings, weights, trim, finishes, manufacturer's installation requirements, manufacturer's performance limitations, and appropriate identification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS GENERAL Fixtures must conform to general requirements given below and to specified requirements for each type. Vitreous china fixtures shall conform to ANSI A112.19.2M. Enameled cast iron fixtures shall conform to ANSI A112.19.1M. Stainless steel fixtures shall conform to ANSI A112.19.3. Fixtures shall be installed so that parts are accessible for repairs when fixtures are in place. Manufacturer's trademark or name shall be visible on fixtures. Faucets, traps, exposed fittings and trim shall be polished chrome plated unless otherwise specified. Provide polished chrome plated nipples at all lavatories. Exposed piping penetrating walls, floors or ceilings shall have chrome plated escutcheons, or flanges of sufficient depth to seal the opening. Fixture stops shall be heavy duty commercial grade, slow compression angle valves with 1/2" inlet and 3/8" or 1/2" chrome plated flexible riser. Traps shall be semi-cast 17-gauge brass, chrome plated, with cleanout and escutcheon. Sink traps shall be 1-1/2" minimum. MANUFACTURERS Vitreous china and enameled cast iron fixtures shall be manufactured by American-Standard, Kohler, or Sloan. Fixture color shall be white unless specified otherwise. Flush valves shall be manufactured by Delaney, Sloan (“Royal” series), Zurn (“Aquavantage” series), or equal.
13032-2
22 40 00 - 2
PLUMBING FIXTURES
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Solid plastic toilet seats shall be manufactured by Bemis, Benneke, Centoco, Church, Olsonite, Kohler, or Zurn. Seat color shall match fixture unless specified otherwise. Carriers for wall-mounted fixtures shall be manufactured by J.R. Smith, Josam, MIFAB, Wade, Watts, or Zurn. Solid surface and stainless steel handwashing stations shall be manufactured by Acorn, Bradley, Intersan, or Willoughby. Cast terrazzo, molded stone, and stainless steel wash fountains shall be manufactured by Acorn, Bradley, Intersan, Sloan, or Willoughby. Drinking fountains and electric water coolers shall be manufactured by Acorn Aqua, Elkay, Filtrine, Halsey Taylor, Haws, Oasis, or Sunroc. Cast terrazzo and molded stone products shall be manufactured by Crane/Fiat, Mustee, or Stern-Williams. Stainless steel sinks shall be manufactured by Advance-Tabco, Elkay, or Just. Stainless steel scrub sinks shall be manufactured by Acorn, Bradley, or Willoughby. Manual faucets shall be manufactured by American Standard, Chicago Faucet, Kohler, Moen Commercial, Speakman, Symmons, T&S Brass, Sloan (Polaris), or Zurn. Electronic sensor operated faucets shall be manufactured by Bradley, Chicago Faucet, Kohler, Sloan, Speakman, or Zurn. Shower modules shall be manufactured by Aqua-Glass, Comfort Designs, Crane/Fiat, Kohler, or Lasco. Stainless steel shower units shall be manufactured by Acorn, Bradley, Leonard, or Willoughby. Shower mixing valves and accessories shall be manufactured by American Standard, Chicago Faucet, Kohler, Leonard, Powers, Speakman, Symmons, or Zurn. Emergency eyewash and shower equipment shall be manufactured by Bradley, Chicago Faucet, Encon, Guardian, Haws, or Speakman. Emergency equipment mixing valves shall be manufactured by Bradley, Haws, Lawler, Leonard, or Powers. Heavy duty stops and supplies shall be manufactured by Chicago Faucet, Dearborn, EBC, Kohler, McGuire, T&S Brass, or Zurn. Lavatory drains shall be offset type, 1-1/4” size, with flat grid strainer, manufactured by Dearborn, EBC, Keeney, Kohler, McGuire, or Zurn. Traps shall be semi-cast 17 gauge brass, chrome plated, with cleanout and escutcheon as manufactured by Dearborn, EBC, Keeney, Kohler, McGuire, or Zurn.
13032-2
22 40 00 - 3
PLUMBING FIXTURES
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Supply, drain and trap insulating kits shall be manufactured by Brocar, EBC, McGuire, Plumberex, or Truebro. Special traps and solids interceptors shall be manufactured by J.R. Smith, Josam, Wade, Watts, or Zurn. Fixtures: See Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawings for type, manufacturer, and model for fixtures. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Install plumbing fixtures in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Set level and plumb. Secure in place to counters, floors and walls providing solid bearing and secure mounting. Bolt fixture carriers to floor and wall. Secure rough-in fixture piping to prevent movement of exposed piping. Install each fixture with trap easily removable for servicing and cleaning. Install fixture stops in readily accessible location for servicing. Individual supplies to fixtures shall be provided with support to prevent movement. Install barrier free fixtures in compliance with COMM 52, 69 and Federal ADA Accessibility Guidelines. Install barrier free lavatory traps parallel and adjacent to wall and supplies and stops elevated to avoid contact by wheelchair users. Seal joints between countertop, wall, floor and fixtures with G.E. Silicone caulk; white, clear or color to match fixture with colored caulk by fixture manufacturer. Each fixture shall have a stop valve installation to control the fixture. Stop valves shall be heavy duty type with brass stems and screwed or sweat inlet connections. Compression type inlets are not acceptable. Cover pipe penetrations with escutcheons. Exposed traps, stops, piping and escutcheons to be chrome plated brass, same items in concealed locations may be of rough brass finish. Set floor mounted water closets, floor mounted service sinks; counter mounted lavs and sinks; lav and sink faucets and drains with full setting bed of flexible non-staining plumber's putty. Cover exposed water closet bolts with bolt covers. Set mop basins to floor and wall with grout or silicone sealant. After installation, fixtures shall be protected to prevent scratching or other damage during construction. Prior to acceptance, fixtures shall be cleaned with compounds recommended by the respective manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 13032-2
22 40 00 - 4
PLUMBING FIXTURES
LAKEVIEW HEALTH CENTER SITEWORK TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 10 00 31 22 00 31 23 16 31 23 50 31 25 00
SITE PREPARATION EARTHWORK EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING FINISH GRADING EROSION CONTROL
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 12 16 32 13 13 32 14 05 32 15 00 32 15 20 32 17 23 32 29 23 32 31 13 32 31 19 32 31 23 32 92 19 32 93 00
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING SITE CONCRETE SITE FURNISHINGS SIGHT SIGNAGE PAVEMENT MARKINGS SODDING GALVANIZED CHAINLINK FENCE ALUMINUM PICKET FENCE PVC FENCES SEEDING TREES, PLANTS, and GROUND COVER
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 11 00 33 31 11 33 41 11
WATER MAINS SANITARY SEWERS STORM SEWERS
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 31 10 00 SITE PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES A.
Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
B.
Site demolition, clearing, grubbing, and subsequent off-site disposal of improvements or other features required to accommodate the new construction.
C.
Relocation of affected utilities.
D.
Installing and maintaining erosion control measures.
RELATED SECTIONS A.
Section 31 25 00 - EROSION CONTROL
B.
Section 00 30 00 - INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
REQUIREMENTS A.
1.4
Contractor shall meet all requirements construction erosion control requirements of the DNR and DSPS.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Traffic: Conduct site-clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Restore to original grades and conditions, areas adjacent to the Site disturbed or damaged as a result of site preparation work.
C.
Condition of Site: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of commencement of contract will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However, variations within site may occur by Owners' removal and salvage operations prior to start of site preparation work.
D.
Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed from site as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
E.
Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work at no cost to Owner.
31 10 00-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
TOPSOIL A.
2.2
Topsoil shall be defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4". Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 1" in diameter.
WASTE MATERIALS A.
Waste Materials shall be defined as: Manufactured products such as pipe, concrete, asphalt paving, curbs, boards, wrapping, boxes, wire, packages which contained equipment maintenance products, cans, and trash. Natural materials such as unacceptable subsoils, unacceptable and excess topsoil, and un-chipped tree parts shall also be considered waste materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
SITE CLEARING A.
Inspection: Prior to commencement of demolition work, inspect areas in which work will be performed. Photograph existing conditions of structure surfaces, equipment, or surrounding properties that could be misconstrued as damage resulting from demolition work; file with Owner's representative.
B.
Cover and protect improvements indicated Ato remain@ from soilage or damage.
C.
Remove grass and other vegetation, or obstructions, as required, to permit installation of new construction. Tree parts shall not be buried on site but shall be disposed of off-site as waste materials. However, tree parts that are chipped may be mixed with salvaged topsoil.
D.
Strip topsoil or other objectionable material to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil. Refer to the Design Phase Geotechnical Report in Section 00 30 00. Strip topsoil only where necessary to install new construction.
E.
Cut exposed roots in a clean and careful manner, flush with the excavated surface.
F.
Stockpile topsoil in storage piles as necessary. Construct storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Provide erosion control as specified. Do not stockpile soil within the dripline of trees indicated to remain.
G.
Dispose of unsuitable materials or excess topsoil off the site.
H.
If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of conflict. Submit report to Owner's representative in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without delay.
31 10 00-2
3.2
TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL A.
3.3
3.4
DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A.
Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is not permitted on Owner's property.
B.
Removal from Owner's Property: Remove all waste materials from Owner's property.
UTILITIES A.
3.5
Consult local utilities regarding the location and condition of any utilities within the project limits. Coordinate and pay for any necessary relocation of existing utilities.
CLEANING A.
3.6
Temporary erosion control: In addition to permanent erosion control measures shown on the plans, the Contractor shall provide control measures as appropriate to protect the earthwork in progress. Sediment traps, bale barriers, rock barriers, silt fence, tracking control aprons, channel erosion matting, seeding, and soil stabilizers shall be installed and maintained by the Contractor as temporary measures until the work progresses to a stage that the planned permanent erosion control measures can be installed and become effective. The following areas shall be specifically addressed: 1. Areas of concentrated flow shall be protected. 2. Areas having slope greater than 4%. 3. Areas adjacent to property lines.
Upon completion of site preparation work, clean areas within the contract limits, remove tools, and equipment. Provide the Site clear, clean, and free of materials and debris and suitable for site work operations.
REPAIRING A.
Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return structures and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to commencement of selective demolition work. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work.
END OF SECTION 31 10 00
31 10 00-3
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 31 22 00 EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES A.
Furnish all labor; materials, equipment and service necessary for, or incidental to, the completion of the work specified in this Section including staking and lay out of the work.
B.
Excavate subsoil and reform to grades, contours, and levels shown on the drawings. All proposed grades and contours shown on the plans are finished surfaces.
C.
Provide approved fill material as required to perform the subgrade corrections shown on the Drawings and described in the geotechnical report and as necessary to meet grades called for in the Drawings.
D.
Quality control testing services.
RELATED WORK A.
Section 31 10 00 - Site Preparation
B.
Section 31 23 16 - Excavating and Backfilling
C.
Section 31 23 50 - Finish Grading
D.
Section 31 25 00 - Erosion Control
DEFINITIONS A.
Excavation: Removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations and the reuse or disposal of materials removed.
B.
Subgrade: The uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, base, aggregate, or topsoil material.
C.
Subbase: The layer placed between the subgrade and base.
D.
Base: The layer placed between the subbase and the surface pavement.
E.
Unauthorized Excavation: Removing materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without direction by the Owner. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Owner, shall be at the Contractor's expense.
F.
Temporary Erosion Control Measures: any erosion or sediment control measure needed to insure that sediment does not leave the project limits. This includes all control work until the completion of grading and the installation of all plan erosion control measures.
G.
Plan Erosion Control Measures: all erosion and sediment control measures shown on the project drawings.
H.
WISDOT: Wisconsin Department of Transportation and their published standards.
31 22 00- 1
I. 1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
1.7
1.8
Quality Assurance Submittals 1. Test results for the following: a. Optimum Density Testing. b. Compaction Testing 2. Closeout Submittals a. Compliance Report in accordance with Article 3.16 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.6
Debris: Wood, coal, objectionable organic materials, construction materials found in soils.
ASTM D698, standard proctor density, shall be used to determine the optimum density and optimum moisture content for the soil work in this Section.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Provide sufficient barricades and protective devices adjacent to excavations to safeguard against injury.
B.
The use of explosives will not be permitted.
C.
Keep excavations free of all surface and groundwater as required for construction activities.
D.
Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 F.
E.
Slope sides of excavations to comply with state, federal, and local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Provide shoring and bracing to retain banks and prevent collapse of excavations as necessary to safeguard workmen, prevent movement of adjacent ground and avoid damage to existing improvements.
F.
Provide sufficient temporary erosion control measures to protect work in progress and to prevent sediment from leaving the project limits.
EXISTING CONDITIONS A.
Known underground, surface, and aerial utility lines and buried objects are indicated on the drawings. Digger's Hotline shall be contacted three (3) working days prior to start of any work.
B.
The project geotechnical report shall be used as a guide during earthwork operations. Except where specifically indicated otherwise in the Drawings and Specification, recommendations in the geotechnical report shall be followed where applicable to this work.
QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A.
An independent soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations shall be selected by the Contractor. The services performed by the soil testing service will be paid by the Contractor as follows: 1. Optimum Density Testing - Fill Material a. The Contractor shall pay for all testing required establishing the quality, appropriateness and optimum density levels of the materials proposed for fill. New laboratory optimum density tests will be required for each marked change in fill material.
31 22 00- 2
2.
3.
Optimum Density Testing - Material in Place a. The Contractor shall pay for laboratory testing required to establish the optimum density and compaction levels for the existing material remaining in place after the topsoil, fill and organic materials have been removed. Compaction Testing a. Field density tests for determining the compaction of the fill in place and the native material after proofrolling shall be made frequently during the progress of the work in accordance with standard recognized procedures for making such tests. The cost of all compaction testing shall be paid by the Contractor. The cost for tests that do not yield the compaction level specified shall also be borne by the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
TOPSOIL A.
2.2
Excavated material salvaged under Section 31 10 00 or imported top soil materials, free of objection or large roots, rocks larger than 1", subsoil, debris, and large weeds.
FILL MATERIALS A.
General Summary: The fill materials will be divided into two categories as specified below: 1. Excavated Material from On-Site: Material excavated from on-site may be reused as a suitable fill provided it was free of debris when excavated, has less than 50% passing the #40 sieve and less than 5% passing the #200 sieve, and is acceptable by the Contractor's geotechnical engineering service. Borrow areas from on-site shall be backfilled and finish graded to the elevations indicated on the drawings. Moisture content of the material shall allow for proper compaction. The Contractor shall dry the soil, as required, to achieve acceptable density. 2. Fill from off-Site: Fill material from off-site may be required to supplement acceptable on-site fill materials. Fill from off-site shall be sand with less than 50% passing the #40 sieve and less than 5 percent passing a #200 sieve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Establish and identify lines, levels, contours, and datum.
B.
Maintain benchmarks, monuments and other reference points. Reestablish if disturbed or destroyed at no cost to Owner.
C.
Before start of grading, establish the location and extent of utilities in the work areas.
D.
Protect existing structures, utilities, pavements, and other facilities form damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
E.
Protect subgrade and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary.
F.
Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soilbearing water runoff to adjacent properties.
31 22 00- 3
3.2
DEWATERING A.
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Prevent surface water from entering excavations and from ponding on prepared subgrade during earthwork operations. Provide trenches or berms as necessary.
EXCAVATION A.
Explosives: Do not use explosives.
B.
Unclassified Excavation: All excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to required subgrade elevations regardless of the character of materials and obstructions encountered. Any soil excavated from the site containing debris shall be removed from the site and disposed of as waste material.
EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A.
Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot.
B.
Excavate surfaces under future walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades.
APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A.
When the Contractor’s geotechnical engineering service determines that unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, over-excavate, and replace with approved fill material.
B.
Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement with granular backfill material will be paid for on a unit cost basis established at the time of bid.
C.
Reconstruct subgrade damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by the Owner.
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIAL A.
Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill soil materials, including acceptable borrow materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water.
B.
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations.
FILL A.
Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills.
B.
Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing surface.|
C.
When subgrade or existing ground surface to receive fill has density less than that required for fill, the Contractor shall compact the surface to required density.
D.
Place fill material in layers to required elevations.
31 22 00- 4
3.8
3.9
3.10
COMPACTION A.
Place fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by handoperated tampers.
B.
Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D698: 1. Under future structures, steps, and pavements, compact the top 24" below subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 100 percent maximum dry density. 2. Under the building remove all fill materials to native sand and compact fill to 100% maximum dry density. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum dry density.
GRADING A.
General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. Slopes should be graded to direct surface drainage to proposed new inlets.
B.
Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades.
C.
Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to conform to required surface tolerances.
D.
Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from future building and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrade to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: ± 0.10 foot. 2. Pavements: ± 0.10 foot.
TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL A.
3.11
Temporary erosion control: In addition to plan erosion control measures shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide control measures to protect the earthwork in progress. Sediment traps, bale barriers, rock barriers, silt fence, tracking control aprons, channel erosion matting, seeding, and soil stabilizers shall be installed and maintained by the Contractor as temporary measures until the work progresses to a stage that the planned permanent erosion control measures can be installed and become effective. The following areas shall be specifically addressed: 1. Areas of concentrated flow shall be protected. 2. Areas having slope greater than 4%. 3. Areas adjacent to property lines.
CORRECTIVE ACTION A.
The Owner reserves the right to order the Contractor to take corrective action at the Contractor’s expense, if the A/E or the Owner’s representative documents that sediment is being tracked off or washed off the site due to work by the Contractor or work done under this contract. The order for corrective action shall remain in place until the problem is cleaned up and corrected to the satisfaction of the Owner. If the Contractor fails to take corrective action of the order satisfactory to the Owner within 24 hours, the Owner may direct corrective action at the expense of the Contractor.
31 22 00- 5
3.12
3.13
3.14
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Testing Agency Services: Allow testing agency to inspect and test each subgrade and each fill or backfill layer. Do not proceed until tests results for previously completed work verify compliance with requirements. 1. Perform field in-place density tests according to ASTM D1556 (sand cone method), ASTM D2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTM D2937 (drive cylinder method), as applicable. a. Field in-place density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method according to ASTM D2922, provided that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D1556. With each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages according to ASTM D3017. b. When field in-place density tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Owner. c. Paved Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for every 2,000 square feet or less of paved area, but in no case fewer than three tests.
B.
When testing agency reports that subgrade, fill, or backfill are below specified density, the Contractor shall take the necessary measures to restore the area to the specified compaction and retest until required density is obtained. This shall be done at the Contractors own expense including the costs of any retesting.
PROTECTION A.
Temporary Erosion Control: In addition to plan erosion control measures shown on the plans, the Contractor shall be responsible for any temporary erosion control needed to protect the work in progress.
B.
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
C.
Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the A/E; reshape and compact at optimum moisture content to the required density.
D.
Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project Warranty period, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing at no additional cost to the Owner.
E.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A.
Disposal: Remove waste material, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property.
31 22 00- 6
3.15
CLEANUP A.
3.16
COMPLIANCE REPORT A.
3.17
Streets and site shall be left free of excess soil, debris, or stains on a daily basis.
Contractor shall submit a final report from the Contractor's testing service stating that the specification has been met. The report shall contain lab and field result reports of all testing performed to support this conclusion.
WARRANTY A.
Contractor shall warrant all work free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year following final acceptance of work by Owner.
END OF SECTION 31 22 00
31 22 00- 7
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 31 23 16 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES A.
Excavations for utilities shall meet the requirements of Chapter 2.2.0 of Standard Specifications for Sewer and Water Construction in Wisconsin unless otherwise specified in this Section.
B.
Dewater excavations as required. All piping shall be installed in dry conditions.
C.
Furnish, place and compact bedding and fills over piping to rough grade elevations.
D.
Locate all underground and overhead utilities prior to beginning work.
E.
Repair of erosion and sediment controls when damaged and installing controls needed to protect work under this section.
RELATED WORK A.
Section 31 23 16 - Earthwork
B.
Section 31 25 00 – Erosion Control
C.
Section 33 11 00 – Water Mains
D.
Section 33 31 11 – Sanitary Sewer
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Bedding Materials: Class IB as defined in ASTM D2321.
B.
Cover Material: In accordance with Chapter 8.43.3 of the Standard Specifications for Sewer and Water Construction in Wisconsin.
C.
Backfill Material: Material meeting the requirements of Section 31 23 16. 2.2.A provided that backfill materials shall meet requirements of the Standard Specifications for Sewer and Water Construction in Wisconsin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION AND LAYOUT A.
Establish extent of excavation by area and elevation. Designate and identify datum elevation.
B.
Set required lines and levels.
C.
Maintain benchmarks, monuments and other reference points.
31 23 16-1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
UTILITIES A.
Before starting excavation, establish location and extent of underground utilities occurring in work area.
B.
Notify utility companies to remove and relocate lines which are in way of excavation.
C.
Maintain, reroute or extend as required, existing utility lines to remain which pass throughout work area. Contractor shall pay costs for this work except those covered by utility companies.
D.
Protect active utility services uncovered by excavation.
E.
Remove abandoned utility service lines from area of excavation. Cap, plug or seal such lines and identify at grade.
F.
Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines, rerouted or extended, on project record documents.
EXCAVATING A.
Excavate in accordance with lines and grades.
B.
Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable proper installation of services and to allow for inspection.
C.
When complete, request A/E to inspect excavations. Correct unauthorized excavations as directed, at no cost to Owner.
D.
Stockpile suitable excavated subsoil for reuse. Remove excess or unsuitable excavated subsoil from site.
E.
Excavate rock according to the requirements of the Standard Specifications.
DEWATERING A.
Keep trenches dry. Provide necessary equipment including pumps, piping and temporary drains.
B.
Do not discharge drainage water lines into municipal sewers without municipal approval. Ensure water discharge does not contain silt held in suspension.
C.
Direct surface drainage away from excavated areas.
D.
Control grading in and adjacent to excavations to prevent water running into excavated areas or onto adjacent properties or public thoroughfares
E.
Furnish and operate suitable pumps on a 24-hour basis to keep excavations free of water until services have been placed and backfill is complete.
BEDDING A.
3.6
Bedding shall be installed in conformance with the requirements of Class “B” bedding of the Standard Specifications unless otherwise noted.
BACKFILLING A.
Do not start backfilling until services have been inspected.
31 23 16-2
3.7
B.
Ensure trenches are free of building debris, snow, ice, or water, and ground surfaces are not in a frozen condition.
C.
Backfill systematically and as early as possible to allow maximum time for natural settlement and compaction.
D.
Place and compact fill materials in continuous layers not to exceed 12". Use methods so as not to disturb or damage services.
E.
Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials so as to attain required compaction density.
F.
Remove surplus fill materials from site.
COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS A.
3.8
Provide equipment capable of drying soils during compaction operations. Remove and replace soil material that is too wet to permit compaction. Compact fill to 95% of standard proctor except the top two feet of backfill below subgrade shall be compacted to 100% of standard proctor where utilities are located under pavement.
COMPACTION TESTING A.
Testing of compacted fill materials will be performed by an independent testing laboratory selected and paid by the Contractor.
B.
Contractor will pay for costs of additional testing required due to improper performance of work.
C.
When work of this Section or portions of work are completed, notify the testing laboratory to perform density test. Do not proceed with additional portions of work until results have been verified.
D.
If, during progress of work, tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace, and retest at no cost to owner as directed by A/E.
E.
Testing in the field shall be in accordance with ASTM D2922, Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by the Nuclear Method. This test correlates to D1556, Density of soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method.
F.
Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory 48 hours in advance of time compaction testing is required.
END OF SECTION 31 23 16
31 23 16-3
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 31 23 50 FINISH GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES A.
Finish Grading for seeded areas.
B.
Installing erosion and sediment controls as work is completed.
SUBMITTALS A.
1.3
Provide and pay for a testing service to analyze stockpiled topsoil for fertilization requirements for lawns and planting beds. Provide the results of the analysis to the A/E.
RELATED WORK A.
Section 31 10 00 - Site Preparation
B.
Section 31 25 00 - Erosion Control
C.
Section 32 92 19 – Seeding
D.
Section 32 93 00 – Trees, Plants, and Ground Cover
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Topsoil salvaged from the stripping operations or new topsoil brought onto the Site (imported topsoil) shall meet the following quality standards: 1. Fertile loam soil rich in organic matter, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth. 2. Free of subsoil, plants, weeds, large roots, stones greater than 1" diameter, or other deleterious material. 3. Minimum pH value of 6.0 and maximum 8.0.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
GRADING A.
3.2
Grade areas within construction limits to establish new grades indicated and additional areas disturbed by construction operations including vehicle use, fill stockpiling, and cutting to provide additional backfill material.
PLACING TOPSOIL A.
Remove topsoil not meeting quality standards and replace with material acceptable to the A/E.
B.
Do not grade, excavate, or work topsoil in frozen or muddy conditions.
C.
Place topsoil immediately in areas where sodding will occur as shown on the plans to a minimum of 6" thick. Place topsoil during dry weather but in no case shall more than three (3) days pass before placing topsoil on areas where rough grading is complete.
31 23 50-1
3.3.
D.
Fine grade topsoil within 24 hours of placing topsoil, eliminating rough or low areas. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade indicated on the drawings.
E.
Coordinate final grading of topsoil to minimize damaged by subsequent construction activities.
F.
Manually spread topsoil close to trees and plants to prevent damage.
G.
Leave stockpile area and site clean and raked, ready to receive seeding.
H.
Excess topsoil shall be left on-site in a location directed by the Engineer.
TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL A.
Temporary erosion control: In addition to permanent erosion control measures shown on the plans, provide control measures to protect the finish grading in progress. Sediment traps, bale barriers, rock barriers, silt fence, tracking control aprons, channel erosion matting, seeding, and soil stabilizers shall be installed and maintained by the Contractor as temporary measures until the work progresses to a stage that the planned permanent erosion control measures can be installed and become effective. The following areas shall be specifically addressed: 1. Areas of concentrated flow shall be protected. 2. Areas having slope greater than 4%. 3. Areas adjacent to property lines.
END OF SECTION 31 23 50
31 23 50-2
SECTION 31 25 00 EROSION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Provide all materials and labor required for permeate and temporary erosion control and soil stabilization of all areas disturbed by excavation, rough grading and fill operations including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Storm water run-off diversions and channeling, temporary and permanent. 2. Sediment traps for channelized run-off. 3. Drainage inlet protection. 4. Prevention of vehicle tracking to off-site roadways. 5. Maintenance of sediment traps and inlet protection. 6. Slope stabilization. 7. Application of erosion control permits. 8. Temporary erosion control measures, not shown on the Drawings, necessary to protect soil from being transported off site during in progress site work.
RELATED SECTIONS A.
Section 31 22 00 – Earthwork
B.
Section 31 23 16 - Excavation and Backfilling
C.
Section 31 23 50 - Finish Grading
REFERENCES A.
Standard Specifications for Highway and Structure Construction, 2003 Edition, State of Wisconsin Department of Transportation, Division of Highway.
B.
Wisconsin Department of Transportation Product Acceptability List.
C.
Wisconsin Construction Site Best Management Practice Handbook, Publication WR-222 93 Revised.
D.
Guidelines for Erosion and Sedimentation Control Planning and Implementation, EPA.
E.
Processes, Procedures and Methods to Control Pollution from All Construction Activity, EPA.
REQUIREMENTS A.
Secure any/all local, Town, or County erosion control/land ordinance permits prior to initiating work. Associated fees are incidental to the Work of this Section.
B.
Comply with all local erosion control ordinance/zoning codes. Comply with any regulations placed on the site by the Wisconsin DNR.
C.
All erosion control measures for diversions or outlets shall be constructed and stabilized prior to any grading or disturbance of the construction site.
31 25 00-1
D.
Install filter fabric, straw bale fences, and barriers prior to disturbing the area.
E.
Apply seeding, sodding, mulching, or other equivalent practices within seven (7) days of the end of active disturbance of the soil surface, even if topsoil, where specified, has not been applied. This does not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to furnish the topsoil as specified.
F.
Place other erosion control measures prior to disturbances of the construction site, as applicable.
G.
The Contractor shall be responsible for temporary erosion control measures. These are erosion or sediment control measures not shown on the Drawings but necessary to protect the site when the site work is only partly completed. Due to the unpredictability of the weather, the progress of the Work, and the Contractor’s methods, these temporary measures cannot be shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be aware of the potential for erosion problems due to the stage of the progressing Work and take any reasonable steps necessary to protect the site from erosion of soil surfaces and the loss of sediment from the site due to erosion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Silt fence: Constructed with 2" x 2" hardwood posts 8'-0" on center with only WisDOT approved fabric as listed in the PAL.
B.
Erosion Control Matting: North American Green S75BN or SC150BN or other matting products classified as “Urban” as found in the Wisconsin DOT PAL list or A/E approved equivalent.
C.
Mulch: Straw or hay inn air dry condition free of noxious weeds and objection foreign matter. Use of marsh hay is not acceptable.
D.
Erosion Matting Staples: As supplied and recommended by the manufacturer of the erosion control matting. Provide biodegradable matting staples in future lawn areas; Bio-Stake as manufactured by North American Green (1/800-772-2040) or equal.
E.
For seeding completed before May 15th or after September 15, straw mulch shall be replaced with matting “Futerra F4netless” by Profile Products, LLC (800) 508-8681.
F.
Breaker Rock: As defined in WISDOT Specification 311 for unscreened breaker run aggregate. Breaker rock delivered to the site that contains excessive fines as determined by the A/E shall be removed and replaced with suitable material at no additional cost to the Owner. Dense graded base shall not be used as a substitute.
G.
Breaker Rock Fabric: Propex 2002 or A/E approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
SILT FENCE A.
Install silt fence in the locations indicated on the Drawings. Install prior to earthwork or site preparation. Installation may be delayed while an area scheduled for silt fence is under construction. When installation of the silt fence is delayed, install as soon as practical, but in no case shall an area be left unprotected for more than two days.
B.
Install silt fence in accordance with the Drawing, the approved shop drawings, and the recommendations of the manufacturer.
31 25 00-2
3.2
3.3
3.4
EROSION CONTROL MATTING A.
Place erosion matting in areas designated on the Drawings or as appropriate. Areas indicated on the Drawings identify only the areas needing the control measure, not the actual area of erosion matting.
B.
Place staples following the directions of the manufacturer, providing a minimum of two staples per square yard of matting.
C.
Install erosion matting within 2 days of finish grading of areas to receive matting.
MULCHING A.
Apply at a uniform rate of 2 tons/acre. Mulch should cover a minimum 70% of the surface to an applied thickness of 0.5 to 1.5-inches.
B.
Anchoring: Immediately after spreading, anchor mulch using a crimper or equivalent to impress mulch to a depth of 1 to 3-inches.
TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL A.
3.4
3.5
3.6
Temporary Erosion Control: In addition to plan erosion control measures, the Contractor shall provide control measures to protect the site during work progress. Install and maintain sediment traps, bale barriers, rock barriers, silt fence, tracking control aprons, channel erosion matting, temporary seeding, and soil stabilizers as temporary measures until plan measures can be installed and become effective. Specifically address the following areas: 1. Areas of concentrated flow. 2. Areas adjacent to property lines.
BREAKER ROCK TRACKING CONTROL APRON A.
Place breaker rock in areas designated on the Drawings in an 18" thick layer.
B.
Cover subgrade areas for breaker rock with breaker rock fabric prior to placement of breaker rock.
PROTECTION FOR CURB AND OTHER LOCATIONS A.
Bale Barriers: Use bales of straw as a temporary control measure. Bales shall be dug in, securely staked.
B.
Sand Bags: Sand bags shall be used on any hard surface to prevent erosion of the gravel next to the new curb or other relevant use as erosion or sediment control.
MAINTENANCE A.
Inspect diversions within 24 hours after each rainfall or daily during periods of prolonged rainfall until the vegetative cover is stabilized. Make a necessary repairs immediately.
B.
Inspect silt fences and barriers within 24 hours after each rainfall or daily during periods of prolonged rainfall. Repair or replace immediately. Remove sediment deposits after each storm event or when deposits reach one-third the height of the fence or barrier.
31 25 00-3
C.
Inspect all seeding, sodding, and mulches within 24 hours after each rainfall or daily during periods of prolonged rainfall. Apply additional mulch, netting or matting immediately when necessary to maintain suitable coverage. Continue inspections until vegetative cover is established. Water seeding and sodding when necessary to promote establishment.
END OF SECTION 31 25 00
31 25 00-4
SECTION 32 12 16 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES A.
Aggregate subbase course.
B.
Crushed aggregate base course.
C.
Asphaltic concrete paving.
RELATED WORK A.
1.3
WEATHER LIMITATIONS A.
1.4
Section 31 22 00 - Earthwork
Do not apply tack coats when temperature is below 36° F. (12° C.) or when base is wet. Apply hot-mixed asphalt paving only when temperature is above 40° F. (4° C.) and when base is dry.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Perform work in accordance with State of Wisconsin Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway and Structure Construction, 2004 Edition.
B.
Provide source testing in accordance with The Asphalt Institute (TAI) procedures found in publication MS-2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Aggregate subbase course shall be as specified in Section 311 of “WISDOT Standard Specifications” for breaker run. The substitution of dense graded base is not allowed.
B.
Crushed aggregate base course: WIDOT Std. Spec. Section 305.2.2.1, 1-1/4” gradation. Pulverized and recycle asphalt pavement mixed with salvaged crushed aggregate basecourse may also be used.
C.
Asphalt cement: Performance grade, PG 58-28.
D.
Aggregate for binder course mix: WIDOT Std. Spec. Section 460, 12.5mm nominal size, Table 460-1.
E.
Aggregate for wearing course mix: WIDOT Std. Spec. Section 460, 12.5mm nominal size.
F.
Mineral filler: finely ground particles of limestone, hydrated lime or other mineral dust, free of foreign matter.
32 12 16 - 1
G. 2.2
Geotextile soil separator: Amoco 2002 or equal..
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.
Submit proposed mix design of each class of mix for review prior to commencement of work.
B.
Test samples in accordance with TAI MS-2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Verify that compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
B.
Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
PAVEMENT THICKNESS SCHEDULE A.
Light Duty Pavement: PAVEMENT SECTION asphalt wearing course asphalt binder course compacted base course
B.
Heavy Duty Pavement: PAVEMENT SECTION asphalt wearing course asphalt binder course compacted base course
3.3
3.4
3.5
THICKNESS 1-½" 1-½" 4"
THICKNESS 1-¾" 2-¼" 10"
PREPARATION - TACK COAT A.
Surfaces to receive tack coat shall be cleaned as necessary to remove dust, dirt, or other foreign material.
B.
Tack coat shall be applied at a controlled rate of 0.025 gallons/sq. Yd., with uniform pressure. Limit application each day to the area the Contractor expect to pave during that day.
PLACING BASE COURSE A.
Place crushed aggregate base course as shown with proper allowance for asphalt pavement.
B.
Compact base course to 95% of maximum density at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D1557.
C.
Base course shall be compacted in two lifts.
PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT
32 12 16 - 2
3.6
3.7
A.
Place binder course to scheduled thickness.
B.
Place wearing course as soon as site conditions permit after placing and compacting base course.
C.
Place wearing course to scheduled thickness.
D.
Compact pavement by rolling. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.
E.
Develop rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks.
TOLERANCES A.
Flatness: Maximum variation of ¼ " measured with 10'-0" straight edge.
B.
Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within ¼ ".
C.
Variation from True elevation: Within ½ ".
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Testing Agency Services: Allow testing agency to inspect and test base course. Do not proceed until tests results for previously completed work verify compliance with requirements. 1. Perform field in-place density tests according to ASTM D1556 (sand cone method), ASTM D2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTM D2937 (drive cylinder method), as applicable. a. Field in-place density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method according to ASTM D2922, provided that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D1556. With each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages according to ASTM D3017. b. When field in-place density tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Owner. c. Paved Areas: Perform at least one field in-place density test for every 2,000 square feet or less of paved area, but in no case fewer than three tests.
B.
When testing agency reports that base course is below specified density, the Contractor shall take the necessary measures to restore the area to the specified compaction and retest until required density is obtained. This shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner, including the costs of any retesting.
END OF SECTION 32 12 16
32 12 16 - 3
32 12 16 - 4
SECTION 32 13 13 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.3
Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40F, or surface is wet or frozen.
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS A.
1.5
Perform work in accordance with ACI 301 and WisDOT std.spec. as applicable.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
1.4
Portland cement concrete sidewalks, curbs and gutters, drives, parking lots, and aprons.
“WisDOT Std. Spec.” shall mean State of Wisconsin, Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Highway and Structure Construction, 2008 Edition.
SUBMITTALS A.
Concrete mix design data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FORM MATERIALS A.
2.2
2.3
Form materials: Conform to ACI 301.
CONCRETE MATERIALS A.
In general, concrete materials shall meet the requirements of WisDOT Standard Specification 501 materials, except course aggregates shall meet the following: percentage by weight passing the one inch sieve for size No. 2 coarse aggregate gradation requirement shall be between 10 and 55 percent.
B.
Cement: ASTM C150 air entraining - Type 1A Portland type, grey color.
C.
Fine and course mix aggregates: ASTM C33.
D.
Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.
E.
Air entrainment: ASTM C260.
ACCESSORIES A.
Curing compound: ASTM C309, Type 2, Class A.
B.
Joint filler: Filler shall be bituminous fiber type, minimum ½” width and meet the requirements of WisDOT Std. Spec. 415.2.3.
32 13 13 - 1
2.4
2.5
C.
Reinforcement shall be steel in accordance with requirements of WisDOT Std. Spec. Sections 505.1 through 505.3.
D.
Handicap Ramp Detectable Warning Field shall be federal yellow, Armour Tile Truncated Dome System as manufactured by Engineered Plastics, Williamsville, NY (800)682-2525 or unfinished cast iron as manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company, Neenah, Wisconsin, (920)725-7000, or approved equal.
E.
Coloring Compound for Integral Colored Concrete: Color uniformity throughout the project shall be guaranteed by Contractor and product manufacturer. Color shall be selected from the manufacturer’s standard range of colors. Acceptable manufacturers of color system are Solomon, (800)624-0261, or approved equal. All color shall be delivered to the mixing plant with one order and all color additives shall be supplied from the same manufacturer.
CONCRETE MIX - BY PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A.
Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94, Alternative No. 2.
B.
Provide concrete to the following criteria: 1. Compressive strength: 3500 psi at 28 days 2. Slump: 1" to 3" 3. Air entrained: 5% to 7%
C.
Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by the A/E. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.
2.6
Tests on cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements.
BASECOURSE A.
Crushed aggregate base course: WisDOT Std. Spec. Section 305.2.2.1.1, 1-¼” Dense Graded Base.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION A.
Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
B.
Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
PREPARATION A.
Notify the A/E minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concrete operations.
B.
Colored Concrete: Incorporate color admixture in strict accordance with manufacturer’s specifications to achieve the approved color selection.
FORMING A.
Place and secure forms to correct locations, dimension, and profile.
32 13 13 - 2
3.4
B.
Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.
C.
Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to form work during concrete placement.
PLACING CONCRETE A.
Place concrete in accordance WisDOT std. spec.
B.
Ensure embedded parts and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement.
C.
Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joint occur.
D.
Execute work in accordance with requirements of “Construction Methods” in Section 601, Section 602, and Section 415 WisDOT Standard Specification, except, as noted: 1. Class of Concrete a. Air-entrained concrete shall be prepared with Type 1A cement. b. If due to certain weather conditions Engineer requires use of air-engrained highearly-strength concrete, when concrete shall be prepared with Type III cement. c. Grade of Concrete: Grade A or A-S2 for all concrete curb, gutter and sidewalk or driveway. 2. Control Joints: a. Maximum spacing between joints shall be 6 feet for sidewalk and 8 feet for curb and gutter and concrete driveway approaches. b. Longitudinal control joints: Construct parallel to centerline of walk for all sidewalks 7 feet or greater in width. c. Control joints may be formed by tooled joints, sawed joints, or inserts. d. Sawing methods: Sawed control joints shall be formed using power saw equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond rimmed blades. 3. Expansion joints; a. For sidewalk place expansion joint filler between sidewalk and adjacent building, sidewalk and adjacent curb, and box out around all hydrants, utility poles, parking meters, and like objects and place expansion joint filler around box out, then pour concrete around object. b. For curb and gutter, place expansion joint filler about 3 feet on each side of inlet casting, where tangent and radial curb meet, and on tangent sections at maximum spacing of 150 feet. c. Set plum and at right angles to face of curb with edges flush or slightly depressed from concrete curb and gutter surface. 4. Joint Alignment: a. Tolerance: Axis of any joint shall not deviate more than 1/4 inch either way from straight line at any point. 5. Curing: a. Impervious coating method: Concrete placed on and after May 1 and on or prior to September 1 shall be cured by Impervious Coating Method. b. Paper method: Concrete placed on and after September 1 and on or prior to May 1 shall be cured by Paper Method. After removing paper or polyethylene sheeting, apply protective or anti-spalling agent. 6. Protection: a. Erect and maintain barricades to keep traffic off newly placed concrete. b. All concrete damaged prior to acceptance shall be repaired or replaced by and at expense of Contractor. c. Provide cold weather protection in accordance with WisDOT Standard Specification. 32 13 13 - 3
B.
3.5
3.6
FINISHING A.
Sidewalk Paving: Light broom finish.
B.
Curbs and Gutters: Light broom finish.
C.
Inclined Sidewalk Ramps: Rough broom finish.
D.
Driveways and Parking Lots: Light broom finish.
E.
Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
CLEANUP A.
3.7
3.8
Handicap ramps shall be constructed in accordance with ADA standards and shall include a detectable warning field as detailed in the plans and specifications.
Within 24 hours of completion of placing concrete curb and gutter, restore crushed aggregate base foundation to condition equal to or better than prior to placement of concrete curb and gutter.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
The Contractor's testing laboratory shall take cylinders and perform slump and air entrainment tests in accordance with ACI 301. Contractor shall assist in collecting cylinders for testing.
B.
Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.
PROTECTION A.
Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
END OF SECTION 32 13 13
32 13 13 - 4
SECTION 32 14 05 SITE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.2
RELATED WORK A.
1.3
1.4
Section 31 22 00 – Earthwork
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.
B.
Testing: Contractor shall employ an independent testing laboratory to test concrete. Tests shall be performed where specified.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
1.5
Slip form Portland cement concrete decorative landscape curbing.
Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40°F, or surface is wet or frozen.
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS A.
“WisDOT Std. Spec.” shall mean State of Wisconsin, Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Highway and Structure Construction, 2008 Edition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FORM MATERIALS A.
2.2
2.3
Form materials: Conform to ACI 301.
CONCRETE MATERIALS A.
Cement: ASTM C150 air entraining - Type 1A Portland type, grey color.
B.
Fine and course mix aggregates: ASTM C33.
C.
Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.
D.
Air entrainment: ASTM C260.
ACCESSORIES A.
Curing compound: ASTM C309, Type 2, Class A.
B.
Joint filler: Filler shall be bituminous fiber type, minimum ½” width and meet the requirements of WisDOT Std. Spc. 415.2.3.
C.
Approved color and form imprinting templates as recommended by the curb machine manufacturer or approved equal.
32 14 05 Page 1
2.4
2.5
CONCRETE MIX - BY PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A.
Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94, Alternative No. 2.
B.
Provide concrete to the following criteria: 1. Compressive strength: 3500 psi at 28 days 2. Slump: 1" to 3" 3. Air entrained: 5% to 7%
C.
Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by the A/E. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.
Tests on cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
EXAMINATION A.
Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
B.
Verify gradients and elevations for the placement of base course materials.
SLIP FORMING A.
Follow manufacturer’s guidelines for operation of equipment.
B.
Place curb and imprint selected pattern and color. A brown brick pattern shall be provided. Brickjoint shall have a contrasting color approved by A/E. Curb style shall have a minimum base width of 6”, a minimum height of 6” and have the top face slope toward the design drain, Tiger TG3003, or equal.
C.
Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines.
PLACING CONCRETE A.
Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301.
B.
Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
JOINTS A.
Place concrete weakened plane joints or construction joints at 10' intervals for curb. Place expansion joints adjacent at no more than 200' intervals in curb.
B.
Place joint filler between paving components or other appurtenances. Recess top of filler 1/8".
FINISHING A.
Curbs: Selected by A/E from standard range of styles and colors.
32 14 05 Page 2
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor’s testing laboratory shall take cylinders and perform slump and air entrainment tests in accordance with ACI 301. Contractor shall assist in collecting cylinders for testing. One set of cylinders shall be taken at minimum each day, or each 800 l.f. of curb. B.
3.7
Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.
PROTECTION A.
Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
END OF SECTION 32 14 05
32 14 05 Page 3
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 32 15 00 SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.2
Provide site and street furnishings as shown on the plan drawings and specified herein. The work includes: Benches
RELATED WORK A.
Section 32 13 13 Portland Cement Concrete Paving
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A.
B.
Bench 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Size: 6 foot. Material: Reinforced aluminum extrusion with cast aluminum frame. Hardware: Stainless Steel. Style: Arch back with arms. Finish: Faux-wood. Mounting: Surface mount. Model: YO1212C Urbanscape Yorktown as manufactured by Wabash Valley Manufacturing, Inc.
Bike Rack 1. Construction: 4½: O.D. schedule 40 steel pipe body with 1 ⅝” O.D. schedule 40 locking loops. 2. Hardware: Stainless Steel. 3. Style: Bollard Style. 4. Finish: Black powder coat.. 5. Mounting: Surface mount. 6. Model: CPBB2CSM as manufactured by Kay Park Recreation Corp.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Remove loose material and debris from surfaces before placing furnishings.
B.
Locate and layout all site furnishings per the plan drawings and details. Obtain Engineer's approval of layout prior to final installation.
INSTALLATION A.
Install benches in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Install benches level.
32 15 00 - 1
C. 3.3
3.4
3.5
Anchor site furnishings securely in place.
ADJUSTING A.
Finish Damage: Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as approved by Engineer.
B.
Component Damage: Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Engineer.
CLEANING A.
Clean benches promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage the finish.
PROTECTION A.
Protect installed site furnishings to ensure that, except for normal weathering, furnishings will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 32 15 00
32 15 00 - 2
SECTION 32 15 20 SITE SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.2
Site signage
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of sign required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURED UNITS A.
Exterior Signs 1. Fabricate signs from 18-gage aluminum with rounded corners. 2. Typography: a. Provide Type Style as detailed. Copy shall be capital letters, sizes as detailed. b. Align letterforms to maintain a base line parallel to the sign format. Maintain margins as specified by sign type drawings. c. Edges of letterforms shall be sharp and clean, with no edge build-up or bleeding. Surfaces of letterforms shall be without pinholes. 3. Paint: a. Specifically formulated for the sign substrate material as recommended by the manufacturer of the paint. b. Fade and discolor resistant when exposed to sun light, heat, and outdoor environment for extended periods. c. Evenly applied and without pinholes, scratches, orange peeling, or other application marks. d. Workmanship in connection with finished and formation of letters shall be acceptable to the A\E. 4. Where recommended by the manufacturer, furnish prime coats or other surface pre-treatments as part of the finished surface work at no extra cost to the Owner.
B.
Supports shall be 1-1/2" square, galvanized steel posts or A\E approved equal.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Locate sign units and accessories where indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Mounting 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Mount sign units level, plumb, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects of appearance.
END OF SECTION 32 15 20
32 15 20 - 1
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.2
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
FS TT-B-1325 - Beads (Glass Spheres); Retro-Reflective; Rev. D, 2007
B.
MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com.
C.
FHWA MUTCD - Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways; U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration; http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov; current edition.
SUBMITTALS A.
1.4
Pavement marking for asphalt & concrete paving. 1. Traffic control markings 2. Parking lot stripping.
Provide manufacturer’s descriptive product literature for pavement marking paint system including the following: 1. Product specifications. 2. Application instructions. 3. MSD sheets.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
All materials furnished under this Section shall be provided by one manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS A.
Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Pratt and Lambert 2. Sherwin Williams 3. A/E “approved equal”
B.
Design based upon Sherwin Williams products.
MATERIALS A.
Paint 1.
2.
Oil based product used over concrete or asphalt surface but not new seal coating. a. White #TM5712 Low VOC acrylic Promar. b. Yellow #TM5713 Low VOX acrylic Promar. Water based product used for traffic markings over NEW seal coat or where safety blue color is specified.
32 17 23 - 1
a.
Safety Blue #TM2133 Setfast
B.
Reflective Glass Beads: Install at ADA symbols, no parking area between ADA stalls and at crosswalks. FS TT-B-1325, Type I (low index of refraction), Gradation A (coarse, drop-on); with silicone or other suitable waterproofing coating to ensure free flow.
C.
Thinners, cleaners, driers, and other additives: As recommended by the manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION A.
Verify surfaces to receive pavement markings are complete and compatible with approved painting system.
B.
Allow new concrete surfaces to cure a minimum of 28 days to cure before coating.
SURFACE PREPARATION A.
Sweep surfaces or employ other effective means of surface cleaning to remove particulate matter.
B.
Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
MIXING A.
3.3
3.4
Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations prior to placing into painting machine.
APPLICATION A.
Layout in conformance with the configuration indicated on the Drawing without sharp breaks in alignment.
B.
Markings shall be 4" wide.
C.
Provide uniform coating with clean true edges.
D.
Apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.
E.
Protect painted surfaces until paint is sufficiently dry to permit vehicles or pedestrian traffic to cross paint without damage.
UNSATISFACTORY APPLICATION A.
Correct markings that do not have uniform appearance.
B.
Repair any defects in the coating system per written recommendations of the coating manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 32 17 23
32 17 23 - 2
SECTION 32 92 21 BONDED FIBER MATRIX PART 1 GENERAL
1.
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY A.
This section specifies a spray-applied bonded fiber matrix wood fiber mulch with pre-mixed tackifier for a strong chemical bond within the fiber matrix for “hydro-mulching”.
B.
Areas scheduled for restoration by the establishment of grass may be mulched under this Section, Section 32 92 19 Seeding, or any combination of the two.
Related Sections A.
Section 31 25 00 Erosion Control
B.
Section 31 22 00 – Earthwork
C.
Section 31 23 50 Finish Grading
D.
Section 32 92 19 Seeding
SUBMITTALS A.
1.4
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. Include required substrate preparation, list of materials, and application rate.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver materials and products in factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B.
Protect from damage from weather, excessive temperatures, and construction operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
2. 2
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A.
PROFILE Products LLC, 750 Lake Cook Road – Suite 440, Buffalo Grove, IL 60089, 800-3661180 (Fax 847-215-0577)
B.
Or Equal.
MATERIALS A.
Bonded Fiber Matrix: Conwed Fibers 2500 BFM by PROFILE Products LLC with the following characteristics: 1. Materials: Wood fiber, Polysaccharide crosslinked hydro-colloid polymer tackifier, dark green dye. 2. pH Range: 4.8 plus or minus 2. 3. Moisture Content: 12+-3% percent maximum. 4. Wood Fiber Content: 90 percent maximum. 5. Polysaccharide Crosslinked Hydro-colloid Polymer Tackifier: 10+-1% 6. Organic Content: 99 percent, plus or minus 1. 7. Ash Content: 1 percent, plus or minus 1.
31 25 00-1
8. 9.
10.
Water Holding Capacity: 1,350 percent minimum. Fiber Mulch Slurry Viscosity: Minimum 2.85 cps (Test Method: Falling Ball Viscometer) Test condition 1500 lbs of fiber mulch per 3000 gallons of water, evaluated immediately after. Packaging: 50 pound UV resistant bags, with UV resistant pallet cover.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.
SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A.
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
3.3
Examine substrates and conditions where materials will be applied. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected, only apply product to geotechnically stable slopes that have been designed and built to divert the water shed away from the face of the slope, therefore eliminating surface flow energy from above from damaging the slope face.
Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Use approved hydro-spraying machines. Apply Conwed Fibers 2500 BFM from opposing directions to soil surface, reducing the “shadow effect” and assures soil surface coverage of a minimum of 99%. Do not exceed maximum slope length of 70 feet when slope gradients are steeper than 4 to 1. Install materials at the following application rate: 1. Hydro-Mulching: Add 30 to 50 pounds of Conwed Fibers 2500 BFM fiber per 100 gallons of water when hydro-mulching; confirm loading rates with equipment manufacturer. a. Mod to 3 to 1 Slope: 3000 pounds per acre. b. 2 to 1 slope: 3500 pounds per acre c. Greater than 1 to 1 Slope: 4000 pounds per acre
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Clean spills promptly. Advise Owner of methods for protection of sprayed areas.
END OF SECTION 32 92 21
31 25 00-2
SECTION 32 29 23 SODDING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES A.
Soil preparation
B.
Sodding operations
C.
Maintenance
D.
Contractor shall coordinate work efforts with existing contractors on the site to provide a smooth progression of the work.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit under provisions of the General Conditions.
B.
Submit certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities.
C.
Submit sod growers certification of grass species mixture.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Cut, deliver, and install sod within a 48-hour period.
B.
Do not deliver sod to the job Site when moisture content may adversely affect sod survival.
C.
Protect sod from sun, wind, and dehydration prior to installation.
D.
Do not tear, stretch, or drop sod during handling and installation.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Notify the A\E at least three working days prior to sodding operations.
B.
Protect existing plantings, utilities, paving, and other facilities from damage by sodding operations.
C.
Perform sodding upon completion of planting and other work affecting the ground surface.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Sod: an approved, nursery grown blend of improved Kentucky Bluegrass Varieties.
B.
Provide well-rooted, healthy sod, free of disease, nematodes, and soil borne insects. Provide sod uniform in color, leaf texture, density, and free of weeds, undesirable grasses, stones, and extraneous material; viable and capable of vigorous growth when planted.
C.
Thickness of root growth shall not be less than 1/2" nor more than 1".
32 29 23 - 1
D.
Fertilizer: 1. Type A: starter fertilizer shall be agricultural grade, granular type per recommended by soil test taken under Section 02260, Finish Grading. 2. Type B: top dressing fertilizer container 31% nitrogen, 3% phosphoric acid, and 10% potash by weight or similar approved composition.
E.
Water: the Owner will provide water suitable for irrigation and free from ingredients harmful to plant life. Hose and other watering equipment required for work shall be furnished by the Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
PREPARATION A.
Examine finish surfaces, grades, topsoil quality, and depth. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B.
Limit preparation to areas which will be sodded within 48 hours.
C.
Provide final disking and hand raking to level minor irregularities in grade, and remove debris and stones over 1" in any dimension.
D.
Grade lawn areas to smooth, firm, free draining, and even surface with a uniformity fine texture. Rake topsoil to remove ridges, fill depressions for positive drainage. Roll finish grade to correct soft spots.
E.
Apply Type A fertilizer at a rate to achieve fertilization recommended by the soil test. Apply fertilizer thoroughly and evenly incorporating it with the soil to a depth of 1/2".
INSTALLATION A.
Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly-fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod strips. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses.
B.
Do not overlay edges. Remove excess sod to avoid smothering of adjacent grass. Provide sod pad top flush with adjacent curbs, sidewalks, drains, and seeded areas.
C.
Do not lay dormant sod or install sod on saturated or frozen soil.
D.
Sod shall be laid in sections starting at bottom of slope and shall run parallel to contours of slope in a straight line. Successive strips of sod shall be matched and joints staggered. Sod shall be lightly tamped to insure proper bedding and tight joints.
E.
Hand roll sod with equipment weighing approximately 100 pound per lineal foot. When completely rolled, thoroughly water sod with a fine spray.
F.
Sod indicated areas within contract limits. Areas adjoining contract limits disturbed as a result of construction operations shall be sodded as directed by the A\E on a unit price bases. Provide a unit price per square yard to furnish and install sod.
MAINTENANCE A.
Maintain sodded lawns for four weeks.
32 29 23 - 2
B.
3.4
3.5
Maintain sodded lawn areas, including watering, spot weeding, mowing, application of fungicides, insecticides and re-sodding to achieve a full, uniform stand of grass free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease, and insects. 1. Water sod thoroughly to establish proper rooting. 2. Repair, rework, and re-sod areas that wash out or erode. 3. Consistently mow lawn areas as soon as top growth reaches a 3" height. Cut back to 2" height. 4. Apply Type B fertilizer to lawns at the end of the four week period at a rate equal to one pound of actual nitrogen per 1,000 square feet (140 pounds per acre), thoroughly water into soil.
ACCEPTANCE A.
When grass has been maintained for at least four weeks, the Contractor shall submit written request to the A\E for inspection of established lawn. Request shall be received at least ten calendar days before anticipated date of inspection.
B.
Weeds or crab grass developing prior to the end of the four week period shall be treated by hand weeding or chemical control. Furnish and apply chemical control as recommended by chemical manufacturer upon review by the A\E.
C.
At least two weeks shall elapse after chemical control is applied before request of inspection is made to the A\E.
D.
Bare spots shall be no more than 2% of lawn areas.
E.
Sodded areas will be acceptable provided requirements of the contract have been met.
F.
At substantial complete, the Owner will assume maintenance of lawn areas.
CLEANUP A.
Repair damage resulting from sodding operations.
B.
Upon completion of each portion of work, remove machinery, equipment, surplus materials from the site and debris connected with execution of sodding.
C.
Sidewalks and streets shall be maintained free of soil, debris and stains during sodding operations.
END OF SECTION 32 29 23
32 29 23 - 3
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCE
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES A.
Fence framework, fabric, and accessories.
B.
Excavation for post bases and concrete foundations for posts.
C.
Gates and related hardware.
SUBMITTALS A.
Shop Drawings: indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, and schedule of components.
B.
Product Data: provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware.
C.
Samples: submit two samples of fence fabric, 12" x 12" in size illustrating construction and finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.2
2.3
Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Master Halco 2. Jameson Facturing 3. The A\E approved equivalent
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS A.
Framing Steel: Round steel pipe and rail, ASTM F1043 Group 1C Table 3 heavy industrial fence framework, exterior and interior zinc coating Type B.
B.
Chain Link Fabric: 1. 2 in. mesh, 9 gauge, 6 feet high. 2. Zinc-Coated Steel Fabric: ASTM A392 hot dipped galvanized, Class 2. 3. Fabric Selvage: Knuckle finish top, twist finish bottom.
COMPONENTS A.
Intermediate posts: 2.375" outside diameter, nominal weight of 3.12 pounds per lineal foot.
B.
End posts: 2.875" outside diameter, nominal weight of 4.64 pounds per lineal foot.
C.
Gate posts: 2-875" diameter, nominal weight of 4.64 pounds per lineal foot.
D.
Top and brace rail: 1.660" diameter, nominal weight of 1.84 pounds per lineal foot, plain end, sleeve coupled.
32 31 13-1
2.4
2.5
E.
Gate frame: 1.900" diameter, nominal weight of 2.28 pounds per lineal foot for welded fabrication.
F.
Tension wire: 7 gage spring coil or crimped wire, ASTM Designation A-824-92, Type 2, Class 5.
G.
Tension bar: ASTM F626galvanized steel, 3/16" thick x ¾" wide.
H.
Tie wire: 9 gage Aluminum wire.
ACCESSORIES A.
Caps: cast steel galvanized; sized to post diameter.
B.
Fittings; sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners and fittings: Galvanized steel.
C.
Single gate hardware: provide with positive type latching device with means for padlocking.
CONCRETE A.
2.6
Provide concrete consisting of portland cement, ASTM C 150, aggregates ASTM C 33, and clean water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi using at least 4 sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum size aggregate, maximum 3-inch slump, and 2 to 4 percent entrained air.
FINISHES A.
Components and fabric: galvanized coating to ASTM A-392, Class 2 galvanized 2 ounces per square foot of wire surface.
B.
Hardware and accessories: same finish as framing and fabric, except as noted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install framework, fabric, accessories, and gates in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Set intermediate posts, terminal posts, and gate posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing flush with finish grade. Slope top of concrete for water runoff.
C.
Brace each gate and corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail and diagonal truss rods. Install brace rail, one bay from end and gate posts.
D.
Provide top rail through line posts tops and splice with 6" long rail sleeves.
E.
Stretch fabric between terminal posts or at intervals of 100'-0" maximum, whichever is less.
F.
Position bottom of fabric 1/2" above finished grade.
G.
Fasten fabric to top rail, line posts, braces, and bottom tension wire with tie wire at maximum 15" on center.
H.
Attach fabric to end, corner, and gateposts with tension bars and tension bar clips.
32 31 13-2
3.2
3.3
I.
Install bottom tension wire stretched taut between terminal posts.
J.
Install gate with fabric to match fence. Install three hinges per leaf, latch, catches, drop bolt, foot bolts and sockets.
ERECTION TOLERANCES A.
Maximum variation from plumb: ¼".
B.
Maximum offset from true position: 1".
CLEAN UP A.
Repair damage resulting from work under this Section.
B.
Upon completion of each portion of work under this section, remove all machinery, equipment, surplus materials, dirt, dust, and debris produced by work connected with the completion of requirements of this section.
END OF SECTION 32 31 13
32 31 13-3
SECTION 32 31 19 ALUMINUM PICKET FENCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
8 foot fences and gates.
REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
AAMA 2604 – Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
B.
AAMA 2605 – Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
SUBMITTALS A.
Comply with General Condition submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, including installation instructions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the proposed work fully indicating materials, dimensions, tolerances, hardware, fasteners, mounting, accessories, and finish.
D.
Cleaning Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s cleaning instructions.
E.
Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B.
Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Keep materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging until installation. 3. Store materials in clean, dry area. 4. Keep temporary protective coverings in place. 5. Protect materials and finish during storage, handling, and installation to prevent damage.
WARRANTY A.
Warranty Period: Lifetime.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURER A.
Ameristar Fence Products, Inc.
B.
Others that meet the requirements of this specification.
FENCES AND GATES -72” HEIGHT 32 31 19-1
2.5
2.6
A.
Construction: 1. Material: ASTM B221 Aluminum. a. Posts and Rails: Alloy 6005-T52. b. Pickets: Alloy 6063-T52. 2. Mounting Rails to Posts: Hidden picket fasteners and rail locks, no screws. 3. Gates: Welded rails and pickets. 4. Fabrication: Factory preassembled.
B.
Model: Echelon II Classic 3-rail aluminum fence system. 1. Height: a. 72” 2. Width: 8 feet on center. 3. Posts: 72” Fence: 2-½” x 2-½” x .080” Alum. w/ reinforced web 4. Gate and Corner Posts (72” Fence): a. 4 inches by 11 Ga Steel. 5. Post Caps to match size of associated post: flat 6. Rails: outside cross-section dimensions of 1.75" square. The top wall and internal web of the rail shall be 0.070" thick; the sidewalls shall be 0.070" thick for superior vertical load strength. Pickets: a. Size: 1" square x 0.062" thick extruded tubing. b. Spacing: 4.72 inches between pickets.
GATES A.
Gates: Echelon II Classic aluminum fence system gates.
B.
Construction: 1. Rails: Aluminum Alloy 6063-T6. 2. Pickets: Aluminum Alloy 6063-T52. 3. Rails and pickets welded. 4. Fabrication: Factory preassembled. 5. Finish: Same AAMA-compliant powder coating as fence. 6. Color: Same as fence.
C.
Gate Width: 42 inches
D.
Hinges: Welded on box hinge.
E.
Latches: Keyed, molded, polymer latches with stainless steel components.
FINISHES 1. 2.
2.7
Powder Coating: TGIC polyester powder coat finish with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). Color: Black.
OPTIONS A.
Welded Plates for Posts for Fences and Gates: 1. For installation of posts to top of concrete. 2. Material: Aluminum plate, alloy 6063-T6, 2 inches larger than post minimum. 3. Finish: Same AAMA-compliant powder coating as fence. 4. Color: Same as fence.
B.
Provide aluminum post stiffeners for gate posts.
32 31 19-2
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas to receive fences and gates for property lines and underground utilities.
B.
Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use of fences and gates.
C.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
INSTALLATION A.
Install fences and gates in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings. Install fences and gates plumb, level, straight, square, accurately aligned, correctly located, to proper elevation, and secure.
B.
Post Holes for 72” Fences: 1. Install posts in concrete. 2. Drill post holes 6 inches to 9 inches in diameter and 36 inches minimum depth. 3. Place posts in holes and backfill with concrete from 8 to 10 inches (203 to 254 mm) below grade. 4. Fill remaining hole with dirt or decorative stone.
C.
Install aluminum post stiffeners inside gate posts.
D.
Install gates using manufacturer's supplied hardware and fasteners.
E.
Install caps to top of posts.
F.
Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by Architect.
G.
Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect.
ADJUSTING A.
3.4
3.5
Adjust gates and operating hardware to function properly and for smooth operation without binding.
CLEANING A.
Clean fences and gates promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish.
PROTECTION A.
Protect installed fences and gates to ensure that, except for normal weathering, fences and gates will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 32 31 19
32 31 19-3
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 32 31 23 POLYVINYLCHOLORIDE FENCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.2
RELATED WORK A.
1.3
1.5
Section 32 13 13 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving
REFERENCES A.
1.4
Polyvinylchloride Fence (PVC) fences and accessories.
ASTM F964 - 09 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Exterior Profiles Used for Fencing and Railing
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, including installation instructions.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s shop drawings, indicating materials, dimensions, tolerances, hardware, fasteners, mounting, accessories, and finish.
C.
Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s lifetime warranty on all components and one year warranty on installation.
DELIEVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B.
Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Keep temporary protective coverings in place.
C.
Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.2
PVC SECTIONS A.
2.3
Items listed below are from: 1. Digger Specialties, Inc., www.diggerspecialties.com.
Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Exterior Profiles, ASTM F954. 1. Impact modifiers for cold weather resistance. 2. Titanium dioxide, 10 parts, for UV resistance.
VINYL FENCING A.
Model: Concave Supreme Fence
32 31 23 - 1
age 1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Height: 48 inches Verticals: 7/8 “ x 3” Pickets. Post Cap: Picket Cap. Fasteners: Stainless steel. Fabrication: Factory preassembled Color: White
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas to receive fences for property lines and underground utilities.
B.
Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use of fences.
C.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
D.
Coordinate with other work to allow for proper timing of post foundations installation.
INSTALLATION A.
Install fences in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the drawings.
B.
Install fences plumb, level, straight, square, accurately aligned, correctly located, to proper elevation, and secure.
C.
Install posts a minimum of 36” in concrete. Ensure concrete fills any frost up-lift hole in posts. Corner posts shall be filled with concrete.
D.
Attach caps to top of posts with PVC glue.
G.
Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as approved by Architect.
H.
Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect
ADJUSTING A.
3.4
3.5
Adjust gates and operating hardware to function properly and for smooth operation without binding.
CLEANING A.
Clean fences and gates promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Remove labels and temporary protective coverings.
C.
Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish.
PROTECTION A.
Protect installed fences and gates to ensure that, except for normal weathering, fences and gates will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 32 31 23
32 31 23 - 2
age 2
SECTION 32 92 19 SEEDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES A.
Soil preparation
B.
Seeding operations
C.
Mulching
SUBMITTALS A.
1.3
1.4
Submit seed vendor's certification of grass seed mixture, indicating percentage by weight, and percentages of purity, germination, and weed seed for each grass species.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Sample and test seed in accordance with rules and recommendation of U.S. Department of Agriculture. Package seed in suitable bags in accordance with commercial practice and aged in suitable bags in accordance with commercial practice and delivered to job site in dealer sealed original bags.
B.
Deliver seed, fertilizer and soil amendments in unopened containers, indicating weight, analysis, and manufacturer's name.
C.
Store products to prevent wetting and deterioration.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Protect existing planting, utilities, paving, and other facilities from damage caused by seeding operations. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to lawn areas caused by work of his planting, mulching, plant maintenance or replacements performed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Fertilizer 1. Commercial fertilizer consisting of 50% nitrogen derived from natural organic sources or urea form. Consistency shall be granular, dry, and free flowing. 2. Type A: Starter fertilizer and lime as recommended by the soil test completed under Section 02260 - Finish Grading. 3. Type B: Top dressing fertilizer containing 31% nitrogen, 3% phosphoric acid, and 10% potash by weight, or similar approved composition.
B.
Lawn Seed 1. Fresh, clean and new crop seed mixture in compliance with applicable governmental standards. 2. Mix by an approved method. 3. Composed of the following varieties, mixed to the specified proportions by weight and tested to minimum percentages of purity and germination. Poa
32 92 19 - 1
4. 5.
Annua, bent grass, and noxious weed seed free. Rate: 4 pounds per 1000 square feet. Blend:
Name
Proportion by Weight
Minimum Purity
Germination
Kentucky Bluegrass Pennlawn Creeping Red Fescue Blazer II Perennial Rye Dasher II Perennial Rye Fiesta II Perennial Rye
50% 15% 8.75% 8.75% 17.5%
95% 95% 95% 95% 95%
85% 85% 85% 85% 85%
6.
C.
When seeding occurs after September 30th and before November 15th, adjust seed mix to allow for 5 percent of the mix to be fall rye. When seeding occurs after April 1st and before May 15th, adjust seed mix to allow for 5 percent of the mix to be oats.
Lawn Seed (Erosion Control) 1. Fresh, clean and new crop seed mixture in compliance with applicable governmental standards. 2. Mix by an approved method. 3. Composed of the following varieties, mixed to the specified proportions by weight and tested to minimum percentages of purity and germination. Poa Annua, bent grass, and noxious weed seed free. 4. Rate: 4 pounds per 1000 square feet. 5. Blend:
Name Atlantis Kentucky Bluegrass Boreal Creeping Red Fescue Pennant II Perennial Rye Double Time Perennial Rye Rio Annual Rye 6.
Proportion by Weight
Minimum Purity
Germination
25% 25%
95% 95%
85% 85%
15%
95% 10% 25%
85% 95% 95%
85% 85%
When seeding occurs after September 30th and before November 15th, adjust seed mix to allow for 5 percent of the mix to be fall rye. When seeding occurs after April 1st and before May 15th, adjust seed mix to allow for 5 percent of the mix to be oats.
D.
Erosion Control Matting: North American Green S75BN or SC150BN or other matting products classified as “Urban” as found in the Wisconsin DOT PAL list or A/E approved equivalent.
E.
Erosion Matting Staples: As supplied and recommended by the manufacturer of the erosion control matting. Provide biodegradable matting staples in future lawn areas; BioStake as manufactured by North American Green (1/800-772-2040) or equal.
F.
Mulch: 1. Straw or hay inn air dry condition free of noxious weeds and objection foreign matter. Use of marsh hay is not acceptable. 2. Hydro Mulch: In accordance with Section 31 25 00.
32 92 19 - 2
G.
Water: suitable for irrigation and free from ingredients harmful to plant life. Furnish hose and other watering equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSPECTION A.
3.2
3.3
Examine finish surfaces, grades, topsoil quality, and depth. Do not begin seeding work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
PREPARATION A.
Disk and rake to level minor irregularities in grade. Remove debris and stone over 1" in any dimension, and remove ridges and fill depressions to provide positive drainage.
B.
Limit preparation to areas to be immediately seeded.
C.
Loosen topsoil of lawn areas to minimum depth of 4".
PERFORMANCE A.
Apply Type A fertilizer at a rate equal to one pound of actual nitrogen per 1,000 square feet (220 pounds/acre) and to a depth of at least 3".
B.
Application of fertilizer shall precede seeding operations by no more than seven days.
C.
Seeding 1. Seed immediately after preparation of bed. Install seed between April 1 and October 15. If special conditions exist which may warrant variance in above dates, submit written request to the A/E stating conditions and proposed variance. 2. Perform seeding operations when the soil is dry and when winds do not exceed five (5) miles per hour velocity. 3. Sowing of permanent crop shall be accomplished with a Brillion seeder or acceptable alternative. Apply seed in two operations with spreader adjusted so one-half of specified amount is released in each operation with the second sowing at right angles to the first. In areas too small for mobile equipment, sow with an approved hand-operated machine seeder. 4. In areas seeded with hand-seeder, smooth and roll seed bed. Smooth seed bed with hand rakes and roll with hand roller weighing approximately 100 pounds per lineal foot. Smooth and roll on same day that seed is sown.
D.
Erosion Control Matting 1. Place erosion matting in areas designated on the Drawings or as appropriate. Areas indicated on the Drawings identify only the areas needing the control measure, not the actual area of erosion matting. 2. Place staples following the directions of the manufacturer, providing a minimum of two staples per square yard of matting. 3. Install erosion matting within 2 days of finish grading of areas to receive matting.
32 92 19 - 3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
RECONDITIONING EXISTING LAWNS A.
Where substantial but thin lawn remains, rake, aerate if compacted, and cultivate soil; fertilize and seed.
B.
Water newly seeded areas. Maintain adequate soil moisture until new grass is established.
MULCHING A.
Apply at a uniform rate of 2 tons/acre. Mulch should cover a minimum 70% of the surface to an applied thickness of 0.5 to 1.5-inches.
B.
Anchoring: Immediately after spreading, anchor mulch using a crimper or equivalent to impress mulch to a depth of 1 to 3-inches.
MAINTENANCE A.
Maintain seeded lawns until final acceptance.
B.
Maintain seeded lawn areas, spot weeding, and re-seeding to achieve a uniform stand of grass free from weeds, undesirable grass species, disease, and insects.
C.
Repair, rework, and reseed areas that wash out or erode.
D.
Consistently mow lawn areas as soon as top growth reaches a 4-1/2” height. Cut back to 3" in height.
ACCEPTANCE A.
When grass has been cut a minimum of three (3) times and a uniform growth of lawn is established without evidence of excessive weed or crab grass infestation, submit written request to the A/E for an inspection of the established lawn.
B.
The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before anticipated date of inspection.
C.
Weeds developing prior to final acceptance shall be treated by hand-weeding or chemical control. Provide chemical control as recommended by chemical manufacturer.
D.
Bare spots shall be no more than 2% of lawn area.
E.
Seeded areas will be acceptable provided requirements of the contract have been met.
CLEANUP A.
Repair damage resulting from seeding operations.
B.
Upon completion of each portion of work, remove machinery, equipment, surplus materials from the site and debris connected with execution of lawn.
END OF SECTION 32 92 19
32 92 19 - 4
SECTION 32 93 00 TREES, PLANTS, AND GROUND COVER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES A.
Provide and install trees, plants, and ground covers as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Mulch and fertilizer for plantings.
C.
Edging materials for designated landscaping areas.
D.
Maintenance of trees, plants and ground cover.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit samples of mulch sealed in 12" square plastic bags.
B.
Submit samples of #1washed river rock.
C.
Planting Schedule indicating anticipated dates of planting.
MAINTENANCE DATA A.
1.4
1.5
Include a schedule for watering plants and any applicable maintenance instructions to be completed by Owner during warranty period.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Provide stock true to botanical name and legibly tagged. No substitutions are permitted without written approval.
B.
Comply with sizing and grading standards of AAN "American Standard for Nursery Stock".
C.
Plants furnished larger than specified are acceptable, at no additional cost to the Owner, providing that the larger plants will not be cut back to size specified.
D.
Contractor shall allow Owner to inspect and approve plants at the nursery source or storage facility before transfer to site.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Schedule planting program to minimize the quantity of unplanted plants stored on project site.
B.
Delivery of Trees and Shrubs: Provide freshly dug trees and shrubs to the greatest extent possible. Do not prune before delivery, except as approved by A/E. Provide adequate protection of root systems and balls from drying winds and sun. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Do not drop balled and burlapped stock during delivery.
C.
Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more then 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist as follows: 1. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, shredded bark, straw, or other acceptable material. Water to prevent from drying. 2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
32 93 00 - 1
3.
D.
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Periodically water root systems of trees and shrubs stored on site. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.
Plants which are potted in the spring from bare root stock shall be fully root bound at the time of planting. Soil shall not fall away from the root ball when plants are removed from the container.
JOB CONDITIONS A.
Notify the Owner at least three working days prior to installing plants.
B.
Verify the location of underground utilities and depths before digging.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Do not install plants when average temperature may drop below 35F. or rise above 90F.
B.
Do not install plants when wind velocity exceeds 30 mph.
WARRANTY A.
Warranty: include coverage for one continuous growing season after final acceptance; replace dead or unhealthy plants.
B.
Limitations: warranty shall not cover damage or loss of plants caused by fires, floods, freezing rain, lightning, winds over 60 mph, negligence on the part of the Owner, and acts of vandalism.
C.
Replacements: plants of same size and species as specified, planted in the next growing season, with a new warranty commencing on date of replacement.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE A.
Provide maintenance service for four weeks following substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Measurements: Measure trees and shrubs with branches and trunks or canes in their normal positions. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6” above ground for trees up to 4” cal. Size and 12” above ground for large sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread dimensions, do not measure from branch or root tip-to-tip.
B.
Provide plants typical of their species or variety; with densely developed and balanced branches with well-developed root systems. Provide sound, healthy, plants free from disfiguring knots, injuries, frost cracks, abrasions of the bark, plant diseases, insect infestations. 1. Provide canopy tree species with a single main trunk; "Y" branching is not acceptable. 2. Provide clump form trees that are uniform in size, height and habit. Basal stems shall be no more than 5 and no less than 3. 3. Plants designed as a row on the plans shall be matched in form. 4. Pruning wounds shall not exceed 1" diameter. 5. Evergreen trees shall be branched to the ground. 6. The root flair of all trees shall be apparent at the surface of the root ball or container surface.
C.
Topsoil: fertile, loam soil, high in organic matter, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth; free of subsoil, impurities, plants and weeds; minimum pH value of 6.0 and maximum 8.0.
D.
Fertilizer:
32 93 00 - 2
1.
Fertilizer Type A: Commercial slow-release 18-46-0 or other approved manufactured fertilizer.
E.
Planting mulch: 1. Type A: Shredded cedar, hardwood, or cyprus mulch with no more than 5% by volume larger than 6" in length and 1" in width, brown in color, free of foreign material. 2. Type B: #1 washed river rock with 100% passing a 1" screen and 0% passing a ½´" screen for use in all shrub and ground cover planting beds.
F.
Water: 1. Water will be furnished by the Owner. 2. Provide hose and other watering equipment.
G.
Weed barrier fabric: 1. Geotextile consisting of 100 percent spunbonded polypropylene and having the following characteristics: tensile strength (ASTM D-4632) 73 lbs.; puncture strength, (ASTM D-4833) 23 lbs.; elongation (ASTM D-4632) 70 percent; permeability (ASTM D-4491) 200 GPM/sq. Ft. flux. 2. Acceptable manufacturer: a. Dewitt Company b. Phillips Fiber Company c. Typar 3201 or Typar 3301 c. A/E approved equivalent
H.
Edging: 1. Concrete landscape edging shall be Bullet Edge as manufactured by Rochester Concrete Products, or approved equal.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas to be planted.
B.
Verify that areas are ready for planting operations to begin.
FERTILIZING A.
3.3
PREPARATION A.
3.4
Incorporate fertilizer Type A into planting backfill soil at a rate of 1 oz per cubic foot of soil material or in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions approved by the A/E.
Time of planting: all materials shall be planted between 15 April and 31 October.
INSTALLATION A.
Tree and shrub planting: 1. Excavate plant pits in accordance with the detail drawings. Depth of the plant pit shall accommodate the root system to set the root flair at the existing ground surface. Scarify the side walls of the plant pit. 2. Remove burlap, ropes, wires, or container from the entire root ball. 3. Set plants in the planting pit so that the root flair is at finish grade and so the plant is in proper alignment. Set plants upright, plumb, and faced to give the best appearance in relationship to each other and adjacent structures.
32 93 00 - 3
4.
5. 6. 7.
3.5
3.6
3.7
Backfill plant pits with excavated soil, reserve topsoil for the upper layers of backfill but in no case shall there be less than 6” of topsoil used to complete the backfill. When plant pits have been backfilled approximately 2/3 full, water thoroughly before installing the remainder of the soil. After water has been absorbed, fill plant pit with topsoil and tamp lightly to grade. Form a water saucer around the edge of each planting pit. For trees not within a planting bed, fill the planting saucer with 4" of bark mulch. After mulching, pull mulch back away from tree trunks approximately 3”.
B.
Edging: 1. Install edging around all planting beds around building and around biofilters as indicated on the drawings. 2. All landscape edge joints shall be tight.
C.
Mulching: mulch plants after installation except where directed to do so in Rain Garden and Biofilter construction. Thoroughly water mulched areas. Spread mulch to provide a uniform finished surface.
D.
Pruning - trees: remove or cut back broken, damaged, and unsymmetrical growth.
E.
Pruning - deciduous shrubs: prune only to remove broken or damaged branches.
F.
Pruning - evergreen trees and shrubs: prune only to remove broken or damaged branches.
CLEANUP A.
Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Continuously remove from site all excess materials, soil, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from planting operations.
B.
Sidewalks and streets shall be maintained free of soil, rubbish and stains throughout progress of work. At completion of landscaping operations sidewalks shall be left broom clean.
ACCEPTANCE A.
A/E will perform an observation of the work after initial planting and report any deficiencies in the work that require correction. Observations may not discover all deficiencies and the lack of reporting such shall not relieve the Contractor from full compliance with the Construction Documents.
B.
A/E or the Owner’s representative may perform an additional observation approximately 60 days prior to the end of the warrantee period and report any deficiencies that require repair prior to the end of the warrantee period. The warrantee shall extend to a date that is 21 days beyond the completion of repairs made to any deficient work.
MAINTENANCE A.
Maintain plants for six weeks following substantial completion.
B.
Maintenance includes: 1. Cultivating and weeding plant beds and tree pits. 2. Applying herbicides for weed control in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Correcting damage resulting from use of herbicides. 4. Correcting damage from use of insecticides. 5. Watering. 6. Pruning, including removing dead or broken branches. 7. Controlling disease.
32 93 00 - 4
3.8
WARRANTEE A.
Contractor shall warrantee all work under this section as specified in paragraph 1.8.
END OF SECTION 32 9300
32 93 00 - 5
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 33 11 00 WATER MAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES A.
Water and fire protection systems and services, including all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary for the installation of water service in accordance with the contract plans and specifications.
B.
All work shall conform to the Standard Specifications and to the Standard Specifications of the Village of West Salem.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit shop drawings and product literature for valves, valve wells and boxes, meters and anchorage system.
B.
Submit bacteriological and hydrostatic tests.
C.
Submit Record Drawings in accordance with Article 1.5.A.
D.
Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Inspector’s notes from water main installation. a. Recorded hourly observation during installation. 2. Certificate of proper installation of water main.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
The project drawings show the finished improvements and elevations of the project. These proposed finished improvements and elevations shall be used by the Contractor to establish the work required to complete the project.
B.
Give 48 hours adequate advance notice to public municipalities and local utility companies of proposed work.
C.
Protect existing utilities during excavation. If utility lines are encountered or damaged, that were not indicated on the Drawings, notify the A/E immediately. Repair damaged utility lines immediately. Contract price will be adjusted in accordance with the provisions of Contract.
D.
Adequate advance notice shall be given interested governmental agencies and A/E prior to disruption of traffic flow due to excavation and replacement of vehicle and pedestrian ways incidental to work of this Section.
E.
Provide, install, and maintain necessary fences, walks, barricades, and other safety devices for protection and minimum inconvenience to public. Place sufficient lights on or near work and keep them lit from sunset to sunrise to insure safety of public.
F.
Any water utility interruption to the existing laboratory must be confined to non-working hours. Coordinate all water utility interruptions with the Owner.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
33 11 00-1
1.5
A.
All work under this Section shall comply with the Standard Drawings and Specifications for the Village of West Salem. The Standard Drawings and Specifications are made a part of this specification by reference.
B.
Standard Specifications for Water and Sewer Construction in Wisconsin, Sixth Edition.
MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDS A.
1.6
The Contractor shall measure and keep an accurate record of all water service locations, valves, water main lengths and hydrant leads.
QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION A.
An independent full-time resident project representative to inspect the water main installation meeting the requirements of NR 811.11shall be selected by the Contractor and approved by the Owner. The services performed by the resident project representative will be paid by the Contractor. 1. The resident project representative shall be a professional engineer registered in the State of Wisconsin.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS B.
C.
Pipe 1.
Water Main Pipe: Ductile iron, bell and spigot, conforming to AWWA C150, wall thickness and AWWA C151 for material and performance, working pressure 350, bituminous coated and cement lined per AWWA C104. a. Tolerances permitted under ANSI A21.51 specifications shall apply.
2.
Water Service 1-½ inch and Smaller: High-density crosslinked polyethylene manufactured using the high-pressure peroxide method of crosslinking (PEXa). a. Conform to ASTM F876, ASTM F877 CSA B137.5, NSF/ANSI 14 and B. Fittings
Joints: 1.
2.
D.
Ductile Iron: a. Push-on shall conform to ANSI A21.11/AWWA C 111. b. Flanges shall conform to ANSI A21.15/AWWA C 115, Class 125. Flanged joint shall be installed only within structures unless indicated on the Drawings. c. Mechanical joints shall conform with ANSI A21.11. Bolts shall be high-strength, low-alloy steel with a minimum of AWWA C111 50,000 psi tensile strength. d. All joints shall have an exterior strap of cable for electrical conductivity. PEXa: Compression-sleeve fittings manufactured of brass supplied by the piping manufacturer as part of a proven cataloged system.
Fittings: 1. Fittings for ductile iron pipe 3" through 12" in diameter shall comply with current revisions of ANSI A21.53, A21.11, B16.1. Fittings shall be push-on, mechanical joint (working pressure 250 psi) or Class 125 and AWWA C153, flange joint inside buildings or structures. a. Fittings and special castings need not be cement lined unless otherwise specified. If cement lining is required, the lining shall conform with ANSI A21.4/AWWA C 104.
33 11 00-2
b. 2.
Gaskets shall be of vulcanized crude rubber or polyvinyl chloride and shall have plain tips.
PEXa: a. All Fittings used with crosslinked polyethylene (PEX) water distribution pipe intended for plumbing applications shall be of the cold-expansion compressionsleeve design. b. Conform to standards ASTM F877, ASTM F2080, NSF/ANSI 14, NSF/ANSI 61 and CSA B137.5 and approved by the manufacturer’s PEX piping system, with applicable plumbing and mechanical code certifications. c. Where fittings are encased in concrete or buried underground, wrap fittias per manufacturer’s recommendation to protect the material.
E.
Valves and Boxes: 1. Valves shall be resilient seated, non-rising stem and conforming to AWWA, C-509, iron mounted, (working pressure 200 psi) and shall turn to open as required by operating agency. Clow Corp. F6100 or approved equal. 2. Valve boxes shall be 5-¼” shaft cast iron extension type with slide adjustment having flared base. Cover shall have work "Water" cast in cover. Valve box shall be Clow: Base F-2465 or F-2484, extension F-2475, center section F-2460, top section F-2455, and cover F-2490, or approved equal.
F.
Concrete thrust restraint blocks shall be placed at all plugs, caps, tees, bends and other fittings including those at open drain crossings. Vertical bends shall have steel tie rods in addition to concrete thrust blocks. Rod length shall be sufficient to restrain bend as if thrust block was not in place. “Mega lug” locking retainer glands may be used in place of thrust blocks and shall be installed on all joints within 18' of the location being restrained.
G.
Tapping sleeves shall be split cast iron, mechanical joint and rated for 200 psi working pressure. Stainless steel units are acceptable for tapping 12" or larger pipe. Determine the outside diameter and material of the existing main before ordering the sleeve. Valve shall be as specified above, manhole or valve box shall be as shown on the detail drawings or plans. Test plug shall be brass or stainless steel. Bolts shall be stainless steel.
H.
Concrete shall conform to requirements of Section 32 13 13.
I.
Tie rods shall be galvanized steel rods as manufactured by Star National Products of A/E approved equivalent. Tie rods may be used in addition to thrust blocks where required, but shall not be used as thrust block replacements.
J.
Polyethylene Film Envelope: Per Standard Specification 8.21.0.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Mechanical joint pipes and “Mega lug” locking restraining glands (if used), shall be installed in full conformance with manufacturer's recommendations, which shall be submitted to the A/E and operating agency for approval. Torque wrenches as specified in AWWA C111, shall be used.
B.
Valves shall be examined and cleaned before placing and shall be set in the vertical position.
C.
Valve boxes shall be set so that valve is centered on the lid opening. Adjust cover to average street or finished ground elevations. Earth shall be tamped about valve box the full depth of backfill.
D.
All water mains shall be flushed to remove all foreign matter. Dispose of the flushing water
33 11 00-3
without causing a nuisance or property damage. E. 3.2
3.3
3.4
Polyethylene wrap shall be installed per Standard Specification 4.4.4.
HYDROSTATIC TESTS A.
All water pipe shall be tested per AWWA C600, except at a line pressure of 150 psi for a period of two hours. The tests shall be conducted under the supervision of the water personnel of the local governmental agency. Rate of loss shall not exceed that specified in the paragraph "Allowable limits for leakage".
B.
Supply a standard type of test pump, a suitable device for measuring water and a standard pressure gauge with all necessary fittings, all of which shall be approved. The test equipment shall be attached to the pipe in an approved manner. Compressed air shall not be used for testing.
C.
Install temporary blow-offs for flushing and disinfection and provide auxiliary means of filling new water main. Such arrangement shall be per Water Department of the Governmental Agency having jurisdiction.
D.
The hydrostatic pressure tests shall be performed per AWWA C600 and the water main installation will not be acceptable until the leakage is less than that prescribed in AWWA C600, Section 4.
DISINFECTION A.
After satisfactory hydrostatic test is obtained and before the water distribution system is connected to the existing system, disinfect in accordance with AWWA Specifications C601 and C651.
B.
Following chlorination, all treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the water supply system.
C.
All costs of testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
CONNECTION TO EXISTING SYSTEM
A. All connections to existing mains shall be made after complete disinfection of the proposed system and shall be made under the direction of the Owner of the existing system.
END OF SECTION 33 11 00
33 11 00-4
SECTION 33 31 11 SANITARY SEWER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A.
1.2
SUBMITTALS A.
1.3
1.5
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Manholes: Indicate complete information on the fabrication of manholes including build, elevations, joints, pipe connection seals, rings, steps, chimney seals, and casting as applicable. 2. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions and recommendations. 3. Manufacturer’s product literature, bulletins, and catalogs indicating the general description, specifications, finish, and limitations of the products being furnished under this Section. 4. Submit copy of record drawings of finished utilities per Article 1.3.A.
MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDS A.
1.4
Section includes: 1. Sanitary sewer system and accessories as required for a complete and functional system.
The Contractor shall keep an accurate record of all riser, wye, tee, and sewer length. Risers, wyes, or tees shall not be covered until they have been inspected and measured. The Contractor shall also keep records of riser, tee, and wye locations along with measurements of pipe laid.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Give adequate advance notice to public municipalities and private utility companies of proposed work.
B.
Protect existing utilities during excavation. If utility lines are encountered or damaged, that were not indicated, notify the Engineer immediately.
C.
Adequate advance notice shall be given to interested governmental agencies and Engineer prior to disruption of traffic flow due to the work of this Section.
D.
Interruptions to the sanitary sewer utility service to the existing laboratory must be limited to nonwork periods. Coordinate all sanitary sewer utility interruptions with the Owner.
REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
All work under this Section shall comply with the Standard Drawings and Specifications for the Village of West Salem. The Standard Drawings and Specifications are made a part of this specification by reference.
B.
Standard Specifications for Sewer and Water Construction in Wisconsin, Sixth Edition (Standard Specifications).
33 31 11 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Polyvinyl chloride pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D3034, FS-14, SDR 35 with elastomeric gasket joints conforming to ASTM D3212. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F 477.
B.
Fittings: SDR 35 gasketed sewer fittings manufactured in accordance with ASTM D 3034, ASTM F1336, and CSA B182.2.
C.
TRACER WIRE LOCATING MATERIALS 1. Tracer Wire: a. Minimum 18 gauge solid copper or Copper Clad Steel with High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) or High Molecular Weight Polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation suitable for direct bury. b. Color: Green. 2. Connectors: “Copperhead SnakeBite” or “3M DBR”. 3. Wire Access Box: Figure SSWABADJ18 as manufactured by Drainage and Water Solutions Inc. or equal. 4. Anode: 5 pound packed magnesium anode, “SuperMAG”, as manufactured by Galvotec Alloys, Inc, Mc Allen, TX, or equal.
D.
All other materials and accessories shall be consistent with the Standard Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
General: All sanitary sewer shall be installed per the Standard Specifications.
B.
Pipe installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and ASTM D2321.
C.
Bedding Material and Type: In accordance with Section 31 2316, Excavation and Backfill.
D.
Tracer Wire: In accordance with DSPS 382.30(11). 1. Install tracer wire directly above and within 6-inches of the non-metallic pipe. 2. Install Tracer Wire Access Boxes at no greater than 400 foot interval along pipe. Install Access Boxes in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions. 3. Use approved corrosion and moisture resistant connectors for all splices. Minimize the number of splices required. 4. Test the tracer wire system for continuity during installation prior tp and after backfilling.
SERVICE CONNECTIONS A.
3.3
Install pipe with approved compressions type joints to 5' outside of the structure being served unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. Leads shall be laid on a minimum uniform slope of ⅛" per foot unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. Provide a temporary plug at the end of pipe. Mark ends of all service connections not immediately terminated to building sewers with an 8-foot treated 4x4 with 4-foot embedment.
TESTS AND INSPECTION A.
General: Method of testing and measurement shall be approved by the Engineer and any governmental agency having jurisdiction. Provide necessary equipment and labor for making tests. All laterals shall be visually inspected prior to backfilling.
33 31 11 - 2
3.4
B.
Make all tests as specified in the City of West Salem Standard Drawings and Specifications.
C.
Any sewer not meeting these requirements shall be repaired and re-tested at no additional cost to the Owner until compliant. Chemical or cement grouting will not be considered an acceptable method of repairing leaking pipe, joints, or structural failures, except where specifically approved by the A/E.
CLEAN-UP A.
Upon completion of work of this Section, leave all components of the drainage systems completely free of silt, debris, and obstructions.
END OF SECTION 33 31 11
33 31 11 - 3
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SECTION 33 41 11 STORM SEWERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Storm sewer system.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Protect existing utilities during excavation. If utility lines are encountered or damaged, that were not indicated, notify the A/E immediately. Repair damaged utility lines immediately.
B.
Adequate advance notice shall be given to Governmental Agencies and A/E prior to disruption of traffic flow due to excavation and replacement of vehicle and pedestrian ways.
REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
All work under this section shall comply with the Standard Drawings and Specifications for Storm Sewers for the City of Prairie du Chien. The Standard Drawings and Specifications are made part of this specification by reference.
B.
Standard Specifications for Sewer and Water Construction in Wisconsin, Sixth Edition, shall be used except where modified by this Specification or by the Drawings.
C.
State of Wisconsin Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway and Structure Construction, 2010 Edition.
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A.
Provide shop drawings for all structures and materials for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve the Contractor from complying with the specifications or from providing a complete construction project as indicated on the plans.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPE A.
High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE) 1. In accordance with requirements or AASHTO M294 Type S pipe, AASHTO MP6 Type D pipe, ASTM D2321, ASTM D3212, ASTM F1417, ASTM F47795, and ASTM F667. Pipe size 12” to 36” shall be Advance Drainage Systems (ADS) N-12 ProLink Ultra Pipe and pipe size 42” and 48” shall be ADS N-12 HC pipe or approved equal. All pipe sizes are inner diameter (I.D). 2. Joints shall be in accordance with ASTM D3212 and ASTM F477-95 for ProLink WP (watertight joint security) push on bell and spigot with bell/bell couplers and single bell styles for ADS N-12 ProLink Ultra Pipe and ADS N-12 HC pipe or approved equal.
33 41 11 - 1
2.2
2.3
2.4
B.
PVC Storm Sewer Pipe: Polyvinyl chloride pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D3034, FS-14, SDR 35 with elastomeric gasket joints conforming to ASTM D3212. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F 477.
C.
Reinforced Concrete Pipe: Conform to ASTM C76, Tables III to V. Pipe shall be Class III or V, Wall “B”. Concrete reinforced sewer pipe joints shall be grooved tongue with rubber gasket, per ASTM C443.
FITTINGS A.
SDR 35 PVC Pipe Fittings: 1. Injection molded push-on gasketed fittings manufactured in accordance with ASTM D 3034, ASTM F1336, and CSA B182.2. 2. Gaskets: Manufactured in accordance with ASTM F 477 or ASTM F 913.
B.
HDPE Pipe Fittings: Bell and spigot connection utilizing a spun –on or welded bell and valley or saddle gasket meeting the soil-tight requirements od ASTM F2306.
MANHOLES AND INLETS A.
Manholes shall be precast concrete meeting requirements of ASTM C478. 1. Adjusting rings shall be precast concrete or polyethylene per ASTM D-1248. 2. Sealant between rings shall be KentSeal or equal for concrete and as recommended by manufacturer for polyethylene rings.
B.
Mortar: In accordance with requirements of ASTM C387, Type M.
C.
Castings shall meet the requirements of ASTM A48, Class 35. All castings shall be Neenah or equal. 1. Curb inlets: Neenah R-3510. 2. Manhole covers: Neenah R-1670, non-rocking. 3. Area storm inlets: Neenah R-5215C.
TRACER WIRE LOCATING MATERIALS A.
Tracer Wire: a. Minimum 18 gauge solid copper or Copper Clad Steel with High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) or High Molecular Weight Polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation suitable for direct bury. b. Color: Green.
B.
Connectors: “Copperhead SnakeBite” or “3M DBR”.
C.
Wire Access Box: Figure SSWABADJ18 as manufactured by Drainage and Water Solutions Inc. or equal.
D.
Anode: 5 pound packed magnesium anode, “SuperMAG”, as manufactured by Galvotec Alloys, Inc, Mc Allen, TX, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
HANDLING OF MATERIAL
33 41 11 - 2
3.2
A.
All materials shall be handled with care to avoid damage. No material shall be dropped.
B.
All defective material shall be removed from the job site.
LINES AND GRADES A.
3.3
3.4
PIPING INSTALLATION A.
Bedding and Cover: In accordance with Section 31 2316, Excavation and Backfill.
B.
Pipe Installation: 1. PVC Pipe: In accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations and ASTM D2321. 2. HDPE Pipe: In accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations.
NDS DRAINS A.
3.5
3.6
3.7
All pipe shall be laid to the lines and grades shown on the drawings or given by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the staking of line and grade, and shall pay the actual cost of having stakes set.
NDS drains shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the detail drawings. Connection between adapter, fittings, and pipe shall be made water tight. Connection between pipe and first NDS fitting shall be secured by three stainless or brass screws. All other connections between fittings shall be secured with three stainless or brass screws per connection or approved adhesive. After installation, screws protruding into the pipe or fitting shall be trimmed flush to the interior wall. Round or oval fastener heads are permitted on the interior of pipe and fittings. Inlet grates shall be secured with stainless or brass screws to the frame of the adaptor. Install fasteners in the locations provided by the factory. Where grates are not provided with locations to secure the grate to the frame, the contractor shall provide a minimum of two tapped holes for securing the grate to the frame.
MANHOLES, INLETS, AND SURFACE DISCHARGE A.
Manholes and inlets shall be constructed to the sizes indicated on the drawings.
B.
Concrete shall be protected from freezing during cold weather construction.
TRACER WIRE SYSTEM A.
Install tracer wire directly above and within 6-inches of the non-metallic pipe.
B.
Install Tracer Wire Access Boxes at no greater than 400 foot interval along pipe. Install Access Boxes in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions.
C.
Use approved corrosion and moisture resistant connectors for all splices. Minimize the number of splices required.
D.
Test the tracer wire system for continuity during installation prior tp and after backfilling.
TESTS, INSPECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
33 41 11 - 3
3.8
A.
Method of testing and measurement shall be approved by the A/E and local governing agency. Provide necessary equipment and labor for making tests.
B.
The pipe barrel between sewer structures shall be straight and of uniform slope.
C.
The pipe alignment shall permit light to be visible when the barrel is lamped between structures. Where light is not visible, the conduit shall be uncovered and repaired at no cost to the Owner.
D.
All cracked pipe, misaligned joints, and points of observable infiltration shall be reexcavated and repaired.
E.
Submit a repair procedure to correct any deficiency. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting rejected work. The A/E shall review the procedure prior to implementing.
CLEAN-UP A.
Upon completion of work leave all components of the drainage systems completely free of silt, debris, and obstructions.
END OF SECTION 33 41 11
33 41 11 - 4
